Sharp MX 6580-7580 SM

TopPage
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX7580/S4E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-6580N
MODEL MX-7580N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Function of each key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 4. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 5. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, [7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
1. System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 4. Dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 [9] MAINTENANCE
3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 1. Works necessary when executing
4. FAX function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 the maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
5. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
6. Report/list function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
7. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
8. Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 1. Disassembly of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
9. Ambient conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2. Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
2. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
3. Definition of developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
4. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
5. Paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 6. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 7. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 8. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
3. DSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 9. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
4. Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 10. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
5. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 11. Waste toner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
6. Sensors and detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 12. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39
7. Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 13. Duplex/paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
8. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 [12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
9. Drive motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
10. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
11. Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12. Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
[13] OTHERS
13. Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
1. VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
14. PWB/Memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
15. Fuses and thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
16. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
MX-7580N
NOTE FOR SERVICING •Service Manual
When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the fol-
lowing points.
 Gas tube
1. Precautions for servicing
 Lightning conductor
• When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the  A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except grounding object by the authorities.
when performing the communication test, etc.
 Grounding wire for telephone line
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
• There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use
• Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forc-
It may cause a burn.
ibly bend, or pull the power cord.
• There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
• Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
• Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to • Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the
machine.
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. • Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury. hands.
It may cause an electric shock.
• When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces-
sively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with 3. Note for installing site
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. Do not install the machine at the following sites.
• The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to dam- • Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature,
age fingers when servicing. low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature
• Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner and humidity.
may ignite and burn you. Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
• When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the speci- causing paper jam or copy dirt.
fied replacement battery. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a described later.
machine malfunction or breakdown.
• When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,
be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
• Place of extreme vibrations
2. Warning for servicing It may cause a breakdown.
• Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that

meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
• If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result. • Poorly ventilated place
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
grounding must be made. The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as
not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a
machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a
well ventilated place.
MX-7580N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

• Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
undergo qualitative change. observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems. age by static electricity.
• When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue
print machine may result in poor quality output. • When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
use an earth band as shown below:
* There was a trouble in a place where silicon-series gas or vol-
atile components are generated. Use great care for avoiding • Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.
this.
• Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.
• Place near a wall

• When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
The machine will require ventilation. procedure on an anti-static mat.
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may
result.
11-13/16"
(30cm)
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
• Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.
MX-7580N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. types.
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
• When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operation table.
check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
• Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are
• When visually checking the inside of the machine for the opera- described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
tion check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes. an exception.
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode
safety may be at risk. or a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid
loosening.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the
transfer unit, the developing unit Screw kinds and tightening torques
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
copy and print image quality.
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
Drum unit
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
• Avoid working at a place with strong lights. M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
• Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for
a long time. Tapping screws (for iron)
• When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with Tightening Tightening Tightening
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets torque torque torque
diameter fixed
of paper to cover it.) (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
(Plate thickness
material on the OPC drum surface.
0.8mm or above)
Transfer unit M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign (Plate thickness
material on the transfer roller, primary transfer belt, and the sec- 0.8mm or above)
ondary transfer belt. M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
(Plate thickness
Developing unit
less than 0.8mm)
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
material on the developing unit. (Plate thickness
Fusing unit less than 0.8mm)
• Be careful not to attach finger prints or foreign materials on the
fusing belt and the pressure roller. Tapping screw (for plastic)
Tightening Tightening Tightening
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
MX-7580N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-7580N
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE Service Manual
1. System diagram
MX-TR14
EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-LT10
LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY
MX-FN19
FINISHER
MX-PN12A/B/C/D
PUNCH MODULE
MX-LC12
LARGE CAPACITY
TRAY
MX-FN20 MX-TU14 MX-SL10 N

EXIT TRAY CABINET STATUS INDICATOR
SADDLE STTICH MX-MF11
FINISHER
MX-RB13 MX-LCX3 N MULTI BYPASS TRAY
LARGE CAPACITY
RELAY UNIT TRAY
MX-PN13 MX-FN21 MX-RB12

A/B/C/D FINISHER PAPER PASS
PUNCH MODULE UNIT
MX-FD10 MX-CF11 MX-RB15 MX-6580N MX-RB14 MX-LC13 N

FOLDING UNIT INSERTER CURL CORRECTION MX-7580N PAPER PASS LARGE CAPACITY
UNIT DIGITAL FULL COLOR UNIT TRAYS
MX-TM10 MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
TRIMMING
MODULE
MX-FN22
SADDLE STTICH
FINISHER
MX-PF10 MX-FX15 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1 MX-FR55U MX-USX1 MX-USX5

BARCODE FONT KIT FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT STAMP UNIT INTERNET FAX EXPANSION DATA SECURITY KIT SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT
KIT
MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-KB13

SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE APPLICATION APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT KEYBOARD
KIT KIT KIT INTEGRATION MODULE COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE
MX-EB18 MX-PX12
WIRELESS LAN ADPTOR INTERFACE KIT
MX-7580N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2. Option list
MX-6580N
Model name Name Remarks
MX-7580N
Paper Feed System MX-LC12 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT A4
MX-LCX3 N LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT A3
MX-LC13 N LARGE CAPACITY TRAYS OPT
MX-RB14 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT For large capacity trays
MX-MF11 MULTI BYPASS TRAY OPT For large capacity trays
― MULTI BYPASS TRAY STD
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT
Paper Exit System MX-TR14 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT
MX-TU14 EXIT TRAY CABINET OPT
MX-RB12 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT
MX-RB13 RELAY UNIT OPT For 100 sheets binding
MX-FN19 FINISHER OPT 50 sheets binding
MX-FN20 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER OPT 50 sheets binding
MX-PN12A PUNCH MODULE OPT For MX-FN19/FN20
MX-PN12B OPT
MX-PN12C OPT
MX-PN12D OPT
MX-FN21 FINISHER OPT 100 sheets binding
MX-FN22 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER OPT 100 sheets binding
MX-PN13A PUNCH MODULE OPT For MX-FN21/FN22
MX-PN13B OPT
MX-PN13C OPT
MX-PN13D OPT
MX-TM10 TRIMMING MODULE OPT For 100 sheets binding saddle
MX-CF11 INSERTER OPT
MX-RB15 CURL CORRECTION UNIT OPT
MX-FD10 FOLDING UNIT OPT
Printer Expansion ― PS3 EXPANSION KIT STD
MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT
― DIRECT PRINT EXPANSION KIT STD
Image Send Expansion MX-FX15 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT
AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT
Authentication / MX-FR55U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT
Security
Application / Solution MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT
MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT
MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE STD/OPT *
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE STD/OPT *
Other MX-EB18 WIRELESS LAN ADAPTOR STD/OPT *
MX-KB13 KEYBOARD STD/OPT *
MX-SL10 N STATUS INDICATOR OPT
MX-PX12 INTERFACE KIT OPT
STD: Standard equipment

OPT: Installable option
*: Option in some area
MX-7580N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

MX-7580N
[2] SPECIFICATIONS Service Manual
1. Basic specifications
A. Engine Specification
Photo-conductor OPC (Diameter: Black: 50mm Color (Y/M/C):
kind 50mm x3 lines)
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
Transfer system Intermediate/secondary transfer belt
Separation system Natural separation method
* Sub separation claw is equipped.
Cleaning system Counter blade
Fusing system Belt method
Waste toner No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle
disposal system
Toner supply during Enabled
operation
Outer Color Pastel white, natural wave design
B. Engine speed (ppm)

(1) Tray 1 - 4, LCC, LCT
Plain Paper
Paper 75cpm machine 65cpm machine
13x19.2 34 31
A3W 34 32
A3/11" x 17"/8K 36 33
B4/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13.5" 41 37
A4/B5/16K 75 65
8.5" x 11" 75 65
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R/16KR 47 43
A5R/5.5" x 8.5"R 47 43
SRA3 35 31
SRA4 57 52
A4W 56 51
Heavy Paper 1/2

13x19.2 21 21
A4/B5/16K/A5R/8.5" x 11"/5.5" x 8.5"R 38 38
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/16KR/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R 31 31
A3/B4/8K/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13.5"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13"/11" x 17" 23 23
A3W 22 22
SRA3 22 22
SRA4 37 37
A4W 37 37
OHP film (A4/8.5x11") 38 38
OHP film (A4R/8.5x11"R) 31 31
Heavy Paper 3/4

13x19.2 16 16
A4/B5/16K/A5R/8.5" x 11"/5.5" x 8.5"R 30 30
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/16KR/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R 24 24
A3/B4/8K/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13.5"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13"/11" x 17" 18 18
A3W 17 17
SRA3 17 17
SRA4 29 29
A4W 29 29
MX-7580N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
(2) Multi Bypass
Plain Paper
75cpm machine 65cpm machine
Paper
Monochrome Color Monochrome Color
13x19.2 32 29 29 26
A3W 33 30 31 26
A3/11" x 17"/8K 35 31 32 27
B4/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13.5" 39 35 36 31
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R/16KR 45 45 42 40
A5R/5.5" x 8.5"R 45 45 42 42
B5 75 62 65 55
A4/16K 75 59 65 53
8.5" x 11" 75 59 65 53
Extra 32 29 29 26
SRA3 34 30 31 26
SRA4 54 53 49 48
A4W 53 52 49 48
Heavy Paper 1/2

Paper
Envelope *1 25 21 25 21
A4/16K/B5/A5R/8.5" x 11"/5.5" x 8.5"R 36 33 36 33
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R/16KR 29 27 29 27
A3/B4/8K/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13.5"/11" x 17" 22 19 22 19
13x19.2 20 17 20 17
A3W 21 18 21 18
Extra 20 17 20 17
SRA3 21 18 21 18
SRA4 35 32 35 32
A4W 35 32 35 32
OHP (A4/8.5" x 11") 36 33 36 33
OHP (A4R/8.5" x 11"R) 29 27 29 27
Heavy Paper 3/4

Paper
A4/16K/B5/A5R/8.5" x 11"/5.5" x 8.5"R 28 25 28 25
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R/16KR 23 20 23 20
A3/B4/8K/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13.5"/11" x 17" 17 14 17 14
A3W 16 13 16 13
Extra 15 12 15 12
13x19.2 15 12 15 12
SRA3 16 13 16 13
SRA4 28 24 28 24
A4W 27 24 27 24
*1: Envelope : Monarch, Com-10, DL, C5,
C. Printable area
Void area Lead edge: 4mm  1mm
Image loss Rear edge: 2mm or more, and 5mm or less
A3 Wide * 297 x 420mm 13x19 319x480mm
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge: 8mm or less
SRA3 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" * 297 x 432mm FR total: 4mm  2mm or less
A3 293 x 412mm 11" x 17" 275 x 424mm
B4 253 x 356mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 348mm
SRA4 297 x 210mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 335mm
A4 206 x 289mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 332mm
B5 178 x 249mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 322mm
A5 144 x 202mm Executive 180 x 259mm
Postcard 96 x 140mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 271mm
8K 266 x 382mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 208mm
16K 191 x 262mm
Custom Min: 86mm x 133mm / Max: 310mm x 1292mm
* When printing 13x19/A3W/12" x 18" size, the full print and trim
mark print of A3/11" x 17" size can be made by the PCL/PS driv-
ers.
* Must conform to long scale paper up to 1,300mm.
D. Engine resolution Internet FAX Single: 100-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Resolution *1 Copy Writing Double: 200-page/min.
600 x 600dpi (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Scanner Single: 100-sheet/min. Single: 100-sheet/min.
1200x1200dpi (for monochrome) (200 x 200dpi/ (200x200dpi/
Print Writing 300x300dpi, 1bit) 300x300dpi, 8bit)
600 x 600dpi Double: 200-page/min. Double: 200-page/min.
1,200 x 1,200dpi (200 x 200dpi/ (200x200dpi/
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi 300x300dpi, 1bit) 300x300dpi, 8bit)
Gradation *2 Copy Writing Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
(256 levels) 600 x 600dpi, 4bit direction
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
Print Writing position random feeding)
PCL: Original transport Sheet-through method
600 x 600dpi, 1bit method
600 x 600dpi, 4bit Original size Standard size
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Inch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
PS: Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
600 x 600dpi, 1bit 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
600 x 600dpi, 4bit Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
*1: Resolution: 600dpi (default) AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8 bit input will be A4R, B5, B5R, A5
performed. AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
E. Scanner section AB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
(1) Resolution/Gradation AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Scanning Monochrome Color
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi (default) 600 x 600dpi
Mix paper feed Enabled
600 x 400dpi
(Same series,
DSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi same width paper)
600 x 400dpi (default)
Random feeding Enabled
Exposure lamp White LED (feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are
Reading gradation 10bit types / different allowed:
Output gradation BW: 1bit widths) A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and
Gray scale: 8bit 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available.
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit Original copy Single:
weight Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
(2) Document table Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (46-sheet/min. (600 x 400dpi),
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed) 36-sheet/min. (600 x 600dpi) (A4, 8.5" x 11")) is
Scanning area 297 x 432mm set up for the thin paper.
Original standard Left top reference Duplex: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
position Max. loading Max. 150 sheets (20lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
Detection Yes capacity of height: 50/64 inch, 19.5mm or less
Detection size Automatic detection (One type of detection unit to documents
be switched for software destination) Un-acceptable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts originals for paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
heater (Scanner feeding. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
section) document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
F. Document feeder document by punch unit is allowed.)
Detection Yes
(1) DSPF Paper detection Auto detection (Refer to “Original size”)
size
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)
Paper feeding Right hand feeding
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11") direction
(A4/8.5" x 11")
Finish stamp Option
Copy Single: Single:
80-sheet/min. 53-sheet/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 8bit) (600 x 600dpi, 8bit)
53-sheet/min. Double:
(600 x 600dpi, 8bit) 106-page/min.
Double: (600 x 600dpi, 8bit)
160-page/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 8bit)
106-page/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 8bit)
FAX Single: 100-sheet/min. NA
(200x200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 200-page/min.
(200x200dpi, 1bit)
G. Paper feed section
(1) Basic specifications
Type Standard 4-stage paper feed tray (Tandem LCC + 2 tray) + Multi bypass tray
Full option 4-stage paper feed tray (Tandem LCC + 2 tray) + 2-stage LCT + Multi bypass tray for LCT
Dehumidifying heater Service parts
Tray 1 Tray 2
Tray Tray 3 Tray 4 Multi bypass tray
(LCC left side) (LCC right side)
Paper capacity Plain paper (80g/m2) 1,200 sheets 800 sheets 500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
Paper size Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.
Paper size detection No Refer to “Paper size detection table”.
Paper type settings Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.
Changing of paper size User/Serviceman selection * User selection
Cassette handle Normal grasp/reverse grasp support (With the lock mechanism)
Default Paper Size Inch series 8.5" x 11" 8.5" x 11" Shipped with the max. paper guide width. –
Setting AB series A4 A4 –
Paper remaining quantity detection Paper empty, Paper empty, Paper empty, 100%/67%/33% Only detection of
100%/33%/6% 100%/50%/9% paper empty
Paper size display Yes
*: A4/8.5" x 11" can be selected by the user. B5 size is selected by the serviceman.
(2) Extra paper capacity
Paper type Tray 4 Multi bypass tray

Postcard NA 20 sheets
Envelope NA 20 sheets
OHP 40 sheets 20 sheets
Heavy paper 80 sheets 20 sheets
Tab paper 40 sheets 20 sheets
Glossy paper NA 1 sheet
Others 1 sheet 1 sheet
(3) Size of paper which can be fed
Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi bypass

Paper feed section Tray 3 Tray 4
(Tandem left) (Tandem right) tray
Minimum weight 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 55g/m2
Maximum weight 105g/m2 105g/m2 220g/m2 220g/m2 300g/m2
Paper Thin paper No No No No Yes
type Plain paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 106 - 176g/m2 No No Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 2 177 - 220g/m2 No No Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 3 221 - 256g/m2 No No No No Yes
Heavy paper 4 257 - 300g/m2 No No No No Yes
Embossed paper No No No Yes Yes
Tab paper*2 No No No Yes Yes
OHP Transparency No No No Yes Yes
Label No No No Yes Yes
Grossy paper No No No No Yes
User settings 1 - 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi bypass
Paper feed section Tray 3 Tray 4
(Tandem left) (Tandem right) tray
Paper 13 x 19 330 x 483 No No No No Yes
size 12" x 18" (A3W) 305 x 457 No No Yes Yes Yes
Ledger (11" x 17") 279 x 432 No No Yes Yes Yes
Legal (8.5" x 14") 216 x 356 No No Yes Yes Yes
Asian legal (8.5" x 13.5") 216 x 343 No No Yes Yes Yes
Mexican legal (8.5" x 13.4") 216 x 340 No No Yes Yes Yes
Foolscap (8.5" x 13") 216 x 330 No No Yes Yes Yes
Letter (8.5" x 11") 279 x 216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter R (8.5" x 11"R) 216 x 279 No No Yes Yes Yes
Invoice R (5.5" x 8.5"R) 140 x 216 No No No Yes Yes
Executive R (7.25" x 10.5"R) 184 x 266 No No Yes Yes Yes
9 x 12 (A4W) 305 x 229 No No Yes Yes Yes
A3 297 x 420 No No Yes Yes Yes
B4 257 x 364 No No Yes Yes Yes
A4 297 x 210 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4-R 210 x 297 No No Yes Yes Yes
B5 257 x 182 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 No No Yes Yes Yes
A5-R 148 x 210 No No No Yes Yes
SRA3 320 x 450 No No No No Yes
SRA4 320 x 225 No No No No Yes
8K 270 x 390 No No Yes Yes Yes
16K 270 x 195 No No Yes Yes Yes
16K-R 195 x 270 No No Yes Yes Yes
Monarch 98 x 191 No No No No Yes
COM10 105 x 241 No No No No Yes
DL 110 x 220 No No No No Yes
C5 229 x 162 No No No No Yes
Special - Custom size No No No Yes Yes
148mm/
Min X (sub scan) No No No 140mm/5.5inch
5.875inch
488mm/
Max X (sub scan) No No No 457mm/18inch
19.2inch
Custom range
90mm/
Min Y (main scan) No No No 100mm/4inch
3.625inch
330mm/
Max Y (main scan) No No No 305mm/12inch
13inch
Special - Uncertain paper size No No No No Yes
Width: 90 - 305
Long size paper No No No No Yes
Length: 489 - 1300
*1: B5 size is available only for Japan, AB-series overseas, and Asia dealers.
*2: Supported tab width for tab paper is as follows: A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm, 8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm
H. Paper exit section

(1) Exit Capacity
Exit location Center (option) Right side (option)

Exit Capacity 250 sheets (A4/8.5" x 11": 80g/m2) 100 sheets (A4/8.5" x 11": 80g/m2)
(2) Size of paper which can be discharged
Paper exit section Duplex Main unit center tray Right exit tray
Minimum weight 60g/m2 55g/m2 55g/m2
Maximum weight 300g/m2 300g/m2 256g/m2
Paper Thin paper No Yes Yes
type Plain paper Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 106 - 176g/m2 Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 4 257 - 300g/m2 Yes Yes No
Embossed paper Yes Yes Yes
Tab paper*1 No Yes No
OHP Transparency No Yes Yes
Label No Yes Yes
Grossy paper Yes Yes Yes
User settings 1 - 9 Yes Yes Yes
Paper 13 x 19 330 x 483 Yes Yes Yes
size 12" x 18" (A3W) 305 x 457 Yes Yes Yes
Ledger (11" x 17") 279 x 432 Yes Yes Yes
Legal (8.5" x 14") 216 x 356 Yes Yes Yes
Asian legal (8.5" x 13.5") 216 x 343 Yes Yes Yes
Mexican legal (8.5" x 13.4") 216 x 340 Yes Yes Yes
Foolscap (8.5" x 13") 216 x 330 Yes Yes Yes
Letter (8.5" x 11") 279 x 216 Yes Yes Yes
Letter R (8.5" x 11"R) 216 x 279 Yes Yes Yes
Invoice R (5.5" x 8.5"R) 140 x 216 Yes Yes Yes
Executive R (7.25" x 10.5"R) 184 x 266 Yes Yes Yes
9 x 12 (A4W) 305 x 229 Yes Yes Yes
A3 297 x 420 Yes Yes Yes
B4 257 x 364 Yes Yes Yes
A4 297 x 210 Yes Yes Yes
A4-R 210 x 297 Yes Yes Yes
B5 257 x 182 Yes Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 Yes Yes Yes
A5-R 148 x 210 Yes Yes Yes
SRA3 320 x 450 Yes Yes Yes
SRA4 320 x 225 Yes Yes Yes
8K 270 x 390 Yes Yes Yes
16K 270 x 195 Yes Yes Yes
16K-R 195 x 270 Yes Yes Yes
Monarch 98 x 191 No Yes No
COM10 105 x 241 No Yes No
DL 110 x 220 No Yes No
C5 229 x 162 No Yes No
Special - Custom size Yes Yes Yes
Min X (sub scan) 140 (5.5) 140 (5.5) 140 (5.5)
Max X (sub scan) 488 (19.2) 488 (19.2) 488 (19.2)
Custom range
Min Y (main scan) 90 (3.625) 90 (3.625) 90 (3.625)
Max Y (main scan) 330 (13) 330 (13) 330 (13)
Special - Uncertain paper size No Yes Yes
Width: 90 - 305
Long size paper No Yes No
Length: 489 - 1300
*1: Supported tab width for tab paper is as follows: A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm, 8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm
I. Operation panel 2. Copy functions
Size 10.1 inch A. First copy time
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
Display dot number 1,024 x 600 dots (WSVGA) Engine
LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system
Platen 3.7 sec. 5.1 sec. 4.0 sec. 5.6 sec.
J. Controller board DSPF 6.3 sec. 8.8 sec. 6.5 sec. 9.2 sec.
CPU ARM11: 600MHz B. Job Speed

ARM9: 400MHz (Energy save mode: 75MHz)
SOC Intel Atom E3845 1.91GHz 75cpm machine 65cpm machine
Engine
Interface Monochrome Color Monochrome Color
Ethernet 1port S to S 75cpm 53cpm 65cpm 53cpm
(100%) (70.7%) (100%) (81.5%)
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, EtherTalk
Protocol
C. Job Effectiveness
USB 2.0 (high 2port (Front 1+ rear 1) BLI Standard (DSPF)
speed) (host) * Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is enable.
USB 2.0 (high 1port 75cpm machine 65cpm machine
Engine
speed) (device) Monochrome Color Monochrome Color
USB-HUB (host) Internal: 4port S to S 66cpm 59cpm 58cpm 53cpm
• For Front USB Port (88.0%) (78.7%) (89.2%) (81.5%)
• For Rear USB Port S to D 60cpm 58cpm 56cpm 51cpm
• For IC card reader (82.7%) (77.3%) (86.2%) (78.5%)
• For Keyboard D to D 68cpm 68cpm 61cpm 59cpm
ACRE Yes (90.7%) (90.7%) (93.8%) (90.8%)
expansion I/F
Video I/F Yes * S to S: 10 pages of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies
(for EFI * S to D: 10 pages of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies
connection) * D to D: 10 pages (20 sides) of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5
Serial I/F 1port copies
(for coin vendor)
Memory slot 1 slot
K. Memory/Hard disk
ICU ICU mSATA ICU
ICU PWB SOC HDD*1
main sub SSD PWB
16MB 2MB 16GB 1GB 1GB 4GB 1TB
*1: HDD capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.
L. Warm-up time
Main power SW
Warm-up time *1 55sec or less
Pre heat Yes
Jam recovery time *2 45sec. or less
*1: Result may change depending on conditions.

*2: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open,
standard condition, Polygon stops.
3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
OS Custom PCL6 Custom PCL5c PS PPD PC-Fax TWAIN
Windows Vista CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 (x 64) CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2012 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2012 R2 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 10 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 10 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac X 10.6 - 10.12 No No CD-ROM No No No
B. PDL emulation/Font
PDL (Command) Installed font Option font
PCL5c / PCL6 compatibility STD European outline font = 80 styles Barcode font = 28 styles
Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
Postscript 3 STD European outline font = 139 styles –
4. FAX function
A. Transmission method E. Record Size
Transmission time Less than 2 sec (Super G3) Max. record width 293mm
Less than 6 sec (G3 ECM) Record size (AB series)
Compression/ MH, MR, MMR, JBIG A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R
expansion system (Fixed to ECM for MMR or JBIG.) (Inch series)
Modem speed 33.6kbps  2.4kbps automatic fallback 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
Resolution 8 x 3.85 line/mm, 8 x 7.7 line/mm, 8.5 x 5.5R
8 x 15.4 line/mm, 16 x 15.4 line/mm (Standard
* If the document length exceeds A3 size, it is divided and printed.
memory is used for transmit/receive.)
Intercommunication G3/Super G3: Standard (V.34, V.17, V.33, V.29, * For printing the list, A5R and 8.5 x 5.5R cannot be used.
V.27ter)
F. Dial
Communication line Public switched telephone network (PSTN),
Private branch exchange (PBX), F-net
Manual dialing To be entered by 10-key, # key, * key
SEGA: R-key for PBX setting
Re-dialing The previous 50 items (max.) can be saved,
ECM Yes
and one of them can be selected.
Individual call is available.
B. Number of Support Line
Individual dialing 6000 items including the group dialing items
Standard 1 line Group dialing 500 items including the individual dialing items
Expansion Not provided Program dialing 48 items + preset 1 item
Chain dialing Max. 64 digits including individual dialing,
C. Transmission Mode 10-key dialing, and pause.
Dial search Alphabet order search, User index groups
DSPF/OC Yes (Switching during the reading is feasible Quick search Yes
transmission switching (When Preview and Job build mode) LDAP search Yes
Sub address Yes
D. Image Quality/Image Process Password Yes
Memory box registration Yes
Half tone reproduction Equivalent to 256 levels
Exposure adjustment Auto / Manual (5 steps) * LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access protocol
FAX quality selection Standard (8 x 3.85 line/mm (203.2 x 97.8dpi))
Fine (8 x 7.7 line/mm (203.2 x 195.6dpi))
Super Fine (8 x 15.4 line/mm (203.2 x 391dpi)) G. Memory for Transmit/Receive
Ultra Fine (16 x 15.4 line/mm (406.4 x 391dpi))
Half-tone (Combination with normal character is FAX transmission data HDD
invalid.) FAX reception data HDD
H. Function Receive Receive data print condition Yes
function function
Transmit Calling function Yes Receive data staple setting/ Yes
function Requires the frequency Copy number setting
setting for each destination. Rotation receive Yes
PBX function Germany, France only Output by clockwise rotation
Memory transmit Yes (Definable destinations: of 90 degrees
94 destinations) Divided receive Yes
On-hook Yes Divided print is not made in
Quick online transmit Yes duplex mode.
Direct transmit Yes Duplex receive Yes
Manual transmit Yes F-code confidential receive Yes
Auto re-call mode Yes Print hold Yes
Time indication function Yes Document Admin Yes
Sequential broadcasting Yes Inbound Routing Yes
function Sender registration function Yes
F code interface Yes Sender print function Yes
broadcasting indication Only one interface station On-hook dialing function Yes
function can be specified. Retransmit function Yes
F code interface Yes Pause function Yes
broadcasting function Pause time is 1 – 15 sec.
F code confidential send Yes Sound volume setting Yes
function function
Polling Yes Tone pulse select function Tone, Pulse, Auto
Even with another company (North America/Taiwan)
machine * For the other destinations,
Sequential polling function Yes set with the soft switch.
Even with another company External phone connection Yes
machine Memory remaining capacity Yes
F-code polling Yes check function Only the integral part is
Bulletin board Yes displayed.
F code bulletin board Yes Back up Yes
function Registered data read/write Yes
Auto reduction transmit Yes function
A3  B4, A3  A4, B4  A4 Report/List Yes
Rotation transmit Yes Special Destination check function Yes
Counterclockwise rotation of function Broadcasting destination Yes
90 degrees display function
Duplex transmit Yes Transmit job change function Yes
Document transmit from OC Yes Save-energy function Yes
function
Line monitor display function Yes
Long length original transmit Only when DSPF is used.
FAST Yes
Transmission is enable up to
Facsimile Automated Service
1000mm.
Technology
Mixed documents function Only when DSPF is used.
Time adjust function Yes
Zoom transmit Yes Summer time ON/OFF
2 in 1 transmit Yes PC-FAX Yes
Card shot transmit Only when transmitting from Color mode No
OC
Sender registration function Yes
Thin paper scan function Available except for duplex Number of registration: 1 for
scan standard sender name and
Edge erase transmit function Yes address. And 18 sender
Only for the fixed sizes names can be registered.
Job build Yes Default destination setting No
Page division transmit Yes Unauthorized scan Yes
Cover No prevention function
Index No Filing-each-page function No
Transmit message adding No Re-operation function Yes
function User account function Yes
Receive Auto receive Yes Max. 200 items additionally
function Manual receive Yes to the default
DRD call function Distinctive Ring Detection Counter function Yes
North America: Standard,
Pattern 1 – 5
Australia/New Zealand/Hong
Kong: ON/OFF (TEL/FAX)
Memory receive Yes
Transfer function Yes
Number of registration: 1
item
Specified receive function Yes (Number of registration)
Rejection numbers: Max.50
items
5. Image send function (4) Transmission function
A. System environment Mode Image send
Memory transmission Yes (Max. 94 destinations)
Copier memory (Local memory) Printer memory (System Memory) Scaled transmission Enable only from a fixed-form size to
512MB (Standard) 1GB (Standard) a fixed-form size
Long original transmission Yes
Maximum of 1000mm (single side
B. Image send function only/black-white binary only)
Restriction on transmission size No
(Push send from the main unit) Stamp No
(1) Support image Large capacity original mode Yes
Scanning of thin paper Yes
Compression method/ Mixed originals feeder Yes (Random + MIX)
Mode
Compression rate (Color scanner) Preview Yes
Fax MH, MR, MMR, JBIG Side erase Yes
Scanner Black-White (Binary): Original count Yes
Non-compression, MH, MMR
Color (Gray scale): JPEG (High/Middle/
Low), Black Letter Emphasis, High Mode FAX
compression On-hook Yes
Quick online transmission Yes
(2) Specification of Addresses Direct transmission Yes
(Switching: Memory transmission 
Mode Image send Direct transmission)
Address specification Specification by individual/group/ Manual transmission setting No
direct address entry. Automatically-reduced Yes
Selection from LDAP server transmission
Entry from externally-connected Rotated transmission Yes
keyboard
Recall mode Error Yes
Number of individual address key Total (number of key):
Busy Yes
registration Maximum 2000
Yes
Number of group (1 key) address Number of Group (1 key) address
Default date sender transmission Yes (ON/OFF only)
registration registration: maximum 500
Number of Group key registration: Fax destination confirmation Yes
6000 (Total address number (Preventing mistransmission)
included in 2000 key)
(5) Reception function
Program 48 items + preset 1 item (Group/
Individual)
Mode FAX
Direct entry of addresses Entry by option keyboard (MX-KB13)
Automatic reception Yes
or soft keyboard
Manual reception Yes
Chain dial Yes (pause key) (Fax only)
Switching from manual reception to
Resend Call up nearest 50 addresses.
automatic reception. (Allowed only
(Except for Desktop, USB memory,
for France and Japan)
Broadcast, Shared folder, FTP.)
Memory reception Yes
Destination confirmation Yes
Fixed size reduced reception Yes
Shortcut for address selection Use the 10-key to call up registered
Specified size scaled reception No
(quick key) numbers of addresses.
Rotated reception Yes
Disable registering destination Yes
from operation panel Setting of received data print Equal size print (partition not
condition allowed)
Disable registering destination on Yes
Equal size print (partition allowed)
web page
Equal or reduced size print
Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Yes
2-sided reception Condition setting through system
send mode
setting
Disable selection from address Yes
2-in-1 reception No
book
Automatic reduction setting upon Yes
Disable direct entry transmission Yes
receiving A3
Disable broadcast transmission Yes
Automatic reduction setting upon Yes (Other than North America and
Disable PC-Fax/Internet Fax Yes
receiving letter Inch destinations)
sending
Reception from a specific number Specified numbers only
not allowed, or allowed. (50 numbers /20 digits)
(3) Specification of Multiple Addresses
(Allow/Reject)
Mode Image send External phone connection Yes
remote
Broadcast Yes (500 destinations)
Confidential reception (Sharp No
Request of serial transmission Yes
mode)
* Broadcast transmission is allowed. (Monochrome only) Received data bypass output Yes
Index printing No
Transfer function upon disabling Yes (1 receiver (of transfer)
of output. registration)
Internet Fax/Fax to e-mail Yes
(Transfer of Internet Fax/Fax
reception data to e-mail, inbound
routing)
Exit tray setting Yes
Insertion of job separator sheet No
Mode FAX (8) Registration-related settings
Staple function of received data Yes
Auto wake up print Yes Mode Image send
Received data print hold *1 Yes Individual/group *1 2000 destinations
E-mail Use of LDAP allowed
Color toner print when black toner No
FTP Up to 500 registered addresses for each
runs out.
Desktop group dial.
*1: This function saves all received data in memory and starts out SMB Registered name in 36 characters
put after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.) Fax Fax only
Individual dial receiver number
Setting only on the receiver side.
registration: within 64 digits for receiver
(6) Other Functions number + sub-address + passcode
(including "/").
Mode Image send Address book registration Yes
Time specification Yes from Resend screen
Page partition transmission Yes Program Registration of addresses (individual/
Card shot Yes (Ratio: 63 - 400%) group), settings (density, image quality,
Forward data transmission/ Yes resolution, original) and special functions
reception (Document Admin) Data transmission by PC-Fax/ in one set is allowed. (48 + preset 1)
PC-Internet Fax is allowed, too. Quick key (short cut Yes (0001 – 2000)
registration) *2
Readout/read-in of data Yes (by the address book conversion
Mode FAX registered in other models utility)
Polling reception Yes Import/export of address book Yes (By storage backup)
Bulletin board transmission Yes
Up to 100 registrations allowed with
bulletin board, confidential and relay Mode FAX
broadcast all combined. (Free area: Number of memory boxes Registration of bulletin board/
1 registration) confidential/relay broadcast is allowed up
Setting of the number of transmission: to 100.
1/no limit. Registration name: 18 characters
Sender print Yes Number of sender registration Only one set (40 characters) of sender
Sender selection Yes information can be registered, and
Date print Yes (Date can be expressed Internet FAX addresses or FAX number
alternatively) are registered in the name part.
Polling protection function Yes Number of sender selection Total: 40 characters (Sender selection: In
registration addition to default, 18 registrations
Page connection No
allowed)
Confidential transmission Yes (F code method)
Registration of polling 10 numbers/20 digits
Relay broadcast instructions Yes (F code method)
approval number
Relay broadcast transmission Yes
Registration of Fax system No
(Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/
number (Sharp mode)
Fax (F-code))
Registration of Fax polling No
2 in 1 Yes
approval ID number (Sharp
mode)
(7) Record Size
Fax relay ID registration No
(Sharp mode)
Mode FAX
Maximum record width 293mm *1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book,
Record size A3 – A5/11 x 17 – 5.5 x 8.5 the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum
total of all modes.
*2: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
registered number of each address within the book for address
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
(9) Telephone functions
Mode FAX
On-hook function Yes
Hold No
Setting of pause time Yes (1 – 15 seconds)
Telephone transmission during No (External telephone transmission
power outage allowed)
Tone pulse switching Tone, Pulse, Auto (North America/
Taiwan)
* For the other destinations, set with
the soft switch.
(10) Sound settings 6. Report/list function
Internet Fax/ A. User Authority
Mode Item Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
On-hook sound Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *2 Type Support
setting Total Count Yes
Sound volume Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 Device Count Yes
for calling setting All Custom Setting List Yes
Ring tone Sound volume N/A N/A N/A Printer Test SPDL Symbol Set List Yes
setting Page SPDL Internal Font List Yes
Line monitor Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 PCL5 Extended Font List Yes
sound setting PS Font List Yes
Reception Sound volume N/A Yes *1 No Kanji Font List Yes
sound setting NIC Page Yes
Reception finish Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 Sending Individual List Yes (Partial printing in the
sound setting Address List address book screen is
Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3 available.)
Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *4 Group List Yes
communication Memory Box List Yes
ending sound
All Sending Address List Yes (Batch print of
Transmission Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 Individual/ Group/
finish sound setting Memory Box)
Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3 Document Filing User / Folder List Yes
Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *4
communication B. Administrator Authority
ending sound
Transmission Sound volume N/A N/A Yes *1 *6 Type Support
and reception setting Administrator Copy Yes
error sound Sound pattern N/A N/A Yes *1 *3 Settings List Print Yes
Time setting for N/A N/A Yes *1 *5 Fax/Image send Yes
communication
Document filing Yes
ending sound
Security Yes
Communication Sound volume N/A Yes *1 No
Common Yes
error sound setting
All Administrator Settings Yes (Batch print of the
Sound setting Sound volume Yes *1 Yes * 1 Yes *1
List Administrator Settings
for end of setting
List)
original reading
(image send) Image Image Sending Activity Yes
Sending Report (Scan)
*1: Setup by system setting. Activity Report Image Sending Activity Yes
*2: 9 steps without mute Report (Internet Fax)
Image Sending Activity Yes
*3: PATTERN 1/2/3/4. Report (Fax)
Different sound should be selectable for each of reception/ Anti Junk Anti Junk Fax Number List Yes
transmission success/transmission and reception error. Allow/Reject Mail and Yes
*4: 5 steps of 2.0 - 4.0 seconds. Domain Name List
*5: 2 steps setting by very 0.3 or 0.7 second. Data Receive/ Inbound Routing List Yes
Forward List Document Admin List Yes
*6: 10 steps (including no sound).
Web Settings List Yes
(11) Others Metadata Set List Yes
User All User Information Print Yes
Mode FAX Information User List Yes
PC-FAX Yes Print List of Number of Pages Yes
FAST No Used
Network FAST No Page Limit Group List Yes
Distinctive ring detection Setting for each destination Authority Group List Yes
Favorite Operation Group Yes
List
C. Other List Print Functions

Type Support
List 2-sided print Yes
Changing settings Log Yes
1 : ‘17/Apr.
7. Power consumption
A. Power consumption
The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.
200 V (North America, etc.) 200 V (Europe, etc.)

1 Maximum rated power Consumption*1 2880W 3840W
Moving time to pre-heat mode 1 minutes (default) 15 minutes (default)
Recovery time from pre-heat mode 30 sec.
Moving time to sleep mode 15 minutes (default) 45 minutes (Europe)
* Printer mode: 10sec. (default)
*1: Power switch ON, dehumidity heater OFF
8. Dimensions and Weight

Outer dimension W845 x D844 x H1221mm
(Included operation panel) (Operation panel default position)
W845 x D831 x H1221mm
(When the operation panel is put
down.)
Footprint W845 x D765mm
Dimension occupied by the W1245 x D844mm
machine (When the bypass tray is extended/
(When the bypass tray is extended) Operation panel default position)
Weight 211kg
Main Unit (including photoreceptor /
not including consumables)
9. Ambient conditions
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
10°C 30°C 35°C

Temperature
MX-7580N
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS Service Manual
1. Supply system table

A. North America, Central America, South America
Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 65K MX-62NT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Reference: 54.2K for A4/Letter 6%)
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 40K MX-62NT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 40K MX-62NT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 40K MX-62NT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 600K MX-62NV-BA 10
Developer Developer x1 400K MX-62NV-SA 5
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(3 colors/set)) (3 colors/set))
Drum OPC drum x1 300K (Black) MX-62NR-SA 10
200K (Color)
B. Europe, Australia, New Zealand

Quantity in
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 65K MX-62GT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 40K MX-62GT-CB 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 40K MX-62GT-MB 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 40K MX-62GT-YB 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 600K MX-62GV-BA 10
Developer Developer x1 400K MX-62GV-SB 5
Drum OPC drum x1 300K (Black) MX-62GR-SA 10
200K (Color)
C. Asia, Hong Kong

Quantity in
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 65K MX-62AT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 40K MX-62AT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 40K MX-62AT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 40K MX-62AT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 600K MX-62AV-BA 10
Developer Developer x1 400K MX-62AV-SA 5
Drum OPC drum x1 300K (Black) MX-62AR-SA 10
200K (Color)
D. Middle East, Taiwan, Africa, Philippines

Quantity in
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 65K MX-62FT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 40K MX-62FT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 40K MX-62FT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 40K MX-62FT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 600K MX-62FV-BA 10
Developer Developer x1 400K MX-62FV-SA 5
Drum OPC drum x1 300K (Black) MX-62FR-SA 10
200K (Color)
MX-7580N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

2. Maintenance parts list
A. North America/Central and South America
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-751FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
Meandering suppress collar x2
Washer x2
Fusing roller kit MX-751HK Fusing roller x1 300K 10
Fusing roller BRG x2
Heating roller x1
Heating roller BRG x2
Insulation bush x2
Pressure roller kit MX-620LH Pressure roller x1 300K 10
Pressure roller gear x1
Pressure roller BRG x2
Lower separation pawl x4
Lower separation pawl SP x4
Web cleaning kit MX-620WB Web roller x1 300K 10
Web guide shaft x1
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
Primary transfer belt kit MX-620B1 Primary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Transfer separation pawl x1
Primary transfer blade kit MX-751TL Primary transfer blade x1 300K 10
Primary transfer CL roller kit MX-751C1 Primary transfer CL roller x1 300K 10
PTC kit MX-620CU Charger wire x1 300K 10
PTC cleaner x1
PTC cleaner B x1
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-620B2 Secondary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Secondary transfer blade kit MX-620TG Secondary transfer blade x1 300K 10
PS paper dust removing unit MX-620PD PS paper dust removing unit x1 300K 10
DV filter kit MX-751FK Filter folder unit x1 Black: 300K 10
Color: 200K 10
Filter kit MX-620FL Ozone filter x2 300K 10
Toner filter x2
Deodorant filter x1
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 100K *1 5 Each color A4 5% coverage
45% color ratio
Main charger kit MX-751MK Main charger unit x1 Black: 300K 10
Drum cleaning blade x1 Color: 200K
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
x3
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20
x3
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-751U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-751U2 Secondary transfer belt unit x1 - 1
(For servicing rotation)
Fusing unit MX-751FU Fusing unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
*1: The life of the toner collection container is 100K (which varies depending on the print contents, the paper sizes, the paper kinds, the use
conditions, and the number of continuous printing) with the color ratio of 30% (Monochrome : Color = 7 : 3) and A4 size 5% coverage.

B. Europe
Quantity in
Model
name
package
Washer x2
Heating roller x1
Insulation bush x2
24T gear x1
Web guide shaft x1
PTC cleaner x1
PTC cleaner B x1
Color: 200K 10
Toner filter x2
UFP filter x2
VOC filter x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container x1 100K *1 5 Each color A4 5% coverage
45% color ratio
x3
x3
x3
x3
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-751U2 Secondary transfer belt unit x1 - 1
(For servicing rotation)

C. Australia/New Zealand/Asia/Middle East
Quantity in
Model
name
package
Washer x2
Heating roller x1
Insulation bush x2
Web guide shaft x1
PTC cleaner x1
PTC cleaner B x1
Color: 200K 10
Toner filter x2
Deodorant filter x1
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container x1 100K *1 5 Each color A4 5% coverage
30% color ratio
(Monochrome : Color = 7 : 3)
Usage environmental
conditions
Standard environmental
conditions:
Room temperature:
20 - 25 °C
Humidity: 65 +/- 5 %RH
x3
x3
x3
x3
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-751U2 Secondary transfer belt unit (For servicing x1 - 1
rotation)

3. Definition of developer/drum life end
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified count.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count.
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life end.
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output may differ greatly.
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are output, monochrome document data may be output in the color mode in order to
prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color selection).
In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the
specified amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the developer/drum life, use SIM22-13.
Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm

B/W Full color B/W Full color
Drum 300K 200K 1000K rotations 1000K rotations
Developer 600K 400K 2000K rotations 2000K rotations
4. Production number identification B. Developer

A. OPC drum
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The lot number is 8 digits in length. Each digit indicates the content
as follows.
The number is printed on the developer bag. (For BK, at the right
lower side of the front. For Cl, at the right lower side of the back.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
The lot number is comprised of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the 2: Number
content as follows. Indicates the production year.
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. 3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
1: Number 5/6: Number
For this model, this digit is 2. Indicates the production day.
2: Alphabet 7: Hyphen
Indicates the model conformity code. 8: Number
3: Number Indicates the production lot.
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date.
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.

C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
bottom of the toner cartridge.
: Unit code/Model name

: Color code (Black: BK /Cyan: CY /Magenta: MA /Yellow: YE)
: Destination
: Skating
: Production place
: Production date (YYYYMMDD)
: Serial number
: Version
5. Environmental conditions
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
10°C 30°C 35°C

Temperature
Standard environmental Temperature 21 – 25 °C

conditions Humidity 50  10 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state

MX-7580N
Service Manual
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view
(2) (1) (11)
(10)
(9)
(4)
(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(3)
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
2 Punch module * This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large stacker) or the saddle stitch finisher (large
stacker).
3 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold function for
(100-sheet stapling) * folding output in half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
4 Finisher (100-sheet stapling) * This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
5 Trimming module * When center stapling is executed, the extended section can be cut.
6 Folding unit * When outputting different paper sizes such as A3 and A4, the larger size paper can be Z-folded to align with the
smaller size paper.
7 Inserter * The cover paper and the inserted paper inserted to the printed paper can be set. By the off-line finish function, paper
can be directly sent to the finisher or the saddle finisher, executing stapling, punching, and folding.
8 Curl correction unit * Corrects curl of printed paper properly.
9 Paper pass unit * Feeds paper to the main machine.
10 Large capacity trays * This holds paper. The capacity of each tray is max. 2,750 sheets.
11 Bypass tray * In manual paper feed, paper is manually inserted into this tray.
When setting A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R or greater, extend the auxiliary guide.
*: Peripheral device.
MX-7580N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

(5)
(4)
(16) (6)
(17)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(15)
(7)
(9)
(14)
(10)
(8) (11)
(12)
(13)

1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Right tray * When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
3 Bypass tray In manual paper feed, paper is manually inserted into this tray.
(Standard for some destinations) * When setting A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R or greater, extend the auxiliary guide.
4 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
5 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
6 Keyboard * This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not used, it can be stored under the operation panel.
7 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold function for
(50-sheet stapling) * folding output in half are also available.
8 Finisher (50-sheet stapling) * This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
9 Punch module * This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large stacker) or the saddle stitch finisher (large
stacker).
10 Tray 1 (left side) This holds paper. Up to 1300 sheets of paper can be loaded.
11 Tray 2 (right side) This holds paper. Up to 900 sheets of paper can be loaded.
12 Tray 3 This holds paper.
13 Tray 4 This holds paper.
14 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray The capacity is max. 4,000 sheets of B5, A4, or 8.5" x 11".
(MX-LC12) is installed) *
15 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W) paper can be loaded. Up to 3500 sheets of paper can be
(MX-LCX3N) is installed) * loaded.
16 Front cover (lower) * Open this cover when turning ON/OFF the main power switch, cleaning the main charger of the OPC drum, or
cleaning the writing unit.
17 Toner cover Open this cover when replacing the toner cartridge or processing a paper jam in the relay unit.
*: Peripheral device.

(1) (2) (3) (4)
(6) (5) (7)
No. Name function/Operation

1 Document feeder cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
2 Original guides Set this guide to the original width to scan the original properly.
3 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
4 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
5 Original size detector Detects the size of documents set on the document table (glass surface).
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.

2. Internal structure
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(3)
(8)

1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that
ran out must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
3 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four colors on each of the photoconductive
drums are combined together on the transfer belt. During black and white printing, only the black toner
image is transferred onto the transfer belt.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
5 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
6 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
7 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
8 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.

3. DSPF
A. Rollers
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 Pickup roller Picks up document and feed it to the document feed roller
2 Document feed roller Perform the document feed operation of documents
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double feed
4 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from paper feed roller to transport roller 2
5 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides transport power of the transport roller to
document
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from transport roller to registration roller
7 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document
8 Registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport
9 Registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the No.1 scan section to the transport roller 4
11 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to
document
12 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller
13 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to
document
14 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document
15 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of the document exit
roller to document
B. Sensors and switches
SCOV SPRDMD
SPPD2 STUD
SPED1 SPLS2
SPPD1
SPLS1
STLD SPWS
SPED2
SPPD3 SPOD
SOCD SPPD5
SPPD4
SLCOV
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

SCOV Upper door open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the upper door
SLCOV Lower door open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the lower door
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit
SPED1 Document empty sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPED2 Document empty sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPLS1 Document length detection short sensor Transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPLS2 Document length detection long sensor Transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper

SPOD Document exit sensor Transmission type Detects document exit of the document
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Reflection type Detects pass of the document
SPRDMD Document random sensor Transmission type Detects the document size in random document feed
SPWS Document width sensor Volume type resistor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper
STLD Document feed tray lower limit sensor Transmission type Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray
STUD Document feed tray upper limit sensor Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray
C. Drive motors, clutches, PWB’s, and lamps
STRC
SPUFM
STRRC
SRRC SPFC
SPFFAN
SPOM
SLUM
3
2
1
DSPF_COPY_LAMP

DSPF_COPY_ Scanner lamp (DSPF) LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document
LAMP image.
SLUM Document feed tray lift motor (DSPF) Stepping motor Lifts the document feed tray.
SPFC Paper feed clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the document feed section roller.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan DC brushless motor Cools the motors and the clutches in the DSPF section.
SPOM Document exit motor (DSPF) Stepping motor Drives the document exit roller.
SPUFM Transport motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller.
SRRC Registration roller clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the registration roller.
STRC Transport roller 2 clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller 2.
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller 1.

1 DSPF cnt PWB Controls the image data process and all the DSPF.
2 CCD PWB (DSPF) Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
3 DSPF Flash PWB Stores the DSPF program data.

4. Connectors
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No. Name function/Operation

1 USB connector (A type) Used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine.
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed)
2 USB connector (B type) Can not be used
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type
cable.
4 Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to
malfunction. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118"
(3 m) in length.
5 Power plug

5. Operation panel
(3) (4) (5)
(6)
(1) (2)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
2 [HOME] key / indicator Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable
quick and easy operation of the machine.
3 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
4 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
5 [POWER SAVE] key / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key blinks when
the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
6 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.

6. Sensors and detectors
OCSW
MHPS
TFD2 POD2
APPD1
HLPCD POD1
TH_UM
TH_US1
TH_US2 WEBEND2 DSW_ADU

TFSD_Y TFSD_M TFSD_C TFSD_K
DSW_FU FPFD TH_LM1
TH_LM2
1TUD_CL REGS_R /PCS R
REGS_C /PCS_C 1TUD_K
REGS_F /PCS_F APPD2
DHPD_Y DHPD_M DHPD_C DHPD_K
PTCCHPD
CCHPD_Y CCHPD_M CCHPD_C CCHPD_K
PPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K MPED
CCMD_Y CCMD_M CCMD_C CCMD_K PPD1 MPWD
MPFD MPLD1
TH1_LSU BD
TH2_LSU LPPD
T1LUD T1PPD1 T1PPD2
HUD_M/TH_M DSW_RL
T1PED T2PPD1
T2LUD
T2PED DSW_CS
T1SPD
T2SPD
TNDSET
C3LUD C3PFD
C3PED
C3SS1 C3SS2
C3SS3 C3SS4 C3SPD
C4LUD C4PFD WTBSET
C4PED
C4SS1 C4SS2
C4SS3 C4SS4
C4SPD WTFD
C4PWD

1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL) Light transmission Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode.
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals.)
1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK) Light transmission Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode.
(1TUD_BK)
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals.)
APPD1 ADU paper pass detector 1 Light transmission Detects paper entry in the ADU section.
APPD2 ADU paper pass detector 2 Light transmission Detects paper pass in the transport roller 21.
BD Laser beam sensor Pin diode Detects laser beams.
C3LUD Paper upper limit detector Light transmission Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 3)
C3PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 3) Light transmission Detects paper.
C3PFD Paper pass sensor (Paper feed tray 3) Light reflection Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the paper feed tray
3.
C3SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Light transmission Detects the paper remaining quantity.
(Paper feed tray 3)
C3SS1 - 4 Paper size detector (Paper feed tray 4) Tact switch Detects the paper size. Detects open/close of the paper feed tray.
C4LUD Paper upper limit detector Light transmission Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 4)
C4PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 4) Light transmission Detects paper.
C4PFD Paper pass sensor (Paper feed tray 4) Light reflection Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the paper feed tray
4.
C4PWD Paper width sensor (Paper feed tray 4) Resistance volume Detects the paper width.
C4SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Light transmission Detects the paper remaining quantity.
(Paper feed tray 4)

C4SS1 - 4 Paper feed tray size detector Tact switch Detects the paper size. Detects open/close of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 4)
CCHPD_C MC cleaner HP sensor (C) Light transmission Detects the MC cleaner home position. (CCHP_C)
CCHPD_K MC cleaner HP sensor (K) Light transmission Detects the MC cleaner home position. (CCHP_K)
CCHPD_M MC cleaner HP sensor (M) Light transmission Detects the MC cleaner home position. (CCHP_M)
CCHPD_Y MC cleaner HP sensor (Y) Light transmission Detects the MC cleaner home position. (CCHP_Y)
CCMD_C MC cleaner shift sensor (C) Light transmission Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
CCMD_K MC cleaner shift sensor (K) Light transmission Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
CCMD_M MC cleaner shift sensor (M) Light transmission Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
CCMD_Y MC cleaner shift sensor (Y) Light transmission Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
DHPD_C Drum phase sensor (C) Light transmission Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (C).
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor (K) Light transmission Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (K).
DHPD_M Drum phase sensor (M) Light transmission Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (M).
DHPD_Y Drum phase sensor (Y) Light transmission Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (Y).
DSW_ADU ADU open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the ADU section.
DSW_CS Transport cover open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the transport cover.
DSW_FU Front door upper open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the front door upper.
DSW_RL Right lower door open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the right lower door.
FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Light reflection Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Light transmission Detects the fusing pressure state.
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensor Temperature/humidity Detects the temperature and the humidity. (For the process control)
sensor
LPPD LCC transport detector Light reflection Detects paper transport from the LCC.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Light transmission Detects the scanner home position.
MPED Paper empty detector Light transmission Detects paper.
(Manual paper feed tray)
MPFD Paper feed detector (Manual paper feed) Light transmission Detects paper pass in the manual paper feed section.
MPLD1 Paper length detector Light transmission Detects the paper length.
MPWD Paper width sensor Resistance volume Detects the paper width.
OCSW Document size detection trigger sensor Light transmission Generates the document size detection trigger signal.
POD1 Fusing paper exit detector Light transmission Detects paper pass in the fusing section.
POD2 Left paper exit detector Light transmission Detects paper exit to the left direction.
PPD1 Registration pre-detection Light reflection Detects the paper timing before registration.
PPD2 Registration sensor Light reflection Detects the paper registration timing.
PTCCHPD PTC cleaner home position sensor Light transmission Detects the PTC cleaner home position. (PTCHP)
REGS_C/ Image registration/Density sensor (C) Light reflection Detects image color shift. Detects the toner patch density.
PCS_C
REGS_F/ Image registration/Density sensor (F) Light reflection Detects image color shift. Detects the toner patch density.
PCS_F
REGS_R/ Image registration/Density sensor (R) Light reflection Detects image color shift. Detects the toner patch density.
PCS R
T1LUD Paper upper limit detector (Paper feed Light transmission Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
tray 1)
T1PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 1) Light transmission Detects paper.
T1PPD1 Paper pass sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Light reflection Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the paper feed tray
1.
1.
T1SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Light transmission Detects the paper remaining quantity.
(Paper feed tray 1)
T2LUD Paper upper limit detector (Paper feed Light transmission Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
tray 2)
T2PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 2) Light transmission Detects paper.
2.
T2SPD Paper remaining quantity detector Light transmission Detects the paper remaining quantity.
(Paper feed tray 2)
TCS_C Toner density sensor (C) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density
(C).
TCS_K Toner density sensor (K) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density
(K).
TCS_M Toner density sensor (M) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density
(M).
TCS_Y Toner density sensor (Y) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density
(Y).
TFD2 Paper exit full detector (Center paper exit Light transmission Detects paper full in the center paper exit tray.
tray)
TFSD_C Toner remaining quantity sensor (C) Piezoelectric sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TFSD_K Toner remaining quantity sensor (K) Piezoelectric sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TFSD_M Toner remaining quantity sensor (M) Piezoelectric sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TFSD_Y Toner remaining quantity sensor (Y) Piezoelectric sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.

TH_LM1 Fusing temperature sensor 1 Non-contact thermistor Detects the center surface temperature of the fusing roller B.
(Fusing roller B)
TH_LM2 Fusing temperature sensor 2 Contact-type thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing roller B.
(Fusing roller B)
TH_UM Main fusing temperature sensor Non-contact thermistor Detects the center surface temperature of the fusing belt.
(Fusing belt)
TH_US1 Sub fusing temperature sensor Non-contact thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing belt.
(Fusing belt)
TH_US2 Fusing temperature sensor (Fusing belt) Contact-type thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing belt.
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 Thermistor Detects the temperature in the LSU.
TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 Thermistor Detects the temperature in the LSU.
TNDSET Open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the paper feed trays 1 and 2.
(Paper feed tray 1, 2)
WEBEND2 Web end detector 2 Light transmission Detects web end.
WTBSET Waste toner bottle detector Light transmission Detects installation of the waste toner bottle.
WTFD Waste toner full detector Light transmission Detects full of waste toner.

7. Switches
PWRSW
DSW_R
MSW
DSW_F

DSW_F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door. Opens/closes the power lines of the
fusing section, the motor, and the LSU laser. (DSW_FL)
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door. Opens/closes the power lines of the
fusing section, the motor, and the LSU laser.
MSW Main power switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main power.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.

8. Clutches and solenoids
ADUGS
DVC_Y
1TURRC DVC_M
DVC_K DVC_C
MPGS PCSS
1TURC
T1PUS
MPFS
T1PUC
TTRC
PTRC2
MPUC T2PUS
LCCC T2PUC
C3PUS
C3PUC
C4PUS
C4PUC
PTRC1

1TURC Transfer mode select clutch (Forward rotation) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF of the transfer mode select cam forward rotation.
1TURRC Transfer mode select clutch (Reverse rotation) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF of the transfer mode select cam reverse rotation.
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Selects the paper exit gate (ADU gate).
C3PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
C3PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 3) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
C4PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
C4PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 4) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
DVC_C DV clutch (C) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the DV unit drive.
DVC_K DV clutch (K) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the DV unit drive.
DVC_M DV clutch (M) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the DV unit drive.
DVC_Y DV clutch (Y) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the DV unit drive.
LCCC LCC transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the roller in the paper entry section from the LCC
and the transport roller in the manual paper feed section.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
MPGS Paper feed gate solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the manual paper feed gate.
MPUC Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
PCSS Image density sensor shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the shutter for the image density sensor.
PTRC1 Paper vertical transport clutch (Lower) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the lower section of the
vertical paper transport section.
PTRC2 Paper vertical transport clutch (Upper) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the upper section of the
vertical paper transport section.
T1PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
T1PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
T2PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
T2PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
TTRC Transport clutch (Paper feed tray 1, 2) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller of the paper feed tray 1.

9. Drive motors
TNM_Y
PRM
TNM_M
MIM TNM_C TNHM_Y
TNM_K TNHM_M
POM
TNHM_C DM_Y
PGM TNHM_K
ADUM1 DM_M
CCM_Y
FUM DM_C
CCM_M
WEBM2
DM_K
BTM CCM_C
CCM_K
PTCCM
RRM
PFM
ADUM2 CPFM
T1LUM
WTM
LCCM
T2LUM
C3LUM
C4LUM

ADUM1 ADU motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the ADU and the transport roller in the right paper exit section.
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 Stepping motor Drives the transport roller in the ADU section.
BTM Transfer motor DC brushless motor Drives the transfer section.
C3LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 3) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
C4LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 4) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
CCM_C MC cleaning motor (C) DC micro motor Slides the MC cleaner.
CCM_K MC cleaning motor (K) DC micro motor Slides the MC cleaner.
CCM_M MC cleaning motor (M) DC micro motor Slides the MC cleaner.
CCM_Y MC cleaning motor (Y) DC micro motor Slides the MC cleaner.
CPFM Paper feed motor DC brushless motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM_C Drum motor C DC brushless motor Drives the OPC unit and the DV unit.
DM_K Drum motor K DC brushless motor Drives the OPC unit and the DV unit.
DM_M Drum motor M DC brushless motor Drives the OPC unit and the DV unit.
DM_Y Drum motor Y DC brushless motor Drives the OPC unit and the DV unit.
FUM Fusing motor DC brushless motor Drives the fusing section.
LCCM LCC paper entry motor Stepping motor LCC transport motor
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner unit. (scan, return operations)
PGM Polygon motor DC brushless motor Drives the LSU polygon mirror.
POM Paper exit motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section.
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Stepping motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing pressure.
PTCCM PTC cleaning motor DC micro motor Slides the PTC cleaner.
RRM Registration motor Stepping motor Drives the registration roller. (Controls the timing of the transfer image for
the paper.)
T1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
T2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
TNHM_C Tone hopper motor (C) Stepping motor Sends toner to the DV unit.

TNHM_K Tone hopper motor (K) Stepping motor Sends toner to the DV unit.
TNHM_M Tone hopper motor (M) Stepping motor Sends toner to the DV unit.
TNHM_Y Tone hopper motor (Y) Stepping motor Sends toner to the DV unit.
TNM_C Toner motor (C) Stepping motor Sends toner to the toner hopper.
TNM_K Toner motor (K) Stepping motor Sends toner to the toner hopper.
TNM_M Toner motor (M) Stepping motor Sends toner to the toner hopper.
TNM_Y Toner motor (Y) Stepping motor Sends toner to the toner hopper.
WEBM2 Web motor Synchronous motor Winds the fusing web sheet.
WTM Waste toner motor DC brushless motor Transport waste toner.

10. Lamps
CLI
HL_UM/US/UW
CCFT HL_LM
DL2_Y
DL_Y
DL2_M
DL_M
DL2_C
DL_C
DL2_K
DL_K

CCFT LCD backlight LED Backlight for LCD.
CLI Scanner lamp LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
DL_C Discharge lamp 1 (C) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp 1 (K) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp 1 (M) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp 1 (Y) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL2_C Discharge lamp 2 (C) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
DL2_K Discharge lamp 2 (K) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
DL2_M Discharge lamp 2 (M) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
DL2_Y Discharge lamp 2 (Y) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
HL_LM Heater lamp (B) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM/US/UW Heater lamp (F) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.

11. Gates

1 Reverse gate Discharges paper to the right tray or selects the switch-back transport route to the ADU section.
2 Paper exit gate (ADU gate) Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the ADU section or to the right tray.

12. Fans
POFM2_F
VFM_BA
POFM_F VFM_R
POFM2_R
ADUFM_F POFM_EX
POFM_R OZFM3
ADUFM_R TBFM
FPRFM_F
POFM2_EX LSUFM
FPRFM_R FUFM
OZFM2
OZFM1
MFPFM
HDDFM
PSFM2
PSFM1
Signal name Name Function/Operation

ADUFM_F ADU cooling fan (F) Cools the ADU paper transport section.
ADUFM_R ADU cooling fan (R) Cools the ADU paper transport section.
FPRFM_F Fusing cooling fan (F) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FPRFM_R Fusing cooling fan (R) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section.
HDDFM HDD cooling fan Cools the HDD.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan Cools the LSU.
MFPFM MFP cooling fan Cools the surrounding of the MFP PWB.
OZFM1 Ozone fan motor 1 Discharges ozone generated in the process section.
POFM_EX Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan (F) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan (R) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM2_EX Paper exit cooling fan2 Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section. (For Europe)
POFM2_F Paper exit cooling fan2 (F) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section. (For Europe)
POFM2_R Paper exit cooling fan2 (R) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section. (For Europe)
PSFM1 Power cooling fan 1 Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan 2 Cools the power unit.
TBFM Toner bottle cooling fan motor Toner cooling fan motor
VFM_BA Machine ventilation fan BA Ventilates air in the machine. (For Europe)
VFM_R Machine ventilation fan Ventilates air in the machine.

13. Filter
1 1
1
1
4
3
6
2
5

1 Toner filter Prevents toner from splashing from the DV unit.
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
3 Toner filter Absorbs floating toner in the image process section.
4 Deodorant filter Absorbs odor generated in the fusing section.
5 UFP filter Absorbs ultrafine particle. (For Europe)
6 VOC filter Absorbs ultrafine particle. (For Europe)

14. PWB/Memory device
3
2 4
14
5
29 1 30
28
9
27
7
26
8
23
10
31
25
11
24 12
13
32 33
15
16
17
21 18
22
20
35
19
34

1 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal.
2 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving) Outputs the document size detection signal.
3 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
4 Scanner lamp drive PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
5 Document size detection PWB (Light emitting) Drives the LED for the document size detection.
6 HL control PWB Drives the heater lamp.
7 SCN Mother PWB Process image data, controls the overall scanner, and controls the operation section. Interfaces
the MFP PWB and the operation PWB, the PCU PWB, the LSU PWB, and the FAX unit.
8 SCN Flash PWB Stores the SCN program data
9 TC1 PWB (High voltage TC1 PWB) Generates the primary transfer voltage.
10 MC PWB (High voltage MC PWB) Generates the main charger voltage and the DV bias voltage.
11 Paper feed tray detection PWB (Paper feed tray 1) Opens/closes the paper feed tray and detects paper.
12 SUB AC POWER PWB Controls the power of the heater lamp drive circuit. AC cord 2 power monitor signal (FW signal
output). (Only in the 2-power plug system models)

13 SUB DC POWER PWB Supplies power for the Option, MFP and Scanner.
14 Wireless LAN PWB Connect the network by the wireless LAN.
15 AC power PWB Controls the primary side power.
16 Paper size detection PWB (Paper feed tray 3) Detects the paper size.
17 Paper size detection PWB (Paper feed tray 4) Detects the paper size.
18 MAIN DC POWER PWB Supplies the power for the machine.
19 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
20 Driver PWB Drives the motors.
21 TC2 PWB (High voltage TC2 PWB) Generates the secondary transfer voltage.
22 Paper feed tray detection PWB (Paper feed tray 2) Opens/closes the paper feed tray and detects paper.
23 MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression, decompression, and filing), and controls the whole machine.
24 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
25 Right door interface PWB Interfaces the signals of the sensors in the paper transport section.
26 LD PWB Drives the laser diode and controls the power.
27 LSUcnt PWB Controls the LSU.
28 HOME KEY PWB Outputs the return home and power saving key signal.
29 POWER SW PWB Indicates power on/off and outputs the power on/off key signal.
30 USB I/F PWB USB interface
31 HDD Stores the MFP PWB program data, the filing data, the e-manual data, the watermark data, the log
data, and the authentication data. Also used as a work area.
32 Flash PWB1 Stores ASIC1 program data.
33 Flash PWB2 Stores ASIC2 program data.
34 mSATA SSD Stores MFP PWB program data, snapshot, e-manual data and log data.
35 PCU Flash PWB Stores the PCU program data.

15. Fuses and thermostats
AC POWER PWB
F3
F4
F2
F1
DC POWER PWB
F101
F102
F605
F604
F603
F602
F601
TS S
TS M
TS L
Fuses
Type
Signal name Name 200V series 200V series Location
(North America) (Other than North America)
F1 Fuse 20A 250V T10AH 250V AC POWER PWB
F2 Fuse – T10AH 250V AC POWER PWB
F3 Fuse T2AH 250V T2AH 250V AC POWER PWB
F4 Fuse – T2AH 250V AC POWER PWB
F101 Fuse 12A 250V DC Power PWB
F102 Fuse 2A 250V DC Power PWB
F601 Fuse 6.3A 250V DC Power PWB
Thermostats
TS L Thermostat L Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS M Thermostat M Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM/HL_UW) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS S Thermostat S Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.

16. Rollers
60 59 52 51
53
54
49
50
56
55
58
47 57
48 27
45 25
46 26
38 24
37
22
23
20 40
21 39
28
17 42
18 41
19 44
43
13
14 36
15 35
16
34
33
32
31
7 8 9 1 2 3 5 4 6 29 30 11 10 12

1 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 4) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 4) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 4) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray to the transport roller 2.
5 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
6 Transport roller 2 Transports paper to the transport roller 9.
roller to paper.

roller to paper.
22 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport roller 13.
roller to paper.
24 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
25 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
26 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
27 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transport paper fed from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 16.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
39 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the LCC to the transport roller 15.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
45 Transport roller 17 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller.
roller to paper.
47 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts the
relative position between images and paper.
48 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to paper.
49 Transport roller 18 (Drive) Transports paper to the paper exit section.
roller to paper.
51 Transport roller 19 (Drive) Transports paper to the right paper exit section or the ADU section.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
roller to paper.
59 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper to the left side.
60 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit
roller to paper.

MX-7580N
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap
1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 High voltage adjustment 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current/voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Print engine image 3A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment) / OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22
distortion adjustment / (Automatic adjustment) / Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
OPC drum phase 3B Print engine image skew (LSU skew) adjustment (Manual adjustment) 50-20
adjustment / Color (No need to adjust normally)
registration adjustment 3C Color registration offset adjustment (No need to adjust normally) 50-20
(Print engine section)
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment (Document 4B Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
table mode) 4C Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew 5A DSPF parallelism adjustment
adjustment (DSPF mode) 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2
5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-2
ADJ 6 Scan image focus 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/DSPF front surface mode) 48-1
adjustment 6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 7/ Color balance/density Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
SET1 adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
7A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
SET Color balance 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup 63-7/8/11
1 adjustment target 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup 67-26/27/28
setup
7B Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic adjustment) 46-74
7C Copy quality 7C Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 46-24
adjustment (Basic (1)
adjustment) 7C Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21
(2)
7D Copy / Image 7D Color copy density adjustment (for each color copy mode) (separately 46-1
send / FAX image (1) for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust
quality adjustment normally)
(Individual 7D Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy 46-2
adjustment) (2) mode) (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area)
(No need to adjust normally)
7D Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment (for each color copy 46-10
(3) mode) (No need to adjust normally)
7D Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for each monochrome 46-16
(4) copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
7D Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density 46-19
(5) scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally
no need to set)
7D Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the 46-32
(6) automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust
normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)
7D Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode) 46-63
(7) (No need to adjust normally)
7D Color copy, text, line image reproduction adjustment (edge gamma, 46-27
(8) density adjustment) (Text, Map mode) (No need to adjust normally)
7D Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction 46-37
(9) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
7D Color copy mode dark area gradation (black component quantity) 46-38
(10) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
7D Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness adjustment 46-60
MX-7580N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 7/ Color balance/density 7D Copy / Image 7D Copy high density image density reproduction setting 46-23
SET1 adjustment send / FAX image (12) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
quality adjustment 7D Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) 46-25
(Individual (13) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 7D DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment 46-9
7D Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for each dither (Automatic 46-54
(15) adjustment)
7D Dropout color adjustment (Normally not required) 46-55
(16)
7D Watermark adjustment (Normally not required) 46-66
(17)
7E Printer image 7E Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 67-24
quality adjustment (1)
(Basic 7E Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
adjustment) (2)
7F Printer image 7F Printer density adjustment (Low density section density adjustment) 67-36
quality adjustment (1) (No need to adjust normally)
(Individual 7F Printer high density image density reproduction setting (Supporting 67-34
adjustment) (2) the high density section tone gap) (No need to adjust normally)
7F Printer gamma adjustment for each dither 67-54
(3) (Automatic adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
ADJ 8 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 9 DSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 10 Document size detection 10A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
adjustment
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 12 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 13 Print image manual 13A Print image manual magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Print engine) 50-10
magnification ratio, area, 13B Print image manual area adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) (Print 50-10 / 50-1
position adjustment engine)
(Manual adjustment) 13C Print image manual position adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) (Print 50-10
engine) (Each paper feed tray)
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification 14A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
(Manual adjustment) 14B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(Document table mode)
14C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF mode)
14D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF mode)
ADJ 15 Scan image off-center 15A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-12
adjustment 15B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode) 50-12 / 50-6
(Manual adjustment)
ADJ 16 Copy image position and 16A Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table 50-1
image loss adjustment mode)
(Manual adjustment) 16B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode) 53-8
16C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 17 Finisher and punch unit adjustments (alignment, punch hole position, staple position) 3-10
ADJ 18 DSPF CCD calibration 18A Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-2
18B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3
ADJ 19 DSPF back surface color balance exposure adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-9
ADJ 20 FR density variation 20A FR density uniformity auto correction (32 point adjustment for all colors) 61-11
correction 20B FR density uniformity visual inspection (CMYK 5 point adjustment or CMYK 32point adjustment) 61-12

3. Details of adjustment 3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.70mm in between 40mm - 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit

70mm
40mm
1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low. 70mm
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. 40mm
* The toner is excessively dispersed.

1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten

the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
2
1
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm - 70mm

from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.70 +/- 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm
40mm
70mm
40mm

Note for use of a thickness gauge 5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-
• Do not insert the gauge diagonally. tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 46.4 +/-
0.5mm.
• The gauge must pass freely.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
• The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
roller oscillation.
Marked point (A) on the drive side (left side) of the MG roller.
A 46.4 + 0.5mm
46.4 + 0.5mm
1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole 6) Loosen the fixing screw of the developing roller main pole
position adjustment plate in the rear side of the developing unit, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not
provide a correct position.) Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the position comes to the specified range.
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller 7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.) main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw.
2㹼3mm

1-C Toner density control reference value ADJ 2 High voltage adjustment
setting
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
* When developer is replaced.
CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer * When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
is replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
2) Close the front cabinet.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel-
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
oping roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner
the scroll key.
density, and the output value is displayed.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-
speed mode and press [OK] key.
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value. Default value
Item/Display
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation Content Setting 65cpm 75cpm
(mode)
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight. range machine machine
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is MID A MIDDLE K charging/grid 150- -620V -625V
completed or not. DLE SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
GB_K middle speed
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed
B MIDDLE C charging/grid 150- -620V -625V
mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner
SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
density control value is set for each of them.
GB_C middle speed
CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the C MIDDLE M charging/grid 150- -620V -625V
adjustment result is not reflected. SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
GB_M middle speed
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid 150- -620V -625V
operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
GB_Y middle speed
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of LOW A LOW1 K charging/grid 150- -608V -608V
the reference toner density control value is not com- SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
pleted normally. GB_K low speed 1
B LOW1 C charging/grid 150- -608V -608V
Error SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
Error name Detail of error
display GB_C low speed 1
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level: 0.99V or below. If not, C LOW1 M charging/grid 150- -608V -608V
Control voltage: 8.0V or above. SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level: 2.28V or above. If not, GB_M low speed 1
Control voltage: 2.0V or below. D LOW1 Y charging/grid 150- -608V -608V
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 1.65V +/- SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
0.04V GB_Y low speed 1
E LOW2 K charging/grid 150- -604V -604V
CAUTION: When replacing developer, always replace all the three SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
colors of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. GB_K low speed 2
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be F LOW2 C charging/grid 150- -604V -604V
adversely affected. Black developer can be replaced SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
individually. GB_C low speed 2
G LOW2 M charging/grid 150- -604V -604V
CAUTION: When not replacing the developer, do not execute SPEED bias set value at 950 ±5V ±5V
SIM25-2. GB_M low speed 2
CAUTION: During execution of this adjustment, do not insert the H LOW2 Y charging/grid 150- -604V -604V
toner cartridge.
GB_Y low speed 2
CAUTION: When SIM25-2 is executed with a toner cartridge
inserted, "Toner Check" is displayed to disable the exe- Remark:
cution button. In this case, remove the toner cartridge Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out-
and execute SIM25-2 again. putted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX

The default values specified for each model must be changed as
follows:

65cpm machine: + 0 Default value
Item/Display
75cpm machine: + 5 Content Setting 65cpm 75cpm
(mode)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce- range machine machine
dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved. LOW A LOW1 K developing 0-600 -450V -450V
SPEED bias set value at ±5V ±5V
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped. DVB_K low speed 1
B LOW1 C developing 0-600 -450V -450V
CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on SPEED bias set value at ±5V ±5V
the MC high voltage power PWB. DVB_C low speed 1
C LOW1 M developing 0-600 -450V -450V
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order DVB_M low speed 1
to check the adjustment value. D LOW1 Y developing 0-600 -450V -450V
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advis- SPEED bias set value at ±5V ±5V
able to put down the adjustment value in advance. DVB_Y low speed 1
E LOW2 K developing 0-600 -450V -450V
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-
DVB_K low speed 2
dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the
F LOW2 C developing 0-600 -450V -450V
other modes are automatically set according to the mid-
dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship. DVB_C low speed 2
CAUTION: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a G LOW2 M developing 0-600 -450V -450V
digital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the out- SPEED bias set value at ±5V ±5V
put must be made by checking the print image quality. DVB_M low speed 2
H LOW2 Y developing 0-600 -450V -450V
2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage DVB_Y low speed 2
Remark:
* When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out-
* U2 trouble has occurred. putted.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. attached to the MC high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Default value
Item/Display
Content Setting 65cpm 75cpm
(mode)
range machine machine
MID A MIDDLE K developing 0-600 -450V -450V
DLE SPEED bias set value at ±5V ±5V
DVB_K middle speed
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX
B MIDDLE C developing 0-600 -450V -450V
SPEED bias set value at ±5V ±5V When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
DVB_C middle speed dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
C MIDDLE M developing 0-600 -450V -450V When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
DVB_M middle speed CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on
D MIDDLE Y developing 0-600 -450V -450V the MC high voltage power PWB.
SPEED bias set value at ±5V ±5V Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
DVB_Y middle speed high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order
to check the adjustment value.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advis-
able to put down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the mid-

dle speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the
other modes are automatically set according to the mid-
dle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
CAUTION: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a
digital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the out-
put must be made by checking the print image quality.

2-C Transfer current/voltage adjustment
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
* When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Second- key.
ary transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified
* U2 trouble has occurred. voltage is outputted.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is out-
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. putted.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A TC1 LOW 1 CL K Primary transfer bias reference value Color K Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
B TC1 LOW 2 CL K Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
C TC1 MIDDLE CL K Middle speed 0 - 255 99
D TC1 LOW 1 CL C C Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
E TC1 LOW 2 CL C Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
F TC1 MIDDLE CL C Middle speed 0 - 255 99
G TC1 LOW 1 CL M M Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
H TC1 LOW 2 CL M Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
I TC1 MIDDLE CL M Middle speed 0 - 255 99
J TC1 LOW 1 CL Y Y Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
K TC1 LOW 2 CL Y Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
L TC1 MIDDLE CL Y Middle speed 0 - 255 99
M TC1 LOW 1 BW K Black and K Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
N TC1 LOW 2 BW K white Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
O TC1 MIDDLE BW K Middle speed 0 - 255 99
P TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias reference value Color Standard paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 145
Q TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
R TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 138
S TC2 PLAIN BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 138
T TC2 PLAIN2 CL SPX Color Standard paper 2 Front surface 0 - 255 145
U TC2 PLAIN2 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
V TC2 PLAIN2 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 138
W TC2 PLAIN2 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 138
X TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 110
Y TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 103
Z TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 110
AA TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 103
AB TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 2 Front surface 0 - 255 110
AC TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 103
AD TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 110
AE TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 103
AF TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 3 Front surface 0 - 255 96
AG TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 87
AH TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 96
AI TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 87
AJ TC2 HEAVY4 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 4 Front surface 0 - 255 96
AK TC2 HEAVY4 CL DPX <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 87
AL TC2 HEAVY4 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 96
AM TC2 HEAVY4 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 87
AN TC2 OHP CL Color OHP Front surface 0 - 255 110
AO TC2 OHP BW <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AP TC2 ENVELOPE CL Black and Envelope Front surface 0 - 255 83
AQ TC2 ENVELOPE BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 83
AR TC2 THIN CL Color Thin paper Front surface 0 - 255 138
AS TC2 THIN BW <Middle speed> Back surface 0 - 255 138
AT TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL Black and Glossy paper Front surface 0 - 255 110
AU TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AV TC2 EMBOSS CL Color Embossed paper Front surface 0 - 255 96
AW TC2 EMBOSS BW <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 80
AX TC2 LABEL CL Black and Label paper Front surface 0 - 255 110
AY TC2 LABEL BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AZ TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW1 SPX Secondary transfer front edge bias In low speed 1 print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BA TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW1 DPX reference value Back surface 0 - 255 145
BB TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW2 SPX In low speed 2 print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BC TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW2 DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
BD TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX In middle speed print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BE TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145

Setting Default
range value
BF TC2 BACKEND LOW1 SPX Secondary transfer rear edge bias In low speed 1 print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BG TC2 BACKEND LOW1 DPX reference value Back surface 0 - 255 69
BH TC2 BACKEND LOW2 SPX In low speed 2 print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BI TC2 BACKEND LOW2 DPX Back surface 0 - 255 69
BJ TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX In middle speed print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BK TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0 - 255 69
BL TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW 1 Secondary transfer cleaning negative In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 76
BM TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW 2 bias reference value In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 76
BN TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 76
BO TC2 INTERVAL LOW 1 Bias reference value between papers In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 72
BP TC2 INTERVAL LOW 2 In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 72
BQ TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 72
BR TC2 COUNTER LOW 1 Counter bias reference value In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 72
BS TC2 COUNTER LOW 2 In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 72
BT TC2 COUNTER MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 72
BU PTC LOW 1 CL PTC current reference value Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 119
BV PTC LOW 2 CL Low speed 2 0 - 255 119
BW PTC MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 119
BX PTC LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 119
BY PTC LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 119
BZ PTC MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 119
CA PTC EMBOSS Both Low speed 2 0 - 255 187
CB CASE VOLT LOW 1 CL PTC case voltage reference value Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 0
CC CASE VOLT LOW 2 CL Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CD CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 0
CE CASE VOLT LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 0
CF CASE VOLT LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CG CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0
CH CASE VOLT EMBOSS Both Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CI TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 1 CL Secondary transfer drive roller bias Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 98
CJ TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 2 CL reference value Low speed 2 0 - 255 98
CK TC2 DRIVEROLL MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 98
CL TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 98
CM TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 98
CN TC2 DRIVEROLL MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 98

ADJ 3 Print engine image distortion 3-A Print engine image distortion adjustment
(Manual adjustment) / OPC drum phase
adjustment / OPC drum phase adjustment (Automatic adjustment) /
adjustment / Color registration Color registration adjustment
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Print engine section) This adjustment performs the print engine image distortion adjust-
ment, the OPC drum phase adjustment, and the color registration
adjustment simultaneously.
* When the color shift occurs.
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.
* When the LSU is replaced.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the LSU is removed from the main unit.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto-
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed. matic adjustment is started. (It takes about 15 sec to complete
* When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the the adjustment.)
OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, 3) When the adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
etc.) the normal display, and the value of the adjustment result is
* When [ADJ13A] Print engine image magnification ratio adjust- displayed.
ment (BK) (main scanning direction) is performed. The current skew level for each color is displayed on the
* U2 trouble has occurred. SKEW display section.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the color phase is not proper even after execution of the
color balance adjustment.
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced. (when it is removed
from the machine)
* When the developing unit or the OPC drum unit is removed from
the machine.
Display/Item Content Display NOTE

MAIN F C Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0 Same item with SIM50-20.
(Cyan laser writing position F side) * However, the adjustment accuracy is in the unit of +/-0.1dot.
M Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0
(Magenta laser writing position F side)
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0
(Yellow laser writing position F side)
MAIN R C Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0
(Cyan laser writing position R side)
M Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0
(Magenta laser writing position R side)
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0
(Yellow laser writing position R side)
SUB C Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0
(Cyan drum - Black drum)
M Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0
(Magenta drum - Black drum)
Y Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 399.0
(Yellow drum - Black drum)
SKEW C Print skew amount calculation result (Cyan) L99.9 - R99.9 If the value is positive (+), "L" is displayed at the head of the
M Print skew amount calculation result (Magenta) L99.9 - R99.9 value. If negative (-), "R" is displayed.
Y Print skew amount calculation result (Yellow) L99.9 - R99.9 If the value is in the range of -5.0 - +5.0, "(OK)" is displayed at
the bottom of the value. In the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed.
ALL_ROTATE Print skew amount calculation result (Overall) L99.9 - R99.9 If the value is positive (+), "L" is displayed at the head of the
value. If negative (-), "R" is displayed.
If the value is in the range of -3.6 - +3.6, "(OK)" is displayed at
the bottom of the value. In the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed.
START Modulation control start position 0 - 359
( ): Previous value
AMP1 Modulation control amplitude 0 - 15
( ): Previous value
AMP2 Modulation control amplitude 0 - 15
( ): Previous value
4) Write down the displayed skew level. * When "L" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU
Meaning of the skew level value and the adjustment pro- skew adjustment screw counterclockwise.
cedure * The turning amount of the adjustment screw corresponds to
* If "OK" is displayed for all items of SKEW ALL_ROTATE, C, each adjustment value. "ALL_ROTATE", C, M, and Y
M, and Y, there is no need to perform the adjustment. indicate numbers of clicks.
* When "R" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU The display value is rounded at the decimal point.
skew adjustment screw clockwise.

2 : ‘17/June
2 * "ALL_ROTATES" shows the number of adjustment click CAUTION: When the adjustment is made by turning the LSU skew
steps for all the adjustment screws. "C, M, and Y (SKEW)" adjustment screw of K, the states of C, M and Y
shows the number of adjustment click steps for each adjust- (SKEW) are changed. Execute SIM50-22 to check to
ment screw of C, M, and Y. confirm that C, M, and Y (SKEW) are OK.
When an abnormality occurs, "ERROR" is displayed.
Contents in ( ) In this case, check each drive section and the process
MIAN, SUB: Difference from the previous adjustment value of section.
image registration.
Example: The adjustment result can be checked by the following manual
If 105 for this time and 103 for the previous time, adjustment mode.
it is displayed as 105.0 (+2.0). * ADJ3B
SKEW, ALL_ROTATE: Judgment of the LSU skew adjustment Image skew adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIM50-20)
result. OK or NG.
* ADJ3C
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value of the previous
Color registration offset adjustment (SIM50-20)
time
5) If the display of ALL_ROTATE is NG, turn all the LSU skew NOTE: When the color registration is greatly shifted due to
adjustment screws to adjust, and perform the procedures 2) to replacement of the LSU, etc, if SIM50-22 is used to per-
4). form the color registration automatic adjustment, an error
may occur.
Repeat the procedures 2) to 5) until the display of
ALL_ROTATE becomes OK. If the display of ALL_ROTATE is In this case, the adjustment may be properly executed by
OK, go to the procedure 6). setting the adjustment items A - I of SIM50-20 to "200" and
executing the automatic adjustment again.
For the adjustment, turn the skew adjustment screw with the
front cover open. If color shift in an actual print image differs in the center, the
front side, and the rear side, the color shift offset adjust-
ment can improve it. (Refer to ADJ3C.)
Normally there is a difference in color shift in several dots.
Perform the adjustment only when the adjustment is
required.
3-B Print engine image skew (LSU skew)

adjustment (Manual adjustment)
If a more accurate adjustment than the automatic adjustment
ADJ3A is required, use this method of adjustment.
This adjustment is made by changing the parallelism of the LSU
unit scan laser beams for the OPC drum.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it, and
press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The image skew (image registration) adjustment pattern is
printed.
6) Repeat the procedures 2) to 4) again, and check to confirm
that C, M, and Y (SKEW) are OK. 4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
If any of them is NG, turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of Use the four cross points printed in black to measure the
the corresponding color to adjust. squareness.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
for any skew (right angle).
Method 1
Measure the distances between opposing corners of the rect-
angle print pattern, and compare the two distances to check
the squareness.
Method 2
Check the squareness of the vertical and horizontal sides of
the rectangle print pattern by using A3 or 11" x 17" paper
sides.
CAUTION: In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be
used may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle
of paper to be used in advance.

In case of the method 1, 0.8mm/about 1.5 rotations
In case of the method 2, 0.5mm/about 1.5 rotations
A B Repeat the procedures 2) to 6).
After completion of the black image skew adjustment, go to the
procedure 7).
Diagonal Diagonal
line C line D
6) Perform the same procedures as 1) and 2).
About 220mm
7) Check the printed color image for any skew.
If the difference between the shift amounts on the F and R
sides is within +/- 1 scale of the fine adjustment check scale,
there is no need to perform the adjustment.
Measure the skew amount from the print patterns on the front
and rear sides of each color.
R side
About 300mm
Method 1
Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
pattern.
Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and
D of the diagonal lines.
Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the
following range.
C - D = 0.8mm F side
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust.
Method 2
Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the rect- Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment
scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame)
angle print pattern. B-sub
Measure the slant (skew) of the vertical side for the horizontal
side of paper as shown in the figure.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
5) Open the front cover, and turn the four LSU image skew B-main A-main
adjustment screws in the same direction by the same degree.
A-sub Color image shift

A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Rough adjustment)
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the F

side and in the R side, note the same print color pattern and
check to confirm that the F side and the R side are in the same
condition.
Fine adjustment pattern check:
Check the square frames on the R side and the F side of each
color. (Normally five sections of high density can be seen.)
Check the sub scanning direction position of the center area of
high density (one of the above five sections). These must be
(Skew adjustment screw rotation direction) on the same position on the R side and the F side.
When C is greater than D in the method 1 or there is some In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check
skew in the direction A in the method 2, turn the screw clock- scale (fine adjustment) as the reference.
wise. Visually check the color density and make the darkest section
When C is smaller than D in the method 1 or there is some as the center, and use it as the read value of the shift amount.
skew in the direction B in the method 2, turn the screw coun- Check that the difference in the center position of the dark den-
terclockwise. sity section is within +/-1 step.
(Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment
screw)

The positional relations of the front and the rear frame of the
print color patterns of a same color are compared. There is no
need that all the colors are in the same state. Compare only
Rear pattern
the positional relations of color patterns of a same color.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
8) Turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of the adjustment target
color to adjust.
Center pattern
(Skew adjustment screw rotation direction)
When the F side is skewed to the right side for R side: Turn the
screw clockwise.
When the F side is skewed to the left side for the R side: Turn
the screw counterclockwise.
Front pattern
(Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment
screw)
Skew of difference by one step between F and R sides (Differ- Reference arrow mark
ence by one scale of the fine adjustment check scale) / Turn
for about 2 clicks. 4) Check the color image registration.
Repeat the procedures 7) to 8) until a satisfactory result is There are 6 color image registration patterns in total; two on
obtained. each of the F side, the R side, and the center. Check all the
patterns to confirm that they are within the specified range.
3-C Color registration offset adjustment Also check to confirm that there is not much shift in each color
(No need to adjust normally) image registration check pattern.
This adjustment is used to set the offset value for the automatic NOTE: There are two kinds of adjustment: one in the main scan-
color registration adjustment (ADJ3A). ning direction and the other in the sub scanning direction.
If there is any difference in color phase at the center and the four The vertical direction in the above figure is that in the main
corners of an actual print image, this adjustment may improve it. scanning direction, and the horizontal direction is that in the
Especially when there is any color shift at the center area, this sub scanning direction.
adjustment may improve it effectively. For the main scan direction image registration, the offset on the F
This adjustment cannot eliminate color shifts in all the areas, but side, the R side, and at the center is independently adjusted.
average the overall color shifts. If there is a difference in the sub scanning direction image registra-
After the automatic adjustment, use this color registration offset tion between the F and R sides, perform the skew adjustment (ADJ
adjustment to correct color shift partially, performing the adjustment 4A).
efficiently.
X2 X1
NOTE:
Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, check to confirm that the fol- scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame)
lowing adjustment has been properly made. B-sub
* ADJ3A or ADJ3B image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
[Kinds of adjustment values]

Y2
There are following two kinds of registration adjustment values.

• Base registration adjustment value: XXX(FRONT)/XXX(REAR)
They are manual adjustment values and automatic adjustment B-main A-main
values, and reflected when the automatic registration adjustment
is executed. It varies for every operation of the automatic regis-
Y1
tration adjustment.
• Offset adjustment values: OFFSETXXF/OFFSETXXR
They are the offset adjustment values added to the above base
registration adjustment values, and are not changed unless
A-sub
SIM50-20 is executed to change. Color image shift
A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section
1) Enter SIM50-20 mode. A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Rough adjustment)
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it. B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern
The color image registration check pattern is printed.

Check the print patterns of the rough adjustment and the fine
adjustment of 18 check patterns.
How to check the fine adjustment pattern and input of the
adjustment value:
Check to confirm that the darkest spot (one of 5 spots seen nor-
mally) is within the center area of the image registration adjustment
reference frame in the square frame.
At that time, use the color image registration check scale (fine
adjustment) as the reference.
Visually check and consider the darkest section of color density as
the center, and measure the shift from it.

Check to confirm that the center of the dark density section is within
Adjustment Default
+/- 1 step. Display/Item Content
value range value
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is in the range of 0 +/- 1 for the A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
fine adjustment reference pattern scale, there is no need to adjust.) (FRONT) value (Main scanning
If shift is in the arrow mark X1 and Y1, increase the adjustment direction) (Cyan) (F side)
value. If shift is in the arrow mark X2 and Y2, decrease the adjust- B CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
ment value. (REAR) value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
(Reference adjustment value)
C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
1 scale/2 (When the set value is changed by 1, shift is made by 1 (FRONT) value (Main scanning
scale.) direction) (Magenta) (F side)
D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(REAR) value (Main scanning
If there is a considerable difference in color shift in the square and
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
at the center area, perform the adjustment.
E YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
Select an adjustment item (OFF SET X F / OFF SET X R / OFF (FRONT) value (Main scanning
SET X S), and change the adjustment value to adjust. direction) (Yellow) (F side)
OFF SET X F: F side main scanning direction registration offset set F YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
value (The color shift on the F side and at the center area is (REAR) value (Main scanning
changed.) direction) (Yellow) (R side)
G CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
OFF SET X D: R side main scanning direction registration offset set
(SUB) value (Sub scanning
value (The color shift on the R side and at the center area is direction) (Cyan)
changed.) H MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
OFF SET X S: Sub scanning direction registration offset set value (SUB) value (Sub scanning
(Color is shifted to the sub scanning direction overall.) direction) (Magenta)
I YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
CAUTION: When the adjustment value of OFF SET X F and OFF
(SUB) value (Sub scanning
SET X R are changed, the color at the center area will direction) (Yellow)
be affected. Consider this when executing the adjust- J OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
ment. CF adjustment value (Main
(Adjustment conditions and method) scanning direction) (Cyan)
(F side)
To adjust evenly overall, adjust so that the color shifts on the F side,
K OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
the R aide and at the center are of the same level.
CR adjustment value (Main
To adjust with the center area most focused, adjust so that the color scanning direction) (Cyan)
shift at the center becomes smaller than that on the F side and the (R side)
R side. L OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
MF adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Magenta)
When the offset adjustment value is 0, if the color registration
(F side)
adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed, the color shift on
M OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
the F side and that on the R side are automatically adjusted to be MR adjustment value (Main
smaller than that on the center area. scanning direction) (Magenta)
(R side)
N OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
YF adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Yellow)
(F side)
O OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
YR adjustment value (Main
(R side)
P OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
CS adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) (Cyan)
Q OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
MS adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) (Magenta)
R OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
YS adjustment value (Sub

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion side of the scanner unit B.
adjustment
(Document table mode)
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scan-
ner unit A from the drive wire.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
4-B Scan image (main scanning direction) frame side.
distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
L scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is 7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
completed.) ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ4C Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit).
4-C Scan image distortion adjustment

(Whole scanner unit)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform adjusted with ADJ4A and ADJ4B related to the scan image distor-
the following procedure. tion adjustment.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
and right-hand side images distortions. adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
Lc Lc the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
A A A
A

When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise.
adjustment (DSPF mode)
When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is more than
1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear
5-A DSPF parallelism adjustment frame counterclockwise.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Repeat steps 2) to 3) until an acceptable result is obtained.
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. 4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of
* When a DSPF JAM is generated. the main unit.
* When a skew is generated in the document feed operation.
* When there is a distortion (skew) in the scan image in the DSPF
unit.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
glass holding resin surface.
5-B DSPF skew adjustment

(Front surface mode)
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
and the clearance B is 0mm (in contact). duplex print mode.
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3). SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
1mm
back sides of the paper.
A
A Paper pass direction
0mm
B
3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level.

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right

a b
side of the DSPF rear frame.
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.
0 - 1.0mm
A [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the

left]
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew
adjusting screw.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.
Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the

5-C DSPF skew adjustment
back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)." (Back surface mode)
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side, This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
then do step 3). * The DSPF section has been disassembled.
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments. * When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
ĭ Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
duplex print mode.
Ĭ SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.

3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover.
A Paper pass direction
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to

A B adjust.
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
[Check Method 2] A B
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
1.0mm.

0 - 1.0mm left]
If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A
counterclockwise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
A right]
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise,
or turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper
balance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turn-
ing the adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not
turn the adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjust-
ment screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the
front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)."
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
procedures of step 3) or later.

9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment CCD unit base as shown below.
6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table

mode/DSPF front surface mode)
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. NOTE: This procedure must be executed also when the CCD
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below. unit is replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.

Go to the copy mode, and make a copy. NOTE: Never loosen the screws marked with X.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale If any one of these screws is loosened, the position
length in terms of length. and the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main to cause a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the
scanning direction from the following formula. market. In that case, the whole scanner unit must be
replaced.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100% 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
copy image. CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1 One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
100mm scale in procedure 9).
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
1.0mm
B
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than
the original)
A
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures. 12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
7) Remove the document table glass. If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/-
8) Remove the dark box cover. 0.5%, repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is
satisfied.

NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula- 6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification direction) to change the installing position.
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.5%) When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti- CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
cal system structure. than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
6-B Image focus adjustment scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
(DSPF back surface mode) * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: in procedure 4).
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
adjusted.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws, and remove the transport
PG upper. A
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.

If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/-
0.5%, repeat the procedures of 4) - 6) until the condition is sat-
isfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.5%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the cal system structure.
CCD unit base as shown below.
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws (4 pcs.).
* Never loosen the screws marked with ✕.

Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust-
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
the entire scanner unit.

(3) Copy color balance and density check
ADJ 7 Color balance/density CAUTION: Before checking the copy color balance and density, be
adjustment sure to execute the following jobs.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
(1) Note before execution of the color balance/density
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
adjustment
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
* Requisite conditions before execution of the color balance/den-
sity adjustment Method 1
Before execution of the color balance/density adjustment, check Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
to insure that the adjustments which affect the color balance/den- of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
sity have been completed properly. 0326FC11), and check that they are proper.
The importance levels of them are shown below. a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check
in the color copy mode
Since the following items affect the color balance/density
directly, they must be adjusted or set before execution of the To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
image quality adjustments. chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density
1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make
Job a copy.
Adjustment item Simulation
No At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user
ADJ Print engine image distortion adjustment / OPC drum 50-20/22 adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
3 phase adjustment / Color registration adjustment In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
Though the following items affect the color balance/density, To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-
there is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a 0162FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/
trouble occurs, they must be checked and adjusted. Printed Photo mode (Manual).
1) The following items must be adjusted properly. In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
Job
Adjustment item Simulation Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
No
ADJ Adjust the ADJ Adjust the developing In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
1 developing unit 1A doctor gap the following conditions.
ADJ Adjust the developing CAUTION: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
1B roller main pole position
chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
ADJ Toner density control 25-2
1C reference value setting (Color copy)
Patch 1 is
ADJ High voltage ADJ Adjust the main charger 8-2 slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
2 adjustment 2A grid voltage SHARP GRAY CHART

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
ADJ Adjust the developing 8-1
2B bias voltage
ADJ Transfer current/voltage 8-6
2C adjustment
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment 48-1 Patch 2 is copied.
6
(Black-and-white copy)
Note for the color balance/density check and adjustments Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
• For the color balance adjustments, be sure to use the paper SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
specified for color (recommended paper).
Note that, if another kind of paper is used for the color balance
adjustment, proper image qualities (color balance, density) may
not be obtained.
• When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.

the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to pre-
Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/
vent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far
UKOG-0326FC11)
as possible.
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
(2) Relationship between the servicing job contents and the
check to insure the following conditions.
color balance/density check and adjustment
(Color copy)
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the color balance/
density check and adjustment depend on the machine status and Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
the servicing conditions.

Follow the flowchart of the color balance/density adjustment proce-
dures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following four, major cases.
1) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
2) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
The densities of patches 1 - 6 of Patch 7 is slightly
(When a consumable part is replaced.) each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.
3) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.

(Without replacement of a consumable part)

Color copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) The color difference in gray balance between the F and the R
2) Registrations (one point for the main scanning, and one point sides is not so great.
for the sub scanning) are not shifted. 5) There are no white and black streaks.
3) The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) can be seen. 6) Color texts are clearly reproduced.
7) The background density is not so light.
Void Void
Resolution Resolution
Color difference in gray balance between the F and the R sides

No white and black streaks
Background density
Resolution Registration
Void Void
Color text reproduction capability

Resolution
Resolution
Void Void

Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) There are no white and black streaks.
2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen. 5) The background density is not so light.
3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so 6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
great.
Void Void
Density difference between the F and the R sides.

No white and black streaks
Resolution
Void Void
Low-density gradation
Background density
Void Void

Method 2 Method 2
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance adjustment sheet, and Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
check each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the black compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
patch in order to confirm that the color balance adjustment is black patch to check the color balance.
proper or not more precisely.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low High Low density High density

density density
Y
Y
M
M
C
C
Bk
Bk
CMY
CMY blend
blend A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is copied.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is reversed.
proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural Patch B may not be copied.
gray color balance by the color table in an actual copy mode.
Patch A must not be copied.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.)
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
(4) Printer color balance/density check proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
CAUTION: Before checking the copy color balance and the density, color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
be sure to execute the following procedures in advance. DEF 1.)
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) 7-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
Method 1 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. * When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
print test pattern is printed. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
• Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
• Check to confirm that the SIT chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) are free
from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.

(2) Adjustment procedures SET 1 Color balance adjustment target setup
1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the a. General
reference position on the left rear frame side of the document When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
table.
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
Set the chart in order that the arrow mark is placed on the left
There are following three kinds of the target.
side.
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
• Service color balance (gamma) target
• User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
This setting is required in the following cases.
* When the color balance and density adjustments are executed
manually (SIM46-21) (SIM67-25)
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
SET 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup

Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjust-
ment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user's desired
target level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
balance target. The above registration (setting)
is made by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to
adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to
register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
color balance adjustment is also changed.
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color
method using the SIT chart. balance is set to the factory color balance target
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. set with SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, setting) of the color balance is same as the
factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
color reproduction (DEF1))
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) (gamma) target When the service color balance
target target is changed, this color balance target is
also changed accordingly.

Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three target (DEF1) = Service color balance
target Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3) Factory color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
= Service color balance
target (The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-74/46-24)

By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM63-8

Factory color balance target
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance
Hue (DEF1) target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

SIM63-8
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
ment ((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). the purpose of registration
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. When, customized with SIM 46-21.
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
same balance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 63- required.
11.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
46-74/46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is CAUTION: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for
changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
printing the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is
revised.

It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
with SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the 64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
same color balance target to another machine. printed pattern is normal.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. (When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
from discoloration and dirt. [EXECUTE] key to print.)
The service color balance target data is registered immediately A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21. machine can be used.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color (adjustment pattern).
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
The accuracy of the service color balance target data can be cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
judges as follows. 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
the service color balance target in SIM 46-74/46-24 is unsatisfac-
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
tory or abnormal.
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
adjustment (Auto) may be improper. (KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - P
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
judged as abnormal.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously 7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
a. Setting procedure
get.
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
the service color balance target)
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(adjustment pattern). CAUTION: This procedure must not be executed when the copy
color balance was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique
CAUTION: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for color balance requested by the user and it was regis-
printing the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21. tered as the service color balance target with SIM 63-7.
When the factory color balance target is changed with
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment SIM 63-11, be sure to execute this procedure.
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an 1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
3) Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
3) Press [SETUP] key. the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly ance as the factory color balance target.
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ7C (2)) on the docu-
ment table.
SET 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup

Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to
balance (gamma) select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which emphasizes color
target reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance (gamma) balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman with SIM
target 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color balance
target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM 67-28 is
executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory color
balance target.
C User color balance Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this color balance
(gamma) target target is also changed accordingly.

Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
Color balance target in the printer color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

target (DEF1)
= Service color balance
target
Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Execute SIM 67-28.
target (DEF3) Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 - 3) = Service color balance
target
(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM67-28 Factory color balance target (DEF1)

Factory color balance target = Service color balance target/Color
(DEF1) balance target for theuser color
Hue balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
ĩłĪ operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
table in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table
Direction in an actual copy mode and print is made.
of Red
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

(DEF3) SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the printer color balance This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). customized with SIM 67-25.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. When, required.
however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
same balance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 67- ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
26. to register the service color balance target data by use of the
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment printed adjustment pattern.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in CAUTION: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM printing the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
46-74/67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created
Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
with SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
the purpose of registration same color balance target to another machine.

It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
discoloration and dirt. the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
The service color balance target data is basically registered imme- CAUTION: This procedure must not be executed when the copy
diately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25. color balance was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- color balance requested by the user and it was regis-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the tered as the service color balance target with SIM 67-
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color 27.
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. When the factory color balance target is changed with
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. SIM 67-26, be sure to execute this procedure.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judged as follows.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or
3) Press [YES] key.
abnormal.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
adjustment (Auto) may be improper. the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was 7-B Copy/Printer color balance and density
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously. (Basic adjustment)
a. Setting procedure * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as replaced.
the service color balance target) * When the CCD unit is replaced.
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
(adjustment pattern).
CAUTION: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
printing the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an a. General
adjustment. SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode. density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
3) Press [SETUP] key.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ7E (2)) on the docu-
this mode.
ment table.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
machine can be used.
the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. 24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
(adjustment pattern). ment individually.
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal- The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the Black automatically.
service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. of all the copy/printer modes are revised.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - P
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.

b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ8B Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (automatic adjustment). (SIM46-74)
(Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment))
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
(Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM63-11/63-8)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*2) NO
Press [EXECUTE] key. (Execute the halftone image correction.)

Though the FACTORY
color balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds)
Cancel SIM46-74.
is changed, satisfactory
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result. are not obtained
(SIM63-11), or the
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text SERVICE target is
selected.
/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density.
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color YES
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
Execute ADJ8C(2) (Copy color balance and density

adjustment) (Manual adjustment).
Are the color balance and density NO
(SIM46-21/44-21/63-7) (*3)
at the specified level? *1:
When the color balance and
YES density are customized and
Execute ADJ10E(1) (Printer color balance and registered as the SERVICE
density adjustment) (Automatic adjustment). target, select the SERVICE
(SIM67-24) target.
*2:
NO Is the PCL printer If the initial setting of the
function provided? Automatic color balance target change
halftone image correction is
not properly adjusted,
Change the color balance and density target.
satisfactory color balance and
(SIM67-26/67-28)
YES density cannot be obtained. In
NO this case, check the print
engine for any problems.
Check the printer color balance and density adjustment result with the self print *3:
check pattern. Though the FACTORY If satisfactory color balance and
color balance and density density are not obtained with
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print target (available in 3 ADJ8C(2) (Copy color balance
check pattern, and check the printer check pattern, and check the printer kinds) is changed, and density adjustment) (Manual
color balance and density. color balance and density. satisfactory color balance adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21),
and density are not check the print engine for any
obtained (SIM67-26), or
problems.
the SERVICE target is
selected. *4:
Are the color balance NO If there is any streak or unclear
and density at the copy on the printed check
specified level? YES pattern, check the print engine
for any problems.
YES
Execute ADJ8E(2) (Printer color balance
End and density adjustment)
(Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25/67-27)

1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. procedure 5) on the document table.
The high density process control is performed, and the copy Place the color patch image so that the fine lines are on the left
color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. side. At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
(A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) color patch image (adjustment pattern).
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, PRINTER CALIBRATION
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
7) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.

When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key. balance, select the [SERVICE] target.
When the color balance is customized by the manual color bal- The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request, performed and the color balance check patch image is printed
and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service out.
target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
[SERVICE] target. tern, check the print engine for any problems.
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
and prints the color balance check patch image.
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat- PRINTER CALIBRATION
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
Low density High density

;
/
Low High
density density
%
Y
$M
M
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
C
Bk 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q 3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-

played. Press [OK] key.
The initial setting of the halftone image correction is per-
formed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,
The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed press it.
out. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically The halftone image correction is performed.
selected.)

10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
adjustment operation is completed. 7-C Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)
Cancel SIM46-74. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
CAUTION: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the
replaced.
both adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer
mode are completed. * The CCD unit has been replaced.
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
(automatic adjustment) is performed and the simulation * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
is canceled, the adjustment result is invalid. * U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
11) Check the copy color balance and density. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
check.) * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in 7-C (1)
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
Copy color balance and density adjustment
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
(Automatic adjustment)
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 8C a. General
(2)). The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not Black automatically.
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
8C (2)). of all the copy modes are revised.
12) Check the printer color balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
check.) ment.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained 1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in is used.)
procedure 7), change the factory color balance target with SIM 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
67-26 and execute SIM67-28 and repeat the procedures from mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
1).
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is reduce the number of service calls.
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man- If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 8E (2)).
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
work effectively.
8E (2)).
If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even lem occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained,
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
may be another cause.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
understood.
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

b. Adjustment procedure
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ8C(1) Copy color balance and density adjustment

(automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

(Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the

FACTORY target or the SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is
automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*3) Automatic color balance target change
Cancel SIM46-24 Change the color balance and

density target. (SIM63-11/63-8)
Check the color balance and density adjustment result. NO
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a

copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color bal- Though the
ance and density. FACTORY color
balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds)
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the is changed, satisfactory color
patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color bal- balance and density are not
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.) obtained (SIM63-11),
or the SERVICE
target is selected.
Are the color balance and den- NO YES

sity at the satisfactory level?
Execute ADJ8C(2) (Manual copy color

YES balance and density adjustment).
(SIM46-21/44-21/63-7).(*2)
Check that the initial setting of the halftone image correction was properly
performed. (*3) *1:
When the copy color balance and density are
customized and registered as the SERVICE
Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction. target, select the SERVICE target.
(SIM44-21) *2:
If satisfactory color balance and density are
not obtained with ADJ8C(2) (Manual copy
Execute the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26) color balance and density adjustment)
(SIM46-21/44-21), check the print engine for
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) any problems.
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check *3:
the color balance and density. If the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be
obtained. In this case, check the print engine
NO for any problems.
Are the color balance and den-
*4:
sity at the satisfactory level?
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print engine
YES for any problems.
End

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
automatically selected.) ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table. MODE" is displayed.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed 6) Check the color balance and density.
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density
check.)
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color
balance and density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance and density check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key. be another cause.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained from
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in proce-
balance, select the service target. dure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM 63-11 and
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed repeat the procedures from 1).
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is not
operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed. obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 46-21) (ADJ7C (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to execute
the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained,
perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ7C(2)).
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even

Low High
density density after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
Y may be another cause.
M repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
C
7-C (2)
Bk
Copy color balance and density adjustment
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
(Manual adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of CMYK. This is used at the following situ-
ation. When the result of auto adjustment described above is not
existing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is
required. When there is request from the user for changing (cus-
tomizing) the color balance.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
This manual adjustment is executed only for the color patch which
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
halftone image correction is performed.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
NOTE:
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.

#OPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT -ANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

FLOWCHART 3)-
3TART
%XECUTE !$*# #OPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT

-ANUAL ADJUSTMENT
%NTER THE 3)- MODE AND SELECT ! X PAPER
!UTOMATIC SELECTION
0RESS ;%8%#54%= KEY

4HE ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN IS PRINTED
2EFER TO THE PRINTED ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN AND SELECT A

TARGET ADJUSTMENT COLOR WITH THE COLOR KEYS # - 9 +
3ELECT A TARGET ADJUSTMENT LEVEL WITH THE SCROLL KEY
%NTER THE ADJUSTMENT VALUE WITH KEY
0RESS ;%8%#54%= KEY

4HE ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN IS PRINTED
#HECK THE PATCH COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY IN THE PROCESS

GRAY OF THE COLOR BALANCE CHECK PATTERN )F THE GRAY COLOR IS
SLIGHTLY SHIFTED TO -AGENTA THE COLOR BALANCE IS PROPERLY
ADJUSTED
!RE THE COLOR BALANCE ./

AND DENSITY AT THE SATI
SFACTORY LEVEL
9%3
#ANCEL THE 3)- MODE
0ERFORM THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONE IMAGE CORRECTION

3)-
#HECK THE COPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT RESULT WITH THE
TEST CHART
5SE THE TEST CHART 5+/' &#::5+/' &#
TO MAKE A COPY IN THE 4EXT0RINTED 0HOTO MODE AND CHECK
THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
!RE THE COLOR BALANCE ./

AND DENSITY AT THE SATI
SFACTORY LEVEL
9%3
#HECK TO CONFIRM THAT THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONE IMAGE CORRECTION IS
PROPERLY SET
0ERFORM THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONE IMAGE CORRECTION

3)-
0ERFORM THE HALFTONE IMAGE CORRECTION 3)-
5SE THE TEST CHART 5+/' &#::5+/' &#

TO MAKE A COPY IN THE 4EXT0RINTED 0HOTO MODE AND CHECK
THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
)F SATISFACTORY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ARE NOT
OBTAINED WITH THE ADJUSTMENT CHECK THE PRINT
ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
./ !RE THE COLOR BALANCE
AND DENSITY AT THE SATI )F THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONE IMAGE
SFACTORY LEVEL CORRECTION IS NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED SATISFACTORY
COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY CANNOT BE OBTAINED )N
9%3 THIS CASE CHECK THE PRINT ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
3ET THE 3%26)#% TARGET FOR THE AUTOMATIC COPY COLOR

BALANCE ADJUSTMENT 3)-
%ND

1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. 6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is 0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
automatically selected.) ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the halftone
If not, execute the following procedures. image correction.)
NOTE:
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment
data as the reference data for the halftone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ7C (2) (Color balance
adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this
procedure.
Low High
density density When ADJ7C (1) (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed
; with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
/ (Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
%
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
$M 9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
CMY ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance/density check.)
1) The max. density section is not blurred. If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied. specified level, there may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK from the beginning.
The patch density is changed gradually. NOTE:
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter color balance as the service target.
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
not be reversed.
required.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
level.
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
Patch B may not be copied. the next color balance adjustment.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
target is DEF 1.)
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.

7-D Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjust-
ments ADJ7B and ADJ7C or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-01 Color copy density adjustment (for each   - - - - - - - -
color copy mode) (separately for the low-
density area and the high-density area)
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for - -   - - - - - -
each monochrome copy mode) (separately
for the low-density area and the high-density
area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density - - - -   - - - -
adjustment (for each mode)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image - - - - - -   - -
density adjustment (for each mode)
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance - - - -   - - - -
adjustment (separately for the low-density
area and the high-density area)
46-09 DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density          -
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-10 Color copy color balance, gamma   - - - - - - - -
adjustment (for each color copy mode)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma - -   - - - - - -
adjustment (for each monochrome copy
mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) - -  - - -  -  -
mode document density scanning operation
(exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-21 Copy color balance and density adjustment     - - - - - -
(Manual adjustment)
46-23 Copy high density image density     - - - - - -
reproduction setting (Normally unnecessary
to the setting change)
46-24 Copy color balance and density adjustment     - - - - - -
(Automatic adjustment)
46-25 Copy color balance adjustment (Single color -  - - - - - - - -
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-26 Single color copy mode color balance -  - - - - - - - -
default setting
46-27 Color copy, text, line image reproduction   - - - - - - - -
adjustment (edge gamma, density
adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
46-30 Copy mode sub scanning direction   - - - - - - - -
resolution setting
46-32 Document low density image density - -  - - -  -  -
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
46-36 2-color (red, black) copy mode fine color -  - - - - - - - -
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color - -   - -    
document reproduction adjustment
46-38 Color copy mode dark area gradation (black   - - - - - - - -
component quantity) adjustment
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment - - - - - - - -  -
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment - - - - - - - -  -
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)

Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE
Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
(Normal text mode)
(Fine text mode)
(Super fine mode)
(Ultra fine mode)
(600dpi mode)
(RGB_RIP)
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send          
image (JPEG) compression ratio setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting
change)
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy     - - - - - -
mode heavy paper and the image process
mode (dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode     - - - - - 
heavy paper and the image process mode
(dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for     - - - - - 
each dither (Automatic adjustment) (No
need to adjust normally)
46-55 Dropout color setting - - - - - - -  - -
46-58 Pseudo resolution UP function setting     - - - - - -
46-59 Pseudo resolution UP function adjustment     - - - - - 
46-60 Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness          
46-61 Area separation recognition level          -
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image         - -
process, automatic exposure mode
operation conditions setting (Normally
unnecessary to the setting change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density         - -
adjustment (for each mode)
46-65 Color correction table setting   - - - - - - - 
46-66 Watermark adjustment     - - - - - -
46-74 Printer/Copy color balance and density     - - - - - 
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment)
46-90 High-compression PDF image process - - - -   - - - -
operation setting (Normally unnecessary to
the setting change)
46-91 Black text emphasis fine adjustment - - - -   - - - -

Setting Default
7-D (1) Item/Display Content
range value
Color copy density adjustment (for each V TWO COLOR 2-color LOW 1 - 99 50
color copy mode) (separately for the low- (COPY TO COPY) (red/black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
density area and the high-density area) (copy document)
(No need to adjust normally) 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually. mode and change the adjustment value.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
copy by each the copy mode individually.
density is decreased.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
copy mode individually.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
* When there is request from the user.
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50 7-D (2)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Monochrome copy density adjustment
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 (for each monochrome copy mode)
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(separately for the low-density area and the
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 high-density area)
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 (No need to adjust normally)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 * When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
HIGH 1 - 99 50 copy by each the copy mode individually.
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 * When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
HIGH 1 - 99 50 copy mode individually.
I TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 * When there is request from the user.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
Setting
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 Display/Item Content Default
range
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) (COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
R LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) (COPY TO COPY) document)
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
U TWO COLOR 2-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(red/black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50

When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is 7-D (4)
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy Monochrome copy density, gamma
density is decreased.
adjustment (for each monochrome copy
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
mode) (No need to adjust normally)
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each
density level in each monochrome copy mode.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. * When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode.
7-D (3) 1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode.
Color copy color balance, gamma 2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
adjustment (for each color copy mode) key.
(No need to adjust normally) Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default
This adjustment is used to execute the color balance adjustment (Point) value range
for each density level in each color copy mode. A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
* When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
by each the copy mode individually.
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
* When there is request from the user. F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode. G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key. H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
key. J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
key.
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
Density level Adjustment N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
Item/Display Default O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 sity is decreased.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 adjusted.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500 That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 printed out.
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
practical to make a copy and check it.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal-
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. ance and the density for each density level (point).
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is 4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den- Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
sity is decreased. mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal
with the color keys are collectively adjusted. copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed out. 7-D (5)
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal- Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
ance and the density for each density level (point). mode document density scanning
6) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. operation (exposure operation) conditions
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy setting (Normally no need to set)
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.

When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu- Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
ment, change the setting. When the density of the document of the read area is light, output
This setting is required in the following cases. image density is increased by control. When the density of the doc-
ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased
* When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
automatic copy mode. by control.
* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied. Document table/DSPF mode
* When a document with colored background is copied.
1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode. 3 to 7mm
2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
"PART", in some cases.
Display/Item Content Set value Default

AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE1 AE WIDTH = FULL
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/PRESCAN
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
ON/OFF
Stop (for FAX)
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for scanner) STOP/PRESCAN
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting Document table mode
NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL 3 to 7mm
PART
NOTE:
100mm
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2: Normal gamma
STOP: AE WIDTH = PART
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
decides the output image density according to the density of that
part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)
REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides
the output image density according to the density of each part of
the document. (The output image density may be not constant at
whole area.) DSPF mode
PRESCAN:
Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out- 3 to 7mm
put image density is determined according to the average of the
scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
surface.)
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE 100mm AE WIDTH = PART
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
Document density detection area

Set
7-D (6) Display/Item Content Default
value
Document low density image density H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
reproduction adjustment in the automatic TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed photo
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, Text 1-9 5
(No need to adjust normally) (Background (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
density adjustment in the scanning section) J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
density in monochrome auto copy mode. (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text/Printed photo 1-9 5
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density M COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
image of the document. PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
* When there is request from the user. N COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
O COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 5
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key. TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. P COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
ground and the low density image is decreased. background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
Setting Default ground and the low density image is decreased.
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196 7-D (8)
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
Color copy, text, line image reproduction
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) adjustment (edge gamma, density
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196 (No need to adjust normally)
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
Adjustment 1
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally.
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface) With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 lines can be varied.
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode
(manual).
7-D (7) * When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be
Copy/Scan low density image density changed.
adjustment (for each mode) * When there is request from the user.
(No need to adjust normally) 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den- 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
sity area in the copy/scanner mode.
Adjust-
This adjustment is required in the following cases. Display/Item
Content ment Default
(Copy mode)
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the range
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
image of the document. (SLOPE) skew adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode. C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. (SLOPE) skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
Set (INTERCEPT) adjustment
Display/Item Content Default
value E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma skew 1 - 99 50
A COLOR COPY : Text/Printed photo 1-9 3 (SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3 (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5 When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy) gamma at the line edge section is changed.
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3 When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust-
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
line edge is decreased.
(color copy)

When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are
increased, the image density at the line edge section is 7-D (9)
increased, and vice versa. Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color
4) Press [OK] key. document reproduction adjustment
5) Make a copy in color text/printed photo copy mode (manual), (No need to adjust normally)
check the copy. Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char- image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
acter and line image. image in monochrome copy mode.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27 This adjustment is required in the following cases.
mode and change the adjustment value. * When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
obtained. monochrome copy mode.
Adjustment 2 1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
the Text/Map copy mode.
Display/Item Adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases. Content Default
(Copy mode) range
* To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy A R/G Gray making setting (R/G) 0 - 99 21
mode images. B B/G Gray making setting (B/G) 0 - 99 0
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
Adjust- value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
Display/Item
Content ment Default When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,
(Copy mode)
range copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
(SLOPE) skew adjustment
4) Press [OK] key.
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment 5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 (manual), check the copy.
(SLOPE) skew adjustment If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50 mode and change the adjustment value.
(INTERCEPT) adjustment Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma skew 1 - 99 50 obtained.
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
7-D (10)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. Color copy mode dark area gradation (black
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is component quantity) adjustment
changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode.
increased, and vice versa.
(except character and line image)
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
changes.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in the color Text/Map copy mode (manual), and
* When reproduction as solid of black image is required.
check the output print.
* To make the black background and the dark area darker
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the
adjustment value. * When change of gradation of the shade part is required.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. * When there is request from the user.

2) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
key.
Display/Item (Copy mode) Select button Content Default

MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text/Printed NORMAL
(-) LUT1 photo
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph NORMAL
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
TEXT PHOTO (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL
(-) LUT1 Photograph
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text Printed
(+) LUT1 photo
(Manual)
(+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
TEXT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Printed photo
(+) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT2
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light NORMAL
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 document
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
AUTO AUTO (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
4) Press the black ingredient amount select button.

When reproduction as solid of black image is required:
Selects + button
When there is desire to darken copy of black image:
Selects + button
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black:
Selects + button
5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode
and change the adjustment value.

7-D (11)
* When changing the sharpness of copy image in copy mode.
Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness (obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
adjustment (No need to adjust normally) * When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color shade part (for decrease of asperity)
copy mode. * To make the black background and the dark area darker.
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image * To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
shade part.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

A SCREEN FILTER H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto) Apply to auto copy
LEVEL L image in auto copy mode Soft emphasis 2 mode only
AUTO Auto 3
B CPY AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for copy/push SOFT 1 2 (CENTER) Apply to copy/push
FILTER LEVEL CENTER scan/FAX mode CENTER 2 scan/FAX mode
HIGH HIGH 3
C CPY PUSH AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2 (CENTER) Apply to auto push
FILTER LEVEL CENTER push scan mode (color Text, Printed Photo / CENTER 2 scan mode only
HIGH Printed Photo images) HIGH 3
D COLOR COPY : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) Available for the
CMY ON in color copy mode ON 1 high density image
E COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color OFF 0 1 (ON) except text and line
ON copy mode ON 1 image
F SINGLE COLOR : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON)
When setting ON,
CMY ON in single color copy mode ON 1
smoothness in the
G 2 COLOR COPY : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) image shade part
CMY ON in 2-color copy mode ON 1 improves by
H 2 COLOR COPY : OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color OFF 0 1 (ON) applying soft filter.
K ON copy mode ON 1 (asperity
I B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON) decreases)
ON copy mode ON 1
J COLOR PUSH : OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
RGB ON scan color mode ON 1
K B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1
L COLOR PRINT: OFF Soft filter applying setting to C,M,Y image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
CMY ON color print mode ON 1
M COLOR PRINT: K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON color print mode ON 1
N B/W PRINT OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON print mode ON 1
3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter

process mode).
• Adjustment item A:
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
numeric value to decrease moire.
• Adjustment item B, C:
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce
moire.
• Adjustment item D - N:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy and check the copy image.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

7-D (12) 7-D (13)
Copy high density image density Copy color balance adjustment
reproduction setting (Normally (Single color copy mode)
unnecessary to the setting change) (No need to adjust normally)
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, the single color copy mode to the user's request.
change the setting. The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are color.
case of following, change the setting. This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. is a request from the user.
* When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
high density. required in the following cases.
* When there is request from the user. * When it is required to change the color balance in the single
a. Adjustment procedure color copy mode.
1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode. * When there is request from the user.
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. a. Adjustment procedure
Setting
Display/Item Content Default 2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
range
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0 3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
(0:ENABLE density correction mode 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
1:DISABLE) Enable
1 CMY engine maximum Default
Display/Item Adjustment range
density correction mode C M Y
Disable A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B K 0 K engine maximum density 0-1 1 B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
(0: ENABLE correction mode Enable C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine maximum density D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
correction mode DIsable E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500 F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
TARGET maximum density correction
G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
correction
J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
E YELLOW Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
MAX TARGET YELLOW maximum density K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
correction L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20
TARGET BLACK maximum density N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255
correction O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
G RATIO LOW Mix ratio of High density 0 - 100 0
correction (LOW)(1/100) 5) Press [OK] key.
H RATIO HIGH Mix ratio of High density 0 - 100 0 6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
correction (HIGH)(1/100) copy.
I DITHER Dither threshold (LOW) 0 - 255 255 If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
THRESHOLD
J SLOPE Slope threshold (HIGH) 100 - 500
THRESHOLD (1/100) 500 Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B

The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
CAUTION: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F.
If these values are changed, density of the high density
part is changed.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the
copy color balance density adjustment. (Auto adjust-
ment)

5) Make a copy in the DSPF mode and check the copy.
7-D (14)
DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density and change the adjustment value.
adjustment (No need to adjust normally) Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
cases, make changes to the setting:
* When copy in DSPF mode differs from copy in document table 7-D (15)
mode. Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
* When copy density in DSPF mode is low or too high. each dither (Automatic adjustment)
a. General
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled.
This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain
* The CCD unit has been replaced. mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
* U2 trouble has occurred. b. Adjustment procedures
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
a. Adjustment procedure A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
(COPY HIGH)". Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
Setting Default
Item Button Display Content
range value
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side)
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 49
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 49 The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted.
LOW exposure adjustment The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
(Low density side) mality.
5) Press [OK] key.
HIGH (High density side) The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The halftone image correction is performed.
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50 7) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density) Select item
Content
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 (Mode/Image)
SIDEB: R R Heavy Paper *1 Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 heavy paper mode
SIDEB: G G Black Edge Adjustment item (K) to improve the reproduction of lines,
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 text density, and thickness
SIDEB: B B Color Edge Adjustment item (Color) to improve the reproduction of
lines, text density, and thickness
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
In case of increase of image density, input large numeric the monochrome text mode and the map mode.
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small Color Ed Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the text
mode and the map mode.
numeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.

Select item
Content
(Mode/Image)
B/W 600dpi Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome printed photo mode and the
photography mode.
WOVEN1 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark density
in the watermark mode 1
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode,

load paper in the manual paper feed tray.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
In the monochrome mode, only the monochrome pattern is
printed.
9) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image

The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted,
and the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
To complete the adjustment and enable the adjustment result,
press [OK] key.
11) Make a copy, and check the copy image quality.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
check.)
NOTE: Use SIM46-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

7-D (16)
Dropout color adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the range of reproduction of color
document images as monochrome images in the image send mode
(monochrome manual text mode).
In other words, it is used to adjust the level of chroma of color
images which are reproduced as monochrome images.
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to widen the reproduction range.
Setting Default
range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
3) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome

manual text mode) and check the adjustment result.
When black characters When the color section is not

are fainted, Document dropped out,
Decrease the adjustment value. Color dropout Increase the value.
Reproduced
image
SIM value 0 SIM value 6

SIM value 3
(Minimum value) (Maximum value)
(Default)
The reproduction range is widened. The reproduction range is narrowed.
Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black area Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out can be
is outputted clearly. dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.

7-D (17)
Watermark adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
This adjustment is used to adjust the reproduction capability of the is not obtained from the adjustment in the system setting mode.)
watermark in the copy/printer mode.
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result
This adjustment is used for watermark documents (primary output). is not obtained from the adjustment with the printer driver.)
The result of this adjustment affects the result of watermark print
(secondary output).
In the printer mode, the watermark density can be adjusted by the
printer driver. That adjustment is based on the result of this adjust- 2) Select the PATTERN mode, then select an adjustment item in
ment. the following list according to the situation.
NOTE: Normally there is no need to adjust the PATTERN
mode (items K and L), the COPY MODE, and the
POSITION mode.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Description NOTE
range value
A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to increase or
(Color: Black / Adjustment for light decrease the density of the watermark of
images) background documents (primary output).
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 19 To increase the watermark density, increase the
(Color: Black, Density: Standard) adjustment value.
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 23 To decrease the watermark density, decrease the
(Color: Black, Density: Dark) adjustment value.
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 19
(Color: Cyan / Adjustment for light NOTE: When the adjustment value is increased,
images) the watermark area which is originally not
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 23 reproduced becomes difficult to disappear.
(Color: Cyan, Density: Standard) When the adjustment value is decreased,
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 27 the watermark area which is originally
(Color: Cyan, Density: Dark) reproduced becomes easy to disappear.
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 15
(Color: Magenta / Adjustment for
light images)
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 18
(Color: Magenta, Density:
Standard)
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 21
(Color: Magenta, Density: Dark)
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in the watermark
density when the adjustment value of the watermark
print/contrast adjustment in the system setting is
changed by 1.
When this value is increased, the variation is also
increased. When the value is decreased, the
variation is also decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the result of the
contrast adjustment is not reflected.
(* The adjustment value must be set to 1 or greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of watermark Normally
positive copy (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43. set to the
In that case, however, the containing characters of default.
the watermark document (primary output) can be
easily reproduced.
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of watermark
negative copy (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing characters of
the watermark document (primary output) can be
easily reproduced.

Changing adjustment values of adjustment items A - I and
Watermark The watermark color is available in Cyan, Magenta, and
trade off
color Black.
Kinds of Containing Characters embedded in a watermark, such as "COPY
watermarks Adjustment characters INHIBITED," are called containing characters.
(Mode Density values of Kinds of There are two kinds: "Character appearing" and
Effect watermarks "Background appearing."
selected in value adjustment
the watermark items A - I When a watermark of "Character appearing" is copied, the
copy mode) background disappears and the containing characters
Characters Decrease. The adjustment The watermark images appear.
appearing. value is become easy to When a watermark of "Background appearing" is copied,
decreased. disappear. the watermark of the character area disappears and the
The containing containing characters become outline characters.
characters become Principle of A watermark is composed of two dots: fine dots and rough
lighter. watermarks dots.
Increase. The adjustment The containing Since fine dots disappear when copied, they are called
value is characters become disappearing patterns.
increased. darker. Since rough dots remain when copied, they are called
The watermark images remaining patterns.
become difficult to In a watermark of "Character appearing," the background is
disappear. a disappearing pattern and the containing characters are
remaining patterns.
Background Decrease. The adjustment The containing
In a watermark of "Background appearing," the background
appearing. value is characters become easy
is a remaining pattern and the containing characters are
decreased. to disappear.
disappearing patterns.
The watermark images
become easy to NOTE: Watermarks have the following characteristics:
disappear. Note for • A watermark is presumed to be synthesized with text
watermarks documents. If it is used with photos or images, the
Increase. The adjustment The watermark images
containing characters may be seen in the watermark
value is become darker.
document (primary output) or the containing characters
increased. The containing
may not appear properly in the watermark copy
characters become
(secondary output).
difficult to disappear.
• When a watermark is synthesized with newspapers or
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. other dark-background documents, the containing
characters may not appear in the watermark copy
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result. (secondary output).
Descriptions on the watermark • Containing characters may not appear in the watermark
copy (secondary output) depending on the kind of the
Containing copier which makes the watermark copy (secondary
characters output) and the copy mode.
Copy / Print Copy
• Containing characters may not appear clearly in the
watermark copy (secondary output) depending on the
copy mode in which the watermark document (primary
COPY INHIBITED
output) is made.
• When the print engine status changes, the containing
COPY INHIBITED
characters may not be concealed properly in the
watermark document (primary output). In this case,
COPY INHIBITED
follow the procedures below to conceal the containing
characters.
Document Watermark document Watermark copy * Use SIM46-24 to execute the color balance
(Copy document or (Primary output) (Secondary output) adjustment.
Print data) (Copy or Printer output) (This machine or other * Use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance
(This machine) company's machine) adjustment for each dither.
* Adjust the watermark print contrast in the system
setting.
• Though the watermark of cyan or magenta is selected in
the black and white mode, the black watermark is
synthesized.
• For a document which is judged as monochrome with
ACS selected, though the watermark color is specified as
cyan or magenta, the black watermark is synthesized.
• The preview screen of the watermark only indicates the
setting of the watermark color, and does not indicate an
actual copy image.
• When the document control (printer mode) is used
together, it is advisable to use "Characters appearing"
setting. If "Background appearing" setting is used
together, the detection accuracy of document control
may be reduced.
• In the printer mode watermark, setting of 1200dpi and a
watermark cannot be used together.

Watermark adjustment in the system setting
7-E Printer image quality adjustment
System setting - Security setting - Watermark print -
Contrast tab (Basic adjustment)
Requisite condition before execution of the printer color bal-
Watermark kind
Density Adjustment
ance/density adjustment
mode selection
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
Character To increase the Decrease the contrast value.
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
appearing text density (Default: 5)
pleted properly.
To decrease the Increase the contrast value.
text density (Default value: 5)
Background To increase the Increase the contrast value. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
appearing text density (Default value: 5) * Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
To decrease the Decrease the contrast value. ment is required.
text density (Default: 5)
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
CAUTION:
Note for adjusting the watermark with SIM46-54 7-E (1)
When the color balance automatic adjustment is executed with Printer color balance adjustment
SIM46-74 or SIM46-24 but the containing characters are (Automatic adjustment)
reproduced, use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance auto-
a. General
matic adjustment for each dither.
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
However, note the following items. the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
• When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 42, the matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 of SIM46-54.
of all the print modes are revised.
• When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 43, the
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of
WOVEN3 and WOVEN4 of SIM46-54. There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
• WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 must be adjusted in a pair as well
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24
as WOVEN3 and WOVEN4.
is used.)
If it is ignored, the containing characters remain reproduced.
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure

flowchart (SIM67-24)
Start
Execute ADJ8E(1) (Printer color balance and density

adjustment) (Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper.
Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Select the FACTORY target or the SERVICE target,
and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically
Automatic adjustment color balance target change
performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM67-26/67-28)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or
unclear copy. (*4) NO
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone

image correction is automatically performed.) (*2) Though the FACTORY
target (available in 3 kinds) is
Cancel SIM67-24. changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are not
obtained (SIM67-26), or the
SERVICE target is
selected.
NO Is the PCL printer
function provided?
YES
YES
adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25/67-27)
(*3)
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and
density adjustment.
*1:
When the color balance and density are customized and
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print registered as the SERVICE target, select the SERVICE
check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the target.
printer color balance and density. printer color balance and density. *2:
If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
Are the color balance and *3:
NO
density at the satisfactory If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
level? with ADJ8E(2) (Printer color balance and density
adjustment) (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the
print engine for any problems.
*4:
YES
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End

1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
automatically selected.) ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table. MODE" is displayed.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. 6) Check the color balance and density.
check.)
PRINTER CALIBRATION When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ7E (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment
(ADJ7E (2)).
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
7-E (2)
Printer color balance adjustment
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(Manual adjustment)
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's a. General
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color adjust the printer density of C, M, Y and K. This is used at the fol-
balance, select the service target. lowing situation. When the result of auto adjustment described
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine
and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the adjustment is required. When there is request from the user for
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed. changing (customizing) the color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
PRINTER CALIBRATION
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.

NOTE:

b. Adjustment procedure 1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure automatically selected.)
flowchart (SIM67-25)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
Start 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory.
If not, execute the following procedures.
adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection.) PRINTER CALIBRATION
Check the printed adjustment check pattern, Low density High density
and select a target adjustment color with the
color keys (C,M,Y,K). ;
Select a target adjustment density level with the

/
scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. %

$M
CMY
Check the patch color balance and density in the
process gray of the color balance check pattern.
blend
(If the gray color is slightly shifted to Magenta, # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
the color balance is properly adjusted.)
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.

Are the color balance
NO
and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
YES
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
NO Is the PCL printer The density level of each color must be almost at the same
function provided? level.
Patch B may not be copied.
YES
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and
density adjustment.
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
printer color balance and density. printer color balance and density.
adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
the color balance target is DEF 1.)
NO
Are the color balance and
density at the satisfactory
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
level? select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
YES The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
Set the SERVICE target for the density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
automatic printer color balance To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
adjustment. (SIM67-27)
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
End Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
engine for any problems. and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.

6) Check the color balance and density. Setting
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density range
check.) B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE density correction mode
NOTE:
1: DISABLE) Enable
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register 1 K engine maximum
the color balance as the service target. density correction mode
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not Disable
required. C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
correction
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
the next color balance adjustment.
TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
correction
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
7-F Printer image quality adjustment TARGET YELLOW maximum density
(Individual adjustment) correction
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
a. General TARGET BLACK maximum density
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each correction
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the G PRINTER Printer total toner limit set up 0-3 0
basic adjustments ADJ7E (1) and ADJ7E (2) or there is a request TOTAL TONER
from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjust- LIMIT SETUP
ment. H RATIO LOW High density correction blend 0 - 100 33
ratio (LOW)(1/100)
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
I RATIO HIGH High density correction blend 0 - 100 0
ratio (HIGH)(1/100)
7-F (1) J DITHER Dither threshold (LOW) 0 - 255 250
Printer density adjustment THRESHOLD
(Low density section density adjustment) K SLOPE Slope threshold (HIGH)(1/ 100 - 400
THRESHOLD 100) 500
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den- * If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
sity area in the printer mode. The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image. gap is better.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. * In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
* When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density
section, or to reproduce low-density images. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
* When there is request from the user. NOTE: If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed,
1) Enter the SIM 67-36 mode. density of the high density part is changed.
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key. When these values are changed, be sure to perform the
printer color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic
In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
adjustment)
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.
7-F (3)
7-F (2) Printer gamma adjustment for each dither
Printer high density image density (Automatic adjustment)
reproduction setting (Supporting the high (No need to adjust normally)
density section tone gap) a. General
(No need to adjust normally) This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode.
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
density section. and images.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following b. Adjustment procedures
cases, a change of setting must be made. 1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode.
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* To lower the density in the high density section. A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
a. Adjustment procedure The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode. 3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. procedure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
Setting left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
range patch image (adjustment pattern).
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0
(0: ENABLE density correction mode
1:DISABLE) Enable
1 CMY engine maximum
density correction mode
Disable

The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
PRINTER CALIBRATION the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
check.)
NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.
ADJ 8 Manual paper feed tray paper

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. size (width) sensor adjustment
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
mality.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
5) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
Select item 1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
Content
(Mode/Image) 2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the tion.
heavy paper mode
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
Gloss Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
gloss paper mode
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode

A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
8) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern).

PRINTER CALIBRATION [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.

10-A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
display. sensor
The minimum width position detection level of the manual 1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
paper feed guide is recognized. 2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis- With the document cover open, without placing a document on
played. the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are 3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed. [EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
ADJ 9 DSPF tray paper size (width)
sensor adjustment
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting
* The DSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The operation panel has been replaced.
* The DSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).

When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
The maximum width detection level is recognized. again.
4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
as a needle or a pin).
8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
ADJ 12 Fusing paper guide position
The minimum width detection level is recognized. adjustment
When each of the above operations has been completed, the Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations has ing cases, perform this adjustment.
failed, the "ERROR" message appears. * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
paper rear edge section.
ADJ 10 Document size detection 1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws on the two posi-
adjustment tions in the front/rear frame direction.
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* Make sure to shift this paper guide parallel to the standard F/
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced. R fixing position.
* When U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.

1 : ‘17/Apr.
1
㼀㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼚㼐㼍㼞㼐㻌㼒㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓㻌㼜㼛㼟㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚
Center line
240 0.5mm
9 scales in direction B from center.
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

6) Change the set value of set item A.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.
Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
13-B Print image manual area adjustment (Main

scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
The standard fixing positions for Front and Rear sides are at
(Print engine)
the 3 scales and 1 scale in direction B from the marking scale
center, respectively. However, the position may be varied This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
depending on the situation. * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper, change the position in the * When a paper tray is replaced.
error direction A. * When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When an image deflection or unclear image is generated in * When the manual feed tray is replaced.
the lead edge area of paper, change the position in the * When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
arrow direction B.
* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
ADJ 13 Print image manual * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
magnification ratio, area,
NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute the
position adjustment print image manual magnification ratio adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (ADJ13A) (main scanning direction) (print engine).
13-A Print image manual magnification ratio 2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an
adjustment (Main scanning direction) adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items B -
(Print engine) J and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "R" to
select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing
test printing.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. are in the range of the standard values.
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray. Content Standard adjustment value
X Lead edge void area 4.0 +/- 1.0mm
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
key and the numeral key.
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
The check pattern is printed out. Z1 + Z2 = 4.0 ± 2.0mm
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed halftone is 240 Z1 > 0.0mm
+/- 0.5mm. Z2 > 0.0mm

Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
Z1
2.0 2.0mm
13-C Print image manual position adjustment
(Main scanning direction, sub scanning
direction) (Print engine) (Each paper feed
tray)
X
4.0 1.0mm Y * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
2.0 - 5.0mm * When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When ADJ13A Print image manual magnification ratio adjust-
ment (Main scanning direction) (Print engine) is performed.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
Z2 * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
2.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
condition, execute the simulation 50-1. * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
NOTE: Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the fol-
5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. lowing item.
6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with * The print image manual magnification ration adjustment
the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key. (ADJ13A) (main scanning direction) (Print engine) has been
properly adjusted.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content SIM 50-10 display item
range value
Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40 Setting Default
adjustment adjustment range value
DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Print off BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100
adjustment center magnification ratio
FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20 adjust- MAIN-MFT (Print off center) manual 1 - 99 50
REAR area adjustment ment feed adjustment value
Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 MAIN-CS1 (Print off center) tray 1 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value adjustment value
direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50 MAIN-CS2 (Print off center) tray 2 1 - 99 50
print area DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50 adjustment value
correction DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50 MAIN-CS3 (Print off center) tray 3 1 - 99 50
value adjustment value
DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50 MAIN-CS4 (Print off center) tray 4 1 - 99 50
DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 55 adjustment value
DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50 MAIN-LCC (Print off center) LCC 1 - 99 50
correction value adjustment value
MAIN-LCT1 Print off center 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is adjustment value (LCT1)
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void MAIN-LCT2 Print off center 1 - 99 50
area is decreased. adjustment value (LCT2)
MAIN-LCT- Print off center 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
MFT adjustment value
changed by 0.1mm.
(LCT_manual feed)
NOTE: MAIN-ADU (Print off center) ADU 1 - 99 50
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as adjustment value
follows: RRCB-MFT (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
registration motor ON
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
timing) manual feed
NOTE: adjustment value
When the amount of the rear edge void is different between RRCB- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item CS12 registration motor ON
(DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust. timing) tray 1 adjustment
value
The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all
RRCB- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
paper feed tray.
CS34 registration motor ON
That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to timing) desk adjustment
adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray. value
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of item (SUB-XXX) in SIM 50-10.
Refer to ADJ13-C.

Setting Default 1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.
range value 2) Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key.
Print off RRCB-ADU (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
center registration motor ON Display/Item Content Setting range
adjust- timing) ADU adjustment NO Not select 1
ment value
RRCB-LC (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50 3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
registration motor ON cedure 2).
timing) LCC/LCT 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment value
The adjustment pattern is printed.
RRCB- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
ADU-HV-A registration motor ON 5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
timing) ADU adjustment rect position.
value (Heavy paper A) Measure the dimension of the lead edge void area in the front
RRCB-CS- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50 and the rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and
HV-A registration motor ON
check that all the following conditions are satisfied.
timing) main unit tray
adjustment value (Heavy
RV
paper A)
2.0mm 2.0mm
RRCB-CS- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
HV-OHP registration motor ON
timing) main unit tray
adjustment value (OHP)
RRCB-LC- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
HV-A registration motor ON HV
timing) LCC/LCT (Rear edge void) (Lead edge void)
paper A)
RRCB-LC- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
HV-B registration motor ON
timing) LCC/LCT
paper B)
RRCB-MFT- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
HV-A registration motor ON
timing) manual feed tray
paper A)
FV
RRCB-MFT- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50
HV-B registration motor ON
2.0mm 2.0mm
adjustment value (Heavy RV: REAR VOID AREA
paper B) FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RRCB-MFT- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50 RV + FV = 4.0 +/- 2.0mm
HV-OHP registration motor ON
timing) manual feed tray RV > 0.0mm
adjustment value (OHP) FV > 0.0mm
RRCB-MFT- (Lead edge adjustment: 1 - 99 50 HV: Lead edge void
HV-ENV registration motor ON
HV = DENA adjustment value / 10 +/- 1.0mm
adjustment value If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
(Envelope) 6) Change the adjustment value.
MULTI Number of print 1 - 999 1
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
COUNT
[EXECUTE] key.
PAPER Tray selection 1-9 2
DUPLEX Duplex print selection 0-1 1 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
Heavy paper A: Heavy paper 1 - 2, Embossed paper, Label sheet, When the MAIN adjustment value is increased, the image FV
Tab sheet, Glossy paper of 5) is increased and the RV is decreased.
Heavy paper B: Heavy paper 3 - 4 When the SUB adjustment value is increased, the image HV of
5) is increased and the rear edge void is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.

7) In the case of tandem tray
Loosen two red screws, and adjust the position of the paper ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio
feed guide. adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (Document table mode)
CAUTION: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magni-
fication ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of
SIM 48-1, copy image quality may be degraded. There-
fore, this adjustment must be executed only when there
is a special necessity.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
8) In the case of paper feed tray 3/4

Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc-
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 +/- 0.5%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
+/- 0.5%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is not within the specified range, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 +/- 0.5%).
NOTE:
The adjustment item (SUB-XXX-HV-XXX) is used to make the fine
adjustment of heavy paper/OHP/envelopes for the adjustment item
(SUB-XXX) of each paper feed tray.

14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 14-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(sub scanning direction) (Manual (main scanning direction)
adjustment) (Document table mode) (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scan- * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
ning direction is not properly adjusted. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner motor is replaced. * When U2 trouble occurs.
* U2 trouble has occurred. * When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF mode copy
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. image in the main scanning direction is not proper.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the DSPF is disassembled.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure a. Adjustment procedures
below.
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray of the DSPF.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
Paper pass direction

A4 size
(Both the front surface

and the back surface)
10mm 10mm
2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. 2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy. images.
Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)

100%
cation ratio Original dimension original
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than 10 20 90 100 110 copy
the original)
10 50 100 150 200 250
10 50 100 150 200 250
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
(Example 2) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
Copy B If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than (100 +/- 0.5%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
the original)
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 +/- 0.5%). DSPF
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 Setting Default
Item Display Content
+/- 0.5%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnifica- range value
tion ratio is not within the specified range, perform the follow- A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
ing procedure. magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica- magnification ratio
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. adjustment (CCD)
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi- C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%. magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 +/- 0.5%).

Setting Default 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
Item Display Content formula:
range value
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
magnification ratio (%)
adjustment (Sub scan)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
adjustment (Main scan) (100 +/- 0.5%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
cedures.
the scroll key.
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio 6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
(Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface) (Front surface)
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed 7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%. key, and press [OK] key.
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained. When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-
fication ratio is changed by 0.1%.
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
14-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
(sub scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: ADJ 15 Scan image off-center
* When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
adjustment
* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
(Manual adjustment)
* When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF mode copy
image in the sub scanning direction is not proper. 15-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual
* When the DSPF is disassembled. adjustment) (Document table mode)
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the DSPF This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
document tray. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and * When a U2 trouble occurs.
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
10mm
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the
Paper pass direction adjustment mode (document table).
A4 size
A
10mm
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. A=B
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images.
B
10
50
100
10
original
150
50
200
100
copy
150
200

2) Check the copy image center position. 2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF.
If A - B = +/- 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required. 3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
A'
original copy
a
A' - B' = 1.0mm

(100%) b
B'
If the difference is within the range of 0 +/- 2.7mmm there is no

need to perform the adjustment.
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following 4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.
procedures.
SIM50-12
4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key. Setting Default
range value
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
The entered value is set. center adjustment
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi- B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm. center adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
center adjustment
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satis-
fied. A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
position is shifted to the rear frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
15-B Scan image off-center adjustment SIM50-6
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode)
Setting Default
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Item/Display Content
range value
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. document scan
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. position adjustment
(CCD)
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
* When U2 trouble occurs. document scan
* When the DSPF section is disassembled. position adjustment
(CCD)
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
CAUTION: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the amount EDGE edge image loss
ADJ15A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document setting (SIDE1) amount setting
table mode) must have been properly adjusted. D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
REAR image loss amount
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
(SIDE1) setting
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur- E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport EDGE edge image loss
direction. (SIDE1) amount setting
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 40
Paper transport direction
amount EDGE edge image loss
Front surface Back surface setting (SIDE2) amount setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) setting
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE2) setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
Draw a line at the center of the
front surface and the back surface K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
of paper in parallel with the paper surface magnification
transport direction. ratio (Sub scan)

* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
(SIM50-12)
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
(SIM50-6)
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode 2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Setting Default
(In the case of SIM50-6: When the adjustment value is Item/Display Content
range value
increased, the print image is shifted to the rear.) A Lead edge RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is adjustment edge reference
obtained. value position (OC)
B Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
area setting loss area setting
C value SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
area setting
ADJ 16 Copy image position and image D Void area DENA Print lead edge 1 - 99 40
adjustment adjustment
loss adjustment E DENB Sub scanning 1 - 99 30
(Manual adjustment) direction print
range adjustment
F FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
16-A Copy image position, image loss, and void REAR area adjustment
area adjustment (Manual adjustment) G Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
(Document table mode) adjustment OC center adjustment
H Magnification SCAN_ SCAN sub 1 - 99 50
ratio SPEED_ scanning
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. correction OC magnification ratio
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. adjustment (CCD)
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. I Sub DENB- Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning MFT correction value
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. direction print
J DENB- Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
* U2 trouble has occurred. area CS1 value
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. K correction DENB- Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value CS2 value
L DENB- Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. CS3 value
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. M DENB- Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
CS4 value
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
N DENB-LC LCC/LCT/LCT 1 - 99 50
the ADJ3 Print engine image skew, image position, image
manual paper feed
magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been com-
correction value
pleted normally.
O DENB- ADU correction 1 - 99 55
ADU value
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure P DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
below. correction value
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction 4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and
plate.
200% in the document table mode.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
edge can be seen.
image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
copy scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

Scale image 4.0mm position 16-B Image scanning position adjustment
Paper lead
edge (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
100% * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
5mm
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
200%
5mm 10mm * When the DSPF unit is replaced.
This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in
the DSPF mode.
5) Image loss adjustment If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, in the DSPF mode.
change these adjustment items. 1) Make a copy in the DSPF mode, and check for any shade on
the lead edge section of the copy image.
Paper lead edge
Copy area Papar lead edge

Maginification ratio : 400%
Image area
1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm
Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm Shadow image of DSPF
Adjust- Standard
Item/ Default
Content ment adjustment
Display value
range value If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 40 4.0 section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
adjustment image loss +/- 1.0mm
adjustment 2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0 3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
loss +/- 1.0mm When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
adjustment position to the DSPF scanning position is increased. When the
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the 0.1mm.
image loss is decreased. Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is obtained.
changed by 0.1mm. CAUTION: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
ADJ16C Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode).
16-C Copy image position, image loss, void area

adjustment (Manual adjustment)
(DSPF mode)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-
dures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.

At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, * Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification timing is delayed.
marks of the front surface and the back surface. * Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
R Front surface
FACE * Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.
L T
(Lead edge image loss adjustment)

1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
Put the position
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to
marks.
the following values.
F (Standard set value)
LEAD EDGE (SIDE 1):
Draw arrows.
20 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)
Back surface LEAD EDGE (SIDE 2):
R
BACK 40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
increased.)
L T (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 +/- 1.0mm
Put the position on the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead
marks. edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
F Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
the image lead edge.
Draw arrows.
Setting Default
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
Copy image
(CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 Image loss
amount EDGE edge image loss 4.0 1.0mm
setting (SIDE1) amount setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20 If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
REAR image loss amount procedure.
(SIDE1) setting
3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
press [OK] key.
EDGE edge image loss
(SIDE1) amount setting Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead 0 - 99 40 sumed image lead edge.
amount EDGE edge image loss SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
setting (SIDE2) amount setting
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
REAR image loss amount (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
(SIDE2) setting tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20 (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
(SIDE2) setting
obtained.
document off-center
adjustment
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification
ratio (Sub scan)

(Rear edge image loss adjustment) (Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the
front surface and the back surface. rear frame side are 2.0 +/- 2.0mm on the front surface and the
back surface.
Paper rear edge
Paper F Image loss
side edge 2.0 2.0mm
Copy image
Copy image
Copy image
Paper R Image loss

Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm side edge 2.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure. procedure.
2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) 2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
with 10-key, and press [OK] key. FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface) Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2): FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface) Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image (When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
loss is increased.) loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained. obtained.

ADJ 17 Finisher and punch unit
adjustments (alignment, punch
hole position, staple position)
* When the finisher is disassembled.
* When the finisher control PWB is replaced.
* When the punch unit is disassembled.
* When the punch control PWB is replaced.
* When the alignment is improper.
* When the punch hole position is shifted.
* When the staple position is shifted.

2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
4K finisher (50 sheet staple) (MX-FN19)
Purpose Change when

Setting Default (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is increased the adjustment
range value adjustment is or decreased value is
required) changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10 When the paper F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
ADJUST adjustment (front) alignment capability alignment plate stop increased, the alignment
in the stacker position position is shifted to the
section is improper, (F/R direction) center.
the paper alignment When the adjustment value is
width is adjusted. decreased, the alignment
position is shifted to the
outside.
B STAPLE REAR Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
adjustment (Rear, 106 position on the R (stapler stop increased, the distance
one position) side is shifted, the position) between the stapling position
adjustment is (F/R direction) and the paper edge becomes
executed. longer.
When the adjustment value is
decreased, the distance
between the stapling position
and the paper edge becomes
shorter.
C STAPLE Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
FRONT adjustment (one 106 position on the F (stapler stop decreased, the distance
position in front) side is shifted, the position) between the stapling position
executed. shorter.
increased, the distance
longer.
D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
CENTER adjustment center is shifted, the (F/R direction) increased, the hole position is
adjustment is shifted to the front.
executed. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the hole position
is shifted to the rear.
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 46 - 52 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
position hole position is (paper transport increased, the punch hole
adjustment shifted in the direction) position is shifted to the rear
transport direction, edge of paper.
the adjustment is When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the punch hole
position is shifted to the lead
edge of paper.

4K saddle stitch finisher (50 sheet staple) (MX-FN20)
Purpose Change when

Setting Default (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is increased the adjustment
range value adjustment is or decreased value is
required) changed by 1
A SADDLE Saddle stitch 197 - 200 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position 203 executed when the edge striking plate increased, the stapling
adjustment saddle staple stop position position is shifted to the lead
position is shifted. (Up-down direction) edge of transported paper.
decreased, the stapling
position is shifted to the rear
edge of transported paper.
B FOLDING Saddle folding 192 - 200 The adjustment is Saddle paper lead When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
POSITION position 208 executed when the edge striking plate increased, the folding position
adjustment saddle folding stop position is shifted to the lead edge of
position is shifted. (Up-down direction) transported paper.
decreased, the folding
position is shifted to the rear
edge of transported paper.
C FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10 When the paper F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
ADJUST adjustment (front) alignment capability alignment plate stop increased, the alignment
in the stacker position position is shifted to the
section is improper, (F/R direction) center.
the paper alignment When the adjustment value is
width is adjusted. decreased, the alignment
position is shifted to the
outside.
D STAPLE REAR Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
adjustment (Rear, 106 position on the R (stapler stop increased, the distance
one position) side is shifted, the position) between the stapling position
executed. longer.
decreased, the distance
shorter.
E STAPLE Stapling position 94 - 100 When the stapling Stapling position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
FRONT adjustment (one 106 position on the F (stapler stop decreased, the distance
position in front) side is shifted, the position) between the stapling position
executed. shorter.
increased, the distance
longer.
F PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50 When the punch off- Punching position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
CENTER adjustment center is shifted, the (F/R direction) increased, the hole position is
adjustment is shifted to the front.
executed. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the hole position
is shifted to the rear.
G PUNCH HOLE Punch hole 46 - 52 50 When the punch Punch position When the adjustment value is 0.2mm
position hole position is (paper transport increased, the punch hole
adjustment shifted in the direction) position is shifted to the rear
transport direction, edge of paper.
the adjustment is When the adjustment value is
executed. decreased, the punch hole
position is shifted to the lead
edge of paper.

4K finisher (100 sheet staple) (MX-FN21)
Item Display Content Setting range Default value

A BUFFER SHIFT1 Buffer paper shift amount adjustment 1 50 - 150 100
B BUFFER SHIFT2 Buffer paper shift amount adjustment 2 50 - 150 100
C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
D STAPLE FRONT(S-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Front 1 position/Small width) 70 - 130 100
E STAPLE FRONT(W-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Front 1 position/Wide width) 70 - 130 100
F STAPLE REAR(S-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Rear 1 position/Small width) 70 - 130 100
G STAPLE REAR(W-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Rear 1 position/Wide width) 70 - 130 100
H STAPLE CENTER Stapling position adjustment (Center 2 positions) 85 - 115 100
I PUNCH Y Punch hole position adjustment (Y: Main scanning direction) 85 - 115 100
J PUNCH X Punch hole position adjustment (X: Sub scanning direction) 50 - 150 100
K PUNCH SKEW Punch mode skew adjustment 98 - 102 100
L PUNCH SKEW SHIN Punch mode skew adjustment (thin paper) 99 - 103 100
4K saddle stitch finisher (100 sheet staple) (MX-FN22)
Item Display Content Setting range Default value

A BUFFER SHIFT1 Buffer paper shift amount adjustment 1 50 - 150 100
B BUFFER SHIFT2 Buffer paper shift amount adjustment 2 50 - 150 100
C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
D STAPLE FRONT(S-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Front 1 position/Small width) 70 - 130 100
E STAPLE FRONT(W-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Front 1 position/Wide width) 70 - 130 100
F STAPLE REAR(S-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Rear 1 position/Small width) 70 - 130 100
G STAPLE REAR(W-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Rear 1 position/Wide width) 70 - 130 100
H STAPLE CENTER Stapling position adjustment (Center 2 positions) 85 - 115 100
I PUNCH Y Punch hole position adjustment (Y: Main scanning direction) 85 - 115 100
J PUNCH X Punch hole position adjustment (X: Sub scanning direction) 50 - 150 100
K PUNCH SKEW Punch mode skew adjustment 98 - 102 100
L PUNCH SKEW SHIN Punch mode skew adjustment (thin paper) 99 - 103 100
M SDL FOLD Saddle folding position adjustment 80 - 120 100
N SDL STPL Saddle stitch position adjustment 80 - 120 100
O SDL DIVIDE Saddle separation position adjustment 85 - 115 100
P SDL WIDTH Saddle alignment width adjustment 80 - 120 100
Q STPL/FOLD 1 Stapling/Folding position adjustment value 13 x 19 42 - 58 50
R UNBOUND FOLD 1 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value A4R/LTRR 42 - 58 50
S UNBOUND FOLD 2 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value B4/LGL 42 - 58 50
T UNBOUND FOLD 3 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value A3/LDR 42 - 58 50
U UNBOUND FOLD 4 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value SRA3/12 x 18 42 - 58 50
V UNBOUND FOLD 5 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value 13 x 19 42 - 58 50
W UNBOUND FOLD 6 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value (User-defined size) 42 - 58 50
X TRIMMER REG S (*) Trimmer registration position adjustment (Small size) 50 - 150 100
Y TRIMMER REG L (*) Trimmer registration position adjustment (Large size) 50 - 150 100
Z TRIMMER CUT S (*) Trimmer cut position adjustment (Small size) 50 - 150 100
AA TRIMMER CUT L (*) Trimmer cut position adjustment (Large size) 50 - 150 100
(*): Setting can be made only when the trimmer unit is installed.
3) Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key.

4) Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.

<Descriptions of keys>
ADJ 18 DSPF CCD calibration Display Content
OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading
18-A Shading adjustment (Calibration) SHADING correction data making (Document table mode)
DSPF Analog correction level correction, and shading correction
(DSPF mode)
SHADING data making (DSPF mode)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. <Result display>
* When a U2 trouble occurs. Display Content
* When the DSPF control PWB is replaced. COMPLETE Normal completion
ERROR Abnormal completion
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
18-B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
with alcohol.)
(DSPF mode)
2) Open the DSPF document scanning section, insert the shad-
ing adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ), and close the DSPF This adjustment is required in the following cases:
document scanning section. * When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF control PWB is replaced.
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-
0356FCZZ) are free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
* When inserting the shading adjustment sheet, insert it along

the rear edge frame so that the rear edge of the shading
adjustment sheet comes to the root of the actuator.

4) Select [DSPF SHADING].
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The shading adjustment process is
started.)
* The shading adjustment sheet is transported by about
25mm, and shading data are obtained during transport.
* During shading adjustment, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is
displayed.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during shading adjust-
ment, the operation is interrupted.
* When shading adjustment is completed normally, [EXE-
CUTE] key returns to the normal display and "COMPLETE"
is displayed.

(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the scanner adjustment chart face-down in the DSPF ADJ 19 DSPF back surface color
paper feed tray. balance exposure adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
This adjustment is to manually adjust the color balance of R, G, and
B on the DSPF back surface in the following cases:
• There is a difference in hue between the front surface and the
back surface of a duplex copy (scan) after executing SIM63-03
(automatic adjustment of the scanner and the DSPF color bal-
ance and color coefficient).
• The color balance is requested to be changed (customized) by
the user.
1) Place the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/Z1) on
the document table (OC), and press START key twice in the
Text/Print Photo mode to make a 2-sided copy.
2) Use the 2-sided copy made in procedure 1) as an original to
make a 2-sided copy in the Text/Print mode with the DSPF.
3) Check the tint of the front and the back surfaces.
If the scanner adjustment chart is not available, execute SIM If there is any difference, execute procedures 4) and later.
63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, how-
4) Referring to the color sample below, check the hue on the back
ever, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with
surface to confirm which color is shifted from that on the front
the adjustment method using the scanner adjustment chart.
surface.
3) When a color key is selected, the adjustment value of the Adjustment value
selected color is displayed. Low 50 High
* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) key is selected,
When R is increased, red is emphasized.
the selected key is highlighted and the adjustment value of R
When R is decreased, cyan is emphasized.
the selected color is displayed.
When G is increased, green is emphasized.
* Only one color key can be selected, and the selected key is G
When G is decreased, magenta is emphasized.
highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
When B is increased, blue is emphasized.
* If there is a page over [UP], an active display is shown and B
When B is decreased, yellow is emphasized.
the page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid. 5) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
If there is a page under [DOWN], an active display is shown For the color (R, G, B) which is shifted, the value is adjusted.
and the page moves down. If there is no page downward, 6) Select "DSPF" and select the color (G:R / H:G / I:B) to be
the display grays out and the operation is invalid. adjusted with the scroll key.
4) When [DSPF] key is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color 7) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed.
The adjustment value can be set in the range of (1 - 99).
5) Press [EXECUTE] key and it is highlighted and the color auto All the initial values are set to 50.
adjustment is executed.
To increase the color density, increase the adjustment value.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the automatic To decrease, decrease the adjustment value.
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
8) Make a duplex copy of UKOG-0326FCZZ/Z1) and a user doc-
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed ument, as needed, in the Text/Print mode with the DSPF, and
in the initial screen. check the adjustment result.
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis- Repeat procedures 3) - 8) until the difference in hue between
played. the front surface and the back surface is eliminated or until the
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error user satisfaction is obtained.
patch numbers are displayed. [Supplement] Since the read value varies according to the docu-
When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to the initial ment type, thickness, and other conditions, perform the adjustment
screen. (The previous value is displayed) by using the user document if necessary.
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
played. When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)

2) [Setting the correction value back to default value
ADJ 20 FR density variation correction (for readjustment)]
Clear the adjustment by Sim 61-13 (Laser Power Auto/
Make sure followings are confirmed prior to the adjustment:
Manual correction data clear). Make sure to execute
• Charge unevenness is not occurring this adjustment again after the clearance.
• A paper tray with A4 (LT) size papers is available. 7) Execute Simulation 46-74 (Copy/Printer color balance adjust-
• The auto correction of FR density uniformity will clear the correc- ment) after completing all the adjustments.
tion value in “ADJ20B manual correction of FR density unifor-
mity”. Do not execute auto correction if you wish to maintain the 20-B FR density uniformity visual inspection
manual correction value.
(CMYK 5 point adjustment or CMYK 32point
• Execute Sim 61-13 if any one of DV unit, Drum Process unit and
LSU unit has been replaced.
adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
20-A FR density uniformity auto correction • Ununiformed density toward main scan direction has been
observed:
(32 point adjustment for all colors)
1) Enter Simulation 61-12.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
2) Press [VISUAL INSPECTION] key.
• Ununiformed density toward main scan direction has been
observed Press [DATA] to confirm present manual correction value.
1) Enter Simulation 61-11. 3) Select the density level to adjust and press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key. The adjustment pattern will be output.
Press [DATA] to confirm present auto correction value. 4) Check the adjustment pattern in the step 3).
3) Select the density level to adjust and press [EXECUTE] key. Select either [5 POINT CORRECTION] or [32 POINT COR-
RECTION], enter adjustment value and press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern will be output.
Larger the adjustment value, the higher the density and vice
* Default Mode: Middle
versa.
4) Place the adjustment pattern in the step 3) and the arrows on
the adjustment pattern should be placed on left side (A4R/LTR
direction) on the document table. and press [EXECUTE] key.
Also put five blank sheets on top of the adjustment pattern.
5) The adjustment result pattern will be printed automatically.

Check whether density on front and rear side matches.
5) After scanning the adjustment pattern and the adjustment

result pattern will be printed automatically. Check whether den-
sity on front and rear side matches.
6) After step5) if you furthermore require this adjustment, press

[RETRY] key and repeat the step 3) to 5).
NOTE: [Setting the correction value back to default value (for
readjustment)]
Clear the adjustment by Sim 61-13 (Laser Power Auto/
Manual Correction Data Clear). Make sure to execute
this adjustment again after the clearance.
7) Execute Simulation 46-74 (Copy/Printer color balance adjust-
6) Press [RETRY] and repeat the steps in 3) to 5), if the density ment) after completing all the adjustments.
between front and rear is still unevenness with result in step 5).
NOTE: 1) As you repeat this procedure, the accuracy of this
adjustment will increase that expected to remedy the
color unevenness between front and rear.

MX-7580N
[6] SIMULATION Service Manual
1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis) data
check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc) data
transport
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine
Simulation mode
Easy mode Displays commonly used simulations for each category
allowing easy access for technicians to change settings,
perform maintenance and adjustments
Classic mode All simulations are listed and can be accessed by
entering the main code, then sub code as per previous
model series
2. Function of each key
3) Touch the (#) key → Asterisk (*) key → Clear key → Asterisk
(*) key → Ready for input of main code of simulation
No. Name Function

1 TEST key Change test mode
2 Mode setting key Change mode (Easy mode, Classic mode)
3 Language setting key Change language in simulation mode
4 INFO key Display operation of current display
5 EXIT key Exit from simulation mode
6 BACK key Back to the previous display
7 CLEAR key Clear input value
3. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode
1) Double click the HOME key
2) Touch the Ver. Display section (10 key mode input mode
screen)
MX-7580N SIMULATION 6 – 1
4. List of simulation codes
A. List of Easy mode
Installation
The first menu The second menu SIM number SIM Title
1 Adjustment 1 Process 46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto adjustment
50-22 Auto adjustment of registration & drum position
2 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position adjustment
3 Copy 46-21 Color copy gradation manual adjustment
4 Printer 67-25 Printer gradation manual adjustment
64-05 Printer self print (PCL)
5 Image Quality Adjustment 63-02 Shading execution
63-03 Scanner color balance auto adjustment
44-06 High density / engine halftone process control compulsory execution
44-26 Half tone density correct execution
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto adjustment
2 Registration Settings 1 Function/Option settings 26-01 Paper output system setup
26-02 Size setup
26-03 Auditor setup
26-50 Function setting
26-65 Finisher alarm mode setup (staple limit)
26-78 ROPE password setting
2 Counter mode 26-05 A3(11x17) countup
26-08 Banner size countup
26-52 A blank paper count mode setup
3 FAX/Image send settings 66-01 Image send software SW. setting
4 Toner setting 26-18 Toner save mode setup
26-69 Toner near end setting
5 FSS setting 27-02 FSS function setup (input)
27-04 FSS function setup
27-07 FSS function setup (function)
27-09 FSS function adjustment
27-14 FSS test mode setup
27-15 FSS connect status
27-16 FSS alert setting
27-17 FSS paper order alert setting
3 Data display 1 Counter display 22-01 Counter display
22-09 Paper feed counter display
22-13 Process cartridge display
2 System/Version 22-05 ROM version data display
22-10 Machine system display
3 List printing 22-06 Data print mode
23-02 JAM/trouble data print mode
4 USB storage 56-99 Export all log data
4 Version upgrade 1 49-01 Firmware update
2 49-03 E-manual update
3 49-05 Water mark update
4 49-06 OCR data update
5 49-10 ACU update
5 Error release 1 13 U1 trouble cancellation
2 14 Trouble cancellation (other)
3 15 Paper feed trouble cancellation
4 16 U2 trouble cancellation
6 Ready for transport 1 10-03 Toner cartridge eject sensor check
2 06-90 Load move for shipment
10 History 1 Date list Use SIM
Maintenance
22-08 Org./staple counter display
2 JAM history data display 22-03 JAM history data display
22-12 SPF JAM history data display
2 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position adjustment
50-22 Auto adjustment of registration<FmSdata>[amp ]drum position
2 Process 25-02 Automatic developer adjustment
44-02 Process control gain adjustment
3 Image Quality Adjustment 44-02 Process control gain adjustment
44-06 High density / engine halftone process control compulsory execution
44-26 Half tone density correct execution
61-13 Laser power correction data clear
61-11 Laser power auto correction
63-03 Scanner color balance auto adjustment
63-05 Standard scanner gamma setup
4 Cleaning 06-04 Charger cleaner check
43-31 Fuser web cleaning check
5 Replacing developer 10-03 Toner cartridge eject sensor check
25-02 Automatic developer adjustment
3 Counter clear 1 24-01 JAM/trouble counter data clear
2 24-02 Paper feed counter clear
3 24-03 Org./output counter data clear
4 24-04 Maintenance counter clear
4 Registration Settings 1 21-01 Maintenance cycle setup
5 Version upgrade 1 49-01 Firmware update
2 49-03 E-manual update
3 49-05 Water mark update
4 49-06 OCR data update
5 49-10 ACU update
6 Error release 1 13 U1 trouble cancellation
2 14 Trouble cancellation(other)
3 15 Paper feed trouble cancellation
4 16 U2 trouble cancellation
Adjustment and Settings

1 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-01 Copy edge adjustment
50-05 Print edge adjustment
50-06 SPF edge adjustment
50-10 Manual image position adjustment
50-12 Original center offset setup
48-01 Ratio adjustment
48-05 Motor speed adjustment
50-22 Auto adjustment of registration<FmSdata>[amp ]drum position
2 Image Quality Automatic 50-22 Auto adjustment of registration<FmSdata>[amp ]drum position
Adjustment 50-20 Registration adjustment
3 Image Quality Adjustment 61-14 Laser power setting collective input
61-13 Laser power correction data clear
46-54 Copy gradation auto adjustment(at dither)
46-52 Copy gradation data clear(at dither)
67-54 Printer gradation auto adjustment(at dither)
67-52 Printer gradation data clear(at dither)
2 Process 1 10-03 Toner cartridge eject sensor check
2 25-02 Automatic developer adjustment
3 44-02 Process control gain adjustment
4 46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto adjustment
3 Scanner/SPF 1 41-01 PD sensor check
2 41-02 Document size photo-sensor setup
3 46-09 Exposure adjustment(SFP)
4 63-02 Shading execution
5 53-06 SPF tray adjustment
6 53-08 SPF scanning position adjustment
7 63-03 Scanner color balance auto adjustment
8 63-05 Standard scanner gamma setup
4 Paper feeding, 1 40-02 Bypass tray adjustment
Transport and paper 2 40-12 Tray adjustment
ejection 3 03-10 Finisher adjustment
4 03-42 Folding unit adjustment
5 Copy 1 46-21 Color copy gradation manual adjustment
2 44-21 Half tone process control standard value register setup
3 46-24 Copy gradation auto adjustment
4 46-54 Copy gradation auto adjustment(at dither)
5 63-07 Copy gradation auto adjustment target setup:service
6 63-08 Copy gradation auto adjustment target clear:service
7 63-11 Copy gradation auto adjustment target select
6 Printer 1 67-24 Printer gradation auto adjustment
2 67-25 Printer gradation manual adjustment
3 67-26 Printer gradation auto adjustment target select
4 67-27 Printer gradation auto adjustment target setup:service
5 67-28 Printer gradation auto adjustment target clear:service
7 Touch panel 1 65-01 Touch panel adjustment
8 Function/Option 1 64-02 Self print(B/W) : service
settings
B. List of Classic mode

Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section DSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
30 Inserter sensor check Inserter
31 Inserter individual load check Inserter
40 Paper folding unit sensor check Paper folding unit
41 Paper fold unit individual load check Paper folding unit
42 Paper folding unit adjustment Paper folding unit
50 Decurler sensor check Decurler
51 Decurler individual load check Decurler unit
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
control circuit of those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
those.
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
transport clutch (LTRC).
10 LCT warm air heater temperature setting LCT
11 LCT fan Duty setting LCT
14 LCT temperature and humidity sensor monitor display LCT
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
4 Used to check the cleaning operation of the PTC and the main charger. Process
6 Used to perform fusing pressure release and applying, and to check the operations of the control circuits. Fusing
7 Used to refresh the fuser belt. Fusing
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for
each color).
7 12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) DSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
10 Main charger total current output setting Process
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Toner supply section
2 Used to check the operations of the toner remaining quantity sensor and the control circuit. Toner supply section
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble. LCC/LCT
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version,
and the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the DSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the DSPF
number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
41 Used to check JAM code information.
42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
43 JAM data details display
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
81 Used to export paper feed time list.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter value and the toner hopper remaining quantity counter.
(After replacing developer, clear these counters.)
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner supply quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
5 Used to display the toner density correction data. (Not used in the market.) Process
10 Developer/drum serial no setting
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right paper exit tray. Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this Paper feed
simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
26 7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale)
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start
to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation. Fusing
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center
binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
66 Simulation password setting.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
85 Simulation function setting.
27 2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment
retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and
the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
12 Used to adjust the tray 4 width detection level. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
2 Used to set the fusing operation and preheating.
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1.
31 Used to check fusing web cleaning.
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
35 Fusing nip operation check Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photoconductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum, development)/
Fusing/LSU
44 15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
17 Process refresh execution Process
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to check the deflection of the OPC drum. Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
62 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
46 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (RGB RIP)
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
48 Used to set the copy output resolution.
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(After execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset to the initial value.)
54 Used to perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither).
55 Used to adjust the drop out color in the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode).
58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution. (Smoothing process)
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
65 Used to set the color correction table.
66 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
68 Used to adjust the auto resolution judgment.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
91 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of black text.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
6 Used to perform the OCR update.
10 Used to perform the ACU update.
3 : ‘19/March.

50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (DSPF mode) DSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC
drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
23 Used to set the temperature correction.
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20 and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the DSPF
registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF mode document scan position.
9 DSPF dirt detection setting.
10 DSPF dirt detection execution.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM and HDD (including user authentication data and address data)
3 to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
7 Used to export system log data.
8 Used to perform ICC profile update.
15 Used to restore MFP EEPROM data.
99 Used to export system log data.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
2 Used to set the laser power (FIERY)
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
11 Used to correct the laser power automatically.
12 Laser power manual correction LSU
13 Used to clear the laser power correction value.
14 Used to set the laser power correction.
3 62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data).
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the
3
system area).
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to delete the document filing management data. HDD
20 Used to check the operation of the mirroring hard disk. Mirroring hard disk
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
64 6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
64 6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the FAX
result.
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. (If there is no FAX
confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting FAX
is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or FAX
the command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. Printer
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
41 Used to set the threshold for judging the selected color printing or the black color printing in the black and Printer
white mode.
42 Used to adjust the gradation by increasing /decreasing the selected color componet amount or the black Printer
color component amount in the black and white mode.
43 2 Color mode balance adjustment Printer
46 Used to adjust print image enhancement
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
54 Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) Printer
5. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1
1-1 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner cuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section DSPF
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
scan resolution (operation speed). ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
ation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI Item/Display Operation mode Default value
(372.0mm/s) (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
600DPI 600DPI (496.0mm/s) (496.0mm/s)
(264.0mm/s) 400DPI 400DPI
1200DPI 1200DPI (396.0mm/s)
(132.0mm/s) 600DPI 600DPI
(264.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(496.0mm/s) (496.0mm/s)
1-2 400DPI 400DPI
(396.0mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check 600DPI 600DPI
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner (264.0mm/s)
(reading) section and the related circuits.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure 2-2
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. Purpose Operation test/check
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
tion.
sors and the detectors in the automatic
document feeder section and the control
circuits.
1-5
Section DSPF
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
(reading) unit and the control circuit. played.
Section Scanner (reading) The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Operation/Procedure are highlighted.
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
Display Content
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. SSET DSPF installation detector
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan SOCD DSPF open/close sensor
resolution (operation speed). SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close sensor
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor
Item/Display Operation mode Default value SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2
400DPI 400DPI SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3
(372.0mm/s) SPPD4 DSPF document pass sensor 4
600DPI 600DPI SPPD5 DSPF document pass sensor 5
(264.0mm/s)
SPOD DSPF document exit sensor
1200DPI 1200DPI
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor
(132.0mm/s)
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output AD value
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
2-3 No,/Display item Content
24 FFANLK Finisher fan motor lock detection
Purpose Operation test/check 25 FSJOGD Finisher stapler alignment interference detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads 26 FSAD Finisher staple safety SW
in the automatic document feeder and the 27 FSHTD Finisher shutter open detection
control circuit. 28 FCD Finisher connection detection
Section DSPF 29 FFDD Finisher front cover open detection
30 F24V Finisher 24V output interruption detection
Operation/Procedure
31 FPSW1 Finisher PUSHSW1 detection
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel 32 FPSW2 Finisher PUSHSW2 detection
key. 33 FPSW3 Finisher PUSHSW3 detection
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 34 FAED21 Finisher tray 2 area detection 1
The selected load performs the operation. 35 FAED22 Finisher tray 2 area detection 2
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 36 FAED23 Finisher tray 2 area detection 3
Finisher (100-sheet stapling)

Display Content
SPFM DSPF transport motor No,/Display item Content
SPOM DSPF document exit motor 1 FNS103 Staple tray paper sensor
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor 2 FNS122 Finisher tray 1 area 1 sensor
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor 3 FNS123 Finisher tray 1 area 2 sensor
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch 4 FNS124 Finisher tray 1 area 3 sensor
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch 5 FNS146 Discharge paper surface detection
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch 6 FNS149 YO paper surface sensor
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch 7 FNS118 Process tray paper surface sensor
STMPS Stamp solenoid 8 FNS143 Lower tray paper surface sensor
9 FNS114 YOHP sensor
10 FNS112 Take-up switch home position sensor
11 FNS135 Paper holding lever home position sensor
12 FNS111 Roller nip home position sensor
3 13 FNS142 Buffer flapper home position sensor
14 FNS102 Discharged paper detection
15 FNS101 Entry port paper detection
3-2
16 FNS131 Staple drive home position detection
Purpose Operation test/check 17 FNS128 Staple area sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- 18 FNSW110 Tray 1 interference switch
sors and the detectors in the finisher and 19 FNS134 Staple cart sensor
the control circuit. 20 FNS132 Staple lead edge position detection
21 FNS133 Staple empty detection
Section Finisher
22 FNS104 Tray 1 paper detection
Operation/Procedure
23 FNS105 Tray 2 paper detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 24 FNS130 Tray 3 paper detection
played. 25 FNPCH_CON Punch unit connection detection
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active 26 FNSW2 PUSHSW2 detection
are highlighted. 27 FNSW1 PUSHSW1 detection
28 FNS107 Staple shift home position detection
NOTE: When the punch module is installed, the code names are
29 FNS108 Alignment plate front home position sensor
displayed at the back of the sensor display.
30 FNS109 Alignment plate rear home position sensor
Finisher (50-sheet stapling) 31 FNS106 Shutter open detection
No,/Display item Content 32 FNS110 Oscillation guide open detection
1 PDPPD1 Finisher paper pass paper transport detector 1 33 FNSW3-1 DIPSW1 detection
2 PDPPD2 Finisher paper pass paper transport detector 2 34 FNSW3-2 DIPSW2 detection
3 PDOS Finisher paper pass cover open/close sensor 35 FNSW3-3 DIPSW3 detection
4 FED Finisher entry port paper detection 36 FNSW3-4 DIPSW4 detection
5 FAED1 Finisher tray 1 area detection 1 37 FNS129 Finisher front cover sensor
6 FAED2 Finisher tray 1 area detection 2 38 FNSW103 Stapler safety switch
7 FAED3 Finisher tray 1 area detection 3 39 FNSW101 Finisher front cover switch
8 FFJHPD Finisher alignment home position detection front 40 FNS148 Shutter close detection
9 FRJHPD Finisher alignment home position detection rear 41 FNSW102 Oscillation guide switch
10 FBED1 Finisher tray 1 paper detection 42 FNS125 Tray 2 area 1 sensor
11 FBED2 Finisher tray 2 paper detection 43 FNS126 Tray 2 area 2 sensor
12 FCCD Finisher tray approach detection 44 FNS127 Tray 2 area 3 sensor
13 FSLD1 Finisher tray 1 paper surface detection 45 FNS113 Rear edge falling home position sensor
14 FPDD1 Finisher discharged paper detection 46 FNS138 YO rear home position sensor
15 FSLD2 Finisher tray 2 paper surface detection 47 FNS139 YO front home position sensor
16 FASHPD Finisher rear edge assist home position detection 48 FNS136 Guide sub rear home position sensor
17 FSWHPD Finisher oscillation guide home position detection 49 FNS137 Guide sub front home position sensor
18 FSWOPD Finisher oscillation guide open detection 50 FN24V-DET 24V-DETECT
19 FSTPD Finisher staple tray paper detection 51 FN24V1-DET 24V1-DETECT
20 FSHPD Finisher staple drive home position detection 52 FNAC-RELAY-ON Relay on signal
21 FSTHPD Finisher staple shift home position detection 53 FNS115 Gripper home position sensor
22 FSD Finisher staple empty detection 54 FNS140 Gripper front/rear sensor
23 FSTD Finisher staple lead edge position detection 55 FNS116 Gripper base front sensor
No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
56 FNS117 Gripper base rear sensor 9 FSS229 Folding home position sensor
57 FNM19-LD Load tray upper motor arm 10 FSS223 Staple drive home position sensor
58 FNM20-LD Load tray lower motor arm 11 FSS208 Pushing home position
59 FNFAN2-ALM Power supply fan alarm 12 FSS203 Vertical path sensor
60 FNFAN1-ALM PWB cooling fan alarm 13 FSS226 Bundle paper exit path sensor 1
61 FNFAN5-ALM Upper tray fan alarm 14 FST-CON Trimmer connection detection
62 FNFAN4-ALM Lower tray fan alarm 15 FSS225 Staple 2 sensor
63 FNS200 Cut staple sensor 16 FSS224 Staple 1 sensor
64 FNSDL_CON Saddle connection detection 17 FSS207 Roller guide home position sensor
65 FNFOLD_CON Folding unit connection detection 18 FSS227 Bundle paper exit bus sensor 2
66 FNGBC_CON GBC punch connection detection 19 FSS218 Rear edge sorting home position
67 FNFLD-ETR-ST- Folding unit EntryStartAck signal 20 FSS201 Entry port path sensor
ACK 21 FS24V-DET Interlock power supply (24V) detection
68 FNFLD-EJCT-ST Folding unit EjectStart signal
69 PIS150 Transfer unit bus sensor Punch module (Finisher (50-sheet stapling))
70 PISW200 Transfer unit front cover switch No,/Display item Content
71 PIUNITMOT_ALM Transfer unit transport motor lock detection 1 FPE Punch motor lock detection
signal 2 FPUC Punch unit connection detection
72 PIPASSUNIT-CON Transfer unit connection detection 3 FPHPD Punch home position detection
4 FPSHPD Punch side registration home position detection
Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling)
5 FPFDD Punch front door open detection
No,/Display item Content 6 FPDD Punch dust detection
1 FSSUC Finisher saddle staple unit detection 7 FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW
2 FSPIND Finisher saddle entry port paper detection
3 FSPDD Finisher saddle paper exit detection Punch module (Finisher (100-sheet stapling))
4 FSDTPD Finisher saddle tray paper detection
No,/Display item Content
5 FS1PD Finisher saddle paper detection 1
1 FCS105 Punch motor clock detection
2 FCPCB2 Punch dust sensor
3 FCS104 Punch home position detection
8 FSLGE Finisher paper pushing plate motor lock detection
4 FCS101 Punch horizontal registration home position detection
9 FSLGHPD Finisher paper pushing plate home position detection
5 FCPCB31 Punch horizontal registration A3 sensor
10 FSLGTD Finisher paper pushing plate lead edge position
6 FCPCB32 Punch horizontal registration LD sensor
detection
7 FCPCB33 Punch horizontal registration B4 sensor
11 FSFOE Finisher paper folding motor lock detection
8 FCPCB34 Punch horizontal registration A4R sensor
12 FSFOHPD Finisher paper folding home position detection
9 FCPCB35 Punch horizontal registration B5R sensor
13 FSPPHPD Finisher paper positioning plate home position
detection 10 FCS102 Punch hole motor position sensor
14 FSPPPD Finisher paper positioning plate paper detection 11 FCS103 Punch hole motor 2-hole/3-hole sensor
15 FSAHPD Finisher alignment plate home position detection 12 FCSW1-1 Punch DIPSW1
16 FSSHPD Finisher stitcher home position detection 13 FCSW1-2 Punch DIPSW2
17 FSVPPD Finisher vertical path paper detection
DIPSW (Finisher (50-sheet stapling))
18 FSCRPD Finisher semi-circular roller phase detection
19 FSGHPD Finisher guide home position detection No,/Display item Content
20 FSSHP1 Finisher stitch operation home position detection 1 1 FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection
21 FSSHP2 Finisher stitch operation home position detection 2 2 FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection
22 FSSD1 Finisher saddle needle presence detection 1 3 FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection
23 FSSD2 Finisher saddle needle presence detection 2 4 FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection
24 FSGHPC Finisher paper folding guide home position sensor 5 FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection
connection detection 6 FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection
25 FSFOHPC Finisher paper folding home position sensor 7 FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection
connector connection detection 8 FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection
26 FSSHPC Finisher stitcher home position sensor connection
detection DIPSW (Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling))
27 FSLGTC Finisher paper pushing plate lead edge position
sensor connector connection detection No,/Display item Content
28 FSINDD Finisher inlet port cover open detection 1 FSDSW1 S-DIPSWS1 detection
29 FSINDSW Finisher saddle inlet port door detection 2 FSDSW2 S-DIPSWS2 detection
30 FSFDSW Finisher front door open detection SW 3 FSDSW3 S-DIPSWS3 detection
31 FSPSW1 Finisher S-PUSHSW detection 4 FSDSW4 S-DIPSWS4 detection
32 FSBHPC Finisher paper pushing plate home position sensor 5 FSDSW5 S-DIPSWS5 detection
connector connection detection 6 FSDSW6 S-DIPSWS6 detection
7 FSDSW7 S-DIPSWS7 detection
Saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling) 8 FSDSW8 S-DIPSWS8 detection

Folding unit (100-sheet stapling)
1 FSS213 Pushing clock sensor
2 FSS214 Folding clock sensor No,/Display item Content
3 FSS228 Saddle tray paper sensor 1 FLENTRY Paper transfer start request
4 FSS219 Rear edge holding shift home position 2 FLEXIT_ACK Paper exit start response
5 FSS221 Rear edge holding home position 3 FLS30 Speed reduction timing sensor
6 FSS206 Alignment plate home position 4 FLS31 Separation timing sensor
7 FSS205 Lead edge stopper home position 5 FLS32 Folding position accurate detection sensor
8 FSS222 Pulling separation home position 6 FLS33 Upper stopper section paper sensor
No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
7 FLS25 Lead edge guide home position sensor 12 FSWM Finisher oscillation motor
8 FLS24 Internal 3-fold stopper home position sensor 13 FASM Finisher rear edge assist motor
9 FLS23 Upper stopper section home position sensor 14 FINRRS Finisher inlet port roller separation solenoid
10 FLS22 Discharged 1 paper sensor 15 FBRRS Finisher buffer roller separation solenoid
11 FLS28 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) home 16 FFDRRS Finisher paper exit roller separation solenoid
position sensor 17 FBES Finisher buffer rear edge holding solenoid
12 FLS26 Internal 3-fold tray (paper exit tray) full sensor 18 FSHC Finisher shutter open/close clutch
13 FLS27 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) paper 19 FAORC Finisher bundle exit lower roller clutch
sensor
14 FLS29 Folding unit pull-out sensor Finisher (100-sheet stapling)
15 FLORIHAN_LOCK Brushless motor lock detection signal No,/Display item Content
16 FLSW1 Front cover sensor 1 FNM101 Entry port transport motor
17 FLS20 Entry port sensor 2 FNM104 Paper delivery transport motor
18 FLS21 Discharged paper 2 sensor 3 FNM108 Front alignment motor
19 FLSW3-1 DipSW1 4 FNM107 Stapler shift motor
20 FLSW3-2 DipSW2 5 FNM105 Load tray upper motor
21 FLSW3-3 DipSW3 6 FNM115 Staple motor
22 FLSW3-4 DipSW4 7 FNM110 Oscillation guide motor
23 FLSW3-5 DipSW5 8 FNM102 Buffer transport motor
24 FLSW3-6 DipSW6 9 FNM106 Load tray lower motor
25 FLSW3-7 DipSW7 10 FNM119 Roller nip motor
26 FLSW3-8 DipSW8 11 FNM114 YO motor
27 FLSW1 PushSW1 12 FNM120 Guide motor
28 FLSW2 PushSW2 13 FNM113 Rear edge falling motor
29 FLFAN3_LOCK Power supply fan lock detection signal 14 FNM117 Gripper belt motor
15 FNM116 Gripper arm motor
Trimming module (100-sheet stapling)
16 FNM121 Take-up transport motor
No,/Display item Content 17 FNM112 Take-up swing motor
1 FTS108 Cutter motor clock sensor 18 FNM118 Paper holding lever motor
2 FTS105 Registration home position sensor 19 FNM109 Rear alignment motor
3 FTS106 Press motor home position sensor 20 FNCL102 Shutter clutch
4 FTS104 Rear estrangement motor home position sensor 21 FNM122 Paper delivery lower transport motor
5 FTS102 Front estrangement motor home position sensor 22 FNSL101 Oscillation safety switch solenoid
6 FTS103 Paper delivery sensor 23 FNFAN102 PWB cooling fan
7 FTS101 Inlet sensor 24 FNFAN103 Upper tray cooling fan
8 FTS111 Waste paper full sensor 25 FNFAN104 Lower tray cooling fan
9 FTS109 Waste paper box detection sensor 26 PIM301 Transfer unit transport motor lock (*1)
10 FTSW1-1 DIPSW1 detection
11 FTSW1-2 DIPSW2 detection *1: Operates only when the transport unit is installed.
Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling)
14 FTSW2 PUSHSW detection No,/Display item Content
1 FPPM Finisher saddle paper positioning motor
2 FSIFM Finisher saddle entry port transport motor
3 FSFM Finisher saddle transport motor
3-3 4 FSFOM Finisher paper folding motor
Purpose Operation test/check 5 FSGM Finisher guide motor
6 FSJM Finisher saddle alignment motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in 7 FSFSTM Finisher stitch motor front
the finisher and the control circuit. 8 FSRSTM Finisher stitch motor rear
Section Finisher 9 FSLGM Finisher paper holding motor
Operation/Procedure 10 FSFS Finisher saddle flapper solenoid
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. 11 FS1DFS Finisher paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
12 FS2DFS Finisher paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
13 FSFCS Finisher transport plate contact solenoid
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Saddle stitch finisher (100-sheet stapling)
Finisher (50-sheet stapling) No,/Display item Content
1 FSM200 Entry port transport motor
2 FSM201 Transport motor
1 PDPGS Finisher paper pass paper gate solenoid
3 FSM212 Alignment roller (lead edge roller) motor
2 PDPTM Finisher paper pass paper transport motor
4 FSSL206 Inlet port path select solenoid
3 PDCF Finisher paper pass cooling fan
5 FSSL205 Lead edge stopper solenoid
4 FFM Finisher paper transport motor 1
6 FSSL203 Lead edge separation solenoid 1
5 FAM Finisher bundle paper exit motor
7 FSSL204 Lead edge separation solenoid 2
6 FFJM Finisher alignment motor front
8 FSM202 Alignment motor
7 FRJM Finisher alignment motor rear
9 FSM203 Lead edge stopper motor
8 FFSM Finisher staple motor
10 FSM204 Roller guide motor
9 FTLM1 Finisher tray 1 lift motor
11 FSM210 Rear edge holding motor
10 FTLM2 Finisher tray 2 lift motor
12 FSM211 Rear edge shift motor
11 FFSM Finisher staple motor
13 FSM213 Flapping motor
No,/Display item Content Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling)
14 FSM214 Pull-in roller (separation) motor Setting Default
15 FSM209 Staple motor Item/Display Content
range value
16 FSM206 Folding motor A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 197 - 200
17 FSM205 Push motor POSITION adjustment 203
B FOLDING Saddle folding position 192 - 200
Punch module (Finisher (50-sheet stapling)) POSITION adjustment 208
No,/Display item Content C FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10
1 FPNM Punch motor ADJUST adjustment (front)
2 FPSM Punch side registration motor D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 94 - 106 100
REAR (Rear, one position)
Folding unit (100-sheet stapling) E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 94 - 106 100
FRONT (one position in front)
No,/Display item Content F PUNCH Punch center adjustment 30 - 70 50
1 FLSOL2 Folding/Straight branch solenoid CENTER
2 FLSOL3 Separation solenoid G PUNCH Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
3 FLSOL5 Internal 3-fold stopper solenoid HOLE adjustment
4 FLM11 Folding transport motor
5 FLM15 Folding position adjustment motor Finisher (100-sheet stapling)
6 FLM13 Exit port motor 2
Setting Default
7 FLM14 Exit port motor 1 Item/Display Content
range value
8 FLM5 Inlet port motor A BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
9 FLSOL4 Internal 3-fold tray branch solenoid SHIFT1 adjustment 1
10 FLM8 Upper stopper motor B BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
11 FLM9 Internal 3-fold stopper adjustment motor SHIFT2 adjustment 2
12 FLM10 Lead edge holding guide motor C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
13 FLM7 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) motor D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
14 FLCL3 Folding position adjustment clutch (normal) FRONT (Front 1 position/Small width)
15 FLCL4 Folding position adjustment clutch (reverse) (S-WIDTH)
E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
Trimming module (100-sheet stapling) FRONT (Front 1 position/Wide width)
(W-WIDTH)
F STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
1 FTM101 Trimmer transport motor REAR (Rear 1 position/Small width)
2 FTM103 Inlet port separation motor (S-WIDTH)
3 FTM104 Paper delivery separation motor G STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
4 FTM102 Registration motor REAR (Rear 1 position/Wide width)
5 FTM106 Cutter motor (W-WIDTH)
6 FTSL101 Registration solenoid H STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 85 - 115 100
7 FTM105 Press motor CENTER (Center 2 positions)
8 FTSL102 Paddle solenoid I PUNCH Y *1 Punch hole position 85 - 115 100
adjustment
(Y: Main scanning direction)
J PUNCH X *1 Punch hole position 50 - 150 100
adjustment
3-10
(X: Sub scanning direction)
Purpose Adjustment K PUNCH Punch mode skew 98 - 102 100
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. SKEW *1 adjustment
L PUNCH Punch mode skew 99 - 103 100
Section Finisher
SKEW SHIN *1 adjustment (thin paper)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch *1: Not saved when the punch is not installed.
panel. Saddle stitch finisher (100-sheet stapling)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Setting Default
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Item/Display Content
range value
Finisher (50-sheet stapling) A BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
SHIFT1 adjustment 1
Setting Default B BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
range value SHIFT2 adjustment 2
A FRONT Alignment position 0 - 20 10 C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
ADJUST adjustment (front) D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
B STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 94 - 106 100 FRONT (Front 1 position/Small
REAR (Rear, one position) (S-WIDTH) width)
C STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 94 - 106 100 E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
FRONT (one position in front) FRONT (Front 1 position/Wide
D PUNCH Punch center adjustment 30 - 70 50 (W-WIDTH) width)
CENTER F STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
E PUNCH Punch hole position 46 - 52 50 REAR (Rear 1 position/Small
HOLE adjustment (S-WIDTH) width)
G STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
REAR (Rear 1 position/Wide width)
(W-WIDTH)
H STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 85 - 115 100
CENTER (Center 2 positions)
Setting Default Display Sensor name
range value INSHP1 No. 1 pickup arm HP detection
I PUNCH Y *2 Punch hole position 85 - 115 100 INSEXT Outlet port sensor
adjustment (Y: Main INSSZ13 No. 1 paper size sensor 3
scanning direction) INSSZ12 No. 1 paper size sensor 2
J PUNCH X *2 Punch hole position 50 - 150 100 INSSZ11 No. 1 paper size sensor 1
adjustment (X: Sub
PPRLNG2 No. 2 length sensor
scanning direction)
PPRLNG1 No. 1 length sensor
K PUNCH Punch mode skew 98 - 102 100
PPREND2 No. 2 paper end detection
SKEW *2 adjustment
PPREND1 No. 1 paper end detection
L PUNCH Punch mode skew 99 - 103 100
SKEW SHIN *2 adjustment (thin paper) NEREND2 No. 2 near end detection
M SDL FOLD Saddle folding position 80 - 120 100 FECVROP1 No. 1 paper size sensor
adjustment INSSZ25 No. 2 paper size sensor 5
N SDL STPL Saddle stitch position 80 - 120 100 INSSZ24 No. 2 paper size sensor 4
O SDL DIVIDE Saddle separation position 85 - 115 100 INSSZ22 No. 2 paper size sensor 2
P SDL WIDTH Saddle alignment width 80 - 120 100 INSSZ15 No. 1 paper size sensor 5
Q STPL/FOLD 1 Stapling/Folding position 42 - 58 50 INSFDRSW Front door SW
adjustment value 13x19 VTRCVRSW Vertical transport cover SW
R UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50 FECVROP2 No. 2 cover open detection
FOLD 1 adjustment value A4R/LTRR
S UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
FOLD 2 adjustment value B4/LGL
T UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50 3-31
FOLD 3 adjustment value A3/LDR
Purpose Operation check
U UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
FOLD 4 adjustment value SRA3/ Function (Purpose) Inserter individual load check
12x18 Section Inserter
V UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
FOLD 5 adjustment value 13x19
Operation/Procedure
W UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50 1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
FOLD 6 adjustment value (User- touch panel key.
defined size) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation.
X TRIMMER Trimmer registration position 50 - 150 100
3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation.
REG S *1 adjustment (Small size)
Y TRIMMER Trimmer registration position 50 - 150 100 [Display items]
REG L *1 adjustment (Large size)
Display Content
Z TRIMMER Trimmer cut position 50 - 150 100
CUT S *1 adjustment (Small size) TRSH_M Horizontal transport motor
AA TRIMMER Trimmer cut position 50 - 150 100 TRSV_M Vertical transport motor
CUT L *1 adjustment (Large size) PLOUT2_M No. 2 pull-out motor
PLOUT1_M No. 1 pull-out motor
*1: Setting can be made only when the trimmer unit is installed. FEED2_M No. 2 paper feed motor
*2: Not saved when the punch is not installed. FEED1_M No. 1 paper feed motor
PIKUP2_M No. 2 pickup motor
PIKUP1_M No. 2 pickup motor
TRYLFT2M No. 2 lift motor
3-30
TRYLFT1M No. 1 lift motor
Function (Purpose) Inserter sensor check
Section Inserter
3-40
Operation/Procedure
1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed
on the screen is highlighted. Function (Purpose) Paper folding unit sensor check
2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages. Section Paper folding unit
Operation/Procedure
Display Sensor name
INSENT Inlet port sensor
on the screen is highlighted.
INSOUT Paper exit sensor
VTRS2 No. 2 vertical transport sensor 2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages.
VTRS1 No. 1 vertical transport sensor
Sensor name Content
PLOUT2 No. 2 pull-out sensor
(Display)
PLOUT1 No. 1 pull-out sensor
FLENTRY Paper reception start request
INSFEED2 No. 2 paper feed sensor
FLEXIT_ACK Paper exit start response
INSFEED1 No. 1 paper feed sensor
FLS30 Speed reduction timing sensor
NEREND1 No. 1 near end detection
FLS31 Separation timing sensor
LWRLMT2 No. 2 lower limit detection
FLS32 Folding position accurate sensor
LWRLMT1 No. 1 lower limit detection
FLS33 Upper stopper section paper sensor
UPRLMT2 No. 2 upper limit detection
FLS25 Lead edge hold guide HP sensor
UPRLMT1 No. 1 upper limit detection
FLS24 Internal 3-fold stopper HP sensor
INSHP2 No. 2 pickup arm HP detection
FLS23 Upper stopper section HP sensor
Sensor name Content Setting Default
(Display) range value
FLS22 Paper exit 1 paper sensor C FOLD S1 B4 B4 Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS28 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) HP sensor position adjustment
FLS26 Internal 3-fold tray (Paper exit tray) full sensor D FOLD S2 B4 B4 Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLS27 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) paper sensor position adjustment
FLS29 Folding unit pull-out sensor E FOLD S1 A4R A4R Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLORIHAN_LOCK Brushless motor lock detection signal position adjustment
FLFSW1 Front cover sensor F FOLD S2 A4R A4R Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
FLS20 Inlet port senor
G FOLD S1 LDR LDR Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLS21 Paper exit 2 sensor
position adjustment
FLSW3-1 DipSW1
H FOLD S2 LDR LDR Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-2 DipSW2
position adjustment
FLSW3-3 DipSW3
I FOLD S1 LGL LGL Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-4 DipSW4 position adjustment
FLSW3-5 DipSW5 J FOLD S2 LGL LGL Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-6 DipSW6 position adjustment
FLSW3-7 DipSW7 K FOLD S1 LTRR Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW3-8 DipSW8 LTRR position adjustment
FLSW1 PushSW1 L FOLD S2 LTRR Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
FLSW2 PushSW2 LTRR position adjustment
FLFAN3_LOCK Power fan lock detection signal M FOLD IN T1 A4R internal 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
A4R folding position adjustment
N FOLD IN T2 A4R internal 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
A4R folding position adjustment
3-41 O FOLD IN T1 LTRR internal 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
Purpose Operation check LTRR folding position adjustment
P FOLD IN T2 LTRR internal 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
Function (Purpose) Paper fold unit individual load check LTRR folding position adjustment
Section Paper folding unit Q FOLD OUT A4R external 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
Operation/Procedure T1 A4R folding position adjustment
R FOLD OUT A4R external 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the T2 A4R folding position adjustment
touch panel key. S FOLD OUT LTRR external 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. T1 LTRR folding position adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation. T FOLD OUT LTRR external 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
T2 LTRR folding position adjustment
[Display item] U FOLD Q1 A4R 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
No,/Display Content A4R position adjustment
1 FLSOL2 Folding/Straight branch solenoid V FOLD Q2 A4R 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
A4R position adjustment
2 FLSOL3 Separation solenoid
W FOLD Q1 LTRR 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
3 FLSOL5 Internal 3-fold stopper solenoid
LTRR position adjustment
4 FLM11 Folding transport motor
X FOLD Q2 LTRR 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
5 FLM15 Folding position adjustment motor
LTRR position adjustment
6 FLM13 Outlet port motor 2
Y FOLD Q1 LGL LGL 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
7 FLM14 Outlet port motor 1 position adjustment
8 FLM5 Inlet port motor Z FOLD Q2 LGL LGL 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
9 FLSOL4 Internal 3-fold tray branch solenoid position adjustment
10 FLM8 Upper stopper motor AA FOLD H1 A4R A4R 2-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
11 FLM9 Internal 3-fold stopper adjustment motor position adjustment
12 FLM10 Lead edge hold guide motor AB FOLD H1 LTRR 2-fold first position 50 - 150 100
13 FLM7 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) motor LTRR adjustment
14 FLCL3 Folding position adjustment clutch (Normal) AC FOLD IN S Z-fold X position fine 46 - 53 50
15 FLCL4 Folding position adjustment clutch (Reverse) FINE adjustment designation data
AD FOLD IN T Internal 3-fold X position fine 36 - 60 48
FINE adjustment designation data
AE FOLD OUT T External 3-fold X position 36 - 60 48
3-42 FINE fine adjustment designation
data
Purpose Adjustment AF FOLD Q1 4-fold X position fine 46 - 60 48
Function (Purpose) Paper folding unit adjustment FINE adjustment designation data
Section Paper folding unit AG FOLD Q2 4-fold Y position fine 50 - 60 52
FINE adjustment designation data
Operation/Procedure AH FOLD H FINE 2-fold X position fine 46 - 54 50
1) Select an adjustment item with the touch panel scroll key. adjustment designation data
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
A FOLD S1 A3 A3 Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
B FOLD S2 A3 A3 Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
Variation
Variation Item Content
Item Content value
value
P When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
A When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
a is decreased.
B When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is decreased.
C When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
D When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased. Variation
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of Item Content
value
b is decreased. Q When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
E When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm a is increased.
a is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of a is decreased.
a is decreased. R When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
F When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm b is increased.
b is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of b is decreased.
b is decreased. S When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
G When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm a is increased.
a is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of a is decreased.
a is decreased. T When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
H When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm b is increased.
b is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of b is decreased.
b is decreased.
I When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
J When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is decreased.
K When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased. Variation
Item Content
L When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm value
b is increased. U When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of a is increased.
b is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
a is decreased.
V When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is decreased.
W When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
X When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
Variation When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
Item Content
value b is decreased.
M When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm Y When the adjustment value is increased, the length of
a is increased. a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of 0.1mm
a is decreased. a is decreased.
N When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm Z When the adjustment value is increased, the length of
b is increased. b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of 0.1mm
b is decreased. b is decreased.
O When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
Variation
Item Content Variation
value Item Content
value
AA When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased. AG When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of b is increased.
b is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased.
AB When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is decreased.
Variation
Item Content
value
AH When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
Variation
Item Content a is decreased.
value
AC When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
a is decreased. 3-50
Function (Purpose) Decurler sensor check
Section Decurler
Operation/Procedure
on the screen is highlighted.
Item Content Variation 2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages.
value
AD When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm No,/Sensor name (Display) Content
a is increased. 1 DCS100 Decurler unit transport path sensor
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of 2 DCTRS_MOT_FAULT Decurler transport motor driver IC error
a is decreased. detection signal
3 DCSW100 Decurler unit front cover switch
4 DCMOT_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 3 alarm signal
5 DCTOP_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 1 alarm signal
6 DCBTM_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 2 alarm signal
7 DCSW1-1 DIPSW1detection
8 DCSW1-2 DIPSW2 detection
9 DCSW1-3 DIPSW3 detection
Variation 10 DCSW1-4 DIPSW4 detection
Item Content 11 DCSW2 PUSHSW detection
value
AE When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm 12 PDPPD1 Finisher paper relay paper transport
a is increased. detector 1
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of 13 PDPPD2 Finisher paper relay paper transport
a is decreased. detector 2
14 PDOS Finisher paper relay cover open/close
sensor
15 FFANLK Finisher fan motor lock detection
Variation
Item Content
value
AF When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
3-51 Display Content
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
Function (Purpose) Decurler individual load check Paper feed option: Paper pass unit sensor
Section Decurler unit Display Content
Operation/Procedure L1DDR01 Machine - Relay connection sensor
L1DDR02 Interface unit upper open/close sensor
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
L1DDR03 Interface unit PG open/close sensor
touch panel key.
L1DFR01 Interface transport sensor 1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. L1DFR02 Interface transport sensor 2
3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation. L1DFR03 Interface transport sensor 3
[Display item] Paper feed option: Paper pass unit sensor, Multi bypass tray
No./Display Content sensor
1 DCM100 Decurler transport motor
Display Content
2 DCFAN100 Decurler unit fan 1
L1MPFS Manual paper feed sensor
L1MTS Manual feed transport sensor
L1DFB01 Manual feed paper entry sensor
5 PDPTM Finisher paper relay paper transport motor
L1MPES Manual feed paper sensor
6 PDPGS Finisher paper relay paper gate solenoid
L1MSLIDE Manual feed slide detector
7 PDCF Finisher paper relay cooling fan
L1MULS Upper limit sensor
8 PBM102 Relay unit transport motor 2
L1MLLS Lower limit sensor
L1MPVS1 Remaining quantity sensor 1
L1MPVS2 Remaining quantity sensor 2
L1MLSW Lift switch
L1MLS Manual feed tray paper length sensor
4 L1MSIZ1 Size sensor 1
L1MSIZ2 Size sensor 2
4-2 L1MSIZ3 Size sensor 3
Purpose Operation test/check
sors and detectors in the desk/large capac- LCT unit sensor
ity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of
Display Content
those.
L1DFTRC TRC signal (1 series)
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) L1DO001 2 series installation detection
Operation/Procedure L1DO002 Interface unit installation detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- L1DO003 Horizontal transport unit installation detection
played. L1DO004 Manual feed unit installation detection
L1DD001 Machine - LCT1 connection sensor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted. L1DD002 LCT1 front door open/close sensor
L1DD003 Transport open/close sensor 1 (1 series)
A4LCC sensor L1DD004 Transport open/close sensor 2 (1 series)
Display Content L1DD005 Vertical transport open/close sensor (1 series)
LPFD LCC transport detector L1DD006 Horizontal unit insertion sensor
LUD LCC tray upper limit detector L1DF001 Vertical transport sensor 1 (1 series)
LDD LCC tray lower limit detector L1DF002 Vertical transport sensor 2 (1 series)
LPED LCC tray paper empty detector L1DF003 Vertical transport sensor 3 (1 series)
LCLD LCC tray open/close detector L1DF004 Vertical transport sensor 4 (1 series)
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch L1DF005 LCT paper exit sensor (1 series)
LRE LCC lift motor encoder L1DF006 Horizontal transport sensor 1
L24VM LCC24V power monitor L1DF007 Horizontal transport sensor 2
LLSW LCC upper limit switch L1DF008 Horizontal transport sensor 3
LCCD LCC main unit connection detection L1DF009 Horizontal transport sensor 4
L1DF010 Horizontal transport sensor 5
A3LCC sensor
LCT unit sensor: Cassette tray 1 sensor
Display Content
LPFD LCC transport detector Display Content
LUD LCC tray upper limit detector L1DF101 Paper exit sensor 1cs
LDD LCC tray lower limit detector L1DT101 Cassette insertion detection switch 1cs
LPED LCC tray paper empty detector L1DT102 Upper limit switch 1cs
LCLD LCC tray open/close detector L1DT103 Paper empty sensor 1cs
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch L1DT104 Lift motor encoder 1cs
LRE LCC lift motor encoder L1DT105 LCC tray lock sensor 1cs
L24VM LCC24V power monitor L1DT106 Upper limit sensor 1cs
LLSW LCC upper limit switch L1DT107 Lower limit sensor 1cs
LPUSW LCC paper upper surface detection switch L1DT108 Reverse winding detection switch 1cs
LRRSW LCC reverse winding detection switch L1DT109 Tray descending switch 1cs
LTLSW LCC tray lift switch L1DT110 Paper upper surface sensor 1cs
LTLD LCC tray lock sensor L1DT111 Paper length sensor 1cs
LIPSW LCC illegal paper detection SW L1DT112 Size sensor 1 1cs
Display Content LCT cassette tray 1
L1DT113 Size sensor 2 1cs Display Content
L1DT114 Size sensor 3 1cs L1MT101 Lift motor 1cs
L1DT115 Size sensor 4 1cs L1MT102 Inlet fan motor 1cs
L1MT103 Outlet fan 1cs
LCT unit sensor: Cassette tray 2 sensor
L1MT104 Assist fan motor 1cs
Display Content L1SL101 Suction valve solenoid 1cs
L1DF201 Paper exit sensor 2cs L1SL102 Lock solenoid 1cs
L1DT201 Cassette insertion detection switch 2cs L1CL101 Paper feed clutch 1cs
L1DT202 Upper limit switch 2cs L1CL102 Transport clutch 1cs
L1DT203 Paper empty sensor 2cs L1HT101 Hot air heater 1cs
L1DT204 Lift motor encoder 2cs L1LD101 Lift LED 1cs
L1DT205 LCC tray lock sensor 2cs L1CHK101 Wind pressure measuring operation 1cs
L1DT206 Upper limit sensor 2cs
L1DT207 Lower limit sensor 2cs LCT cassette tray 2
L1DT208 Reverse winding detection switch 2cs
Display Content
L1DT209 Tray descending switch 2cs
L1MT201 Lift motor 2cs
L1DT210 Paper upper surface sensor 2cs
L1MT202 Inlet fan motor 2cs
L1DT211 Paper length sensor 2cs
L1MT203 Outlet fan 2cs
L1DT212 Size sensor 1 2cs
L1MT204 Assist fan motor 2cs
L1SL201 Suction valve solenoid 2cs
L1SL202 Lock solenoid 2cs
L1CL201 Paper feed clutch 2cs
L1CL202 Transport clutch 2cs
L1HT201 Hot air heater 2cs
L1LD201 Lift LED 2cs
4-3
L1CHK201 Wind pressure measuring operation 2cs
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
the control circuit of those. 4-5
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC)
touch panel key. and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC).
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
The selected load performs the operation. Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Check the ON operation
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
A4LCC
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
Display Content
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
LPFM LCC transport motor
highlighted.
LLM LCC lift motor
Check the OFF operation
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid Press the highlighted button which is ON.
LTRC LCC transport clutch When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
A3LCC display is maintained.
Display Content
Button Content
LPFM LCC transport motor
LTRC A4LCC, A3LCC, multi-stage LCT transport clutch
LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
LTLED LCC tray LED lamp
LTLS LCC tray lock solenoid
LFAN LCC separation auxiliary fan
Paper feed option: Paper pass unit

Display Content
L1MTR01 Paper pass unit transport motor
L1CLR01 Paper pass unit transport clutch
L1LDR01 Paper pass unit LED
LCT unit
Display Content
L1MT001 Transport motor 1 (1 series)
L1PW001 Heat-retention heater relay (1 series)
L1CL001 Horizontal transport clutch
4-10
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) LCT warm air heater temperature setting
Section LCT
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key to save the setting value into the EEPROM and
the RAM.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A WARM AIR TEMP. (PLAIN) Warm air heater temperature setting: Normal paper 20 - 80 45
B WARM AIR TEMP. (HEAVY1,2) Warm air heater temperature setting: Heavy paper 1, 2 20 - 80 45
C WARM AIR TEMP. (HEAVY3,4) Warm air heater temperature setting: Heavy paper 3, 4 20 - 80 45
D WARM AIR TEMP. (THIN) Warm air heater temperature setting: Thin paper 20 - 80 45
E WARM AIR TEMP. (GROSSY) Warm air heater temperature setting: Glossy paper 20 - 80 45
F WARM AIR TEMP. (OTHER) Warm air heater temperature setting: Other 20 - 80 45
G WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (PLAIN) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 1
Normal paper 1: Disable
H WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (HEAVY1,2) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 0
Heavy paper 1, 2 1: Disable
I WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (HEAVY3,4) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 0
Heavy paper 3, 4 1: Disable
J WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (THIN) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 1
Thin paper 1: Disable
K WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (GROSSY) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 0
Glossy paper 1: Disable
L WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (OTHER) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 1
Other 1: Disable
4-11
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) LCT fan Duty setting
Section LCT
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key to save the setting value into the EEPROM and
the RAM.
When the set value is 50, the fan duty is 50%.
NOTE: When the fan duty is set to 0 - 14%, the fan does not rotate.

A VACUUM FAN DUTY (PLAIN - L) Suction fan Duty: Normal paper Large size 30 - 100 60
B VACUUM FAN DUTY (PLAIN - M) Suction fan Duty: Normal paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
C VACUUM FAN DUTY (PLAIN - S) Suction fan Duty: Normal paper Small size 30 - 100 60
D VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - L) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Large size 30 - 100 90
E VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - M) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Middle size 30 - 100 90
F VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - S) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Small size 30 - 100 90
G VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - L) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Large size 30 - 100 90
H VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - M) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Middle size 30 - 100 90
I VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - S) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Small size 30 - 100 90
J VACUUM FAN DUTY (THIN - L) Suction fan Duty: Thin paper Large size 30 - 100 60
K VACUUM FAN DUTY (THIN - M) Suction fan Duty: Thin paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
L VACUUM FAN DUTY (THIN - S) Suction fan Duty: Thin paper Small size 30 - 100 60
M VACUUM FAN DUTY (GROSSY - L) Suction fan Duty: Glossy paper Large size 30 - 100 60
N VACUUM FAN DUTY (GROSSY - M) Suction fan Duty: Glossy paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
O VACUUM FAN DUTY (GROSSY - S) Suction fan Duty: Glossy paper Small size 30 - 100 60
P VACUUM FAN DUTY (OTHER - L) Suction fan Duty: Other Large size 30 - 100 60
Q VACUUM FAN DUTY (OTHER - M) Suction fan Duty: Other Middle size 30 - 100 60
R VACUUM FAN DUTY (OTHER - S) Suction fan Duty: Other Small size 30 - 100 60
S BLOWER FAN DUTY (PLAIN - L) Separation fan Duty: Normal paper Large size 30 - 100 60
T BLOWER FAN DUTY (PLAIN - M) Separation fan Duty: Normal paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
U BLOWER FAN DUTY (PLAIN - S) Separation fan Duty: Normal paper Small size 30 - 100 60
V BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - L) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Large size 30 - 100 90
W BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - M) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Middle size 30 - 100 90
X BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - S) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Small size 30 - 100 90
Y BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - L) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Large size 30 - 100 90
Z BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - M) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Middle size 30 - 100 90
AA BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - S) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Small size 30 - 100 90
AB BLOWER FAN DUTY (THIN - L) Separation fan Duty: Thin paper Large size 30 - 100 60
AC BLOWER FAN DUTY (THIN - M) Separation fan Duty: Thin paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
AD BLOWER FAN DUTY (THIN - S) Separation fan Duty: Thin paper Small size 30 - 100 60
AE BLOWER FAN DUTY (GROSSY - L) Separation fan Duty: Glossy paper Large size 30 - 100 60
AF BLOWER FAN DUTY (GROSSY - M) Separation fan Duty: Glossy paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
AG BLOWER FAN DUTY (GROSSY - S) Separation fan Duty: Glossy paper Small size 30 - 100 60
AH BLOWER FAN DUTY (OTHER - L) Separation fan Duty: Other Large size 30 - 100 60
AI BLOWER FAN DUTY (OTHER - M) Separation fan Duty: Other Middle size 30 - 100 60
AJ BLOWER FAN DUTY (OTHER - S) Separation fan Duty: Other Small size 30 - 100 60
AK ASSIST FAN DUTY (PLAIN - L) Side assist fan Duty: Normal paper Large size 0 - 100 10
AL ASSIST FAN DUTY (PLAIN - M) Side assist fan Duty: Normal paper Middle size 0 - 100 10
AM ASSIST FAN DUTY (PLAIN - S) Side assist fan Duty: Normal paper Small size 0 - 100 10
AN ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - L) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Large size 0 - 100 10
AO ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - M) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Middle size 0 - 100 10
AP ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - S) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Small size 0 - 100 10
AQ ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - L) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Large size 0 - 100 30
AR ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - M) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Middle size 0 - 100 10
AS ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - S) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Small size 0 - 100 10
AT ASSIST FAN DUTY (THIN - L) Side assist fan Duty: Thin paper Large size 0 - 100 10
AU ASSIST FAN DUTY (THIN - M) Side assist fan Duty: Thin paper Middle size 0 - 100 10
AV ASSIST FAN DUTY (THIN - S) Side assist fan Duty: Thin paper Small size 0 - 100 10
AW ASSIST FAN DUTY (GROSSY - L) Side assist fan Duty: Glossy paper Large size 0 - 100 10
AX ASSIST FAN DUTY (GROSSY - M) Side assist fan Duty: Glossy paper Middle size 0 - 100 10
AY ASSIST FAN DUTY (GROSSY - S) Side assist fan Duty: Glossy paper Small size 0 - 100 10
AZ ASSIST FAN DUTY (OTHER - L) Side assist fan Duty: Other Large size 0 - 100 10
BA ASSIST FAN DUTY (OTHER - M) Side assist fan Duty: Other Middle size 0 - 100 10
BB ASSIST FAN DUTY (OTHER - S) Side assist fan Duty: Other Small size 0 - 100 10
Display item Content Display range

4-14
CS2 HEATER CS2 CS heater temperature Temperature: 0 -
Purpose Check TEMP. sensor: Temperature 255degrees C
Function (Purpose) LCT temperature and humidity sensor mon- CS2 CS heater temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
itor display sensor: AD value
CS2 WARM CS2 CS warm air outlet port Temperature: 0 -
Section LCT AIR TEMP. temperature sensor: 255degrees C
Operation/Procedure Temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
When the machine enters the simulation mode, the current data CS2 CS warm air outlet port
are displayed. temperature sensor: AD value
CS2 TEMP. CS2 CS temperature sensor: Temperature: 0 -
Since the value varies depending on the use conditions and the Temperature 255degrees C
operating conditions, use the value as a reference only. CS2 CS temperature sensor: AD value: 0 - 65535
* Data are revised every 5 sec. AD value
CS2 RH CS2 CS humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100%
Display item Content Display range Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535
LCT1 TEMP. LCT1 series temperature Temperature: 0 - 255 CS2 CS humidity sensor:
sensor: Temperature degrees C AD value
LCT1 series temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
sensor: AD value * The AD value is displayed by converting the above display range
LCT1 RH LCT1 series humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100% into hexadecimal number.
Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535 * "C" is displayed as "deg" because of he display fonts.
LCT1 series humidity sensor:
AD value
CS1 HEATER CS1 CS heater temperature Temperature: 0 -
TEMP. sensor: Temperature 255degrees C
CS1 CS heater temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
sensor: AD value
CS1 WARM CS1 CS warm air outlet port Temperature: 0 -
AIR TEMP. temperature sensor: 255degrees C
Temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
CS1 CS warm air outlet port
temperature sensor: AD value
CS1 TEMP. CS1 CS temperature sensor: Temperature: 0 -
Temperature 255degrees C
CS1 CS temperature sensor: AD value: 0 - 65535
AD value
CS1 RH CS1 CS humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100%
Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535
CS1 CS humidity sensor:
AD value
5-4
5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
5-1
charge lamp and the control circuit.
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
Operation/Procedure
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
cuit. 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
The LCD is changed as shown below.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX -
MIN - the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. Item name Content
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are DL_K Discharge lamp K
checked. DL_C Discharge lamp C
DL_M Discharge lamp M
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
DL2_K After-transfer discharge lamp K
5-2
DL2_C After-transfer discharge lamp C
Purpose Operation test/check DL2_M After-transfer discharge lamp M
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater DL2_Y After-transfer discharge lamp Y
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. 6
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
6-1
Heater lamp operation check method:
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
frame fusing section. Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Operation/Procedure
Display Content
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
HL_UM Heater lamp main (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_US Heater lamp sub (Front surface of paper heat roller) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
HL_LM Heater lamp main (Back surface of paper heat roller) The selected load performs the operation.
HL_UW Upper assist heater lamp (Warm-up) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
5-3
sound.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner Item display name Content
lamp and the control circuit. Transport/ LCCM LCC transport motor
process RRM Registration motor
Section Scanner (reading) FRS Fusing lower separation pawl solenoid
Operation/Procedure FUM Fusing motor
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. POM_F Paper exit motor (normal rotation)(*1)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. POM_R Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)(*1)
WTM Waste toner transport motor
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
2TWTM Secondary transfer waste toner motor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. PTRC2 Vertical transport clutch upper
Descriptions of loads (for DSPF) PTRC1 Tray vertical transport clutch
TTRC Tandem transport clutch
Display Content
LCCC LCC transport clutch
OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp
DVC_K Developing clutch K
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp
DVC_C Developing clutch C
Descriptions of loads (except DSPF) DVC_M Developing clutch M
DVC_Y Developing clutch Y
Display Content PCSS Process control shutter solenoid
OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp PFM PS front motor
Item display name Content 6-3
Paper feed CPFM Paper feed motor
T1LUM Tandem tray 1 lift motor
T2LUM Tandem tray 2 lift motor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the trans-
C3LUM Tray 3 lift motor port unit and the control circuit.
C4LUM Tray 4 lift motor Section Process (Transport)
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
Operation/Procedure
T1PUC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
T2PUC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
1) Select the operation mode with the mode select button.
C3PUC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
Display Content
C4PUC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
1TC MID The cam is operated at the process speed in the plain paper
MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
mode.
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
1TC L1 The cam is operated at the process speed of low speed 1
T1PUS Tray 1 pickup solenoid (220m/s).
T2PUS Tray 2 pickup solenoid 1TC L2 The cam is operated at the process speed of low speed 2
C3PUS Tray 3 pickup solenoid (165m/s).
C4PUS Tray 4 pickup solenoid
LSU LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation of the mode
selected in 1) is performed.
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are
displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the Button Display Content Remarks
same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a 1TC MID BLACK Monochrome mode Black mode position -
change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the position Color mode position -
operation is stopped. COLOR Color mode position Black mode position -
FREE Drum separation Drum separation position
position - (Black mode position)
(Repeated in this
6-2 sequence.)
Purpose Operation test/check 1TC L1 BLACK Monochrome mode Black mode position -
position Color mode position -
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan Black mode position -
COLOR Color mode position
motor and its control circuit. Drum separation position
FREE Drum separation
Section Others position - (Black mode position)
(Repeated in this
Operation/Procedure
sequence.)
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. 1TC L2 BLACK Monochrome mode Black mode position -
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. position Color mode position -
COLOR Color mode position Black mode position -
The selected load performs the operation.
FREE Drum separation Drum separation position
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. - (Black mode position)
position
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively. (Repeated in this
sequence.)
Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
6-4
Display Content Purpose Operation test/check
POFM Paper exit fan motor rear exhaust Function (Purpose) Used to check the cleaning operation of the
Paper exit fan motor front PTC and the main charger.
Paper exit fan motor rear
Section Process
OZFM12 Ozone exhaust fan motor 1
Ozone exhaust fan motor 2 Operation/Procedure
OZFM3 Ozone exhaust fan motor 3 1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor 2) [MC] On the execution menu, the color is designated with K, C,
FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor M, and Y. (Two or more colors can be selected.)
FPRFM Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor F 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor R
TBFM Toner bottle cooling fan motor List of cleaner operations
VFM_R Main inside ventilation fan motor R Cleaning operation
Display Content
LSUFM LSU fan motor counter
ADUFM ADU transport cooling fan motor MC MC(K)COUNT MC cleaner operation
MFPFAN Controller fan motor, HDD fan motor MC(C)COUNT check (Color can be
POFM2_EX Paper exit cooling fan2 (For Europe) MC(M)COUNT selected.)
POFM2_F Paper exit cooling fan2 (F) (For Europe) MC(Y)COUNT
POFM2_R Paper exit cooling fan2 (R) (For Europe) PTC PTC COUNT PTC cleaner operation
VFM_BA Machine ventilation fan BA (For Europe) check
ALL All counter MC cleaner operation
check (Color cannot be
selected. All colors
cleaning) + PTC cleaner
operation check
6-6 AGING Aging operation setup
Purpose Operation test/check INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform fusing pressure release
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting
and applying, and to check the operations
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
of the control circuits.
DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
Section Fusing SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
Operation/Procedure CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting
1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fus-
ing pressure release are repeated.
7-6
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
Purpose Setting
played.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying - Fusing cycle.
applying pressure release - (Fusing pressure
Section
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
release Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
key.
2) Press [OK] key.
6-7
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
Purpose others * The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
Function (Purpose) Used to refresh the fuser belt. The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
Section fusing after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Operation/Procedure
Item Display Setting range Default value
1) Press EXECUTE key. and start fuser presure releasing. A CYCLE TIME(SEC) 1 - 900 3
2) The EXECUTE button is highlighted during decompression of
the fuser.
3) After completion of the fuser / decompression operation, the
screen transits to the screen for waiting for execution of the 7-8
fuser belt refreshing. Purpose Operation display
4) Press EXECUTE key. Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
The EXECUTE button changes to highlighted, and the fuser
Section
belt refresh processing is started.
After the fuser refresh processing is completed, the screen Operation/Procedure
returns to the normal end screen. Press [EXECUTE] key.
5) Press EXIT or BACK key to exit the simulation Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
6-90
Purpose Setting
7-9
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock Purpose Operation test/check
enable position) Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode
Section Scanner (Used to check the copy operation and the
Operation/Procedure image quality for each color).
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section

The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key.
(Two or more colors can be selected.)
7 The key of the selected color is highlighted.
7-1 Copying is performed with the selected color.
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper-
Purpose Setting
ation menu in the simulation mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
aging. K Setup/cancel of black
Section Others C Setup/cancel of cyan
M Setup/cancel of magenta
Operation/Procedure
Y Setup/cancel of yellow
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
7-12 Setting Default
Button Item Display Content
range value
Purpose Operation test/check LOW A LOW1 K developing 0 - 600 450
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets SPEED bias set value at
setting (for aging operation) DVB_K low speed 1
B LOW1 C developing 0 - 600 450
Section DSPF SPEED bias set value at
Operation/Procedure DVB_C low speed 1
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key. C LOW1 M developing 0 - 600 450
(Setting range:0 - 255) SPEED bias set value at
DVB_M low speed 1
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
D LOW1 Y developing 0 - 600 450
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- SPEED bias set value at
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. DVB_Y low speed 1
E LOW2 K developing 0 - 600 450
Setting Default SPEED bias set value at
range value DVB_K low speed 2
A ORIGINALS Document scan quantity 0 - 255 0 F LOW2 C developing 0 - 600 450
specification (for aging) SPEED bias set value at
DVB_C low speed 2
G LOW2 M developing 0 - 600 450
8 SPEED
DVB_M
bias set value at
low speed 2
H LOW2 Y developing 0 - 600 450
8-1 SPEED bias set value at
DVB_Y low speed 2
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit. 8-2
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously. Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
Section Process (Developing) printer mode and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure * When the middle speed is adjusted, the
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch low speed are also adjusted simultane-
panel. ously.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. Section Process (Charging)
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the Operation/Procedure
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) 1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each panel.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
output for 30 sec. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Setting Default
Button Item Display Content
range value The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K developing 0 - 600 450 output for 30 sec.
SPEED bias set value at When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
DVB_K middle speed
B MIDDLE C developing 0 - 600 450 Default value
Item/ Setting
SPEED bias set value at Button Content 65 cpm 75 cpm
Display range
DVB_C middle speed machine machine
C MIDDLE M developing 0 - 600 450 MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid 150 - 620 625
SPEED bias set value at SPEED bias set value 950
DVB_M middle speed GB_K at middle
D MIDDLE Y developing 0 - 600 450 speed
SPEED bias set value at B MIDDLE C charging/grid 150 - 620 625
DVB_Y middle speed SPEED bias set value 950
GB_C at middle
speed
C MIDDLE M charging/grid 150 - 620 625
SPEED bias set value 950
GB_M at middle
speed
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid 150 - 620 625
GB_Y at middle
speed
Default value
Item/ Setting
Button Content 65 cpm 75 cpm
Display range
machine machine
LOW A LOW1 K charging/grid 150 - 608
GB_K at low speed 1
B LOW1 C charging/grid 150 - 608
GB_C at low speed 1
C LOW1 M charging/grid 150 - 608
GB_M at low speed 1
D LOW1 Y charging/grid 150 - 608
GB_Y at low speed 1
E LOW2 K charging/grid 150 - 604
GB_K at low speed 2
F LOW2 C charging/grid 150 - 604
GB_C at low speed 2
G LOW2 M charging/grid 150 - 604
GB_M at low speed 2
H LOW2 Y charging/grid 150 - 604
GB_Y at low speed 2
8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Setting Default
range value
A TC1 LOW 1 CL K Primary transfer bias reference value Color K Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
B TC1 LOW 2 CL K Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
C TC1 MIDDLE CL K Middle speed 0 - 255 99
D TC1 LOW 1 CL C C Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
E TC1 LOW 2 CL C Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
F TC1 MIDDLE CL C Middle speed 0 - 255 99
G TC1 LOW 1 CL M M Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
H TC1 LOW 2 CL M Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
I TC1 MIDDLE CL M Middle speed 0 - 255 99
J TC1 LOW 1 CL Y Y Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
K TC1 LOW 2 CL Y Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
L TC1 MIDDLE CL Y Middle speed 0 - 255 99
M TC1 LOW 1 BW K Black and K Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
N TC1 LOW 2 BW K white Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
O TC1 MIDDLE BW K Middle speed 0 - 255 99
P TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias reference value Color Standard paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 145
Q TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
R TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 138
S TC2 PLAIN BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 138
T TC2 PLAIN2 CL SPX Color Standard paper 2 Front surface 0 - 255 145
U TC2 PLAIN2 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
V TC2 PLAIN2 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 138
W TC2 PLAIN2 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 138
Setting Default
range value
X TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Secondary transfer bias reference value Color Heavy paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 110
Y TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 103
Z TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 110
AA TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 103
AB TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 2 Front surface 0 - 255 110
AC TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 103
AD TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 110
AE TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 103
AF TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 3 Front surface 0 - 255 96
AG TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 87
AH TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 96
AI TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 87
AJ TC2 HEAVY4 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 4 Front surface 0 - 255 96
AK TC2 HEAVY4 CL DPX <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 87
AL TC2 HEAVY4 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 96
AM TC2 HEAVY4 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 87
AN TC2 OHP CL Color OHP Front surface 0 - 255 110
AO TC2 OHP BW <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AP TC2 ENVELOPE CL Black and Envelope Front surface 0 - 255 83
AQ TC2 ENVELOPE BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 83
AR TC2 THIN CL Color Thin paper Front surface 0 - 255 138
AS TC2 THIN BW <Middle speed> Back surface 0 - 255 138
AT TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL Black and Glossy paper Front surface 0 - 255 110
AU TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AV TC2 EMBOSS CL Color Embossed paper Front surface 0 - 255 96
AW TC2 EMBOSS BW <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 80
AX TC2 LABEL CL Black and Label paper Front surface 0 - 255 110
AY TC2 LABEL BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AZ TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW1 SPX Secondary transfer front edge bias In low speed 1 print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BA TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW1 DPX reference value Back surface 0 - 255 145
BB TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW2 SPX In low speed 2 print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BC TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW2 DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
BD TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX In middle speed print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BE TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
BF TC2 BACKEND LOW1 SPX Secondary transfer rear edge bias In low speed 1 print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BG TC2 BACKEND LOW1 DPX reference value Back surface 0 - 255 69
BH TC2 BACKEND LOW2 SPX In low speed 2 print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BI TC2 BACKEND LOW2 DPX Back surface 0 - 255 69
BJ TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX In middle speed print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BK TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0 - 255 69
BL TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW 1 Secondary transfer cleaning negative In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 76
BM TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW 2 bias reference value In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 76
BN TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 76
BO TC2 INTERVAL LOW 1 Bias reference value between papers In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 72
BP TC2 INTERVAL LOW 2 In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 72
BQ TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 72
BR TC2 COUNTER LOW 1 Counter bias reference value In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 72
BS TC2 COUNTER LOW 2 In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 72
BT TC2 COUNTER MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 72
BU PTC LOW 1 CL PTC current reference value Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 119
BV PTC LOW 2 CL Low speed 2 0 - 255 119
BW PTC MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 119
BX PTC LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 119
BY PTC LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 119
BZ PTC MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 119
CA PTC EMBOSS Both Low speed 2 0 - 255 187
CB CASE VOLT LOW 1 CL PTC case voltage reference value Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 0
CC CASE VOLT LOW 2 CL Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CD CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 0
CE CASE VOLT LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 0
CF CASE VOLT LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CG CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0
CH CASE VOLT EMBOSS Both Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CI TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 1 CL Secondary transfer drive roller bias Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 98
CJ TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 2 CL reference value Low speed 2 0 - 255 98
CK TC2 DRIVEROLL MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 98
CL TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 98
CM TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 98
CN TC2 DRIVEROLL MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 98
8-10
Function (Purpose) Main charger total current output setting
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
2) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
3) Press [OK] key.
Button Item Display Content Setting range Default value

MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (middle speed mode) K 60 - 110 70
B MIDDLE SPEED MC_C Main charger total current (middle speed mode) C 60 - 110 70
C MIDDLE SPEED MC_M Main charger total current (middle speed mode) M 60 - 110 70
D MIDDLE SPEED MC_Y Main charger total current (middle speed mode) Y 60 - 110 70
LOW1 A LOW1 SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) K 60 - 110 70
B LOW1 SPEED MC_C Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) C 60 - 110 70
C LOW1 SPEED MC_M Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) M 60 - 110 70
D LOW1 SPEED MC_Y Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) Y 60 - 110 70
LOW2 A LOW2 SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (low speed 2 mode) K 60 - 110 70
B LOW2 SPEED MC_C Main charger total current (low speed 2 mode) C 60 - 110 70
C LOW2 SPEED MC_M Main charger total current (low speed 2 mode) M 60 - 110 70
D LOW2 SPEED MC_Y Main charger total current (low speed 2 mode) Y 60 - 110 70
9 10
9-2 10-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
sors and detectors in the paper reverse supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
section (duplex section) and its control cir- related circuit.
cuit. Section Toner supply section
Section Duplex Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
played. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
are highlighted.
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1 NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 toner cartridges.
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in overtoner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
9-3
tridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making
Purpose Operation test/check a few black background copy in the single color copy mode
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in of the target color.
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
and its control circuit. Display Content
TNM_K Toner motor K
Section Duplex
TNM_C Toner motor C
Operation/Procedure TNM_M Toner motor M
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. TNM_Y Toner motor Y
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. TNHM_K Hopper motor K
The selected load performs the operation. TNHM_C Hopper motor C
TNHM_M Hopper motor M
TNHM_Y Hopper motor Y
Display Content
ADUM1 ADU motor 1
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
10-2
16
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
16--
remaining quantity sensor and the control
circuit. Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Section Toner supply section Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Operation/Procedure Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Press [EXECUTE] key to display "No toner remaining" or "Toner Operation/Procedure
remaining" in the toner hopper. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
No toner remaining: Normal display 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Toner remaining: Highlighted display
Display Content
TFSD_K Hopper remaining quantity sensor K
TFSD_C Hopper remaining quantity sensor C 21
TFSD_M Hopper remaining quantity sensor M
TFSD_Y Hopper remaining quantity sensor Y 21-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Section
13 Operation/Procedure
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
13-- counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.) ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
clarify.
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
Section panel.
Operation/Procedure 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 300K
COUNTER counter (Total) 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
14 (TOTAL) 999: Free
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 200K
COUNTER counter (Color) 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
14--
(COLOR) 999: Free
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
22
22-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check
15 Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each

section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
15--
Section
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble. Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
Section LCC/LCT
Operation/Procedure Display
Target Default range/
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. counter
Display Description
value No. of
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. digits
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8
quantity (BW) quantity of black
and white
TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8
(COL) quantity of color
Display 22-3
Target Default range/
Display Description Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
counter value No. of
digits Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8 misfeed count of each position.
quantity of black and white * Presumption of the faulty point by this
TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8 data is possible.
of full color
TOTAL (2COL) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8 Section
of 2-color Operation/Procedure
TOTAL (3COL) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8 The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
of 3-color up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
TOTAL Total use quantity 0 Max. 8
(SGL_COL) of single color
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
copy counter 22-4
COPY (COL) Full color copy 0 Max. 8 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
counter
COPY (2COL) 2-color copy 0 Max. 8
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
counter tory.
COPY Single color copy 0 Max. 8 Section
(SGL_COL) counter Operation/Procedure
Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
print counter
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
PRINT (COL) Full color print 0 Max. 8
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
counter
PRINT (2COL) 2-color print 0 Max. 8
counter 22-5
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print 0 Max. 8
Purpose Others
counter
PRINT Single color print 0 Max. 8 Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
(SGL_COL) counter unit (section).
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8 Section Firmware
filing document filing
print counter Operation/Procedure
DOC FIL (COL) Color document 0 Max. 8 The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
filing print counter When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
DOC FIL 2-color document 0 Max. 8 check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
(2COL) filing print counter
DOC FIL Single color 0 Max. 8 Display Content
(SGL_COL) document filing Serial No. (The codes for November and
S/N
print counter December are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8 BUNDLE Bundle version
other counter ICU-MAIN ICUM (MAIN section)
OTHER (COL) Color other counter 0 Max. 8 ICU-BIOS ICUM (BIOS section)
ASIC-MAIN ASIC (MAIN section)
ASIC-SUB ASIC (SUB section)
ASIC2 ASIC2
22-2 LANGUAGE Language support data version
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check LANGUAGE (LIST) Language data for list printing
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed EOSA ESCP font ROM
and troubles. (When the number of total UNICONTENTS Contents data for display
jam is considerably great, it is judged as SIM-TEXT Language data for simulation
necessary for repair.) PCL (PROFILE) Color profile data
POWER-CON Power controller program
Section
FONT BARCODE Font data for bar code
Operation/Procedure FONT PS PS font data
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed. FONT PCL PCL font data
FONT SPDL Simple PDL font data
Display Content Default value FONT OFFICE Office Direct font data
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 0 WATER MARK Water mark data
DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter 0 E-MANUAL Users manual data
TROUBLE Trouble counter 0 OCR-DIC OCR dictionary data
SCU SCU
DSPF DSPF
PCU PCU
DESK/ESK (TANDEM) Desk unit
LCT/LCC/LCT(A3LCC)/
LCT/LCC/LCT(A3LCC)/LCT(A3LCT)
LCT(A3LCT)
FINISHER/FINISHER
(FIN100)/ FINISHER Finisher
(4KFIN)/
SADDLE/
Saddle
SADDLE(FIN100)
PUNCH/PUNCH(4K) Punch unit
Display Content Number of
TRIMMER Trimmer digits of Default
Display Content
INSERTER Inserter display or value
FOLDING UNIT Folding unit type
FAX Standard FAX OC LAMP TIME Displays the total lighting *****:** 0
time of the lamp in the OC
FAX OPT1 FAX 1-Line (Option section)
section.
FAX OPT2 FAX 2-Line (Option section)
DSPF LAMP Displays the total lighting *****:** 0
ACU High compression PDF unit
TIME(*1) time of the lamp in the
FIERY Fiery DSPF section.
FONT UNICODE Unicode font data
The lamp lighting time is displayed in ** hours ** minutes.
The lamp lighting time is accumulated in all the modes.
*1: Displayed only when the DSPF is installed.
22-6
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data 22-9
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
firmware version, and the counter list.
Section Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
quantity) of each paper feed section.
Operation/Procedure
Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. Operation/Procedure
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
No. of Default
Display item Content
digits value
Item Print list mode Print content
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter 8 digits 0
DATA PATTERN NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
NO.2 SIM50-24 data
NO.3 Data related to the process control
2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED Simplex surface print (Default)
MFT Manual paper feed counter 8 digits 0
2-SIDED Duplex surface print
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter 8 digits 0
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step (A4LCCorA3LCC) (*1)
1). LCT1 Upper stage LCT paper feed 8 digits 0
counter (*1)
LCT2 Lower stage LCT paper feed 8 digits 0
counter (*1)
22-8 LCT_MFT LCT manual paper feed 8 digits 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check counter (*1)
ADU ADU paper feed counter 8 digits 0
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
TRAY1_TTL Accumulated tray 1 paper feed 8 digits 0
(counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF,
counter
and the scan (reading) unit.
Section counter
Operation/Procedure TRAY3_TTL Accumulated tray 3 paper feed 8 digits 0
counter
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner
related counters are displayed.
counter
MFT_TTL Accumulated manual paper 8 digits 0
Number of
feed counter (*1)
digits of Default
Display Content LCC_TTL Accumulated side LCC paper 8 digits 0
display or value
type feed counter (A4LCC or
A3LCC) (*1)
SPF Document feed quantity 8 digits 0
LCT1_TTL Accumulated upper stage LCT 8 digits 0
SCAN Scan counter 8 digits 0
paper feed counter (*1)
STAPLER Staple counter 8 digits 0
LCT2_TTL Accumulated lower stage LCT 8 digits 0
PUNCHER Puncher counter 8 digits 0
paper feed counter (*1)
STAMP Stamp counter 8 digits 0
LCT_MFT_TTL Accumulated LCT manual 8 digits 0
SADDLE Saddle staple counter 8 digits 0 paper feed counter (*1)
STAPLER
ADU_TTL Accumulated ADU paper feed 8 digits 0
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold 8 digits 0 counter
counter
TRAY1_RETRY Paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
COVER Cover open/close counter 8 digits 0 (Paper feed tray 1)
HP_ON HP detection count 8 digits 0 TRAY2_RETRY Paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
TRIMMER Trimmer counter 8 digits 0 (Paper feed tray 2)
FOLDING Paper folding counter 8 digits 0 TRAY3_RETRY Paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
INSERTER Inserter counter (Tray 1) 8 digits 0 (Paper feed tray 3)
INSERTER2 Inserter counter (Tray 2) 8 digits 0 TRAY4_RETRY Paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
INSERTER Inserter offline counter 8 digits 0 (Paper feed tray 4)
OFFLINE MFT_RETRY Manual paper feed retry 8 digits 0
DECURLER De-curler counter 8 digits 0 counter (*1)
GBC PUNCH GBC punch counter 8 digits 0 LCC_RETRY LCC paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
(*1)
No. of Default Item display
Display item Content Display content Content
digits value name
LCT1_RETRY LCT1 paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0 FOLDING UNIT MX-FD10 Folding unit
(*1)
LCT2_RETRY LCT2 paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0 *1: Option units are displayed only when they are installed.
(*1)
LCT_MFT_RETRY LCT Manual paper feed retry 8 digits 0
counter (*1) 22-11
*1: Displayed only when the option is installed. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
receive) of FAX.
22-10 (Only when FAX is installed)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration Operation/Procedure
(option, internal hardware). The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
Section are displayed.
Operation/Procedure Default
Display Content
The system configuration is displayed. value
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis- FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) 0
played.) FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX print quantity counter (for line 2) 0
FAX OUTPUT_L3 FAX print quantity counter (for line 3) 0
Item display FAX SEND FAX send counter 0
Display content Content
name FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter 0
MACHINE MX-6580N Main unit SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) 0
MX-7580N SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2) 0
SPF STANDARD Duplex single pass feeder SEND IMAGES_L3 FAX send quantity counter (for line 3) 0
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp SEND TIME FAX send time 0
LCC MX-LC12 A4 large capacity tray RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time 0
MX-LCX3 N A3 large capacity tray
MX-LC13 N Large capacity tray
PUNCHER MX-PN12A Punch module
MX-PN12B 22-12
MX-PN12C Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
MX-PN12D
Function (Purpose) Used to check the DSPF misfeed positions
MX-PN13A
and the number of misfeed at each posi-
MX-PN13B
tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
MX-PN13C
siderably great, it can be judged as
MX-PN13D
necessary for repair.)
MX-PNX4A
MX-PNX4B Section DSPF
MX-PNX4C Operation/Procedure
MX-PNX4D The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
FINISHER MX-FN21 4K finisher (100 sheets staple) up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
MX-FN22 4K saddle finisher
(100 sheets staple)
MX-FN19 4K finisher (50 sheets staple)
MX-FN20 4K saddle finisher
(50 sheets staple)
INSERTER MX-CF11 Inserter
FAX1 MX-FX15 Facsimile expansion kit
FAX2 MX-FL12 Fax line expansion kit
FAX3 MX-FL12 Fax line expansion kit
PS STANDARD PS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR55U Data security kit (commercial
version)
ICU_PWB *****MB ICU_REUS memory capacity
(REUS1)
ICU_PWB *****MB ICU_SOC memory capacity
(SOC)
HDD *****GB Hard disk capacity
SSD *****MB SSD capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
ACM(*1) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
EAM(*1) MX-AMX3 External account module
HC-PDF MX-EB11 Enhanced compression kit
CURL MX-RB15 Curl correction unit
TRIMMING MX-TM10 Trimming module
(100 sheets saddle finisher)
22-13
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.
Number of Life meter (+/- Number of

Display item Content Counter RPM
use days 1% unit) remaining days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING UNIT Fusing unit
FUSING BELT Fusing belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING MOTOR Fusing motor Not displayed Max. 8 0 - 999 Not displayed Not displayed
FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release drive Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
PRESSURE ROLLER Pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
SEPARATE PAWL Separation pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
SEPARATE PLATE Separation plate Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING WEB UNIT(L) Fusing lower web unit Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING WEB SEND(L) Fusing lower web cleaning send Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
counter
TC1 UNIT Primary transfer unit
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer blade Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PTC PTC counter Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PTC CLEAN PTC cleaner Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
TC2 UNIT Secondary transfer unit
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TC2 TRANSFER BLADE Secondary transfer blade Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PS PAPER PS paper dust removing Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
OZONE/TONER FILTER Ozone filter/Toner filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE UNIT(K)/(C)/(M)/ Developer unit K/C/M/Y
(Y)
DEVE CLUTCH(K)/(C)/ Developer clutch K/C/M/Y
(M)/(Y)
DEVE CTRG(K) Developer cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE CTRG(C) Developer cartridge C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE CTRG(M) Developer cartridge M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE CTRG(Y) Developer cartridge Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM UNIT(K)/(C)/(M)/ Drum unit K/C/M/Y
(Y)
DRUM CTRG(K) Drum cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM CTRG(C) Drum cartridge C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM CTRG(M) Drum cartridge M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM CTRG(Y) Drum cartridge Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(K) Main charger K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(C) Main charger C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(M) Main charger M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(Y) Main charger Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MC CLEAN(K) MC cleaner (K) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
MC CLEAN(C) MC cleaner (C) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
MC CLEAN(M) MC cleaner (M) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
MC CLEAN(Y) MC cleaner (Y) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
DRUM BLADE(K) Drum blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM BLADE(C) Drum blade C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM BLADE(M) Drum blade M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM BLADE(Y) Drum blade Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TONER CTRG(K) Toner cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG(C) Toner cartridge C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG(M) Toner cartridge M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG(Y) Toner cartridge Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
*1: For outside the range, "-----" is displayed.
22-14
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
Accumulated No. of Accumulated No. of near Accumulated No. of Remaining quantity

Display item Content installed cartridges (Unit) near end (Unit) end (Unit) (Unit: %)
INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K) Toner cartridge use counter (K) 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0-25%
TONER (C) Toner cartridge use counter (C) 25-50%
TONER (M) Toner cartridge use counter (M) 50-75%
TONER (Y) Toner cartridge use counter (Y) 75-100%
22-18 No. of Default

Display Content
digits value
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check FTP FTP Number of FTP send 8 0
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history. COUNTER
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send 8 0
Section
USB CNT Number of times of USB 8 0
Operation/Procedure storage
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed. TRIAL Trial mode counter (B/W 8 0
MODE_B&C & COLOR scan job)
Display item SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record 8 0
Content
Item name Date HDD_B/W quantity (B/W)
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record 8 0
of operation start) HDD_CL quantity (Color)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record 8 0
of operation end) HDD_2CL quantity (2-color)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record 8 0
HDD_SGL quantity (Single color)
22-19
22-40
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters
Purpose Error contents display
related to the scan - image send.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
Section
contents.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
1) Select the main error code.
No. of Default The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
Display Content
digits value
Network NET SCN Network scanner 8 0
scanner ORG_B/W document read quantity
counter (B/W scan job) 22-41
NET SCN Network scanner 8 0 Purpose JAM code contents display
ORG_CL document read quantity
Function (Purpose) Used to display the JAM code list and the
counter (Color scan job)
contents.
NET SCN Network scanner 8 0
ORG_2CL document read quantity Section
counter (2-Color scan Operation/Procedure
job)
1) Select the JAM code.
NET SCN Network scanner 8 0
ORG_SGL document read quantity Display can be changed by [ENGINE] and [SPF] keys.
counter (Single-color
scan job)
Internet INTERNET Number of internet FAX 8 0
FAX FAX OUTPUT output
INTERNET Number of internet FAX 8 0
FAX SEND sending page
OUTPUT
FAX RECEIVE receive
FAX SEND send
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of 8 0
COUNTER E-MAIL send
22-42
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys.
Counter Content Max.

JAM CODE/ number
Display data TOTAL TOTAL Remarks
Display Content TROUBLE DATE/TIME of
COUNT(BW) COUNT(CL)
CODE histories
PAPER JAM PAPER JAM Number of Generated Generated Total output Total output The head is the latest, and the
COUNT machine JAM JAM code date/time quantity of quantity of 50 bottom is the oldest. The max.
troubles (Machine) (YY/MM/DD black and color number of histories is 50.
SPF JAM SPF JAM Number of Generated HH:MM:SS) white When 50 is exceeded, the
COUNT SPF JAM JAM code 50 oldest one is not displayed
troubles (SPF) sequentially.
TROUBLE TROUBLE Number of Generated The head is the latest, and the
COUNT troubles trouble code bottom is the oldest. The max.
number of histories is 30.
30
When 30 is exceeded, the
oldest one is not displayed
sequentially.
Display data and contents (HISTORY2)

22-43
Item Content
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check NO. History number
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display DATE/TIME Occurrence date
TH_M External air temperature sensor temperature/AD
Section
value
Operation/Procedure HUD_M External air humidity sensor humidity/AD value
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 temperature/AD value
When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed. TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor (differential)
temperature/AD value
When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is dis-
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
played.
When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature and TUMD Fusing upper main thermistor (detection) AD value
humidity data are displayed. TH_US1 Fusing upper sub thermistor (differential)
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys. temperature/AD value
TH_US1_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor (compensation)
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
Item Content TU1D Fusing upper sub thermistor (detection) AD value
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles TH_LM1 Fusing lower main thermistor (differential)
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with temperature/AD value
SIM22-09 display content) TH_LM1_CS Fusing lower main thermistor (compensation)
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar temperature/AD value
with SIM27-18 display content) TL1D Fusing lower main thermistor (detection) AD value
TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
Display data and contents (HISTORY1) TH_LM2 Fusing lower main thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
Item Content Description
Detail display content of HISTORY1
NO No History number
JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main Display Content
DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date NON Inch series No paper size
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W) WLG fixed form Double Legal
TOTAL_CL Total Count (CL) Total counter (color) WLR Double Legal-R
P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size LD Ledger
P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type LDR Ledger-R (Double Letter)
JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode LG Legal
JN Job No First after JOB start or not LGR Legal-R
OF Offset Paper exit: Offset FC Foolscap
EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position FCR Foolscap-R
PC Punch Paper exit: Punch LT Letter
SP Staple Paper exit: Staple LTR Letter-R
IV Invoice (Mini)
*1: Refer to the detail display content of HISTORY1. IVR Invoice-R (Mini)
EC Executive
ECR Executive-R
A3W A3W (12x18 in)
Display Content Display Content
AWR Inch series A3W (12x18 in)-R 89 Domestic 120 x 235 mm
12 fixed form 22x17 08B special 90 x 205 mm
13 22x17R 08D (Envelope) 90 x 185 mm
14 22x34 08F 240 x 332 mm
15 22x34R 91 216 x 277 mm
16 34x44 93 197 x 267 mm
17 34x44R 95 190 x 240 mm
18 44x68 97 162 x 229 mm
19 44x68R 99 142 x 205 mm
01A 9x12 09B 119 x 197 mm
01B 9x12R 09D 120 x 176 mm
01C 13x19 09F 114 x 162 mm
01D 13x19R 0A1 98 x 148 mm
MLG Mexican-Legal 0A3 105 x 235 mm
MLR Mexican-Legal-R 0A5 95 x 217 mm
ALG Asian-Legal 0A7 98 x 190 mm
ALR Asian -Legal-R 0A9 92 x 165 mm
EXT Other Extra (Special) 0AA AB series E-version
A1 AB series A1 0AB AB series L-version
A1R fixed form A1R 0AC AB series panorama size
A2 A2 0AD AB series name card size
A2R A2R 0AE AB series identification photo
A3 A3 0AF AB series name card small
A3R A3R 0B0 Other A3 width
A4 A4 0B1 B4 width
A4R A4R 0B2 A4 width
A5 A5 0B3 A3 width (Long size)
A5R A5R 0B4 B4 width (Long size)
A6 A6 0B5 A4 width (Long size)
A6R A6R 0BC Custom (Large size)
B3 B3 0BD Custom (Small size)
B3R B3R 0BF Custom
B4 B4 0C2 Oversea Monarch
B4R B4R 0C3 special Monarch-R
B5 B5 0C4 (Envelope) DL
B5R B5R 0C5 DL-R
B6 B6 0C6 C4
B6R B6R 0C7 C4-R
54 A0x2 0C8 C5
55 A0x2 R 0C9 C5-R
A0 A0 0CA C6
A0R A0R 0CB C6-R
B0 B0 0CC C65
B0R B0R 0CD C65-R
B1 B1 0CE ISOB5
B1R B1R 0CF ISOB5-R
B2R B2 0D0 Size6-1/2
B2R B2R 0D1 Size6-1/2-R
K8 K8 0D2 Size9
K8R K8R 0D3 Size9-R
K16 K16 0D8 Com-10
16R K16R 0D9 Com-10-R
K32 K32 0DA Inch series E-version
32R K32R 0DB Inch series L-version
66 SRA3 0DC Inch series panorama size
67 SRA3R 0DD Inch series name card large
68 SRA4 0DE Inch series identification photo
69 SRA4R 0DF Inch series name card small
06A 318 x 469 mm 0EC Other Extra (Special large size)
06B 469 x 318 mm 0ED Extra (Special small size)
06C 234 x 318 mm 0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed)
06D 318 x 234 mm 0F0 Long size
06E 312 x 440 mm 0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in
06F 440 x 312 mm a coin vendor.)
70 220 x 312 mm
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T)
71 312 x 220 mm
82 Domestic DBL Postcard Display Content
83 special DBL Postcard-R UST User type
84 (Envelope) Postcard LHP Letter head paper
85 Postcard-R PNP Perforated sheet
87 119 x 277 mm RCL Recycled paper
Display Content 22-90
COL Color paper
PLN Standard paper
PRP Pre printed Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
OHP OHP Transparency Section
HV Heavy paper
Operation/Procedure
LBL Label sheet
ENV Envelope
1) Change the display with scroll key.
HG Postcard 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
TAB Tab sheet 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
THN Thin paper
US1 User type 1 Category Item Content
US2 User type 2 Machine status MACHINE STATUS LIST Machine status list
US3 User type 3 list *1
US4 User type 4 Printer test PCL SYMBOL SET LIST SPDL symbol set list *2
US5 User type 5 page PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST SPDL internal font list *2
US6 User type 6 PCL EXTENDED FONT SPDL extended font list
US7 User type 7 LIST *2
US8 User type 8 PS FONT LIST PS internal font list *2
US9 User type 9 KANJI FONT LIST PS KANJI font list *2
US10 User type 10 PS EXTENDED FONT LIST PS extended font list *2
US11 User type 11 NIC PAGE NIC page
HV2 Heavy paper 2 Address INDIVIDUAL LIST Address registration list
registration list GROUP LIST Group list
PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used)
*1 MEMORY BOX LIST Memory box list
HV3 Heavy paper 3
HV4 Heavy paper 4 Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing folder
filing list *1 FOLDER LIST list
GLS Glossy paper
Common PAPER SETTING LIST Paper setting list
EMB Embossed paper
MACHINE Machine identification
ECO Eco Crystal Paper
IDENTIFICATION settings list
Display content detail: Job mode (JOB) SETTINGS LIST
OPERATION SETTINGS Operation settings list
Display Content LIST
SHD Shading. KEYBOARD SETTINGS Keyboard settings list
PCL Process control LIST
SIM Test mode (Sim) DEVICE CONTROL LIST Device control list
ICP Interruption copy Home screen HOME SCREEN LIST Home screen list
CP Copy Copy setting COPY SETTINGS LIST Copy settings list
FXS FAX send scan Printer setting PRINTER SETTINGS LIST Printer settings list
AXS AXIS FAX/Image METADATA SET LIST Meta data set list
FXP FAX reception print send SCAN SETTINGS LIST Scan settings list
PR Printer FAX SETTINGS LIST Fax settings list
FXC FAX communication report print I-FAX SETTINGS LIST Internet fax settings list
00A Zaurus print Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing settings
SLF Self/Test print filing list SETTINGS LIST list
00C Document counter SHARP OSA SHARP OSA SETTINGS SHARP OSA settings list
RMT Remote maintenance setting LIST
00E SIM 52-01 Network NETWORK SETTINGS Network settings list
00F Tandem (Cordless handset) setting LIST
CFP Confidential print Security SECURITY SETTINGS Security settings list
NET Network scanner setting LIST
PRF Proof print Energy save ENERGY SAVE LIST Energy save settings list
setting
Image quality IMAGE QUALITY Image quality
adjustment ADJUSTMENT LIST adjustment list
Image sending IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
activity report ACTIVITY REPORT (FAX) report (FAX)
IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
ACTIVITY REPORT (SCAN) report (scanner)
IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
ACTIVITY REPORT report (Internet FAX)
(INTERNET FAX)
Transfer table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER Receive rejection
list LIST number table
ALLOW/REJECT MAIL & Receive rejection/allow
DOMAIN NAME LIST address
INBOUND ROUTING LIST Transfer table list
DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST To administrator transfer
list
*1 When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK

model, this setting is invalid.
*2 When Fiery is set, this setting is invalid.
23 24
23-2 24-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
troubles of misfeed is considerably great, nance, clear the counters.)
the judgment is made that repair is Section
required.)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
3) Press [YES] key.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
The target counter is cleared.
Item Button display Content
MACHINE Machine JAM counter
DATA PATTERN NO.1 JAM/Trouble history print
SPF DSPF JAM counter
NO.2 Paper feed counter, JAM history
TROUBLE Trouble counter
details, and temperature/humidity
history print
23-80 24-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
and paper transport in the paper feed sec- ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
tion and the paper transport section. Used
Section
to output the list of the operation status of
the sensor and the detectors in the paper Operation/Procedure
feed section and the paper transport sec- 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
tion. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport 3) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure The target counter is cleared.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
Display Content
paper transport is outputted.
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
in the paper feed and transport section.
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. ADU ADU paper feed counter
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending MFT Manual paper feed counter (*1)
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC or A3 LCC)
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. LCT1 Upper stage LCT paper feed counter (*1)
LCT2 Lower stage LCT paper feed counter (*1)
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection operation LCT_MFT LCT manual paper feed counter (*1)
or load operation name)
STANDARD Reference value (ms) *1: Displayed only when the option is installed.
CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the final
paper
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job on the
24-3
final paper
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs Purpose Data clear
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the
scan (reading) unit counter.
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the Section
market. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
23-81 3) Press [YES] key.
Purpose Operation test/check The target counter is cleared.
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
Display Display
SIM23-80.
SPF Document feed quantity
Section Paper feed, Paper transport SCAN Number of times of scan
Operation/Procedure STAPLER Staple counter
1) Connect the USB flash drive to the main unit. PUNCHER Puncher counter
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. STAMP Number of stamps
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
COVER Cover open/close counter
Display Display Display Content
HP_ON HP detection count Transfer TC1 UNIT Primary transfer unit (counter)
TRIMMER Trimmer counter TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter)
FOLDING Paper folding counter Primary transfer belt (Number of
INSERTER Inserter counter (Tray 1) use days)
INSERTER2 Inserter counter (Tray 2) Primary transfer belt
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter (Accumulated traveling distance)
DECURLER De-curler counter TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter)
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time Transfer blade (Number of use
DSPF LAMP TIME (*1) DSPF section lamp total lighting time days)
Transfer blade (Accumulated
*1: Display only when the DSPF is installed. traveling distance)
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller (Counter)
Transfer cleaning roller (Number
of use days)
24-4
Transfer cleaning roller
Purpose Data clear (Accumulated traveling distance)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the TC2 UNIT Secondary transfer unit (Counter)
printer counters of the transport unit and TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt (Counter)
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte- Secondary transfer belt (Number
nance, clear the counters.) of use days)
Secondary transfer belt
Section (Accumulated traveling distance)
Operation/Procedure TC2 TRANS BLADE Secondary transfer blade
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. (Counter)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Secondary transfer blade
(Number of use days)
3) Press [YES] key. Secondary transfer blade
The target counter is cleared. (Accumulated traveling distance)
PTC PTC PTC counter (Counter)
Display Content PTC counter (Number of use
Maintenance MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) days)
(Counter) PTC counter (Accumulated
Maintenance counter (Total) traveling distance)
(Number of use days) PTC CLEAN PTC counter (RPM)
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) Drum DRUM UNIT K Drum unit K (Counter)
(Counter) DRUM UNIT C Drum unit C (Counter)
Maintenance counter (Color) DRUM UNIT M Drum unit M (Counter)
DRUM UNIT Y Drum unit Y (Counter)
Fusing FUSING UNIT Fusing unit (counter)
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge K (Counter)
FUSING BELT Fusing belt (Counter)
Drum cartridge K (Number of use
Fusing belt (Number of use days) days)
Fusing belt (Accumulated Drum cartridge K (Accumulated
traveling distance) traveling distance)
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller (Counter) DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge C (Counter)
Fusing roller (Number of use Drum cartridge C (Number of use
days) days)
Fusing roller (Accumulated Drum cartridge C (Accumulated
traveling distance) traveling distance)
FUSING MOTOR Fusing motor (Number of use DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge M (Counter)
days)
Drum cartridge M (Number of use
Fusing motor (Accumulated days)
traveling distance)
Drum cartridge M (Accumulated
FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release drive traveling distance)
(Number of rotations)
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge Y (Counter)
PRESS ROLLER Pressure roller (Counter)
Drum cartridge Y (Number of use
Pressure roller (Number of use days)
days)
Drum cartridge Y (Accumulated
Pressure roller (Accumulated traveling distance)
traveling distance)
Main charger MAIN CHARGER K Main charger K (Counter)
SEPARATE PAWL Separation pawl (Counter)
Main charger K (Number of use
Separation pawl (Number of use days)
days)
Main charger K (Accumulated
Separation pawl (Accumulated traveling distance)
traveling distance)
MAIN CHARGER C Main charger C (Counter)
SEPARATE PLATE Separation plate (Counter)
Main charger C (Number of use
Separation plate (Number of use days)
days)
Main charger C (Accumulated
Separation plate (Accumulated traveling distance)
traveling distance)
MAIN CHARGER M Main charger M (Counter)
WEB UNIT(L) Fusing lower web unit (Counter)
Main charger M (Number of use
Fusing lower web unit (Number days)
of use days)
Main charger M (Accumulated
Fusing lower web cleaning send traveling distance)
counter (Counter)
Display Content Button
Content
Main charger MAIN CHARGER Y Main charger Y (Counter) display
Main charger Y (Number of use DV_K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
days) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Main charger Y (Accumulated Number of day that used developer (day) (K)
traveling distance) DV_C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
MC CLEAN K MC cleaner K (RPM) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
MC CLEAN C MC cleaner C (RPM) Number of day that used developer (day) (C)
MC CLEAN M MC cleaner M (RPM) DV_M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
MC CLEAN Y MC cleaner Y (RPM) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Drum blade DRUM BLADE K Drum blade K (Counter) Number of day that used developer (day) (M)
Drum blade K (Number of use DV_Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
days) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Drum blade K (Accumulated Number of day that used developer (day) (Y)
traveling distance) HP_K Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper (K)
DRUM BLADE C Drum blade C (Counter) Hopper loop count (K)
Drum blade C (Number of use HP_C Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper (C)
days)
Hopper loop count (C)
Drum blade C (Accumulated
HP_M Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper (M)
traveling distance)
Hopper loop count (M)
DRUM BLADE M Drum blade M (Counter)
HP_Y Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper (Y)
Drum blade M (Number of use
Hopper loop count (Y)
days)
Drum blade M (Accumulated NOTE: The "developer cartridge life meter" counter displayed in
traveling distance) SIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it is not
DRUM BLADE Y Drum blade Y (Counter) cleared when this simulation is executed.
Drum blade Y (Number of use
When the toner hopper is replaced with a new one or when
days)
toner in the hopper is cleaned, execute "HP_*."
Drum blade Y (Accumulated
traveling distance)
Other PS PAPER PS paper dust removing
(Counter) 24-35
PS paper dust removing
Purpose Data clear
OZONE/TONER Ozone filter/Toner filter (Counter) Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
FILTER Ozone filter/Toner filter (Number data.
of use days) Section
DEVE CLUTCH K DV Clutch K (Counter)
Operation/Procedure
DEVE CLUTCH C DV Clutch C (Counter)
DEVE CLUTCH M DV Clutch M (Counter)
DEVE CLUTCH Y DV Clutch Y (Counter) 2) Press [YES] key.
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
* The winding counter for the fusing web cleaning is cleared by
being synchronized with the fusing web cleaning feed counter.
* When "MAIN CHARGER K" is cleared, "MC CLEAN K" is also
cleared. (as well as CMY)
25
24-5 25-1
Purpose Data clear Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter value Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
and the toner hopper remaining quantity oping section.
counter. (After replacing developer, clear Section Process (Developing section)
these counters.)
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
3) Press [YES] key. played.
The target counter is cleared.
Sensor
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, the counters related to devel- name Sensor name
oper are automatically cleared. (Display)
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
Button
Content TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
display TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
DV_UT_K DV unit print counter (K) TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
DV_UT_C DV unit print counter (C) TSG_K Toner sensor control voltage input value (K)
DV_UT_M DV unit print counter (M) TSG_C Toner sensor control voltage input value (C)
DV_UT_Y DV unit print counter (Y) TSG_M Toner sensor control voltage input value (M)
TSG_Y Toner sensor control voltage input value (Y)
Display during execution of the simulation
Display Default
Content Sensor
item value
name Sensor name
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed Middle (Display)
LOW1 Process speed: Low speed 1 speed
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
LOW2 Process speed: Low speed 2 TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
TSG_K Toner sensor control voltage input value (K)
25-2
TSG_C Toner sensor control voltage input value (C)
Purpose Setting TSG_M Toner sensor control voltage input value (M)
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner TSG_Y Toner sensor control voltage input value (Y)
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
matic adjustment) Error content
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- Error

Error name Details of error display
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) display
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or the
Operation/Procedure control voltage exceeds 207.
1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel. EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. control voltage is less than 52.
The developing motor rotates for 1 min 30 sec, and the toner den- EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128 ± 3.
sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level
is displayed.
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner 25-4
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
trol level. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
CAUTION: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar-
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
ket.)
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the
reference toner density level is not set normally. Section Process
CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new devel- Operation/Procedure
oper is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, under- The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.
toner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble.
Display
CAUTION: Execute without insertion of the toner cartridge. Item/Display Content
range
Result display item name YLD_CNT_FB Toner supply FB rate by the yield count 50 - 200
DELTA_DVB Delta DVB -500 - 500
Display Default (Process control DVB - Target DVB)
range value
IDL_DVB Target DVB 100 - 600
AT DEVE ADJ_L1_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
PROCON_DVB Process control DVB 100 - 600
AT DEVE ADJ_L1_C adjustment value at 1 - 255 128
DV_LIFE Developer life area 1 - 32
AT DEVE ADJ_L1_M low speed 1 1 - 255 128
COVERAGE_ Average print rate area 1 - 29
AT DEVE ADJ_L1_Y 1 - 255 128 AREA
AT DEVE ADJ_L2_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128 ENV_AREA Environment area 1 - 16
AT DEVE ADJ_L2_C adjustment value at 1 - 255 128 MULTI_TIME Toner supply drive time area 1-8
AT DEVE ADJ_L2_M low speed 2 1 - 255 128 (Specified by the DV motor rotation time)
AT DEVE ADJ_L2_Y 1 - 255 128 PRO_FB_CNT No. of remaining times of toner supply for 0 - 65535
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128 the process control result
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C adjustment value at 1 - 255 128 PRO_FB_INT Interval of toner supply for the process 0 - 65535
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M middle speed 1 - 255 128 control result
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128 PRO_FB_RATIO Correction rate of one-time toner supply -10 - 10
AT DEVE VO_L1_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128 for the process control result
AT DEVE VO_L1_C adjustment control 1 - 255 128 RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (+) 0 - 65535
AT DEVE VO_L1_M voltage in low speed 1 1 - 255 128 CNT(+) (No. of times of compulsory toner supply)
AT DEVE VO_L1_Y 1 - 255 128 RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (-) 0 - 65535
AT DEVE VO_L2_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128 CNT(-) (No. of times of compulsory printing of
adjustment control one-color background image)
AT DEVE VO_L2_C 1 - 255 128
voltage in low speed 2 AUTO_DV_ARE Environment area at automatic 1 - 16
AT DEVE VO_L2_M 1 - 255 128
A developer adjustment
AT DEVE VO_L2_Y 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_M_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_M_C adjustment control 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_M_M voltage in middle 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_M_Y speed 1 - 255 128
25-5 Item/Display Content
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density correction
data. (Not used in the market.)
Section Process
The toner density correction data are displayed. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
Display
Display Content capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
range
is changed, this simulation must be exe-
TCS_B_AVE. Average value of the toner sensor output 0 - 255
cuted to change the paper size in software.)
block
TSG_HUM Current TSG environment correction -127 - 127 Section Paper feed
value (Medium speed) Operation/Procedure
TSG_COV Current TSG print ratio correction value -127 - 127
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
(Medium speed)
TSG_LIFE Current TSG developer life correction -127 - 127 Item Setting value Content
value (Medium speed)
TRAY1 0 8.5 x 11
TSG_ENV Current TSG accumulated drive area -127 - 127
1 A4
correction value (Medium speed)
2 B5
DELTA_TSG Control voltage correction value -255 - 255
A4 LCC 0 8.5 x 11
DELTA ∆Vspeed correction value (Medium -127 - 127
1 A4
VSPEED(M) speed)
2 B5
DELTA ∆Vspeed correction value (Low speed) -127 - 127
VSPEED(L) G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
TSG_REF Control voltage reference value (Medium 0 - 255 1 LBS
speed)
TSG_TOTAL Current applying TSG (Medium speed) 0 - 255 Setting value
Destination
TCS_AVE. Toner sensor output average value 0 - 255 TRAY1 A4 LCC G/LBS SET
TN_EMP_W Number of times of detecting the toner 0 - 255 U.S.A 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
empty threshold value w or above CANADA 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
TN_EMP_X Number of times of detecting the toner 0 - 255 INCH 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
empty threshold value x or above JAPAN B5 A4 GRAM
TN_EMP_Y Number of times of detecting the toner 0 - 255 TAIWAN A4 A4 GRAM
empty threshold value y or above
EUROPE A4 A4 GRAM
TN_REM_CNT Remaining toner counter in the 0-
U.K. A4 A4 GRAM
intermediate hopper 400000
AUS. A4 A4 GRAM
TNM_PPS PPC correction coefficiency for 50 - 150
AB A4 A4 GRAM
calculating the TM rotation umber
CHINA A4 A4 GRAM
HP_B_AVE. Intermediate hopper transport amount 30 - 50
average value KOREA A4 A4 GRAM
BRAZIL A4 A4 GRAM
25-10
26-3
Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Developer/drum serial no. setting (Not used
in the market) Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
(Setting must be made according to the
Section auditor use conditions.)
Operation/Procedure
Section Auditor
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Default
26 value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
26-1 OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
Purpose Setting AUDITOR vendor is used.
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the
(Only the copy mode can be
right paper exit tray.
controlled.)
Section Paper exit P VENDOR2 Vendor mode in which
Operation/Procedure signals for the DocuLyser
connected to the PCU are
used for communication in
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) parallel I/F.
This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit. P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
signals for the intercard
connected to the PCU are
used for communication in
parallel I/F.
Default Details of the vendor mode
value Completion Insufficient money during Completion
OUTSIDE P OTHER Mode for an external auditor NONE of the copy job of the
AUDITOR connected to the SCU. specified specified
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
(*1) (no money (Money
(Money (No money
remaining) remaining)
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job remaining) remaining)
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
document filing print MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
OFF No support for the auditor in
document filing print Operation 1:
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
performed in the duplex print which can be changed in the system setting.
mode.
Operation 2:
If the remaining money
expires during continuous Auto clear is not made.
printing, the sheets in the Operation 3:
machine are discharged The display is shifted to the initial screen.
without being printed on the
back surfaces. Details of the printer control
OFF Continuous printing is not MODE1 I) Selectable all VENDOR MODE
performed in the duplex print MODE2 I) Printing of the copy job (not including the reprint in copy
mode. (The remaining mode) and print job (including the reprint in printer mode/self-
amount is checked for print in printer mode) are exclusively controlled using READY
printing every surface in all signal from the vender.
the printing process.)
If the remaining money II) If READY signal from the vender gets ready during printing,
expires during printing, the the print job in progress will be completed and other print jobs
sheet is discharged without will be held on the job queue, and then the copy job becomes
printing on the back surface. executable.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3 III) If READY signal becomes NotReady, the copy job in
MODE3 Vendor mode 3 progress will be canceled after the print stops, and then the
COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_O print of the printer job will resume.
TIMING timing of the paper lead edge UT MODE3 I) If READY signal from the auditor becomes NotReady during
by the sensor after the paper printing the copy job/print job (including Self-print)/all kinds of
passes the fusing section is reprint jobs, all of copy/print/any kinds of reprint jobs on the job
used as the money charging queue will be canceled right after the print of the job in progress
timing. stops.
FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear edge
by the sensor after the paper
passes the fusing section is 26-5
used as the money charging
timing.
Purpose Setting
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
timing of the paper rear edge counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
by the paper exit sensor of 11x17 size)
the right paper exit tray or of
the after process unit is used
Section
as the money charging Operation/Procedure
timing. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
IMS ON Image send mode is limited. OFF
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
CONTROL OFF Image send mode is not
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
limited.
PRINTER MODE1 All the items in OUTSIDE MODE 3) Press [OK] key.
CONTROL AUDITOR and VENDOR 3 The set value in step 2) is saved.
MODE are allowed to select.
MODE2 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is Item/Display Content Default value
always set to P VENDOR1 A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
and VENDOR MODE is B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color)
always set to MODE3. C MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
MODE3 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is D MAINTE (COL) Maintenance counter (Color)
always set to P OTHER and
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
VENDOR MODE is always
F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color)
set to MODE3.
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.

(*2) Refer to the details of the vendor mode.
26-6 26-8
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale)
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a setting item with the scroll key.
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up
The selected set content is saved. 3) Press [OK] key.
U.S.A. United States of America Default

Setting Default
CANADA Canada Item/Display Content value
range value
INCH Inch series, other destinations (Taiwan)
JAPAN Japan A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
TAIWAN Taiwan LONG Total counter (B/W)
EUROPE Europe SIZE(S)
U.K. United Kingdom B TOTAL Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
AUS. Australia (COL) LONG Total counter (Color)
SIZE(S)
AB AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
C MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
CHINA China
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
KOREA Korea
SIZE(S) counter (B/W)
BRAZIL Brazil
D MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
(COL) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(S) counter (Color)
E DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
26-7 LONG Developer counter
Purpose Setting SIZE(S) (B/W)
F DEV(COL) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID.
LONG Developer counter
Section SIZE(S) (color)
Operation/Procedure G TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Total counter (B/W)
1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key.
SIZE(L)
Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be H TOTAL Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
inputted. (COL) LONG Total counter (Color)
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly. SIZE(L)
I MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
Refer to the following list and enter characters.
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input- SIZE(L) counter (B/W)
ted. J MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key (COL) LONG Maintenance
and enter the correct character. SIZE(L) counter (Color)
K DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1).
LONG Developer counter
NOTE: SIZE(L) (B/W)
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode L DEV(COL) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
function. LONG Developer counter
SIZE(L) (color)
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula-
tion mode.
Number of times of key input 26-10

10-key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Purpose Setting
1 1 - - - - - - - - - Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
2 A B C a b c 2 - - - scanner.
3 D E F d e f 3 - - -
Section
4 G H I g h i 4 - - -
5 J K L j k l 5 - - - Operation/Procedure
6 M N O m n o 6 - - - 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 - 2) Press [OK] key.
8 T U V t u v 8 - - -
The set value in step 1) is saved.
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 -
0 0 - - - - - - - - - TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
26-18 26-30
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
save mode operation. sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
Section ing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
0 Control allowed
The set value in step 2) is saved. 1 Control inhibited
Item/
Content
Setting Default
NOTE
2) Press [OK] key.
Display range value
A COPY 0 Copy toner 0-3 0
(0: OFF save mode * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
1: SV1 NOT available to the power frequency, etc.
2: SV2 1 Copy toner 1: Toner
3: SV3) save mode 1 save LOW U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
2 Copy toner CANADA 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 1 (CE not supported)
save mode 2 INCH 1 (CE not supported) AB 1 (CE not supported)
3 Copy toner 3: Toner JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
save mode 3 save HIGH TAIWAN 1 (CE not supported) KOREA 1 (CE not supported)
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner 0-3 0 EUROPE 0 (CE supported) BRAZIL 1 (CE not supported)
(0: OFF save mode
1: SV1 NOT available
2: SV2 1 Printer toner 1: Toner
3: SV3) save mode 1 save LOW 26-32
2 Printer toner Purpose Setting
save mode 2
3 Printer toner 3: Toner Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing
save mode 3 save HIGH cleaning operation.
C COPY TS 0 Setting of copy 0-1 Linked Section Fusing
DISPLAY toner save is with the
Operation/Procedure
(0: YES displayed. set value
1: NO) 1 Setting of copy of 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
toner save is SIM26-6. Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set.
not displayed.
2) Press [OK] key.
D PRINTER 0 Setting of 0-1 Linked
TS printer toner with the Default
DISPLAY save is set value Item/Display Content Setting range
value
(0:YES displayed. of
A CLEANING User fusing cleaning 0 YES 0
1:NO) 1 Setting of SIM26-6.
PRINT SET function is Enable. (YES)
printer toner
User fusing cleaning 1 NO
save is not
function is Disable.
displayed.
Destination Default value C Default value D

U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 26-35
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Purpose Setting
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
JAPAN 1 (Not Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
TAIWAN 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
trouble history when a same trouble
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
U.K. 1 (Not Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
modes: display as one trouble and display
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
as several series of troubles.
AB 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Section
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Operation/Procedure
KOREA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
BRAZIL 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
0 Only once display.
1 Any time display.
2) Press [OK] key.

26-38 26-50
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
maintenance life is reached. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. panel.
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
value value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0 A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance 1 Destination
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue) BW reverse copy Enable values Item
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/ A
Stop when the maintenance B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode Refer
life is over (Print Stop) Enable/Disable setting Destination
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1 values Item
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end B
1: STOP) (Print Continue) C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 (YES)
1 Continue/Stop setting of print FUNCTION The number of paper exit is
when the fusing web is end limited.
(Print Stop) 1 Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
not limited.
D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer
26-41 (PRINTER) counters are displayed. Destination
1 All are displayed except for values Item
Purpose Setting D
the 3-color print counter.
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi- 2 Monochrome and full color
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS) print counters are displayed.
in the center binding mode. E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
Section COLOR ON during paper feed
1 Paper feed tray color display
Operation/Procedure OFF during paper feed
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. F BANNER SIZE 0 Long size print disable 0
PRINT 1 Long size print enable
0 AMS Disable G STATUS LIGHT 0 Disable status display light 0 (NO)
1 AMS Enable SETTING setting.
1 Enable status display light
2) Press [OK] key.
setting.
The set value in step 1) is saved. H GBC PUNCH 0 Switching the setting of AB 0 (INCH)
<Default value of each destination> SET 1 type / inch type of GBC 1 (AB)
punch unit Refer
U.S.A 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable) Destination
CANADA 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable) values Item
INCH 0 (Disable) AB 0 (Disable) H
JAPAN 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
TAIWAN 0 (Disable) KOREA 0 (Disable) I WIRELESS SET 0 Disables wireless LAN 0 (NO)
EUROPE 1 (Enable) BRAZIL 0 (Disable) setting.
1 Enables wireless LAN
setting.
J POWER SHUT- 0 Display setting of auto power Refer
OFF SET 1 shut off Destination
26-49
values Item
Purpose Setting J
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards K USB DEVICE 0 USB device settings 0 (NO)
mode. 1
Section *Item F. Maximum width specification is 305mm but can be set up

Operation/Procedure to 330mm.
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) *1: Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
Item/Setting value Content Default value Destination Item A Item B Item D Item H Item J
LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW U.S.A 1 (Enable) 0 2 0 (INCH) 1 (Display)
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH CANADA 1 (Enable) 0 2 0 (INCH) 1 (Display)
INCH 1 (Enable) 0 2 0 (INCH) 1 (Display)
JAPAN 1 (Enable) 7 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display)
TAIWAN 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display)
EUROPE 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 0 (Hide)
U.K. 0 (Disable) 0 2 1 (AB) 0 (Hide)
AUS. 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display)
Destination Item A Item B Item D Item H Item J 26-52
AB 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display)
CHINA 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display)
Purpose Setting
KOREA 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
BRAZIL 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
or not.
*2: Item B: COLOR MODE set value
(OFF: Displayed/ON: Not displayed) Section
Operation/Procedure
Mode 2-Color/Single 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Set value
Single 2-color Counter
0 OFF OFF OFF 0 Count up
1 OFF ON OFF 1 No count up
2 ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF 2) Press [OK] key.
4 OFF OFF ON The set value in step 1) is saved.
5 OFF ON ON
6 ON OFF ON Destination Default
7 ON ON ON U.S.A 0 (Counted)
CANADA 0 (Counted)
*3: INCH 0 (Counted)
JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
Target Target paper setting TAIWAN 0 (Counted)
paper 0 1 EUROPE 0 (Counted)
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1," U.K. 0 (Counted)
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
AUS. 1 (Not counted)
discharged continuously. When, stopped when
AB 0 (Counted)
however, different kinds of the paper exit
sheets are mixed and tray is full or CHINA 0 (Counted)
discharged and 10 or less when 250 KOREA 1 (Not counted)
sheets of a kind are sheets BRAZIL 0 (Counted)
continuously discharged, the (35.5mm thick)
operation is stopped by the are discharged.
paper exit tray full detection.
Label The operation is stopped when
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When,
OHP however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and
discharged and 100 or less
sheets of a kind are
continuously discharged, the
operation is stopped by the
1K Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
Saddle envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
stitch discharged continuously. When, stopped when
finisher however, different kinds of the paper exit
sheets are mixed and tray is full or
discharged and 30 or less when 500
sheets of a kind are sheets (67mm
continuously discharged, the thick) are
operation is stopped by the discharged.
Label The operation is stopped when
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When,
OHP however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and
discharged and 100 or less
sheets of a kind are
continuously discharged, the
operation is stopped by the
26-65
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Use the touch key to set.
100 sheets staple finisher/

100 sheets staple saddle 4K finisher 4K saddle finisher
Item Content finisher
Setting Setting Default Setting Setting Default Setting Setting Default
value range value value range value value range value
LIMIT COPIES Number of sheets of stapling: Limited ON ON or ON ON ON or ON ON ON or ON
Number of sets of stapling: Not Limited OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
SADDLE COPIES Number of sets loaded in the saddle - - ON ON or ON
staple: Limited OFF
Number of sets loaded in the saddle OFF
staple: Not Limited
* The limit for loading when folding paper is linked with SADDLE COPIES.

range value
Purpose Setting B REMAINING 20% 3 Toner 0-9 4
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password for the simula- TONER preparation at
tion. LEVEL remaining toner
level of 20%
Section 25% 4 Toner
Operation/Procedure preparation at
1) The current password for the simulation is displayed. remaining toner
level of 25%
30% 5 Toner
3) Press [SET] key. preparation at
remaining toner
level of 30%
35% 6 Toner
26-69
preparation at
Purpose Setting remaining toner
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for level of 35%
toner near end. 40% 7 Toner
preparation at
Section remaining toner
Operation/Procedure level of 40%
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 45% 8 Toner
preparation at
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. remaining toner
3) Press [OK] key. level of 45%
The set value in step 2 is saved. 50% 9 Toner
preparation at
Setting Default remaining toner
Item/Display Content level of 50%
range value
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 0 C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near 0-1 0
PREPARATION preparation END(0:YES 1:NO) end message is
(0:YES 1:NO) message is displayed.
displayed. 1 The toner near
1 The toner end message is
preparation not displayed.
message is not D TONER END 1 Operation 1 1-3 2
displayed. 2 Operation 2
B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner 0-9 4 3 Operation 3
TONER preparation at E TONER END 1 Remaining 1-3 1
LEVEL remaining toner JUDGMENT toner counter
level of 5% (accumulated
10% 1 Toner rotation time of
preparation at the toner
remaining toner hopper)
level of 10% 2 Toner end
15% 2 Toner judgment by
preparation at ATC (Exhaust
remaining toner use in the
level of 15% intermediate
hopper)
Setting Default 26-78
range value
E TONER END 3 Toner end 1-3 1 Purpose Setting
JUDGMENT judgment by Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
bottle end operation panel.
(Introduction
process, etc.) Section
F TONER E-MAIL 0 E-mail alert 0-1 0 Operation/Procedure
ALERT Toner Low 1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
status send
timing near near
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
toner end In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
1 E-mail alert to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
Toner Low 2) Press [SET] key.
status send
timing near
toner end
G TONER MIB UNIT 0 Receive the 0-2 0 26-79
remaining toner Purpose Setting
level MIB in 1%
increment. Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
1 Receive the of user data delete result.
remaining toner Section
level MIB in 5%
increment.
Operation/Procedure
2 Receive the 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
remaining toner The value for the display operation specification after comple-
level MIB in tion of user data delete is set.
25% increment.
2) Press [OK] key.
Default
value
26-73
A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
Purpose Setting pop-up display ON
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide User data delete result NO 0
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan- pop-up display OFF
tity) adjustment
Section
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Purpose Setting
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the function of the simulation
3) Press [OK] key. mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss Section
(shade delete quantity) is increased. Operation/Procedure
Setting 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Item/Display Content Default value
range 2) Press [OK] key.
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment Default
(M) (shade delete amount: value
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step) A DISP SET Password input display for YES 1 0
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0 transferring between each
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment simulation ON
(S) delete quantity) amount: Password input display for NO 0
adjustment 0.1mm/step) transferring between each
simulation OFF
26-74
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
(0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
1 OSA trial mode is
canceled.
27 3) Press [SET] key.
27-2
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
Purpose Setting SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num- • If the connection process is not completed
ber and the HOST server telephone num- normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
ber. (FSS function) HOST may be continuously made every time when
the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
Section In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
Operation/Procedure HOST.
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(C) NEAR_END timing setting (C) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(M) NEAR_END timing setting (M) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END timing setting (Y) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
M TONER ORDER TIMING Toner order timing Toner order alert send at the fixed 0-1 0 1
CONTROL control toner remaining quantity
Toner under alert send when 1
presuming the toner consumption
27-5 27-7
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.
tion allows the host computer to check the (FSS function)
machine tag No.) (FSS function) Section
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW". 3) Press [OK] key.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key The set value in step 2) is saved.
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key. Item/Display Content
Setting Default
range value
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO)
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1
27-6 B ALERT Alert call enable 0 0 (YES)
Purpose Setting (0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call. C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX)
(FSS function) (0: FAX Not used. 1
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2
Section 2: HTTP)
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Setting Default Service call When pressing Service call.
range value Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Manual service call 0-1 0 reached.
Enable Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
1 Manual service call a new product)
Disable Alert resend
2) Press [OK] key.
27-9 27-11
Purpose Setting Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record- Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
gain adjustment retry number. ment retry number history. (FSS function)
(FSS function) Section
Operation/Procedure The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Display item
3) Press [OK] key. Content
Occurrence date Retry
The set value in step 2) is saved. Item name
(Display) number
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
Setting Default LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication retry
range value number history
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
A FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%) display
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
transport time between
LCC1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
sensors (SPF)
LCC2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
B GAIN Threshold value of the gain 0 - 20 11
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES) DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
RETRY DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
C JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 20 10 SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
judgment threshold value (TIMES) ADJ1 adjustment retry
(Alert judgment threshold SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
value for continuous JAM's) ADJ2
(Setting of the number of SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
JAM's continuously made ADJ3
at which it is judged as an SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
alert.) ADJ4
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 0 - 99 30 SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
PERIOD period setting (DAYS) ADJ5
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper; ADJ1 adjustment retry
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper. DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of ADJ2
retry is actually not registered. DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ3
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ4
27-10
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
Purpose Data clear ADJ5
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
information. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
Target history Serial communication retry history

High density process control error history
Halftone process control error history
Automatic registration adjustment error history
History of high density error between papers
History of half-tone error between papers
History of automatic registration adjustment error
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
DSPF gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
27-12
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
process control and the automatic registra-
tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
tion)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
tration adjustment error history is displayed.
Display item Content Occurrence date (Display) Error code (digits)

HV_ERR1 High density error history 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR1 Halftone error history 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
P_HV_ERR1 History of high density error between papers 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
P_HT_ERR1 History of half-tone error between papers1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
P_HT_ERR2 History of half-tone error between papers 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
P_AUTO REG ADJ1 History of automatic registration adjustment error 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
Code between Reference

Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
Code between Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
Main FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
DSPF FEED TIME1 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 1 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
27-14 27-16
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.
test mode. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
Setting Default
A CONNECTION 1 The FSS connection test 0-1 0 Item/Display Content
range value
TEST MODE mode is enable. (OFF)
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance Alert send 0 0
(1: ON 0: OFF) 0 The FSS connection test
ALERT alert send Enable
mode is disable. (*1)
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
*1: The FSS connection test mode can be changed only from Disable to
Disable
Enable, and cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
2) Press [OK] key. ORDER ALERT alert send Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
Disable
C TONER CTRG Toner Alert send 0 0
ALERT cartridge Enable
27-15 (0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1
alert send Disable
Purpose Operation test/check Enable setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status. D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
Section (0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable
send Enable Alert send 1
Operation/Procedure setting Disable
The FSS operating status is displayed. E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
ALERT send Enable Enable
Default (0:YES 1:NO) setting Alert send 1
value Disable
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0 F PAPER ORDER Paper order Alert send 0 0
FSS connection operated ALERT alert send Enable
status. 1 Operated (0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
Disable
27-17
30
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
30-1
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set. sors and the detectors in other than the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. paper feed section and the control circuits.
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification Section
is set.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [SET] key.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Item/ Setting Default
played.
Content NOTE
Display range value The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
PAPER Setting of paper kind for 0-2 0 0: Standard lighted.
TYPE paper order alert paper and
SET recycled paper PPD1 Resist pre-detection
1: Standard PPD2 Resist detection
paper only POD1 Fusing rear detection
2: Recycled POD2 Main unit paper exit detection
paper only POD3 Right tray paper exit detection
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection
sheets] (A3) DSW_R Right door open/close detection
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of DSW_RL Right lower door open/close detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
DSW_FU Front door upper open/close detection SW
sheets] (A4)
DSW_FL Front door lower open/close detection SW
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
DSW_CS Transport cover open/close detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B4) DHPD_K Drum phase detection K
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of DHPD_C Drum phase detection C
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box DHPD_M Drum phase detection M
sheets] (B5) DHPD_Y Drum phase detection Y
A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert WTFD Waste toner full detection
FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the WTBSET Waste toner box installation detection
(Number of used first time CCHP_K MC cleaner HP-K
sheets) CCHP_C MC cleaner HP-C
A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert CCHP_M MC cleaner HP-M
FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the CCHP_Y MC cleaner HP-Y
(Number of used first time
CCMD_K MC cleaner shift detection K
sheets)
CCMD_C MC cleaner shift detection C
B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
CCMD_M MC cleaner shift detection M
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time CCMD_Y MC cleaner shift detection Y
sheets) LPPD LCC paper entry detection
B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert T2PPD1 Tandem tray 2 transport detection
FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 paper entry detection 1
(Number of used first time T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 paper entry detection 2
sheets) HLPCD Fusing pressure release detection
WEB_END1 Web end detection 1
WEB_END2 Web end detection 2
PTCHP PTC initial detection
PTCMD PTC cleaner shift detection
PRTPD Right paper exit paper empty detection
FPFD Fusing upper paper entry detection
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation CL detection
1TUD_K Primary transfer belt separation K detection
30-2 MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
Purpose Operation test/check P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
sors and the detectors in the paper feed
section and the control circuits.
Section
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
played. Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
lighted. Section Paper feed
TNDSET Tandem tray close detection Operation/Procedure
T1SPD Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
T1LUD Tray 1 upper limit detection 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
T1PED Tray 1 paper empty detection 3) Press [OK] key.
T2SPD Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
T2LUD Tray 2 upper limit detection
T2PED Tray 2 paper empty detection Default
C3PFD Tray 3 transport detection Item/Display Content
value
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
C3SPD Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detection C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) 140
C3SS1 Tray 3 paper size detection 1 D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
C3SS2 Tray 3 paper size detection 2
C4PFD Tray 4 transport detection 40-12
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detection Purpose Adjustment/Setup
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection
C4SPD Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detection
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the tray 4 width detection
level.
C4SS2 Tray 4 paper size detection 2 Section Paper feed
C4SS3 Tray 4 paper size detection 3 Operation/Procedure
C4SS4 Tray 4 paper size detection 4 1) Set the tray 4 paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection (Detection at "1")
MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
3) Set to the tray 4 paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
40 displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
40-2 MAX POSITION Tray 4 max. width

MIN POSITION Tray 4 min. width
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment.
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure 41
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 41-1
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. Purpose Operation test/check
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. ment size sensor and the control circuit.
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. Section
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). Operation/Procedure
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. played.
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN). The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is Close: Highlighted
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted
41-2 Setting
Display Content Default
range
Purpose Adjustment
PLAIN Used to change the fusing -20 0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor PAP&WUP&RDY GR temperature setting of -15
detection level. plain paper, WUP, and -10
Section Ready series -5
Operation/Procedure 0
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without +5
place a document on the document table. +10
+15
The sensor level without document is recognized.
+20
2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press PLAIN PAPER 2 Used to change the fusing -20 0
[EXECUTE] key. temperature setting of -15
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed. plain paper 2. -10
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed. -5
0
Sensor +5
Content Setting range Default value
name +10
PD1 Document sensor 1 0 - 255 128 +15
PD2 Document sensor 2 +20
PD3 Document sensor 3 HEAVY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
PD4 Document sensor 4 temperature setting of -15
PD5 Document sensor 5 heavy paper series -10
PD6 Document sensor 6 -5
PD7 Document sensor 7 0
+5
+10
+15
41-3 +20
Purpose Operation test/check THIN PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
temperature setting of thin -15
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
paper series -10
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
-5
Section 0
Operation/Procedure +5
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document +10
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. +15
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128) +20
RECYCLED PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0
Item/Display Content Detection level range GR temperature setting of -15
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close) recycled paper series -10
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255 -5
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255 0
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255 +5
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255 GLOSSY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
temperature setting of -15
gloss paper series -10
-5
0
43 +5
+10
+15
43-1
+20
Purpose Setting ENV PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each temperature setting of -15
mode. envelope series -10
-5
Section
0
Operation/Procedure +5
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B. +10
2) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. +15
3) Select an item to be set with displayed value. +20
Setting Setting
Display Content Default Display Content Default
range range
EMBOSS PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0 WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready HH -10 0
temperature setting of -15 HH environment fine -7
embossed paper -10 adjustment -5
-5 -3
0 0
+5 +3
+10 +5
+15 +7
+20 +10
OHP PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0 PLAIN PAP ADJ HH Normal paper HH -10 0
temperature setting of -15 environment fine -7
OHP paper -10 adjustment -5
-5 -3
0 0
+5 +3
+10 +5
+15 +7
+20 +10
FUSING CONDITION Fusing condition 0 0 HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper HH -10 0
ADJ adjustment setting 1 ADJ HH environment fine -7
2 adjustment -5
3 -3
4 0
5 +3
ENV PAPER PRESS Envelop paper pressure 0 0 +5
PATTERN adjustment 1 +7
2 +10
WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready LL -10 0 SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper HH -10 0
LL environment fine -7 HH environment fine -7
adjustment -5 adjustment -5
-3 -3
0 0
+3 +3
+5 +5
+7 +7
+10 +10
PLAIN PAP ADJ LL Normal paper LL -10 0
environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper LL -10 0
ADJ LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper LL -10 0
LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
3 : ‘19/March.
43-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing operation and pre-
heating.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
65 CPM machine
Default value (SW A) Default value (SW B)

Setting
Item/Display Content Group Group Group Group Group Group
range
A B C A B C
A WARMUP FUMON TH_UM Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0
T
B WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 255 20 20 20 20 20 20
C WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 84 84 84 84 84 84
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0
at alpha degrees C or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha 0 - 255 72 72 72 72 72 72
degrees C or above
F LO_WARMUP_TIME Setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees 0 - 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
C or below (Timer from Ready completion)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME Setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees 0 - 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
C or above (Timer from Ready completion)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in 1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60
warm-up of alpha degrees C or above
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After-rotation time after completion of a job 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
J TH_UM E-STAR TH_UM set value when preheating 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150
K TH_LM E-STAR TH_LM set value when preheating 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
L TH_US E-STAR TH_US set value when preheating 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150
M TH_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 160 160 160 180 180 190
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper (60-89g/m2) is selected in the System setting/Common Setting/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
3
SW-B Setting value when plain paper (90-105g/m2) is selected in the System setting/Common Setting/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN - - - - -
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH - - -
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A CHINA
75 CPM machine

Setting
range
A B C A B C
A WARMUP FUMON TH_UM Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0
T
B WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 255 20 20 20 20 20 20
C WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 84 84 84 84 84 84
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0
at alpha degrees C or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha 0 - 255 72 72 72 72 72 72
degrees C or above
F LO_WARMUP_TIME AF - AH applying time (Timer from completion of 0 - 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
Ready)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME AJ - AL applying time (Timer from completion of 0 - 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
Ready)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which AN - AP is applied 1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After-rotation time after completion of a job 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
J TH_UM E-STAR TH_UM set value when preheating 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150
3 : ‘19/March.

Setting
range
A B C A B C
K TH_LM E-STAR TH_LM set value when preheating 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
L TH_US E-STAR TH_US set value when preheating 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150
M TH_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 160 160 160 180 180 195
Code descriptions
SW-A Setting value when plain paper (60-89g/m2) is selected in the System setting/Common Setting/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
3
SW-B Setting value when plain paper (90-105g/m2) is selected in the System setting/Common Setting/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
Group Destination
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH - - -
43-20
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
The set value in step 2) is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 65 CPM 75 CPM
range
machine machine
A WARMUP FUMON TH_UM T Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50
LL environment
B WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 50 50
C WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 85 85
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or 1 - 99 50 50
above under LL environment
E HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or 1 - 99 50 50
above under LL environment
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees C or 1 - 99 50 50
below under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees C or 1 - 99 50 50
above under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value of the threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in warm-up of 1 - 99 50 50
alpha degrees C or above under LL environment
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment 1 - 99 50 50
J TH_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
K TH_LM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
L TH_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
M TH_UM PRE-JOB LL Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
Code descriptions
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting

43-21
(SIM 43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
The set value in step 2 is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
65 CPM machine 75 CPM machine
A WARMUP FUMON HL_US T HH Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50
B WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 1 - 99 50 50
C WARMUP END TIME HH Warm-up complete time 1 - 99 50 50
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HH FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up at 1 - 99 50 50
alpha degrees C or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME HH Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha 1 - 99 50 50
degrees C or above
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for AF - AH application time (timer from 1 - 99 50 50
Ready complete)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME HH Correction value for AJ - AL application time (timer from 1 - 99 50 50
Ready complete)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Threshold value alpha to which AN - AP is applied 1 - 99 50 50
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME HH After-rotation time after completion of a job 1 - 99 50 50
J TH_UM E-STAR HH TH_UM set value when preheating 1 - 99 50 50
K TH_LM E-STAR HH TH_LM set value when preheating 1 - 99 50 50
L TH_US E-STAR HH TH_US set value when preheating 1 - 99 50 50
M TH_UM PRE-JOB HH Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)
43-24
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 99)
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Default value Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content (65 CPM machine) (75 CPM machine)
range
Group Group Group Group Group Group
A B C A B C
A COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time (Heavy paper) 1 - 60 5 5 5 5 5 5
B COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time (OHP) 1 - 60 10 10 10 10 10 10
C COOL_DOWN_ENVELOPE Cool down time (Envelope) 1 - 60 15 15 15 15 15 15
D FUS_MOTOR Fusing web motor operating interval (*1) 3 - 20 18 18 18 18 18 18
E POWER_SET Power voltage setting 1-3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1: 100V, 2: 110 - 120V, 3: 220V - 240V
*1: When the web feed amount is changed (increased), the web life will be shortened to cause the machine to stop by detecting "End" before
display of "Near End." In addition, the life meter of the fusing web unit in SIM22-13 will not be displayed normally.
Code descriptions
Group Destination
Group B U.S.A CANADA INCH - - -
43-31 43-32
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the
web cleaning motor and the control circuit. forcible operation of web cleaning when job
Section end.
Operation/Procedure Section Fusing
Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The fusing web cleaning motor is operated. 1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
Fusing web unit installation
Operation Remark 3) Press [OK] key.
detection state
Fusing web unit not installed No operation * During the operation, The set value in step 2) is saved.
Fusing web unit installed Operates the fusing web NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
predefined cleaning feed counter individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
pulse times is counted up.
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Setting Default
Item/Display Item
range value
A JOB END Fusing web motor Enable 0-1 0 1
COMP ACT forcible operation Disable 1
CHECK condition when job end
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity of 1 - 255 110
COMP ACT compulsory action of the fusing
INTERVAL web motor at job end
C JOB END Number of forcible operations of 1 - 10 5
COMP ACT the fusing web motor when job
CNT end
5) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam
43-35
paper.
Purpose Adjustment and setting 6) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam
Function (Purpose) Fusing nip operation check paper, and check to confirm that it is in the range of about
Section Fusing 10.5mm - 12mm.
Operation/Procedure * If the difference between F and R is considerably great, the
fusing pressure may be insufficient.
1) Prepare a black-background image, and put it on the cassette
with the black background facing upward. Setting Default
Item/Display item Content
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The cassette is specified.) range value
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. A PAPER MFT Cassette selection 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
4) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started. CS1 2
CS2 3
When printing is executed, a jam is always generated. (As
CS3 4
shown in the photo below.)
CS4 5
"LACK BACKGROUND
0APER FEED DIRECTION
'LOSS CHANGE
SECTION
.IP WIDTH
1 : ‘17/Apr.
Operation/Procedure
44 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
44-1 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Setting NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Setting Default
Display Content Remarks
range value
HV Enable/Disable setting of the high density process control Black text Allow
in normal operation on white
HT Enable/Disable setting of the medium density process background Allow
control in normal operation (Inhibit:
TN_PIX_SUP Enable/Disable setting of toner supply control by the yield 0=NO) Allow When set to Disable, the all-color FB ratio is fixed to
count White text 100%.
TN_FB Enable/Disable setting of FEEDBACK toner supply control on black Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by
background the process control feedback.
(Allow:
TN_INT Enable/Disable setting of the interval toner supply control Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by
1=YES)
the developer traveling distance.
TN_RECV Enable/Disable setting of developer recovery Allow When set to Disable, the developer recovery mode
is not available in HV process control.
TN_ADJ Enable/Disable setting of the sensor output adjustment Allow When set to Disable, the control voltage adjustment
is not made in process control.
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner falling distance Allow When set to Disable, the fall amount is not detected.
detection control (ENP_INT and ENP_NEW are not available.)
TN_EMP_INT Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner falling distance Allow When set to Disable, near end when EMP is
detection control of job interruption detected in a job
TN_EMP_NEW Enable/Disable setting of fall amount detection control of a Allow
new cartridge
TN_PIX_TBL Enable/Disable setting of the yield count correction table Allow
calculation
FIERY_HT Enable/Disable setting of Fiery printer correction feedback Allow
1 of half-tone process control
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of printer correction feedback of Allow
half-tone process control
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease grid Allow
voltage correction
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Allow
environment grid voltage correction
MD VG MC Enable/Disable setting of the grid correction by the MC Allow
total current correction
MD VG DV Enable/Disable setting of the grid correction by the Allow
developer bias absolute value
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease laser Allow
power voltage correction
MD LD EV Enable/Disable setting of environmental area and the Allow
membrane decrease count laser power voltage correction
MD LD HV Enable/Disable process control laser power voltage Allow
correction
MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Allow
discharge light quantity correction
MD DL2 Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by membrane decrease
MD DL EV Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Inhibit
environment discharge quantity correction
MD DL2 EV Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by environmental change
MD DL2 TC Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by the transfer current
MD DL2 GB Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by grid voltage
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total current correction Allow
by an increase in the resistance
MD MC EV Enable/Disable setting of the MC total current correction Allow
by environmental change
AR_AUTO Auto registration adjustment Enable/Disable setting Allow
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable/Disable setting Allow
PAR AUTO Enable/Disable setting of registration adjustment between Allow
papers
DM_VCTL Enable/Disable setting of the drum motor modulation Allow
control
PTC_ENV PTC environment correction Enable/Disable setting Allow Enable: Correction ON
1 : ‘17/Apr.
Setting Default
Display Content Remarks
range value
1TC Primary transfer output correction Enable/Disable setting Black text Allow
2TC Secondary transfer output correction Enable/Disable on white Allow
setting background
(Inhibit:
0=NO)
White text
on black
background
(Allow:
1=YES)
Class
ificati Content
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Item/Display range value
on
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image PROC M PCS_F Linearity correction
0 - 255 20
density sensor (registration sensor). ON _V1 coefficients (F side)
N PCS_F
Section Process _V2
0 - 255 41
Operation/Procedure O PCS_F
0 - 255 82
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- _V3
matically. P PCS_F
0 - 255 122
_V4
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
Q PCS_F
played. 0 - 255 163
_V5
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. R PCS_C Linearity correction
0 - 255 20
_V1 coefficients
Class S PCS_C
Setting Default 0 - 255 41
ificati Content _V2
Item/Display range value
on
T PCS_C
PROC A REGS_ Light emitting quantity 0 - 255 82
1 - 255 21 _V3
ON/ F LED adjustment value
U PCS_C
EGIS B REGS_ 0 - 255 122
1-255 21 _V4
T C LED
V PCS_C
C REGS_ 0 - 255 163
1 - 255 21 _V5
R LED
W PCS_R Linearity correction
D REGS_ Transfer belt substrate 0 - 255 20
_V1 coefficients (R side)
F detection level value (F
X PCS_R
side) when the light 0 - 255 0 0 - 255 41
_V2
emitting quantity
Y PCS_R
adjustment is completed. 0 - 255 82
_V3
E REGS_ Transfer belt substrate
Z PCS_R
C detection level value (C 0 - 255 122
_V4
side) when the light 0 - 255 0
emitting quantity AA PCS_R
0 - 255 163
adjustment is completed. _V5
F REGS_ Transfer belt substrate AB PCS_F Diffuse reflection 100 -
500
R detection level value (R _CL_ka normalization coefficients 2000
side) when the light 0 - 255 0 AC PCS_C 100 -
500
emitting quantity _CL_ka 2000
adjustment is completed. AD PCS_R 100 -
500
G REGS_ Specular reflection dark _CL_ka 2000
F voltage (F side) 0 - 255 0 AE BELT_ Belt substrate F side
DARK PCS_F monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
H REGS_ Specular reflection dark MAX (Process control)
C voltage (C side) 0 - 255 0 AF BELT_ Belt substrate F side
DARK PCS_F monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
I REGS_ Specular reflection dark MIN (Process control)
R voltage (R side) 0 - 255 0 AG BELT_ Belt substrate F side
DARK PCS_F monitor difference
0 - 255 0
PROC J PCS_F Diffuse reflection dark DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX-
0 - 255 0 MIN)
ON _DARK voltage (F side)
K PCS_C Diffuse reflection dark AH BELT_ Belt substrate C side
0 - 255 0 PCS_C monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
_DARK voltage (C side)
L PCS_R Diffuse reflection dark MAX (Process control)
0 - 255 0 AI BELT_ Belt substrate C side
_DARK voltage (R side)
PCS_C monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
MIN (Process control)
AJ BELT_ Belt substrate C side
PCS_C monitor difference
0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_C_MAX-
MIN)
Class Class
Setting Default Setting Default
ificati Content ificati Content
Item/Display range value Item/Display range value
on on
PROC AK BELT_ Belt substrate R side REGI BG PATCH Toner patch detection
ON PCS_R monitor max. value 0 - 255 0 ST _REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0
MAX (Process control) _R_M
AL BELT_ Belt substrate R side BH PATCH Toner patch detection
PCS_R monitor min. value 0 - 255 0 _REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0
MIN (Process control) _R_Y
AM BELT_ Belt substrate R side
PCS_R monitor difference Error name Error content
0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX-
F sensor adjustment REGS_F LED error
MIN)
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
REGI AN BELT_ Belt substrate F side adjustments.
ST REGS_ monitor max. value
0 - 255 0 C sensor adjustment REGS_C LED error
F_ (Registration)
MAX
adjustments.
AO BELT_ Belt substrate F side
R sensor adjustment REGS_R LED error
REGS_ monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
F_ MIN (Registration)
adjustments.
AP BELT_ Belt substrate F side
F Color sensor PCS_F_CL_ka calculation error
REGS_ monitor difference
0 - 255 0 adjustment The target is not reached
F_ DIF (BELT_REGS_F MAX-
abnormality
MIN)
Process control F BELT_PCS_F DIF error
AQ BELT_ Belt substrate C side
sensor adjustment The difference between the max. value and the
REGS_ monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
C_MAX (Registration)
greater than the specified value when the transfer
AR BELT_ Belt substrate C side belt rotates 1 turn
C Color sensor PCS_C_CL_ka calculation error
C_MIN (Registration)
adjustment The target is not reached
AS BELT_ Belt substrate C side abnormality
REGS_ monitor difference
0 - 255 0 Process control C BELT_PCS_C DIF error
C_DIF (BELT_REGS_C MAX-
MIN)
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
AT BELT_ Belt substrate R side greater than the specified value when the transfer
REGS_ monitor max. value belt rotates 1 turn
0 - 255 0
R_ (Registration)
R Color sensor PCS_R_CL_ka calculation error
MAX
adjustment The target is not reached
AU BELT_ Belt substrate R side abnormality
Process control R BELT_PCS_R DIF error
R_ MIN (Registration)
AV BELT_ Belt substrate R side abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
REGS_ monitor difference greater than the specified value when the transfer
0 - 255 0
R_ DIF (BELT_REGS_R MAX- belt rotates 1 turn
MIN)
Registration BELT_REGS_F_ DIF error
AW PATCH Toner patch detection substrate F scan The difference between the max. value and the
_REGS level F (K) 0 - 255 0 abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
_F_K greater than the specified value when the transfer
AX PATCH Toner patch detection belt rotates 1 turn
_REGS level F (C) 0 - 255 0 Registration BELT_REGS_C_ DIF error
_F_C substrate C scan The difference between the max. value and the
AY PATCH Toner patch detection abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
_REGS level F (M) 0 - 255 0 greater than the specified value when the transfer
_F_M belt rotates 1 turn
AZ PATCH Toner patch detection Registration BELT_REGS_R_ DIF error
_REGS level F (Y) 0 - 255 0 substrate R scan The difference between the max. value and the
_F_Y abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
BA PATCH Toner patch detection greater than the specified value when the transfer
_REGS level C (K) 0 - 255 0 belt rotates 1 turn
_C_K
BB PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level C (C) 0 - 255 0
_C_C
BC PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level C (M) 0 - 255 0
_C_M
BD PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level C (Y) 0 - 255 0
_C_Y
BE PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level R (K) 0 - 255 0
_R_K
BF PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level R (C) 0 - 255 0
_R_C
44-4 44-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den- Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sity process control operation. control forcibly.
Section Process Section Process
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
3) Press [OK] key. In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- (Refer to the table below.)
cially required. In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
Setting Default Result display Content description

range value COMPLETE Normal complete
A PCS TARGET Sensor target value set 1 - 255 204 ERROR Abnormal end
value INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
B LED_F_OUTPUT F sensor light emitting 1 - 255 21
quantity set value
Details of error display Content description
C LED_C_OUTPUT C sensor light emitting 1 - 255 21
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality
quantity set value
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
D LED_R_OUTPUT R sensor light emitting 1 - 255 21
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
quantity set value
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment target 1 - 255 8
LIMIT limit value M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
F BELT GROUND Effective difference 1 - 255 1 Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
DIF between upper/loser TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
values of belt one-round
surface
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) reference 0 - 255 60
STANDARD DIF calculation difference
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) reference 0 - 255 0
STANDARD DIF calculation difference
I BIAS PATCH Patch bias output interval 1 - 255 60
INTERVAL
J Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 50
value (yellow)
K M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 50
value (magenta)
L C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 50
value (cyan)
M K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 45
value (black)
N Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW1 value LOW1 (yellow)
O M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW1 value LOW1 (magenta)
P C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW1 value LOW1 (cyan)
Q K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW1 value LOW1 (black)
R Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW2 value LOW2 (yellow)
S M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW2 value LOW2 (magenta)
T C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW2 value LOW2 (cyan)
U K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW2 value LOW2 (black)
V HV BK_GROUND Surface light reception 1 - 255 60
LIMIT effective area value at the
patch position
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
Display Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content
range value
CPY/PRN P BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB:150 - 950 GB:630
(*1) (PROCON) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV:0 - 600 DV:430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal GB:150 - 850 GB:630
(NORMAL (MIDDLE)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (display for middle speed) DV:0 - 600 DV:430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L1) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal GB:150 - 850 GB:630
(NORMAL (LOW1)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (display for low speed) DV:0 - 600 DV:430
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L2) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal GB:150 - 850 GB:630
(NORMAL (LOW2)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (display for low speed 2) DV:0 - 600 DV:430
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER 1/8 TN/TC LEFT TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1-8 4
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD 0 - 1023 0
value
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1 - 15 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD 0 - 1023 0
value
RIGHT TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1 - 11 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity 1-8 4
area
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity 0 - 1023 0
AD value
DRUM LEFT MD K DRUM COUNT Membrane decrease drum traveling 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNT distance area (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNT
MD Y DRUM COUNT
2/8 LIFE MD K REVISE(LIFE) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** LIFE grid voltage correction display 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LIFE) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LIFE) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LIFE) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
EV MD K REVISE(EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Environment grid voltage correction 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
VG_DV MD K REVISE(VG_DV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Grid voltage skew correction display 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG_DV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (CMYK)
MD M REVISE(VG_DV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG_DV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
3/8 VG_MC MD K REVISE(VG_MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Current grid voltage correction display 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG_MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(VG_MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG_MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
ALL MD K REVISE(ALL) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Grid voltage correction ALL display 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(ALL) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(ALL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(ALL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease laser 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** power voltage correction (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
Display Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content
range value
OTHER 4/8 LD EV MD K REVISE(LD EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Environment laser power correction 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
LD DVB MD K REVISE(LD DVB) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Laser power correction (KCMY) for 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD DVB) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** DV vias
MD M REVISE(LD DVB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD DVB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
LD EHT MD K REVISE(LD EHT) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Laser power correction (KCMY) for 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD EHT) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Halftone process control
MD M REVISE(LD EHT) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD EHT) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
5/8 DL MD K REVISE COL (DL) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge 0 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** environment discharge light quantity
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** correction (%)
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
DL2 MD K REVISE COL (DL2) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease after- 0 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL2) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** transfer discharge light quantity
MD M REVISE COL (DL2) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** correction (%)
MD Y REVISE COL (DL2) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
6/8 DL2 EV MD K REVISE COL (DL2 EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease after- -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL2 EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** transfer environmental discharge light
MD M REVISE COL (DL2 EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** quantity correction (%)
MD Y REVISE COL (DL2 EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
DL2 TC MD K REVISE COL (DL2 TC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** After-transfer discharge light quantity -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL2 TC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** correction (%) by the transfer current
MD M REVISE COL (DL2 TC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL2 TC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
DL2 GB MD K REVISE COL (DL2 GB) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** After-transfer discharge light quantity 0 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL2 GB) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** correction (%) by the grid bias
MD M REVISE COL (DL2 GB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL2 GB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
7/8 MC MD K REVISE(MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Current correction (KCMY) by the MC 0 - 90 1
MD C REVISE(MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** discharge time
MD M REVISE(MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MC EV MD K REVISE(MC EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Environment MC current correction -90 - 90 0
MD C REVISE(MC EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(MC EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(MC EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
8/8 CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control 0 - 99999999 0
execution number
PROCON COUNT HT Halftone process control execution 0 - 99999999 0
umber
*1: The left of the correction value is the result of execution. The right is the reference value.
44-12 44-14
Purpose Operation data display Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
high density process control and the image perature and humidity sensor.
density sensor (registration sensor). Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- LSU
ing) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
Display Display Default Display item Description Display range

Item Content
item range value TH_M External air temperature Temperature:
TARGET HV TARGET Sensor target setting 0.00 - 0 sensor temperature -40.0 - 150.0 degrees C
M(K/C/M/Y) value (middle speed) 255.00 External air temperature (+/-0.1 degrees C)
HV TARGET Sensor target setting 0.00 - 0 sensor AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
L1(K/C/M/Y) value (low speed 1) 255.00 HUD_M External air humidity sensor Humidity:
HV TARGET Sensor target setting 0.00 - 0 humidity 0.0 - 100.0% (+/-0.1)
L2(K/C/M/Y) value (low speed 2) 255.00 External air sensor AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
PHT Halftone process control 0.00 - 0 TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 Temperature:
TARGET target between paper 255.00 temperature 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
M(K/C/M/Y) (middle speed) LSU thermistor 1 A/D value -0.1 degrees C)
PHT Halftone process control 0.00 - 0 AD value: 0 - 255
TARGET target between paper 255.00 TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 Temperature:
L1(K/C/M/Y) (low speed 1) temperature 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
PHT Halftone process control 0.00 - 0 LSU thermistor 2 A/D value -0.1 degrees C)
TARGET target between paper 255.00 AD value: 0 - 255
L2(K/C/M/Y) (low speed 2) TH_UM Fusing upper main Temperature:
ADK_SL(K/ Development –9.99 - 0 thermistor temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
C/M/Y) characteristics gradient 9.99 Fusing upper main degrees C)
coefficient (K/C/M/Y) thermistor (differential) AD AD value: 0 - 1023
ADK_INT(K/ Developing –999.9 - 0 value
C/M/Y) characteristics intercept 999.9 TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main Temperature:
coefficient (K/C/M/Y) thermistor (compensation) 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
PCS_F_ Diffuse reflection dark 0 - 255 0 temperature -0.1 degrees C)
DARK potential (F side) Fusing upper main AD value: 0 - 1023
thermistor (compensation)
PCS_C_ Diffuse reflection dark 0 - 255 0
AD value
DARK potential (C side)
TH_UM_D Fusing upper main AD value: 0 - 1023
PCS_R_ Diffuse reflection dark 0 - 255 0
thermistor (detection) AD
DARK potential (R side)
value
REGS_F_D Regular reflection dark 0 - 255 0
TH_US1 Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
ARK potential (F side)
temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
REGS_C_D Regular reflection dark 0 - 255 0
Fusing upper sub thermistor degrees C)
ARK potential (C side)
(differential) AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
REGS_R_D Regular reflection dark 0 - 255 0
TH_US1_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
ARK potential (R side)
(compensation) temperature 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 Fusing upper sub thermistor -0.1 degrees C)
patch 1 (compensation) AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 TH_US1_D Fusing upper sub thermistor AD value: 0 - 1023
patch 2 (detection) AD value
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
patch 3 2 temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 Fusing upper sub thermistor degrees C)
patch 4 2 AD value
TH_LM1 Fusing lower main Temperature:
thermistor temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
Fusing lower main degrees C)
thermistor (differential) AD AD value: 0 - 1023
value
TH_LM1_CS Fusing lower main Temperature:
thermistor (compensation) 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
temperature -0.1 degrees C)
Fusing lower main AD value: 0 - 1023
thermistor (compensation)
AD value
TH_LM1_D Fusing lower main AD value: 0 - 1023
thermistor (detection) AD
value
TH_LM2 Fusing lower main Temperature:
thermistor 2 temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
Fusing lower main degrees C)
thermistor 2 AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
44-15 44-21
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
Section Process get.
Operation/Procedure Section Process
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [OK] key. The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required. are displayed.
Display Content
Item/ Setting Default
Content COMPLETE Normal complete
Display range value
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0- 6 ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
between the previous OPC drum idle 255 ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
rotation and the next one) setting (h) ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
B AREA1 Environmental area difference judgment 0-5 2 ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
threshold value setting (difference [YMCK] Halftone process control error [YMCK]
between the previous OPC drum idle OTHER Other errors
rotation and the current one)
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions (AND 1 - 15 1
condition of the previous OPC drum idle
rotation and the current one) 44-22
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting (sec) in 0- 0 Purpose Operation data display
the process control when recovered 255
from power ON, preheating/sleep mode. Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
level in the halftone process control opera-
The execution YES/NO of the OPC drum idle rotation is determined tion.
by the AND condition of TIME, AREA1, and AREA 2.
Section Process
To execute the OPC drum idle rotation, set item B (AREA 1) to "0,"
Operation/Procedure
and item C (AREA2) to "15."
1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP], [2ND STEP] key.
However, idle rotation is performed in a certain interval while in shut
off. This must be fully explained to the user. The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
control operation is displayed.

44-17 ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 16)
Purpose Setting BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
Function (Purpose) Process refresh execution
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a refresh item with the touch panel key. 44-24
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Operation data display
3) The refresh operation is executed. Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
the correction level in the halftone process
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required.
control operation.
Display items and descriptions of contents Section Process
Display Content Operation/Procedure
BLADE REFRESH Blade development refresh 1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
DRUM REFRESH Drum refresh
2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh
* DEVE REFLESH execution consume
Category Display item Content
W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner.
Coefficient [DITHER_RAW_VALUE] Printer halftone correction value
(before correction)
Display of results and descriptions of items
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET Halftone process control
Display Content value MID] reference value (for Mid)
COMPLETE Normal completion [SENSOR_TARGET Halftone process control
ERROR Abnormal end LOW1] reference value (for Low1)
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption [SENSOR_TARGET Halftone process control
LOW2] reference value (for Low2)
Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control
value correction amount
[COPY_LOW1 Copier Low 1 conversion
COVERSION VALUE] amount
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control
* correction amount
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer halftone process control
DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT_ Printer automatic density
VALUE] adjustment correction amount
Category Display item Content 44-26
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process
correction control correction amount Purpose Adjustment/Setup
value [BEFORE Previous printer halftone Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
PRINTER_S_VALUE] process control correction trol compulsory.
amount
Section Process
* It is not displayed when the FIERY printer option is installed. Operation/Procedure
The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
44-25 are displayed.
Purpose Setting
COMPLETE Normal complete
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
correction value for the halftone process ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
control. ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
Section Process ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
Operation/Procedure [YMCK] Halftone process control error [YMCK] error
OTHER Other errors
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
touch panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 44-27
4) Press [OK] key. Purpose Data clear
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
cially required. tone process control.
Section Process
Default
Setting Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content value
range
K CMY 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A HIGHTLIGHT 0 - 128 Highlight correction 20 20 2) Press [YES] key.
VALUE LIMIT amount limit value
The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
B MAX VALUE 0 - 128 Maximum density value 20 20
LIMIT correction limit value
44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Default
Item/Category Display Content Setting range
value
A Process INITIAL YES When warming up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
control NO OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
Enable/ counters
B Disable SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process 0-3 0 3
setting canceling power shut-off) control Enable
Process control 1
Disable
BK process 2
control Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time control Enable
can be changed by INTERVAL Process control 1
TIME) Disable
BK process 2
control Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
Default
value
D Process HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when Color process 0-2 0 0
control turning ON the power and after control Enable
Enable/ passing TIME. Process control 1
Disable Disable
setting BK process 2
control Enable
E HUM The temperature and humidity in the Color process 0-2 0 0
machine are monitored in every 2 control Enable
hours only during a job, and the Process control 1
change in the temperature/humidity Disable
is above the specified level BK process 2
compared with that in execution of control Enable
the previous process control.
F REV1 YES When a certain level of the Allow 0-1 0 0
NO accumulated traveling distance of Inhibit 1
BK or M position OPC drum unit is
reached after the power is supplied.
G REV2_BK YES When a certain level of the Allow 0-1 0 0
NO accumulated traveling distance of Inhibit 1
BK position OPC drum unit is
reached after execution of the
previous density correction.
H REV2_CL YES When a certain level of the Allow 0-1 0 0
NO accumulated traveling distance of M Inhibit 1
position OPC drum unit is reached
after execution of the previous
density correction.
I REFRESH MODE YES YES/NO setting of the display of the Key operation 0-1 0 1
manual process control key by key display YES
NO operations Key operation 1
display NO
J Process DAY After color job after passing a certain 0: Disable of the 0 - 999 0 1
control days from execution of the previous specified days
execution color process control. When next judgment
condition warming up if there is no color job. 1 - 999: 1 - 999 999
setting days passing
K HI-COV The average print ratio is monitored Process control 0-2 0 0
in a certain interval, and the high interval setting
print process control execution is for every 10
judged. pages
High print 1
judgment
disable
Judgment at the 2
30th paper
(continuous).
L LO-COV Low print document continuous Allow 0-1 0 0
printing process control execution Inhibit 1
judgment
M TonerCA-END When the toner cartridge remaining Allow 0-1 0 1
quantity reached 25% or below, the Inhibit 1
process control interval is changed.
N JOB STOP Enable/Disable setting of execution Allow 0-1 0 1
[REV2_BK], [REV2_CL], [HI-COV], Inhibit 1
and [LO-COV] judgment during a
job.
O AVERAGE-PAGE Average print ratio paper number 1: 10 pages - 1-5 1 3
setting 5: 50 pages
Corresponds to 5
1 step/
10 pages.
P LIMIT PAGE Setting of the job connection number 1: 10 pages - 1 - 99 1 10
of sheets/limitation of the number of 99: 990 pages
sheets Corresponds to 99
1 step/
10 pages.
Q PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count 1 - 999 10
specified value
When 100 is entered, it corresponds to 1kp at 5% print.
R PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner 1 - 999 10
count specified value
When 100 is entered, it corresponds to 1kp at 5% print.
S INTERVAL TIME Setting of the leaving time when turning ON the power 1 - 255 3
(including the sleep recovery time) (h: hour) (1 - 255; 1 - 255h passed)
Default
value
T Process HUM HOUR [HUM] temperature/humidity monitoring time 1 - 24 2
control Interval setting (10 minutes unit)
U execution HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the 1-9 2
condition execution of the previous process control of "HUM"
V setting BK_RATIO [REV2_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance 1 - 999 15
value magnification ratio setting (%) (Entry of 20 corresponds to
10,000mm.)
W M_RATIO [REV2_CL] M position OPC drum traveling distance 1 - 999 15
10,000mm.)
X REV1_RATIO [REV1_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance 1 - 255 20
70,000mm.)
Y LOW_RATIO LOW mode process control execution interval 1 - 999 15
Z COLOR BORDER Setting of the 0: BK process control is 0 - 999 20
magnification ratio of the executed without ratio
upper limit of the M judgment of the M OPC
position OPC drum drum traveling distance.
traveling distance when 1 - 999;1 - 999(%)
BK process control is
executed.
AA BK ONLY Enable/Disable setting of Enable 5 times 0-6 0 5
the BK process control Enable 1 - 5 times 1-5
execution when Inhibit 6
monochrome printing is
continued, and setting of
the number of repetitions.
AB P2P PV_CL Interval of number of sheets of color patch making of 0 - 255 30
process control between papers
AC P2P PV_BK Interval of number of sheets of BK patch making of 0 - 255 60
process control between papers
AD HT_DIF Used to judge the execution of HT process control. 1 - 255 40
Bias variation difference value
AE Registration RG_ON_SYNC CL Power ON process control Synchronization/ 0-2 0 0
adjustment ALL Asynchronization switch 1
setting CL/BK 2
AF RR_PH_ADJ TIMER Setting of the span of the modulation adjustment timer 0 - 199 72
execution (Hour)
AG RG_PERM_TIMER Setting of the span from execution disable to enable 0 - 15 0
(X 10 minute)
AH RG_HOUR_TIMER Setting of the span of timer execution 0 - 15 6
(HOUR)
AI RG_BW_SYNC Enable/Disable setting of the registration Allow 0-1 0 1
adjustment in a monochrome job. Inhibit 1
AJ MC cleaner MC_CLEAN_TIME MC automatic cleaning 0: Not executed 0 - 99 0 3
control execution interval 5 - 99: Executed 1 - 99
AK MC_CLEAN_DUR Enable/Disable setting of the MC Enable 0-1 0 1
ING_JOB automatic cleaning execution during Disable 1
job.
AL MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_1 Setting of idle discharge time after MC automatic 0 - 300 0
cleaning (sec)
AM MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_2 Setting of idle discharge time after MC cleaning in Sim 0 - 300 0
(sec)
AN MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_3 Setting of idle discharge time after MC cleaning from 0 - 300 30
system setting (sec)
AO DRUM_REVERSE Drum reverse rotation control setting Enable 0-1 0 1
Disable 1
AP BLADE_CLEAN_TIME Setting blade refresh interval Disable 0 - 99 0 10
Interval setting 1 - 99
AQ MC_CLEAN_LL_1 Judgment on MC cleaning at WUP Disable 0-1 0 0
under low humidity environment Enable 1
AR MC_CLEAN_LL_2 Judgment on MC cleaning under low Disable 0-1 0 1
humidity environment Enable 1
AS PTC_CLEAN_TIME_CL PTC automatic cleaning interval (Color) 0 - 300 50
AT PTC_CLEAN_TIME_BK PTC automatic cleaning interval (Monochrome) 0 - 300 100
AU PAR_CNT SYNC Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment 1 - 999 (sheet) 700
between sheets, interval of number of sheets
AV PAR_TIMER SYNC Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 240 (minute) 30
between sheets, interval of time
AW PAR_TEMP SYNC Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 99 degrees C 0
between sheets, difference in temperature
* "1: HV only" in items A to D also includes execution of engine
44-29
halftone correction.
Purpose Setting * The display of A to E is item name: detailed display.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the Example: COPY: HV  HT
process control during a job.
HV: High density process control
Section Process HT: Halftone process control
Operation/Procedure
panel. 44-31
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
3) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) Used to check the deflection of the OPC
drum.
Default
value
Section Process
A COPY During copy 0- 0: No execution 2 Operation/Procedure
job 2 1: HV only
NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simu-
B PRINTER During print 2: HV  HT 2
lation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
job
C FAX During FAX 2
print job 1) Select item A with scroll key.
D SELF During self 2 2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with
PRINT print 10-key.
E CPY TO Halftone 0- 0: CALCULATED 0
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.)
PRT process 1 (Color balance
TABLE control calculation value) 4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two
copier - 1: DEFAULT scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
printer 5) Select item B with scroll key.
conversion
table select 6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce-
F HT Setting of 1 - 255 20 dure 4).
RETRY halftone 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
correction 8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
retry
G HT Setting of 1 - 255 3
TARGET halftone
RETRY correction
reference
value
registration
retry setting
44-37
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with scroll keys.
NOTE: When the print density is varied in the continuous printing
operation, this simulation is used.

K A GB_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
B GB_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
C GB_ADJ_CL_K_M_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
D GB_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
E GB_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
F GB_ADJ_CL_K_L_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
G GB_ADJ_CL_K_L2_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
H GB_ADJ_CL_K_L2_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
I GB_ADJ_CL_K_L2_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
C A GB_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
B GB_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
C GB_ADJ_CL_C_M_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
D GB_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
E GB_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
F GB_ADJ_CL_C_L_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
G GB_ADJ_CL_C_L2_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
H GB_ADJ_CL_C_L2_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
I GB_ADJ_CL_C_L2_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
M A GB_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
B GB_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
C GB_ADJ_CL_M_M_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
D GB_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
E GB_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
F GB_ADJ_CL_M_L_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
G GB_ADJ_CL_M_L2_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
H GB_ADJ_CL_M_L2_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
I GB_ADJ_CL_M_L2_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
Y A GB_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
B GB_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
C GB_ADJ_CL_Y_M_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (middle speed) 0-5 0
D GB_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
E GB_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
F GB_ADJ_CL_Y_L_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed 1) 0-5 0
G GB_ADJ_CL_Y_L2_DATA_1 Grid bias correction data 1 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
H GB_ADJ_CL_Y_L2_DATA_2 Grid bias correction data 2 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
I GB_ADJ_CL_Y_L2_DATA_3 Grid bias correction data 3 in color printing (low speed 2) 0-5 0
<Use example>
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value.
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller than that of the first sheet, increase the set value.
When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not work.
44-43 Display
Item/Display Content NOTE
range
Purpose Data display I DVCH_A K developing unit 0 - 255 AD value of the
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa- D_K identification AD developing unit
tion of the developing unit. value identification voltage
J DVCH_A C developing unit 0 - 255
Section Developing system D_C identification AD
Operation/Procedure value
The identification number and the identification signal level of the K DVCH_A M developing unit 0 - 255
developing unit are displayed. D_M identification AD
value
Display L DVCH_A Y developing unit 0 - 255
Item/Display Content NOTE D_Y identification AD
range
A DVCH K developing unit 1-9 The model value
KIND K identification number identification number
* The developing unit is identified by the combination of items E, F,
B DVCH C developing unit 1-9 of the developing unit
G, H and items I, J, K, and L.
KIND C identification number which is backed up in
C DVCH M developing unit 1-9 the EEPROM of the
KIND M identification number machine.
D DVCH Y developing unit 1-9 44-62
KIND Y identification number
Purpose Setup/Adjustment
E DV_TYP_ K developing unit 0-1 0 = High (Open)
SEL_K identification 1 = Low (GND) Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
detection conditions.
F DV_TYP_ C developing unit 0-1 Section Process
SEL_C identification
Operation/Procedure
detection
G DV_TYP_ M developing unit 0-1 This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of
SEL_M identification SIM44-4 and SIM44-28.
detection A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending
H DV_TYP_ Y developing unit 0-1 on the condition.
SEL_Y identification
detection
Select an item to be set.
• To change the image density in the high density area, select
PROCON TARGET.
• To change the frequency of the process control operations,
select PROCON MODE.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
Display/Item Content
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
PROCON CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease.
sity is decreased.
TARGET (The C/M/Y high density process control
target values decrease.)
Setting Default
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase. Item/Display Content
range value
(The C/M/Y high density process control
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
target values increase.)
HIGH 1 - 99 50
BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
density process control target value
decreases.) HIGH 1 - 99 50
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
density process control target value PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
increases.) D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values decrease.) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase. F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control target values increase.) G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values are the standard
HIGH 1 - 99 50
values.)
I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON HIGH QUALITY1 The execution frequency of the process
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
MODE control is high. (It is set when the color
image quality is given priority.) J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH QUALITY2 The execution frequency of the process PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
control is highest. (It is set when the color COPY) document)
image quality is given priority.) K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
PRINT The execution frequency of the process (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
PERFORMANCE control is low. (It is set when the job document)
1 speed is given priority.) L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50
PRINT The process control is executed in the TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
PERFORMANCE normal frequency. (It is set when there ENHANCEMENT)
2 are little color jobs and many M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
monochrome jobs.) PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The process control is executed in the TONE (Color tone
normal frequency. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
When PROCON TARGET is selected. (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
1) Select the density level.
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
When PROCON MODE is selected. (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
1) Select the execution frequency of the process control. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
3) Press [YES] key.
NOTE: Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver-
R LIGHT (COLOR Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
sion.
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
46 T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
document)
46-1 U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
V TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
mode.
(copy document)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
adjustment value.
46-2
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
mode. increased, and vice versa.
Section
Setting Default
Operation/Procedure Mode Item/Display Content
range value
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
panel. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each PHOTO
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density H RIP - 1 - 99 50
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
adjustment value. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- PHOTO
sity is decreased. D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Setting Default F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
range value G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50 H RIP - 1 - 99 50
A
HIGH 1 - 99 50
AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
B
HIGH 1 - 99 50
AUTO3 Auto 3 LOW 1 - 99 50 46-5
C
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
D Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 send mode.
E
PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50 Section
TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
F
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
PRINTED Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
G panel.
PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H
HIGH 1 - 99 50 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
MAP MAP LOW 1 - 99 50 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
I
HIGH 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
AUTO1(COPY Auto 1 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
J
TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 increased, and vice versa.
AUTO2(COPY Auto 2 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
K
TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
AUTO3(COPY Auto 3 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 range value
L
TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 LOW A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
M
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 PHOTO
N PHOTO(COPY Photo (Copy D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TO COPY) document) E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PRINTED Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
O PHOTO(COPY (Copy G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TO COPY) document) H RIP - 1 - 99 50
LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
P
HIGH 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
46-4 E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
send mode. H RIP - 1 - 99 50
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
range value
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 49
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color SIDEB: exposure adjustment
balance RGB. LOW (Low density side)
Section SIDEB: exposure adjustment
Operation/Procedure LOW (Low density side)
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 49
panel. LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
panel. SIDEB: exposure adjustment
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. HIGH (High density side)
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
area and the high density area.
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the HIGH exposure adjustment
target color is increased, and vice versa. (High density)
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
Setting Default SIDEB: R R
range value H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density 1 - 99 50 SIDEB: G G
correction amount I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density 50 SIDEB: B B
correction amount
46-10
46-9
Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density. the gamma (for each color copy mode).
Section Section
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch 1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
panel. 2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. touch panel.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each 3) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. panel.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
mode, and the fax mode. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
increased, and vice versa. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Setting Default
range value
TEXT Text
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
SIDEA: exposure adjustment MAP Map
LOW (Low density side) LIGHT Light document
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 COPY ORG Copy document
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side) Density level
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52 Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point)
SIDEA: exposure adjustment A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH exposure adjustment F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
(High density) G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range Default value Item/Display Content Set value
(Point) value
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 setting NORMAL
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
NOTE:
46-16
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
Purpose Adjustment MODE 2 Normal gamma
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den- STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
sity and the gamma (for each monochrome scanned, and the output image density is determined
copy mode). according to the scanned density. (The output image
density is even for all the surface.)
Section
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
Operation/Procedure sequentially, and the output image density is determined
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch according to the density in each area of document. (The
panel. output image density may not be even for all the
surface.)
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each sequentially, and the output image density is determined
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) output image density is even for all the surface.)
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
FULL auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the
increased, and vice versa. document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
mode.
Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
(Point)
PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 46-21
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
Purpose Adjustment
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 adjustment)
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500 Section
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 Operation/Procedure
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
touch panel.
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 panel.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
46-19
Purpose Setting increased, and vice versa.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
density scanning (exposure) of mono- the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
chrome auto copy mode documents. value.
Section
Operation/Procedure Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
Select an item to be set with touch panel. A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
saved. C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
Default E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
Item/Display Content Set value
value F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
MODE2, MODE3
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ PRESCA
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
Stop (for copy) STOP/ N
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
Stop (for FAX) L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
Stop (for scanner) STOP/ N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Density level Default 46-24
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
46-23
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
high density section (High density tone gap
supported). 2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed,
then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
0 Enable 4) Press [OK] key.
1 Inhibit The halftone correction target registration is processed.
5) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
Setting Default ment is completed.
range value
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the
A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
adjustment procedure for both copy and print mode have
(0: ENABLE density correction mode:
1: DISABLE) Enable completed successfully. For example, when the copy color
1 CMY engine highest balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed
density correction mode: and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not
Disable effective.
B K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
46-25
correction mode: Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment
TARGET maximum density correction Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin-
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 gle color copy mode)
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
correction
Section
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 Operation/Procedure
TARGET YELLOW maximum density 1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the
correction touch panel.
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density
correction
panel.
G RATIO LOW Mix ratio of High density 0 - 100 0 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
correction (LOW)(1/100) 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
H RATIO HIGH Mix ratio of High density 0 - 100 0
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
correction (HIGH)(1/100)
target color is increased, and vice versa.
I DITHER Dither threshold (LOW) 0 - 255 255
THRESHOLD
Default value
J SLOPE Slope threshold (HIGH)(1/100) 100 - 500 Item/Display Setting range
C M Y
THRESHOLD 500
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
and B to "0". C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
gap is better.
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255
A and B to "1".
H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0
The tone gap may occur in high density part. I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
values are changed, the density in the high density area is K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
changed. L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0
M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20
N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255
O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
46-26 46-30
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub
balance set value to the default. scanning direction in the copy mode.
Section Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre-
2) Press [YES] key. sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key.
The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
default value.
Setting Default
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode 1 0-1 0 0
46-27 RESOLUTION selection Mode 2 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup SW (COPY: COLOR)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy

Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)
images, texts, and line image edges.
Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
Section Mode
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
Operation/Procedure ratio] ratio] ratio]
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch Mode 1 OC 600 600 600
panel. DSPF 600 600 -
Mode 2 OC 400 600 600
DSPF 400 600 -
Item/Display Setting Default

Content
(Copy mode) range value
46-32
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
(INTERCEPT) adjustment density reproducibility in the monochrome
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 auto copy mode.
(SLOPE) skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50 Section
(INTERCEPT) adjustment Operation/Procedure
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
(SLOPE) skew adjustment (Text/Map panel.
mode)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the background and the low density image is increased. When the
gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed.
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of and the low density image is decreased.
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge Setting Default
is decreased. range value
When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased, A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
vice versa. (SIDE1) surface)
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) surface)
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) back surface)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) surface)
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) surface)
46-36
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color
copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
Default value Default

C M Y value
OUTCOLOR A RED R output color 0 - 255 0 255 200 -
(Output color B GREEN G output color 0 - 255 255 0 255 -
coefficient) C BLUE B output color 0 - 255 255 150 0 -
D CYAN C output color 0 - 255 255 0 0 -
E MAGENTA M output color 0 - 255 0 255 0 -
F YELLOW Y output color 0 - 255 0 0 255 -
G ORANGE O output color 0 - 255 0 150 255 -
H NAVY N output color 0 - 255 255 200 0 -
I LIGHT GREEN LG output color 0 - 255 150 0 150 -
J LIGHT BLUE LB output color 0 - 255 150 20 0 -
K AQUA MARINE AM output color 0 - 255 170 0 50 -
L PURPLE PU output color 0 - 255 128 255 0 -
M PINK P output color 0 - 255 0 150 20 -
N YELLOW GREEN YG output color 0 - 255 128 0 255 -
O BEIGE BE output color 0 - 255 0 50 170 -
CHROMA A RED / BLACK Red extraction mode 0-6 - - - 3
(Chroma (The red recognition area is adjusted.)
adjustment) B KS:CHROMATIC Chromatic color extraction mode 0-6 - - - 3
(The chromatic color recognition area is adjusted.)
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from

46-37
the formula below.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
of monochrome mode color. values (Default).
Section When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
Operation/Procedure the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. value is decreased, the density is increased.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased,
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust-
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased.
4) Press [YES] key.
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow
images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
in the monochrome mode.
An individual adjustment is available in each of the copy mode and

the printer mode.
Setting Default
range value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 137
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 827
C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)

(1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B)
(1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
46-38 Item/Display Select Default
Content
(Copy mode) button value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup AUTO AUTO (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component (-) LUT1 judgment
amount in the color copy mode. NOMAL
Section (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 46-39
3) Press the black component amount select key. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
(except character and line image) images.
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part Section
changes. Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Select Default 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
Content
(Copy mode) button value 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text/Printed NORMAL 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(-) LUT1 photo (Manual)
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
NOMAL
numeric value to decrease moire.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 Setting Default
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL range value
(-) LUT1 A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
NOMAL halftone OFF
(+) LUT1 B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT2 halftone OFF
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual) halftone ON
NOMAL D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT1 halftone OFF
(+) LUT2 E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph NORMAL
(Manual) F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
(-) LUT1
halftone OFF
NOMAL
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT1
halftone ON
(+) LUT2
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL halftone OFF
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
NOMAL halftone ON
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1 46-40
NOMAL Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
TXT PRT (-) LUT1 Text Printed Section
NOMAL photo (Manual) Operation/Procedure
(+) LUT1 1) Set the document on the document table.
(+) LUT2
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set.
TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual) 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
NOMAL 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
(+) LUT1 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
(+) LUT2 and the scanned document image is outputted.
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Printed photo Setting Default
NOMAL (Manual) range value
(+) LUT1 A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50
(+) LUT2 LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light document NORMAL adjustment of all the modes)
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
46-41 46-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Normal) (Fine)
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

range value range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1 G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO) Halftone
EXP2 Exposure 2 3 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
EXP3 Exposure 3 4 Halftone
EXP4 Exposure 4 5 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Exposure 5 6 Halftone
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu- Halftone
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F, K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
and press [EXECUTE] key. Halftone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO)
Exposure 1
EXP2 Fine/ 3
Exposure 2
EXP3 Fine/ 4
Exposure 3
EXP4 Fine/ 5
Exposure 4
EXP5 Fine/ 6
Exposure 5
AUTO Fine/ 7
H_TONE Automatic/
halftone
EXP1 Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 1/
Halftone
EXP2 Fine/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2/
Halftone
EXP3 Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone
EXP4 Fine/ 11
H_ONE Exposure 4/
Halftone
EXP5 Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-43 46-44
(Super Fine) (Ultra fine)
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Halftone
Exposure 4 H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone
Exposure 5 I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 2/Halftone
Auto/Halftone J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 3/Halftone
Exposure 1/Halftone K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 4/Halftone
Exposure 2/Halftone L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 5/Halftone
Exposure 3/Halftone M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Exposure 4/Halftone EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
Exposure 5/Halftone EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1- 1 1 Exposure 2
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
EXP1 Super Fine/ 2 Exposure 3
Exposure 1 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
Exposure 2 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
Exposure 3 AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
EXP4 Super Fine/ 5 H_TONE Auto/
Exposure 4 Halftone
EXP5 Super Fine/ 6 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
Exposure 5 H_TONE Exposure 1/
AUTO Super Fine/ 7 Halftone
H_TONE Auto/ EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9
Halftone H_TONE Exposure 2/
EXP1 Super Fine/ 8 Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 1/ EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 4/
Halftone To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
EXP5 Super Fine/ 12 ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
H_TONE Exposure 5/ and press [EXECUTE] key.
Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-45 46-46
(600dpi). (RGB RIP)
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Select a target mode for adjustment.
2) Select [I-FAX] or [FAX] to be set. 2) Set the document on the document table.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 4) Press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When the set value is increased, the density becomes higher.
and the scanned document image is outputted. When the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower.

A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 A STANDARD RIP For Normal/ 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Halftone OFF
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 mode
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 B FINE RIP For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 OFF mode
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 C FINE RIP H_TONE For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50
ON mode
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone 1 D SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone OFF
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
mode
Halftone
E SUPER FINE RIP H_TONE For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone ON
Halftone
mode
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
F ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
Halftone OFF
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
mode
Halftone
G ULTRA FINE RIP H_TONE For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone ON
Halftone
mode
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1- 1 1
H 600DPI RIP For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Halftone OFF
EXP1 600dpi/ 2 mode
Exposure 1
I 600DPI RIP H_TONE For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50
EXP2 600dpi/ 3 Halftone ON
Exposure 2 mode
EXP3 600dpi/ 4
Exposure 3
EXP4 600dpi/ 5
Exposure 4 46-47
EXP5 600dpi/ 6
Exposure 5 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AUTO 600dpi/ 7 Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
H_TONE Auto/ and scan images (JPEG).
Halftone
Section
EXP1 600dpi/ 8
H_TONE Exposure Operation/Procedure
1/Halftone 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
EXP2 600dpi/ 9 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H_TONE Exposure
2/Halftone 3) Press [OK] key.
EXP3 600dpi/ 10 The set value is saved.
H_TONE Exposure
3/Halftone Operation Setting Default
EXP4 600dpi/ 11 mode range value
H_TONE Exposure FILLING A FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
4/Halftone (COLOR) (C) compres-
EXP5 600dpi/ 12 Filing sion
H_TONE Exposure (Color (Color)
5/Halftone mode) MIDDLE Medium 1
compres-
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- sion
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, (Color)
and press [EXECUTE] key. HIGH High 2
compres-
sion
(Color)
Operation Setting Default Operation Setting Default
mode range value mode range value
FILLING B FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) PUSH F SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
(GRAY) (G) compres- SCAN (G) (*1) 1 compres- (MIDDLE
Filing sion (GRAY) sion mode 2)
(Mono- (Halftone) (Scanner 1
chrome MIDDLE Medium 1 mono- Low
halftone compres- chrome compres-
mode) sion halftone sion
(Mono- mode) MIDDLE Medium 1
chrome 2 compres-
halftone sion mode
mode) 2
HIGH High 2 Medium
compres- compres-
sion sion
(Mono- MIDDLE Medium 2
chrome 3 compres-
halftone sion mode
mode) 3
PRINT C PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) High
HOLD (C) compres- compres-
(COLOR) sion sion
Print hold (Color)
(Color *1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image
MIDDLE Medium 1
mode) compres- compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
sion NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
(Color) in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other
HIGH High 2 hand, however, the image quality of some documents may
compres-
be remarkably reduced.
sion
(Color)
PRINT D PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
HOLD (G) compres- 46-48
(GRAY) sion
Print hold (Halftone)
(Mono- MIDDLE Medium 1 Function (Purpose) Used to change the copy output resolution
chrome compres- to 600dpi or 1200dpi depending on the
halftone sion printing quality.
mode) (Mono-
Section
chrome
halftone Operation/Procedure
mode) 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
HIGH High 2
compres- Item Button display Content Default value
sion AUTO 600DPI ED AUTO 600DPI DT
(Mono- 600DPI DT
chrome
TEXT/PRT PHOTO 600DPI ED Text/Printed 600DPI DT
halftone
600DPI DT Photo
mode)
1200DPI DT
PUSH E SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
SCAN (C) (*1) 1 compres- (MIDDLE TEXT/PHOTO 600DPI DT Text/ 600DPI DT
(COLOR) sion mode 2) 1200DPI DT Photograph
(Scanner 1 PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI DT Printed photo 1200DPI DT
color) Low 1200DPI DT
compres- PHOTO 600DPI DT Photograph 1200DPI DT
sion 1200DPI DT
MIDDLE Medium 1
2 compres-
sion mode
2
Medium
compres-
sion
MIDDLE Medium 2
3 compres-
sion mode
3
High
compres-
sion
46-51 46-54
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto-
mode heavy paper mode and the image matic density adjustment (dither).
process mode. Section
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
[PAPER/DITHER]. self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the feed tray is used.)
touch panel. 2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the [EXECUTE] key.
touch panel. Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. automatically printed.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- 3) Press [OK] key.
putted. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is After completion of the halftone image correction, the screen
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust shifts to the dither selection menu.
the image density. 5) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.
Item/Display Content Color
HEAVYPAPER Copier/gamma for heavy paper
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY
BLACK EDGE Black edge
DITH1 Black edge K
COLOR EDGE Color edge
DITH2 Color edge KCMY
COLOR ED Color error diffusion
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY
B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K
B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
DITH7 Monochrome dither (1200dpi) K
WOVEN1 Watermark mode 1
DITH8 Monochrome dither (600dpi) K
DITH9 Monochrome dither (600dpi low) K
Item/Display Setting range 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 The 48 patch self print is printed.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 7) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 [EXECUTE] key.
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 dither selection menu.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 8) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 items (dither), press [OK] key.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 46-55
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the drop out color in the
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 image send mode (monochrome manual
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 text mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
46-52 In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the
range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images
is adjusted.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy 1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
mode heavy paper and the image process
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to the initial value.)
to widen the reproduction range.
Section
Operation/Procedure Setting Default
range value
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome
manual text mode), and check the adjustment result.
3) Press [YES] key.
46-58
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu-
tion. (Smoothing process)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll
key.
3) Press [OK] key.
1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi
The setting is reflected only the image edge area.
Content Setting Default

Mode Item/Display
(copy mode) range value
COLOR A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text/Printed OFF 0 0 (OFF)
photo ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
J CPY TO CPY/ Text Printed OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT photo (copy ON 1
document)
K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy document) ON 1
MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text/Printed OFF 0 0 (OFF)
photo ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
I COPY TO Auto (copy OFF 0 0 (OFF)
COPY/AUTO document) ON 1
J CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
K CPY TO CPY/ Text Printed OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT photo (copy ON 1
document)
L CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy document) ON 1
46-60
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.

A SCREEN FILTER LEVEL H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern image in auto Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto)
L copy mode Soft emphasis 2
AUTO Auto 3
B CPY CL AUTO FILTER SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for copy/push scan/FAX SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
LEVEL CENTER mode CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C CPY PUSH AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto push scan mode SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER (color Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
D COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in color copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
E COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
F SINGLE COLOR : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in single color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
G 2 COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to C/M/Y OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
H 2 COLOR COPY : K OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to K images of OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON the 2-color copy mode ON 1
I B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
J COLOR PUSH : RGB OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
K B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON monochrome mode ON 1
L COLOR PRINT: CMY OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to color print C, OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON M, Y images ON 1
M COLOR PRINT: K OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to color print K OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON images ON 1
N B/W PRINT OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON print images ON 1
Setting Default
46-61 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- O adjustment: No 1 - 99 50
[BK]
tion level. chrome judgment
Detection level
Section SEGMENT: ADJUST
P adjustment: Chrome 1 - 99 50
[CL]
Operation/Procedure judgment
1) Select an adjustment mode. Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Q adjustment: Text on 1 - 99 50
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch [TXT ON BG]
background
panel.
Detection level
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. SEGMENT: ADJUST
R adjustment: High 1 - 49 25
[SCR 1 HIGH]
4) Press [OK] key. density dots 1
Detection level
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- SEGMENT: ADJUST
S adjustment: Medium 1 - 49 25
cially required. [SCR 1 MIDDLE]
density dots 1
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur T adjustment: Low 1 - 49 25
[SCR 1 LOW]
for some documents. density dots 1
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level
U 1 - 15 8
Item/Display Content [SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level
V 1 - 15 8
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print) [SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
COPY (TPP & [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print & Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
AUTO) Auto) W adjustment: line 1 - 49 25
[LINE HALFTONE]
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto screen
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print) Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
X adjustment: Small 1 - 49 25
COPY (TPP & [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print & [SMALL SCR 1]
Dot Area 1
AUTO) Auto)
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Y adjustment: Small 1 - 99 50
[SMALL SCR 2]
Setting Default Dot Area 2
range value Image Quality
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: SEGMENT: SWITCH Priority ON/OFF :
A 0-1 0 Z 0-1 0
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot [LOCK] Image Quality
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: Priority lock
B 0-1 0
[LINE SCR] line screen
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
C 0-1 0
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
Detection ON/OFF: 46-62
SEGMENT: SWITCH
D High line number 0-1 0
[HIGH LPI] Purpose Adjustment/Setup
judgment select
SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
E [TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send 0-1 0 ACS, the area separation, the background
SEND] dots image process, and the auto exposure
Detection level mode.
SEGMENT: ADJUST
F adjustment: Black 1 - 99 50
[BK TXT 1] Section
text 1
Detection level Operation/Procedure
SEGMENT: ADJUST
G adjustment: Color 1 - 99 50 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
[CL TXT 1]
text 1 panel.
Detection level 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
SEGMENT: ADJUST
H adjustment: Black 1 - 49 25
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] 3) Press [OK] key.
text 2, Color text 2
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Detection level NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
I adjustment: Thine 1 - 99 50 cially required.
[THIN LINE]
line
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur
J adjustment: Text 1 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 1] for some documents.
on dots
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST Setting Default
K adjustment: Text 2 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
[TXT ON SCR 2] range value
on dots
A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1
Detection level
reference area select
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment:
L 1 - 15 8 B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
[TXT ON SCR AREA 1] Detection area 1 of
text on dots priority level adjustment
Detection level C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: priority level adjustment
M 1 - 99 50 D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
[TXT ON SCR AREA 2] Detection area 2 of
text on dots threshold value
Detection level adjustment
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: High E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment 0-6 3
N 1 - 49 25 target area adjustment
[HIGH LPI] line number
judgment
Setting Default 46-63
range value
F AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
detection division result Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low
adjustment: density section.
For color copy
G AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
Section
detection division result Operation/Procedure
adjustment: 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
For monochrome copy
panel.
H AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4
detection division result
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
adjustment: 3) Press [OK] key.
For color scan When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
I AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4 background and the low density image is increased. When the
detection division result adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
adjustment:
and the low density image is decreased.
For monochrome scan
J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
Setting Default
_LV_L_U density threshold value Item/Display Content
range value
adjustment (lower limit)
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
LV_L_O density threshold value
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
adjustment (upper limit)
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
LV_C detection level
adjustment (chroma) D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_ONOFF OFF switch : E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
OFF OFF 1
_CC For color copy TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
_MC For mono- (color density)
chrome copy H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
_CS For color scan I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) (COPY TO COPY) Character
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch :For OFF 1 (color copy)
_MS monochrome J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
scan PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 TO COPY) (color copy)
LV_L adjustment (value) K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 5
R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
LV_C adjustment (chroma) L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0 M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
paper mode select PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0 N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
paper mode select PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0 O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 5
paper mode select TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0 P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
paper mode select
W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0
MODE0 select
X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
MODE1 select
Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2
MODE2 select
Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3
MODE3 select
AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4
MODE4 select
AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5
MODE5 select
AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6
MODE6 select
46-65
Function (Purpose) Used to set the color correction table.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment mode.
2) Select an item (mode) to be set with the scroll key.
4) Press [OK] key.
When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func-
tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy
mode.
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
Setting Default
Category Mode Item/Display Content
range value
OC COPY A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 0
(Document B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3
table) C PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0 - 12 0
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph 0 - 12 1
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3
G LIGHT ORIGINAL Pencil 0 - 12 0
H COPY TO COPY/TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Copy document/Text print 0 - 12 2
I COPY TO COPY/TEXT Copy document/Text 0 - 12 3
J COPY TO COPY/PHOTO Copy document/Printed photo 0 - 12 2
K AUTO0 Auto mode judgment 0 0 - 12 0
L AUTO1 Auto mode judgment 1 0 - 12 0
M AUTO2 Auto mode judgment 2 0 - 12 1
N AUTO3 Auto mode judgment 3 0 - 12 1
O AUTO4 Auto mode judgment 4 0 - 12 0
P AUTO5 Auto mode judgment 5 0 - 12 0
Q AUTO6 Auto mode judgment 6 0 - 12 0
PREVIEW A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 0
B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0 - 12 0
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3
SPF1 COPY A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 4
(Automatic B TEXT Text 0 - 12 7
document C PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0 - 12 4
feeder (DSPF) D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 5
front)
F MAP Map 0 - 12 7
Setting Default
Category Mode Item/Display Content
range value
SPF1 PREVIEW A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 4
front)
F MAP Map 0 - 12 7
SPF2 COPY A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 8
back)
F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
PREVIEW A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 8
B TEXT Text 0 - 12 11
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0 - 12 8
F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
46-66
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 changed to increase or
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 decrease the density of the
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level (Cyan LOW) 0 - 255 19 watermark of background
documents (primary output).
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level (Cyan MIDDLE) 0 - 255 23
To increase the watermark
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level (Cyan HIGH) 0 - 255 27
density, increase the
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level (Magenta LOW) 0 - 255 15 adjustment value.
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level (Magenta MIDDLE) 0 - 255 18 To decrease the watermark
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level (Magenta HIGH) 0 - 255 21 density, decrease the
adjustment value.
NOTE:
When the adjustment value
is increased, the watermark
area which is originally not
reproduced becomes
difficult to disappear.
is decreased, the watermark
area which is originally
reproduced becomes easy
to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the
variation in the watermark
density when the adjustment
value of the watermark print/
contrast adjustment in the
system setting is changed
by 1.
When this value is
increased, the variation is
also increased. When the
value is decreased, the
variation is also decreased.
is 0, the result of the
contrast adjustment is not
reflected. (* The adjustment
value must be set to 1 or
greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42 characters of watermark
copy (secondary output)
more clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the
containing characters of the
watermark document
(primary output) can be
easily reproduced.
Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
COPY MODE A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1 Normally set to the default.
select Enable/Disable ON 1 No need to change in the
B TEXT Text mode select Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1 market.
Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
F MAP Map mode select Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density document OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
text/ printed photo mode
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
Disable of selection of the ON 1
text mode
J PRINTED PHOTO (CPY Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
printed photo mode
K AUTO Automatic mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
L DEFAULT MODE When the default TEXT/ 0-5 0 0
exposure mode PRINTED PHOTO
background is ON, the TEXT 1
exposure mode to be set PRINTED PHOTO 2
is specified. PHOTOGRAPH 3
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(24P - 36P)(*1)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(37P - 48P)(*1)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(49P - 64P)(*1)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(65P - 80P)(*1)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 10
box (24P - 36P)(*2)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 10
box (37P - 48P)(*2)
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 10
box (49P - 64P)(*2)
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 10
box (65P - 80P)(*2)
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(24P - 36P)(*3)
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 90
(37P - 48P)(*3)
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 120
(49P - 64P)(*3)
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 150
(65P - 80P)(*3)
*1: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the line space is varied by 0.1mm.
*2: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the upper and the lower margins are varied by 0.1mm.
*3: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the left and the right margins are varied by 0.1mm.
46-68 46-90
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the automatic resolution Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
judgement. compression PDF images.
Section Section
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch 1) Select a target adjustment mode.
panel. 2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. 4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.

Item/Display Content Mode Item/Display Content
RESULT HIGH Judgement result : High TEXT A GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0
A 0-3 3
RESOLUTION resolution SENSITIVITY selection
RESULT MID Judgement result : B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
B 0-3 2
RESOLUTION1 Slight high resolution FINDLINES selection
RESULT MID Judgement result : C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
C 0-3 1
RESOLUTION2 Slight low resolution FINDLINES SW SW (H)
RESULT LOW Judgement result : Low D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
D 0-3 1
RESOLUTION1 resolution FINDLINES SW SW (V)
RESULT UNKNOWN Judgement result : E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
E 0-3 1
RESOLUTION Cannot judge INDEXING SEL number
F LANGUAGE SEL Language setting 0-1 0 adjustment SW
AUTO RESOLUTION Automatic resolution F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
G 0-2 1
MODE judgement mode INDEXING ADJ adjustment
COLOR A LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
46-74 INTENT selection
Purpose Adjustment C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto D R-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 299
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R)
ment (Auto adjustment) E G-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 587
Section ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G)
Operation/Procedure BG LAYER A BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
INTENT 1 setting
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
uously. INTENT 2 priority setting
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic SOFT CIC A SKEW Skew 0-1 0
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic CORRECTION correction
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations. switch
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is B FILTER Filter switch 0-1 0
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is C CIC MODE High 0-1 0
compression
printed.
mode switch
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, D OUTPUT Resolution 0-3 0
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. RESOLUTION setting
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment pattern is printed.
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment
result pattern is printed.
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered.
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
ment is completed.
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the
adjustment procedure for both copy and print mode have
completed successfully. For example, when the copy color
balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed
and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not
effective.
46-91
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of black text.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set.
When COLOR key or MONO key is pressed, the adjustment value
is set and a copy is made simultaneously.
Setting Default
Item Display Content Description
range value
A SEGMENT PARAM COMMON Area separation setting select 0: Other than image send mode black text 0-1 0
SPECIAL emphasis (simple, high compression)
1: Image send mode black text
emphasis (simple, high compression)
B BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment The JPEG compression ratio of the 0-2 1
[Color: High compression mode] background layer is selected.
C BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0: Low 0-2 1
[Color: Ultra fine mode] 1: Middle
D BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment 2: High 0-2 1
[Gray: High compression mode]
E BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0-2 1
[Gray: Ultra fine mode]
F FG: TARGET AREA TYPE0 Front ground extraction area select 0: type0 0-2 0
TYPE1 1: type1
TYPE2 2: type2
G FG: TEXT DENSITY [COL] Front ground black text density The black text density in the front ground 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Color] layer is changed.
H FG: TEXT DENSITY [GRY] Front ground black text density 0: Dark - 5: Default - 10: Light 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Gray]
I ULTRA FINE MODE OFF High compression/Ultra Fine mode 0: High compression mode 0-1 0
ON select 1: Ultra fine mode
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the initial value, an image quality trouble may occur.
Setting Default
48 Item/Display Content
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
48-1 magnification ratio adjustment
(CCD)
Purpose Adjustment
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica- magnification ratio adjustment
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction (CCD)
and the sub scanning direction). C SPF (MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
Section
(Main scan)
Operation/Procedure D SPF (SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch magnification ratio adjustment
panel. (Sub scan)
E SPFB (MAIN) DSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (Main scan)
The set value is saved. F COPY Copy magnification correction 1-7 4
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification CORRECTIO (Sub scan)
N (SUB)
ratio is increased.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B or D corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.

When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
48-5
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
Purpose Adjustment is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi- the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Setting Default
Section Scanner section Item/Display Content
range value
Operation/Procedure A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
panel. C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(High speed)
3) Press [OK] key. E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
The set value is saved. (Reference speed)
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
this adjustment.
2) Select a target adjustment item on the touch panel.

48-6
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
The set value is saved.
motor.
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
Section and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
Operation/Procedure to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [MID] [LOW A] [LOW B]
LOW C] keys on the touch panel.
Setting Default
Mode Select Item/Display Content
range value
COLOR/MONO MID A RRM (COLOR) Registration motor correction value (Color) 51
COLOR/MONO MID B RRM (MONO) Registration motor correction value (Monochrome) 51
HEAVY1,2 LOW A A RRM (COLOR/MONO) Registration motor correction value 1-99 51
HEAVY3 LOW B A RRM (COLOR/MONO) 51
HEAVY4 LOW C A RRM (COLOR/MONO) 51
COLOR/MONO MID C BTM Belt motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID D DM-K Drum K motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID E DM-C Drum C motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID F DM-M Drum M motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID G DM-Y Drum Y motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID H FUM Fusing motor correction value 43
HEAVY1,2 LOW A B 45
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 45
HEAVY4 LOW C 45
COLOR/MONO MID I CPFM Paper feed motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A C 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID J PFM PS front motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A D 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID K POM Paper exit motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A E 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A F FUSER SETTING Fusing speed switch timing value 35
HEAVY3 LOW B 1-99 43
HEAVY4 LOW C 43
HEAVY1,2 LOW A G FS-OFFSET Fusing acceleration ratio 70
HEAVY4 LOW C 70
HEAVY1,2 LOW A H RRM-START RRM acceleration start timing 150
HEAVY4 LOW C 150
HEAVY1,2 LOW A I RRM-END RRM acceleration end timing 200
HEAVY4 LOW C 200
HEAVY1,2 LOW A J RRM-OFFSET RRM acceleration ratio 60
HEAVY4 LOW C 70

Setting Default
Mode Select Item/Display Content
range value
COLOR/MONO MID L LCCM LCC motor correction values 1-99 50
COLOR/MONO MID M COR-IM Imaging motors all correction values 1-99 50
COLOR/MONO MID N COR-PP Paper transport motors all correction values 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A K 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and vice versa. Change by +/-1 corresponds to 0.1%.
However, with respect to FUSER SETTING, RRM START, and RRM END, when the paper enters the fixing state, the change is 1 mm for every
±1
(The larger the value is, the downstream in the conveying direction, the smaller the value, the more upstream in the conveying direction)
Error
49 Display item Content
display
4KFIN100(MAIN) 100 sheets staple 4K finisher Main 100FM
section
49-1
1KPUNCH(BOOT) Punch module Boot section for 1K 1PUNB
Purpose finisher
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. 1KPUNCH(MAIN) Punch module Main section for 1K 1PUNM
finisher
Section 4KPUNCH(BOOT) Punch module Boot section for 4K 4PUNB
Operation/Procedure finisher
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory. 4KPUNCH(MAIN) Punch module Main section for 4K 4PUNM
finisher
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
SADDLE100(BOOT) 100 sheets staple saddle unit Boot S100B
operation panel section.)
section
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. SADDLE100(MAIN) 100 sheets staple saddle unit Main S100M
4) Select a target firmware. section
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. TRIMMER(BOOT) 100 sheets staple trimmer unit Boot TRIMB
section
TRIMMER(MAIN) 100 sheets staple trimmer unit Main TRIMM
6) Press [YES] key. section
The selected firmware is updated. FOLDER(BOOT) Folding unit Boot section FOLDB
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is FOLDER(MAIN) Folding unit Main section FOLDM
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis- DECURLER(BOOT) Relay unit (Decurling) Boot section DECB
played. DECURLER(MAIN) Relay unit (Decurling) Main section DECM
SCU(BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUB
Error SCU(MAIN) SCU Main section SCUM
display DSPF(BOOT) DSPF Boot section DSPFB
ICU1(MAIN) ICU1 Main section former half ICU1M DSPF(MAIN) DSPF Main section DSPFM
ICU1(BOOTM) ICU1 Boot section main ICU1B FAX(BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXB
ICU1(SUB) ICU1 Sub section (ARM9) ICU1S FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXM
ICU2 ICU2 program ICU2 FAXOPT1(BOOT) FAX2 Boot section FX01B
LANGUAGE Language support data program LANG FAXOPT1(MAIN) FAX2 Main section FX01M
(General term) FAXOPT2(BOOT) FAX3 Boot section FX02B
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLIST FAXOPT2(MAINÅj FAX3 Main section FX02M
EOSA embedded OSA EOSA ACRE(BOOT) ACRE Boot section ACREB
PCL(PROFILE) PCL color profile PCLP ACRE(MAIN) ACRE Main section ACREM
PCU(BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUB ACRE_DATA ACRE table ACRED
PCU(MAIN) PCU Main section PCUM
DESK(BOOT) Desk unit Boot section DESKB
DESK(MAIN) Desk unit Main section DESKM
A4LCC(BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section LCC4B 49-3
A4LCC(MAIN) Side LCC (A4) Main section LCC4M Purpose
A3LCC(BOOT) Side LCC (A3) Boot section LCC3B
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual.
A3LCC(MAIN) Side LCC (A3) Main section LCC3M
LCT1(BOOT) A3LCT1 series Boot section LCT1B Section
LCT1(MAIN) A3LCT1 series Main section LCT1M Operation/Procedure
FIN(BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT section FINB 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
FIN(MAIN) Inner finisher MAIN section FINM * When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
INSERTER(BOOT) Inserter Boot section INSB MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
INSERTER(MAIN) Inserter Main section INSM pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
SADDLE(BOOT) Saddle Boot section SDLB
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-
SADDLE(MAIN) Saddle Main section SDLM
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
1KFIN(BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section FIN1B
1KFIN(MAIN) 1K finisher Main section FIN1M The current version and the update version are displayed.
4KFIN(BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section FIN4B 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4KFIN(MAIN) 4K finisher Main section FIN4M [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
4KFIN100(BOOT) 100 sheets staple 4K finisher Boot 100FB active from gray out.
section

4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
Setting Default
updated. Item/Display item Description
range value
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- A Lead edge RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. adjustment edge reference
value position (OC)
B Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
49-5 area setting loss area setting
C value SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
Purpose area adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. D Void area DENA Print lead edge 1 - 99 40
adjustment adjustment
Section
E DENB Sub scanning 1 - 99 30
Operation/Procedure direction print
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. range adjustment
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark F FRONT/ FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20
update. REAR void area
adjustment
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. G Off-center OFFSET_ OC document 1 - 99 50
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment OC off-center
5) Press [YES] key. adjustment
H Magnification SCAN_ SCAN sub 1 - 99 50
The selected watermark is updated.
ratio SPEED_ scanning
correction OC magnification
ratio adjustment
49-6 (CCD)
I Sub scanning DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
Purpose direction print correction value
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the OCR update. J area DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
correction value
Section
K value DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure value
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit. L DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the OCR update. value
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. M DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. N DENB-LC LCC/LCT/LCT 1 - 99 50
5) Press [YES] key. manual paper
The selected OCR is updated. feed correction
value
O DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 55
value
49-10 P DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
Purpose correction value
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the ACU firmware update. A.(RRC-A)

Section The timing of detection of the image lead edge after starting the
Operation/Procedure document scan is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. * When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When the
2) Press [YES] key. value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B.(LEAD)
The lead edge image loss amount is specified. Difference between
the document lead edge scan start position and the document lead
edge (0.1mm/step)
50
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
C.(SIDE)
50-1
The side image loss amount is specified.
Purpose Adjustment (Document width - Document edge scan range)/2 (0.1mm/step)
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust- (Rear edge image loss amount is fixed to 0. (No adjustment))
ment * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
Section D.(DEN-A)
Operation/Procedure The void amount made at the paper lead edge is specified.
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch (0.1mm/step)
panel. * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. E.(DEN-B)
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the The void amount made at the paper rear edge is specified. (0.1mm/
default. step)
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment F.(FRONT/REAR)
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment The void amount made at the right and the left edges of paper is
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.

50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0+/-2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Remarks
value
A DEN-C Printer print lead edge adjustment 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value for fitting the print lead edge for the
printer
When the adjustment value of this item is decreased
by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by
0.1mm.
B DEN-B Sub scanning direction print range 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge.
adjustment When the adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is
decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in
the sub scanning direction for the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 The void amount made at the right and the left edges
of paper is adjusted. When the value is increased,
the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed correction value 1 - 99 50
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
I DENB-LC LCC/LCT/LCT manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 55
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-9 1 2(CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
LCT1_1 LCT first series first 6
stage (*2)
LCT1_2 LCT first series second 7
stage (*2)
LCT2_1 LCT second series, first 8
stage (*3)
LCT2_2 LCT second series, 9
second stage (*3)
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO selection Not select 1
*1: Displayed only when A4/A3 LCC is connected.

*2: Displayed only when 2-stage LCT is installed.
*3: Displayed only when two units of 2-stage LCT are connected.

50-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss. (DSPF mode)
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Setting Default
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan position
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface document 1 - 99 50
scan position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
amount EDGE image loss amount
setting (SIDE1) setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) setting
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
(SIDE1) setting
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 40
amount EDGE image loss amount
setting (SIDE2) setting
(SIDE2) setting
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) setting
document off-center
adjustment
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification
ratio (Sub scan)
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing

is delayed.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
*3: Displayed only when two units of 2-stage LCT are connected.

50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 99
B MAIN-STD Standard correction amount (offcenter direction) 51
C SUB-STD Standard correction amount (Paper feed direction) 55
D MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 69
E MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 56
F MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 45
H MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 44
I MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value (LCC) 1 - 99 50
J MAIN-LCT-MFT Print off center adjustment value (LCT manual feed) 1 - 99 50
K MAIN-LCT1 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 1 series, first stage) 1 - 99 50
L MAIN-LCT2 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 1 series, second stage) 1 - 99 50
M MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (ADU) 1 - 99 44
N SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual feed (Main machine) 1 - 99 48
O SUB-CS1 timing adjustment Standard tray 1 - 99 50
P SUB-CS2 1 - 99 50
Q SUB-CS3 1 - 99 48
R SUB-CS4 1 - 99 48
S SUB-LC LCC /LCT/LCT manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
T SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 48
U SUB-HV-A Heavy paper1,2 1 - 99 50
V SUB-HV-B Heavy paper3,4 1 - 99 50
W SUB-GLOSSY Glossy paper 1 - 99 50
PAPER
X SUB-EMBOSS Embossed paper 1 - 99 50
Y SUB-OHP OHP 1 - 99 50
Z SUB-ENV Envelope 1 - 99 50
AA MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
AB PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual feed 1-6 1 2(CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
LCT1_1 LCT 1 series, first stage (*2) 6
LCT1_2 LCT 1 series, second stage (*2) 7
ALL_B All printable cassettes except cassette 2 6/7/
UT_CS 8(*3)
2
AC DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO Not select 1

*3: Without option: 6, A4 / A3 at LCC connection: 7, at 2nd stage LCT connection: 8.

50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
Setting Default
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
ning direction)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Setting Default
range value
A CYAN(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction F side (Cyan laser writing position F side) 1 - 399 200
B CYAN(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction R side (Cyan laser writing position R side) 1 - 399 200
C MAGENTA(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction F side (Magenta laser writing position F side) 1 - 399 200
D MAGENTA(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction R side (Magenta laser writing position R 1 - 399 200
side)
E YELLOW(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction F side (Yellow laser writing position F side) 1 - 399 200
F YELLOW(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction R side (Yellow laser writing position R side) 1 - 399 200
G CYAN(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction CYAN (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
H MAGENTA(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction MAGENTA (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
I YELLOW(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction YELLOW (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
J OFFSET_C_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value CYAN (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
F
K OFFSET_C_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value CYAN (REAR) 1 - 99 50
R
L OFFSET_M_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value MAGENTA (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
F
M OFFSET_M_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value MAGENTA (REAR) 1 - 99 50
R
N OFFSET_Y_MAIN_F Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value MAGENTA (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
O OFFSET_Y_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value MAGENTA (REAR) 1 - 99 50
R
P OFFSET_C_SUB Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value CYAN 1 - 99 51
Q OFFSET_M_SUB Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value MAGENTA 1 - 99 51
R OFFSET_Y_SUB Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value YELLOW 1 - 99 51
S OFFSET_C_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value CYAN (Heavy paper 1/2) 1 - 99 50
V12
T OFFSET_M_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value MAGENTA (Heavy paper 1/2) 1 - 99 50
V12

Setting Default
range value
U OFFSET_Y_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value YELLOW (Heavy paper 1/2) 1 - 99 50
V12
V OFFSET_C_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value CYAN (Heavy paper 3/4) 1 - 99 50
V34
W OFFSET_M_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value MAGENTA (Heavy paper 3/4) 1 - 99 50
V34
X OFFSET_Y_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value YELLOW (Heavy paper 3/4) 1 - 99 50
V34
Y MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
Z PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
AA DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO Not select 1
50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the
technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) Default value Remarks

MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 200 Same item with SIM50-20.
(VALUE) amount main scan direction F * However, the adjustment
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0 accuracy is in the unit of +/-
amount from the previous one, main 0.1) 0.1dot.
scan F
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 200
(VALUE) amount main scan direction R
() REG_M_R (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0
amount from the previous one, main 0.1)
scan R
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 200
(VALUE) amount sub scan direction
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction -399.0 - 399.0 (+/- 0
amount from the previous one, sub 0.1)
scan
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC Rotating direction of SKEW L99.9 - R99.9 (+/-0.1) 0 If the value is positive (+),
adjustment and the number of clicks "L" is displayed at the head the
(CMY) value. If the value is negative
(-), "R" is displayed at the
head. If the value is -5.0 -
+5.0, "(OK)" is displayed at the
bottom of the value. If not,
"(NG)" is displayed.
ALL_ Rotating direction of SKEW * If the value is positive (+),
ROTATE adjustment and the number of clicks "L" is displayed at the head
(K) the value. If the value is
negative (-), "R" is displayed
at the head. If the value is
-3.6 - +3.6, "(OK)" is
displayed at the bottom of
the value. If not, "(NG)" is
displayed.
START KCMY START_POINT Modulation control start position (1: 0 - 359 0 1step 1°
Current value)
() Modulation control start position (2:
The previous value)

Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) Default value Remarks
AMP1 KCMY AMP Modulation control amplitude value 0.00 - 15.00(±0.25) 0 Adjustment unit:±0.25
1 (1: Current value)
() Modulation control amplitude value
2 (2: The previous value)
AMP2 KCMY AMP2 Modulation control amplitude value 0.00 - 15.00(±0.25) 0 Adjustment unit:±0.25
2 (2: Current value)
() Modulation control amplitude value
PHASE KCMY PHASE_ADJ Modulation phase adjustment value 0 - 359 0
1 (1:Current value)
() Modulation phase adjustment value
(2: The previous value)
PHASE KCMY PHASE_ADJ2 Modulation phase adjustment value 0 - 359 0
2 2 (1:Current value)
() Modulation phase adjustment value
PHASE CMY PHASE_ADJK Tandem phase adjustment value K 0 - 359 0
/K (1: Current value)
() Tandem phase adjustment value K
(2: The previous value)
POSITI CMY POSITION Drum phase position value (1: 0 - 359 0
ON Current value)
() Drum phase position value (2: The
previous value)
Error displays in case of abnormal end Error code Error display Error content
Error code Error display Error content Sub 30 DATA_SUB_M_F_all 30 Data not designated
Forcible - SUSPENDED Door open scanning SUB_M_F all
end error adjustment 31 DATA_SUB_M_F_any 31 Data not designated
- SUSPENDED CA end
error SUB_M_F any
- - OFF end
32 DATA_SUB_M_F_all_widt Data not designated
Basic error 1 TONNER EMPTY 01 Toner empty
h 32 SUB_M_F all_width
2 BEFORE BEHAVIOR 02 Other conditions
33 DATA_SUB_M_F_any_wi Data not designated
4 SENSOR CALIBRATION Caribration error F
dth 33 SUB_M_F any_width
F 04
35 DATA_SUB_M_R_all 35 Data not designated
5 SENSOR CALIBRATION Caribration erroe C
SUB_M_R all
C 05
36 DATA_SUB_M_R_any 36 Data not designated
6 SENSOR CALIBRATION Caribration erroe R
SUB_M_R any
R 06
37 DATA_SUB_M_R_all_widt Data not designated
7 TIME OVER 07 Time error
h 37 SUB_M_R all_width
8 PROCESS CONTROL 08 Process control error
38 DATA_SUB_M_R_any_wi Data not designated
Sub 10 DATA_SUB_K_F_all 10 Data not designated dth 38 SUB_M_R any_width
scanning SUB_K_F all
40 DATA_SUB_Y_F_all 40 Data not designated
adjustment 11 DATA_SUB_K_F_any 11 Data not designated SUB_Y_F all
error SUB_K_F any
41 DATA_SUB_Y_F_any 41 Data not designated
12 DATA_SUB_K_F_all_widt Data not designated SUB_Y_F any
h 12 SUB_K_F all_width
42 DATA_SUB_Y_F_all_widt Data not designated
13 DATA_SUB_K_F_any_wid Data not designated h 42 SUB_Y_F all_width
th 13 SUB_K_F any_width
43 DATA_SUB_Y_F_any_wid Data not designated
15 DATA_SUB_K_R_all 15 Data not designated th 43 SUB_Y_F any_width
SUB_K_R all
45 DATA_SUB_Y_R_all 45 Data not designated
16 DATA_SUB_K_R_any 16 Data not designated SUB_Y_R all
SUB_K_R any
46 DATA_SUB_Y_R_any 46 Data not designated
17 DATA_SUB_K_R_all_widt Data not designated SUB_Y_R any
h 17 SUB_K_R all_width
47 DATA_SUB_Y_R_all_widt Data not designated
18 DATA_SUB_K_R_any_wi Data not designated h 47 SUB_Y_R all_width
dth 18 SUB_K_R any_width
48 DATA_SUB_Y_R_any_wi Data not designated
20 DATA_SUB_C_F_all 20 Data not designated dth 48 SUB_Y_R any_width
SUB_C_F all
52 DATA_SUB_K_F_all_widt Data not designated
21 DATA_SUB_C_F_any 21 Data not designated h 52 SUB_K_F all_width
SUB_C_F any
53 DATA_SUB_K_F_any_wid Data not designated
22 DATA_SUB_C_F_all_widt Data not designated th 53 SUB_K_F any_width
h 22 SUB_C_F all_width
Main 50 DATA_MAIN_K_F_all 50 Data not designated
23 DATA_SUB_C_F_any_wid Data not designated scanning MAIN_K_F all
th 23 SUB_C_F any_width adjustment 51 DATA_MAIN_K_F_any 51 Data not designated
25 DATA_SUB_C_R_all 25 Data not designated error MAIN_K_F any
SUB_C_R all
55 DATA_MAIN_K_R_all 55 Data not designated
26 DATA_SUB_C_R_any 26 Data not designated MAIN_K_R all
SUB_C_R any
56 DATA_MAIN_K_R_any 56 Data not designated
27 DATA_SUB_C_R_all_widt Data not designated MAIN_K_R any
h 27 SUB_C_R all_width
57 DATA_MAIN_K_R_all_wid Data not designated
28 DATA_SUB_C_R_any_wi Data not designated th 57 MAIN_K_R all_width
dth 28 SUB_C_R any_width

Error code Error display Error content Error code Error display Error content
Main 58 DATA_MAIN_K_R_any_wi Data not designated Adjustment 107 RANGE_MAIN_Y_R 107 Adjustment range error
scanning dth 58 MAIN_K_R any_width range error MAIN_Y_R
adjustment 60 DATA_MAIN_C_F_all 60 Data not designated
error MAIN_C_F all
61 DATA_MAIN_C_F_any 61 Data not designated
MAIN_C_F any 50-23
62 DATA_MAIN_C_F_all_wid Data not designated Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
th 62 MAIN_C_F all_width market.)
63 DATA_MAIN_C_F_any_wi Data not designated
dth 63 MAIN_C_F any_width Function (Purpose) Used to set the registration for temperature
65 DATA_MAIN_C_R_all 65 Data not designated adjustment.
MAIN_C_R all Section
66 DATA_MAIN_C_R_any 66 Data not designated Operation/Procedure
MAIN_C_R any
67 DATA_MAIN_C_R_all_wid Data not designated
th 67 MAIN_C_R all_width panel.
68 DATA_MAIN_C_R_any_wi Data not designated 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
dth 68 MAIN_C_R any_width 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
70 DATA_MAIN_M_F_all 70 Data not designated
MAIN_M_F all
71 DATA_MAIN_M_F_any 71 Data not designated
MAIN_M_F any 50-24
72 DATA_MAIN_M_F_all_wid Data not designated Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
th 72 MAIN_M_F all_width market.)
73 DATA_MAIN_M_F_any_wi Data not designated
dth 73 MAIN_M_F any_width
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,
75 DATA_MAIN_M_R_all 75 Data not designated
50-20 and 22.
MAIN_M_R all Section
76 DATA_MAIN_M_R_any 76 Data not designated Operation/Procedure
MAIN_M_R any
77 DATA_MAIN_M_R_all_wi Data not designated NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division,
dth 77 MAIN_M_R all_width and is not necessary for the market.
78 DATA_MAIN_M_R_any_w Data not designated
idth 78 MAIN_M_R any_width
80 DATA_MAIN_Y_F_all 80 Data not designated
MAIN_Y_F all
81 DATA_MAIN_Y_F_any 81 Data not designated
MAIN_Y_F any
82 DATA_MAIN_Y_F_all_wid Data not designated
th 82 MAIN_Y_F all_width
83 DATA_MAIN_Y_F_any_wi Data not designated
dth 83 MAIN_Y_F any_width
85 DATA_MAIN_Y_R_all 85 Data not designated
MAIN_Y_R all
86 DATA_MAIN_Y_R_any 86 Data not designated
MAIN_Y_R any
87 DATA_MAIN_Y_R_all_wid Data not designated
th 87 MAIN_Y_R all_width
88 DATA_MAIN_Y_R_any_wi Data not designated
dth 88 MAIN_Y_R any_width
Adjustment 90 RANGE_SKEW_K 90 Adjustment range error
range error SKEW_K
91 RANGE_SUB_C 91 Adjustment range error
SUB_C
92 RANGE_SKEW_C 92 Adjustment range error
SKEW_C
93 RANGE_SUB_M 93 Adjustment range error
SUB_M
94 RANGE_SKEW_M 94 Adjustment range error
SKEW_M
95 RANGE_SUB_Y 95 Adjustment range error
SUB_Y
96 RANGE_SKEW_Y 96 Adjustment range error
SKEW_Y
97 RANGE_MAIN_C_F 97 Adjustment range error
MAIN_C_F
99 RANGE_MAIN_C_R 99 Adjustment range error
MAIN_C_R
101 RANGE_MAIN_M_F 101 Adjustment range error
MAIN_M_F
103 RANGE_MAIN_M_R 103 Adjustment range error
MAIN_M_R
105 RANGE_MAIN_Y_F 105 Adjustment range error
MAIN_Y_F

50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
panel.

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
Item/Display item Content Setting Default

51 range value
D BACKEND OFF Secondary transfer 1 - 99 60
TIMING backend bias OFF timing
51-1 setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
secondary transport voltage.
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
Item/Display item Content Setting Default

range value
A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage 1 - 99 48
ON timing setting
B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage 1 - 99 50
OFF timing setting
C FRONT EDGE Secondary transfer front 1 - 99 30
ON TIMING edge bias ON timing
setting

51-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the DSPF registration roller.
(This adjustment is performed when there
is a considerable variation in the print
image position on the paper or when paper
jams frequently occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
Content Transport Setting Default

Item/Button Display item
(Mode, document, paper feed speed) direction range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A REGI2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A ENGINE TRAY1 (S) Tray 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size) less
B TRAY2 (S) Tray 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
C MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
D MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size) above
E MANUAL HEAVY A PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
F MANUAL HEAVY A PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above
G MANUAL HEAVY B PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper B/Small size) less
H MANUAL HEAVY B PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper B/Large size) above
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 40
J MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 40
K MANUAL LABEL Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 40

Content Transport Setting Default
Item/Button Display item
(Mode, document, paper feed speed) direction range value
L ENGINE ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
M ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
N ADU HEAVY A PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
O ADU HEAVY A PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
P ADU HEAVY B PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
Q ADU HEAVY B PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
R TRAY3/4(S) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
S TRAY3/4 HEAVY A PAPER (S) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
T TRAY3/4(L) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
U TRAY3/4 HEAVY A PAPER (L) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
V TRAY4 OHP Tray 4/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 40
W TRAY4 LABEL Tray 4/deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 40
X LCC/LCT (S) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
Y LCC/LCT HEAVY A PAPER (S) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
Z LCC/LCT HEAVY B PAPER (S) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
AA LCC/LCT (L) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
AB LCC/LCT HEAVY A PAPER (L) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
AC LCC/LCT HEAVY B PAPER (L) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
AD LCT MANUAL OHP LCT, warp adjustment value (OHP) manual feed - 1 - 99 40
adjustment value
AE LCC/LCT LABEL LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 40
Note on "Large size" and "Small size"

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
* The adjustment unit is a distance of 0.1mm unit.
* The smaller the set value of the warp amount for each of the specified items is, the smaller the warp is. The greater the set value is, the
greater the warp is.
* DSPF REGI1 is the registration amount adjustment in the paper feed side. DSPF REGI2 is the registration amount adjustment at just before
scanning.
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

53-8
53
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
53-6
erence and the DSPF mode document
Purpose Adjustment scan position.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the Section
DSPF document width.
Operation/Procedure
Section Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
Operation/Procedure AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment
1) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. (Auto adjustment)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
The maximum width detection level is recognized. table.
3) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment value is saved.)
The A4R width detection level is recognized. Setting Default
5) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. range value
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
7) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. reference position
MANUAL: DSPF mode document scan position adjustment
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
Setting Default
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value range value
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value A ADJUST DSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 10
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
stop position adjustment)
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
• When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
tion in the DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
• When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
53-7
shifted by 0.1mm.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document size
width sensor. 53-9
Section Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) DSPF dirt detection setting
Section
panel.
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 3) Press [OK] key.
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
B AD_P1 Intermediate position (L) 0 - 1023 438
C AD_P2 Intermediate position (S) 0 - 1023 699
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893

Setting Default
Item/Display item, Details of display Content
range value
A SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_START OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0-1 0 0
ON setting (when starting) ON 1 (OFF)
B SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0-1 0 1
ON setting (After a job) ON 1 (ON)
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV WEAK DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection level Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE setting Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
D OC_DIRT_LV WEAK OC dirt level setting Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
E SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK DSPF front surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0-2 0 1
STRONG High 2
F SIDEB_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK DSPF back surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0-2 0 1
STRONG High 2
G SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF DSPF front surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
H SIDEB_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF DSPF back surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
I SIDEB_EXT_SHADING_SET SPF back surface extended shading setting Default 0-4 0 0
Both 1
OFF
Both ON 2
ON at 3
startup /
OFF
after
JOB
OFF at 4
startup /
ON after
JOB
53-10
55
Function (Purpose) DSPF dirt detection execution.
55-1
Section
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
Operation/Procedure required.)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
control operations. (SOFT SW)
Item Content
OC Forcible execution of OC/DSPF SIDE A and the result Section
display are made. Operation/Procedure
DSPF Forcible execution of DSPF SIDE B and the result display
are made.
55-2
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
55-3
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

55-10
56
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
56-1
only)
Purpose Backup
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
Operation/Procedure
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. PWB.)
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
Section
3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select a target content of data transfer.
range value 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1 Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit
32 [blank: When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit
20H] displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit
65 - 90
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit EEPROM - HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
[Alphabet:
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right edge) HDD - EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
41H("A") -
5AH("Z")]
48 - 57
[Numeral:
30H("0") - 56-2
39H("9")]
Purpose Data backup
G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
C input 1 Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
M 2 HDD (including user authentication data
Y 3 and address data) to the USB memory.
R 4 (Corresponding to the device cloning and
G 5 the storage backup.)
B 6 Section
H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging type 0 1
Operation/Procedure
1 com-
PATTERN posing OR process 1 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2 method type 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
PATTERN No-delete- 2 <IMPORT>
3 compo- From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, HDD
sition type
<EXPORT>
Input value From EEPROM, HDD To USB MEMORY
Print Blank A B C D E F 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Input value 32 65 66 67 68 69 70 Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Print G H I J K L M displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Input value 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 (Machine with the DSK installed)
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Print N O P Q R S T
Input value 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, HDD
<EXPORT>
Print U V W X Y Z 0 From EEPROM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
Input value 85 86 87 88 89 90 48 3) Enter the password with 10-key.
4) Press [SET] key.
Print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input value 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Print 8 9 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Input value 56 57 displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

56-3 56-7
Purpose Data backup Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to Function (Purpose) Used to import the syslog data to a USB
the USB memory. flash drive.
Section Section
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
<IMPORT> 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE 56-8
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. Function (Purpose) Used to import the ICC profile data to a
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is USB flash drive.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
56-4
2) Select the ICC profile data to be imported.
Purpose Data backup
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
USB memory.
Section 56-15
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Backup
Function (Purpose) MFP EEPROM data restore
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
1) Confirm that new EEPROM attached on the PWB
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and, press [YES] key.
displayed. in case of an abnormal end "ERROR" is displayed.
56-5
56-99
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
memory in the TEXT format.
Function (Purpose) Used to import the log data to a USB flash
Section
drive.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
2) Select the log item data to be imported.
Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. Item Contents
SIM56-5 Import SIM56-5 data.
SIM56-6 Import SIM56-6 data.
56-6 SIM00-11 Import SIM00-11 data.
SIM56-4 Import SIM56-4 job log data.
SIM56-7 Import SIM56-7 system log data.
Function (Purpose) Used to output the JAM/trouble data. SIM56-2 Perform simplified output of SIM56-2.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Select the output target item with the touch panel key.
4) Press [YES] key.

60
60-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
(read/write) of the MFP PWB.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Start the test.
Result display Description

OK Success
NG Fail
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
INVALID Execution disable
SLOT Description
ICUM SLOT1 ICU standard 1 SLOT1
ICUM SLOT2 ICU standard 2 SLOT2
ICU1 SLOT1 ICU1 standard DIMM1
ICU1 SLOT2 ICU1 expansion DIMM2
ICU2 SLOT1 ICU2 standard DIMM3
ACRE SLOT ACRE ACRE
61
61-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
tion and laser detection.
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Display Content
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)

61-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [PR600] on the touch
panel.
panel.
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
Default value
Setting
Category Item/Display Content 65 CPM 75 CPM
range
machine machine
PR600 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(K) Laser power setting middle speed/K 0 - 255 142 155
(Fiery) B LASER POWER MIDDLE(C) Laser power setting middle speed/C 0 - 255 142 155
C LASER POWER MIDDLE(M) Laser power setting middle speed/M 0 - 255 142 155
D LASER POWER MIDDLE(Y) Laser power setting middle speed/Y 0 - 255 142 155
E LASER POWER LOW1(K) Laser power setting low speed 1/K 0 - 255 100 100
F LASER POWER LOW1(C) Laser power setting low speed 1/C 0 - 255 100 100
G LASER POWER LOW1(M) Laser power setting low speed 1/M 0 - 255 100 100
H LASER POWER LOW1(Y) Laser power setting low speed 1/Y 0 - 255 100 100
I LASER POWER LOW2(K) Laser power setting low speed 2/K 0 - 255 142 142
J LASER POWER LOW2(C) Laser power setting low speed 2/C 0 - 255 142 142
K LASER POWER LOW2(M) Laser power setting low speed 2/M 0 - 255 142 142
L LASER POWER LOW2(Y) Laser power setting low speed 2/Y 0 - 255 142 142
M LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 142 155
N LASER POWER LOW1(BW) Laser power setting low speed 1/BW 0 - 255 100 100
O LASER POWER LOW2(BW) Laser power setting low speed 2/BW 0 - 255 142 142
P LASER DUTY MIDDLE(K) Laser DUTY select middle speed/K 0 - 255 0 0
Q LASER DUTY MIDDLE(C) Laser DUTY select middle speed/C 0 - 255 0 0
R LASER DUTY MIDDLE(M) Laser DUTY select middle speed/M 0 - 255 0 0
S LASER DUTY MIDDLE(Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed/Y 0 - 255 0 0
T LASER DUTY LOW1(K) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/K 0 - 255 0 0
U LASER DUTY LOW1(C) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/C 0 - 255 0 0
V LASER DUTY LOW1(M) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/M 0 - 255 0 0
W LASER DUTY LOW1(Y) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/Y 0 - 255 0 0
X LASER DUTY LOW2(K) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/K 0 - 255 0 0
Y LASER DUTY LOW2(C) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/C 0 - 255 0 0
Z LASER DUTY LOW2(M) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/M 0 - 255 0 0
AA LASER DUTY LOW2(Y) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/Y 0 - 255 0 0
AB LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AC LASER DUTY LOW1(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AD LASER DUTY LOW2(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AE LASER DUTY MIDDLE(K 1BIT) Laser Duty select middle speed /K 0 - 255 0 0
AF LASER DUTY MIDDLE(C 1BIT) Laser Duty select middle speed /C 0 - 255 0 0
AG LASER DUTY MIDDLE(M 1BIT) Laser Duty select middle speed /M 0 - 255 0 0
AH LASER DUTY MIDDLE(Y 1BIT) Laser Duty select middle speed /Y 0 - 255 0 0
AI LASER DUTY LOW1(K 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low1 speed /K 0 - 255 0 0
AJ LASER DUTY LOW1(C 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low1 speed /C 0 - 255 0 0
AK LASER DUTY LOW1(M 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low1 speed /M 0 - 255 0 0
AL LASER DUTY LOW1(Y 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low1 speed /Y 0 - 255 0 0
AM LASER DUTY LOW2(K 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low2 speed /K 0 - 255 0 0
AN LASER DUTY LOW2(C 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low2 speed /C 0 - 255 0 0
AO LASER DUTY LOW2(M 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low2 speed /M 0 - 255 0 0
AP LASER DUTY LOW2(Y 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low2 speed /Y 0 - 255 0 0
AQ LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW 1BIT) Laser power setting correction value Y1 0 - 255 0 0
AR LASER DUTY LOW1(BW 1BIT) Laser power setting correction value Y2 0 - 255 0 0
AS LASER DUTY LOW2(BW 1BIT) Laser power setting correction value Y3 0 - 255 0 0

Default value
Setting
range
machine machine
COPY1200 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(K) Laser power setting middle speed/K 0 - 255 142 155
(Fiery) B LASER POWER MIDDLE(C) Laser power setting middle speed/C 0 - 255 142 155

61-3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY],
[COPY1200], [PR600/FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
panel.
When the laser power are increased, the print density is
increased and the line width of line images are increased.
Default value
Setting
range
machine machine
COPY600 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(K) Laser power setting middle speed/K 0 - 255 130 141
B LASER POWER MIDDLE(C) Laser power setting middle speed/C 0 - 255 130 141
J LASER POWER LOW2(C) Laser power setting low speed 2/ 0 - 255 130 130
AE LASER POWER K1 Laser power setting correction value K1 0 - 255 100 100
AF LASER POWER K2 Laser power setting correction value K2 0 - 255 100 100
AG LASER POWER K3 Laser power setting correction value K3 0 - 255 100 100
AH LASER POWER K4 Laser power setting correction value K4 0 - 255 100 100
AI LASER POWER C1 Laser power setting correction value C1 0 - 255 100 100
AJ LASER POWER C2 Laser power setting correction value C2 0 - 255 100 100
AK LASER POWER C3 Laser power setting correction value C3 0 - 255 100 100
AL LASER POWER C4 Laser power setting correction value C4 0 - 255 100 100
AM LASER POWER M1 Laser power setting correction value M1 0 - 255 100 100
AN LASER POWER M2 Laser power setting correction value M2 0 - 255 100 100
AO LASER POWER M3 Laser power setting correction value M3 0 - 255 100 100
AP LASER POWER M4 Laser power setting correction value M4 0 - 255 100 100
AQ LASER POWER Y1 Laser power setting correction value Y1 0 - 255 100 100
AR LASER POWER Y2 Laser power setting correction value Y2 0 - 255 100 100
AS LASER POWER Y3 Laser power setting correction value Y3 0 - 255 100 100
AT LASER POWER Y4 Laser power setting correction value Y4 0 - 255 100 100

Default value
Setting
range
machine machine
PRINTER A LASER POWER MIDDLE(K) Laser power setting middle speed/K 0 - 255 130 141
600/FAX B LASER POWER MIDDLE(C) Laser power setting middle speed/C 0 - 255 130 141
J LASER POWER LOW2(C) Laser power setting low speed 2/ 0 - 255 130 130
AE LASER DUTY MIDDLE(K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/K 0 - 255 0 0
AF LASER DUTY MIDDLE(C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/C 0 - 255 0 0
AG LASER DUTY MIDDLE(M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/M 0 - 255 0 0
AH LASER DUTY MIDDLE(Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/Y 0 - 255 0 0
AI LASER DUTY LOW1(K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/K 0 - 255 0 0
AJ LASER DUTY LOW1(C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/C 0 - 255 0 0
AK LASER DUTY LOW1(M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/M 0 - 255 0 0
AL LASER DUTY LOW1(Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/Y 0 - 255 0 0
AM LASER DUTY LOW2(K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/K 0 - 255 0 0
AN LASER DUTY LOW2(C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/C 0 - 255 0 0
AO LASER DUTY LOW2(M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/M 0 - 255 0 0
AP LASER DUTY LOW2(Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/Y 0 - 255 0 0
AQ LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AR LASER DUTY LOW1(BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AS LASER DUTY LOW2(BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/BW 0 - 255 0 0

Default value
Setting
range
machine machine
PRINTER A LASER POWER MIDDLE(K) Laser power setting middle speed/K 0 - 255 130 141
1200 B LASER POWER MIDDLE(C) Laser power setting middle speed/C 0 - 255 130 141
61-4 61-11
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust- Function (Purpose) Used to correct the laser power automati-
ment pattern. (LSU unit) cally.
Section Section LSU
1) Select a target item with scroll key on the touch panel. Select a target item on the touch panel key.
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key.
Items Contents Outline
AUTO Automatic correction Adjustment by scanner
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed. CORRECTION
DATA Data display screen Data display when
Setting Default executing the automatic
range value correction
A MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
B PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 When [AUTO CORRECTION] is pressed:
selection paper feed 1) Select a density to be corrected.
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5 4) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table
LCC LCC 6 (A4R direction), and press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment result pattern is outputted.
5) IF correction is still required, press [RETRY] key.
When [DATA] is pressed:
The display is shifted to the auto adjustment result display screen.

61-12 61-14
Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power at once.
Section LSU Section LSU
Press an item button to be adjusted. This Sim mode allows change of laser power settings easily, and all
When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed: at once. However, this change will not change the initial value of
1) Select the adjustment density pattern. SIM 61-3 (Laser power settings).
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The laser power set in this Sim mode will be:
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out. Initial value of Sim 61-3 x Initial value of Sim 61-14 (%)
4) Enter the adjustment value of 5points by the density meter. 1) Press a target item.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. Item Setting range Default

Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the K/BW -2 Fine (80%) 0
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis- -1 Slight fine (90%)
played. 0 Normal (100%)
6) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key. 1 Slight thick (110%)
2 Thick (120%)
When [VISUAL INSPECTION] is pressed:
C -2 Fine (80%) 0
1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
-1 Slight fine (90%)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 0 Normal (100%)
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out. 1 Slight thick (110%)
4) Press [5POINT CORRECTION] or [32POINT CORRECTION]. 2 Thick (120%)
M -2 Fine (80%) 0
5) Enter an adjustment value.
-1 Slight fine (90%)
0 Normal (100%)
Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the 1 Slight thick (110%)
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis- 2 Thick (120%)
played. Y -2 Fine (80%) 0
7) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key. -1 Slight fine (90%)
When [DATA] is pressed: 0 Normal (100%)
1 Slight thick (110%)
The display is shifted to the manual adjustment result display
2 Thick (120%)
screen.
Items Contents Outline

MEASURING Density meter correction * Adjustment with the
INSTRUMENT density meter.
VISUAL Visual check adjustment Adjustment by visual 62
INSPECTION check
DATA Data display screen Data display during
62-1
execution of the manual
correction Purpose Data clear
*: Since a special tool is required for measurement, this simulation Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk.
is executed only in the factory. Section
Operation/Procedure
61-13 2) Press [YES] key.
Purpose Adjustment Used to execute the HDD format.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the laser power correction When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
value. normal display.
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 62-2
2) Press [YES] key. Purpose Operation test/check
3) Laser power auto correction value (K-Y) 32 points and laser Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
power manual correction value (K-Y) 32 points are return back (partial).
to the default value. Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.

62-3 62-10
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.
(all areas). Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [YES] key. Used to delete the job log data.
Read/write operations are performed. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
62-6
Purpose Operation test/check 62-11
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the Purpose Data clear
hard disk. Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section Section
1) Select the self diag area. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
The self diag operation is performed. Used to delete the document filing data.
NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
use this simulation to cheek the HDD. normal display.
SHORT S.T Partial area diag

EXTENDED S.T All area diag
62-12
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Purpose Setting
normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
Normal completion - "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed. in a hard disk trouble.
Abnormal end - "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
Section
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
Operation/Procedure
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
tion. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
62-7 When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
Purpose Operation test/check data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
data storage area is cleared.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log. Item Content Default value
Section A 0 Enable 1
Operation/Procedure 1 Disable

ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed. 62-13
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Purpose Data clear
normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk.
Section
62-8 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Data clear 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk.
The operation manual data are deleted.
Section
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Operation/Procedure normal display.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format.
normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
NG" is displayed.

62-14 Display
Button Description Remarks
item
Purpose Data clear OC SMP AVE Reference plate
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing manage- ODD sampling average
ment data. value (odd number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
Section HDD EVEN sampling average
Operation/Procedure value (even number)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. TARGET Target value
VALUE
2) Press [YES] key.
BLACK Black output level
The document filing management data are cleared. LEVEL
At the same time, the job log data are also cleared. ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
This simulation is executed in the following trouble cases. CODE 1: STAGE1. Loop
number over
* The document filing function does not work normally.
2: STAGE2. The
* The job log is not recorded normally. target value is less
NOTE: than the specified
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. level.
3: STAGE3. The gain
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- set value is
sion. negative.
4: END is not
asserted. (Gain
62-20 adjustment)
5: STAGE2 Retry Max
Purpose Operation test/check 6: STAGE2.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the mirror- Underflow
ing hard disk. 7: Black shading error
Section Mirroring hard disk 8: Other error
9: END is not
Operation/Procedure asserted. (White
Enter the simulation mode, and the operation status of the HDD is shading)
displayed. 10: END is not
The status display is renewed in every second. asserted. (Black
shading)
Display Content description 11: END is not
OK Normal operation asserted. (Light
quantity correction)
NONE Not connected
12: END is not
REBUILDING Data rebuilding
asserted. (Scan)
ERROR Error occurrence
13: Register check
TROUBLE Trouble
error (When
starting/Gain)
14: Register check
error (Before light
63 DSPF First scan DSPF
FACE front surface white
WHITE reference level
63-1 LEVEL 1ST
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check DSPF Second scan DSPF
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction FACE front surface white
result.
LEVEL 2ND
Section Scanner DSPF ANALOG Analog gain
Operation/Procedure GAIN ODD adjustment value
(odd number)
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
ANALOG Analog gain
panel.
GAIN adjustment value
EVEN (even number)
Display
Button Description Remarks DIGITAL Digital gain
item
GAIN ODD adjustment value
OC ANALOG Analog gain
(odd number)
DIGITAL Digital gain
(odd number)
ANALOG Analog gain
EVEN (even number)
EVEN (even number)
ODD sampling average
value (odd number)
(odd number)
EVEN sampling average
value (even number)
TARGET Target value
EVEN (even number)
VALUE
BLACK Black output level
LEVEL

Display 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Button Description Remarks
item The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
DSPF ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error formed.
CODE 1: STAGE1. Loop When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
number over
normal display.
2: STAGE2. The
target value is less After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
than the specified adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
level. display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.
3: STAGE3. The gain
set value is
negative.
63-4
4: END is not
asserted. (Gain Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
adjustment) Function (Purpose) Used to display the chart patch density.
5: STAGE2 Retry Max
Section
6: STAGE2.
Underflow Operation/Procedure
7: Black shading error 1) Place the chart on the reference position of the left rear frame
8: Other error side of the document table. For the DSPF mode, put the chart
9: END is not backside up on the DSPF tray.
asserted. (White 2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
shading)
10: END is not
asserted. (Black The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
shading) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
11: END is not the normal display.
asserted. (Light
4) Select a data display mode.
12: END is not
GAMMA THROUGH Chart scan data
asserted. (Scan)
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the chart scan
13: Register check
data
error (When
starting/Gain) SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the
chart scan data
14: Register check
error (Before light SIT CHECK Chart scan data/Check result
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.
DSPF First scan DSPF
BACK back surface white
LEVEL 1ST 63-5
DSPF Second scan DSPF
BACK back surface white
WHITE reference level Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
LEVEL 2ND balance and gamma default setting.
Section
Operation/Procedure
63-2 1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
Purpose Adjustment 2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
default.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
Section
Operation/Procedure
63-7
1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and
Used to perform shading. Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
normal display. Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
63-3 2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
Purpose Adjustment SIM46-21 on the document table.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
ance and gamma auto adjustment. The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
Section Scanner 4) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the
1) Place the chart on the reference position of the left rear frame
scanned adjustment pattern sheet.
side of the document table. For the DSPF mode, put the chart
backside up on the DSPF tray. The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key. Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.

NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the copy color bal-
ance is manually adjusted.
B Point B target value

C Point C target value
D Point D target value
E Point E target value
F Point F target value
G Point G target value
H Point H target value
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
P Point P target value
BASE Background sampling value
63-8
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
ment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.
63-11
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
Default
value
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target DEF 1
color in the automatic color balance operation is
balance slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target
is selected, the color balance is converted
into natural gray color balance by the color
table in an actual copy mode and print is
made.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target
in the automatic color balance operation is
slightly shifted to natural gray color balance.
When this target is selected, the color
balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and print
is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target
in the automatic color balance operation is
slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is
selected, the color balance is converted into
the color balance with enhanced Cyan by
the color table in an actual copy mode and
print is made.

64
64-1
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, Specification of the print pattern 1 - 68 1
22, 29) (* For details, refer to the below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19,
21, 22, 29)
B DOT1 Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1 - 255 1
(DOT1>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2 - 255
except above: 1 - 255)
C DOT2 Space dot number setting (N parameter) 0 - 255 236
(DOT2>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2 - 255
D DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 255
(FIXED "255" IF A:9) (Pattern 9: 255 Fixed
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17 - 19: 2 - 8 2 (STANDARD
PHOTO except above: 1 - 8) DITHER)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photo 5
PRIINTED PHOTO Printed photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-7 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
LCT1_1 LCT tray 1 (*2) 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Standard paper 1-7 1 1
PLAIN2 Standard paper 2 2 (PLAIN1)
HEAVY Heavy paper 3
OHP OHP 4
ENVELOPE Envelope 5
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 6
GROSSY Glossy paper 7


Print pattern of Item A
Pattern Color select M parameter N parameter

Gradatio Exposure
NO./Content Pattern size generating When Enable/ Default Enable/ Default
Condition n select select
section none Disable value Disable value
1 Grid pattern All surface LSU-ASIC  K only  ×  1  236
• When the print width is 100 or above and all colors are selected, printing is made in the three colors of
CMY.
• Printing is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
• For the first writing, LD1 is fixed regardless of void.
2 Dot print All surface  K only  ×  2  2
9 Each color Fixed range × -  ×  10  1
10% area (4 colors
(A4/4R) fixed)
density print • Each interval is 41.86mm (989dots).
• When m is out of the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
• K printing is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt Fixed range × -  × × 1 × 1
print (4 colors
fixed)
11 4-color dot All surface × -  ×  2  2
print (sub (each color (4 colors
scan) 1/4) fixed)
• Each color is printed in 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
• At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
17 All All surface Halftone  K only   × 1 × 1
background (IMG-ASIC (Up to 3
(halftone) rear colors)
process) • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 Fixed range  K only ×  × 1 × 1
gradations (Up to 3
pattern colors)
(Other • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
dither) • 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations are printed in the next
line. (16 x 16 patch print)
• Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 Fixed range  K only ×  × 1 × 1
gradations (Up to 3
pattern colors)
(Dither for Same as above.
text)
21 4-point dot All color LSU-ASIC × -  ×  2  2
print (main (each color (4 colors
scan) 1/4) fixed)
• Each color is printed in 1/4 of the main scan paper size.
• At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
22 Slant line All surface LSU-ASIC  K only  ×  1  254

64-2
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-1 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29, 33 - 35) (* For details, refer to the below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19,
21, 22, 29, 33 - 35)
B DOT1 Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-1 1
(DOT1>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11, : 2 - 255
C DOT2 Space dot number setting (N parameter) 0-0 236
(DOT2>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11, : 2 - 255
D DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1-1 255
(FIXED "255" IF A:9) (Pattern 9: 255 Fixed
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1-1 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A:17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17 - 19: 2 - 8 2 (STANDARD
PHOTO except above: 1 - 8) DITHER)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photo 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-7 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Standard paper 1-7 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 3
OHP OHP 4
ENVELOPE Envelope 5
GROSSY Glossy paper 7


M N
Pattern
Pattern Gradation Exposure parameter parameter
NO./Content generating
size select select Enable/ Enable/
section Default value Default value
Disable Disable
1 Grid pattern All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  236
• When the print width is 100 or above and all colors are selected, printing is made in the three colors
of CMY.
• For the first writing, LD1 is fixed regardless of void.
2 Dot print All surface  ×  2  2
9 Each color 10% Fixed  ×  10  1
area (A4/4R) range • Each interval is 41.86mm (989dots).
density print • When m is out of the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
• K printing is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print Fixed  × × 1 × 1
range
11 4-color dot print All surface    2  2
(sub scan) (each • Each color is printed in 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
color 1/4) • At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
17 All background All surface Halftone   × 1 × 1
(halftone) (IMG-ASIC rear • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations Fixed process) ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (Other range • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
dither) • 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations are printed in
the next line. (16 x 16 patch print)
• Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations Fixed ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (Dither range Same as above.
for text)
21 4-point dot print All color LSU-ASIC  ×  2  2
(main scan) (each • Each color is printed in 1/4 of the main scan paper size.
color 1/4) • At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
22 Slant line All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  254

64-4
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 6
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 3
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS2)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
LCT1_1 LCT1 7
LCT1_2 LCT1 2 8
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0 0
HIGH High line number 1 (LOW)
F QUALITY 600DPI Image quality setting Standard 0 1
600DPI(HIGH QUALITY) High quality 1 600DPI(HIGH
1200DPI Fine 2 QUALIYT)
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Standard paper 0 0
GLOSSY Glossy paper 2
HEAVY1 Heavy paper 3

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR)
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
4 Halftone pattern (COLOR)
5 Halftone pattern (B/W)
6 Background dot print

64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-5 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
LCT1_1 LCT1 7
LCT1_2 LCT1 2 8
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 2
600DPI(HIGH High quality 1 600DPI(HIGH
QUALITY) QUALITY)
1200DPI Fine 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1
PLAIN2 Standard paper 2 1 (PLAIN)
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo 1 (SHARP)
GRAPHICS Presentation 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (SRGB)
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
TONER SAVE For TONER SAVE 6
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method Print method K 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1 (K)
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Pure black print set. 0 0
OFF not set. 1 (ON)
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W
4 Service chart (COLOR)
5 Service chart (B/W)

64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
LCT1_1 LCT1 7
LCT1_2 LCT1 2 8
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 2
600DPI(High High quality 1 600DPI(HIGH
QUALITY) QUALITY)
1200DPI Fine 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1 (CALIB)
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo 1 (SHARP)
GRAPHICS Presentation 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (SRGB)
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method Print method K only 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1 (K)
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Pure Black set. 0 0
OFF not set. 1 (ON)
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)
O CMY INK SIMULATION OFF CMYK simulation OFF 0 0
SWOP SWOP 1 (OFF)
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W

65-5
65 Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
65-1 input.
Purpose Adjustment Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis- Operation/Procedure
play section) detection coordinates. Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
Section Operation panel section the screen.
Operation/Procedure If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
screen. is displayed.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to <Check target key>
the simulation sub number entry menu.
10 Inch LCD model
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. HOME
66
66-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
cleared.
65-2 2) Press [DATA] key.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
Purpose Operation check/test
* When [SW NO] key is pressed, the display returns to the ini-
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
tial screen.
play section) detection coordinates.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
Section
10-key.
Operation/Procedure
* [1] - [0]
Touch the touch panel.
[0] - [1]
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the set-
the touched position is displayed in real time. ting is saved.
After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal
display.
;<

66-2

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the
default value for the country code.

Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
screen is displayed.
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed, the display is shifted to
the country code list screen.
* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
"PRESENT:".
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
[SET] key becomes active.
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of "NEW:" is cleared.
3) When [SET] key is pressed after entering the country code,
[EXECUTE] key becomes active. The country code is dis-
played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of
"NEW:" is cleared.

4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and [YES] 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
and [NO] keys become active. The country name is displayed memory check of the selected item is started.
on the tile line. 4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] key returns to
5) When [YES] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW the normal display and the result of memory check is dis-
corresponding to the country code is initialized. played.
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE], Memory check status
[YES], and [NO] keys become inactive.
NO CHECK No check
CHECKING During checking
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page) OK Check complete OK
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed on the initial screen, the dis- NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data
play is shifted to the country code list screen. line is displayed for each item.
Use scroll keys to select the country select page.
Check item
<Country code list>
Check memory item Remark
JAPAN 00000000 1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
U.S.A. 10110101 once.
AUSTRALIA 00001001 2 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
U.K. 10110100 3 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
FRANCE 00111101 4 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
GERMANY 00000100 5 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
SWEDEN 10100101
NEWZEALAND 01111110 The number in < > indicates the line.
CHINA 00100110
SINGAPORE 10011100
TW 11111110 66-4
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101
Purpose Operation test/Check
SLOVAKIA 11111100
OTHER3 11111011 Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the
FINLAND 00111100 line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:
NORWAY 10000010 max.)
DENMARK 00110001 Section FAX
NETHERLANDS 01111011 Operation/Procedure
ITALY 01011001
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the
SWITZERLAND 10100110
right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)
AUSTRIA 00001010
INDONESIA 01010100
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
THAILAND 10101001 2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
MALAYSIA 01101100 lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
INDIA 01010011 display.
PHILIPPINES 10001001 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
HONGKONG 01010000 are sent.
RUSSIA 10111000 4) To end signal send:
SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
SPAIN 10100000
send is interrupted.
PORTUGUESE 10001011
LUXEMBURG 01101001
<Signal send table>
BELGIUM 00001111
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
CZECH 00101110
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
HUNGARY 01010001
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
GREECE 01000110
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
POLAND 10001010
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
BRAZIL 00010110
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
KOREA 01100001
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
VIETNAM 10111100
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG Volt/mA

66-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
and display the result.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key.
2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is
shifted to the memory check screen.

<Sound message table>
66-5
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2)
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft (Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6)
SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals, ALARM (Alarm) RINGER EXT.TEL.RING
refer to SIM66-04.) (Ringing sound ER (External
(Speaker)) telephone call)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 66-9
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page. Purpose Operation test/Check
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high- Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
display. Soft SW setting)
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals * For details of sound messages, refer to
are sent. the sound message table of SIM66-08.
4) To end signal send: Section FAX
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal Operation/Procedure
send is interrupted. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the following
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
66-6 highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
Purpose Data output/Check display.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound
check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass- message is sent.
code. (If there is no confidential registra- 4) To end signal send:
tion, no print is made.) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
Section FAX send is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the con-
fidential checkable is printed. 66-10
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even Purpose Data clear
though [EXECUTE] key is pressed. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- image data. (The confidential data are also
mal display. cleared.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-7
Purpose Data output/Check 2) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the 3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the
image memory. (Confidential data are also machine.
outputted.)
Section FAX
1) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and all Purpose Operation test/Check
image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
mal display. Max.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-8
Purpose Operation test/Check screen is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes- 2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
sages to the line and the speaker. (Send highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
level: Max.) display.
Section FAX 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound
Operation/Procedure message is sent.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the following 4) To end signal send:
screen is displayed. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is send is interrupted.
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal <300bps send signal table>
display.
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001

66-12 66-15
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS)
to the line and the speaker. (Send level: send test and to adjust the make time.
Soft SW setting) Section FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps,
Operation/Procedure
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
table. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the following
Section FAX
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial
Operation/Procedure pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the following * The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered
with SIM66-13.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key again. The button
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
display.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and a sound
message is sent.
66-16
4) To end signal send:
Purpose Adjustment
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signal
send is interrupted. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
and to adjust the send level.
Section FAX
Purpose Setting 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the following
Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-
14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial
registered.) pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
group of the signal send level.
Section FAX
3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key. The button
Operation/Procedure
* The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column 66-17
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)
2) Enter a number with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:].
and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by Section FAX
one digit)) Operation/Procedure
3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-17, the following
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of screen is displayed.
[PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank. 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
66-14 are sent.
Purpose Adjustment 4) To stop signal sending:
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it returns to the normal dis-
send test and to adjust the make time. play and signal sending is interrupted.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the dial
pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] key again. The button

66-18 66-29
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Clear
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data
and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set- (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/
ting) Desktop expansion table, the group expan-
Section FAX sion table, the program registration table,
the interface memory box table, the meta
Operation/Procedure
data, InboundRouting, and the Document
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the following Admin table).
Section FAX
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
Operation/Procedure
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and signals
are sent. 2) Press [YES] key.
4) To stop signal sending: The telephone book data area cleared.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it returns to the normal dis- 3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] key returns to
play and signal sending is interrupted. the normal display and [YES] and [NO] keys gray out.
66-21 66-30
Purpose Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change,
error, protocol monitor). The display is highlighted by status change.
Section FAX Section FAX
1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the following
and the previously set button returns to the normal display. screen is displayed.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is
detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started.
detected.
3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
mal display. <TEL/LIU status change item description>
<FAX information print content table> HS1 Polarity inversion signal

HS2 Polarity inversion signal
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
RHS Handset hook SW
EXHS External telephone hook SW
66-22
Purpose Setting 66-31
Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume. Purpose Setting
(This simulation can be executed even
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
though the handset setting is set to NO.
TEL/LIU.
When, however, the handset is not
installed, the sound volume cannot be Section FAX
checked.) (Japan model only) Operation/Procedure
Section FAX 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the following
Operation/Procedure
2) Change the port setting.
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.
the default sound volume.) 3) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the changed setting is
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID- reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.
DLE 2:MAX) 4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] key again. [EXE-
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to deliver the selected on-hold tone. CUTE] key returns to the normal display.
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume <Port which outputs to TEL/LIU>
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
CION 150Vom S.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and delivery
of the on-hold tone is stopped.

66-32 66-39
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
the line and to display the result. setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Section FAX Section FAX
1) Press [EXECUTE] key to check the fixed data received from 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des-
the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set
* Fixed data check procedure as the destination.)
• The data received from the line is checked of the following 2) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is
"OK" is displayed on LCD, if not "NG" is displayed. highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the
normal display.
• The judgment is made in 2 minutes.
* When the destination button is changed, the new destination
Receive speed: 300BPS
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Receive data: 00H
<Destination setting table>
Judgment data: 100byte
2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor- JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA
mal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG." CHINA ASIA&OTHERS
66-33
Purpose Operation test/Check 66-42
Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig- Purpose Setting
nals with the line connected and to display
the detection result. When a signal is Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
trol installed in the FAX BOX.
detected, the display is highlighted.
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and
screen is displayed. YES] and [NO] keys become active.
2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two 2) Press [YES] key.
options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF." The power control program is rewritten.
3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG 3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com-
CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected, pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the
they are normally displayed. normal display, and [YES] and [NO] keys gray out.
<Signal used for signal detection check>
(When "FNET" is selected)
66-43
FNET
Purpose Setting
(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected) Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
power control installed in the FAX BOX.
BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from
* Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control
the MODEM controller to the MFP control-
adjustment value.
ler or the data line or the command line
individually. 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing
to the power control is executed. When writing is normally
Section FAX
completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis-
Operation/Procedure played.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-36, the following 3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
screen is displayed. mal display.
2) Operation check <Set range and default value of each set value>
Select an item to be checked on the screen.
Item Set range Default value
<MFP controller I/F check item table> A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6
MFP < MDMC (DATA once) MFP > MDMC (DATA once) B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10
Data line Once Data line Once C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142
MFP < MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP > MDMC (DATA repeat) D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
Data line Repeat Data line Repeat E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15
MFP < MDMC (CMD once) MFP > MDMC (CMD once) F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240
Command line Once Command line Once G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2
MFP < MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP > MDMC (CMD repeat) H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Command line Repeat Command line Repeat

66-61 67-24
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto
(151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing adjustment)
the soft SW while checking with the LCD. Section Printer
Section FAX Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Press [DATA] key. 2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed. select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
10-key. The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and
* [1] - [0] the adjustment result is printed.
[0] - [1] 4) Press [OK] key.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the set- The halftone correction target registration is processed.
ting is saved.
67-25
66-62 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Purpose Backup Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a adjustment)
USB memory in PDF file type. Section Printer
Section FAX Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. touch panel.
2) Select data to be imported. 2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. touch panel.
Execute import of data selected in procedure 2). 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Error display Content
ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB memory installed
ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image data
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
ERROR Other errors
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value.
Item/Display Setting range Default value

A POINT1 1 - 999 500
67 B POINT2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 1 - 999 500
67-17 D POINT4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 1 - 999 500
Purpose Reset
F POINT6 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Printer reset G POINT7 1 - 999 500
Section Printer H POINT8 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure I POINT9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 1 - 999 500
2) Press [YES] key.
L POINT12 1 - 999 500
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
M POINT13 1 - 999 500
NIC setting.)
N POINT14 1 - 999 500
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the O POINT15 1 - 999 500
normal display. P POINT16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 1 - 999 500

67-26 67-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
printer mode auto color balance adjust- of the printer mode auto color balance
ment. adjustment.
Section Printer Section Printer
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Default
value
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in DEF 1 adjustment is set to the default.
value the automatic color balance operation is The service color balance target and the color balance target
table slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
select selected, the color balance is converted into balance as the factory color balance target.
natural gray color balance by the color table in
an actual printer mode and print is made.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in
the automatic color balance operation is 67-31
slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. Purpose Data clear
When this target is selected, the color balance
is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
an actual copy mode and print is made. Section Printer
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in
Operation/Procedure
the automatic color balance operation is
slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
selected, the color balance is converted into 2) Press [YES] key.
the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are
color table in an actual copy mode and print is
cleared.
made.
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.)
67-27 67-33
Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer
mode auto color balance adjustment. screen.
Section Printer Section Printer
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. 1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
2) Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet touch panel.
printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table. 2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key.
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
sheet patch images. value.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
Setting Default
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. Item/Display Content
range value
NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the printer color bal- A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
ance is manually adjusted. B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
B Point B target value D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
C Point C target value E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
D Point D target value F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
E Point E target value G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
F Point F target value H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
G Point G target value I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
H Point H target value J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
I Point I target value K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
J Point J target value L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
K Point K target value M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
L Point L target value N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
M Point M target value O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
N Point N target value P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
O Point O target value Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
P Point P target value
BASE Background sampling value

Display Content Key 67-36
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper CMYK Purpose Adjustment/Setup
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo CMYK
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
SCREEN2 600dpi 1bit Graphics CMYK
sity section.
SCREEN3 600dpi 4bit Photo CMYK
SCREEN4 600dpi 4bit Graphics CMYK Section Printer
SCREEN5 1200dpi 1bit Photo CMYK Operation/Procedure
SCREEN6 1200dpi 1bit Graphics CMYK 1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
SCREEN7 B/W 600 dpi 1bit K
2) Press [OK] key.
SCREEN8 B/W 600 dpi 4bit K
SCREEN9 B/W 1200dpi 1bit K
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
SCREEN10 Toner Save B/W CMYK
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
low density are images are weakly reproduced.
* When only the K data are displayed, [C], [M], and [Y] keys are When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
grayed out, disabling the key operations. section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
* When "600dpi 1bit SCREEN" is displayed, [EXECUTE] key is
grayed out, disabling the key operations. Item/Display Content
Setting Default
range value
A A PATCH INPUT A patch input value 0 - 13 1
67-34
67-41
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
printer high density section. (Support for Purpose Adjustment/Setup
the high density section tone gap) Function (Purpose) Used to set the threshold for judging the
Section Printer selected color printing or the black color
Operation/Procedure printing in the black and white mode.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
0 Enable 1) Select a set value with the scroll key.
1 Disable
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 3) Press [OK] key.

A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0 A C1 Mode1 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
(0: ENABLE density correction B V1 Mode1 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0
1: DISABLE) mode: Enable C C2 Mode2 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
1 CMY engine highest D V2 Mode2 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0
density correction
mode: Disable
B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE density correction
67-42
1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
1 K engine highest Purpose Adjustment
density correction Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gradation by increasing /
mode: Disable decreasing the selected color componet
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 amount or the black color component
TARGET CYAN maximum density
amount in the black and white mode.
correction
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 Section Printer
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density Operation/Procedure
correction
1) Select Mode1 or Mode2.
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum density 2) Select an item to be set.
correction
Mode Default
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 Item/Display Content
value
TARGET BLACK maximum density
correction Black F1 Black : Light F2
(Achromatic F2 Black : Normal
• When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items MODE color) F3 Black : Dark
A and B to "0." 1 G1 Selected color : Light G2
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone COLOR G2 Selected color : Normal
gap is reduced. (Selected color) G3 Selected color : Dark
• To increase the density in the high density section further, set
items A and B to "1."
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
changed.

67-43 67-54
Function (Purpose) 2 Color mode balance adjustment Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment
Section Printer (Automatic adjustment for each dither)
Operation/Procedure Section Printer
1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-keys. This simulation is used to adjust the color balance, the density, and
3) Press [OK] key. the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, the graphic mode, the dot screen mode and the
Setting Default value SHIGH mode.
Item/Display Content Color
range C M Y This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
A RED R output CMY 0 - 255 0 235 224 and images.
color 1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/LT or A3 or 11" x 17" paper is auto-
B GREEN G output CMY 0 - 255 180 0 241 matically selected.)
color
C BLUE B output CMY 0 - 255 235 159 0
color 2) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
D CYAN C output CMY 0 - 255 182 0 25 procedure 1) on the document table so that the thin lines on
color the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
E MAGENTA M output CMY 0 - 255 0 217 0 left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
color patch image (adjustment pattern).
F YELLOW Y output CMY 0 - 255 0 0 234 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
color
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
67-46
mality.
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust print image enhancement The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
Section 5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
Operation/Procedure
Select item (Mode) Content
1) Select an adjustment item with scroll key.
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in
2) Enter the set value with 10-keys the heavy paper mode
3) Press [OK] key 1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in
1200dpi mode
Item/ Setting Default B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and
Content
Display range value gradation in the monochrome mode
A PROCESS Edge judgment 0-1 0 4BIT_GRAPHICS Adjustment item to improve the color balance in
(0:CMYK 1:K) 600dpi, 4bit Graphic mode.
B CANCEL (600dpi) Edge cancellation 0 - 255 64
C CANCEL (1200dpi) Edge cancellation 0 - 255 64 6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/LT or A3 or 11" x 17" paper is auto-
matically selected.)
67-52 The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 7) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 6) on the document table so that the thin lines on
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
printer screen.
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
Section Printer patch image (adjustment pattern).
1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel. The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes. the color balance check patch image is printed out.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. 9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
SIM67-54, it is reset to the default. key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
Display Content To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen press [EXECUTE] key.
Printer heavy paper automatic density
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
correction amount
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
tered.
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo) 10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
SCREEN2 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit)
SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit)
Printer B/W toner save automatic
density correction amount
4BIT_GRAPHICS SCREEN4 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)

[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE Service Manual
MX-7580N
1. Error code and troubleshooting D. Self diag operation

The machine always monitors its own state.
A. General When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- displays the trouble message.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user nearly expired or is expired.
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,
When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the
may not be stopped.
machine to minimize the damage.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
B. Function and purpose the LCD and lamp.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
trouble.) ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is tion.
stopped on detection of a trouble.) Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, sages must be cleared by a simulation.
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows Monitors the machine
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This conditions.
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-
sumable part.)
Detects/analyzes
C. Self diag message kinds the content.
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the

Warning
࠙࣬
user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.) Trouble
Πρήσ
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble ൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped. ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
Others -
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-7580N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 1

E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Error code and operatable mode
Operable mode
Judgeme Scan
Trouble content Trouble code Copy Scan Scan List FAX FAX
nt block To Print
scan (Push) (Pull) print send print
HDD
Security trouble Security module MFP E7(C0,C1) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
FAX board trouble FAX board F6(00,01,02,04,21,30,97,       1 1
breakdown 98)
HDD trouble SSD breakdown E7(A7) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD breakdown E7(03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD-ASIC E7(04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Operation Operation U9(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
communication communication
trouble trouble
Scanner SCU communication A0(02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
communication error E7(80)
trouble
Engine PCU communication A0(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
communication error E7(90)
trouble
Option ACU communication A0(04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
communication error
trouble
Printer port system Printer port system F9(00)  ✕ ✕  ✕   
trouble trouble *13 *14
Backup battery Backup battery U1(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
voltage fall trouble voltage fall *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
Operation disable Controller fan motor L4(28,30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 1 trouble
Operation disable Memory error U2(00,11,41,42) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 2 (included not installed *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
the expansion RAM)
Serial number U2(30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
discrepancy *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
HDD registration data U2(50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
check sum error *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
External U7(50,51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
communication
disable (RIC)
Memory error U2(40) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(included not installed
the expansion RAM)
Connection trouble A0(10,15,17,18,19,20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(MFP detection) E7(60,61,62)
Operation disable Memory check error E7(96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 3 when booting
Image memory E7(01,49,91,92,93,94) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble, decode error
Image memory E7(42,46,47,48) ✕ 17 ✕ ✕ ✕   
trouble, decode error
(related to ACRE)
Operation disable Personal counter not PC(00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 4 installed trouble
Power controller Power controller L8(20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble trouble
Special function Special function error U2(60,70)        
trouble *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16

Operable mode
Judgeme Scan
nt block To Print
HDD
Laser trouble LSU breakdown PCU E7(20,24,28,29,A0) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
L6(10) *10
Engine trouble 1 Connection trouble A0(21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(PCU detection) E7(50,55)
F1(50)
Engine trouble 2 PCU troubles (motor, H5(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
fusing, etc) U2(90,91) *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
*20
PCU troubles (motor, C1(01,10,14,40) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
fusing, etc) C4(00,20,21,25,30,31,35) *10
F2(22,40,64,70,74,91)
H2(00,01,02,03,04,05,06,
07)
H3(00,01,02)
H4(00,01,02,30,31,32)
H7(10,11)
L4(02,03,06,07,08,12,16,
17,18,19,20,31,32,34,35,
36,39,40,41,42,43,44,48,
49,57,60,61,71)
L8(01,02,11,12)
Color system General PCU color C1(03,05,07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble system breakdown E7(21,22,23,25,26,27,A1, *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *10 *19 *19
A2,A3) *19
F2(23,24,25,41,42,43,65,
66,67,71,72,73,75,76,77,
92,93,94)
Paper feed tray 0 Paper feed tray 0 U6(63,68,69) 3    3 3  3
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 1 Paper feed tray 1 F3(12) 3    3 3  3
Paper feed tray 5 Paper feed tray 5 U6(09) 3    3 3  3
trouble breakdown *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
*20
Paper feed tray 5 U6(23,24,29) 3    3 3  3
breakdown UE(10,11,12,13,14,15,16, *10
17)
Paper feed tray 6 Paper feed tray 6 U6(33,34,39) 3    3 3  3
trouble breakdown UE(20,21,22,23,24,25,26, *10
27)
Paper feed tray Paper feed tray other U6(20,21,22,51,54,80,81, 11    11 11  11
other trouble breakdown 82,83,84) *10
Staple trouble Staple breakdown F1(08,10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
*10
Saddle stitch Saddle stitch section F1(31,41,42,43,44,45,46, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
section trouble breakdown 51) *10
Finisher trouble After process F0(03,08,10,11,14,15,18, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
breakdown 19,20,23,25,28,29,30,31, *10
32,33,34,37,40,41,42,43,
44,45,46,47,48,49,51,52,
53,54,55,56,70,71,72,73,
74,75,76,77,80,81,82,83,
84,86)
F1(00,03,15,19,20,21,22,
23,30,32,33,34,37,38,52,
55,60,90,96,97,98,99)
Inserter trouble Inserter breakdown F1(64,65,66,67) 3    3 3  3
(except for *10
communication
trouble)
Other troubles Other troubles EE(EC,EL,EU)        
Process control Process control F2(39,49,50,51,52,53,58,        
trouble breakdown (PCU 78,A0,A1,A2,A3) *12
detection)

Operable mode
Judgeme Scan
nt block To Print
HDD
Operation disable Connection trouble SCU A0(22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (SCU detection)
Color system SCU color system UC(02) 9 9 9 9   9 
trouble (SCU breakdown (SCU
detection) detection)
Color system SCU color system UC(12) 8 8 8 8   8 
trouble (DSPF breakdown (DSPF
detection) detection)
Anti-copy trouble Anti-copy system UC(20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
Anti-copy trouble Anti-copy system UC(30) 7 7 7 7   7 
(DSPF detection) (DSPF detection)
Scanner trouble 1 EEPROM system U2(80,81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
*20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
Scanner trouble 2 Scanner section L1(00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
breakdown (mirror, L3(00)
motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD trouble CCD breakdown E7(10,11,14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
(shading, etc)
DSPF/DF trouble DSPF/DF breakdown U5(00,16,20,30,31) 6 6 6 6   6 
SPF back surface General troubles in E6(10,11,14) 7 7 7 7   7 
trouble the SPF back surface
scanning section
Trouble content
Trouble content PCU F2(45)        
Error history MFP U2(05)        
: Operation enabled ✕: Operation disabled

1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section
6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode
7: When detected in other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode/single surface scan mode
8: When detected in other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the duplex color scan mode
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the monochrome mode
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred
11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK
*12: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
*13: When Fiery server is installed, PCL does not operate
*14: Only Fiery server list print (self print) is disabled
15: When in U2-22. trouble notification cannot be made. When in U2-23, If either of the FAX soft switch cannot be restored.
*16: Message is displayed
17: Job execution enable only in a format other than high compression PDF
*19: When the color mode is set to disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the mono-
chrome mode
*20: Message is displayed

(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
MFP event Each block

manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
F3-12, 22 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16 sim task
SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: U6 trouble cancel,
F3-12, F3-22 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Process sequence Error code Content

U2 50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
First
(Low priority) A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
E7 48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error
42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
Last A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error
(High priority)
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)

F. Error code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP 
02 SCN Mother PWB ROM error MFP 
04 ACU ROM error MFP 
10 Controller ROM error MFP 
15 Store DSK data conflict MFP 
17 Inconsistency between the UI data and the CPU firmware version MFP 
18 Incompatible ASIC-MAIN firmware MFP 
19 MFPC starting (synchronization) error MFP 
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP 
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU 
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU 
C1 01 Charger cleaner trouble (K) PCU 
03 Charger cleaner trouble (C) PCU 
05 Charger cleaner trouble (M) PCU 
07 Charger cleaner trouble (Y) PCU 
10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) PCU 
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU 
40 High voltage MC PWB trouble PCU 
C4 00 PTC trouble PCU 
01 PTC (Pre Transfer Charger) cleaner trouble PCU 
20 1st transfer output open trouble PCU 
21 1st transfer output short trouble PCU 
25 High voltage 1TC PWB trouble PCU 
30 2nd transfer output open trouble PCU 
31 2nd transfer output short trouble PCU 
35 High voltage 2TC PWB trouble PCU 
E6 10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP 
03 HDD trouble MFP 
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP 
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
20 LSU laser detection and deterioration error (K) PCU 
21 LSU laser deterioration error (C) PCU 
22 LSU laser deterioration error (M) PCU 
23 LSU laser deterioration error (Y) PCU 
24 LSU LD driver trouble (K) PCU 
25 LSU LD driver trouble (C) PCU 
26 LSU LD driver trouble (M) PCU 
27 LSU LD driver trouble (Y) PCU 
28 LSU - PCU connection error PCU 
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU 
42 Image data trouble (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
46 Image data decode error (ACRE ASIC) MFP 
47 Inconsistency between the MFP and the ACRE firmware MFP 
48 ACRE ASIC memory error MFP 
49 Water Mark data error MFP 
50 Combination error between PWB and firmware PCU 
55 PWB information sum error MFP 
60 Combination error between PWB and firmware MFP 
61 Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the PCU PWB MFP 
62 Controller connection error MFP 
80 MFP - SCN Mother PWB communication error MFP 
89 Communication error between MFPC PWB CPU and energy-saving NIC MFP 
controller
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP 
91 FAX reception image data error MFP 
92 Copy image data error MFP 
93 Copy, image send, filing, print image data process error MFP 
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP 
96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error MFP 
A0 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (K) PCU 
A1 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (C) PCU 
A2 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (M) PCU 

Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
E7 A3 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (Y) PCU 
A7 SSD trouble MFP 
C0 TPM PWB data access error MFP 
C1 Security check error MFP 
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error PCU 
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU 
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU 
F0 03 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor section abnormality (FNM110) PCU 
08 Finisher stapler shift motor section abnormality (FNM107) PCU 
10 Finisher staple motor section abnormality (FNM115) PCU 
11 Finisher bundle exit motor section abnormality (FNM116) PCU 
14 Finisher paper rear edge falling motor section abnormality (FNM113) PCU 
15 Finisher tray lift motor section abnormality (FNM106) PCU 
18 Finisher rear edge hold motor section abnormality (FNM118) PCU 
19 Finisher paper alignment motor F section abnormality (FNM108) PCU 
20 Finisher paper alignment motor R section abnormality (FNM109) PCU 
23 Shutter trouble (FNCL102) PCU 
25 Finisher paper transport roller lift motor section abnormality (FNM119) PCU 
28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift motor section abnormality (FNM112) PCU 
29 Finisher PWB cooling fan abnormality (FNFAN102) PCU 
30 Communication trouble between the finisher and the saddle PCU 
31 Finisher saddle folding motor section abnormality (FSM206) PCU 
32 Finisher relay unit transport motor section abnormality (PIM301) PCU 
33 Finisher punch shift motor section abnormality (FCM101) PCU 
34 Finisher punch motor section abnormality (FCM102 PCU 
37 Finisher backup RAM trouble PCU 
40 Communication trouble between the finisher saddle and the trimmer. PCU 
41 Finisher saddle lead edge stopper motor section abnormality (FSM203) PCU 
42 Finisher saddle folding roller guide motor section abnormality (FSM204) PCU 
43 Finisher saddle alignment motor section abnormality (FSM212) PCU 
44 Finisher saddle rear edge hold motor section abnormality (FSM210) PCU 
45 Finisher saddle staple motor section abnormality (FSM209) PCU 
46 Finisher saddle rear edge shift motor section abnormality (FSM211) PCU 
47 Finisher saddle flap motor section abnormality (FSM213) PCU 
48 Finisher saddle push motor section abnormality (FSM205) PCU 
49 Finisher saddle separation motor section abnormality (FSM214) PCU 
51 Finisher trimmer cutter motor abnormality (FTM106) PCU 
52 Finisher trimmer registration motor section abnormality (FTM102) PCU 
53 Finisher trimmer inlet port separation motor abnormality (FTM103) PCU 
54 Finisher trimmer paper exit separation motor section abnormality PCU 
(FTM104)
55 Finisher trimmer bundle press motor section abnormality (FTM105) PCU 
56 Paper remaining trouble in the finisher trimmer PCU 
70 Communication trouble between the finisher and the folding unit PCU 
71 Folding unit lead edge holding guide motor section abnormality (FLM10) PCU 
72 Folding unit backup RAM trouble PCU 
73 Folding unit power fan abnormality PCU 
74 Folding unit folding tray paper exit motor section abnormality (FLM14) PCU 
75 Folding unit upper stopper motor section abnormality (FLM8) PCU 
76 3-fold stopper motor section in the folding unit is abnormal (FLM9) PCU 
77 Folding unit transport motor section abnormality (FLM11) PCU 
80 Finisher power cooling fan motor abnormality (FNFAN101) PCU 
81 Finisher upper tray fan abnormality (FNFAN103) PCU 
82 Finisher lower tray fan abnormality (FNFAN104) PCU 
83 Finisher paper guide motor section abnormality (FNM120) PCU 
84 Finisher grip section abnormality (FNM117) PCU 
86 Finisher discharged paper hold motor section abnormality (FNM114) PCU 
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
03 Finisher paper delivery roller lift operation trouble (FSWN) PCU 
08 Stapler shift trouble (FSM) PCU 
10 Staple operation trouble (FFSM) PCU 
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble (FTLM) PCU 
19 Finisher paper alignment operation trouble F PCU 
20 Finisher paper alignment operation trouble R PCU 
21 Abnormality of relay unit fan motor inside the machine (FDCM) PCU 
22 Finisher trailing edge assist motor trouble (FASM) PCU 
23 Finisher shutter trouble (FSHC) PCU 
30 Communication trouble between the Finisher and Saddle Unit PCU 

3 : ‘19/March.
Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection
code code
F1 31 Saddle paper folding motor trouble (FSFOM) PCU 
32 Communication error between the finisher and the punch unit PCU 
(Saddle stitch finisher)
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble (FPSM) PCU 
34 Punch operation trouble (FPNM) PCU 
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU 
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU 
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble (FPPM) PCU 
42 Saddle guide motor trouble (FSGM) PCU 
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble (FSJM) PCU 
44 Saddle staple motor R trouble (FSRSTM) PCU 
45 Saddle staple trouble (FSFSTM) PCU 
46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble (FSLGM) PCU 
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU 
51 Saddle sensor connection trouble (FSGHPD, FSLGHPD or FSLGTD) PCU 
52 Finisher inlet door switch trouble (FSINDSW) PCU 
3 55 After-process unit ROM trouble PCU ○
60 Communication error between the Finisher and Inserter PCU 
64 No. 1 pickup motor trouble PCU 
65 No. 2 pickup motor trouble PCU 
66 No. 1 lift motor trouble PCU 
67 No. 2 lift motor trouble PCU 
90 Communication trouble between the decurler and the downstream units. PCU 
96 Decurler transport motor abnormality (DCM100) PCU 
97 Decurler unit fan 1 (Upper cooling fan) abnormality (DCFAN100) PCU 
98 Decurler unit fan 2 (Lower cooling fan) abnormality (DCFAN103) PCU 
99 Decurler unit fan 3 (Transport motor cooling fan) abnormality (DCFAN101) PCU 
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU 
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU 
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU 
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU 
39 Process temperature sensor trouble PCU 
40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) PCU 
41 Toner density sensor trouble (C) PCU 
42 Toner density sensor trouble (M) PCU 
43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y) PCU 
45 Color image density sensor trouble PCU 
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU 
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU 
51 CL drum phase sensor trouble (C) PCU 
52 CL drum phase sensor trouble (M) PCU 
53 CL drum phase sensor trouble (Y) PCU 
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU 
64 Toner supply operation trouble (K) PCU 
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU 
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU 
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) PCU 
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) PCU 
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) PCU 
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y) PCU 
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) PCU 
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) PCU 
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) PCU 
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) PCU 
78 Registration/BK image density sensor trouble PCU 
A0 After-transfer discharge lamp open trouble (K) PCU 
A1 After-transfer discharge lamp open trouble (C) PCU 
A2 After-transfer discharge lamp open trouble (M) PCU 
A3 After-transfer discharge lamp open trouble (Y) PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU 
32 Main body cassette 3 lift trouble PCU 
42 Main body cassette 4 lift trouble PCU 
F6 00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble MFP 
01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error FAX 
02 FAX power supply trouble FAX 
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX 
21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch FAX 

3 : ‘19/March.
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
F6 30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection) FAX 
97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine MFP 
98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main MFP 
machine destination
F9 00 Communication error between MFP and the printer section when booting MFP
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU 
01 Non-contact thermistor lower main detection thermistor open PCU 
(TH_LM1_AD2)
02 Non-contact thermistor upper sub detection thermistor open PCU 
(TH_US1_AD2)
03 Non-contact thermistor upper main compensation thermistor open PCU 
(TH_UM_CS)
04 Non-contact thermistor lower main compensation thermistor open PCU 
(TH_LM1_AD1)
05 Non-contact thermistor upper sub compensation thermistor open PCU 
(TH_US1_AD1)
06 Upper edge section thermistor open (TH_US2) PCU 
07 Lower edge section thermistor open (TH_LM2) PCU 
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
3 H4 00 Fusing section low temperature (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
30 Upper main thermistor differential input abnormality (TH_UM) PCU 
31 Lower main thermistor differential input abnormality (TH_LM1) PCU 
32 Upper sub thermistor differential input abnormality (TH_US1) PCU 
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU 
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM_AD2) PCU 
11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_LM) PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU 
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU 
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU 
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU 
07 Transfer belt motor trouble PCU 
08 Waste toner transport motor lock PCU 
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU 
17 Drum motor lock trouble (K) PCU 
18 Drum motor lock trouble (C) PCU 
19 Drum motor lock trouble (M) PCU 
20 Drum motor lock trouble (Y) PCU 
30 MFP cooling fan / HDD cooling fan trouble MFP 
31 Paper exit cooling fan F trouble PCU 
32 Power source cooling fan 1 trouble PCU 
33 Machine ventilation fan BA trouble PCU 
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU 
35 Paper exit exhaust fan trouble PCU 
36 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU 
38 Paper exit cooling fan2 F trouble PCU 
39 Machine ventilation fan trouble PCU 
40 Ozone fan motor 1 trouble PCU 
43 Paper exit cooling fan R trouble PCU 
44 Power source cooling fan 2 trouble PCU 
48 ADU transport cooling fan motor F trouble PCU 
49 ADU transport cooling fan motor R trouble PCU 
56 Paper exit cooling fan2 R trouble PCU 
57 Toner bottle cooling fan motor trouble PCU 
58 Paper exit cooling fan2 trouble PCU 
60 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor F trouble PCU 
61 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor R trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal error PCU 
11 AC Cord 2 (power for fusing) full wave not detected PCU 
12 AC Cord 2 (power for fusing) full wave signal width abnormality PCU 
L8 20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/SCN mother board MFP 
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP 

1 : ‘17/Apr. 3 : ‘19/March.
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP 
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP 
05 Erroneous detection of account management data MFP 
11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP 
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP 
3 40 mSATA SSD system storage data area error MFP 
41 HDD system storage data area error MFP 
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP 
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP 
60 Watermark check error MFP 
1 70 OCR dictionary check error MFP 
80 SCN Mother PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU 
81 SCN Mother PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU 
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU 
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU 
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU 
16 Document feed unit fan trouble SCU 
20 SPF paper feed transport motor trouble SCU 
30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble SCU 
31 Document feed unit tray lift down trouble SCU 
U6 09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU 
20 LCC control PWB - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU 
22 LCC 24V power abnormality PCU 
23 A3 LCC tray descending trouble (Reverse winding detection) (A3 LCC) PCU 
24 A3 LCC tray lock detection trouble PCU 
29 LCT1 lift trouble PCU 
33 LCT2 reverse winding detection trouble PCU 
34 LCT2 lock detection trouble PCU 
39 LCT2 lift trouble PCU 
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU 
54 Option installation combination trouble PCU
63 Manual feed tray descending trouble PCU 
68 Manual feed tray paper feed position abnormality PCU 
69 Manual feed tray lift trouble PCU 
80 Relay unit transport motor trouble PCU
81 Power unit cooling fan motor trouble PCU
82 EEPROM trouble PCU
83 Room temperature thermistor breakdown PCU
84 Room humidity thermistor breakdown PCU
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP 
51 Vendor machine error MFP 
U9 01 Touch panel trouble MFP 
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU 
12 CPT - ASIC abnormal trouble (DSPF detection) SCU 
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU 
30 Anti-copy MODULE trouble (DSPF detection) SCU 
UE 10 LCT1 suction fan motor trouble PCU
11 LCT1 exhaust fan motor trouble PCU
12 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor open PCU
13 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor low temperature trouble PCU
14 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor high temperature trouble PCU
15 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor open PCU
16 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor low temperature PCU
17 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor high temperature PCU
20 LCT2 suction fan motor trouble PCU
21 LCT2 exhaust fan motor trouble PCU
22 LCT2 warm air heater thermistor open PCU
23 LCT2 warm air heater thermistor low temperature trouble PCU
24 LCT2 warm air heater thermistor high temperature trouble PCU
25 LCT2 warm air outlet port thermistor open PCU
26 LCT2 warm air outlet port thermistor low temperature PCU
27 LCT2 warm air outlet port thermistor high temperature PCU

G. Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-18 Incompatible ASIC-MAIN firmware
Detail MFP Trouble content

Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Detail MFP
interruption of the power during the version-up Cause Combination version error in MFP ASIC
operation, etc. Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
PCU PWB trouble. Use Sim49-1 to perform the firmware version up
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the PCU PWB. A0-19 MFPC starting (synchronization) error
A0-02 SCN Mother PWB ROM error Trouble content

Detail Starting error caused by defective MFP PWB
Cause Defective of Flash ROM, memory devices
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Insert and extract mSATA SSD
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Insert and extract ASIC1 Flash ROM (ASIC-PG1)
interruption of the power during the version-up Insert and extract ASIC2 Flash ROM (ASIC-PG2)
operation, etc.
SCN Mother PWB trouble. Check and replace the following parts individually.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up If still the same remained, replace parts will be
procedure again. returned to the old one each time.
Replace the SCN Mother PWB. Replace mSATA SSD
Replace ASIC1 Flash ROM (ASIC-PG1)
Replace ASIC2 Flash ROM (ASIC-PG2)
A0-04 ACU ROM error Replace MFP PWB
Detail MFP
Cause ACU ROM data error
A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
An error occurs during firmware upgrading for some version (MFP)
reasons.
Check & Remedy Perform firmware upgrading again. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
A0-10 Controller ROM error the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Trouble content Controller ROM error
Detail MFP
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal. A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
Combination error between the MFPC PWB firmware version (PCU)
and the color profile
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
A0-15 Store DSK data conflict the EEPROM data version.
Detail MFP
Cause combination error of firmware version ASIC-MAIN
A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
Check & Remedy Check firmware version for ASIC-MAIN
version (SCU)
A0-17 Inconsistency between the UI data Trouble content

and the CPU firmware version Detail SCU
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Combination error between the UI contents data and
the CPU UI firmware version.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up
mode.

C1-01 Charger cleaner trouble (K) C1-05 Charger cleaner trouble (M)
Trouble content Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (K) is not installed properly. Cause The main charger unit (M) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (K). There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (M).
Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (K) HP Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (M) HP
sensor, the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer sensor, the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer
discharge lamp. discharge lamp.
Harness disconnection of the drum unit (K) HP Harness disconnection of the drum unit (M) HP
HP sensor dirt. HP sensor dirt.
Charger cleaner motor (K) trouble. Charger cleaner motor (M) trouble.
PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble. PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger
cleaner. cleaner.
Check disconnection of the main charger unit./ Check disconnection of the main charger unit./
Replace. Replace.
Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum
unit (K) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after- unit (M) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after-
transfer discharge lamp. transfer discharge lamp.
Check the harness of the drum unit (K) HP sensor, the Check the harness of the drum unit (M) HP sensor,
discharge lamp, and the after-transfer discharge lamp. the discharge lamp, and the after-transfer discharge
(Since the earth wire is common to them, check the lamp. (Since the earth wire is common to them, check
three positions.) the three positions.)
Clean the HP sensor. Clean the HP sensor.
Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./ Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./
Replace PWB. Replace PWB.
Replace the charger cleaner motor (K). Replace the charger cleaner motor (M).
C1-03 Charger cleaner trouble (C) C1-07 Charger cleaner trouble (Y)

Cause The main charger unit (C) is not installed properly. Cause The main charger unit (Y) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (C). There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (Y).
Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (C) HP Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (Y) HP
Harness disconnection of the drum unit (C) HP Harness disconnection of the drum unit (Y) HP
HP sensor dirt. HP sensor dirt.
Charger cleaner motor (C) trouble. Charger cleaner motor (Y) trouble.
PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble. PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger
cleaner. cleaner.
Check disconnection of the main charger unit./ Check disconnection of the main charger unit./
Replace. Replace.
Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum
unit (C) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after- unit (Y) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after-
transfer discharge lamp. transfer discharge lamp.
Check the harness of the drum unit (C) HP sensor, the Check the harness of the drum unit (Y) HP sensor, the
discharge lamp, and the after-transfer discharge lamp. discharge lamp, and the after-transfer discharge lamp.
(Since the earth wire is common to them, check the (Since the earth wire is common to them, check the
three positions.) three positions.)
Clean the HP sensor. Clean the HP sensor.
Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./ Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./
Replace PWB. Replace PWB.
Replace the charger cleaner motor (C). Replace the charger cleaner motor (Y).

C1-10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) C1-40 High voltage MC PWB trouble
Trouble detection PCU Trouble content

Cause Open circuit or short circuit of the main charger Detail PCU
(Black) output Cause 1) Input harness disconnection in the high voltage MC
1) Check & Use SIM8-2 to check the output of [GB-K]. PWB CN1
Remedy If the leakage noise or the flickering on the screen of 2) Harness (MC-K-ERR, MC-CMY-ERR) pin
the panel is detected; disconnection
(1) Abnormality of the charger (BK) (connector CN1-1,8,9,10pin)
-> Remove and insert the charger (BK) or replace the 3) 24V fuse meltdown
charger (BK). 4) High voltage error circuit (MC-K-ERR, MC-CMY-
(2) Imperfect insertion of the charger (BK) ERR) breakage
-> Remove and insert the charger (BK). Check & Remedy 1) Check the harness and connector CN1
(3) Abnormality of MC-K harness (Transformer T101 2) Check or replace the harness MC PWB input
of the high-voltage MC PWB) connector CN1-1,8,9,10pin
-> Remove and insert MC-K harness or replace MC- 3) 4)Replace the MC PWB
K harness.
(4)Abnormality of GB-K/DV-KCMY wiring
-> Check GB-K/DV-KCMY wiring./Replace. C4-00 PTC trouble
(5) Abnormality of the developing unit (K/C/M/Y)
-> Insert and remove the developing unit./Replace.
(6) Abnormality of the high voltage MC PWB spring Trouble detection PCU
contact (GB,DV). Cause (1) Abnormality of PTC unit
-> Check the high voltage MC PWB spring contact. (2) Imperfection insertion of PTC unit
2) Check & Use SIM8-2 to check the output of [GB-K]. (3) PTC unit not inserted
Remedy If the leakage noise etc. is not detected; (4) Disconnection, abnormality of PTC unit.
(1) Charger (BK) not inserted. (Transformer T102 of the high-voltage 2TC PWB)
-> Insert the Charger (BK). (5) High voltage 2TC PWB trouble
(2) Disconnection/ breakage of MC-K harness (6) PCU PWB trouble
(Transformer T101 of the high-voltage MC PWB) Check & Remedy (1)Remove and insert PTC unit./Replace.
-> Insert the harness./Replace. (2) Remove and insert PTC unit.
(3) High MC PWB trouble. (3) Insert PTC unit.
-> Replace the high MC PWB. (4) Insert PCT harness. /Replace. (Transformer T102
(4) PCU PWB trouble of the high-voltage 2TC PWB)
-> Replace PCU PWB. (5) Replace the high voltage 2TC PWB.
(6 Replace PCU PWB.
C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color)

C4-01 PTC (Pre Transfer Charger) cleaner
Trouble detection PCU trouble
Cause Open circuit or short circuit of the main charger
(Color) output Trouble content Shifting the charger cleaner is not completed within
1) Check & Use SIM8-2 to check the output of [GB-C/M/Y]. the specified time.
Remedy If the leakage noise or the flickering on the screen of Detail PCU
the panel is detected; Cause Charger unit trouble
(1) Abnormality of the charger (C/M/Y) HP sensor, motor, PCU PWB, harness connection
-> Remove and insert the charger (C/M/Y) or replace trouble
the charger (C/M/Y).
Check & Remedy Check the charger unit, the PCU PWB, and the
(2) Imperfect insertion of the charger (C/M/Y)
harness connection.
-> Remove and insert the charger (C/M/Y).
(3) Abnormality of MC-CL harness (Transformer
T102, T201, T202 of the high-voltage MC PWB)
-> Remove and insert MC-CL harness or replace MC-
CL harness.
(4)Abnormality of GB-CMY wiring
-> Check GB-CMY wiring./Replace.
(5)Abnormality of the high voltage MC PWB spring
contact (GB,DV)
-> Check the high voltage MC PWB spring contact.
2) Check & Use SIM8-2 to check the output of [GB-C/M/Y].
Remedy If the leakage noise etc. is not detected;
(1) Charger (C/M/Y) not inserted.
-> Insert the Charger (C/M/Y).
(2) Disconnection/ breakage of MC-CL harness
(Transformer T102, T201, T202 of the high-voltage
MC PWB)
-> Insert the harness./Replace.
(3) High MC PWB trouble.
-> Replace the high MC PWB.
(4) PCU PWB trouble
-> Replace PCU PWB.

C4-20 1st transfer output open trouble C4-30 2nd transfer output open trouble
Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Open circuit of the 1st transfer out put. Cause Open circuit of the 2nd transfer out put.
1) Check & Use SIM8-6 to check the out put of [1TC-K/C/M/Y].If Check & Remedy Use SIM8-6 to check the out put of [2TC]. If the
Remedy the leakage noise or the flickering on the screen of leakage noise or the flickering on the screen of the
the panel is detected; panel is detected;
(1) Abnormality of 1ST transfer unit. (1) Abnormality of 1ST transfer unit.
--> Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit. --> Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit.
--> Replace the 1ST transfer unit. --> Replace the 1ST transfer unit.
(2) Imperfect insertion the 1ST transfer unit. (2) Imperfect insertion the 1ST transfer unit.
--> Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit. --> Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit.
(3) Abnormality of the 1TC-K/C/M/Y harness (3) Abnormality of 2nd transfer unit.
(Transformer T101,T102,T201,T202 of the high --> Remove and insert the 2nd transfer unit.
voltage 1TC PWB). --> Replace the 2ST transfer unit.
--> Check 1TC-K/C/M/Y harness wiring./Replace. (4) Imperfect insertion the 2nd transfer unit.
(4) High voltage 1TC PWB trouble. --> Remove and insert the 2nd transfer unit.
--> Replace the High voltage 1TC PWB. (5) Abnormality of the 2nd TC harness. (Transformer
(5) PCU PWB trouble. T102 of the high-voltage 2TC PWB)
--> Replace the PCU PWB. --> Check 2nd TC harness wiring.Replace.
2) Check & Check the operation of the 1ST transfer separation (6) High voltage 2TC PWB trouble.
Remedy clutch (1TURC, 1TURRC). --> Replace the high voltage 2TC PWB.
If the clutch or gera do not move smoothly or have (7) PCU PWB trouble.
noise, --> Replace the PCU PWB.
(1) Abnormality of 1ST transfer separation clutch.
--> Check connection of harness and check the
clutch. C4-31 2nd transfer output short trouble
--> Replace the clutch.
(2) Abnormality of 1ST transfer unit.
--> Check the 1ST transfer unit. Trouble detection PCU
--> Replace the 1ST transfer unit. Cause 1) Abnormality of 1st transfer unit, 2nd transfer unit.
3) Check & Check the operation of OPC Drum. 2) Imperfect insertion the 1st transfer unit, 2nd
Remedy If it is not normal movement, transfer unit.
(1) Abnormality of Drum drive motor (DM_K, DM_C, 3) High voltage 2TC PWB trouble.
DM_M, DM_Y). Check & Remedy Use SIM8-6 to check the out put of [2TC].
--> Check Drum drive motor (DM_K, DM_C, DM_M, 1) Check the 1st transfer unit, 2nd transfer unit.
DM_Y). Replace the 1st transfer unit, 2nd transfer unit.
(2) Abnormality of OPC Drum (K/C/M/Y). 2) Remove and insert the 1st transfer unit, 2nd
--> Check OPC Drum (K/C/M/Y). transfer unit.
--> Replace OPC Drum (K/C/M/Y). 3) Replace the high voltage 2nd PWB.
C4-21 1st transfer output short trouble C4-35 High voltage 2TC PWB trouble
Trouble detection PCU Trouble content

Cause 1) Abnormality of 1ST transfer unit. Detail
2) Imperfect insertion the 1ST transfer unit. Cause 1) Input harness disconnection in the high voltage
3) High voltage 1TC PWB trouble. 2TC PWB CN1
Check & Remedy Use SIM8-6 to check the out put of [1TC]. 2) Harness (2TC-ERR, PTC-ERR) pin disconnection
1) Check the 1ST transfer unit. (connector CN1-1,7,8pin, or PCU PWB connector
Replace the 1ST transfer unit. CN12-24,26,38pin)
2) Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit. 3) 24V fuse meltdown
3) Replace the high voltage 1TC PWB. 4) High voltage error circuit(2TC-ERR, PTC-ERR)
breakage
5) Connector CN12 disconnection on the PCU PWB
6) PCU PWB trouble
C4-25 High voltage 1TC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy 1) Check the harness and connector CN1
2) Check or replace the harness 2TC PWB input
Trouble content connector CN1-1,7,8pin, or PCU PWB input
Detail PCU connector CN12-24,26,38pin
Cause 1) Input harness disconnection in the high voltage 3) 4)Replace the high voltage 2TC PWB
1TC PWB CN1 5) Check the connector CN12 on the PCU PWB
2) Hrness(1TC-S-ERR, 1TC-O-ERR) pin 6) Replace PCU PWB
disconnection
(connector CN1-1,7,8pin)
3) 24V fuse meltdown E6-10 Shading error (Black correction)
4) High voltage error circuit(1TC-S-ERR, 1TC-O-ERR)
breakage
5) ConnectorCN23 disconnection on the PCU PWB Trouble content
Check & Remedy 1) Check the harness and connector CN1 Detail SCU
2) Check or replace the harness input connector CN1- Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
1,7,8pin CCD unit trouble.
3) 4)Replace high voltage 1TC PWB DSPF PWB trouble.
5) Replace PCU PWB Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD
unit.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the DSPF PWB.

E6-11 Shading error (White correction) E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)

Detail SCU Detail SCU
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness. Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
Copy lamp lighting trouble. scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
plate. CCD unit abnormality.
CCD unit trouble. SCN Mother PWB abnormality.
DSPF PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Shading SIM not executed / Shading ROM Check the CCD unit.
abnormality. Check the SCN Mother PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD unit.
Check the installing state of the harness to the copy
lamp unit. E7-11 Shading error (White correction)
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white plate.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the DSPF PWB. Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
E6-14 CCD-ASIC error level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Trouble content Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Detail SCU Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble
Cause DSPF PWB trouble. CCD unit abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check the DSPF PWB. SCN Mother PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
E7-01 MFP image data error unit.
Check or replace the scanner lamp.
Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.
Trouble content Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the
Detail MFP reference white board.
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB. Check or replace the CCD unit.
MFPC PWB trouble. Check or replace the SCN Mother PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
the MFPC PWB.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
Trouble content
E7-03 HDD trouble
Detail SCU
Cause SCN Mother PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check the SCN Mother PWB.
Detail MFP Replace the SCN Mother PWB.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC
PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality E7-20 LSU laser detection and deterioration
(FAT breakage).
MFPC PWB trouble.
error (K)
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
the MFPC PWB and HDD. Trouble content
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the Detail PCU
HDD. Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
Replace the HDD. Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. trouble.
LSU harness, connector trouble
BD board, LD board, LSUcnt board trouble
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content Check connection of the LSU harness and connector.
Replace the LSU.
Detail MFP
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
booting.
E7-21 LSU laser deterioration error (C)
Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble.
LSU harness, connector trouble
LD board, LSUcnt board trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check connection of the LSU harness and connector.
Replace the LSU.

E7-22 LSU laser deterioration error (M) E7-27 LSU LD driver trouble (Y)
Trouble content Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the
Detail PCU LD driver is not performed normally.
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Detail PCU
trouble. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
LSU harness, connector trouble trouble.
LD board, LSUcnt board trouble LSU connector trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU.
Check connection of the LSU harness and connector. Check the harness and the connector between the LD
Replace the LSU. PWB and the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LD PWB and the LSU control PWB.
E7-23 LSU laser deterioration error (Y)

E7-28 LSU - PCU connection error
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Detail PCU
trouble. Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
LSU harness, connector trouble PWB and the LSU control ASIC.
LD board, LSUcnt board trouble Improper connection of the communication connector
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. (interface PWB).
Check connection of the LSU harness and connector. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
Replace the LSU. control PWB (interface PWB)
PCU PWB trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble.
E7-24 LSU LD driver trouble (K) LSU trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the Replace the LSU control PWB.
LD driver is not performed normally. Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU Replace the LSU.
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble.
LSU connector trouble. E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Trouble content
Check connection of the LSU harness. Detail PCU
Replace the LSU. Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator used
in the LSU ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU control PWB.
E7-25 LSU LD driver trouble (C) Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the

LD driver is not performed normally.
E7-42 Image data trouble (ACRE ASIC)
Detail PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Trouble content
trouble. Detail MFP
LSU connector trouble. Cause An image data error occurs.
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble. An image data send error occurs.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU. ACRE ASIC trouble.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. MFPC PWB trouble.
Check connection of the LSU harness. Check & Remedy Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Replace the LSU.
E7-46 Image data decode error (ACRE ASIC)

E7-26 LSU LD driver trouble (M)
Trouble content
Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the Detail MFP
LD driver is not performed normally. Cause A decode error occurs while high compression PDF
Detail PCU images are made. (garbled data)
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode ACRE ASIC trouble.
trouble. MFPC PWB trouble.
LSU connector trouble. Check & Remedy Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU.
Check connection of the LSU harness.
Replace the LSU.

E7-47 Inconsistency between the MFP and E7-61 Combination error between the MFPC
the ACRE firmware PWB and the PCU PWB
Trouble content Detail MFP

Detail Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the
Cause Written ACRE board of the firmware that a model did PCU PWB.
not support MFP was connected MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware. PCU PWB trouble.
Use Sim49-1 or Sim49-10 to execute firmware version Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and
up the PCU PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
E7-48 ACRE ASIC memory error
E7-62 Controller combination error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause ACRE ASIC trouble. Detail
MFPC PWB trouble. Cause Combination error between the scanner and MFP
Check & Remedy Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. PWB
Check & Remedy Check MFP PWB and scanner combination
E7-49 Water Mark data error

E7-80 MFP - SCN Mother PWB communica-
Trouble content
tion error
Detail MFP
Cause Watermark data trouble. Detail MFP
HDD trouble. Cause SCN Mother PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data. SCN Mother PWB trouble.
Replace the HDD. MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCN Mother PWB and the
MFPC PWB.
E7-50 Combination error between PWB and Check the ground.
Replace the SCN Mother PWB.
firmware Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause A PWB/firmware/LSU which is not compatible with the E7-89 Communication error between MFPC
machine specifications is detected. PWB CPU and energy-saving NIC
PCU PWB trouble
LSU trouble controller
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check or replace the LSU. Trouble content No response can be obtained from the energy-saving
Check or replace the PCU PWB. NIC controller.
Detail MFP
Cause MFPC PWB trouble.
E7-55 PWB information sum error Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause EEPROM device trouble. E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error
EEPROM device contact trouble.
Device access error due to noises.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
E7-60 Combination error between PWB and MFPC PWB trouble.
firmware Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC
PWB.
Check the ground.
Detail MFP
Cause A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
machine specifications is detected in the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.

3 : ‘19/March.
3 E7-91 FAX reception image data error E7-94 Image file data process error (when
importing file data)
Trouble content An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.
Detail MFP Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when
Cause Image data process abnormality importing filing data
HDD trouble Detail MFP
mSATA SSD trouble or contact error
Cause Image data process abnormality
Image compression data corruption
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
MFPC PWB trouble
FAX control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory. the memory.
Replace the HDD. Replace the HDD.
Replace or check installation of the mSATA SSD. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Replace the FAX control PWB.
E7-96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error
E7-92 Copy image data error
Trouble content MFPC PWB DIMM memory access trouble
Detail MFP
Trouble content An error of copy image data process occurs.
(In Non ERDH) Cause Memory data corruption occurs
MFPC PWB trouble
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
HDD trouble
the memory.
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory socket check
Replace the DIMM memory.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
E7-A0 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. error (K)
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/

E7-93 Copy, image send, filing, print image LD driver for Black
data process error Detail PCU
Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble.
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble.
Trouble content An image data process error occurs in the following
operation mode: Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
• Copy (in ERDH) the LD PWB and the PCU PWB.
• Copy composing system function (Water mark) Replace the PCU PWB.
• When in image send If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble,
• When filing documents replace the LSU.
• When displaying the preview
• When printing with the GDI/PCL printer
• Copy composing system function (Water mark) E7-A1 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write
Detail MFP error (C)
HDD trouble
Image compression data corruption Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/
MFPC PWB trouble LD driver for Cyan
DIMM memory trouble or contact error Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble.
the memory. EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble.
Replace the HDD. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
Replace the MFPC PWB. the LD PWB and the PCU PWB.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. Replace the PCU PWB.
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble,
replace the LSU.

E7-A2 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment
error (M) error
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/ Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
LD driver for Magenta adjustment is outside of 128 +/-10.
Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of PCU PWB trouble.
the LD PWB and the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the developing unit.
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble, Replace the PCU PWB.
replace the LSU.
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment

E7-A3 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (Over toner)
error (Y)
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/ adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208
LD driver for Yellow or above.
Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of PCU PWB trouble.
the LD PWB and the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the developing unit.
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble, Replace the PCU PWB.
replace the LSU.
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment

E7-A7 SSD trouble error (Under toner)
Trouble content
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Detail adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is 51
Cause SSD trouble or less.
Improper connection of SSD Detail PCU
MFP PWB trouble
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Data error of the file system management part
Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Remove and insert the SSD PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the SSD Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the MFP PWB
Replace the developing unit.
E7-C0 TPM PWB data access error

F0-03 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor
Trouble content section abnormality (FNM110)
Detail
Cause TPM PWB error, poor connection
Trouble content Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation abnormality.
Installed TPM PWB used with other MFP
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Turn power off and on
Check and confirm TPM PWB insertion Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
E7-C1 Security check error roller lift motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor.
Trouble content Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Detail part.
Cause TPM PWB error
Program error
Security function, setting error F0-08 Finisher stapler shift motor section
Check & Remedy Turn power off and on abnormality (FNM107)
Check and confirm TPM PWB insertion
Trouble content The shift operation of the finisher stapler is abnormal.

Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
motor.
and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.

F0-10 Finisher staple motor section F0-18 Finisher rear edge hold motor section
abnormality (FNM115) abnormality (FNM118)
Trouble content The operation of the finisher staple is abnormal. Trouble content The operation of the paper hold arm in the staple
Detail PCU compiler of the finisher is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper hold
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor motor.
and the sensor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor and the sensor.
part. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-11 Finisher bundle exit motor section

abnormality (FNM116) F0-19 Finisher paper alignment motor F
section abnormality (FNM108)
Trouble content The grip expansion arm drive motor of the finisher for
staple bundle exit is abnormal. HP sensor Trouble content The operation of the front alignment plate in the staple
abnormality. compiler of the finisher is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
trouble, HP sensor breakdown, disconnection of harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
harness or connector. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper arm alignment motor F.
motor (FNM116). Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-14 Finisher paper rear edge falling motor

section abnormality (FNM113) F0-20 Finisher paper alignment motor R
section abnormality (FNM109)
Trouble content The rear edge falling operation in the staple compiler
of the finisher is abnormal. Trouble content The operation of the rear alignment plate in the staple
Detail PCU compiler of the finisher.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear edge harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
falling motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor alignment motor R.
part.
F0-15 Finisher tray lift motor section

abnormality (FNM106) F0-23 Shutter trouble (FNCL102)
Trouble content The operation of the shutter open/close in the paper

Trouble content The operation of the lift motor for the upper and the
exit section.
lower trays of the finisher is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown, area harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the shutter
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the upper tray clutch.
lift motor and the lower tray lift motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the clutch
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
and the sensor. Replace the control PWB, the clutch, and the sensor
Replace the control PWB, and motor, and the sensor part.
part.

F0-25 Finisher paper transport roller lift F0-31 Finisher saddle folding motor section
motor section abnormality (FNM119) abnormality (FSM206)
Trouble content The separation operation of the transport roller in the Trouble content Saddle unit folding roller operation abnormality
buffer section of the finisher or the path select Detail PCU
operation of the flapper is abnormal. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Detail PCU harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. paper folding motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
transport roller lift motor. and the sensor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
and the sensor. part.
part.
F0-32 Finisher relay unit transport motor
section abnormality (PIM301)
F0-28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift
motor section abnormality (FNM112) Trouble content The operation of the paper transport in the paper relay
unit of the finisher is abnormal.
Trouble content The lifting operation of the paper takeup roller arm in Detail PCU
the staple compiler of the finisher is abnormal. Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
Detail PCU trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the relay paper
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. transport motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
alignment roller lift motor. Turn OFF/ON the power. Replace the control PWB
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and the motor.
and the sensor.
part. F0-33 Finisher punch shift motor section
abnormality (FCM101)
F0-29 Finisher PWB cooling fan abnormality
Trouble content The horizontal registration shift operation of the punch
(FNFAN102) unit in the finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The operation of the PWB cooling fan in the finisher is Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
abnormal. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch shift
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB motor.
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the control PWB and the sensor.
cooling fan. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. part.
Replace the control PWB and the fan motor.
F0-34 Finisher punch motor section

F0-30 Communication trouble between the abnormality (FCM102)
finisher and the saddle
Trouble content The punching operation of the punch unit in the
Trouble content Communication trouble between the finisher and the finisher is abnormal.
saddle Detail PCU
No response for the command send from the saddle Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
unit harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB motor.
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check the connector and the sensor.
between the finisher and the saddle. Replace the Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
control PWB of the saddle unit. part.
F0-37 Finisher backup RAM trouble
Trouble content Data cannot be written into the backup RAM. The red
values are abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble, EEPROM chip
breakdown.
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.

F0-40 Communication trouble between the F0-44 Finisher saddle rear edge hold motor
finisher saddle and the trimmer section abnormality (FSM210)
Trouble content Communication trouble between the saddle unit and Trouble content The operation of the rear edge hold member of the
the trimmer unit. saddle unit is abnormal.
When a command is sent from the saddle unit to the Detail PCU
trimmer unit, no response is made by the trimmer unit. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Detail PCU harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle rear
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. edge hold motor.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check the connector Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
between the saddle and the trimmer unit. Replace the and the sensor.
control PWB of the saddle unit. Replace the control Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
PWB of the trimmer unit. part.
F0-41 Finisher saddle lead edge stopper F0-45 Finisher saddle staple motor section
motor section abnormality (FSM203) abnormality (FSM209)
Trouble content The operation of the finisher saddle unit lead edge Trouble content The staple operation of the saddle unit is abnormal.
stopper motor is abnormal. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle lead staple motor.
edge stopper motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
and the sensor. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part.
part.
F0-46 Finisher saddle rear edge shift motor

F0-42 Finisher saddle folding roller guide section abnormality (FSM211)
motor section abnormality (FSM204)
Trouble content The operation of the rear edge shift motor of the
Trouble content The operation of the saddle unit folding roller guide is finisher saddle unit is abnormal.
abnormal. Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle rear
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle edge shift motor.
folding roller guide motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
part.
F0-47 Finisher saddle flap motor section

F0-43 Finisher saddle alignment motor abnormality (FSM213)
section abnormality (FSM212)
Trouble content The operation of the rear edge flap unit of the saddle
Trouble content The jogger shift operation in the staple compiler of the unit is abnormal.
saddle unit is abnormal. Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle flap
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle motor.
paper alignment motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
part.

F0-48 Finisher saddle push motor section F0-53 Finisher trimmer inlet port separation
abnormality (FSM205) motor abnormality (FTM103)
Trouble content The pushing operation of the saddle unit is abnormal. Trouble content The separation operation of the inlet port roller of the
Detail PCU trimmer unit is abnormal.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle push harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer inlet
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor port separation motor.
part.
F0-49 Finisher saddle separation motor

section abnormality (FSM214) F0-54 Finisher trimmer paper exit separation
motor section abnormality (FTM104)
Trouble content The operation of the takeup separation roller of the
saddle unit is abnormal. Trouble content The separation operation of the paper exit roller of the
Detail PCU trimmer unit is abnormal.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
separation motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor paper exit separation motor.
part.
F0-51 Finisher trimmer cutter motor

abnormality (FTM106) F0-55 Finisher trimmer bundle press motor
section abnormality (FTM105)
Trouble content The cutter operation of the trimmer unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU Trouble content The nip and separation operations of the bundle press
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of roller of the trimmer unit are abnormal.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
cutter motor. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
and the sensor. bundle press motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
part. and the sensor.
part.
F0-52 Finisher trimmer registration motor
section abnormality (FTM102)
F0-56 Paper remaining trouble in the finisher
Trouble content PCU
trimmer
Detail The operation of the registration taking unit of the
trimmer unit is abnormal. Trouble content Paper bundle remained in the trimmer is not
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of discharged by the automatic paper exit operation.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer Cause Trimmer inlet port sensor breakdown
registration motor. The paper bundle is bent and cannot be transported.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
and the sensor. transport motor.
part.
Check the paper bundle can be transported or not.

F0-70 Communication trouble between the F0-75 Folding unit upper stopper motor
finisher and the folding unit section abnormality (FLM8)
Trouble content Communication trouble between the finisher and the Trouble content The operation of the upper stopper of the folding unit
folding unit. is abnormal.
No response for a command from the folding unit. Detail PCU
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connection between upper stopper motor.
the finisher and the folding unit. Replace the control Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
PWB of the folding unit. and the sensor.
part.
F0-71 Folding unit lead edge holding guide
motor section abnormality (FLM10)
F0-76 3-fold stopper motor section in the
Trouble content The operations of the folding unit lead edge holding
folding unit is abnormal (FLM9)
guide is abnormal.
Detail PCU Trouble content The operation of the 3-fold stopper in the folding unit
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of is abnormal.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
lead edge holding guide motor. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-41 to check the operation of the 3-fold
and the sensor. stopper motor in the folding unit.
part.
F0-72 Folding unit backup RAM trouble
Trouble content Data cannot be written into the backup RAM of the
F0-77 Folding unit transport motor section
folding unit. The red values are abnormal. abnormality (FLM11)
Detail PCU
Cause Folding unit control PWB trouble, EEPROM chip Trouble content The folding and transport operations of the folding unit
breakdown. are abnormal.
Check & Remedy Replace the folding unit control PWB. Detail PCU
harness or connector.
F0-73 Folding unit power fan abnormality Check & Remedy Use SIM3-41 to check the operation of the folding unit
transport motor.
Trouble content Cooling fan abnormality in the power unit section of Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
the folding unit and the sensor.
Detail PCU
part.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
motor.
F0-80 Finisher power cooling fan motor
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. abnormality (FNFAN101)
Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the power unit
F0-74 Folding unit folding tray paper exit section of the finisher is abnormal.
motor section abnormality (FLM14) Detail PCU
Trouble content The paper exit operation to the folding unit is
abnormal. Check & Remedy Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
motor.
Detail PCU
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit
folding tray paper exit motor.
and the sensor.
part.

F0-81 Finisher upper tray fan abnormality F0-86 Finisher discharged paper hold motor
(FNFAN103) section abnormality (FNM114)
Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the upper tray of Trouble content The operation of the paper hold lever at the paper exit
the finisher is abnormal. port of the finisher is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the upper tray Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the discharged
fan. paper hold motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
motor. and the sensor.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor
part.
F0-82 Finisher lower tray fan abnormality

(FNFAN104) F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
error
Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the lower tray of the
finisher is abnormal. Trouble content
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the lower tray Finisher control PWB trouble.
fan. PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
motor. finisher and the PCU PWB.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
F0-83 Finisher paper guide motor section

abnormality (FNM120) F1-03 Finisher paper delivery roller lift oper-
ation trouble (FSWM)
Trouble content The operation of the paper lead edge guide unit at the
paper exit port of the finisher is abnormal. Trouble content
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Cause Finisher paper delivery roller lift motor trouble
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper guide Home position sensor trouble
motor. Finisher control PWB trouble
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
and the sensor. delivery roller lift motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
part. position sensor.
Replace the paper delivery roller lift motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
F0-84 Finisher grip section abnormality Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
(FNM117)
Trouble content The bundle grip operation when discharging paper F1-08 Stapler shift trouble (FSM)
bundle from the staple compiler of the finisher is
abnormal.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper
Home position sensor trouble.
motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
and the sensor. motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
part. position sensor.
Replace the stapler shift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.

F1-10 Staple operation trouble (FFSM) F1-21 Abnormality of relay unit fan motor
inside the machine (PDCF)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content The operation of the relay unit fan motor inside the
Cause Staple motor trouble. machine is abnormal.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the relay unit
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
fan inside the machine.
position sensor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
Replace the staple motor.
motor.
F1-22 Finisher trailing edge assist motor
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble (FASM)
trouble (FTLM)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Lift motor trouble.
Cause Motor harness short/open trouble.
Detail PCU
Control PWB trouble.
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. Connection harness/connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor with
SIM3-3.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
tray lift motor.
Replace the control PWB.
position sensor.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
F1-23 Finisher shutter trouble (FSHC)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F1-19 Finisher paper alignment operation Cause Motor lock trouble.
trouble F Control PWB trouble.
Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check the operation of the bundle paper exit motor
Detail PCU with SIM3-3.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Motor speed abnormality. Replace the control PWB.
Over-current to the motor.
Home position sensor trouble. F1-30 Communication trouble between the
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
Finisher and Saddle Unit
position sensor. Trouble content
Replace the finisher control PWB. Detail PCU
Replace the paper alignment motor F. Cause Connector and harness connection trouble.
Replace the home position sensor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
F1-20 Finisher paper alignment operation Replace the finisher control PWB.
trouble R
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Over-current to the motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
position sensor.
Replace the paper alignment motor R.

F1-31 Saddle paper folding motor trouble F1-34 Punch operation trouble (FPNM)
(FSFOM)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Punch motor trouble.
Cause Saddle paper folding motor trouble.
Saddle paper folding mechanism trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Folding plate home position sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Saddle paper folding motor rotation sensor trouble. position sensor.
Harness/connector connection trouble. Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the punch motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check the saddle paper folding mechanism.
Check the finisher control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check the folding plate home position sensor, and F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error
replace if necessary.
Check the saddle paper folding motor rotation sensor, Trouble content
and replace if necessary.
Detail PCU
Check connection of the harness/connector, and
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
replace if necessary.
Malfunction due to noises
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control
PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
F1-32 Communication error between
the finisher and the punch unit
(Saddle stitch finisher) F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error

Cause Connector/harness trouble between the finisher and Cause Punch control PWB trouble.
the punch unit. Malfunction due to noises
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the
Malfunction due to noises. sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Check & Remedy Check the connector/harness between the finisher
and the punch unit, and replace if necessary.
Check the finisher control PWB, and replace if F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation
necessary.
trouble (FPPM)
Trouble content Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in

F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble the saddle section.
Detail PCU
(FPSM)
Cause Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
Trouble content Home position sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Harness and connector connection trouble.
Cause Punch shift motor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Finisher control PWB trouble. paper positioning motor.
Home position sensor trouble. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Turn OFF/ON the power.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch Replace the control PWB.
shifting. Replace the sensor.
position sensor.
Replace the punch shift motor. F1-42 Finisher saddle guide motor trouble
(FSGM)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Saddle roller guide motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle roller
guide motor.
Replace the sensor.

3 : ‘19/March.
F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error
(FSJM)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
model is installed.
Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Saddle
alignment motor (FSPAM).
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. F1-51 Saddle sensor connection trouble
Turn OFF/ON the power. (FSGHPD, FSLGHPD or FSLGTD)
Replace the sensor.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F1-44 Saddle staple motor R trouble Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
(FSRSTM) Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-02 to check the operations of the guide
Trouble content HP sensor and the push plate lead edge sensor.
Detail PCU Check connection from the control PWB to the sensor.
Cause Saddle staple motor R trouble. Replace the control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle F1-52 Finisher inlet door switch trouble
staple motor R. (FSINDSW)
Replace the control PWB. Trouble content
Replace the sensor. Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Each micro switch trouble.
F1-45 Saddle staple trouble (FSFSTM) Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-02 to check the operations of the front
door/upper door open detection and the oscillation
Trouble content Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the saddle guide close detection.
section. Check connection from the control PWB to the sensor.
Detail PCU Replace the control PWB.
Cause Saddle staple motor trouble. Replace the sensor.
3
Harness and connector connection trouble. F1-55 After-process unit ROM trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
staple motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Trouble content
Turn OFF/ON the power. Detail PCU
Replace the control PWB. Cause Main firmware trouble.
Replace the sensor. Conflict the main firmware version and the boot
version.
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware of the finisher.
F1-46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble
(FSLGM)
F1-60 Communication error between the Fin-
Trouble content
isher and Inserter
Detail PCU
Cause Saddle motor trouble. Trouble content Communication abnormality between the units
Finisher control PWB trouble. connected to the downstream of the inserter.
Home position sensor trouble. No response for a command from the inserter. Motor
Harness and connector connection trouble. abnormality.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Detail PCU
motor. Cause Noise on the communication line
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Control PWB trouble.
Turn OFF/ON the power. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the control PWB. Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the sensor. Check connection of the connector with the
downstream units of the inserter.
Replace the control PWB of the downstream units of
the inserter.

F1-65 No. 2 pickup motor trouble F1-97 Decurler unit fan 1 (Upper cooling fan)
abnormality (DCFAN100)
Trouble content Abnormality of the paper feed roller driving motor in
the lower side paper feed section of the inserter
Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is
Detail PCU abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position Detail PCU
sensor breakdown, connection harness / connector
connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 2
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
pickup motor.
unit fan 1 (Upper cooling fan).
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
motor.
F1-66 No. 1 lift motor trouble

F1-98 Decurler unit fan 2 (Lower cooling fan)
Trouble content Abnormality of the tray lift-up driving motor in the abnormality (DCFAN103)
upper side paper feed section of the inserter.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position
abnormal.
connection trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 1 lift Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
motor. trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part. unit fan 2 (Lower cooling fan).
motor.
F1-67 No. 2 lift motor trouble Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Trouble content Abnormality of the tray lift-up driving motor in the F1-99 Decurler unit fan 3
upper side paper feed section of the inserter.
Detail PCU
(Transport motor cooling fan)
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position abnormality (DCFAN101)
connection trouble. Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 2 lift abnormal.
motor. Detail PCU
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
unit fan 3 (Transport motor cooling fan).
F1-90 Communication trouble between the Check connection from the control PWB to the fan
decurler and the downstream units. motor.
Trouble content Communication trouble between the decurler and the

units connected to the downstream of the decurler.
Detail PCU
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB
trouble, disconnection of connector or harness. Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. a certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it
Check connection of the connector between the is detected as a trouble.
decurler unit and the downstream units of the Detail PCU
decurler. Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K)
Replace the control PWB of the downstream units of and the PCU PWB.
the decurler. Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp
F1-96 Decurler transport motor abnormality (K) [DL_K].
(DCM100) Check the discharge lamp PWB (K).
Check the harness and the connector.
Trouble content The transport operation of the decurler transport
motor is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor driver IC overcurrent detection, overheat
detection.
transport motor.

F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (K)
Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for Trouble content
a certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it Detail PCU
is detected as a trouble. Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Detail PCU Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (C) Developing unit trouble.
and the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp harness.
(C) [DL_C]. Replace the developing unit.
Check the discharge lamp PWB (C). Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-41 Toner density sensor trouble (C)
F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
a certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
is detected as a trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (M) Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
and the PCU PWB. Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the developing unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp Replace the PCU PWB.
(M) [DL_M].
Check the discharge lamp PWB (M).
Check the harness and the connector. F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble (M)
Trouble content
F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for Developing unit trouble.
a certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it PCU PWB trouble.
is detected as a trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Detail PCU Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (Y) harness.
and the PCU PWB. Replace the developing unit.
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp
(Y) [DL_Y]. F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y)
Check the discharge lamp PWB (Y).
Replace the PCU PWB. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
F2-39 Process temperature sensor trouble Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Detail PCU Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Cause Process thermistor trouble. harness.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble. Replace the developing unit.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Check connection of the process thermistor harness
and the connector.

F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble F2-52 CL drum phase sensor trouble (M)

Cause Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Color image density sensor trouble. Drum drive section trouble.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Image density sensor dirt. Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C",
Calibration plate dirt. "DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y".
Transfer unit lift operation trouble Replace the drum phase sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the color image density sensor. Repair the drum drive section.
Check connection of the sensor harness and the Replace the PCU PWB.
connector.
Clean the image density sensor.
Replace the calibration plate. F2-53 CL drum phase sensor trouble (Y)
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble Harness and connector connection trouble.
Drum drive section trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C",
Detail PCU "DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y".
Cause The LSU temperature is outside of -28 - 78 deg C. Replace the drum phase sensor.
LSU thermistor trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
LSU thermistor harness and connector connection Repair the drum drive section.
trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LSU.
(HUD_M/TH_M)
Trouble content
F2-50 K drum phase sensor trouble Detail PCU
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Process humidity sensor harness and connector
Trouble content
connection trouble
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
connection trouble
harness and the connector.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K".
Replace the drum phase sensor.
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (K)
and the connector.
Repair the drum drive section. Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Cause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble (C) Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Tone hopper section trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
Replace the toner density sensor.
connection trouble
Connector and harness check.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C", Replace the developing unit.
"DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y". Check the toner hopper section.
Replace the drum phase sensor.
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness
and the connector.
Repair the drum drive section.

F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) F2-71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C)

Cause Toner motor trouble. Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit
Toner density sensor trouble. detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)
Connector/harness trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Developing unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor. F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M)
Replace the toner cartridge. Trouble content
Replace the developing unit. Detail PCU
Check the toner hopper section. Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)
F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Toner motor trouble. F2-73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y)
Toner density sensor trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Trouble content
Toner cartridge trouble. Detail PCU
Developing unit trouble. Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit
Tone hopper section trouble detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor. Toner cartridge trouble.
Replace the toner density sensor. PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness check. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
Check the toner hopper section. F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)
F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) Trouble content

Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Trouble content PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Cause Toner motor trouble. and toner cartridge
Toner density sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Connector/harness trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Check the connector and the harness between the
Toner cartridge trouble. PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor. F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C)
Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Trouble content
Replace the toner cartridge. Detail PCU
Replace the developing unit. Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Check the toner hopper section. PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
and toner cartridge
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the connector and the harness between the
Trouble content
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)
PCU PWB trouble.

F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) F2-A1 After-transfer discharge lamp open
trouble (C)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. open for a specified time from turning ON the after-
PCU PWB trouble. transfer discharge lamp.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB Detail PCU
and toner cartridge
Cause Connection trouble between the after-transfer
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. discharge lamp PWB and the PCU PWB
Replace the PCU PWB. After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble
Check the connector and the harness between the PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge. Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer
discharge lamp (C) [DL2_C].
Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (C).
F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) Check the harness and the connector.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
F2-A2 After-transfer discharge lamp open
PCU PWB trouble. trouble (M)
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
and toner cartridge
Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept
open for a specified time from turning ON the after-
transfer discharge lamp.
Check the connector and the harness between the
Detail PCU
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
discharge lamp PWB and the PCU PWB
After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble
F2-78 Registration/BK image density sen- PCU PWB trouble
sor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer
discharge lamp (M) [DL2_M].
Trouble content Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (M).
Detail PCU
Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor
sensitivity adjustment trouble).
PCU PWB trouble.
Image density (resist) sensor connector and harness
F2-A3 After-transfer discharge lamp open
connection trouble trouble (Y)
Image density (registration) sensor dirt.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness of
Detail PCU
the image density (resist) sensor.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor. Cause Connection trouble between the after-transfer
Clean or replace the transfer belt. discharge lamp PWB and the PCU PWB
After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
F2-A0 After-transfer discharge lamp open Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer
discharge lamp (Y) [DL2_Y].
trouble (K) Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (Y).
Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
discharge lamp PWB and the PCU PWB Trouble content
After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer CLUD1 sensor trouble.
discharge lamp (K) [DL2_K]. Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (K). PCU PWB trouble.
Check the harness and the connector. Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of
LUD1.
Replace the lift unit.

F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble F6-01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write
error
Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time. write)
CLUD2 sensor trouble. Section FAX
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Replace the lift unit.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
Remedy
F3-32 Main body cassette 3 lift trouble
Trouble content C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. F6-02 FAX power supply trouble
Detail PCU
Cause C3LUD sensor trouble.
Trouble content
Cassette 3 lift motor trouble.
Detail
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB,
the lift unit, and the paper feed unit Cause DC power supply trouble
MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C3LUD.
24V detection circuit trouble
Check the lift unit.
Harness trouble between the FAX PWB and MFP
PWB
Check & Remedy Check 24V supply circuit between the machine and
F3-42 Main body cassette 4 lift trouble FAX PWB
Replace DC power supply unit
Trouble content C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. Replace MFP PWB
Detail PCU Replace FAX PWB
Cause C4LUD sensor trouble. Replace the harness between the machine and FAX
Cassette 4 lift motor trouble. PWB
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB,
the lift unit, and the paper feed unit
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C4LUD. F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
Check the lift unit.
Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
Section FAX
F6-00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
trouble Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
remedy
Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error /
Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Framing / Parity / Protocol error
Section MFP
and
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble.
Remedy
and
Remedy
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and
F6-21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU
harness trouble PWB and FAX soft switch
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB. Trouble content Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
Remedy FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and Section FAX
harness trouble
Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
Check Check the connector and the harness between the improper.
and FAX control PWB and the mother board.
Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
Remedy
and
Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage Remedy
Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB. Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble.
and
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
Remedy
and
Remedy

3 : ‘19/March.
F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access H2-00 Thermistor open trouble

error (FAX detection) (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and Trouble content
write) Detail PCU
Section FAX Cause Thermistor trouble
Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor, PCU PWB trouble
or no program data written. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor Fusing section connector connection trouble
and program. Fusing unit not installed
Remedy Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble. Replace the thermistor.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
and Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Remedy harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX control

H2-01 Non-contact thermistor lower main
PWB and the main machine
detection thermistor open
Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the
(TH_LM1_AD2)
main machine
Section MFP Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper. Detail PCU
FAX control PWB trouble. Cause Thermistor trouble
Check Install a proper FAX control PWB. Control PWB trouble
and Replace the FAX control PWB. Fusing section connector connection trouble
Remedy AC power trouble
Fusing unit not installed.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX from the thermistor to the control PWB.
control PWB destination and the main
machine destination H2-02 Non-contact thermistor upper sub
detection thermistor open
Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB
destination and the main machine destination
(TH_US1_AD2)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information Trouble content The thermistor is open.
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that Detail PCU
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6) Cause Thermistor trouble
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB. Control PWB trouble
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6) Fusing section connector connection trouble
Remedy AC power trouble
F9-00 Communication error between MFP from the thermistor to the control PWB.
and the printer section when booting
H2-03 Non-contact thermistor upper main
Trouble content Booting of the printer section cannot be recognized
when booting.
compensation thermistor open
Detail MFP (TH_UM_CS)
Cause MFPC (section) PWB trouble.
3 MFPC (section) PWB - printer (section) PWB Trouble content The thermistor is open.
connection trouble.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC (section) PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble
Check connection between the MFPC (section) PWB
Control PWB trouble
and the printer (section) PWB.
Fusing section connector connection trouble
AC power trouble
from the thermistor to the control PWB.

H2-04 Non-contact thermistor lower main H3-00 Fusing section high temperature
compensation thermistor open trouble (TH_UM)
(TH_LM1_AD1)
Trouble content
Trouble content The thermistor is open. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Control PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
HL control PWB trouble
AC power trouble
Fusing unit not installed. Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
from the thermistor to the control PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the thermistor.
H2-05 Non-contact thermistor upper sub Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
compensation thermistor open harness.
(TH_US1_AD1) Replace the HL control PWB.
Trouble content The thermistor is open. H3-01 Fusing section high temperature
Detail PCU
trouble (TH_LM)
Control PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble Trouble content
AC power trouble Detail PCU
Fusing unit not installed. Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector Thermistor trouble
from the thermistor to the control PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
HL control PWB trouble
H2-06 Upper edge section thermistor open Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
(TH_US2) Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Trouble content The thermistor is open. Replace the thermistor.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Control PWB trouble harness.
Fusing section connector connection trouble Replace the HL control PWB.
AC power trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector H3-02 Fusing section high temperature
from the thermistor to the control PWB. trouble (TH_US)
H2-07 Lower edge section thermistor open Trouble content

Detail PCU
(TH_LM2) Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble
Trouble content The thermistor is open. PCU PWB trouble
Detail PCU Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Cause Thermistor trouble HL control PWB trouble
Control PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Fusing section connector connection trouble Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
AC power trouble heater lamp.
Fusing unit not installed. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector Replace the thermistor.
from the thermistor to the control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Replace the HL control PWB.

H4-00 Fusing section low temperature H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_UM_AD2) trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the level within the specified time from turning ON the
power relay. power relay.
Cause Thermistor trouble. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
Thermostat trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL control PWB trouble. HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp. heater lamp.
Replace the thermistor. Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the thermostat. Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit. Replace the power unit.
H4-01 Fusing section low temperature H4-30 Upper main thermistor differential
trouble (TH_LM) input abnormality (TH_UM)
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Trouble content The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not
level within the specified time from turning ON the exceed the specified value within the specified time
power relay. from turning ON the HL_UM.
Cause Thermistor trouble. Cause HL_UM does not turn on.
Heater lamp trouble. Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Harness trouble.
Thermostat trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
HL control PWB trouble. heater lamp.
Power unit trouble. When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. thermistor and its harness.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the PWB.
heater lamp. When the lamp does not light up, check for
Replace the thermistor. disconnection in the heater lamp and breakage of
Replace the heater lamp. the thermostat.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the interlock switch.
Replace the thermostat. Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and
Check connection of the connector and the harness. the PCU PWB.
Replace the HL control PWB. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the power unit.

H4-31 Lower main thermistor differential H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
input abnormality (TH_LM1) (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content The lower main compensation thermistor and the Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
lower main differential thermistor do not exceed the level within the specified time from stopping a job due
specified value within the specified time from turning to fall in the fusing temperature.
ON the lower main heater lamp. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Thermistor trouble.
Cause The lower main heater lamp does not turn ON. Heater lamp trouble.
Thermistor breakdown, harness trouble, PCU PWB PCU PWB trouble.
trouble Thermostat trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the Connector, harness connection trouble.
heater lamp. HL control PWB trouble.
When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the Power unit trouble.
thermistor and its harness. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU Replace the heater lamp.
PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
When the lamp does not light up, check for Replace the thermostat.
disconnection in the heater lamp and breakage of the Check connection of the connector and the harness.
thermostat. Replace the HL control PWB.
Check the interlock switch. Replace the power unit.
Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and the Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
PCU PWB. heater lamp.
H7-11 Recovery error from low fuser temp.

H4-32 Upper sub thermistor differential input (TH_LM)
abnormality (TH_US1)
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Trouble content The upper sub compensation thermistor and the level within the specified time from stopping a job due
upper sub differential thermistor do not exceed the to fall in the fusing temperature.
specified value within the specified time from turning Detail PCU
ON the upper sub heater lamp. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Detail PCU Heater lamp trouble.
Cause The upper sub heater lamp does not turn ON. PCU PWB trouble.
Thermistor breakdown, harness trouble, PCU PWB Thermostat trouble.
trouble Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the HL control PWB trouble.
heater lamp. Power unit trouble.
When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
thermistor and its harness. Replace the heater lamp.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
PWB. Replace the thermostat.
When the lamp does not light up, check for Check connection of the connector and the harness.
disconnection in the heater lamp and breakage of the Replace the HL control PWB.
thermostat. Replace the power unit.
Check the interlock switch. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and the heater lamp.
PCU PWB.
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach Trouble content Scanner feed is not completed within the specified
jam time.
Detail SCU
Trouble content Cause Scanner unit trouble.
Detail PCU SCN Mother PWB trouble.
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
remains.)
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
POD1 sensor trouble
Scanner motor trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble
POD1 sensor connector and harness connection Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
trouble Replace the scanner unit.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the SCN Mother PWB.
Fusing unit, drive section trouble Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor. Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Check installation of the fusing unit. Replace the scanner motor.
Replace the fusing unit.
Check or repair the fusing drive section.
Check connection of the POD1 sensor connector and
the harness.

L3-00 Scanner return trouble L4-07 Transfer belt motor trouble
Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
time. transfer belt motor.
Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause Scanner unit trouble Cause Transfer belt trouble.
SCN Mother PWB trouble Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
Scanner control PWB trouble and the transfer belt motor.
Harness and connector connection trouble Control PWB trouble.
Scanner home position sensor trouble Circuit trouble.
Scanner motor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the transfer
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. belt motor.
Replace the scanner unit. Check the harness and the connector between the
Replace the SCN Mother PWB. PCU PWB and the transfer belt motor.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor. L4-08 Waste toner transport motor lock
Trouble content The waste toner lock sensor is detected during

L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble rotation of the drum motor.
Detail PCU
Trouble content A lock signal is not detected within the specified time Cause Waste toner transport motor trouble.
in ON operation of the paper feed motor after Waste toner transport pipe clogging
warming-up or canceling a jam. Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
Detail PCU and the waste toner transport motor.
Cause Paper feed motor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the waste toner
Paper feed motor harness and connector connection transport motor (WTM).
trouble Check the waste toner transport pipe for clogging.
PCU PWB trouble Check the harness and the connector between the
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed PCU PWB and the waste toner transport motor.
motor.
Replace the paper feed motor.
Check connection of the paper feed motor harness L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble
and the connector.
Trouble content A change in the fusing pressure release sensor signal
cannot be detected within the specified time after
outputting the fusing pressure release motor.
L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Fusing pressure release sensor trouble.
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the Fusing pressure release motor trouble.
fusing motor. Pressure release drive gear and pressure release idle
Detail PCU gear trouble.
Cause Fusing motor trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Fusing motor harness and connector connection Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
trouble Check & Remedy Replace the fusing pressure release sensor.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing Replace the pressure release drive gear and the
motor. pressure release idle gear.
Replace the Fusing motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the fusing motor harness and the Check connection of the connector and the harness.
connection.
L4-17 Drum motor lock trouble (K)
L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
drum motor (K).
Trouble content A change in the primary transfer position sensor Detail PCU
cannot be detected within the specified time in lifting Cause Drum motor trouble
operation of the primary transfer unit. Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
Detail PCU and the drum motor
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble Control circuit trouble
Dirt on the transfer unit position sensor. Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum
PCU PWB trouble motor.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check the harness and the connector between the
Transfer unit lift mechanism trouble PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Primary transfer belt unit is not installed. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the
transfer unit.
Install the primary transfer belt unit.
Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Clean the transfer unit position sensor.
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.

L4-18 Drum motor lock trouble (C) L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan F trouble
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the
drum motor (C). specified time in the paper exit cooling fan F
Detail PCU operation.
Cause Drum motor trouble Detail PCU
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
and the drum motor the fan connector or other trouble.
Control circuit trouble Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum PCU PWB and the fan.
motor. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor. L4-32 Power source cooling fan 1 trouble
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the
L4-19 Drum motor lock trouble (M) specified time in the power cooling fan 1 operation.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
drum motor (M). the ozone exhaust fan or other trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Cause Drum motor trouble PCU PWB and the fan.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
and the drum motor
Control circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum L4-33 Machine ventilation fan BA trouble
motor.
PCU PWB and the developing motor. Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor. specified time in the machine ventilation fan BA
operation.
Detail PCU
L4-20 Drum motor lock trouble (Y) Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
the ozone exhaust fan or other trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the PCU PWB and the fan.
drum motor (Y). Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Detail PCU
Cause Drum motor trouble
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble
and the drum motor
Control circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum Trouble content
motor. Detail PCU
Check the harness and the connector between the Cause When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan
PCU PWB and the developing motor. operation signal is not detected within the specified
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor. time.
LSU fan trouble.
Harness, connector trouble.
L4-30 MFP cooling fan / HDD cooling fan LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the fan operation.
trouble Check the LSU fan, and replace if necessary.
Check the harness/connector, and replace if
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the necessary.
MFP cooling fan or HDD cooling fan. Check the LSU control PWB, and replace if
Detail MFP necessary.
Cause Fan motor trouble, controller PWB trouble, SCN-
Mother PWB trouble, fan motor/SCN-Mother PWB
harness connection trouble, controller PWB/SCN- L4-35 Paper exit exhaust fan trouble
Mother PWB connection trouble, control circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM06-02 to check the operation of the fan motor. Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
Check the controller PWB, the SCN-Mother PWB, and not detected within the specified time.
the harness and the connector between the fan motor
Detail PCU
and the SCN-Mother PWB.
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
the fan connector or other trouble.
PCU PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.

L4-36 Fusing cooling fan trouble L4-42 Ozone fan motor 3 trouble
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
not detected within the specified time. not detected within the specified time.
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
the fan connector or other trouble. the fan connector or other trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan. PCU PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
L4-38 Paper exit cooling fan2 F trouble L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan R trouble
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
not detected within the specified time. not detected within the specified time.
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of
the fan connector or other trouble. the fan connector or other trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan. PCU PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
L4-39 Machine ventilation fan trouble L4-44 Power source cooling fan 2 trouble
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the
not detected within the specified time. power source cooling fan 2.
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
the fan connector or other trouble. and the fan motor.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB and the fan. Fan motor trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble.
(No power supply to the fan motor)
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
L4-40 Ozone fan motor 1 trouble Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan motor.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the Replace the fan motor.
ozone fan motor 1.
Detail PCU
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB L4-48 ADU transport cooling fan motor F
and the fan motor.
PCU PWB trouble.
trouble
Fan motor trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU
(No power supply to the fan motor) transport cooling fan motor F.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Detail PCU
Check the harness and the connector between the Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
PCU PWB and the fan motor. and the fan motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the fan motor. Fan motor trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble.
L4-41 Ozone fan motor 2 trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the PCU PWB and the fan motor.
ozone fan motor 2. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the fan motor.
Detail PCU
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
and the fan motor.
PCU PWB trouble.
Fan motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
PCU PWB and the fan motor.
Replace the fan motor.

L4-49 ADU transport cooling fan motor R L4-60 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan
trouble motor F trouble
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
transport cooling fan motor R. not detected within the specified time.
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
and the fan motor. and the fan motor.
Fan motor trouble. Fan motor trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble.
(No power supply to the fan motor) (No power supply to the fan motor)
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan motor. PCU PWB and the fan motor.
Replace the fan motor. Replace the fan motor.
L4-56 Paper exit cooling fan2 R trouble L4-61 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan
motor R trouble
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
not detected within the specified time.
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
Detail PCU not detected within the specified time.
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of Detail PCU
the fan connector or other trouble. Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the and the fan motor.
PCU PWB and the fan. PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. Fan motor trouble.
L4-57 Toner bottle cooling fan motor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the PCU PWB and the fan motor.
specified time in the toner bottle cooling fan Replace the PCU PWB.
operation. Replace the fan motor.
Detail PCU
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
PCU PWB and the fan motor. Trouble content The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM
Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the within the specified time after starting rotation of the
power. polygon motor.
Detail PCU
Cause Polygon motor trouble.
L4-58 Paper exit cooling fan2 trouble LSU control PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
not detected within the specified time. motor.
Detail PCU
Replace the LSU.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
PCU PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error
Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected.

Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.

L8-02 Full wave signal error PC-- Personal counter not detected

Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is Cause The personal counter is not installed.
detected. The personal counter is not detected.
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or SCN Mother PWB trouble.
45Hz or less.) Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the SCN Mother PWB.
Power unit trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness. U1-01 Battery trouble
Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Replace the power unit. Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fall
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Detail MFP
Check the power waveform. Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
L8-11 AC Cord 2 (power for fusing) full wave and 2.5V or above.
Remedy Replace the battery.
not detected
Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected. U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Detail PCU
Trouble content
Power unit trouble.
Detail MFP
Harness trouble.
Disconnection of the AC cord 2. Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
AC SUB PWB trouble. EEPROM socket contact trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Strong external noises.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
Check the connection of the AC cord 2. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the AC SUB PWB (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
Check the power environment.
L8-12 AC Cord 2 (power for fusing) full wave
signal width abnormality
U2-05 Erroneous detection of account
Trouble content The frequency of the full wave signal is judged as management data
abnormal.
Detail PCU
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Power unit trouble.
Harness trouble. Cause Breakage of the authentication DB is detected.
AC SUB PWB trouble. Check & Remedy When breakage of the authentication DB is detected,
Power frequency, waveform abnormality. the MFP is rebooted and the DB tables are
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. reconstructed, generating "U2-05".
Replace the power unit. The message, however, is not displayed and only the
Check connection of the connector and the harness. trouble history is saved.
Replace the AC SUB PWB. The authentication data are cleared.
Check the power waveform.
U2-11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check

L8-20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/ sum error
SCN mother board
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause SCN mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection EEPROM socket contact trouble
trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble. Strong external noises.
SCN mother board trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
Check & Remedy Check connection between the SCN mother board data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
PWB and the MFPC PWB. EEPROM.)
Check the ground of the main unit. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
Replace the SCN mother board. replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)

1 : ‘17/Apr. 3 : ‘19/March.
U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB U2-42 Machine adjustment data (system
manufacturing No. data inconsistency storage data area) error
Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved Trouble content
in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in
Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB, the mSATA SSD and the HDD cannot be found or is
the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before broken.
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB. Both of the mSATA SSD set data and the HDD
MFPC PWB trouble system saved data area are broken.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Backup the data by following the procedure for the
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set. mSATA SSD and the HDD breakage and format the 3
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was HDD by SIM62.
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted Or, replace the HDD and perform SIM16.
on the new PWB. Perform the mechanical adjustment because the
Replace the MFPC PWB. mechanical adjustment values are formatted.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.) U2-50 HDD user authentication data check
sum error
3 U2-40 mSATA SSD system storage data area Trouble content

error Detail MFP
Cause HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Trouble content Strong external noises.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error
Cause A file error occurs in the mSATA SSD system storage (address book, image send system registration data
data partition. (senders record, meta data)) and register again.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
HDD are written into the mSATA SSD and the Replace the HDD.
machine is automatically booted. Replace the MFPC PWB.
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error Manual, and perform the works.)
Trouble content
U2-60 Watermark check error
Detail MFP
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the Trouble content
machine adjustment values in the mSATA SSD. Detail MFP
HDD trouble Cause Watermark data trouble
MFPC PWB trouble HDD trouble
3 Check & Remedy Backup the data by following the procedure for the MFPC PWB trouble
trouble which can be released by turning OFF and Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
ON the power of the main unit, and format the HDD Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data.
by SIM62. Replace the HDD.
Or, replace the HDD and perform SIM16. Replace the MFPC PWB.
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.)
U2-70 OCR dictionary check error 1
Trouble detection MFP

Cause OCR dictionary error
Check & Remedy Use Sim49-6 to install the OCR dictionary data.

U2-80 SCN Mother PWB EEPROM read/write U5-00 Document feed unit communication
error error

Detail SCU Detail SCU
Cause SCN Mother PWB EEPROM trouble Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
SCN Mother PWB trouble SCN Mother PWB trouble.
SCN Mother PWB EEPROM socket connection DSPF PWB trouble.
trouble Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCN Mother PWB EEPROM. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the SCN Mother PWB. Replace the SCN Mother PWB.
Check connection of the SCN Mother PWB EEPROM Replace the DSPF PWB.
socket.
Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
items, and adjust again if they are improper. U5-16 Document feed unit fan trouble
• Scanner-related adjustments
• Touch panel-related adjustments
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is
U2-81 SCN Mother PWB EEPROM check not detected within the specified time.
Fan motor trouble.
sum error Connector, harness connection trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check that the fan is rotating.
Detail SCU Replace the fan motor.
Cause SCN Mother PWB EEPROM trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. Replace the DSPF PWB.
SCN Mother PWB trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCN Mother PWB EEPROM. U5-20 SPF paper feed transport motor trou-
Replace the SCN Mother PWB. ble
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
error detection data are calculated again to reset the Trouble content
proper check sum data.) Detail
Cause SPF paper feed transport motor trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error Check & Remedy Use Sim2-3 to check the operation
Check the SPF paper feed transport motor and
connection of the connector and the harness
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble U5-30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Trouble content
Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and Detail SCU
adjust again if they are improper. Cause STUD does not turn ON 5 times continuously within
Replace the PCU PWB. the specified time.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the DSPF PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU U5-31 Document feed unit tray lift down
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail SCU
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
error detection data are calculated again to reset the Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
proper check sum data.) DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
Replace the DSPF PWB.

U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble U6-23 A3 LCC tray descending trouble
(Reverse winding detection) (A3 LCC)
Trouble content No variation in the motor rotation sensor signal
(encoder sign) is detected within the specified time
Trouble content It is detected that the wire of the LCC tray is reversely
after booting or stopping the LCC lift motor.
wound. (A3 LCC / A3 2-stage LCT)
Detail PCU The lower limit position (full state) is not detected
Cause LCC lift motor rotation sensor trouble within the specified time (A4: 10sec, A3: 8sec) from
LCC control PWB trouble the start of descending the LCT1 tray.
LCC lift mechanism trouble (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
LCC lift motor trouble Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the LCC Cause Reverse winding detection SW ON
sensor and the lift motor. The wire is reversely wound.
Check the LCC lift motor rotation sensor, and replace Reverse winding detection SW trouble
if necessary. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if LCC control PWB trouble. (A3 LCC)
necessary. A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble (A3 2-stage
Check the LCC lift mechanism, and repair if LCT)
necessary. Remaining quantity sensor abnormality, LCT1 tray lift
Check the LCC lift motor, and replace if necessary. motor lock, connector and harness connection
Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. trouble, PWB trouble
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Check & Remedy Check the wire.
U6-20 LCC control PWB - PCU PWB Replace the reverse winding SW and the LCC control
communication error PWB. / Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
(A3 LCC / A3 2-stage LCT)
Trouble content Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations
Detail PCU of the remaining quantity sensor and the LCT1 lift
Cause Communication error between the LCC control PWB motor. Check the wiring.
and the PCU PWB. (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Connection trouble of the harness and the connector
between the machine and the LCC and those of the
LCC control PWB. U6-24 A3 LCC tray lock detection trouble
LCC control PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Malfunction due to noises. Trouble content The LCC / A3 2-stage LCT tray lock mechanism
Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model. malfunctions.
Check the connection of the harness and the Detail PCU
connector between the machine and the LCC and Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown
those of the LCC control PWB, and replace if Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
necessary. Tray lock sensor trouble
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control
necessary. PWB trouble
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary. Check & Remedy Check the tray lock mechanism.
Replace the tray lock sensor.
U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble Replace the LCC control PWB. / Replace the A3 2-
stage LCT control PWB.
Trouble content Transport motor abnormality

Detail PCU U6-29 LCT1 lift trouble
Cause Motor lock
Motor RPM abnormality
Overcurrent to the motor Trouble content The upper limit is not detected within the specified
LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control time (A4 LCC: 10sec, A3 LCC: 8sec) when lifting up.
PWB trouble (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the transport The upper limit is not detected within the specified
motor. time when lifting. The limit SW ON is detected when
Replace the motor lifting. The encoder signal does not vary when lifting.
Replace the LCC / A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. (A3 2-stage LCT)
Detail PCU
Cause Upper limit sensor abnormality, tray lift motor lock,
U6-22 LCC 24V power abnormality connector and harness connection trouble, PWB
trouble (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Sensor trouble, upper limit SW trouble, A3 2-stage
Trouble content The DV 24V power is not supplied to the LCC / A3 2- LCT control PWB trouble, broken gear, lift motor
stage LCT. trouble (A3 2-stage LCT)
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation
Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector of the upper limit sensor and the lift operation. Check
and the harness. the wiring.
LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
PWB trouble (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Power unit trouble Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the power of the upper limit sensor, the upper limit SW, the
line. encoder sensor, and the lift motor.
Check the 24V voltage with the power unit, the LCC Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
control PWB, and the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. (A3 2-stage LCT)

U6-33 LCT2 reverse winding detection U6-54 Option installation combination trou-
trouble ble
Trouble content It is detected that the wire of the tray is reversely Trouble content
wound. Detail
Detail Cause Firmware version is inconsistency
Cause Reverse winding detection SW ON Check & Remedy Update latest firmware version
The wire is reversely wound.
Reverse winding detection SW trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness U6-63 Manual feed tray descending trouble
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check the wire.
Replace the reverse winding SW. Trouble content The lower limit position is not detected within the
Check connection of the connector and the harness. specified time (10sec) from the start of descending the
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. manual feed tray.
Detail PCU
Cause Lower limit sensor trouble.
U6-34 LCT2 lock detection trouble Manual feed tray lift motor lock.
PWB trouble.
Trouble content It is detected that the tray lock mechanism Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations
malfunctions. of the lower limit position sensor and the manual fed
Detail tray lift motor.
Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown Wiring check.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
Tray lock sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Check the tray lock mechanism. U6-68 Manual feed tray paper feed position
Replace the tray lock sensor.
abnormality
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
Trouble content The upper limit sensor turns OFF before turning ON
the pickup SOL. (Normally the upper limit sensor turns
U6-39 LCT2 lift trouble OFF after turning OFF the pickup SOL when starting
lifting up.)
Detail PCU
Trouble content The upper limit is not detected within the specified
Cause Sensor trouble.
time (A4 LCC: 10sec, A3 LCC: 8sec) when lifting.
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
PWB trouble.
The upper limit is not detected within the specified
The pickup roller remains in the lower position.
time when lifting. The limit SW ON is detected when
(Mechanism trouble)
lifting. The encoder signal does not vary when lifting.
(A3 2-stage LCT) Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations
Detail PCU of the upper limit sensor and lift operations.
Wiring check.
Cause Upper limit sensor abnormality, tray lift motor lock,
connector and harness connection trouble, PWB
trouble (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Sensor trouble, upper limit SW trouble, LCT control U6-69 Manual feed tray lift trouble
PWB trouble, broken gear, lift motor trouble (A3 2-
stage LCT) Trouble content The upper limit is not detected within the specified
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation time (10sec) when lifting up.
of the upper limit sensor and the lift operation. Check Detail PCU
the wiring. Cause Upper limit sensor trouble.
Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. Tray lift motor lock.
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT) Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation PWB trouble.
of the upper limit sensor, the upper limit SW, the
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations
encoder sensor, and the lift motor.
of the upper limit sensor and lift operations.
Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
Wiring check.
(A3 2-stage LCT)
Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble U6-80 Relay unit transport motor trouble
Trouble content An LCC of a different model which is not supported by
Trouble content Relay unit transport motor abnormality
the machine is installed. (Improper combination of the
Detail PCU
machine and the LCC model code.)
Cause Motor lock
Detail PCU
Cause LCC control PWB trouble
Overcurrent to the motor
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model.
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the relay unit
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if
transport motor.
necessary.
Replace the motor. Replace the A3 2-stage LCT
control PWB.

U6-81 Power unit cooling fan motor trouble U7-51 Vendor machine error
Trouble content A3 2-stage LCT power unit section cooling fan motor Trouble content
abnormality Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Detail PCU Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, A3 2-stage Connector, harness connection trouble.
LCT control PWB trouble, harness and connector Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
connection trouble vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Check & Remedy Check connection from the A3 2-stage LCT control Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
PWB to the motor. code.
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. Replace Check the connector and the harness in the
the motor. communication line.
U6-82 EEPROM trouble U9-01 Touch panel trouble
Trouble content The EEPROM contents are garbled. Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail
Cause A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Cause Harness connection trouble
Malfunction caused by noises MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the A3 2-stage LCT controller PWB. Touch panel trouble
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness in the touch
panel line
U6-83 Room temperature thermistor Replace MFP PWB
Replace Touch panel
breakdown
Trouble content Room temperature thermistor open or short UC-02 CPT - ASIC error
Detail PCU
Cause Room temperature thermistor harness connection Trouble content
trouble
Detail SCU
Room temperature thermistor trouble
Cause SCN Mother PWB trouble. (CPT-ASIC trouble.)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCN Mother PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of
the room temperature thermistor.
Replace the temperature and humidity sensor.
Check the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. UC-12 CPT - ASIC abnormal trouble
(DSPF detection)
U6-84 Room humidity thermistor breakdown Trouble content Access abnormality to the CPT - ASIC (when the
ASIC operates abnormally)
Trouble content Humidity thermistor open or short Detail SCU
Detail PCU Cause B to B connector connection trouble.
Cause Humidity thermistor harness connection trouble DSPF PWB trouble.
Humidity thermistor trouble CPT - ASIC trouble.
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check the B to B connector.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of Replace the DSPF PWB or the Option PWB.
the humidity thermistor.
Replace the temperature and humidity sensor.
Check the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. UC-20 DOCC ASIC error
Trouble content
U7-50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine
Detail SCU
communication error Cause SCN Mother PWB trouble. (DOCC-ASIC trouble.)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCN Mother PWB.
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial
vendor.
Detail MFP UC-30 Anti-copy MODULE trouble
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications (DSPF detection)
(SIM26-3).
Vendor machine trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble. Trouble content Access abnormality to the DOCC-ASIC (when the
Connector, harness connection trouble. ASIC operates abnormally)
Strong external noises. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power. Cause B to B connector connection trouble.
Check the connector and the harness in the DSPF PWB trouble.
communication line. DOCC-ASIC trouble.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine Check & Remedy Check the B to B connector.
(SIM26-3). Replace the DSPF PWB or the Option PWB.

UE-10 LCT1 suction fan motor trouble UE-14 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor high
temperature trouble
Trouble content Suction fan motor abnormality
Detail PCU Trouble content The warm air heater temperature exceeds the
Cause Motor lock specified level.
Motor RPM abnormality Detail PCU
Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble
Harness and connector connection trouble
Warm air heater harness and connector connection
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the suction trouble
fan motor. Heater relay PWB trouble
Check connection of the harness and the connector.
Check & Remedy Check the warm air heater (thermistor) and its
harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the A3 2-
UE-11 LCT1 exhaust fan motor trouble Check the heater relay PWB.
Check the heater control circuit of the A3 2-stage LCT
Trouble content Exhaust fan motor abnormality control PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock
UE-15 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor
Overcurrent to the motor open
Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the exhaust
Detail PCU
fan motor.
Check connection of the harness and the connector. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
Connector connection trouble
UE-12 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor open from the thermistor to the A3 2-stage LCT control
PWB.
Trouble content The thermistor is open.

Detail PCU UE-16 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor
Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble low temperature
trouble Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector from the warm within the specified time after turning ON the power
air heater (thermistor) to the A3 2-stage LCT control relay.
PWB. Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Warm air heater trouble
UE-13 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor low Warm air heater harness and connector connection
trouble
temperature trouble A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level AC power trouble
within the specified time after turning ON the power Insertion detection switch 2 trouble
relay. Heater relay PWB trouble
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check the thermistor and its harness.
Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble Check the thermistor input circuit section of the A3 2-
Warm air heater trouble stage LCT control PWB.
Warm air heater harness and connector connection Check for disconnection of the warm air heater and
trouble the thermostat.
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Check the insertion detection switch 2.
Thermostat trouble. Check the heater relay PWB.
AC power trouble Check the heater control circuit of the AC PWB and
Insertion detection switch 2 trouble that of the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
Heater relay PWB trouble
harness.
Check for disconnection of the warm air heater and
the thermostat.
Check the insertion detection switch 2.
Check the heater relay PWB.
Check the heater control circuit of the AC PWB and
that of the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.

UE-17 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor UE-23 LCT2 warm air heater thermistor low
high temperature temperature trouble
Trouble content The temperature at the warm air outlet port exceeds Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level
the specified level. within the specified time after turning ON the power
Detail PCU relay.
Cause Thermistor trouble. Detail PCU
Warm air heater harness and connector connection Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble
trouble Warm air heater trouble
Heater relay PWB trouble Warm air heater harness and connector connection
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble trouble
Check & Remedy Check the thermistor and its harness. A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the A3 2- Thermostat trouble.
stage LCT control PWB. AC power trouble
Check the heater relay PWB. Insertion detection switch 2 trouble
Check the heater control circuit of the A3 2-stage LCT Heater relay PWB trouble
control PWB. Check & Remedy Check the warm air heater (thermistor) and its
harness.
UE-20 LCT2 suction fan motor trouble stage LCT control PWB.
Check for disconnection of the warm air heater and
the thermostat.
Trouble content Suction fan motor abnormality Check the insertion detection switch 2.
Detail PCU Check the heater relay PWB.
Cause Motor lock Check the heater control circuit of the AC PWB and
Motor RPM abnormality that of the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble UE-24 LCT2 warm air heater thermistor high
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the suction
fan motor.
temperature trouble
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT controller PWB. Trouble content The warm air heater temperature exceeds the
specified level.
Detail PCU
UE-21 LCT2 exhaust fan motor trouble Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble
Trouble content Exhaust fan motor abnormality
trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock
harness.
Check the heater relay PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the exhaust Check the heater control circuit of the A3 2-stage LCT
fan motor. control PWB.
UE-22 LCT2 warm air heater thermistor open open
Trouble content The thermistor is open. Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble Cause Thermistor trouble.
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
Warm air heater harness and connector connection Connector connection trouble
trouble Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector from the warm from the thermistor to the A3 2-stage LCT control
air heater (thermistor) to the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
PWB.

2. JAM and troubleshooting
low temperature A. JAM code list
(1) PCU JAM cause (Some parts are overlapped with
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level the SCU code table.)
within the specified time after turning ON the power
relay. Main unit
Detail PCU JAM code JAM content
Cause Thermistor trouble. MFT_LE Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
Warm air heater trouble (100K for the paper feed counter)*1
Warm air heater harness and connector connection TRAY1_LE Tray 1 paper feed JAM
trouble (200K for the paper feed counter)*1
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble TRAY2_LE Tray 2 paper feed JAM
Thermostat trouble. (200K for the paper feed counter)*1
AC power trouble
TRAY3_LE Tray 3 paper feed JAM
Insertion detection switch 2 trouble
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1
TRAY4_LE Tray 4 paper feed JAM
Check & Remedy Check the thermistor and its harness.
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-reached)
Check for disconnection of the warm air heater and MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM
the thermostat. TRAY1 Tandem tray 1
Check the insertion detection switch 2. T1PPD1_S1 T1PPD1 remaining JAM
Check the heater relay PWB. T1PPD2_N1 Tandem tray 1 paper feed JAM
Check the heater control circuit of the AC PWB and (T1PPD2 not-reached JAM)
that of the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. T1PPD2_S1 T1PPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY2 Tandem tray 2 paper feed JAM
(T2PPD1 not-reached JAM)
UE-27 LCT2 warm air outlet port thermistor T2PPD1_N3 T2PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed
high temperature paper)
T2PPD1_N4 T2PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed
paper)
Trouble content The temperature at the warm air outlet port exceeds
T2PPD1_S2 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 2 paper feed paper)
the specified level.
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM (C3PFD not-reached JAM)
trouble C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
Heater relay PWB trouble C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble C3PFD_S4 C3PFD remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
Check & Remedy Check the thermistor and its harness. TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM (C4PFD not-reached JAM)
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the A3 2- C4PFD_S4 C4PFD remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
stage LCT control PWB. LPPD1_NL LPPD not-reached JAM
Check the heater relay PWB. (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
Check the heater control circuit of the A3 2-stage LCT LPPD1_NL11 LPPD not-reached JAM
control PWB. (large capacity paper feed tray 1 paper feed paper)
LPPD1_NL12 LPPD not-reached JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray 2 paper feed paper)
LPPD1_NLM LPPD not-reached JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed
paper)
LPPD1_SL LPPD remaining JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
LPPD1_SL11 LPPD remaining JAM
LPPD1_SL12 LPPD remaining JAM
LPPD1_SLM LPPD remaining JAM
paper)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM
PPD1_NL11 PPD1 not-reached JAM
PPD1_NL12 PPD1 not-reached JAM
PPD1_NLM PPD1 not-reached JAM
paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)

1 : ‘17/Apr.
JAM code JAM content JAM code JAM content
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) PPD2_NA_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) PPD2_SM_D PPD2 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) PPD2_S1_D PPD2 remaining JAM
PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2
PPD1_SL11 PPD1 remaining JAM PPD2_S2_D PPD2 remaining JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray 1 paper feed paper) (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2
PPD1_SL12 PPD1 remaining JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray 2 paper feed paper) PPD2_S3_D PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
PPD1_SLM PPD1 remaining JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed PPD2_S4_D PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) PPD2_SL_D PPD2 remaining JAM
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD2_SL11_D PPD2 remaining JAM
PPD2_SL12_D PPD2 remaining JAM
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM PPD2_SLM_D PPD2 remaining JAM (large capacity paper feed tray
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) manual paper feed paper)
PPD2_NL11 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(large capacity paper feed tray 1 paper feed paper) PPD2_SA_D PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_NL12 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
(large capacity paper feed tray 2 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NM FPFD not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) 1
PPD2_NLM PPD2 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_N1 FPFD not-reached JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
paper)
P_FPFD_N2 FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) P_FPFD_N3 FPFD not-reached JAM (tray 3 paper feed paper)
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_N4 FPFD not-reached JAM (tray 4 paper feed paper)
PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NL FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NL11 FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (large capacity paper feed tray 1 paper feed paper)
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NL12 FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD2_SL11 PPD2 remaining JAM (large capacity paper feed tray 2 paper feed paper)
PPD2_SL12 PPD2 remaining JAM
PPD2_SLM PPD2 remaining JAM
P_FPFD_NLM FPFD not-reached JAM
paper)
(large capacity manual paper feed paper)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
P_FPFD_NA FPFD not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_NM_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
P_FPFD_SM FPFD remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
(manual paper feed tray paper)
P_FPFD_S1 FPFD remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
P_FPFD_S2 FPFD remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
PPD2_N1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_S3 FPFD remaining JAM (tray 3 paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 P_FPFD_S4 FPFD remaining JAM (tray 4 paper feed paper)
PPD2_N2_D PPD2 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_SL FPFD remaining JAM
(tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 P_FPFD_SL11 FPFD remaining JAM
PPD2_N3_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (large capacity paper feed tray 1 paper feed paper)
(cassette 3 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_SL12 FPFD remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 (large capacity paper feed tray 2 paper feed paper)
PPD2_N4_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(cassette 4 paper feed paper)
PPD2_NL_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) P_FPFD_SLM FPFD remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 (large capacity manual paper feed paper)
PPD2_NL11_D PPD2 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_SA FPFD remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray 1 paper feed paper) POD1_NA POD1 not-reached JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 (In the case of a jam at the second surface)
PPD2_NL12_D PPD2 not-reached JAM POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1_SA POD1 remaining JAM
(In the case of a jam at the second surface)
PPD2_NLM_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (large capacity paper feed tray
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
manual paper feed paper)
POD2_NB POD2 not-reached JAM
(In the case of a jam before switchback)

1 : ‘17/Apr.
JAM code JAM content MX-RB15
POD2_SB POD2 remaining JAM JAM code JAM content
(In the case of a jam before switchback) DCS100_N Decurler unit transport pass sensor not-reached JAM
1 DCS100_S Decurler unit transport pass sensor remaining JAM
POD2_SA POD2 remaining JAM DCTIME Early reaching JAM
(In the case of a jam after switchback)
DCPAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM MX-RB13
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
JAM code JAM content
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
PIS150_N Transport unit pass sensor not-reached JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
PIS150_S Transport unit pass sensor remaining JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
GBC punch 1
1 DRUM Drum JAM (drum lock detection)
FUSER Fuser JAM (fusing winding detection) JAM code JAM content
PRI_JAM PRI JAM (Image preparation wait time-out) GBCJ GBC punch unit JAM
MX-FN21/22
LCC_ERR LCC JAM (LCC communication abnormality detection)
FIN_ERR Finisher JAM JAM code JAM content
(Finisher communication abnormality detection) FNS101_N Inlet port not-reached JAM (FN pass)
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM FNS101_S Inlet port remaining JAM (FN pass)
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request) FNS102_N Paper exit not-reached JAM
NO_MATCH Parameter inconsistency FNS102_S Paper exit remaining JAM
MFT_RT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FNM110 Paper exit roller lift motor JAM
TRAY1_RT Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FNM117 Gripper motor JAM
TRAY2_RT Tray 2 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FNM115 Staple JAM
TRAY3_RT Tray 3 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FNM114 Discharged paper HOLD motor JAM
TRAY4_RT Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FNM113 Paper rear edge fall motor JAM
MFT_1ST Manual feed tray paper feed JAM FNM116 Gripper arm motor JAM
(Check the paper set condition) FNM112 Paper alignment roller lift motor JAM
TRAY1_1ST Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM FNM118 Paper rear edge hold motor JAM
(Check the paper set condition) FCM102 Punch JAM
TRAY2_1ST Tray 2 feed tray paper feed JAM FNPAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow
(Check the paper set condition)
FNTIME Early reaching JAM
TRAY3_1ST Tray 3 feed tray paper feed JAM
FSS201_N Saddle inlet port pass sensor delay JAM
FSS201_S Saddle inlet port pass sensor remaining JAM
TRAY4_1ST Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM
FSS203_N Saddle vertical pass sensor delay JAM
FSS226_N Saddle transport paper pass sensor 1 delay JAM
*1: In SIM22-41, the descriptions are abbreviated on the screen FSS226_S Saddle transport paper pass sensor 1 remaining JAM
because of the limitation on the number of characters (100K for FSS227_N Saddle paper exit pass sensor 2 delay JAM
the paper feed counter). FSS227_S Saddle paper exit pass sensor 2 remaining JAM
*2: In SIM22-41, the description of "(Delay of paper just before the FSM202 Saddle section saddle alignment motor JAM
JAM from PS)" is omitted because of the limitation on the FSM203 Saddle section lead edge stopper motor JAM
number of characters. FSM204 Saddle section folding roller guide motor JAM
FSM210 Saddle section rear edge hold motor JAM
FSM211 Saddle section rear edge shift motor JAM
MX-FN19/20 FSM213 Saddle section SADDLE flapping motor JAM
JAM code JAM content FSM214 Saddle section SEPARATION motor JAM
FED_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM FSM206 Saddle section folding motor JAM
FED_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM FSM205 Saddle section PUSH motor JAM
FFPD_N Saddle section not-reached JAM
MX-TM10
FFPD_S Saddle section remaining JAM
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM JAM code JAM content
FHS_N Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM FTS103_N Trimmer paper exit sensor delay JAM
FHS_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM FTS103_S Trimmer paper exit sensor remaining JAM
FSHS_N Saddle transport not-reached JAM FTS101_N Trimmer inlet port sensor relay JAM
FSHS_S Saddle transport remaining JAM FTS101_S Trimmer inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FSFS_N Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM FTM103 Trimmer section inlet port separation motor JAM
FSFS_S Saddle paper exit remaining JAM FTM104 Trimmer section paper exit separation motor JAM
FSTPLJ Finisher staple JAM FTM102 Trimmer section registration motor JAM
FPNCHJ Finisher punch JAM FTM106 Trimmer section CUTTER motor JAM
FSSTPLJ Saddle staple JAM FTM105 Trimmer section bundle press motor JAM
PDPPD1_N Finisher interface inlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD1_S Finisher interface inlet port remaining JAM
PDPPD2_N Finisher interface outlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD2_S Finisher interface outlet port remaining JAM
1

MX-FD10 MX-RB14
JAM code JAM content JAM code JAM content
FLS30_N Speed reduction timing sensor delay JAM L1DFR01_NL1 Interface transport sensor 1 not-reached JAM
FLS30_S Speed reduction timing sensor emaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
FLS31_N Separation timing sensor delay JAM L1DFR01_SL1 Interface transport sensor 1 remaining JAM
FLS31_S Separation timing sensor emaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
FLS32_N Folding position adjustment sensor delay JAM L1DFR01_NL2 Interface transport sensor 1 not-reached JAM
FLS32_S Folding position adjustment sensor remaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed)
FLS33_N Upper stopper section paper detection sensor delay L1DFR01_SL2 Interface transport sensor 1 remaining JAM
JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed)
FLS33_S Upper stopper section paper detection sensor L1DFR01_NLM Interface transport sensor 1 not-reached JAM
remaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
FLS22_N Outlet port 1 sensor delay JAM L1DFR01_SLM Interface transport sensor 1 remaining JAM
(Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
FLS22_S Outlet port 1 sensor remaining JAM
L1DFR02_NL1 Interface transport sensor 2 not-reached JAM
FLS27_N Folding tray empty sensor delay JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
FLS27_S Folding tray empty sensor remaining JAM
L1DFR02_SL1 Interface transport sensor 2 remaining JAM
FLS20_N Inlet port sensor delay JAM
FLS20_S Inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FLS21_N Outlet port 2 sensor delay JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed)
FLS21_S Outlet port 2 sensor remaining JAM L1DFR02_SL2 Interface transport sensor 2 remaining JAM
FLM8 Folding section upper stopper motor JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed)
FLM9 Folding SECTION 3-fold stopper motor JAM L1DFR02_NLM Interface transport sensor 2 not-reached JAM
FLM10 Folding section lead edge hold guide motor JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
FLM7 Folding section folding tray paper exit motor JAM L1DFR02_SLM Interface transport sensor 2 remaining JAM
FLENT_ERR EntryStart time out JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
FLEJT_ERR EjectStartAck time out JAM L1DFR03_NL1 Interface transport sensor 3 not-reached JAM
MX-CF11 L1DFR03_SL1 Interface transport sensor 3 remaining JAM
JAM code JAM content
INSTR1_LE Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM
L1DFR03_SL2 Interface transport sensor 3 remaining JAM
INSTR2_LE Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM
L1DFR03_NLM Interface transport sensor 3 not-reached JAM
INSTR1_RT Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
INSTR2_RT Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
L1DFR03_SLM Interface transport sensor 3 remaining JAM
INSTR1_1ST Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM
INSTR2_1ST Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM MX-MF11
INSFED1_N No. 1 paper feed sensor not-reached JAM JAM code JAM content
INSFED1_S No. 1 paper feed sensor remaining JAM L1MPFS_NLM Manual paper feed sensor not-reached JAM
INSFED2_N No. 2 paper feed sensor not-reached JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
INSFED2_S No. 2 paper feed sensor remaining JAM L1MPFS_SLM Manual paper feed sensor remaining JAM
INSPL1_N No. 1 pull-out sensor not-reached JAM
L1MTS_NLM Manual paper transport sensor not-reached JAM
INSPL1_S No. 1 pull-out sensor remaining JAM
INSPL2_N No. 2 pull-out sensor not-reached JAM
L1MTS_SLM Manual paper transport sensor remaining JAM
INSPL2_S No. 2 pull-out sensor remaining JAM
INSVTR1_N No. 1 vertical transport sensor not-reached JAM
L1DFB01_NLM Manual feed paper entry sensor not-reached JAM
INSVTR1_S No. 1 vertical transport sensor remaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
INSVTR2_N No. 2 vertical transport sensor not-reached JAM L1DFB01_SLM Manual feed paper entry sensor remaining JAM
INSVTR2_S No. 2 vertical transport sensor remaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
INSOUT_N Paper exit sensor not reached JAM MFT2_LE Multi-stage LCT manual feed tray paper feed JAM
INSOUT_S Paper exit sensor remaining JAM (200K for the paper feed counter)
INSENT_N Inlet port sensor not-reached JAM MFT2_RT Multi-stage LCT manual feed tray paper feed JAM
INSENT_S Inlet port sensor remaining JAM (Check the paper)
INSEXT_N Outlet port sensor not-reached JAM MFT2_1ST Multi-stage LCT manual feed tray paper feed JAM
INSEXT_S Outlet port sensor remaining JAM (Check the paper set condition)
INSLUP1J No. 1 lift motor JAM
INSLUP2J No. 2 lift motor JAM MX-LCX3N/LC12
INSPICM1J No. 1 pickup motor JAM JAM code JAM content
INSPICM2J No. 2 pickup motor JAM LCC_LE Side A4LCC paper feed JAM
(200K/100K for the paper feed counter)*1
LCC A4/A3LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached JAM)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM
LCC_RT A4/A3LCC feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
LCC_1ST A4/A3LCC paper feed JAM

MX-LC13 N
(2) SCU JAM case (Some parts are overlapped with
JAM code JAM content the PCU code table.)
LCT1_1_RT Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed JAM
(Check the paper) JAM code JAM content
LCT1_2_RT Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed JAM STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
(Check the paper) SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
LCT1_1_1ST Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed JAM SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
(Check the paper set condition) SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM
LCT1_2_1ST Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed JAM SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM
L1DF101_NL1 Paper exit sensor 1cs not-reached JAM
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM
L1DF101_SL1 Paper exit sensor 1cs remaining JAM
SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
L1DF201_NL2 Paper exit sensor 2cs not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed) SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM
L1DF201_SL2 Paper exit sensor 2cs remaining JAM SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed) SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
L1DF001_NL1 Vertical transport sensor 1 (1-series) not-reached JAM SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
(Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed) P_SHORT Short size JAM
L1DF001_SL1 Vertical transport sensor 1 (1-series) remaining JAM SDFS_S Double feed detection JAM/Accompanied feed JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed) ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
L1DF001_NLM Vertical transport sensor 1 (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1DF001_SLM Vertical transport sensor 1 (1-series) remaining JAM
L1DF002_NL1 Vertical transport sensor 2 (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1DF002_SL1 Vertical transport sensor 2 (1-series) remaining JAM
L1DF005_NL1 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1DF005_SL1 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) remaining JAM
L1DF005_NL2 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1DF005_SL2 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) remaining JAM
L1DF005_NLM LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1DF005_SLM LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) remaining JAM

3. Image send communication report
code
A. Outline and code system descriptions
After completion of communication, the communication report
table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
described on the communication report column.
The communication report code is composed as follows:
Communication report: XX (XXXX)
The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
Communication report code of 00 – 99 (Refer to communication
report main code.)
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code:
Used by the serviceman.
The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to
communication report sub code 1.)
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to
communication report sub code 2.)
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2
are in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimal
notation.)
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the
these models.
B. Details
(1) Communication report main code
Report Final receive signal

Final receive signal (Receive side)
code (Send side)
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
3 FTT EOP
4 MCF EOM
5 PIP, PIN MPS
6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
7 No signal, DCN DCN
8 PPR PPS-EOP
9 PPS-EOM
10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
11 RNR RR
12 CTR CTC
13 ERR EOR-Q
14 PPS-PRI-Q
16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
19 FTT PPS-EOP
20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
CAUTION: For report codes 16 – 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICA-

TION.

Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0 – 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.
In F code receiving : <Receive>

"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>

Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
75 NG75 XXXX *1 • Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
• When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
• Check for disconnection of cables.
• A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
• The port is set to DISABLE.
• Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
• When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
• Error of the disposition-modifier.
• The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
• In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
• Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
• Header acquisition error.
• Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
• The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
• There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Cannot be stored in memory.
• The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
• Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 When image conversion for image send cannot be made after send reservation.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
• The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
• An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
• An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
• Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.
*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
• When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
• Errors in ( ) are not used.

(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive

00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used —
10 Not used —
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used —
19 Not used —
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used —
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used —
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In conversion for sending, the number of the IMS management pages exceeds the upper limit (1 communication Send
reservation: 999 sheets, Total communication reservation: 5,000 sheets). (This trouble occurs also in OSA scan, resulting OSAScan
in memory over.)
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
Endian error
Version error
Tag data error
Tag parameter error

Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
Header size error
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.
When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."
4. Dial tone
When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this machine,
be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.
Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the
buzzer sound.)
If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.

MX-7580N
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE Service Manual
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired. When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine. Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-7580N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 4) Press [ALL] key.
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware All the firmware programs are selected.
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation * Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.
panel.)
* In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine
2) Enter the SIM49-01. side are ignored.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with
the update screen. the firmware display key.
* The number of key changes according to the number of the * If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. and cannot be pressed.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the firemware.
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] 6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
played.
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen cessfully.
appears. 7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated played.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
B. Firmware update using FTP

FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update the
firmware. [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-
special firmware upgrade page appears.
tion." will be displayed.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

3 : ‘19/March.
D. Firmware update using the CN update function d. Keys used in the CN update mode
(There are three methods.) The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
(1) Outline normal mode.
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called
the CN update.
[UP] [BACK]
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
• Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring data
from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the SCU
PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options by
means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the follow-
ing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a sec- [MENU]
tion other than the boot program for some reasons during firm- [DOWN] [OK]
ware update operation of other method than the CN update, this
method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the Key name Functions in the CN update mode
3 mSATA SSD must be replaced with a new one having the normal [OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
boot program. [MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality in
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
the boot program.
[UP] key Selects an item.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not [DOWN] key Selects an item.
displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
the main program. (2) Operating procedures
• Firmware version check function a. Firmware update function
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 is This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-
easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX
manual.) PWB, and each option.
b. Purpose It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
This function is used in the following cases: • The update target ROM is automatically selected.
• When an error occurs during firmware update operation other • When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a sec-
than the CN update. tion other than the boot program for some reasons during firm-
• When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section ware update operation of other method than the CN update.
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this method
update operation of other method than the CN update, this cannot be used. On that case, the mSATA SSD must be replaced 3
method can be used to update the firmware. with a new one having the normal boot program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be used. When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
3 In such a case, the mSATA SSD must be replaced with a new one not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
having the normal boot program. the main program (mSATA SSD). 3
c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode a-1. Necessary items
To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on 1) Insert the mSATA SSD to the MFP PWB of the machine. 3
the MFP PWB and boot the machine. 2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-
OFF (normal mode). level lower directory.

a-2. Procedures 9) Press [OK] key.
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
PWB cover. minute.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. Display of file reading
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position Firm Update
Reading Data
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is

continued.
Display of the firmware update process
Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
4) Turn ON the power. * The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
more than ten seconds to display the menu.) display.
Display when booting is completed * During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
Update Program Init 11) Check the update result.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
Please wait firmware programs.
Display of the firmware update result
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM

Version Check Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
Conf : 00050000
• OK: Update is completed successfully.
• NG: Update is failed.
6) Select the firmware update mode.
• Not Update: Update is not executed.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
12) Turn OFF the power.
Display of the firmware update mode
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
Firm Update 14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
From USB Memory
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
7) Press [OK] key. copier basic menu.
The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and 15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
the file selection menu is displayed. 16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.
Display of file selection
Firm Update
> F 0100P000.sfu
8) Select the firmware file (SFU).

Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
[DOWN] key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.

MX-7580N
[9] MAINTENANCE Service Manual
1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance

A. Counter check
Before execution of the maintenance, execute SIM22 to check the
counter values of the following counters to confirm consuming
states of each section.
1) Each consumable part counter
2) Each unit counter
3) Trouble counter, JAM counter
B. Counter reset
When a part or consumable part is replaced with new one in the
maintenance, execute SIM24 to reset the following counters.
1) Maintenance counter
2) Each consumable part counter
3) Each unit counter
4) Trouble counter, JAM counter
C. Firmware version check and upgrading

Execute SIM22-5 to check the firmware version, and upgrade it as
needed. (SIM49-1)
D. Confirmation, adjustment
After completion of part replacement and cleaning, etc, execute the following procedures.
Items necessary to execute
Item SIM to be used

ADJ 3 Print engine image distortion adjustment / ADJ 3A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment) / 50-22
OPC drum phase adjustment / OPC drum phase adjustment (Automatic adjustment) /
Color registration adjustment Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
ADJ 7/SET1 Color balance/density adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
ADJ 7B Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment 46-74
(Automatic adjustment) (Basic adjustment)
Items to execute as needed
Item SIM to be used

ADJ 2 High voltage adjustment ADJ 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
ADJ 2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
ADJ 2C Transfer current/voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 7/SET1 Color balance/density adjustment ADJ 7A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
MX-7580N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value.
The display content is "Maintenance execution timing Code: OO."
The relations between the messages and the counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Code Counter name Display condition SIM26-38-A set value Print JOB Enable/Disable
TA Maintenance counter (Total) When 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. No relation Enable
When the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. 0 (Print continue) Enable
1 (Print stop) Disable
CA Maintenance counter (Color) When 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. No relation Enable
When the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. 0 (Print continue) Enable
AA Maintenance counter When 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. No relation Enable
(Both of Total and Color) When the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. 0 (Print continue) Enable
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).
B. Primary transfer unit

TK1 Primary transfer unit print counter When 300K is reached. No relation Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
C. Secondary transfer unit

TK2 Secondary transfer unit print When 300K is reaches. No relation Enable
counter
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
D. Fusing unit
FK1 Fusing belt print counter When 300K is reached. No relation Enable
FK2 Pressure roller print counter When 300K is reached. No relation Enable
Code Counter name Display condition SIM26-38-B set value Print JOB Enable/Disable
FK3 Fusing web send counter When 300K is reached. No relation Enable
FK3 Fusing web send counter When the fusing web end detection is ON. 0 (Print continue) Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, the fusing belt counter, the fusing web print counter,
the accumulated rotation number counter, and the use day counter.
E. OPC drum
DK OPC drum print counter (K) When 300K sheets is reached, or No relation Enable
OPC drum accumulated number of rotations (K) when 1,000K rotations is reached.
D (C/M/Y) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) When 200K sheets is reached, or No relation Enable
OPC drum accumulated number of rotations (C/M/Y) when 1,000K rotations is reached.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
F. Developer
VK Developer print counter (K) When 600K sheets is reached, or No relation Enable
DV unit accumulated number of rotations (K) when 2,000K rotations is reached.
V (C/M/Y) Developer print counter (C/M/Y) When 400K sheets is reached, or No relation Enable
DV unit accumulated number of rotations (C/M/Y) when 2,000K rotations is reached.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the developer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
G. Waste toner box

SIM26-38-A Print JOB
Code Counter name Display condition Display message
set value Enable/Disable
- When near end is detected. Waste toner full The waste toner bottle will be No relation Enable
detection switch ON needed soon. (Prepare a new
one.)
- The pixel count from near end reaches Specified pixel count Please replace the waste No relation Disable
the specified value. toner bottle.
* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears.
H. Toner cartridge
SIM26-38-A Print JOB
Code Counter name Display condition Display message
set value Enable/Disable
- Toner motor rotation time Specified time of (K/C/M/Y) Prepare a toner No relation Enable
rotations (Near near end)
- Toner supply amount is decreasing. Toner remaining (K/C/M/Y) Replace the toner No relation Enable
quantity sensor output cartridge. (Near end)
- The Hopper Remaining Toner after Specified hopper Replace the toner cartridge. No relation Disable for a JOB which
detection of near end reaches the remaining count (K) (End) requires K toner
specified level.
- The Hopper Remaining Toner after Specified hopper Replace the toner cartridge. No relation Enable for monochrome,
detection of near end reaches the remaining count (C/M/Y) (End) Disable for color
specified level.
3. Maintenance list
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) O: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate
When Every Every Every Every

Section Unit No. Maintenance parts Remark
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K
DSPF Document 1 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other
section feed tray unit side must be also cleaned.
Document 2 Document pickup roller O O Replace according to each paper feed
feed unit 3 Paper feed roller O O counter value: Replace at 100K or after
one-year use.
4 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other
side must be also cleaned.
Lamp unit 5 Second scan section, O O
scanning glass
6 Scanner lamp O O Air-blow the LED section.
Optical unit 7 Mirror O O
8 Lens O O
9 CCD O O
DSPF unit 10 Separation roller O O Replace according to each paper feed
counter value: Replace at 100K or after
one-year use.
11 Torque limiter X X Replace according to each paper feed
counter value: 800K
12 No. 1 registration roller O O
13 Transport roller 1 O O
17 Paper exit roller O O
18 No. 1 scanning plate O O
19 No. 2 scanning section O O
white reference glass
20 Discharge brush X X Replacement reference:
When the brush bundle is remarkably
deformed.
21 OC mat O O
Drive unit 23 Gears X X Apply to the specified position as
needed when checking.
(UKOG-0299FCZZ)
24 Belts - X
Transport 25 Belts - X
drive unit
Scanner Scanner unit 1 Table glass O O
section 2 SPF glass O O
3 Rails Apply to the specified position.
4 Drive belt X X
5 Drive wire X X
Lamp unit 7 Mirror O O
Mirror unit 9 Mirror O O
CCD unit 10 Lens O O
11 CCD O O
Tray paper Tandem 1 Paper pickup roller X O Replace according to each paper feed
feed paper feed 2 Paper feed roller X O counter value: Replace at 200K or after
section tray 3 Separation roller X O one-year use.
counter value: 800K
- Transport paper guides O O
Tray paper Tray paper 6 Paper pickup roller X O Replace according to each paper feed
feed feed unit 7 Paper feed roller X O counter value: Replace at 100K or after
section 8 Separation roller X O one-year use.
counter value: 800K
10 Transport roller 9, 10 X O
Paper feed 13 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other
tray side must be also cleaned.
Manual Manual paper 1 Paper pickup roller X O Replace according to each paper feed
paper feed feed unit 2 Paper feed roller X O counter value: Replace at 100K or after
section 3 Separation roller X O one-year use.
counter value: 800K
5 Transport roller 8 X O
Paper Interface unit 1 Transport roller 6 X O
transport 2 Transport roller 7 X O
section 3 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other
Right vertical 4 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other
transport unit side must be also cleaned.
Vertical 5 Transport roller 11 X O
transport unit 6 Transport roller 12 X O
LCC transport 8 Transport roller 14 X O
unit 9 Transport roller 15 X O
PS lower unit 12 Transport roller 13 X O
PS unit 13 Transport roller 17 X O
14 Registration roller (drive) X O
15 Registration roller (idle) X O
17 Paper dust removing unit O 
LSU LSU 1 Dust-proof glass X X Clean as needed.
section LSU cleaning 2 Cleaning base X X
rod
Toner supply section 1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. The storage period is 2 years.
Developing Developing 1 Developer X  Replace at 600K or at the specified
section unit rotation number.
(monochrome The storage period is 2 years.
) 2 DV blade X X Replace as needed.
3 DV side seals F/R X X Replace as needed.
4 Toner filter X 
5 Bias pin X X
6 Connector X X
Developing 1 Developer X  Replace at 400K or at the specified
unit (color) rotation number.
The storage period is 2 years.
2 DV blade X X Replace as needed.
5 Bias pin X X
6 Connector X X
OPC drum OPC drum 1 Drum -  Replace according to the drum counter
section unit value or when the specified rotation
(monochrome number is reached.
) The storage period is 3 years.
2 Cleaner blade -  Recommendable to replace according
to the blade counter value or when the
specified rotation number is reached.
3 MC unit X 
4 Side seals F/R - X Replace as needed.
5 Toner reception seat - X Replace as needed.
6 Cleaning brush - X Check for clogging of the brush. If
cleaning cannot delete the trouble,
replace.
7 DL unit - X Clean the DL protection cover of the
(Discharge lamp unit) light shielding surface as needed.
8 TCDL unit - X Clean the TCDL protection cover of the
(After-transfer discharge light shielding surface as needed.
lamp unit)
9 HP sensor X X Clean as needed.
10 Process suction port X X Clean as needed.
moltopren
OPC drum 1 Drum -  Replace according to the drum counter
unit (color) value or when the specified rotation
number is reached.
2 Cleaner blade -  Recommendable to replace according
to the blade counter value or when the
specified rotation number is reached.
3 MC unit X 
6 Cleaning brush - X Check for clogging of the brush. If
cleaning cannot delete the trouble,
replace.
7 DL unit - X Clean the DL protection cover of the
(Discharge lamp unit) light shielding surface as needed.
8 TCDL unit - X Clean the TCDL protection cover of the
(After-transfer discharge light shielding surface as needed.
lamp unit)
10 Process suction port X X Clean as needed.
moltopren
Transfer Primary 1 Primary transfer belt -  When replacing, apply CKOG-
section transfer unit 0345DS51(Y toner).
2 Primary transfer cleaner -  When 300K is reached, replace
blade together with the primary transfer belt.
3 Primary transfer roller - X Replace as needed.
4 Primary transfer belt - X Replace as needed.
drive gear
5 Primary transfer belt - O Clean with alcohol.
drive roller
follower roller
tension roller
8 Primary transfer idle - O Clean with alcohol.
roller
9 PTC opposed roller - O Clean with alcohol.
10 Transfer separation pawl -  Replace together with the primary
transfer belt.
11 Y auxiliary roller - O Clean with alcohol.
12 Primary transfer cleaner - X Replace as needed.
seals F/R
13 Primary transfer toner - X Replace as needed.
reception seal
15 Resist backup shaft - O Clean with alcohol.
16 Primary transfer cleaning - O
brush roller
17 Primary transfer cleaning - 
roller
18 Shatterproof seal - X Replace as needed.
Transfer PTC unit 19 Charger wire -  Do not touch the wire with bare hand.
section 20 PTC cleaner - 
21 PTC cleaner B - 
Registration 22 Image registration/ - O After the sensors were cleaned, never
sensor unit density sensor forget to execute Sim44-2 then execute
Sim46-74 “Copy color balance
adjustment”.
Secondary 24 Secondary transfer belt -  Never use alcohol or solvents for
transfer unit cleaning.
When replacing, apply CKOG-
0345DS51(Y toner).
25 Secondary transfer -  When 300K is reached, replace
cleaner blade together with the secondary transfer
belt.
26 Secondary transfer roller - X Replace as needed.
27 Secondary transfer idle - X Replace as needed.
gear
28 Secondary transfer belt - O Clean with alcohol.
drive roller
follower roller
30 Secondary transfer blade - O Clean with alcohol.
contact roller
31 Secondary transfer - O Clean with alcohol.
backup roller
32 Secondary transfer - O
cleaning brush roller
33 Secondary transfer - X Replace as needed.
cleaner seals F/R
34 Secondary transfer toner - X Replace as needed.
reception seal
Waste toner collection 1 Waste toner box X X Replacement reference: 100K under
section the standard environmental conditions
(20 - 25 degrees C 65 +/- 5%) at the
color ratio of "7 : 3 (Black : Color)" in
the print ratio 5% document mode.
Fusing Fusing unit 1 Fusing belt - 
section 2 Fusing roller -  When replacing, apply grease (UKOG-
0235FCZZ) to the shaft section.
3 Pressure roller -  When replacing, apply grease (UKOG-
0235FCZZ) to the shaft section.
4 Separation plate -  Clean when a foreign material is
attached.
5 Lower separation pawl -  Clean when a foreign material is
attached.
6 Meandering suppress - 
collar
7 Heating roller - 
8 Fusing roller bearing - 
9 Heating roller bearing - 
10 Pressure roller bearing - 
11 Heat-insulating bush -  When replacing, apply grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ) to the shaft section.
12 Pressure roller gear - 
13 24T Gear -  Packed in Pressure roller lit “MX-
750LH”
14 Main thermistor X X
15 Sub thermistor 1 X X
16 Sub thermistor 2 X X Replace or clean with alcohol as
needed.
17 Lower thermistor 1 X X
18 Lower thermistor 2 X X Replace or clean with alcohol as
needed.
20 Gears X X
21 Web roller - 
Fusing Fusing unit 22 Web guide shaft - 
section 23 Web pressure roller - 
24 Web pressure roller - 
bearing
25 Fusing paper exit - X
detector
26 Fusing front paper pass - X For the reflection-type sensor, the other
detector side must be also cleaned.
- Paper guides O O
- Fusing unit -  Replace at 300K when replacing the
unit.
Paper exit/ Right door 1 Transport roller 19 X O
reverse unit 2 Transport roller 20 X O
section 3 Transport roller 21 X O
5 Paper exit roller 2 X O
6 Discharge brush X X
Paper exit 8 Paper exit roller 1 X O
unit 9 Discharge brush X X
Drive Tandem 1 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as
section paper feed needed when checking.
drive unit 2 Belts - X
Paper feed 3 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as
drive unit needed when checking.
4 Belts - X
Transport 5 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as
drive unit needed when checking.
6 Belts - X
Main drive 7 Gears - X Apply greace (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
unit (BK) the specified position as needed when
checking.
8 Shaft earth sections - X Apply greace (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position as needed when
checking.
9 Belts - X
Main drive 11 Gears - X Apply greace (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
unit (CL) the specified position as needed when
checking.
12 Shaft earth sections - X Apply greace (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position as needed when
checking.
Other 14 Fusing motor - X Replace at the specified number of
rotations: about 2,300K.
Filter section 1 Deodorant filter X 
3 Ozone filter X 
4 UFP filter X  For Europe
5 VOC filter X  For Europe
Memo:
Note for cleaning the image registration/density sensor
In maintenance (DV/Drum) or in case of a service call (F2-78), clean the image registration/density sensors.
After the sensors were cleaned, never forget to execute Sim44-2 then execute Sim46-74 “Copy color balance adjustment”.
Greasing
Greasing is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases, check and grease.
• When there are some noises.
• When a lot of jams occur frequently. (Check the jam history.)
Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport system

Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport system is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases,
check and clean.
• When a trouble or a jam occurs due to a sensor or a detector. (Check the jam history.)
Torque limiter check and replacement

Torque limiter check and replacement is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases, check and replace.
• When there are some noises.
• When a lot of jams occur frequently. (Check the jam history.)
Alcohol for cleaning

Be sure to use ethanol for cleaning.
Cleaning of the primary transfer mode detector (CL/BK)

• When replacing the OPC drum, remove the primary transfer unit and the developing unit, and clean them.
• Blow air to the light emitting section and light receiving section to remove the attached toner.
• Blow air also when the sensor is wiped and cleaned with waste cloth.
A. DSPF section

Unit No. Maintenance parts Remark
Document feed 1 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
tray unit must be also cleaned.
Document feed 2 Document pickup roller O O Replace according to each paper feed counter
unit 3 Paper feed roller O O value: Replace at 100K or after one-year use.
4 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.
Lamp unit 5 Second scan section, O O
scanning glass
Optical unit 7 Mirror O O
8 Lens O O
9 CCD O O
DSPF unit 10 Separation roller O O Replace according to each paper feed counter
value: Replace at 100K or after one-year use.
11 Torque limiter X X Replace according to each paper feed counter
value: 800K
17 Paper exit roller O O
18 No. 1 scanning plate O O
19 No. 2 scanning section O O
white reference glass
20 Discharge brush X X Replacement reference:
When the brush bundle is remarkably deformed.
21 OC mat O O
Drive unit 23 Gears X X Apply to the specified position as needed when
checking. (UKOG-0299FCZZ)
24 Belts - X
Transport drive unit 25 Belts - X
22
10
12
22
13
14
4
11
3
2
22
20
1
18
22
19
15
4
16
8 17
21
9 22 25
7
23
24 23
7 25
6
5 24
24
23
B. Scanner section

Scanner unit 1 Table glass O O
2 SPF glass O O
3 Rails Apply to the specified position.
4 Drive belt X X
5 Drive wire X X
Lamp unit 7 Mirror O O
Mirror unit 9 Mirror O O
CCD unit 10 Lens O O
11 CCD O O
4
5
8
10
7 9
11
C. Tray paper feed section

Tandem paper feed 1 Paper pickup roller X O Replace according to each paper feed counter
tray 2 Paper feed roller X O value: Replace at 200K or after one-year use.
3 Separation roller X O
value: 800K
— Transport paper guides O O
Tray paper feed 6 Paper pickup roller X O Replace according to each paper feed counter
unit 7 Paper feed roller X O value: Replace at 100K or after one-year use.
value: 800K
Paper feed tray 13 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
1 2
3
4
5
1
2
10
7
12
5
4
3 6
13 9
12
8
11
10
7
13 12
9
12
8
11
D. Manual paper feed section

Manual paper feed 1 Paper pickup roller X O Replace according to each paper feed counter
unit 2 Paper feed roller X O value: Replace at 100K or after one-year use.
value: 800K
1
2
6
3
E. Paper transport section

Interface unit 1 Transport roller 6 X O
Right vertical 4 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
transport unit must be also cleaned.
Vertical transport 5 Transport roller 11 X O
unit 6 Transport roller 12 X O
LCC transport unit 8 Transport roller 14 X O
PS lower unit 12 Transport roller 13 X O
PS unit 13 Transport roller 17 X O
14 Registration roller (drive) X O
15 Registration roller (idle) X O
17 Paper dust removing unit O 
16
15 9
14
10
17
13
16
16
3
12
8
11
6
7
7
4
1 2
F. LSU section

LSU 1 Dust-proof glass X X Clean as needed.
LSU cleaning rod 2 Cleaning base X X
G. Toner supply section

1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. The storage period is 2 years.
H. Developing section

Developing unit 1 Developer X  Replace at 600K or at the specified rotation
(monochrome) number.
5 Bias pin X X
6 Connector X X
Developing unit 1 Developer X  Replace at 400K or at the specified rotation
(color) number.
5 Bias pin X X
6 Connector X X
3
5
6
I. OPC drum section

OPC drum unit 1 Drum -  Replace according to the drum counter value or
(monochrome) when the specified rotation number is reached.
2 Cleaner blade -  Recommendable to replace according to the
blade counter value or when the specified
rotation number is reached.
3 MC unit X 
6 Cleaning brush - X Check for clogging of the brush. If cleaning
cannot delete the trouble, replace.
7 DL unit - X Clean the DL protection cover of the light
(Discharge lamp unit) shielding surface as needed.
8 TCDL unit - X Clean the TCDL protection cover of the light
(After-transfer discharge lamp shielding surface as needed.
unit)
10 Process suction port moltopren X X Clean as needed.
OPC drum unit 1 Drum -  Replace according to the drum counter value or
(color) when the specified rotation number is reached.
2 Cleaner blade -  Recommendable to replace according to the
blade counter value or when the specified
rotation number is reached.
3 MC unit X 
6 Cleaning brush - X Check for clogging of the brush. If cleaning
cannot delete the trouble, replace.
7 DL unit - X Clean the DL protection cover of the light
(Discharge lamp unit) shielding surface as needed.
8 TCDL unit - X Clean the TCDL protection cover of the light
(After-transfer discharge lamp shielding surface as needed.
unit)
10 Process suction port moltopren X X Clean as needed.
1 4
2
10
J. Transfer section

Primary transfer 1 Primary transfer belt -  When replacing, apply CKOG-0345DS51(Y toner).
unit 2 Primary transfer cleaner -  When 300K is reached, replace together with the
blade primary transfer belt.
3 Primary transfer roller - X Replace as needed.
4 Primary transfer belt - X Replace as needed.
drive gear
drive roller
follower roller
tension roller
8 Primary transfer idle - O Clean with alcohol.
roller
9 PTC opposed roller - O Clean with alcohol.
10 Transfer separation pawl -  Replace together with the primary transfer belt.
11 Y auxiliary roller - O Clean with alcohol.
12 Primary transfer cleaner - X Replace as needed.
seals F/R
13 Primary transfer toner - X Replace as needed.
reception seal
14 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side must
be also cleaned.
15 Resist backup shaft - O Clean with alcohol.
16 Primary transfer cleaning - O
brush roller
17 Primary transfer cleaning - 
roller
18 Shatterproof seal - X Replace as needed.
PTC unit 19 Charger wire -  Do not touch the wire with bare hand.
20 PTC cleaner - 
21 PTC cleaner B - 
Registration 22 Image registration/ - O After the sensors were cleaned, never forget to
sensor unit density sensor execute Sim44-2 then execute Sim46-74 “Copy
color balance adjustment”.
23 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side must
be also cleaned.
Secondary 24 Secondary transfer belt -  Never use alcohol or solvents for cleaning.
transfer unit When replacing, apply CKOG-0345DS51(Y toner).
25 Secondary transfer -  When 300K is reached, replace together with the
cleaner blade secondary transfer belt.
26 Secondary transfer roller - X Replace as needed.
27 Secondary transfer idle - X Replace as needed.
gear
drive roller
follower roller
30 Secondary transfer blade - O Clean with alcohol.
contact roller
31 Secondary transfer - O Clean with alcohol.
backup roller
32 Secondary transfer - O
cleaning brush roller
33 Secondary transfer - X Replace as needed.
cleaner seals F/R
34 Secondary transfer toner - X Replace as needed.
reception seal
12
13
14
1
16
17
14
12
2
10
7
8
18
18
27
33
24
34
6
11
3 28
30
18 26
5
3
18 31
15
9 29
32
33
19 25
20
23
21
22
K. Waste toner collection section

1 Waste toner box X X Replacement reference: 100K
L. Fusing section

Fusing unit 1 Fusing belt - 
2 Fusing roller -  When replacing, apply grease
(UKOG-0235FCZZ) to the shaft section.
3 Pressure roller -  When replacing, apply grease
4 Separation plate -  Clean when a foreign material is attached.
5 Lower separation pawl -  Clean when a foreign material is attached.
6 Meandering suppress collar - 
7 Heating roller - 
8 Fusing roller bearing - 
9 Heating roller bearing - 
10 Pressure roller bearing - 
11 Heat-insulating bush -  When replacing, apply grease
12 Pressure roller gear - 
13 24T Gear -  Packed in Pressure roller lit “MX-750LH”
14 Main thermistor X X
15 Sub thermistor 1 X X
16 Sub thermistor 2 X X Replace or clean with alcohol as needed.
17 Lower thermistor 1 X X
18 Lower thermistor 2 X X Replace or clean with alcohol as needed.
20 Gears X X Apply to the specified position.
21 Web roller - 
22 Web guide shaft - 
23 Web pressure roller - 
24 Web pressure roller bearing - 
25 Fusing paper exit detector - 
26 Fusing front paper pass detector -  For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
27 Sensors -  For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
- Paper guides - 
- Fusing unit -  Replace at 300K when replacing the unit.
9
6 11
25
16
1
19
7
14
2 8
13
15 12
6 10
9
24
27
23
5
11 21
8 26
4 17
3 10 18 22 24
27
M. Paper exit/reverse section

Right door unit 1 Transport roller 19 X O
5 Paper exit roller 2 X O
Paper exit unit 8 Paper exit roller 1 X O
10
5
6
7
6
1
N. Drive section

Tandem paper feed 1 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as needed when
drive unit checking.
2 Belts - X
Paper feed drive 3 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as needed when
unit checking.
4 Belts - X
Transport drive unit 5 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as needed when
checking.
6 Belts - X
Main drive unit 7 Gears - X Apply greace (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to the
(BK) specified position as needed when checking.
8 Shaft earth sections - X Apply greace (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to the
specified position as needed when checking.
9 Belts - X
Main drive unit 11 Gears - X Apply greace (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to the
(CL) specified position as needed when checking.
12 Shaft earth sections - X Apply greace (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to the
specified position as needed when checking.
Other 14 Fusing motor - X Replace at the specified number of rotations:
about 2,300K.
13
12
13
12
13 2
9
8 12
10
14
2
6
2
O. Filter section

1 Deodorant filter X 
3 Ozone filter X 
4 UFP filter X  For Europe
5 VOC filter X  For Europe
5 2
4
3
MX-7580N
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Service Manual
1. Disassembly of Units
A. External view section (1) Upper cabinet rear cover
1) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
No. Name
1 Upper cabinet rear cover
2 Rear cabinet
3 Right cabinet rear
4 Upper cabinet front right
5 Upper cabinet front left
6 Upper cabinet left
7 Upper cabinet right
8 Front cover
9 Right lower door
10 Right cabinet lower 1
11 Right lower door cover
12 Left cabinet rear
13 Left cabinet upper 1 2
14 Toner cover
15 Paper exit tray
16 Paper exit tray rear connection cabinet (2) Rear cabinet
1) Loosen the screw at the bottom of the rear cabinet, and
remove the rear cabinet.
15
16
5 7
14
2
3
8 2 3
4
11 2
10 2
2 1
(3) Right cabinet rear

1
6 1) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet rear.
2 13
12
2
MX-7580N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

(4) Upper cabinet front right (7) Upper cabinet right
1) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet front right. 1) Open the right door.
Disconnect the connector from the USB I/F PWB. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right.
1
2
2
1
3 3
1
(8) Front cover

1) Remove the band. Side the shaft, and remove the front cover.
(5) Upper cabinet front left 2 2

1) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet front left.
1 1
2
1
1
(6) Upper cabinet left (9) Right lower door, Right cabinet lower
1) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet left. 1) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the right lower door.
1
2

2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. (11) Left cabinet rear
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet rear.
2 2
1 1
4 3
4
3
(12) Left cabinet upper

3) Remove the screw, and right cabinet lower. 1) Open the front cover.
2) Open the tandem paper feed tray.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet upper.
1
1
(10) Right lower door cover

1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray, paper feed tray.
2) Open the right lower door.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right lower door cover.
(13) Toner cover, Paper exit tray,
Paper exit tray rear connection cabinet
1) Open the toner cover. Remove the resin E-ring, and remove
the toner cover.
1
1
2
1
2

2) Remove the paper holding arm, and remove the actuator. B. Operation panel section
No. Name
1 Operation panel unit
1
2
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray. (1) Operation panel unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet front right.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
2
1
2
1
4) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray rear con-
nection cabinet.
3) Disconnect the connector of the operation panel unit, and

2 remove the harness from the wire saddle.
1
2 2
2

4) Remove the screws, and remove the cabinet. C. DSPF section
No. Name
1 DSPF unit
2 Front cabinet
3 Rear cabinet upper
4 Upper door unit
5 Document feed tray
6 Paper feed unit
7 Lamp unit
8 Optical unit
9 Delivery drive unit
1 10 Paper feed drive unit
11 DSPF control PWB
2
4 3
1
5) Remove the screw, and remove the operation panel unit.
1
1
2
2 5
10
6
9
1
8
11
(1) DSPF unit

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Disconnect the
connector from the SCN Mother PWB.
2
1

3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate. 2) Remove the front cabinet.
ĭ
2
3
1 4
(3) Rear cabinet upper

1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw, and remove the rear
cabinet.
4) Remove the screws, and remove the DSPF unit from the
machine.
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ (4) Upper door unit

1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the sprig. Remove the pressure release axis holder
and the screw, and remove the pressure release link lever.
4 2
(2) Front cabinet

1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.
1
3

3) Remove the screw and remove the paper feed cover. 3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
document feed tray.
ĭ
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle and remove

the snap band.
(6) Paper feed unit

2) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
3) Remove the screw and remove the paper feed cover.
ĭ
ĭ
į Ĭ
4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle and remove

5) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the upper door unit.
the snap band.
1 ĭ
Ĭ
(5) Document feed tray

5) Remove the screw, and remove the document feed unit. 5) Open the lower door. Remove the screw, and remove the ful-
crum plate. Remove the lower door.
1
2 1
3
2
(7) Lamp unit

3) Open the OC mat. 6) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate. Remove the
white reference plate.
4) Disconnect the connector for lamp unit from the CONTROL

PWB 7) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp unit.

(8) Optical unit (9) Delivery drive unit
1) Remove the upper door. 1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
2) Remove the lamp unit. 2) Disconnect the connector and open the edge saddle. Remove
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide. the snap band.
2 Į
Ĭ
Ĭ
4) Remove the CCD FFC from the CCD PWB.
3) Remove the screws and the drive unit.
When attaching the delivery drive unit, tighten the screw in the
order of (1) - (3).
5) Remove the screw, and remove the optical fixing plate.

Remove the optical unit.
Ĭ
ĭ
3
2
1 2

(10) Paper feed drive unit a. Attachment of belts
1) Remove the rear cabinet upper. 1) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw while applying tension.
2) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the harness from the wire
saddle.
Ĭ
ĭ
3) Remove resign E-ring, separation clutch and transport clutch.

NOTE: make sure that stopping section in the clutch is fit into
the plate during the assembly. 2) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw again after reapplying
tension in the direction of the arrow.
ĭ ĭ
4) Remove screws and the paper feed drive unit.

(11) DSPF control PWB D. Scanner section
1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
No. Name
2) Remove the rear cabinet lower.
1 Scanner unit
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ (1) Scanner unit

1) Remove the DSPF unit.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove 2) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and remove the rear
the DSPF control PWB. cabinet.
3) Remove the left cabinet rear.
4) Remove the upper cabinet front right, upper cabinet front left,
upper cabinet left, and the upper cabinet right.
5) Remove the snap band. Remove the step screw, and remove
ĭ
the duct unit.
Ĭ
ĭ 1
Ĭ 1
ĭ
1 3
Ĭ
6) Remove the screw, and open the high voltage MC PWB

mounting plate downward.
1 1

7) Disconnect the connector from PCI interface PWB, and E. Tray paper feed section
remove the snap band.
No. Name
3 3 1 Tandem paper feed tray
2 Paper feed tray
3 Tray paper feed unit
4 2
3 1
2 3
8) Remove the screw and the snap band, and remove the docu-
ment detection unit.
(1) Tandem paper feed tray

1 1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray.
3
9) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the scanner
unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the tandem paper feed tray.
1
2
1
2
2
1 1 2 1
1

(2) Paper feed tray F. Manual paper feed section
1) Pull out the paper feed tray, and lift and remove it.
No. Name
1 Manual paper feed tray
2 Manual paper feed unit
(3) Tray paper feed unit 2

1) Remove the right vertical transport unit. 1
2) Remove the right lower door cover.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum, and the paper
guide.
(1) Manual paper feed tray

1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the right door rear cabinet.
2
1
3
2
1
1
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the

tray paper feed unit.
1
2
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right door front cabinet
lower.
1
3
1 2

4) Remove the cover. Disconnect the connector. G. Paper transport section
1 No. Name
1 Interface unit
2 Right vertical transport unit
3 Vertical transport unit
4 LCC transport unit
5 PS lower unit
6 PS unit
7 Paper dust cleaner unit
7
6
5
5) Remove the shaft. Remove the screw, and remove the manual 1
paper feed tray. 4
3
2
2
3
(1) Interface unit
2 1) Remove the tandem paper feed tray.
2) Remove the front cover.
1
interface unit.
3
(2) Manual paper feed unit
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
manual paper feed unit.
1
3 3 1
2
4
3
1

(2) Right vertical transport unit (4) LCC transport unit
1) Remove the waste toner bottle. 1) Remove the right lower door and the right cabinet lower.
2) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the right vertical trans- 2) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the LCC
port unit. transport unit.
2
3
1
2
(3) Vertical transport unit (5) PS lower unit

1) Remove the right vertical transport unit. 1) Remove the LCC transport unit.
2) Open the right door unit. 2) Remove the PS unit.
3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 3) Remove the screw, and remove the PS lower unit.
vertical transport unit.
1
1 1
2 3 2
1

(6) PS unit H. LSU section
1) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
No. Name
1 LSU
3) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
nector.
3 1
3
4) Remove the screw, and slide the PS unit to the front side and (1) LSU
remove it.
1) Remove the left cabinet upper.
2 1
1 2
1
1
3) Disconnect the connector from LSU. Remove the screw, and
pull out the LSU.
(7) Paper dust cleaner unit

1) Open the front cover.
2) Pull out and remove the paper dust removing unit. 3
1
1

Note for disassembling the LSUcnt PWB I. Toner supply section
Do not hold the right and left edges of the LSUcnt PWB when dis-
assembling. No. Name
1 Toner cartridge
* The board may be warped, resulting in solder separation of built-
in parts.
NG
Be sure to hold the upper and lower edges of the LSUcnt PWB
when disassembling.
(1) Toner cartridge

1) Open the cover.
OK
Note for assembling the LSUcnt PWB
When connecting in board-to-board, press these points to engage.
2) Pull out and remove the toner cartridge.

CAUTION: When assembling, do not push abruptly. Insert slowly
and horizontally with your hand on it until it is inserted to
the bottom.
CAUTION: Do not install a toner cartridge of a different color. Be
sure to install a toner cartridge of the same color.
Y
M
C
BK

J. Developing section 3) Remove the screw of the positioning unit. Check to confirm
that the arrow marks of the positioning release button are
No. Name aligned together, and push the positioning release button to
1 Development unit open the positioning unit.
CAUTION: Remove the screw of the positioning unit. Check to con-
firm that the arrow marks of the positioning release but-
ton are aligned together, and push the positioning
release button to open the positioning unit.
If the operation is executed without aligning the arrow
marks of the positioning release button, the primary
transfer belt may be damaged.
1
2 3
(1) Development unit 1

4) Release the lock, and pull out the developing unit and remove
it.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning shaft.
2
1
2
1
2 CAUTION: If the drum unit is abruptly inserted, developer may
1 splash. Insert slowly and horizontally by putting your
1 hand on it.
CAUTION: Always keep the DV unit with developer in it horizontal
when handling.
Since this unit employs the developer refresh method, if
the DV unit is tilted, developer may fall into the waste
toner transport section because of its structure.

CAUTION: When installing the DV unit, check if the lock is certainly Note for installing the OPC drum unit
“Unlocked” as a figure below and insert the unit to the CAUTION: Fit the marks a shown below to insert.
main unit and then lock the lock lever.
CAUTION: Check that the bottom of the OPC drum unit is engaged
8QORFNHG /RFNHG in the machine rail before insertion.
K. OPC drum section

No. Name
1 OPC drum unit
(1) OPC drum unit

1) Remove the developing unit.
2) Release the lock, and pull out the OPC drum unit and remove
it. L. Transfer section
No. Name
1 Primary transfer unit
2 PTC unit
3 Registration sensor unit
4 Secondary transfer unit
3
1
4
(1) Primary transfer unit


2) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning shaft. CAUTION: Press the positioning release button securely before
opening the positioning unit.
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
4) Remove the screw, and pull out the primary transfer unit and
3) Remove the screw of the positioning unit. Check to confirm remove it.
that the arrow marks of the positioning release button are
aligned together, and push the positioning release button to
open the positioning unit. 2
CAUTION: When the power is turned OFF normally, the arrow
marks of the positioning release button are aligned. If,
however, the power is abruptly interrupted such as pull-
ing the power cord during operation, the arrow marks
may not be aligned. In such a case, turn the positioning
release button clockwise to align the arrow marks. 1
1
2 3
(2) PTC unit

1) Open the positioning unit.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the PTC unit.
1

(3) Registration sensor unit M. Tone hopper section
1) Remove the developing unit (BK).
No. Name
2) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK).
1 Tone hopper unit
3) Remove the primary transfer unit.
4) Remove the PTC unit. 1) Remove the toner cartridge.
5) Remove the PS unit. 2) Remove the developing unit.
6) Disconnect the connector on the registration sensor. Remove 3) Remove the OPC drum unit.
the screw, and remove the registration sensor unit. 4) Remove the primary transfer unit.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the front frame bottle cover.
(1) Hopper cover unit

(4) Secondary transfer unit
1) To remove only the hopper cover unit, remove the screw, pull
the cover toward the front side, and lift the right side of the unit
2) Remove the screw, turn the secondary transfer unit by 90 to to remove.
remove it to the rear side.
2
3
㽲
CAUTION: When attaching the cover, insert the pawls (4 positions)

on the left side of the cover securely.

(2) Hopper unit N. Waste toner collection section
1) Disconnect the connector (2 positions).
No. Name
1 Waste toner bottle
2 Positioning unit (Waste toner collection)
3 Waste toner transport unit
2) Remove the screw (3 pcs.).

1
CAUTION: When removing the screw, be careful not to hit the drum
drive shaft.
If the drum shaft is bent by applying a stress to it, the
picture quality may be affected.
(1) Waste toner bottle

1) Open the right lower door. Remove the waste toner bottle.
CAUTION: When removing the waste toner bottle or when attach-
ing the bottle cap, be careful of dirt on the waste toner
bottle.
3) Pull the unit to the front side, lift it upward, and remove the unit.
CAUTION: When attaching the unit, insert the boss at the back of
the pipe securely before tightening the screw.
4) When a new unit is installed, execute HP_K - Y of SIM24-5 to
clear the remaining quantity counter.
5) The hopper motor and the remaining quantity sensor can be
checked with SIM10-1 and 10-2.
When a new unit is installed, if the name of sensor correspond-
ing to SIM10-2 is highlighted in black, it may be connection fail-
ure of the connector.

CAUTION: Since the removed waste toner bottle is dirty, attach the 3) Remove the screw of the positioning unit. Check to confirm
bottle cap to it and put in the package of the spare that the arrow marks of the positioning release button are
waste toner bottle. aligned together, and push the positioning release button to
open the positioning unit.
CAUTION: When the power is turned OFF normally, the arrow
marks of the positioning release button are aligned. If,
however, the power is abruptly interrupted such as pull-
ing the power cord during operation, the arrow marks
may not be aligned. In such a case, turn the positioning
release button clockwise to align the arrow marks.
2 3
(2) Positioning unit (Waste toner collection)

1
CAUTION: Press the positioning release button securely before

opening the positioning unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning shaft.
2
1
2
1
2
1
1

4) Remove the front cover and the left cabinet. 9) Close the positioning unit. Remove the screw, and open the
5) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. positioning unit again.
3
2
1
4
1
3
3 2
3 10) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning unit.

6) Remove the screws, the plate and the bearing. CAUTION: When the positioning unit is installed, the hook of the
positioning unit is jumped by the spring. Therefore,
press the unit downward with your fingers to engage it
with the main body and install.

7) Remove the screw and the snap band and the E-ring and the
bearing, and remove the gear cover. 1
1 2
4
1
1
(3) Waste toner transport unit
3
1) Remove the LCC transport unit.
2) Remove the positioning unit.
5
1 3) Remove the snap band. Disconnect the connector from waste
toner transport unit. Remove the screw, and remove the waste
toner transport unit.
2
6
2
1
3
1

O. Fusing section The pressure lever is in front of the dotted line section.
(No pressure is applied.)
No. Name
1 Fusing unit
The pressure lever is over the dotted line section.

(A pressure is applied.)
(1) Fusing unit

2) Release the lock. Remove the screw, and pull out the fusing
unit to the right side.
3) Lift the front side of the fusing unit, store the rail in the front
side, then hold the handle of the unit to remove. [For MX-RB14, LC13 installed]
1) Remove the cap from the top screw.
2) Remove the screw (x3).
3) Remove the left top cover.
1
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
2
3 2
Check to confirm that the fusing pressure is released.

If the pressure is not released, the fusing unit cannot be
removed.

P. Paper exit/Reverse section 3) Remove the screw, and remove the right door upper cabinet
and the right door front cabinet.
No. Name
1 Right door unit 1
2 Paper exit unit
2
2
1
4) Remove the screw. Remove the rail from step screw, and
remove the right door unit.
(1) Right door unit
1) Release the lock. Open the right door unit. 2
2 2
1 1
2) Remove the waste toner tray.

(2) Paper exit unit Q. Drive section
1) Remove the fusing unit.
No. Name
2) Remove the paper holding arm and the actuator.
1 Tandem paper feed drive unit
2 Paper feed drive unit
3 Transport drive unit
4 Main drive unit (BK), Main drive unit (CL)
5 Toner transport drive unit
4
4
1 1
2
3
2
(1) Tandem paper feed drive unit

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and the rear cabinet.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw and open the
PCU PWB mounting plate.
1
2
1
2 1
2
1
2

1
2
paper exit unit.
3 1
2 1
2 1
2
2
1
2
1 1 2

3) Remove the resin ring, and remove the belt, and remove the (2) Paper feed drive unit
pulley. Remove the screw, and remove the plate. 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and the rear cabinet.
5
3
2
1 1
1
4) Remove the resin ring, and remove the belt, and remove the
pulley. Remove the resin ring, and remove the pulley, and
remove the belt. Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
2 2
1
3) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame.
6
5
4
7 1
1
8

tandem paper feed drive unit.
3 2
2 2

speaker mounting plate.
2 2
1
2
2 2 1

5) Remove the screw, and remove the angle. 8) Remove the resin ring, and remove the belt, and remove the
pulley. Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
2
1
1
5

2 paper feed drive unit.
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PCU harness from 2 2

saddle. Remove the screw, and remove the high voltage 2TC
PWB mounting plate.
1
1 1 1
1
3
1
2
2 2
1
2
1
(3) Transport drive unit

1 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and the rear cabinet.
3
7) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and open the mounting plate downward.
PCU PWB mounting plate.
1
2
1 1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2 1
2 1
2
2
2
2
2

3) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit 6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PCU harness from
upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame. saddle. Remove the screw, and remove the high voltage 2TC
PWB mounting plate.
1 1
1
1
2
1 2
1
3
2
pulley. Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
3
5
3
2
speaker mounting plate.
1
pulley.
2 2 1
3
3
2
1
5) Remove the screw, and remove the angle.

9) Disconnect the connector, and remove the clamp. Remove the
screw, and remove the transport drive unit.
3 3
1
1
4
3 3

(4) Main drive unit (BK), Main drive unit (CL) 9) Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel.
1) Remove the primary transfer unit.
2) Remove the developing unit.
3) Remove the process unit.
4) Remove the PTC unit. 2
5) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and the rear cabinet. 2
6) Disconnect the connector.
10) Disconnect the connector, and remove snap band.

2
1
2
1 1
1
2
11) Disconnect the connector. Open the clamp, and set the har-
ness free.
1
1

12) Remove the screw, and pull out the main drive unit (BK). (5) Toner transport drive unit
2
1
1 1
1 2
3) Remove the screw.

13) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and pull out the
main drive unit (CL).
1 1
3
2
2
1
2 2
1

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the clamp. Remove the R. PWB section
screw, and remove the HL-TC1 PWB mounting plate.
No. Name
1 HL control PWB
2 SCN Mother PWB
3 High voltage 1TC PWB
4 High voltage MC PWB
5 SUB AC POWER PWB
6 SUB DC POWER PWB
7 AC POWER PWB
8 DC POWER PWB
9 PCU PWB
1 10 Driver PWB
11 High voltage 2TC PWB
12 MFP control PWB
13 HDD
2 1
1

toner transport drive unit.
2 2 3 2 2
1
3
2
4
2
13
12 5
1 6
11
10
1
7
10
9
(1) HL control PWB, High voltage 1TC PWB

1 1

3) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit (2) SCN Mother PWB
upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame. 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and the rear cabinet.
1 1
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 3) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
HL control PWB. upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame.
2 3 2
1
1
1
2 1 2

high voltage 1TC PWB. 2
2 3 2 1 2
3
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.

Remove the screw, and remove the PCI support plate.
3 3
2 2 2
1 1
2
4 2

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Disconnect (4) SUB AC POWER PWB, DC POWER PWB
the connector, and remove the SCN Mother PWB. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
CAUTION: Since the MFP control PWB and the SCN Mother PWB 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
are connected in board to board, be careful when disas- PCU PWB mounting plate.
sembling and assembling.
1
2
2 1 1 2
1
1
1
2
2
3 1
2 1
2
2 1 2
1 4 1
2
1
2 1
2 1
2
2
2
(3) High voltage MC PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet. 3
high voltage MC PWB.
2
3
earth terminal. Remove the screw, and remove the AC cord
2 2 2
mounting plate.
1
1
2 2 2
3
2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5
4
3
2

4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 7) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
duct unit. SUB AC POWER PWB.
3 2 1 2
2
1
1
2
1
2 2

5) Disconnect the connector. DC POWER PWB.
2 1 2 1 2
2 2
1
2 2 2 2
(5) SUB DC POWER PWB

SUB DC POWER PWB.
6) Remove the harness from saddle, and remove the snap band.
Remove the screw, and remove the AC PWB mounting plate. 2 3 2
2
1
3
1
2
2 2
2 2
2ࠉ 2ࠉ 2
2
(6) AC POWER PWB

2 AC POWER PWB.
2 1 3 1 2
2
1 1 2
2
2
1 1 1 2

(7) PCU PWB 3) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
1) Remove the rear cabinet. upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from sad-
dle. Remove the screw, and remove the PCU PWB.
2 3 1 3 1 3
1 1 1
3 3 1
1
1
4 1
2
3 1 3 1 3
(8) Driver PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet. 4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from sad- speaker mounting plate.
dle. Remove the screw, and remove the driver PWB.
3
3
1
1
3 3
2 2 1
1
1
4
3
3 3
1
(9) High voltage 2TC PWB

5) Remove the screw, and remove the angle.
1 1

6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the clamp. Remove the 3) Disconnect the connector from MFP control PWB. Remove the
screw, and remove the FAX PWB unit. screw, and remove the MFP control PWB.
1
1
2
2
3 2 1 2
2
3
4 2
2
2 2
3
2

high voltage 2TC PWB.
1 1 2 1
2 2
4) Disconnect the connector from HDD. Remove the screw, and

2 2 remove the HDD unit.
3
3
2
2 1 2 2 2
(10) MFP control PWB, HDD

1) Remove the right cabinet rear.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP control unit.
1
5) Remove the screw from HDD, and remove the angle.
1
1 2
2 3
4
1
1 3
4
5

2. Maintenance (2) Lamp unit
A. DSPF section a. Second scan section scanning glass, scanner lamp
1) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp mounting plate.
(1) Document feed unit
a. Document pickup roller, Paper feed roller 1
1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed cover.
1
2
2) Remove the paper feed PG upper cover. 2) Clean the second scan section scanning glass.
3) Remove the pickup roller holder. Remove the document 3) Clean the scanner lamp.
pickup roller from the pickup roller holder.
4) Remove the paper feed roller.

(3) Optical unit 3) Clean the lens and CCD.
a. Mirror
1) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.
1 2
(4) DSPF unit

a. Separation roller
1) Remove the document feed unit.
2) Clean the mirror.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed PG lower
cover.
2
1
3) Remove the revere pressure release lever, and remove the

separation roller.
b. Lens, CCD
1) Remove the screw, and remove the dark box. Remove the
dust-proof cover.
1
1
2 3 2
b. Torque limiter
2) Remove the drive unit.
3) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the No. 1 registration
roller (Idle).
2) Remove the lens cover.

2

4) Remove the screw. Lift the document paper feed tray and d. Transport roller 1
remove the paper guide. 1) Open the upper door unit.
1 2) Clean the transport roller 1.
1
1
3
2
2
2
5) Remove the screw, and remove the support plate and the
bearing. Remove the roller shaft, and remove the torque lim-
iter. e. No. 2 registration roller
4
3) Remove the screw, and remove the left rear lower cabinet.
3
2
1
5
c. No. 1 registration roller 4) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the PS knob.
2
2) Clean the No. 1 registration roller.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide.

Clean the No. 2 registration roller.
1
2
3
4

f. Paper exit roller, discharge brush h. Second scan section white reference glass, transport roller
1) Remove the document feed tray. 2, transport roller 3
2) Clean the paper exit roller. 1) Open the OC mat.
3) Check the discharge brush. 2) Open the lower door. Remove the screw, and remove the ful-
CAUTION: when replacing the discharge brush, attach to the crum plate. Remove the lower door.
attachment reference.
2 1
3
g. OC mat, No. 1 scan plate

3) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate. Remove the
1) Open the DSPF unit.
white reference plate.
2) Clean the OC mat and No. 1 scan plate.

4) Use cleaner to clean the second scan section white reference b. Rails
glass. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Apply grease to each rail.
CAUTION: Be careful not to apply grease to the drive wire.
If grease is attached to the drive wire, clean it deliber-
ately.
5) Clean the transport roller 2 and transport roller 3.
c. Drive belt, Drive wire

1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension of the wire belt and the drive wire.
Also check to confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley
section is tightly wound without clearance.
B. Scanner section
(1) Scanner unit
a. Table glass, SPF glass
1) Remove the screw, and remove the glass holder. Remove the
table glass. Remove the screw, and remove the SPF glass.
Clean the table glass and SPF glass.
5 1

CAUTION: Set and fix the drive wires in the sequence of 1 - 7 as b. Scanner lamp
shown below. 1) Turn over the sheet.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the
CAUTION: When attaching the sheet to the original position, insert
mirror unit to the vicinity of the home position. Wind the
the L-shape sections into the inside of the metal plate
wire seven turns as shown in the figure, and fix the
and attach the center portion to the metal plate with
eighth turn section with the screw. Then wind two turns
double-stick tape.
furthermore around the pulley.
7
6
4 2
5
1
7
6
4 1 7 8 9 10
5 2) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp guide. Disconnect

the connector from the LED driver PWB.
2
1 1
3
10 9 8 7 1
1
2
3
(2) Lamp unit
a. Mirror, reflector
1) Clean the mirror and the reflector.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the light guide plate and the
scanner lamp. Disconnect the connector from the scanner
lamp.
1 Clean the scanner lamp.
1 2
2
3

(3) Mirror unit C. Tray paper feed section
1) Remove the table glass. (1) Tandem paper feed tray
2) Clean the mirror.
a. Paper pickup roller, Paper feed roller
1) Remove the paper guide.
(4) CCD unit

a. Lens, CCD
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the dark box.
1 2) Lift the tandem paper feed. Remove the paper pickup roller
and the paper feed roller.
1
2
3 2
1 3
3) Clean the lens and CCD.
1 b. Separation roller

2) Remove the separation roller. (2) Tray paper feed unit
a. Paper pickup roller, Paper feed roller
1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Remove the paper guide.
c. Torque limiter 3) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
1 2
2) Remove the screw, and remove the separation roller. b. Separation roller
1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Remove the separation roller.
1
2
3) Remove the torque limiter.

c. Transport roller 9/10, Transport roller 2/3 2) Remove the spring. Remove the screw, and remove the rein-
1) Remove the E-ring, the gear, the parallel pin, and the baring. forcement plate. Remove the lever.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed lower unit.
2
2
3
5 6
4 1
3 2
2
1
4
6 5
2) Clean the transport roller 9/10 and the transport roller 2/3.
3) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring.
1
2
d. Torque limiter 1
1) Remove the E-ring, the gear, the parallel pin, and the baring.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed lower unit.
4) Shift the separation shaft, remove the bearing, and remove the
separation shaft.
5 6
4
3 2
1
3
7
2
1

5) Remove the E-ring and the coupling. Remove the separation 3) Remove the cover. Remove the separation roller.
shaft, and remove the torque limiter.
2
1
4
b. Torque limiter
1) Remove the screw, and remove the reinforcement plate.
D. Manual paper feed section Remove the spring.
(1) Manual paper feed unit
1
a. Paper pickup roller, Paper feed roller, Separation roller
1) Remove the cover. 1
2) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
2) Remove the E-ring, and slide the shaft. Remove the torque
limitter.
2 3
1
2

c. Transport roller 8 E. Paper transport section
1) Remove the cover.
(1) Interface unit
a. Transport roller 6, Transport roller7
1) Clean the transport roller 6 and the transport roller 7.
(2) Vertical transport unit

a. Transport roller 11, Transport roller 12
1) Clean the transport roller 11 and the transport roller 12.
2

Clean the transport roller 8
1 (3) LCC transport unit

a. Transport roller 14, Transport roller 15, Transport roller 16
1) Clean the transport roller 14 and the transport roller 15 and the
transport roller 16.
2
3

(4) PS lower unit F. LSU section
a. Transport roller 13 (1) LSU
1) Clean the transport roller 13.
a. Dust-proof glass
2) Insert the LSU cleaning rod into the LSU cleaning hole with the
cleaning base faced downward, and clean the dust-proof
glass.
(5) PS unit
a. Transport roller 17
(2) LSU cleaning rod

a. Cleaning base
2) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cover.
b. Registration roller (Drive), Registration roller (Idle)
1) Clean the registration roller (Drive) and the registration roller
(Idle).
3) Remove the cleaning base from the lead edge of the LSU
cleaning rod.

G. Developing section 3. Check to confirm that three convex portions are securely
engaged.
(1) Development unit
a. Developer
CAUTION: Always keep the DV unit with developer in it horizontal
when handling.
Since this unit employs the developer refresh method, if
the DV unit is tilted, developer may fall into the waste
toner transport section because of its structure.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.
1
2) Discharge old developer from the DV unit.
CAUTION: When discharging developer, rotate the coupling pulley
in the rear side of the DV unit in the arrow direction
while the operation.
1
2
[Note for attaching the DV cover]

When attaching the DV cover, be careful of the following items:
1. Insert the convex portion in the angle shown below.
3) Supply new developer into the DV unit.

CAUTION: When supplying developer, rotate the coupling pulley in
the rear side of the DV unit in the arrow direction while
the operation.
2. Turn the cover to attach.

b. DV blade d. Toner filter
1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor cover. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the filter cover. Remove the fil-
CAUTION: When installing, check to confirm that the hook of the ter holder.
DV doctor cover is securely engaged with the position-
ing boss. 1
2
1
2
1
2) Check the DV blade.

CAUTION: When replacing the DV blade, attach it to the attach-
ment reference.
CAUTION: After attaching the DV blade, check the DV blade for CAUTION: When attaching the filter cover, do not rotate but attach
any deformation or wavering. straight from the top. (See the figure below.)
OK
Wall surface reference

Rib reference
0mm 0.3mm
0.5mm
0mm
c. DV side seals F/R

1) Check the DV side seals F/R.
CAUTION: When replacing the DV side seals F/R, attach them to
the attachment references.
CAUTION: When attaching the DV side seals F/R, be careful not to
cover the DV blade with the DV side seals.
DV BOX edge
Mark-off line reference
inside reference
0.3mm 0mm
0mm 0.3mm
Edge reference
Edge reference
0.3mm
0mm 0.3mm
0mm

2) After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the
NG black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the
OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic
acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.
H. OPC drum section

• Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends
(1) OPC drum unit (5mm) of the OPC drum.
a. Drum • Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above
1) Release the lock, and remove the drum. the black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.
CAUTION: Since the drum has directional property, be careful not NOTE: When installing the drum, push the drum after inserting the
to mistake the installing direction when installing. F-side drum flange into the Process UN so as not to
reverse the fiber flow of the side seal F.
"F" mark is put on the drum front side.
NG
Side seal F
1) Before inserting the F-side drum flange into the pro-

cess UN,
2) slide it sideways to deform the fiber flow of the side
seal.
CAUTION: When the OPC drum is removed, perform the following
procedures. fiber flow
1) After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder NG
(UKOG-0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum.
Side seal F
Hit the edge of the moquette

c. DL unit, Cleaner blade
1) Remove the MC unit.
OK 2) Remove the drum.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the MC cover.
ĭ 1
Ĭ
2
1) After inserting the F-side drum flange into the process

UN,
2) push the drum.
fiber flow
OK
Side seal F
4) Remove the DL unit, and disconnect the connector from the

DL unit.
１
CAUTION: When installing, check to confirm that the hook of the
DL unit is securely engaged with the positioning boss.
２
1
b. MC unit 2
1) Remove the drum.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the MC unit.
* When removing the MC unit only, there is no need to remove
the drum.
1 2
CAUTION: Arrange the harness as shown below.

1) Bend the harness as shown below.

When attaching the cover, refer to the figure below. d. TCDL unit, Toner reception sheet, Side seals F/R
1) Remove the MC unit.
OK 2) Remove the drum.
3) Remove the harness cover.
NG
4) Remove the screw, and remove the TCDL unit. Disconnect the
connector from the TCDL unit.
CAUTION: When the side seals F and R and the toner reception
sheet are replaced, this procedure is not required.
2
5) Remove the screw, hold the projection of the cleaner blade,
and remove it. 1
3
1
2

5) Check the toner reception sheet. e. Cleaning brush
CAUTION: When replacing the toner reception sheet, attach it to 1) Remove the MC unit.
the attachment reference of the toner reception cover. 2) Remove the drum.
CAUTION: When replacing the toner reception sheet, it is not 3) Remove the side seals R.
required to remove the toner reception cover. 4) Remove the screw, and remove the plate and the gear.
Difference-in-level
0.5mm 0mm
reference
0mm 0.5mm
3
Difference-in-level reference
1
6) Check the side seals F/R. 5) Remove the screw, and remove the cleaning brush.
CAUTION: When replacing the side seals F and R, it is not required
to remove the toner reception cover.
CAUTION: When there is a clearance in the edge section of the
side seals after replacing the blade and when the side
2
seal is replaced, attach the seal to the attachment refer-
ence.
Also attach so that the rubber section of the cleaner
blade does not interfere with the side seal when the rub-
ber section is pushed in.
Be careful not to step on the toner reception sheet. Especially
when the side seals are replaced without changing the toner
reception sheet, turn over the toner reception sheet and attach
the seals as shown in the figure below.
Toner reception Toner reception

cover edge reference cover edge reference 1
+0 +0
+0.2mm +0.2mm
(Attach along it.) (Attach along it.)
㽲
㽳
6) Remove the coupling and the bearing from the cleaning brush.
Blade edge reference Blade edge reference
+0mm +0mm
+0.2mm +0.2mm
Sample of attachment
Side seal R PO Side seal F PO
3
2
1
* When attaching the side moltopren, attach it by pushing
it onto the side of the toner reception cover.

Note for servicing the OPC drums I. Transfer section
1. Prevent contamination
(1) Primary transfer unit
Note
a. Transfer separation pawl
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.) 1) Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the sepa-
ration pawl and the spring from the holder.
• When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet. CAUTION: When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care the transfer belt with the separation pawl.
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade
may flip.)
Countermeasures
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures. 4
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt. 2 3
2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.
1
Check method
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow- b. Primary transfer toner reception seal
ing method.
1) Remove the screw, rotate the primary transfer cleaner unit and
• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x remove it.
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
Note
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time. 1
• Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
Countermeasures 1
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) If the OPC drum is subject to stress by being exposed to
strong light, it may be recovered by leaving it in a dark and cool
place.
If it may not be recovered, replace it with a new one. 2
2) Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer toner

reception seal.
1 2

c. Primary transfer cleaner seal F/R, Primary transfer cleaner d. Primary transfer belt
blade. 1) Remove the primary transfer cleaner unit.
1) Remove the primary transfer cleaner unit. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the separation pawl unit.
2) Remove the primary transfer cleaner seal F/R. Remove the screw, and remove the guide rail.
CAUTION: When replacing the primary transfer cleaner seals F/R, CAUTION: When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch
attach them to the attachment reference. the transfer belt with the separation pawl.
CAUTION: When putting the separation pawl unit on a flat surface,
put is with the separation pawl facing upward in order to
prevent against damage on the lead edge of the sepa-
ration pawl.
1
2
Edge reference Edge reference

0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm
Edge reference
Edge reference
3
0mm
0mm
0.5mm
0.5mm
3) Remove the screw on the front side of the primary transfer

unit. Turn the bearing 90 to rotate.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer cleaner
blade.
1 2
2
1
4) Remove the screw, and slide the plate.

5) Fold the primary transfer unit 90 to remove the primary trans- e. Primary transfer belt drive roller, Primary transfer belt
fer belt. follower roller, Primary transfer belt tension roller, Primary
CAUTION: Handle the primary transfer belt not to damage it. Also transfer belt idle roller
do not touch the surface of the primary transfer belt with 1) Remove the primary transfer belt.
bare hands. 2) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller, the primary transfer
CAUTION: Install so that the lot number printed surface the primary belt follower roller, the primary transfer belt tension roller, and
transfer belt comes on the rear side. the primary transfer belt idle roller.
CAUTION: When installing, check to confirm that the both ends of

the primary transfer belt are not positioned over the
transfer guide.
f. PTC-opposing roller, registration backup roller, Y support

roller
2
1) Remove the primary transfer belt.
2) Turn back the primary transfer unit.
1 Clean the PTC-opposing roller, the registration backup roller,
and the Y support roller.
CAUTION: After replacement of the primary transfer belt, perform

the following procedures.
1) With the primary transfer cleaner unit removed, apply yellow
powder (CKOG-0345DS51) to the whole surface of the pri-
mary transfer belt.
g. Primary transfer roller

1) Remove the primary transfer belt.
2) Turn back the primary transfer unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer roller.
Remove the primary transfer roller from the holder.
1
2) Attach the primary transfer cleaner unit.
3) Manually rotate the transfer belt drive gear to remove yellow 3
powder from the primary transfer belt clearly.

h. Primary transfer belt drive gear 3) Remove the rear side cover of the PTC unit.
1) Turn the coupling lock 90 to remove the primary transfer belt
drive gear.
2 4) Loosen the screw, and remove the round terminal of the char-
ger wire from the mounting plate. Remove the spring, and
remove the charger wire.
CAUTION: To handle the charger wire, hold the round terminal and
(2) PTC unit do not touch the wire section directly. Be careful to keep
a. PTC cleaner B, PTC cleaner, Charger wire the wire free from dirt, oil, or twist and bend.
1) Remove the front side cover of the PTC unit.
1
2) Remove the PTC cleaner B, and remove the PTC cleaner.

CAUTION: When removing and installing, be careful not to catch
the PTC cleaner with the charger wire.
CAUTION: When installing the PTC cleaner B, check to confirm (3) Registration sensor unit
that the pawl of the PTC cleaner is securely engaged. a. Image registration/Density sensor
1) Open the shutter, and clean the image registration and the
density sensor.
2
CAUTION: After installation, check to confirm that the charger wire

is at the center of the cleaner pad.

(4) Secondary transfer unit 4) Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the bear-
ing.
a. Secondary transfer belt follower roller, Secondary transfer
belt
1) Remove the screw, and remove the electrode holder.
CAUTION: When attaching the electrode holder, check to confirm
that the roller shaft is inserted into the bearing.
2
3
1
2
5) Remove the secondary transfer belt follower roller and the sec-
1 ondary transfer belt. Remove the bearing of the frame.
Clean the secondary transfer belt follower roller and the sec-
2) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning shaft. ondary transfer belt.
CAUTION: When handling the transfer belt, use enough care to
1 keep it free from scratches and dirt.
CAUTION: When installing, be careful not to bring the transfer belt
2 in contact with the frame, etc., and not to break the
1 transfer belt.
2 CAUTION: When attaching the secondary transfer belt follower

roller, insert it from the vicinity of the secondary transfer
belt contact roller.
3) Remove the step screw, and remove the secondary transfer

belt unit.
2
3
2
b. Secondary transfer belt drive roller, Secondary transfer belt

backup roller, Secondary transfer blade contact roller
1
1 1) Remove the secondary transfer belt.
2) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller and the second-
ary transfer backup roller.

1 : ‘17/Apr.
3) Clean the secondary transfer blade contact roller. CAUTION: When replacing the secondary transfer toner reception
seal, attach it to the attachment reference.
0mm 0.3mm
0mm
0.3mm
c. Secondary transfer roller e. Secondary transfer cleaner seal F/R, Secondary transfer
1) Remove the secondary transfer belt. cleaner blade, Secondary transfer cleaning brush roller
2) Remove the bearing and the spring, and remove the second- 1) Remove the secondary transfer belt unit.
ary transfer roller. 2) Remove the secondary transfer cleaner seal F/R.
CAUTION: When replacing the secondary transfer cleaner seals F/
R, attach them to the attachment reference. Also attach
so that the secondary transfer cleaner seals F/R are not
positioned over the secondary transfer cleaner blade.
3
edge reference
Frame corner
edge reference
Frame corner
0mm
0mm
2
1
0.3mm
0.3mm
1 CAUTION: Spring has mounting direction.

Fit the spring in the boss of the bearing.
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
Blade edge Blade edge

reference reference
3) Remove the screw, and remove the secondary transfer

cleaner blade.
Rear side Front side
1
d. Secondary transfer toner reception seal

1) Remove the secondary transfer belt unit.
2
2) Check the secondary transfer reception seal.

4) While rotating the secondary transfer cleaning brush roller in J. Fusing section
the arrow direction, clean it.
CAUTION: Handle the fusing belt unit integrally with the fusing unit
CAUTION: Do not rotate the secondary transfer cleaning brush case.
roller in the reverse direction, If it is rotated reversely, Never attach the fusing belt unit to another unit. If it
the toner reception seal may be damaged.
should be attached to another unit, the meandering
adjustment function of the fusing belt turns into an
unbalanced state, resulting in breakage of the belt.
(1) Fusing unit
a. Transport roller 18
f. Secondary transfer idle gear

1) Remove the secondary transfer belt unit.
2) Remove the spring. Remove the step screw and the spring,
b. Fusing front paper pass detector
and remove the gear holder. Remove the gear from the gear
holder. 1) Remove the screw, and remove the mounting plate. Discon-
nect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the fus-
ing front paper pass detector.
4
1
2
4 3
5
3 1
3) Remove the C-ring, and remove the shaft and the secondary
c. Web guide shaft, Web pressure roller bearing, Web
transfer idle gear.
pressure roller, Web roller
web unit.
2
2 1
3
1
3
2

2) Remove the screws ( 1 ), and remove the rear lower paper 4) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
guide.
1
2
5) Remove the screw, and remove the web motor.
1 1
6) Remove the screw, and remove the frame. Remove the screw,
and remove the holder.
CAUTION: When attaching the holder, adjust so that the actuator
presses over the web roller sheet.
3) Remove the screws ( 2 ), and remove the lower separation
pawl unit.
2 4
3
2

7) Remove the web guide shaft. 10) While pulling the web roller shaft, remove the web roller.
CAUTION: When installing, fit the web guide shaft with the D-cut of
the mounting hole in the web guide shaft.
CAUTION: After installing the web roller, turn the gear (A) in the fig-
8) While pulling the web roller shaft, remove the web roller. ure below until the blue line on the web sheet exceeds
the pressure roller.
1
(A)
2
Pressure roller
9) Remove the spring and the web pressure roller bearing, and
remove the web pressure roller.
Web tension
Web rollor shaft
3
d. Lower separation pawl
1) Remove the web unit.
2 2) Remove the lower separation pawl and the spring.
1
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2

e. Pressure roller gear, Pressure roller bearing, Pressure 5) Remove the screw, and remove the pressure release unit.
roller
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2 2 6) Remove the screw and remove the Fusing middle paper guide.
CAUTION: When attach the paper guide, insert the paper guide
under the separation plate.
1 1
4) Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Remove the screw,

and remove the rear transport unit.
1
2
Insert the pawl

2 3 into the square
hole and slide it
to attach.
Insert the
paper guide
under the
1 separation Insert the paper
plate. guide under the
separation plate.
7) Disconnect the connector of the heater lamp. Remove the

screw, and remove the holder.
3
2

8) Disconnect the connector of the heater lamp. 11) Remove the C-ring from the pressure roller, and remove the
pressure roller gear. Remove the pressure roller gear, and the
frame.
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
NOTE: When attaching the pressure roller, attach it with the pro-
9) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
tection sheet on it. After completion of assembly, remove
heater lamp.
the protection sheet.
NOTE: When replacing the pressure roller, apply grease (JFE552)
to section A. In addition, wipe the pressure roller surface
with alcohol.
2
1 A A
3
2
1
10) Remove the spring. Remove the screw, and remove the fixing
plate. Remove the pressure roller unit.
Remove the gear(No.5:24T Gear).
1 f. Separation plate
4 1) Remove the spring, and remove the separation plate.
1 1
1
5
3 2
3
2

2) Remove the screw from the separation plate. 5) Remove the screw, and remove the fuser belt unit.
1 2 1
2
1
1 2
g. Fusing paper exit detector

1) Remove the rear transport unit.
2) Remove the E-ring and the bearing. Remove the screw, and
remove the holder. Remove the fusing paper exit detector. CAUTION: Handle the fusing belt unit integrally with the fusing unit
case.
Never attach the fusing belt unit to another unit. If it
should be attached to another unit, the meandering
adjustment function of the fusing belt turns into an
5 unbalanced state, resulting in breakage of the belt.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
heater lamp.
3
2 4
1
h. Heat insulation bushing, Heat roller bearing, Meandering

suppression collar, Heat roller
2) Remove the pressure roller unit.
2
3) Remove the separation plate. 1
4) Disconnect the connector of the fusing belt unit. 2
1
3
7) Remove the spring.

8) Remove the C-ring, the heat insulation bushing, the heat roller 3) Remove the fusing roller, and the fusing belt.
bearing, and the meandering suppression collar.
When replacing the insulation bush, apply grease (JFE552) to
section A.
A
A
2

1

NOTE: When replacing the fusing roller, apply grease (JFE552) to
section A.

9) Remove the heating roller.
A A
[Handling of the fusing belt]
Note that the fusing belt used in this model is different from the con-
ventional ones, and use enough care when handling as described
below.
A. Removal from the package

1) Insert your fingers inside the belt surface, and extend it with
your fingers to slowly lift and remove.
i. Fusing roller bearing, Fusing roller, Fusing belt

1) Remove the C-ring, and remove the gear. Remove the C-ring,
and remove the fusing roller bearing.
2) When putting the fusing belt on a work table, put it vertically to

the work table without making a sound.
3) Never touch the outer surface of the fusing belt.
B. How to hold the belt when checking the belt surface
1) After removing the fusing belt as in A-1, stretch the belt surface
with your fingers from the inside for check.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the holder.
1
2

C. Other cautions 3) Never hit on the edge.
1) Do not put the fusing belt diagonally onto a work table.
2) Do not put anything on the fusing belt which is standing. j. Main thermistor, Sub thermistor 1, Sub thermistor 2
1) Remove the fusing belt.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the main
thermistor, and the sub thermistor 1. Check the main thermis-
tor, and the sub thermistor 1.
2
1
3) When inserting the fusing belt and the heat roller, be careful 2 3
not to hit them on the belt edge.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the sub thermistor 2.

Check the sub thermistor 2.
D. Inhibition
Never execute the following items, which may cause breakage of
the belt.
1) Never press the surface with your fingers.
k. Lower thermistor 1, Lower thermistor 2

1) Remove the fusing belt unit.
2) Check the lower thermistor 1, and the lower thermistor 2.
2) Never hold the edge.

K. Paper exit/reverse section 3) Remove the screw of the right paper exit upper unit, and
remove the paper guide.
(1) Right door unit
a. Transport roller 19, Paper exit roller 2, Discharge brush 1
1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. 1
2 1
2 1
4) Check the discharge brush.

CAUTION: When replacing the discharge brush, attach to the
1 1
1
1
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
nector of the right paper exit upper unit. Remove the screw,
and remove the right paper exit upper unit.
Clean the transport roller 19, and the paper exit roller 2.
4 Edge reference
Edge reference
Edge reference
0mm
5 Edge reference
0mm
0.5mm
0.5mm
b. Transport roller 20, Transport roller 21

7 1) Open the ADU open/close door, and clean the transport roller
6 20, and the transport roller 21.
2
2

c. Transport roller 22 L. Drive section
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
(1) Fusing motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the upper cabinet rear cover and
the right cabinet rear.
1 1
(2) Paper exit unit

a. Paper exit roller 1
1) Remove the screw, and remove the fan cover.
Clean the paper exit roller 1.
2
2
1 3) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
3
1
b. Discharge brush
1) Check the discharge brush.
2
CAUTION: When replacing the discharge brush, attach to the
4) Disconnect the connector from fusing motor. Remove the

screw, and remove the fusing motor.
Edge reference Edge reference

0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm
Edge reference
0mm
1
0.5mm
2
3

1 : ‘17/Apr.
M. Filter section 2) Remove the screw, and remove the filter box.
1 (1) Deodorizing filter (Other than for Europe)

1) Remove the filter cover from the upper rear cabinet, and
remove the deodorizing filer. 2
2
1
1
3) Remove the toner filter and the ozone filter from the filter box.
CAUTION: When attaching the ozone filter, slide it to the toner filter
1 (2) UFP filter and VOC filter (For Europe only) side and insert it.
1) Remove the filter cover from the upper rear cabinet, and
remove the UFC filter(X2) and VOC filter (X2).
CAUTION: Each filter has mounting direction.
(3) Toner filter, Ozone filter

1) Remove the screw from the rear cabinet, and remove the filter
cover.

1.
CN-9 CN-3 CN-4
MX-7580N
FX16S-41S-0.5SV FX16S-41S-0.5SV FI-RE41S-VF

GND 1 41 GND
nLCD_DISP 2 4 0 nLCD_DISP
CN_LCDSEL1 3 39 CN_LCDSEL1
CN_LCDSEL0 4 38 CN_LCDSEL0
GND 5 37 GND
LCD_A3_P 6 36 LCD_A3_P
LCD_A3_N 7 35 LCD_A3_N
GND 8 34 GND
LCD_CLK_P 9 33 LCD_CLK_P
LCD_CLK_N 10 32 LCD_CLK_N
GND 11 31 GND
LCD_A2_P 12 30 LCD_A2_P
LCD_A2_N 13 29 LCD_A2_N
GND 14 28 GND 18V_LCD 28
ORS-PD
LCD_A1_P 15 27 LCD_A1_P 18V_LCD 27
LCD_A1_N 16 26 LCD_A1_N 18V_LCD 26
3
GND 17 25 GND DISPout 25
LCD_A0_P 18 24 LCD_A0_P CCFTout 24
LCD_A0_N 19 23 LCD_A0_N GND 23
CCFT
GND 20 22 GND GND 22
CN_nCCFT 21 21 CN_nCCFT GND 21
3R3V_HUB_PSW 22 20 nHL(X2) GND 20
3R3V_HUB_PSW 23 19 YH(Y2) GND 19
LVDS PWB
OPE_TP_SCL 24 18 nYL(Y1) GND 18
OPE_TP_SDA 25 17 XH(X1) GND 17
GND 26 16 GND TCLK+ 16
4
+5VNSPSW 27 15 +5VNSPSW TCLK- 15
+5VNSPSW 28 14 +5VNSPSW GND 14
+5VNSPSW 29 13 +5VNSPSW TXOUT2+ 13
+5VNSPSW 30 12 +5VNSPSW TXOUT2- 12 CN-1
GND 31 11 GND GND 11 BM11B-GHS-TBT
Operation panel section
GND 32 10 GND TXOUT1+ 10 11 GND
5
+24V_PSW 33 9 +24V_PSW TXOUT1- 9 10 GND(POW_LED)
+24V_PSW 34 8 +24V_PSW GND 8 9 /BZR
+24V_PSW 35 7 +24V_PSW TXOUT0+ 7 8 nHM_KEY
+24V_PSW 36 6 +24V_PSW TXOUT0- 6 7 nHM_LED(/FO)
GND 37 5 GND DATAEDID 5 6 SEG0
GND 38 4 GND CLKEDID 4 5 nWU_KEY
GND 39 3 GND DDC3.3V 3 4 WU_LED
GND 40 2 GND 3.3V 2 3 5VO
GND 41 1 GND 3.3V 1 2 POW_LED
FI-RE-41CL FI-RE-41CL 1 nPWRSW
GHR-11V-S
1
2
6
CN-1
WU_KEY
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
BM08B-GHS-TBT
1 GND
11 12V 11 2 12V CN-2
10 XH(X1) 10 3 INFO_L_G 52271-0469
9 nYL(Y1) 9 4 INFO_L_R XH(X1) 1
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
8 YH(Y2) 8 5 XH(X1) /YL(Y1) 2

OCSW
7 nXL(X2) 7 6 /YL(Y1) /XL(X2) 3

6 GND 6 7 /XL(X2) YH(Y2) 4
PWRSW
5 +5VO 5 8 YH(Y2)
TP-IF PWB
4 CN_BZR 4
3 CN_OPELED_SEG0 3
WU_KEY
2 CN_nOPELED_FO 2
GHR-08V-S
1 CN_nHOME_KEY 1
XARR-11V XAP-11V-1
7 GND 7
6 INFO_LED_R 6
SCN MOTHER PWB

5 INFO_LED_G 5
4 nPWR_SW 4
3 POW_LED_G 3
2 nWU_LED 2
1 nWU_KEY 1
(1/2)CN-3 SMP-07V-NC SMR-O7V-N
B26B-PNDZS
nINFO_FAX_LED 1
INFO_LED_G 3
nPOW_LED_G 5
nWU_LED 7
CN_OPELED_SEG0 9
XH(X1) 11 CN1
CN_PDSEL1 13 B03B-PASK-1
MX-7580N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 1

nYL(Y1) 15 1 5VO
Service Manual
GND 17 2 nINFO_LED
GND 19 (NC) 3 (NC)
YH(Y2) 21 PAP-03V-S
CN_BZR 23
+5VO 25
nPWR_SW 2
INFO_LED_R 4
nWU_KEY 8
CN_nOPELED_FO 10 B6P-PH-K-S
CN_PDSEL0 12 1 PDSEL0
CN_PDSEL2 14 2 PDSEL1
CN_PD 16 3 PDSEL2
+5V 18 4 5V
GND 20 5 PD
nXL(X2) 22 6 GND
CN_nHOME_KEY 24 PHR-6
+5VO 26
PNDP-26V-Z
CN-5
B6B-PH-K-S B3B-EH
5VC1 1 1 5V
GND 2 2 GND
/OCSW 3 3 /OCSW
24V 4 EHR-3
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6 24V
PHR-6 /SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
GND
SRA-21T-4
HM_KEY Home Screen key Switch for home screen
OCSW Document size detection trigger sensor Generates the document size detection trigger signal.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.
WU_KEY Power Save key Switch for power save

1 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. / Controls the touch panel.
2 Document size detection PWB (Light emitting) Drives the LED for the document size detection.
3 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving) Outputs the document size detection signal.
4 USB I/F PWB USB Interface
5 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
6 Power lamp PWB Power lamp display
7 Touch panel Touch panel
8 LCD LCD
B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine operation.
It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.
A document size is detected by the document size detection PWB (light emitting) and the document size detection PWB (light receiving).
The detection timing of document size is determined according to the document size detection trigger sensor signal.

2.
CCN13
5V_STLD 3 A-1 5V_STLD
GND 2 A-2 GND
STLD 1 A-3 D_STLD
03XR-6H-P A-4 5V_SPF
A-5 GND
A-6 D_SPED2
A-7 (NC)
5V_SPF 3 A-8 (NC)
GND 2 08CZ-6Y
SPED2 1
03XR-6H-P CCN13
B-1 +24V
B-2 /D_STMPS
B-3 D_STSET
B-4 GND
B-5 5V_SPOD
B-6 GND
(1) Paper feed section
DSPF section
B-7 D_SPOD
B-8 (NC)
08CZ-6H
B16B-CZWHK-B-1
SPRDMD
SPPD1 1
GND 2
5V_SPPD1 3 CCN10
03XR-6H-P
B-9 D_SPPD1
SPPD1
B-8 GND
B-7 5V_SPPD1
STUD 1 B-6 D_STUD
GND 2 B-5 GND
5V_STUD 3 B-4 5V_STUD
03XR-6H-P B-3 D_SCOV
B-2 GND
B-1 5V_SCOV
09CZ-6H
SCOV 1 CZWH-18V-S
GND 2
5V_SCOV 3
03XR-6H-P
+24V 1
/D_SPFC 2 CCN10
02CZ-6H
A-9 (NC)
A-8 +24V
STUD
A-7 /D_SPFC
SPRDMD 1 A-6 D_RANDOM
GND 2 A-5 GND
5V_SPRDMD 3 A-4 5V_SPRDMD
03XR-6H-P A-3 D_SPED1
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
A-2 GND
A-1 5V_SPED1
09CZ-6Y
SCOV
SPED1 1 B18B-CZWHK-B-1
STLD
GND 2
5V_SPED1 3
SPWS
03XR-6H-P
SPED2
SPFC
CN1
SPED1
B-15 +24V
DSPF control PWB
B-14 /D_SRRC
B-13 +24V
B-12 /D_STRRC
+24V 1
B-11 +24V
PGND 2
B-10 PGND
SPLS1
(NC) 3
B-9 SPUFM_CLK
SPUFM_CLK 4
B-8 SPUFM_BRAKE
SPUFM_BRAKE 5
B-7 SPUFM_CW
SPUFM_CW 6
B-6 SPUFM_LD
SPUFM_LD 7
B-5 +24V
07XR-6H-P B-4 /D_STRC
292132-7
B-3 SOCD
B-2 GND
B-1 5V_SOCD
CZWH-30V-S
15CZ-6H
A-15 SLCOV
A-14 GND

A-13 5V_SLCOV
A-12 SPPD5
SPLS2
A-11 GND
A-10 5V_SPPD5
A-9 SPPD4
A-8 GND
A-7 5V_SPPD4
A-6 SPPD3
A-5 GND
A-4 5V_SPPD3
A-3 5V_SPPD2
A-2 SPPD2
A-1 GND
SLUM 15CZ-6Y
B30B-CZWHK-V-B-1
SPUFM
CCN8
/D_LUMBOUT 1 /D_LUMBOUT
/D_LUMAOUT 2 /D_LUMAOUT
D_LUMBOUT 3 D_LUMBOUT
D_LUMAOUT 4 D_LUMAOUT
+24V 5 +24V
PHR-5
B5B-PH-K-S
D_SPLS2 1
GND 2
5V_SPLS2 3
03XR-6H-P CCN12
9 D_SPLS2
8 GND
7 5V_SPLS2
+3.3V 1 +3.3V 3 1 6 +3.3V
D_SPWS 2 D_SPWS 2 2 5 D_SPWS
GND 3 GND 1 3 4 GND
PHNR-03-H 03CK-6H-PC 3 D_SPLS1
BU03P-TR-P-H 2 GND
1 5V_SPLS1
09CZ-6Y
D_SPLS1 1 B09B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)
GND 2
5V_SPLS1 3
03XR-6H-P
SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPUFM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper.
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.
No. Name Function/ Operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the document feed roller.
2 Document feed roller Performs the document feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is always provided for rotation of the separation roller to prevent double feed.
(2) Upper transport section
B30B-CZWHK-V-B-1
SPUFM_BRAKE
DSPF control PWB
SPUFM_CLK
SPUFM_CW
SPUFM_LD
5V_SLCOV
5V_SPPD5
5V_SPPD4
5V_SPPD3
5V_SPPD2
/D_STRRC
5V_SOCD
/D_SRRC
/D_STRC
SLCOV
SPPD5
SPPD4
SPPD3
SPPD2
PGND
SOCD
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CN1
15CZ-6Y
CZWH-30V-S
15CZ-6H
B-15
B-14
B-13
B-12
B-11
B-10
B-9
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-5
B-4
B-3
B-2
B-1
A-15
A-14
A-13
A-12
A-11
A-10
A-9
A-8
A-7
A-6
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
03XR-6H-P
07XR-6H-P
02CZ-6H
02CZ-6H
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
1
2
3
+24V
/D_STRRC
+24V
PGND
(NC)
SPUFM_CLK
SPUFM_BRAKE
SPUFM_CW
SPUFM_LD
+24V
/D_STRC
5V_SPPD2
292132-7
292254-3
SPPD2
GND
3
2
1
173977-3
SPUFM
03XR-6H-P
1
2
3
5V_SPPD2
SPPD2
GND
STRC
STRRC
SPPD2

SPUFM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 registration roller.

1 No. 1 registration roller (Drive) Performs registration of document transport.
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from No. 1 registration roller to No. 2 registration roller.

(3) Lower transport section
B30B-CZWHK-V-B-1
SPUFM_BRAKE
DSPF control PWB
SPUFM_CLK
SPUFM_CW
SPUFM_LD
5V_SLCOV
5V_SPPD5
5V_SPPD4
5V_SPPD3
5V_SPPD2
/D_STRRC
5V_SOCD
/D_SRRC
/D_STRC
SLCOV
SPPD5
SPPD4
SPPD3
SPPD2
PGND
SOCD
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CN1
CZWH-30V-S
15CZ-6H
15CZ-6Y
B-15
B-14
B-13
B-12
B-11
B-10
B-9
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-5
B-4
B-3
B-2
B-1
A-15
A-14
A-13
A-12
A-11
A-10
A-9
A-8
A-7
A-6
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
03CK-6H-PC
07XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P
02XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P
02CZ-6H
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
BU03P-TR-P-H
+24V
/D_SRRC
+24V
PGND
(NC)
SPUFM_CLK
SPUFM_BRAKE
SPUFM_CW
SPUFM_LD
SOCD
GND
5V_SOCD
ROCD
GND
SPPD4
GND
5V_SPPD4
SPPD3
GND
5V_SPPD3
5V_SPPD5
292132-7
SPPD5
GND
03KR-6H-PC
3
2
1
SPUFM
03XR-6H-P
1
2
3
SPPD5
GND
5V_SPPD5
SRRC
SPPD3
SPPD4 SPPD5
SOCD
SLCOV

SLCOV Lower door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the lower door
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the DDPF unit
SPUFM DSPF transport motor Drives the transport roller.
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 registration roller.

1 No. 2 registration roller (Drive) Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position.
2 Platen roller A pressure is applied to document to prevent fluctuations of document.
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.
4 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.

(4) Optical section
DSPF COPY LAMP
LED PWB
CN5
LED_POWER
IDRV6
IDRV5
IDRV4
IDRV3
IDRV2
IDRV1
B7B-PH-K-S
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B7B-PH-K-S
7 LED_POWER
6 IDRV6
5 IDRV5
4 IDRV4
3 IDRV3
2 IDRV2
1 IDRV1
CN9
DSPF CNT PWB

DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.

1 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
2 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
3 DSPF CCD PWB Scans the document image (optical signals) and converts it into electrical signals.

(5) Paper exit section
DSPFCNT PWB
CN8 CN 2
5V 1 1 5V
SGND 2 2 SGND
D_SPFFAN 3 3 D_SPFFAN
SGND 4 4 SGND
D_SPPD1 5 5 D_SPPD1
D_RANDOM 6 6 D_RANDOM
D_SOCV 7 7 D_SOCV
D_SPOD 8 8 D_SPOD
D_SPU M_INA 9 9 D_SPU M_INA
D_SPU M_IN/A 10 10 D_SPU M_IN/A
D_SPU M_INB 11 11 D_SPU M_INB
D_SPU M_IN/B 12 12 D_SPU M_IN/B
D_SLUMA 13 13 D_SLUMA
D_SULM/A 14 14 D_SULM/A
D_SLUMB 15 15 D_SLUMB
D_SLUM/B 16 16 D_SLUM/B
D_SPO M_ENA 17 17 D_SPO M_ENA
D_SPO M_ STEP 18 18 D_SPO M_STEP
CN5 D_SPO M_ MODE 19 19 D_SPO M_MODE

1 D_SPOM/B D_SPO M_ DIR 20 20 D_SPO M_DIR
24V 21 21 24V
SPOM 2
3
D_SPOM/A
D_SPOMB PGND 22 22 PGND
4 D_SPOMA 24V 23 23 24V
B4B-PH-K-S PGND 24 24 PGND
24V 25 25 24V
PGND 26 26 PGND
B 26 B-PHDSS-B B26 B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
PWB CN-3 CN-3
CN2 B28B-PHDSS-B B28B-PHDSS-B
D_SPUM_VREF 1 1 D_SPUM_VREF
4 D_SPED2 D_SPFM_VREF 2 2 D_SPFM_VREF
1 SGND D_SPOM_VREF1 3 3 D_SPOM_VREF1
3 5V(sensor) D_SPOM_VREF2 4 4 D_SPOM_VREF2
6 D_STLD
D_SELA 5 5 D_SELA
D_SELB 6 6 D_SELB
2 SGND D_SELC 7 7 D_SELC
5 5V(sensor) D_SELOUT 8 8 D_SELOUT
SPOD D_SPOD 1 8 D_SPOD
3.3V
D_SPWS
9
10
9
10
3.3V
D_SPWS
SGND 2 9 SGND AGND 11 11 AGND
5V(sensor) 3 7 5V(sensor) D_SPFC 12 12 D_SPFC
175487-3 10 N C( SGND ) D_SRRC 13 13 D_SRRC
D_SRRBC 14 (NC) (NC) 14 D_SRRBC
B10B-PHDSS-B
D_SPFM_M1 15 15 D_SPFM_M1
D_SPFM_M2 16 16 D_SPFM_M2
STMPS D_SPFM_CLK 17 17 D_SPFM_CLK
D_SPFM_DIREC 18 18 D_SPFM_DIREC
D_STRRC 19 19 D_STRRC
D_STRRBC 20 (NC) (NC) 20 D_STRRBC
D_STMPS 21 21 D_STMPS
/D_STRC 22 22 /D_STRC
179228-4/29225-4/179228-4 CN9 5V 23 23 5V
1 SGND 1 1 SGND SGND 24 24 SGND
2 D_STSET 2 2 D_STSET
3 /D_STMP
5VPWM 25 25 5VPWM
3 /D_STMP 3
4 24V_TR 4 4 24V_TR SPED 26 26 SPED
B28B-PHDSS-B
5V0 27 27 5V0
SGND 28 28 SGND

SPOD DSPF document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor Drives the document exit roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the stamp solenoid.

1 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.

(1) Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sen-
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF
document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is
judged from the document width and the document length as
shown in the table below. SPWS
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on SPLS1
the document tray, the largest size is detected.
SPLS2
Document length sensor
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
(2) Timing chart

To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or
smaller sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control.
Scan transport speed 372mm/s 400dpi letter single transport
Copy key ON
SPUM
DSPF document feed motor
ON simultaneously with print start of each motor
OFF at 500ms after SPOD OFF of the last paper
SPFM
DSPF transport motor
Decelerates simultaneously with turning off SPOD to

SPOM reduce to 200mm/s for 18.9mm. Drives for 15mm,
DSPF document exit motor and returns to 372mm/s for 18.9mm.
(Common to all the paper sizes)
SPFC
DSPF document feed clutch
1 0
STRRC
DSPF No.1 registration roller
clutch
1
STRC ON simultaneously with SPPD2_ON

DSPF transport roller clutch OFF at 25.7ms after SPPD2_OFF
SRRC
ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (29ms) after SPPD3 ON (SIM adjustment)
DSPF No.2 registration roller
OFF at 10.4mm (28ms) after SPPD3 OFF
clutch
1
SPRDMD
DSPF document random sensor
SPPD1
DSPF document pass sensor 1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPOD
DSPF document exit sensor

3.
6
5
4
3
2
1
CLI
MIM
No.
MHPS
CN-17
B3B-PH-K-S
Lens
MHPS 1 33 MHPS
Signal name
GND 2 22 D-GND
5VPD 3 11 5V
PHR-3 EHR-3
CCD PWB
No. 3 mirror
No. 2 mirror
No. 1 mirror
Scanner lamp
Scanner motor
Scanner lamp drive PWB

Name
Scanner section
Name
Scanner home position sensor

CN-1 CN-1011
FH48-50S-0.5SV FH48-50S-0.5SV
GND 50 50 GND
5
GND 49 49 GND
GND 48 48 GND
GND 47 47 GND
GND 46 46 GND
GND 45 45 GND
GND 44 44 GND
GND 43 43 GND
GND 42 42 GND
6
GND 41 41 GND
CN_AFE_SDO 40 40 CN_AFE_SDO
AFE_SDTO 39 39 AFE_SDTO
AFE_SCLK 38 38 AFE_SCLK
AFE_CS 37 37 AFE_CS
nRES_CCDAD 36 36 nRES_CCDAD
GND 35 35 GND
A3.3V 34 34 A3.3V
A3.3V 33 33 A3.3V
A3.3V 32 32 A3.3V
A3.3V 31 31 A3.3V
A3.3V 30 30 A3.3V
A3.3V 29 29 A3.3V
GND 28 28 GND
A5V 27 27 A5V
A5V 26 26 A5V
Drives the scanner lamp.

A5V 25 25 A5V
2
GND 24 24 GND
MHPS
A10V 23 23 A10V
CCD PWB
A10V 22 22 A10V
GND 21 21 GND
CN_TA_N 20 20 CN_TA_N
SCN CNT PWB

CN_TA_P 19 19 CN_TA_P
GND 18 18 GND
CN_TB_N 17 17 CN_TB_N
CN_TB_P 16 16 CN_TB_P
3
GND 15 15 GND
CN_TC_N 14 14 CN_TC_N
CN_TC_P 13 13 CN_TC_P
GND 12 12 GND
Reflects the document image into the lens.

CN_TCLK_N 11 11 CN_TCLK_N
CN_TCLK_P 10 10 CN_TCLK_P
GND 9 9 GND
1
CN_TD_N 8 8 CN_TD_N
4
CN_TD_P 7 7 CN_TD_P
Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.

GND 6 6 GND
CLI
CN_TE_N 5 5 CN_TE_N
Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
CN_TE_P 4 4 CN_TE_P

SCNCNT_SE2 3 3 SCNCNT_SE2
GND 1 1 GND
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.

CN-2
Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
B4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-SM4-TB
MIM_A 1 1 MIM_A
MIM_B 2 2 MIM_B
Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
MIM_/A 3 3 MIM_/A
MIM_/B 4 4 MIM_/B
PHR-4 PHR-4
MIM
CN-7 CN-8
5597-05CPB7F 5 597-05APB B8B-PH-K-S B8B-PH-K-S
24VPD 5 1 24VPD IDRV1 1 1 IDRV1
PWB
24VPD 4 2 24VPD IDRV2 2 2 IDRV2

LAMP 3 3 LAMP IDRV3 3 3 IDRV3
GND 2 4 GND IDRV4 4 4 IDRV4
GND 1 5 GND IDRV5 5 5 IDRV5
IDRV6 6 6 IDRV6
IDRV7 7 7 IDRV7
LED DRIVER
24V 8 8 24V
PHR-8 PHR-8
(1) Outline
This section performs the following functions.
1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the
B
G
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
R
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
(2) Detail description
a. Optical section drive R
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner G
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
B
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
(Image data for 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage R G B
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal Red component Green component Blue component
sent from the scanner control PWB. image data image data image data
c. Image scan/color separation

d. Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the con-
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, Each color pixel has 10bit information.
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the process section.
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue
components. This operation is called the color separation. CCD PWB
Analog IC
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD CCD
elements, R, G, and B. AFE ADC LVDS
(6 Lines) R
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by G
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc- B
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner
Buffer
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
reflected to the CCD. Timing
The scan resolution is 600 dpi. Generator
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

4. Paper feed section
(1) Manual paper feed section
CN-10
B40B-PNDZS SMR-04V-NSMP-04V-NC SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
PCU PWB MPUC
24V4
1
3
1 MPUC
2 24V4
1
2
1 MPUC
2 24V4
1
2
SMR-04V-NSMP-04V-NC SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-N
LCCC 2 3 LCCC 3 1 LCCC 1
24V4 4 4 24V4 4 2 24V4 2
CN-15(2/2)
B26B-PNDZS B2B-VH
INT24V2L 2 1 INT24V2L
P-GND 4 2 P-GND
GND 6 VHR-2N Manual paper feed tray UN
5VN 8
B7B-PASK-1 3 MPLD1
CPFM_D 10
1 D-GND SMP-06V-NC SMR-06V-N 2 D-GND
CPFM_CK 12
2 5VN 1 MPLD1 1 1 5V_LED
CPFM_LD 14
CPFM_GAIN 16 3 CPFM_D 2 D-GND 2 179228-3
CPFM_CW/CCW 18 4 CPFM_CK 3 5V_LED 3
PNDP-26V-Z 5 CPFM_LD 4 5VN 4 3 5VN
6 CPFM_GAIN 5 MPWD 5 2 MPWD
7 CPFM_CW/CCW 6 D-GND 6 1 D-GND
PAP-07V-S PHR-3
QR/P4-40*-C(01) BU10P-TZ-S
1 FPRFM2_V 1 1 MPED 10
2 FPRFM2_LD 2 2 D-GND 9
3 MPGS 3 3 5V_LED 8 SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC
4 24V4 4 4 24V4 7 1 24V4 1
5 MPFS 5 5 /MPFS 6 2 /MPFS 2
CN-12(1/2) 6 24V4 6 6 5V_LED 5
B38B-PNDZS 7 +24V 7 CN-1 CN-3 7 D-GND 4
5VO+R 1 8 +24V 8 S16B-PHDSS-B S32B-PHDSS-B 8 MPFD 3
PRTPD 3 9 +24V 9 1 5VN D-GND 21 9 /MPGS 2
5VNPD 5 10 +24V 10 2 GND MPWD 20 ( NC) 10 24V4 1
5VN 7 11 5VN 11 3 SIN3 5VN 19 CZHR-10V-S CZHR-10V-S
GND 9 12 GND 12 4 SELIN1 5V_LED 18
SIN3 11 13 SIN3 13 5 SELIN2 D-GND 17 Multi UN
SELIN1 13 14 SELIN1 14 6 SELIN3 MPLD1 16
SELIN2 15 15 SELIN2 15 7 APPD1 5V_LED 15 (NC)
SELIN3 17 16 SELIN3 16 8 APPD2 D-GND 14
APPD1 19 17 APPD1 17 (NC) 9 ADUD3 ADFM1_LD 13
APPD2 21 18 APPD2 18 10 POD3 5V_LED 12
MPWD 23 19 POD3 19 (NC) 11 MPFD D-GND 11
FPRFM2_LD 25 20 5VNPD 20 (NC) 12 FAX_D MPFD 10 ( NC)
POD3 27 21 FPRFM1_V 21 (NC) 13 MPWD 5V_LED 9
MPFD 29 22 MPFD 22 (NC)
(NC)
14 TH_M
15 HUM_D
D-GND
MPED
8
7
CPFM
23 MPWD 23
24 ADUM2_B 24 16 5VNPD PHDR-32VS-1
25 ADUM2_A 25 PHDR-16VS-2
24V4 8
26 ADUM2_XB 26
27 ADUM2_XA 27
R-DOOR I/F PWB
24V4 10 28 ADUM1_B 28
MPUC
SMR-02V-N
179228-3
179228-3
24V4 12 29 ADUM1_A 29
FPRFM1_V 14 30 ADUM1_XB 30
FPRFM2_V 16 31 ADUM1_XA 31
MPFS 18 32 ADUGS 32
MPGS 20 33 24V4 33
1 24V4
2 /MPGS
1 MPFD
2 D-GND
3 5V_LED
3 5V_LED
2 D-GND
1 MPED
ADUGS 22 34 PRTPD 34
TBFM_V 2 35 5VO+R 35
TBFM_LD 4
LCCC
GND 6 5
SMP-02V-NC
PTC_ERR 24
2TC_ERR 26
1
2
HY_REM_TC2 28 SRA-21T-4 40 FG 40
/TC2_LD 30 To High S P
/TC2_CLK 32 voltage SRA-01T-3.2
/TC2_DATA 34 4
GND 36
INT24V2 38 MPFD 1
PNDP-38V-Z
2 3 MPFS
MPED
MPLD1
MPWD
MPGS

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
LCCC LCC paper entry clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the LCC transport section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Detects presence of paper in the manual paper feed tray.
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detector Detects entry of paper into the manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Controls pickup of paper. (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate.
MPLD1 Manual paper feed length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed.
5 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 16.
6 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the LCC to the transport roller 15.

5
5
3
1
2
(2) Tandem paper feed tray unit
B04B-PASK-1
5
5VNPD 1
GND 2
T1LUD 3
T1PED 4
PAP-04V-S
4
CN-2
T1LUD
B2B-PH-K-S B24B-PNDZS
T1PED
GND 1 1 GND
T1LUM 2 3 T1LUM
PHR-2
SMP-10V-NCSMR-10V-N
1
1 5VNPD 1 5 5VNPD
2 GND 2 7 GND
3 T1LUD 3 9 T1LUD
4 T1PED 4 11 T1PED
T1PUS
GND 1 5 GND 5 13 GND
T1SPD
3
T1SPD 2 6 T1SPD 6 15 T1SPD
5VNPD 3 7 5VNPD 7 17 5VNPD
179228-3 8 GND 8 19 GND
2
9 T2SPD 9 21 T2SPD
5
SMR-02V-NSMP-02V-NC 10 5VNPD 10 23 5VNPD
4
1 24V3 1 2 24V3
2 T1PUS 2 4 T1PUS
5VNPD 1 6 5VNPD
GND 2 8 GND
T2LUD 3 10 T2LUD
GND 1 T2PED 4 12 T2PED
T2SPD 2
5VNPD 3 B04B-PASK-1 PAP-04V-S
179228-3
TNDSET
T2SPD
T2LUD
T1PUC
T1LUM
T2PED

CN-15(2/2)
B2B-VH B26B-PNDZS
5VN
GND
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
TNDSET
VHR-2N 6 GND
8 5VN
3
2
1
B7B-PASK-1 10 CPFM_D
D-GND 1 12 CPFM_CK
5VN 2 14 CPFM_LD
CPFM_D 3 16 CPFM_GAIN
T2PUS
CPFM_CK 4 18 CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_LD 5 (NC) 20 EF M1_V
03XR-6H-P
CPFM_GAIN 6 (NC) 22 EFM1_CNT
CPFM_CW/CCW 7 (NC) 24 GND
PAP-07V-S (NC) 26 EFM1_LD
PNDP-26V-Z
CN-15(1/2)
CPFM
PHNR-02-H BU02P-TR-P-H PHNR-02-H B26B-PNDZS
2 T1PUC 1 1 T1PUC
1 24V4 2 3 24V4
T2LUM
SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
5 T2PUC
1 24V4 1 7 24V4
PCU PWB
2 T2PUS 2 9 TTRC
11 24V4
BU02P-TR-P-H PHNR-02-H 13 PTRC2
T2PUC
2 T2PUC 1 15 24V4
1 24V4 2 17 24V4
19 T2PUS
GND 1 21 GND
T2L
UM 2 23 T2LUM
PHR-2 Reserve_OUT2 25 (NC)
B29B-CSRK
9 5VN
8 TNDSET
7 GND
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section and the transport section.
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit position of the upper limit tandem tray 1.
T1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tandem tray 1) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
T1PED Tandem tray 1 paper empty detector Detects presence of paper in tandem tray 1
T1PUC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed section.
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Controls the paper pickup.
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tandem tray 1.
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit position of tandem tray 2.
T2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tandem tray 2) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
T2PED Tandem tray 2 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tandem tray 2.
T2PUC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed section.
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Controls the paper pickup.
T2SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tandem tray 2.
TNDSET Tandem tray installation detector Detects installation of tandem tray.

1 Paper pickup roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Torque limiter Applies a certain level of resistance power to rotation of the separation roller in order to
prevent against double feed.
5 Lift wire Transmits the drive power of the paper tray lift motor to the paper feed tray.

CN-5
B22B-CZWHK-B-1 BU11P-TZ-S 03XR-6H-P
5VNPD A-11 1 5VNPD 11 1 5VNPD
C3PFD A-10 2 C3PFD 10 2 C3PFD
GND A-9 3 GND 9 3 GND
03XR-6H-P
5VNPD A-8 4 5VNPD 8 1 5VNPD
C3LUD A-7 5 C3LUD 7 2 C3LUD
03XR-6H-P
VNPD A-5 7 5VNPD 5 1 5VNPD
C3PED A-4 8 C3PED 4 2 C3PED
02CK-6H-PC BU02P-TR-P-H
24V4 A-2 10 24V4 2 1 2 24V4 1
C3PUS A-1 11 C3PUS 1 2 1 C3PUS 2
11CZ-6Y 11CZ-6H 11CZ-6Y PHNR-02-H
CZWH-22V-S
(3) Tray paper feed section
BU11P-TZ-S 03XR-6H-P
5VNPD B-11 1 5VNPD 11 1 5VNPD
C4PFD B-10 2 C4PFD 10 2 C4PFD
GND B-9 3 GND 9 3 GND
03XR-6H-P
C4LUD B-7 5 C4LUD 7 2 C4LUD
11CZ-6H 03XR-6H-P
C4PED B-4 8 C4PED 4 2 C4PED
12
02CK-6H-PC BU02P-TR-P-H
10
11
24V4 B-2 10 24V4 2 1 2 24V4 1
C4PUS B-1 11 C4PUS 1 2 1 C4PUS 2
11CZ-6H 11CZ-6Y PHNR-02-H
1
C3PED
8
2
3
7
C3LUD
12
11
10
C3SS3
C3PUS
C3PFD
6
C4PED
4
PCU PWB
9
1 2
3
C3SS1
C4LUD
C3SS2
C3SPD
C3SS4
C4SS3
C4PUS
6-292254-3 SMR-03V-NSMP-03V-NC
1 GND 3 1 VREF 1
C4PFD
2 C4PWD 2
4
2 GND 2
3 VREF 1 3 C4PWD 3 CN-15(2/2)
9
B2B-VH B26B-PNDZS
C4SS1
03XR-6H-P 179228-3 INT24V2L 1 2 INT24V2L
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
VHR-2N 6 GND

CPFM
C4SS2
8 5VN
C4SS4
C4SPD
B7B-PASK-1 10
C4PWD
CPFM_D
C3PUC
B6B-PH-K-S D-GND 1 12
C4PUC
CN-3 CPFM_CK
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 (NC) 6 1 GND 5VN 2 14 CPFM_LD
GND A-1 5 2 GND CPFM_D 3 16 CPFM_GAIN
C4SS1 A-2 4 3 C4SS1 CPFM_CK 4 18 CPFM_CW/CCW
C4SS2 A-3 3 4 C4SS2 CPFM_LD 5 (NC) 20 EF M1_V
C4SS3 A-4 2 5 C4SS3 CPFM_GAIN 6 (NC) 22 EFM1_CNT
C4SS4 A-5 1 6 C4SS4 CPFM_CW/CCW 7 (NC) 24 GND
06CK-6H-PC PAP-07V-S (NC) 26 EFM1_LD
B6B-PH-K-S PNDP-26V-Z
(NC) 6 1 BU02P-TR-P-H
GND
GND A-6 5 2 GND 1 C3PUC 2 1 CN-3
PTRC1
C3SS1 A-7 4 3 C3SS1 2 24V4 1 2 B30B-CZWHK-B-1

C3SS2 A-8 3 4 PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-PC B-9 PTRC1
C3SS2
C3SS3 A-9 2 5 C3SS3 BU02P-TR-P-H B-8 24V4
C3SS4 A-10 1 6 C3SS4 1 C4PUC 2 1 B-7 C4PUC
PCU PWB
06CK-6H-PC 2 24V4 1 2 B-6 24V4

PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-PC B-5 C3PUC
BU02P-TR-P-H B-4 24V4
5 VNPD B-15 1 5VNPD 1 PTRC1 2 1
C4SPD B-14 2 C4SPD 2 24V4 1 2
GND B-13 3 D-GND PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-PC
03XR-6H-P B2B-PH-K-S
P-GND 1 2 A-11 GND
5VNPD B-12 1 5VNPD C3LUM 2 1 A-12 C4LUM
C3SPD B-11 2 C3SPD 02CK-6H-PC A-13 GND
GND B-10 3 D-GND A-14 C3LUM
03XR-6H-P B2B-PH-K-S A-15 (NC)
C3LUM
P-GND 2 1
C4LUM 2 1
C4LUM
GND B-3 02CK-6H-PC

C4PWD B-2
VREF B-1
15CZ-6H
CZWH-30V-S
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detector (Lift Detects the upper limit position of tray 3.
home position detection)
C3LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tray 3) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tray 3.
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detector Detects paper entry from tray 3.
C3PUC Tray 3 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 3 paper feed section.
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3) Controls pickup of paper.
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tray 3.
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detector 1 Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 3 is detected to detect tray insertion.
C3SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detector 2 The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
C3SS3 Tray 3 rear edge detector 3
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detector (Lift Detects the upper limit position of tray 4.
home position detection)
C4LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tray 4) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tray 4.
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detector Detects paper entry from tray 4.
C4PUC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 4 paper feed section.
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4) Controls pickup of paper.
C4PWD Casette 4 width detection Casette 4 width detection
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tray 4.
C4SS1 Tray 4 rear edge detector 1 Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 4 is detected to detect tray insertion.
C4SS2 Tray 4 rear edge detector 2 The paper size of tray 4 is detected.
PTRC1 Casette Vertical transport clutch Casette Vertical transport clutch control

1 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Torque limiter Applies a certain level of resistance power to rotation of the separation roller in order to prevent against
double feed.
5 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2.
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4.
7 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 and the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5.
9 Paper size detection plate This plate shifts its position in conjunction with the rear edge plate, and the rear edge is detected to detect
the paper size.
10 Lift plate Lifts paper to maintain the paper feed position at a certain level.
11 Regulation plate Regulates paper in the transverse direction.
12 Rear edge plate Regulates paper in the longitudinal direction.
(1) Bypass
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, (3) Tray paper feed
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
a. Paper feed front operation
to the paper feed roller section.
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the • The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the man- • The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
ual transport roller. stops at the specified position.
(2) Tandem paper feed
a. Paper size for each paper feed tray
Paper tray 1 accepts paper of A4, 11” x 8.5”, or B5. Paper tray 2
accepts paper of A4 (11” x 8.5”) only.
b. Paper feed operation
1) When the copy/print operation is started, the motor (CPFM)
and the clutch (T1PUC) are turned ON to turn ON the solenoid
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates the takeup
roller and lowers it to pick up paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent double feed of paper.

b. Paper feed operation c. Paper remaining detection
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch • The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup tim- total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
ing, feeding paper. empty. The result is displayed.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper d. Paper remaining quantity detection method
to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates • The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rota-
to prevent against double feed of paper. tions of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
sensor.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

5. Paper transport section
(1) Interface pass unit
PCU PWB
18 CPFM_CW/CCW
B26B-PNDZS
16 CPFM_GAIN
22 EFM1_CNT
B24B-PNDZS
12 CPFM_CK
CN-15(1/2)
14 CPFM_LD
B26B-PNDZS
2 INT24V2L
26 EFM1_LD
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
20 EF M1_V
10 CPFM_D
5VNPD
5VNPD
CN-15(2/2)
4 P-GND
9 TTRC
11 24V4
GND
GND
6 GND
24 GND
8 5VN
CN-2
14
16
18
20
22
24
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
PNDP-26V-Z
PNDP-24V-Z
SMP-06V-NCSMR-06V-N
PAP-07V-S
VHR-2N
1 5VNPD 1
2 T1PPD1 2
3
4 5VNPD 4
5 T1PPD2 5
6
PHNR-02-H
3 GND
6 GND
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BU02P-TR-P-H
CPFM_CW/CCW
2 TTRC 1
2
CPFM_GAIN
B7B-PASK-1
INT24V2L
CPFM_CK
CPFM_LD
CPFM_D
B2B-VH
P-GND
D-GND
1 24V4
5VN
PHNR-02-H
TTRC
179228-3
179228-3
CPFM
1
2
3
1
2
3
T1PPD1
T1PPD2
5VNPD
5VNPD
GND
GND
T1PPD1
T1PPD2

T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1 Detects paper entry from tandem tray 1.
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass from tandem tray 1.
TTRC Tandem tray transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of transport rollers 6/7.

1 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper from the tandem tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
2 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 6 to the transport roller 13.

(2) Vertical transport unit
CN-15(2/2)
B2B-VH B26B-PNDZS
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
VHR-2N 6 GND
8 5VN
B7B-PASK-1 10 CPFM_D
D-GND 1 12 CPFM_CK
5VN 2 14 CPFM_LD
CPFM_D 3 16 CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CK 4 18 CPFM_CW/CCW
CPFM_LD 5
CPFM CPFM_GAIN
CPFM_CW/CCW
6
7
PAP-07V-S
PNDP-26V-Z
CN-15(1/2)
BU02P-TR-P-H B26B-PNDZS
2 PTRC2 1 13 PTRC2
1 24V4 2 15 24V4
PHNR-02-H PHNR-02-H
PTRC2
PCU PWB
CN-6
1 5VNPD 1
6-292254-3 B29B-CSRK
12 5VNPD
3 5VNPD 1
T2PPD1 2 11 T2PPD1
T2PPD1 GND 3
2 T2PPD1
1 GND
2
3 10 GND
03XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P 03XR-6H-P
DSW_RL
DSW_CS
CN-6
7-292254-3 B29B-CSRK
5VN 1 6 5VN 8 21 5VN
DSW_RL 2 5 DSW_CS 9 20 DSW_CS
173977-3 3 5VN 11 18 5VN
2 DSW_RL 12 17 DSW_RL
1 GND 13 16 GND
1-173977-3 13XR-6H-P
5VN 1
DSW_CS 2
GND 3
173977-3

CPFM Paper feed/Transport motor Drives the paper feed section and the transport section.
DSW_CS Transport cover open/close sensor Detects open/close of the vertical transport cover.
DSW_RL Right lower door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the right lower door.
PTRC2 Paper feed vertical transport clutch upper Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
T2PPD1 Tandem tray 2 transport sensor Detects the tandem tray 2 paper pass.


3
2
1
No.
LPPD
LCCC
LCCM
CPFM
CN-15(2/2)
B26B-PNDZS B2B-VH
Signal name
P-GND 4 2 P-GND
GND 6 VHR-2N
5VN 8
CPFM_D 10 B7B-PASK-1
CPFM_CK 12 1 D-GND
CPFM_LD 14 2 5VN
CPFM_GAIN 16 3 CPFM_D
CPFM_CW/CCW 18 4 CPFM_CK
5 CPFM_LD
6 CPFM_GAIN
7 CPFM_CW/CCW
PNDP-26V-Z PAP-07V-S
CN-6
B29B-CSRK 6-292254-3
(3) LCC transport unit
Name
Transport roller 16 (Drive)

Paper feed motor
LPPD 14 2 LPPD 2 2 LPPD
Name
29CSR-8PK 03XR-6H-P 03XR-6H-P 03XR-6H-P
LCC transport motor

LCC paper entry clutch
3
LCC paper entry detector

2
PCU PWB
Drives the paper feed section.

CN-10 CN-8
502790-6491 502790-6491
Drives the LCC transport section.

GND 64 1 GND
PRM_XB 32 TNM_K_A 63 2 TNM_K_A 33 PRM_XB
WEBM2_A 31 TNM_K_B 62 3 TNM_K_B 34 WEBM2_A
WEBM2_B 30 TNM_K_/A 61 4 TNM_K_/A 35 WEBM2_B
WEBM1_A 29 TNM_K_/B 60 5 TNM_K_/B 36 WEBM1_A
LPPD
WEBM1_B 28 TNM_C_A 59 6 TNM_C_A 37 WEBM1_B
Detects paper transported from the LCC.

RRM_CLK 27 TNM_C_B 58 7 TNM_C_B 38 RRM_CLK
Transports paper to the transport roller 17.

RRM_EN 26 TNM_C_/A 57 8 TNM_C_/A 39 RRM_EN
RRM_CNT1 25 TNM_C_/B 56 9 TNM_C_/B 40 RRM_CNT1
RRM_CNT2 24 TNM_M_A 55 10 TNM_M_A 41 RRM_CNT2
POM_A 23 TNM_M_B 54 11 TNM_M_B 42 POM_A
POM_B 22 TNM_M_/A 53 12 TNM_M_/A 43 POM_B
POM_XA 21 TNM_M_/B 52 13 TNM_M_/B 44 POM_XA
POM_XB 20 TNM_Y_A 51 14 TNM_Y_A 45 POM_XB
CPFM
POM_CNT 19 TNM_Y_B 50 15 TNM_Y_B 46 POM_CNT

ADUM1_A 18 TNM_Y_/A 49 16 TNM_Y_/A 47 ADUM1_A
ADUM1_B 17 TNM_Y_/B 48 17 TNM_Y_/B 48 ADUM1_B
ADUM1_XA 16 TNHM_A 47 18 TNHM_A 49 ADUM1_XA
ADUM1_XB 15 TNHM_B 46 19 TNHM_B 50 ADUM1_XB
ADUM1_CNT 14 TNHM_/A 45 20 TNHM_/A 51 ADUM1_CNT
ADUM2_A 13 TNHM_/B 44 21 TNHM_/B 52 ADUM2_A
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the LCC transport section.

ADUM2_B 12 TNHM_Y_EN 43 22 TNHM_Y_EN 53 ADUM2_B
Transports paper fed from the LCC to the transport roller 15.
ADUM2_XA 11 TNHM_M_EN 42 23 TNHM_M_EN 54 ADUM2_XA
ADUM2_XB 10 TNHM_C_EN 41 24 TNHM_C_EN 55 ADUM2_XB
ADUM2_CNT 9 TNHM_K_EN 40 25 TNHM_K_EN 56 ADUM2_CNT
PFM_CLK 8 FUMCM_A 39 26 FUMCM_A 57 PFM_CLK
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
PFM_EN 7 FUMCM_B 38 27 FUMCM_B 58 PFM_EN
PFM_CNT 6 FUMCM_XA 37 28 FUMCM_XA 59 PFM_CNT
LCCM_A 5 FUMCM_XB 36 29 FUMCM_XB 60 LCCM_A
LCCM_B 4 PRM_A 35 30 PRM_A 61 LCCM_B
LCCM_XA 3 PRM_B 34 31 PRM_B 62 LCCM_XA
LCCM_XB 2 PRM_XA 33 32 PRM_XA 63 LCCM_XB
LCCM_CNT 1 64 LCCM_CNT
CN-10
B40B-PNDZS SMR-04V-NSMP-04V-NC
LCCC 2 3 LCCC 3
24V4 4 4 24V4 4
SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-N
1 LCCC 1
CN-8 2 24V4 2
B6B-XH-A
LCCM
B6B-PASK-1
LCCM_/B 1 1 LCCM_A
LCCM_B 2 2 +24V
LCCC
LCCM_A 3 3 LCCM_/A
LCCM_/A 4 4 LCCM_B
DRIVER PWB
+24V 5 5 +24V
+24V 6 6 LCCM_/B
PAP-06V-S XHP-6
1
No.
LCCM
Signal name
1
(4) PS lower unit
Name
Name
LCC transport motor
CN-10 CN-8
502790-6491 502790-6491
GND 64 1 GND

LCCM

Drives the LCC transport section and the PS lower section.
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
CN-8
PCU PWB
B6B-PASK-1 B6B-XH-A
LCCM_/B 1 1 LCCM_A
LCCM_B 2 2 +24V
LCCM_A 3 3 LCCM_/A
LCCM_/A 4 4 LCCM_B
DRIVER PWB
+24V 5 5 +24V
+24V 6 6 LCCM_/B
PAP-06V-S XHP-6
(5) PS unit
B6B-PH-K-S CN-7
PFM_/A 1 BU12P-TZ-S B12B-CZHK-1
+24V 2 1 PFM_B 12 1 PFM_B
PFM_/B 3 2 PFM_/B 11 2 PFM_/B
PFM_A 4 3 PFM_/A 10 3 PFM_/A
+24V 5 4 PFM_A 9 4 PFM_A
PFM_B 6 5 +24V 8 5 +24V
PHR-6 6 +24V 7 6 +24V
7 RRM_B 6 7 RRM_B
8 RRM_/B 5 8 RRM_/B
9 RRM_/A 4 9 RRM_/A
10 RRM_A 3 10 RRM_A
11 +24V 2 11 +24V
12 +24V 1 12 +24V
CZHR-12V-S 12CZ-6H 12CZ-6H
S06B-XASK-1
RRM_A 1
+24V 2
RRM_/A 3
RRM_B 4
+24V 5
RRM_/B 6
XAP-6
PFM
RRM
3
PPD2 PCU PWB DRIVER PWB

PPD1 CN-8
502790-6491
CN-10
502790-6491
CN-13
GND 1 64 GND
BU09P-TZ-S B24B-CZWHK-B-1 WEBM2_A
WEBM2_A 34 TNM_K_B 3 62 TNM_K_B 31
1 GND 9 A-4 GND WEBM2_B 35 TNM_K_/A 4 61 TNM_K_/A 30 WEBM2_B
2 PTD 8 A-5 PTD WEBM1_A 36 TNM_K_/B 5 60 TNM_K_/B 29 WEBM1_A
3 5VNPD 7 A-6 5VNPD WEBM1_B 37 TNM_C_A 6 59 TNM_C_A 28 WEBM1_B
4 GND 6 A-7 GND RRM_CLK 38 TNM_C_B 7 58 TNM_C_B 27 RRM_CLK
5 PPD2 5 A-8 PPD2 RRM_EN 39 TNM_C_/A 8 57 TNM_C_/A 26 RRM_EN
GND 3 6 5VNPD 4 A-9 5VNPD RRM_CNT1 40 TNM_C_/B 9 56 TNM_C_/B 25 RRM_CNT1
PPD2 2 7 GND 3 A-10 GND RRM_CNT2 41 TNM_M_A 10 55 TNM_M_A 24 RRM_CNT2
5VNPD 1 8 PPD1 2 A-11 PPD1 POM_A 42 TNM_M_B 11 54 TNM_M_B 23 POM_A
03XR-6H-P 9 5VNPD 1 A-12 5VNPD POM_B 43 TNM_M_/A 12 53 TNM_M_/A 22 POM_B
09CZ-6H 09CZ-6H 12CZ-6Y POM_XA 44 TNM_M_/B 13 52 TNM_M_/B 21 POM_XA
1 GND
PPD1
3
2 POM_CNT 46 TNM_Y_B 15 50 TNM_Y_B 19 POM_CNT
5VNPD+R 1 ADUM1_A 47 TNM_Y_/A 16 49 TNM_Y_/A 18 ADUM1_A
03XR-6H-P ADUM1_B 48 TNM_Y_/B 17 48 TNM_Y_/B 17 ADUM1_B

PFM Transport motor Transports and drives the registration roller.
PPD1 Registration pre-pre-detection Detects the paper in front of transport roller 17.
PPD2 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of registration roller.
RRM Registration motor Drives the registration roller and controls ON/OFF.

1 Transport roller 17 (Drive) Transports paper from transport roller 13 to registration roller.
2 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper, and adjusts the relative
relations between images and paper.
3 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
paper.
Transport paper from each paper feed section to the registration roller with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch controls
ON/OFF of each transport roller. The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images. The registration roller is driven by the trans-
port motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

6
7
CN6
TX25-120P-6ST-H1E
CN1
4
D-GND 1
S3B-PH-K-S
#P0_K_AK1 61 TH1 2
1 24V
D-GND 62 TH2 3
2 nFANRDY
3.3V 63 D-GND 4
3 PGND
WP_Y 64 nBD 5
PHNR-3
SCL_Y 65 D-GND 6
4
SDA_Y 66 +24V1 7
WP_M 67 +24V1 8
SCL_M 68 +24V1 9
SDA_M 69 P-GND 10
WP_C 70 P-GND 11
CN3
SCL_C 71 P-GND 12
B5B-ZR-SM4-TF S5B-PH-K-S
SDA_C 72 nPOLY_START 13
+24V 1 1 24V WP_K 73 nPOLY_LOCK 14
GND 2 2 PGND SCL_K 74 nPOLY_CK 15
/START 3 3 nPOLY_START SDA_K 75 D-GND 16
/LOCKED nPOLY_LOCK
4
4 4
D-GND 76 FAN_24V 17
EXT.CLK 5 5 nPOLY_CK
LSUFM
D-GND 77 FAN_nREADY 18
ZHR-5 PHR-5
5VLD 78 P-GND 19
Board to Board
D-GND 79 #P2_AK2 20
5VLD 80 #P1_AK2 21
D-GND 81 #P0_AK2 22
5
5VLD 82 SDCLK 23
4
D-GND 83 P4_Y_AK2 24
#P0_C_AK1 84 P3_Y_AK2 25
CN1 CN4 #P2_AK1 85 nINT_Y_AK2 26

S4B-PH-K-S S7B-PH-K-S #P1_AK1 86 MSET_Y_AK2 27
#P0_M_AK1 87 P4_Y_AK1 28
10
+5V 1 4 1 7 +5V_LD
DGND 2 3 2 6 GND DT_Y3+ 88 P3_Y_AK1 29
nBD 3 2 3 5 BD DT_Y3- 89 nINT_Y_AK1 30
4
DT_Y4+ 90 nLDERR_Y 31
PGM
DGND 4 1 (NC) 4 4 GND
5
04CK-6H-PC TH1 DT_Y4- 91 MSET_Y_AK1 32

12
5 3
(Reverse type) 6 2 GND DT_Y1+ 92 P4_K_AK2 33
7 1 TH2 DT_Y1- 93 P3_K_AK2 34
3
07CK-6H-PC DT_Y2+ 94 nINT_K_AK2 35
(Reverse type) DT_Y2- 95 MSET_K_AK2 36
CN1 S3B-PH-K-S DT_K3+ 96 P4_K_AK1 37
2
(NC) 1 3 (NC) DT_K3- 97 P3_K_AK1 38
GND 2 2 DT_K4+ 98 nINT_K_AK1 39
TH1 3 1 DT_K4- 99 nLDERR_K 40
8
03CK-6H-PC DT_K1+ 100 MSET_K_AK1 41
5
(Reverse type) DT_K1- 101 P4_C_AK2 42
LD PWB
12
DT_K2+ 102 P3_C_AK2 43
DT_K2- 103 nINT_C_AK2 44
DT_C3+ 104 MSET_C_AK2 45
DT_C3- 105 P4_C_AK1 46
DT_C4+ 106 P3_C_AK1 47
DT_C4- 107 nINT_C_AK1 48
DT_C1+ 108
1
nLDERR_C 49
DT_C1- 109 MSET_C_AK1 50
9
DT_C2+ 110
5
P4_M_AK2 51
DT_C2- 111 P3_M_AK2 52
DT_M3+ 112 nINT_M_AK2 53
DT_M3- 113 MSET_M_AK2 54
DT_M4+ 114 P4_M_AK1 55
11
CN1 S3B-PH-K-S DT_M4- 115 P3_M_AK1 56
DT_M1+ 116 nINT_M_AK1 57
(NC) 1 3 (NC)
DT_M1- 117 nLDERR_M 58
GND 2 2
DT_M2+ 118 MSET_M_AK1 59
TH2 3 1
DT_M2- 119 D-GND 60
03CK-6H-PC
(Reverse type) #P0_Y_AK1 120
LSU section
6.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
TH1_LSU LSU temperature sensor 1 Detects the temperature in the LSU.
TH2_LSU LSU temperature sensor 2 Detects the temperature in the LSU.

1 LD PWB Controls drive and power of the laser diode.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams, and focuses on the polygon mirror. (sub scanning direction)
3 f lens 1 Converges laser beams on the OPC drum, making the laser scan speeds at both ends and the center the same.
4 Reflection mirror Assures the optical path for laser.
5 f lens 3 Converges laser beams on the OPC drum, making the laser scan speeds at both ends and the center the same.
6 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
7 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
8 LSU control PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control
signal and the MFPC PWB image data.
9 LSU thermistor 1 Measures the temperature in LSU.
10 LSU thermistor 2 Measures the temperature in LSU.
11 Collimator lens Arranges laser beams.
12 Skew adjustment screw This screw is used to adjust the radiation angle of laser beams for the OPC drum. By turning this adjustment screw,
the image skew can be adjusted.

B. Operational descriptions Main scanning direction
(1) Outline
REAR
Image data sent from the image process circuit are converted into
Scanning
laser beams which are radiated to the surface of the OPC drum. direction
In this model, 4-laser system is employed where 4-laser diodes for
each color are radiated. The LSU unit is composed of the optical
element from laser to the polygon mirror, the primary system
including the mirror which assures light path, and the main scan-
ning system.
(2) Composition
Primary system Y
M
C
BK
FRONT
* Though four laser beams are actually radiated for one color, they
are illustrated as one beam.
PGM (3) Outline of LSU specifications
Scanning width: 329mm
Resolution: 1200dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 80µm, Sub scan = 50 to 80µm
Laser power: Max.0.375mW/1Beam
LD wavelength: 775 - 800nm
Scanning system
LD1 - 4 LD1 - 4 LD1 - 4 LD1 - 4
* Though four laser beams are actually radiated for one color, they
are illustrated as one beam.

7. OPC drum section
B7B-PASK-1 7-292254-1
CN-19
B23B-CSRK
PCU PWB
24V3 1 1 24V3 11 1 24V3
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 10 2 P-GND
(NC) 3 (NC) 3 DM_M_CK 9 3 DM_M_CK
DM_M_CK 4 4 DM_M_D 8 4 DM_M_D
DM_M_D 5 5 CW/CCW 7 5 CW/CCW
CW/CCW 6 6 DM_M_LD 6 6 DM_M_LD
DM_M_LD 7 CN-23(1/3)
PAP-07V-S B40B-PNDZS
9 DHPD_M 3 9 DHPD_M INT24V2 1
10 GND 2 10 GND GND 3
B7B-PASK-1 11 5VNPD+R 1 11 5VNPD+R 24V3 5
24V3 1 1-179228-1 11XR-6H-P /MC_DATA 7
P-GND 2 12 24V3 /MC_CLK 9
7-292254-1
(NC) 3 (NC) 24V3 13 P-GND /MC_LD 11
1 11
DM_C_CK 4 P-GND 14 DM_C_CK /MC_LD2 13
2 10
DM_C_D 5 DM_C_CK 9 15 DM_C_D HV_REM_MC 15
3
CW/CCW 6 4 DM_C_D 8 16 CW/CCW MCBKERR 17
DM_C_LD 7 CW/CCW 17 DM_C_LD MCCLERR 19
5 7
PAP-07V-S 6 DM_C_LD 6
B7B-PASK-1 20 DHPD_C
24V3 1 9 DHPD_C 3 21 GND PNDP-40V-Z
P-GND 2 10 GND 2 22 5VNPD+R
(NC) 3 (NC) 11 5VNPD+R 1 (NC) 23 (NC)
DM_Y_CK 4 23CSR-8PK 7-292254-1
1-179228-1 11XR-6H-P
DM_Y_D 5 7-292254-1 11 24V3 1
CN-20 CN-18
CW/CCW 6 1 24V3 11 B31B-CSRK B31B-CSRK 10 P-GND 2
DM_Y_LD 7 2 P-GND 10 1 24V3 24V3 1 9 DM_K_CK 3
PAP-07V-S 3 DM_Y_CK 9 2 P-GND P-GND 2 8 DM_K_D 4
CW/CCW B7B-PASK-1
4 DM_Y_D 8 3 DM_Y_CK DM_K_CK 3 7 5
1 24V3
5 CW/CCW 7 4 DM_Y_D DM_K_D 4 6 DM_K_LD 6
2 P-GND
6 DM_Y_LD 6 5 CW/CCW CW/CCW 5
(NC) 3 (NC)
7 DVC_Y 5 6 DM_Y_LD DM_K_LD 6 4 DM_K_CK
8 24V3 4 7 DVC_Y 3 DHPD_K 9 DM_K_D
5
PROCESS UN (YELLOW) 9 DHPD_Y 3 8 24V3 2 GND 10
CW/CCW
6
10 GND 2 9 DHPD_Y DHPD_K 9 1 5VNPD+R 11 DM_K_LD
7
GND 3 11 5VNPD+R 1 10 GND GND 10 11XR-6H-P 1-179228-1
PAP-07V-S
GND 2 QR/P8-8*-C 1-179228-1 11XR-6H-P 11 5VNPD+R 5VNPD+R 11 7-292254-0
DL_Y 1 (NC) 8 (NC) 7-292254-0
8 (NC) 10 CCMD_K 1
PHR-3 7 GND 7 1 CCMD_Y 10 12 CCMD_Y CCMD_K 12 GND PROCESS UN (BLACK)
9 2
6 DL_Y 6 2 GND 9 13 GND GND 13 QR/P8-8*-C
GND 3 8 5VNPD+R 3
5 DL2_Y 5 3 5VNPD+R 8 14 5VNPD+R 5VNPD+R 14 CCM_K_A (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC) 3 GND
GND 2 7 4
DL2_Y 4 CCHPD_Y 4 4 CCM_Y_A 7 15 CCM_Y_A CCM_K_A 15 CCM_K_B 7 GND 7 2 GND
1 6 5
3 5VNPD+R 3 5 CCM_Y_B 6 16 CCM_Y_B CCM_K_B 16 GND 6 DL_K 6 1 DL_K
PHR-3 5 6
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 6 GND 5 17 GND GND 17 DL_K 5 DL2_K 5 PHR-3
4 7
GND 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 7 DL_Y 4 18 DL_Y DL_K 18 3 DL2_K 8 4 CCHPD_K 4
CCHPD_Y 2 8 DL2_Y 3 19 DL2_Y 2_K
DL 19 3 GND
P S 2 CCHPD_K 9 3 5VNPD+R 3
5VNPD+R 3 9 CCHPD_Y 2 20 CCHPD_Y CCHPD_K 20 2 GND
1 5VNPD+R 10 (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC)
PHR-3 10 5VNPD+R 1 21 5VNPD+R 5VNPD+R 21 1 DL2_K
(NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC)
10XR-6H-P 1-179228-0 PHR-3
1-179228-0 10XR-6H-P S P
7-292254-0 7-292254-0 1 GND
22 CCMD_M CCMD_C 22
PROCESS UN (MAGENTA) 1 CCMD_M 10 10 CCMD_C 1
23 GND GND 23 2 CCHPD_K
QR/P8-8*-C 2 GND 9 9 GND 2
24 5VNPD+R 5VNPD+R 24 3 5VNPD+R
GND 3 (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC) 3 5VNPD+R 8 8 5VNPD+R 3
25 CCM_M_A CCM_C_A 25 PHR-3
GND 2 7 GND 7 4 CCM_M_A 7 7 CCM_C_A 4
26 CCM_M_B CCM_C_B 26
DL_M 1 6 DL_M 6 5 CCM_M_B 6 6 CCM_C_B 5
DL2_M GND 27 GND GND 27 GND
PHR-3 5 5 6 5 5 6
28 DL_M DL_C 28
4 CCHPD_M 4 7 DL_M 4 4 DL_C 7 PROCESS UN (CYAN)
GND 3 5VNPD+R 3 DL2_M 29 DL2_M DL2_C 29 DL2_C QR/P8-8*-C
3 8 3 3 8
GND 2 30 CCHP_M CCHPD_C 30 (NC)
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 9 CCHP_M 2 2 CCHPD_C 9 (NC) 8 8 (NC) 3 GND
DL2_M 1 31 5VNPD+R 5VNPD+R 31 GND
(NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 10 5VNPD+R 1 1 5VNPD+R 10 7 7 2 GND
PHR-3 1-179228-0 10XR-6H-P 31CSR-8PK 31CSR-8PK 6 DL_C 6 1 DL_C
P S 10XR-6H-P 1-179228-0
GND 1 5 DL2_C 5 PHR-3
CCHPD_M 2 4 CCHPD_C 4
3 GND
5VNPD+R 3 3 5VNPD+R 3
(NC) 2 GND
PHR-3 (NC) 2 2 (NC)
(NC) 1 DL2_C
(NC) 1 1 (NC)
PHR-3
S P
1 GND
2 CCHPD_C
3 5VNPD+R
DM_Y DHPD_Y 1
PHR-3
D-GND 2 CN-1
5VNPD+R 3 S3B-PH-K-S
179228-3 CCM_Y_A+ 1
CCM_Y_B- 3
DHPD_Y PHR-3
CCMD_Y 1 DHPD_M 1
CCM_Y D-GND
5VNPD+R 3
2 D-GND
5VNPD+R
2
CN-1
DL2_Y 5 179228-3
3
179228-3
S3B-PH-K-S
CCM_M_A+ 1
DM_M CCMD_M 1
CCM_M_B- 3
PHR-3
1 D-GND
5VNPD+R
2
3
DHPD_M 179228-3 DHPD_C 1
D-GND 2
5VNPD+R 3
CCMD_Y CCM_M 179228-3
CN-1
4 DL2_M S3B-PH-K-S
1 DM_C CCM_C_A+ 1
CCM_C_B- 3
DL_Y PHR-3
DHPD_C CCMD_C 1
CCMD_M D-GND
5VNPD+R
2
3
CCHPD_Y 3 CCM_C 179228-3
DL2_C DHPD_K 1
GB-Y D-GND 2
SRA-21T-3
2 1 DM_K 5VNPD+R 3
179228-3
DL_M
SRA-21T-3
DHPD_K
5 CCMD_C CCM_K
CCHPD_M 3 DL2_K CN-1
S3B-PH-K-S
MC-Y SRA-21T-3 2 1 CCM_K_A+ 1

CCM_K_B- 3
PHR-3
SRA-21T-3
GB-M DL_C CCMD_K 1
D-GND 2
5VNPD+R 3
5 CCMD_K 179228-3
CCHPD_C 3
MC PWB MC-K MC-M 2
PS-250
SRA-21T-3 GB-C DL_K
GB-K 1
CN-1 VHR-2N
B10B-PASK-1
1 INT24V2
2 GND
MC-C
PS-250 SRA-21T-3 5
3 /MC_DATA GB-C 1
4 /MC_CLK
VHR-2N CCHPD_K 3
5 /MC_LD MC-M
6 /MC_LD2
7 HV_REM_MC
PS-250
MC-C SRA-21T-3
2
GB-M 1
8 MCBKERR VHR-2N
9 MCCLERR
MC-Y
SRA-21T-3 GB-K
10 24V3 PS-250
PAP-10V-S
GB-Y 1
VHR-2N
MC-K

CCHPD_KCMY Charger cleaner home position sensor (K, C, M, Y) Detects the charger cleaner home position. (CCHP_KCMY)
CCMD_KCMY Charger cleaner shift sensor (K, C, M, Y) Detects and controls shift of the charger cleaner.
DHPD_KCMY OPC drum rotation sensor (K, C, M, Y) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum.
DL Discharge lamp Discharges the OPC drum surface.
DL2 After-transfer discharge lamp Discharges the OPC drum surface immediately after transfer.
DM_KCMY Drum motor Drives the cyan OPC drum.
GB Grid bias The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
MC Main charger The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.

1 OPC drum Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
3 Waste toner transport screw Transports remaining toner in the OPC drum unit to the waste toner collection section.
4 Discharge lamp Reduces the surface potential of the OPC drum.
5 After-transfer discharge lamp Reduces the surface potential of the OPC drum immediately after transfer.
B. Operational descriptions 2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by Aluminum
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. OPC drum layer
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main CGL
charger. CTL
Aluminum
layer
OPC drum
CGL
CTL
Laser beams
OPC drum When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
Screen grid High voltage unit negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
Main corona unit
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- radiated.
age applied to the screen grid. As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
cleaning blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.

4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL
Lens
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,

light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.

8. Toner supply section
(1) Toner supply section
B6B-PH-K-S
TNM_Y_/B 1 6
TNM_Y_/A 2 5
+24V 3 4 CN-1
+24V 4 3 BU18P-TZ-S B18B-CZHK-1
TNM_Y_B 5 2 1 TNM_C_/B 18 1 TNM_C_/B
TNM_Y_A 6 1 2 TNM_C_/A 17 2 TNM_C_/A
06CK-6H-PC 3 +24V 16 3 +24V
(reverse type) 4 +24V 15 4 +24V
5 TNM_C_B 14 5 TNM_C_B
B6B-PH-K-S 6 TNM_C_A 13 6 TNM_C_A
TNM_M_/B 1 6 7 TNM_M_/B 12 7 TNM_M_/B
TNM_M_/A 2 5 8 TNM_M_/A 11 8 TNM_M_/A
+24V 3 4 9 +24V 10 9 +24V
+24V 4 3 10 +24V 9 10 +24V
TNM_M_B 5 2 11 TNM_M_B 8 11 TNM_M_B
TNM_M_A 6 1 12 TNM_M_A 7 12 TNM_M_A
06CK-6H-PC 13 TNM_Y_/B 6 13 TNM_Y_/B
(reverse type) 14 TNM_Y_/A 5 14 TNM_Y_/A
15 +24V 4 15 +24V
B6B-PH-K-S
16 +24V 3 16 +24V
TNM_C_/B 1 6
17 TNM_Y_B 2 17 TNM_Y_B
TNM_C_/A 2 5
18 TNM_Y_A 1 18 TNM_Y_A
+24V 3 4
18CZ-6H 18CZ-6H
+24V 4 3
TNM_C_B 5 2
TNM_C_A 6 1
06CK-6H-PC
(reverse type)
CN-2
B6B-PH-K-S BU12P-TZ-S B12B-CZHK-1
TNHM_K_/B 1 6 1 TNHM_K_/B 12 1 T NHM_K_/B
TNHM_K_/A 2 5 2 TNHM_K_/A 11 2 T NHM_K_/A
+24V 3 4
TNM_Y +24V 4 3
3
4
+24V
+24V
10
9
3 +24V
4 +24V
TNHM_K_B 5 2 5 TNHM_K_B 8 5 TNHM_K_B
TNHM_K_A 6 1 6 TNHM_K_A 7 6 TNHM_K_A
TNM_M 06CK-6H-PC
(reverse type)
7
8
TNM_K_/B
TNM_K_/A
6
5
7 TNM_K_/B
8 TNM_K_/A
9 +24V 4 9 +24V
B6B-PH-K-S 10 +24V
10 +24V 3
TNM_C TNM_K_/B
TNM_K_/A
1 6
2 5
11
12
TNM_K_B
TNM_K_A
2
1
11 TNM_K_B
12 TNM_K_A
+24V 3 4
12CZ-6H 12CZ-6H 12CZ-6H
+24V 4 3
TNM_K_B 5 2
TNM_K_A 6 1
06CK-6H-PC
(reverse type)
TNM_K
B6B-PH-K-S
THHM_Y_/B 1 6
TNHM_Y_/A 2 5
+24V 3 4 CN-3
+24V 4 3 BU19P-TZ-S B18B-CZHK-1
TNHM_Y_B 5 2 1 TNHM_Y_/B 19 1 TNHM_Y_/B
TNHM_Y_A 6 1 2 TNHM_Y_/A 18 2 TNHM_Y_/A
06CK-6H-PC 3 +24V 17 3 +24V
(reverse type) 4 +24V 16 4 +24V
5 TNHM_Y_B 15 5 TNHM_Y_B
B6B-PH-K-S 6 TNHM_Y_A 14 6 TNHM_Y_A
TNHM_M_/B 1 6 7 TNHM_M_/B 13 7 TNHM_M_/B
TNHM_M_/A 2 5 8 TNHM_M_/A 12 8 TNHM_M_/A
+24V 3 4 9 +24V 11 9 +24V
+24V 4 3 10 +24V 10 10 +24V
11 TNHM_M_B 9 11 TNHM_M_B
TBFM TNHM_M_B
TNHM_M_A
5 2
6 1 12 TNHM_M_A 8 12 TNHM_M_A
13 TNHM_C_/B 7 13 TNHM_C_/B
06CK-6H-PC
(reverse type) 14 TNHM_C_/A 6 14 TNHM_C_/A
15 +24V 5 15 +24V
B6B-PH-K-S 16 +24V 4 16 +24V
TNHM_C_/B 1 6 17 TNHM_C_B 3 17 TNHM_C_B
TNHM_C_/A 2 5 18 TNHM_C_A 2 18 TNHM_C_A
+24V 3 4 (NC) 19 (NC) 1 (NC) 18CZ-6H
TNHM_Y +24V
TNHM_C_B
4 3
5 2
19CZ-6H 19CZ-6H
TNHM_C_A 6 1
06CK-6H-PC
TNHM_M (reverse type)
TNHM_C
TFSD_Y TNHM_K
TFSD_M
TFSD_C
TFSD_K
DRIVER PWB
PCU PWB CN-8 CN-10
502790-6491 502790-6491
TBFM GND 1 64 GND
CN-12(1/2) WEBM2_B 35 TNM_K_/A 4 61 TNM_K_/A 30 WEBM2_B
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N B38B-PNDZS WEBM1_A 36 TNM_K_/B 5 60 TNM_K_/B 29 WEBM1_A
1 TBFM_V 1 2 TBFM_V WEBM1_B 37 TNM_C_A 6 59 TNM_C_A 28 WEBM1_B
2 TBFM_LD 2 4 TBFM_LD RRM_CLK 38 TNM_C_B 7 58 TNM_C_B 27 RRM_CLK
3 GND 3 6 GND RRM_EN 39 TNM_C_/A 8 57 TNM_C_/A 26 RRM_EN
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N POM_B 43 TNM_M_/A 12 53 TNM_M_/A 22 POM_B
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
CN-21 POM_XB 45 TNM_Y_A 14 51 TNM_Y_A 20 POM_XB
TFSD_K 2 2 TFSD_K 2 7-292254-3 B29B-CSRK
GND 3 3 GND 3
DF3-3S-2C 2 5VNPD 12 18 5VNPD ADUM1_B 48 TNM_Y_/B 17 48 TNM_Y_/B 17 ADUM1_B
3 TFSD_K 11 19 TFSD_K ADUM1_XA 49 TNHM_A 18 47 TNHM_A 16 ADUM1_XA
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N 4 GND 10 20 GND ADUM1_XB 50 TNHM_B 19 46 TNHM_B 15 ADUM1_XB
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1 5 5VNPD 9 21 5VNPD ADUM1_CNT 51 TNHM_/A 20 45 TNHM_/A 14 ADUM1_CNT
TFSD_C 2 2 TFSD_C 2 6 TFSD_C 8 22 TFSD_C ADUM2_A 52 TNHM_/B 21 44 TNHM_/B 13 ADUM2_A
GND 3 3 GND 3 7 GND 7 23 GND ADUM2_B 53 TNHM_Y_EN 22 43 TNHM_Y_EN 12 ADUM2_B
DF3-3S-2C 8 GND 6 24 GND ADUM2_XA 54 TNHM_M_EN 23 42 TNHM_M_EN 11 ADUM2_XA
9 TFSD_M 5 25 TFSD_M ADUM2_XB 55 TNHM_C_EN 24 41 TNHM_C_EN 10 ADUM2_XB
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N 12 5VNPD 4 26 5VNPD ADUM2_CNT 56 TNHM_K_EN 25 40 TNHM_K_EN 9 ADUM2_CNT
GND 3 3 GND 3 11 GND 3 27 GND PFM_CLK 57 FUMCM_A 26 39 FUMCM_A 8 PFM_CLK
TFSD_M 2 2 TFSD_M 2 12 TFSD_Y 2 28 TFSD_Y PFM_EN 58 FUMCM_B 27 38 FUMCM_B 7 PFM_EN
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1 13 5VNPD 1 29 5VNPD PFM_CNT 59 FUMCM_XA 28 37 FUMCM_XA 6 PFM_CNT
DF3-3S-2C 1-179228-3 13XR-6H-P 29CSR-8PK LCCM_A 60 FUMCM_XB 29 36 FUMCM_XB 5 LCCM_A
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N LCCM_XA 62 PRM_B 31 34 PRM_B 3 LCCM_XA
GND 3 3 GND 3 LCCM_XB 63 PRM_XA 32 33 PRM_XA 2 LCCM_XB
TFSD_Y 2 2 TFSD_Y 2 LCCM_CNT 64 1 LCCM_CNT
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
DF3-3S-2C

TBFM Toner bottle fan motor Cools the surrounding of the toner bottle.
TFSD_KCMY Toner remaining quantity sensor Detects the remaining toner quantity.
TNHM_KCMY Hopper motor Transports toner.
TNM_KCMY Toner motor Transports toner from the toner bottle to the toner hopper unit.
(1) Outline
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a compact toner cartridge size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner hopper.
After supplying, full or empty status is detected at the toner hopper inside. Therefore even if the toner cartridge becomes empty, copying is not
immediately suspended because toner inside the toner hopper is used.

09SOR-RFC-MGD(LF)(SN) RFCP-09SO-RJ-M
6-292254-7
1 DVTYPSEL_K 7
09CSR-8PK(N)
(NC) 9
8
/DVCRU_K
RFCYP-09-Z-S
9 (NC)
DVTYPSEL_K 8 (NC)
DV UN
9.
2 GND 6 7 GND 7 (BLACK)
3 DVTYP_K 5 6 DVTYP_K 6
4 TSG_K# 4 5 TSG_K# 5 1 TSG_K#
CN-17 5 5VN 3 4 5VN 4 2 5VN
B29B-CSRK 6 TCS_K 2 3 TCS_K 3 3 TCS_K
7 GND 1 2 GND 2 4 GND
(NC) 1 (NC) 1 24V3(DVCRU_V) 1 (NC) 51021-0400
DVTYPSEL_K 2 07XR-6H-P 07XR-6H-P
GND 3
DVTYP_K 4
TSG_K# 5
5VN 6
09CSR-8PK(N) RFCYP-09-Z-S
TCS_K 7
GND 8 6-292254-7 (NC) 9 /DVCRU_C 9 (NC) DV UN
DVTYPSEL_C 9 1 DVTYPSEL_C 7 8 DVTYPSEL_C 8 (NC)
GND 10 2 GND 6 7 GND 7 (CYAN)
DVTYP_C 11 3 DVTYP_C 5 6 DVTYP_C 6
2
1
TSG_C# 12 4 TSG_C# 4 5 TSG_C# 5 1 TSG_C#
5VN 13 5 5VN 3 4 5VN 4 2 5VN
TCS_C 14 6 TCS_C 2 3 TCS_C 3 3 TCS_C
GND 15 7 GND 1 2 GND 2 4 GND
07XR-6H-P 07XR-6H-P (NC) 1 24V3(DVCRU_V) 1 (NC) 51021-0400
09CSR-8PK(N) RFCYP-09-Z-S
2
6-292254-7 (NC) 9 /DVCRU_M 9 (NC) DV UN
Developing section
DVTYPSEL_M 16 1 DVTYPSEL_M 7 8 DVTYPSEL_M 8 (NC)
1
GND 17 2 GND 6 7 GND 7 (MAGENTA)
DVTYP_M 18 3 DVTYP_M 5 6 DVTYP_M 6
TSG_M# 19 4 TSG_M# 4 5 TSG_M# 5 1 TSG_M#
5VN 20 5 5VN 3 4 5VN 4 2 5VN
TCS_M 21 6 TCS_M 2 3 TCS_M 3 3 TCS_M
DVTYPSEL_Y 23 07XR-6H-P 07XR-6H-P (NC) 1 24V3(DVCRU_V) 1 (NC) 51021-0400
GND 24
2
DVTYP_Y 25
TSG_Y# 26 09SOR-RFC-MGD(LF)(SN) RFCP-09SO-RJ-M
1
5VN 27 09CSR-8PK(N) RFCYP-09-Z-S
TCS_Y 28
6-292254-7 (NC) 9 /DVCRU_Y 9 (NC) DV UN
GND 29
1 DVTYPSEL_Y 7 8 DVTYPSEL_Y 8 (NC)
2 GND 6 7 GND 7 (YELLOW)
3 DVTYP_Y 5 6 DVTYP_Y 6
4 TSG_Y# 4 5 TSG_Y# 5 1 TSG_Y#
5 5VN 3 4 5VN 4 2 5VN
6 TCS_Y 2 3 TCS_Y 3 3 TCS_Y
29CSR-8PK 7 GND 1 2 GND 2 4 GND
1
07XR-6H-P 07XR-6H-P (NC) 1 24V3(DVCRU_V) 1 (NC) 51021-0400
CN-23(1/3)
B40B-PNDZS
INT24V2 1 SRA-21T-4
GND 3 CN-1
B10B-PASK-1
2
GB_Y
24V3 5 F.G
/MC_DATA 7 I
1 INT24V2
PCU PWB
3
/MC_CLK 9 2 GND
/MC_LD 11 3 /MC_DATA
/MC_LD2 13 4 /MC_CLK VHR-2N
HV_REM_MC 15 5 /MC_LD GB-Y 1
MCBKERR 17 6 /MC_LD2 VHR-2N
MCCLERR 19 7 HV_REM_MC GB-M 1
8 MCBKERR VHR-2N
9 MCCLERR GB-C
MC PWB
1
TCS_Y
10 24V3 VHR-2N
GB_M
CN-18
PAP-10V-S GB-K 1
3
B7B-PASK-1
B31B-CSRK 7-292254-1 1 24V3
24V3 1 11 24V3 1 2 P-GND
P-GND 2 10 P-GND 2 (NC) 3 (NC)
DM_K_CK 3 9 DM_K_CK 3 4 DM_K_CK
DM_K_D 4 8 DM_K_D 4 5 DM_K_D
CW/CCW 5 7 CW/CCW 5 6 CW/CCW
DVC_Y
DM_K_LD 6 6 DM_K_LD 6 7 DM_K_LD

DM_Y
DVC_K 7 5 DVC_K 7 PAP-07V-S

TCS_M
GB_C
24V3 8 4 24V3 8
3
DHPD_Y 9 3 DHPD_K 9 BU02P-TR-P-H
GND 10 2 GND 10 2 DVC_K 1
5VNPD+R 11 1 5VNPD+R 11 1 24V3 2
11XR-6H-P 1-179228-1 PHNR-02-H
02CK-6H-P
CN-19 B7B-PASK-1
B23B-CSRK 7-292254-1 1 24V3
24V3 1 11 24V3 1 2 P-GND
P-GND 2 10 P -GND 2 (NC) 3 (NC)

DVC_M
DM_M_CK 3 9 DM_M_CK 3 4 DM_M_CK

TCS_C
GB_K
DM_M_D
DM_M
4 8 DM_M_D 4 5 DM_M_D
DM_M_LD 6 6 DM_M_LD 6 7 DM_M_LD
DVC_M 7 5 DVC_M 7 PAP-07V-S
24V3 8 4 24V3 8
DHPD_M 9 3 DHPD_M 9 BU02P-TR-P-H
TCS_K
GND 10 2 GND 10 2 DVC_M 1

5VNPD+R 11 1 5VNPD+R 11 1 24V3 2
11XR-6H-P 1-179228-1 PHNR-02-H
02CK-6H-P
B7B-PASK-1
DVC_C
DM_C
7-292254-1 1 24V3
24V3 12 11 24V3 1 2 P-GND
P-GND 13 10 P-GND 2 (NC) 3 (NC)
DM_C_CK 14 9 DM_C_CK 3 4 DM_C_CK
DM_C_D 15 8 DM_C_D 4 5 DM_C_D
DM_C_LD 17 6 DM_C_LD 6 7 DM_C_LD
DVC_C 18 5 DVC_C 7 PAP-07V-S
24V3 19 4 24V3 8
DVC_K
DHPD_C 20 3 DHPD_C 9 BU02P-TR-P-H

GND 21 2 GND 10 2 DVC_C 1
DM_K
5VNPD+R 22 1 5VNPD+R 11 1 24V3 2

(NC) 23(NC) 11XR-6H-P 1-179228-1 PHNR-02-H
02CK-6H-P
CN-20 B7B-PASK-1
B31B-CSRK 7-292254-1 1 24V3
24V3 1 11 24V3 1 2 P-GND
P-GND 2 10 P-GND 2 (NC) 3 (NC)
DM_Y_CK 3 9 DM_Y_CK 3 4 DM_Y_CK
DM_Y_D 4 8 DM_Y_D 4 5 DM_Y_D
DM_Y_LD 6 6 DM_Y_LD 6 7 DM_Y_LD
DVC_Y 7 5 DVC_Y 7 PAP-07V-S
24V3 8 4 24V3 8
DHPD_Y 9 3 DHPD_Y 9 BU02P-TR-P-H
GND 10 2 GND 10 1 DVC_Y 2
5VNPD+R 11 1 5VNPD+R 11 2 24V3 1
11XR-6H-P 1-179228-1 PHNR-02-H
02CK-6H-P
DM_KCMY Drum motor Drives the developer and the drum.
DVC_KCMY Development drive clutch Clutch for development drive
GB-KCMY Developing bias Bias for development
TCS_KCMY Toner density sensor Controls the toner density in the developing unit.

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Mixing roller Mixing of developer
3 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner
B. Operational descriptions (1) Preliminary mixing system

This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen- The preliminary mixing section is extended for rapid mixing of sup-
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner. ply toner with developer and stable toner density.
Preliminary mixing section
(2) Developer refresh system

Developer deterioration suppression technology for the purpose of
charging stability and long-life of developer.
Waste developer is discharged from the developer exit port little by
little as shown in the figure below to maintain developer fresh.
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
Developer exit port

10. Transfer section
(1) Transfer section
PCU PWB
CN-13 CN-6
B29B-CSRK
BU03P-TZ-S B24B-CZWHK-B-1
Reserve_OUT1 29 (NC) 7-292254-3
1 5VNPD+R 3 A-1 5VNPD+R
2 GND 2 A-2 GND 24V4 28 1 24V4 13
3 1TUD_K 1 A-3 1TUD_K GND 27 2 GND 12
03CZ-6Y 03CZ-6H 5VN 26 3 5VN 11
WTM_D 25 4 WTM_D 10
WTM_CK 24 5 WTM_CK 9
B07B-PASK-1 GND(WTM_CW) 23 6 GND(WTM_CW) 8
24V WTM_LD 22 7 WTM_LD 7
1
P-GND 24V4 5VN 21
2 B-1
BRAKE P-GND DSW_CS 20
3 (NC) B-2
BTM_CK BTM_CK GND 19
4 B-3
BTM_D BTM_D 5VN 18
5 B-4
DSW_RL 17 13XR-6H-P 1-173977-3
CW/CCW 6 B-5 CW/CCW
BTM_LD BTM_LD GND 16
7 B-6
PAP-07V-S B-7 24V4
B-8 1TURC
B-9 24V4
B-10 1TURRC
SMR-06V-N SMP-06V-NC B-11 PTCCM_A
1 24V4 1 B-12 PTCCM_B 29CSR-8PK
2 1TURC 2 CZHR-12V-S
3 24V4 3 (2/2)CN-12
4 1TURRC 4 B38B-PNDZS
5 PTCCM_A 5 INT24V2 38
6 PTCCM_B 6 GND 36
CN-16
/TC2_DATA 34
B21B-CSRK
/TC2_CLK 32
/TC2_LD
HV_REM_TC2
30 2TC PWB
BU21P-TCS-LE 28 CN-1
4 PTCCHPD 2TC_ERR 26 B08B-PASK-1
3 GND PTC_ERR 24 1 INT24V2
PNDP-38V-Z 2 GND SRA-21T-3
2 5VNPD+R
4 PTCCHPD 18 (NC) 1 (NC) 3 /TC2_DATA 2TC
3 GND 19 21CSR-8PK 4 /TC2_CLK PS-250
2 5VNPD+R 20 CN-23(2/3) 5 /TC2_LD
(NC) 1 (NC) 21 (NC) B40B-PNDZS 6 HV_REM_TC2 SRA-21T-3
21CSR-8PK 21CSR-8PK INT24V2 2 7 2TC_ERR
PTC
GND 4 8 PTC_ERR
CN-23(1/3) /TC1_DATA PS-250
6 PAP-08V-S
B40B-PNDZS /TC1_CLK 8
BU03P-TZ-S /TC1_LD 10
HV_REM_MC
1 5VNPD+R
2 GND
3
2 21 GND 1TCS-ERR
12
14
1TC PWB SRA-21T-3
3 1TUD_CL 1 23 1TUD_CL 1TCO-ERR 16 CN-1 1TC-K
03CZ-6Y CZHR-03V-S 25 5VNPD+R B08B-PASK-1 PS-250
1 INT24V2
SRA-21T-3
2 GND
PNDP-40V-Z PNDP-40V-Z 3 /TC1_DATA 1TC-C
4 /TC1_CLK PS-250
5 /TC1_LD SRA-21T-3
6 HV_REM_MC
7 1TCS-ERR 1TC-M
8 1TCO-ERR PS-250
PAP-08V-S SRA-21T-3
3 5VNPD+R
1TC-Y
2 GND
PS-250
1 1TUD_CL
03XR-6H-P
5VNPD+R 3
GND 2
6
03XR-6H-P
1TUD_K 1
03XR-6H-P
SMR-02V-NSMP-02V-NC
1
2
3
1TURC 1 24V4
2 1TURC
1
2
7 1TC_Y 1TUD_CL
PTCCHPD
5VNPD+R
1TURRC
GND
SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC
1 24V4 1
1TC_M 2 1TURRC 2
8
4 1TC_C BTM
1TUD_K
1TC_K CN-1
S3B-PH-K-S
1 PTCCM_A 3
2 PACCM_B 1
4 PHR-3
3 PTCCM
5
3 PTC
3
2TC
3
9
15
12
10
14 PTCCHPD
13
11
16
B8B-ZR 6-292254-7
24V4 8 7 24V4 1
GND 6 GND
WTM 5VN
7
6 5 5VN
2
3
WTM_D 5 4 WTM_D 4
WTM_CK 4 3 WTM_CK 5
GND(WTM_CW) 3 2 GND(WTM_CW) 6
WTM_LD 2 1 WTM_LD 7
(NC) 1 (NC) 179228-7 173977-7
ZHR-8

1TC-CMY Primary transfer output (CMY) Color transfer high voltage
1TC-K Primary transfer output (K) B/W transfer high voltage
1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL) Color transfer roller position detection
1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK) B/W transfer roller position detection (1TUD_BK)
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
1TURRC Primary transfer separation reverse clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
2CL Secondary transfer brush roller output Cleans the secondary transfer section.
2DR Secondary transfer drive roller output Reduces toner splash in separation.
2TC Secondary belt transfer output Secondary transfer high voltage
BTM Transfer belt motor Drives the transfer belt.
PTC PTC output PTC high voltage
PTCCHPD PTC cleaner home position sensor Detects the PTC cleaner home position. (PTCHP)
PTCCM PTC cleaning motor Drives the PTC cleaner.
WTM Waste toner drive motor Transports waste toner.

1 Primary transfer cleaner blade Clean and remove residual toner from the primary transfer belt.
2 Primary transfer belt Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt.
3 Primary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt.
4 Primary transfer idle roller Transfer belt follower.
5 Primary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
6 Primary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
7 Primary transfer belt tension roller Apply a tension to the transfer belt.
8 Belt CL brush Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
9 PTC opposing roller Roller to flow a PTC current.
10 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
11 Secondary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
12 Secondary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
13 Secondary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
14 PTC unit Reduces the positive charges on the primary transfer belt.
15 Registration backup roller Holds the belt position in the registration section in the process control.
16 Secondary transfer blade Cleans remaining toner on the secondary transfer belt.

(2) Process registration sensor section
6-292254-2
1 24V3 2 1 24V3 1
PCU PWB 2 PCSS 1 2 PCSS 2
02XR-6H-P 179228-2 SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
CN-16
B21B-CSRK BU21P-TCS-LE
24V3 21 1 24V3 21
PCSS 20 2 PCSS 20
5VN 19 3 5VN 19 1 5VN
GND 18 4 GND 18 2 D-GND
REGS_R_LED 17 5 REGS_R_LED 17 3 REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R 16 6 REGS_R 16 4 REGS_R
PCS_R 15 7 PCS_R 15 5 PCS_R
5VN 14 8 5VN 14 05XR-6H-P
GND 13 9 GND 13
REGS_C_LED 12 10 REGS_C_LED 12
REGS_C 11 11 REGS_C 11 1 5VN
PCS_C 10 12 PCS_C 10 2 D-GND
5VN 9 13 5VN 9 3 REGS_C_LED#
GND 8 14 GND 8 4 REGS_C
REGS_F_LED 7 15 REGS_F_LED 7 5 PCS_C
REGS_F 6 16 REGS_F 6 05XR-6H-P
PCS_F 5 17 PCS_F 5
PTCCHPD 4 18 PTCCHPD 4
GND 3 19 GND 3 1 5VNPD
5 VNPD+R 2 20 5VNPD+R 2 2 D-GND
(NC) 1 (NC) (NC) 21 (NC) 1 (NC) 3 REGS_F_LED#
21CSR-8PK 21CSR-8PK 21CSR-8PK 4 REGS_F
5 PCS_F
05XR-6H-P
1 PTCCHPD
2 GND
3 5VNPD+R
03XR-6H-P
PCSS
REGS_R /PCS R
REGS_C /PCS_C
REGS_F /PCS_F
PTCCHPD

PCSS Color image density sensor PWB reflection plate shutter solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration
sensor.
PTCCHPD PTC cleaner home position detection Detects the PTC cleaner home position.
REGS_C/PCS_C Color image density sensor/Image registration sensor C Detection of registration shift on the machine front (C) side, and
detection of the M/BK toner patch density.
REGS_F/PCS_F Color image density sensor/Image registration sensor F Detection of registration shift on the machine front (F) side, and detection
of the C toner patch density.
REGS_R/PCS_R Color image density sensor/Image registration sensor R Detection of registration shift on the machine front (R) side, and
detection of the Y toner patch density.

B. Operational descriptions b. Primary (intermediate) transfer roller separation
mechanism and contents
(1) Transfer
The primary transfer roller operates pressing all the rollers, sepa-
a. Transfer operation rates all the rollers, or presses only black depending on the opera-
a-1. Transfer operation tion mode.
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) turns ON, the transfer
cam rotates to shift the primary transfer link and the primary trans-
fer arm linked with the cam in the arrow direction, performing sepa-
rating operation of the roller.
All pressing
All separating
PTC
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary

transfer belt by applying the positive high voltage to the primary
transfer roller.
Negative charge is generated by the PTC unit, and this strengthens
negative charges on the transfer belt, improving the secondary
transfer efficiency. Pressing only black
By this operation, the transfer efficiency in the secondary transfer is
improved.
Then a high negative voltage is applied to the primary transfer belt
to transfer the toner images from the primary transfer belt to paper.
In the monochrome mode and the color mode, the black (K) trans-
fer voltage is selected.
a-2. Cleaning operation It also performs all pressing, all separating, or pressing only black
Toner is cleaned by the secondary transfer cleaning blade, and with the roller separation sensors (1TUD_CL, 1TUD_K) and the
transported to the waste toner section. separation detection arm.
Unnecessary toner remained on the secondary transfer belt is
1TUD_CL 1TUD_BK
transferred to the primary transfer belt by making the polarity of the
All pressing ON OFF
applying voltage to the primary transfer belt. Then it is cleaned by
All separating OFF ON
the primary transfer belt cleaning blade to be transported to the
Pressing only black OFF OFF
waste toner section.
(2) Image density detection and registration detection
The image density and the image registration are detected by the
sensors provided at the front, the center, and the rear of the frame.
a. Function and operation of the color image density sensor/
image registration sensor
a-1. Image registration sensor
The shift of the image registration (F, C, R) is detected.
a-2. Process control sensor/Image registration sensor
Process control sensor Image registration sensor

Rear Y R
Center M/BK C
Front C F

Sensitivity adjustment of the color sensor light receiving ele- Light emitting current of the sensor LED (Light emitting diode)
ments (Photo transistors) Purpose: To maintain the light emitting quantity of the sensor even
Purpose: To maintain the sensitivity of the light receiving elements if the sensor LED is aged or the environmental conditions vary.
even if the environmental conditions (temperature and humidity) Execution timing: Every time when the process control is made.
vary.
Method: Reflection on the surface of the primary transfer belt is
Execution timing: This adjustment is executed in the process con- used to adjust the sensor sensitivity.
trol when the temperature or the humidity varies.
Method: Use the patch written on the primary transfer to adjust the
sensor sensitivity.
b. High density process control operation (Toner patch generation and density correction operations)
1) When the machine enters the high density process control mode, the secondary transfer unit remains in the printing position.
2) While changing the DV bias voltage step by step, a number of toner patches in different densities are generated on the primary transfer
belt.
Front: The C toner patch is generated.
Center: The Bk, M toner patch is generated.
Rear: The Y toner patch is generated.
3) Each toner patch density is detected by the image density sensor, and the DV bias correction voltage is calculated in the PCU PWB so that
the proper density is obtained from the relation between the DV bias voltage at the time when each toner patch is made and the toner
patch density.

11. Waste toner section
CN-13
B24B-CZWHK-B-1
B07B-PASK-1
24V 1
P-GND 2 B-1 24V4
BRAKE 3 (NC) B-2 P-GND
BTM_CK 4 B-3 BTM_CK
BTM_D 5 B-4 BTM_D
CW/CCW 6 B-5 CW/CCW
BTM_LD 7 B-6 BTM_LD
PAP-07V-S
CN-6
B29B-CSRK
Reserve_OUT1 29 (NC) 7-292254-3
24V4 28 1 24V4 13
GND 27 2 GND 12
5VN 26 3 5VN 11
WTM_D 25 4 WTM_D 10
WTM_CK 24 5 WTM_CK 9
WTM_LD 22 7 WTM_LD 7
BTM 5VN 21
DSW_CS 20
GND 19
5VN 18
DSW_RL 17 13XR-6H-P 1-173977-3
GND 16
5VN 6
WTFD 5
GND 4
WTBSET 3
GND 2
5VN+R 1
29CSR-8PK
B8B-ZR 6-292254-7
WTM 24V4 8 7 24V4 1
GND 7 6 GND 2
5VN 6 5 5VN 3
WTM_D 5 4 WTM_D 4
WTM_CK 4 3 WTM_CK 5
WTM_LD 2 1 WTM_LD 7
(NC) 1 (NC) 179228-7 173977-7
ZHR-8
WTBSET
WTBSET 3 1
GND 2 2
5VNPD 1 3
03CK-6H-PC
5VN 3 1
WTFD 2 2
GND 1 3
03CK-6H-PC
WTFD

BTM Transfer belt motor Drives the transfer belt.
WTBSET Waste toner bottle detector Detects installation of the waste toner bottle.
WTFD Waste toner full detector Detects full of waste toner.
WTM Waste toner motor Transport waste toner.

12. Fusing section
YLP-04V YLR-04VF VLR-03V VLP-03V YLP-03V YLR-03VF

2 L-HL(US/LM) 2 2 L-HL(US) 2 3 N-HL(US) 3
D1.25-M3(Ni) WH BK
1 L-HL(UW) 1 2 N-HL(UW) 2
1 L-HL(UM/UW) 1 3 L-HL(UM) 3 1 N-HL(UM) 1

D1.25-M3(Ni)
4 L-HL(UM/UW) 4
D1.25-M3(Ni)
3 L-HL(US/LM) 3
D1.25-M3(Ni) SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N
4 FUFM_LD 4
3 GND 3
2 FUFM_CNT 2
1 FUFM_V 1
1 TH_US2 1
2 GND 2
SMP-03V-BC
2 TH_UM
SMR-03V-N
2
FUFM
1 TH_UM_CS 1
3 GND 3
2 TH_US 2 10
1 TH_US_CS 1
3 GND 3
TH_US2 HL_UM FUM
/US/UW
TS S
TS M D-GND
PAP-07V-S
1
2
TH_UM 5VN
FUM_D 3
FUM_CK 4
FUM_LD 5
FUM_GAIN 6
TH_US1 POD1 WEBM2 FUM_CW/CCW 7 (NC)
B7B-PASK-1
VHR-2N
1 INT24V2L 1
9 P-GND
B2B-VH
2
2 175489-3
GND 3
HLPCD POD1 2
5VNPD 1
179228-3
SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-BC
7 1 WEBM2_A
2 WEBM2_B
1
2
4
TS L
PRM
9
FPFD
8 3
SLR-01VF SLP-01V
HL_LM TH_LM1
1 L-HL(LM) 1
2 HLPCD
1 5VNPD
RD
7
3 GND
179228-3
TH_LM2 6
D1.25-M3(Ni)
D1.25-M3(Ni) HL PWB 5
CN-5 CN-7
B2P-VH-B B7B-PASK-1
(NC) 1 (NC) HL_US 7
WEBEND2 2 N-HL(US) HL_LM 6
VHR-3N HL_UW 5
CN-4 HL_UM 4
B03B-VL /HL_PR 3
1 N-HL(UW) GND 2
YLP-01V YLR-01VF
WH 19*-RWZV-K*GG-*6(LF)(SN) (NC) 2 (NC) INT24V2L 1
1 N-HL(LM) 1
3 N-HL(UM) PAP-07V-S
(NC) 5 (NC) 5 (NC)
VLP-03V
13*-RWZV-K*GG-*4(LF)(SN) CN-3
1 N-HL(LM) 1 B03B-VL-R
2 L-HL(LM) 2 3 N-HL(US) 3 1 L-HL(UW)
3 L-HL(UW) 3 2 L-HL(LM)
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC) 6 N-HL(UW) 6 3 N-HL(LM)
VLP-03V-R
1 N-HL(UM) 1
B-6 GND B-1

B-5 POD1 B-2
B-4 5VNPD B-3
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) PCU PWB
B-3 WEBM2_A B-4 CN-9 (3/3) CN-23
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC)
B-2 WEBM2_B B-5 B34B-PNDZS B40B-PNDZS
(NC) B-1 FRS B-6 (NC) (NC) 1 5VNPD INT24V2L 39
CZHR-06V-S CZHR-06V-S (NC) 3 FBMD_R GND 37
CZHR-09V-S CZHR-09V-S (NC) 5 GND HL_UW 35
B-9 TH_UM B-1 7 TH_UM HL_LM 33
(NC) A-7 24V 4 A-1 (NC) B-8 TH_UM_CS B-2 9 TH_UM_CS HL_US 31
(NC) A-6 WEBEND1 A-2 (NC) B-7 GND B-3 11 GND HL_UM 29
(NC) A-5 FBMCM_A A-3 (NC) B-6 TH_US B-4 13 TH_US /HL_PR 27
(NC) A-4 FBMCM_XA A-4 (NC) B-5 TH_US_CS B-5 15 TH_US_CS PNDP-40V-Z
(NC) A-3 FBMCM_B A-5 (NC) SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-BC B-4 GND B-6 17 GND CN-10
(NC) A-2 FBMCM_XB A-6 (NC) 2 TH_LM 2 B-3 TH_LM B-7 19 TH_LM B40B-PNDZS
(NC) A-1 +24V A-7 (NC) 1 TH_LM_CS 1 B-2 TH_LM_CS B-8 21 TH_LM_CS
P R 3 GND 3 B-1 GND B-9 23 GND
CZHR-07V-S CZHR-07V-S 25 TH_US2
27 GND
29 TH_LM2
31 GND
(NC) 33 (NC)
DRIVER PWB GND 6
CN-4 (NC) 2 5VNPD HLPCD 8
B16B-PASK-1 A-10 WEBEND2 A-1 (NC) 4 FBMD_F 5VNPD 10
FBMCM_A 1 (NC) SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC A-9 GND A-2 (NC) 6 GND
FBMCM_XA 2 (NC) 1 TH_LM2 1 A-8 TH_LM2 A-3 (NC) 8 5VNPD
FBMCM_B 3 (NC) SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC 2 GND 2 A-7 GND A-4 (NC) 10 WEBEND1
FBMCM_XB 4 (NC) A-6 5VNPD A-5 (NC) 12 GND FUFM_V 18
1 WEBM2_A 1
+24V 5 (NC) A-5 TH_US2 A-6 14 5VNPD GND 20
2 WEBM2_B 2
+24V 6 (NC) 175489-3 A-4 GND A-7 16 WEBEND2 FUFM_CNT 22
PRM_A 7 5VNPD 1 A-3 5VNPD A-8 18 GND FUFM_LD 24
PRM_XA 8 WEBEND2 2 A-2 FPFD A-9 20 5VNPD FUM_GAIN 26
PRM_B D-GND 3 A-1 GND A-10 22 FPFD FUM_LD 28
9 B6B-PH-K-S
PRM_XB 1 PRM_/B 179228-3 P R 24 GND FUM_CK 30
10
+24V 11 2 PRM_/A CZHR-10V-S CZHR-10V-S 26 GND FUM_D 32
+24V 175489-3 POD1 5VN 34
12 3 +24V 28
WEBM2_A 4 +24V 5VNPD 1 30 5VNPD GND 36
13
WEBM2_B 5 PRM_B FPFD 2 (NC) 32 FRS P-GND 38
14
WEBM1_A 6 PRM_A GND 3 (NC) 34 24V4 INT24V2L 40
15 (NC)
WEBM1_B 16 (NC) PHR-6 179228-3 PNDP-34V-Z PNDP-40V-Z
PAP-16V-S

FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
HL_UW Heater lamp assist Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Detects the fusing pressure state.
POD1 Fusing paper exit detector Detects paper pass in the fusing section.
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing pressure.
TH_LM/TH_LM_CS Fusing temperature sensor lower Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing roller (B).
TH_LM2 Fusing temperature sensor lower (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing roller (B).
TH_UM/TH_UM_CS Fusing temperature sensor upper (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing belt.
TH_US/TH_US_CS Fusing temperature sensor upper (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt.
TH_US2 Fusing temperature sensor upper (Sub 2) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt.
TS_L Thermostat lower (Main) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS_M Thermostat upper (Main) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS_S Thermostat upper (Sub) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
WEBEND2 Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.
WEBM2 Fusing web motor Drives the fusing web roller.

1 Fusing roller (F1) Heats the fusing belt.
2 Fusing roller (F2) The cushion layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller (B).
3 Fusing roller (B) Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
4 Transport roller Includes silicon oil in it and improves fusing separation and cleaning capabilities.
5 HL control PWB Drives the heater lamp.
6 Fusing web roller Cleans the fusing roller (B).
7 Discharge brush Discharges static electricity generated in the fusing section to the ground.
8 Separation plate Separates paper.
9 Separation pawl Separates fusing roller (B) when it is attached.
10 Fusing belt Heats the front surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
(1) Outline of operations Heater lamp operations
This machine employs the fusing system by the belt.
Heater lamp Operation
The features of the belt-type fusing system are as follows: Heater lamp upper Heats the center of the fusing roller (F1) and the
1) Short warm-up time main (HL_UM) fusing belt.
2) Low power consumption Heater lamp upper Heats the edges of the fusing roller (F1) and the
sub (HL_US) fusing belt.
3) Wide nip providing high fusing capability
Heater lamp assist Heats fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
(2) Heater lamp driving (HL_UW) Turns ON when warming up.
The surface temperature of the heat roller and the fusing belt Heater lamp lower Heats fusing roller (B). Does not turn ON while
main (HL_LM) heater lamp upper main (HL_UM) and heater lamp
detected by the fusing temperature sensor is sent to the PCU. If the
upper sub (HL_US) light up.
temperature is lower than the specified temperature, the heater
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive
circuit in the HL PWB.
When the power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned ON,
the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp to light the lamp and
heat the fusing belt.
A thermostat is provided as a safety device against an abnormally
high temperature in the heat roller and the fusing belt.
When the thermostat is opened, the AC power supply to the heater
lamp is cut off.
The heater lamp is arranged to fusing roller (F1) and fusing roller
(B).
In heater lamp (HL_UM/US/UW), three lamps are integrated into
one.

(3) Fusing operation (4) Automatic pressure release system
Color toner (Y, M, C, and K) on paper is heated and pressed by the Normally the upper and lower heat rollers are pressed. When, how-
fusing belt, fusing roller (F2), and fusing roller (B) to be fused on ever, the following conditions are satisfied, the pressure is
paper. released.
Toner in the four layers on the paper is fused by heating from up • When the machine shifts to the preheat mode.
and down and both sides. • When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode.
The fusing belt, fusing roller (F2) which is provided with the cushion • When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF.
layer, and fusing roller (B) realize the following operations.
• When the machine is left for 90 sec under the ready state.
1) The nip amount is increased and the heat capacity to paper is
• When in the envelope mode.
increased.
• When a jam occurs.
2) By pressing with the flexible roller, toner of many layers can be
fused without being deformed. a. Pressure release operation
3) An even pressure is applied to rough surface of toner (due to The fusing pressure control motor (PRM) rotates to turn ON the
the multi-layer composition). fusing pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level). When the specified
time passes after turning ON the fusing pressure detector (HLPCD)
Fusing roller (F2) (H level) by rotation of the fusing pressure control roller (PRM), the
pressure release motor stops to complete the pressure release
Fusing roller (B) operation.
Fusing belt
HLPCD
b. Pressing operation
When the end user makes some operations or when the machine
Fusing roller receives the Job signal, the fusing pressure control motor (PRM)
(F2) rotates reversely to drive the pressure release lever to the pressing
Fusing roller
(B) state.
When the specified time passes from turning OFF the fusing pres-
sure detector (HLPCD), the pressure release motor stops to com-
plete the pressing operation.
Fusing belt
HLPCD
When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure
to turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to
confirm that the LCD display goes off before turning OFF the main
power switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD lighted, the
power is cut off before completion of the pressure release opera-
tion. If this state is kept for a long time, the fusing roller may be
deformed.

(5) Fusing section cleaning (7) Fusing belt meandering alignment adjustment
In this machine, the fusing roller (B) is cleaned by the web. The fusing belt meandering alignment adjustment is executed in
The cleaning unit is composed of the web feed roller, the winding the production process.
roller, and the backup roller which presses the web onto the fusing This adjustment can be made only in the production process, and
roller (B) with the proper pressure. must not be performed by the serviceman.
Residual toner on the fusing roller (B) is cleaned by the web which CAUTION: If a screw is tighten in a position which is not marked in
contains silicon oil. red, the belt may be broken.
Backup roller
Winding side
Web sheet Feed side
Fusing roller (B)
(6) Web life end detection

The web life near end is detected by the web print counter. When
the life reaches 300K prints, the following message is displayed to
notify that the replacement timing is approaching.
(Maintenance required.: FK3)
The web life end is detected by the web end detector. When the life
end is detected, a job is forcibly interrupted even the job is being
performed.
After replacing the web with a new one, reset the web life counter
and the web send counter to clear the life end state.

13. Duplex/paper exit section
(1) Duplex section
ADUFM_R
POD3 ADUM1 B6B-PH-K-S
ADUM1_/A 1
INT24VI 2
B U08P-TZ-S SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC 4 ADUM1_/B 3
1
2
ADUFM1_V
/ADUFM_F_CNT
8
7
1 ADUFMV
2 /ADUFM_F_CNT 2
1
6 ADUM1_A
INT24VI
4
5
3 D-GND 6 3 D-GND 3 ADUM1_B 6
4 ADFM1_LD 5 4 ADFM1_LD 4 PHR-6
ADUFM_F
SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
ADUGS
5 ADUFM2_V 4 1 ADUFMV 1
6 /ADUFM_R_CNT 3
7 D-GND 2
2 /ADUFM_R_CNT 2
3 D-GND 3
TFD3
8 ADFM2_LD 1 4 ADFM2_LD 4
CZHR-08V-S CZHR-08V-S
5
PRTPD DSW_ADU
FPRFM_R
1 FPRFM1_V
2 FPRFM1_LD
1
2 APPD1 ADUM2
3 D-GND 3
1 B6B-PH-K-S
ADUM2_/A 1
SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC INT24VI 2
1 FPRFM2_V 1 ADUM2_/B 3
2 FPRFM2_LD 2 ADUM2_A 4
3 D-GND 3
APPD2 INT24VI
ADUM2_B
5
6
CZHR-09V-S
FPRFM_F PHR-6
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
2
FPRFM1_LD
FPRFM2_LD
FPRFM1_V
FPRFM2_V
B U09P-TZ-S
7 5V_LED
D-GND
D-GND
8 D-GND
9 APPD2
3 5V_LED
CZHR-09V-S
2 D-GND
1 APPD2
1
2
3
4
5
6
179228-3
PCU PWB
1 PRTPD
2 D-GND
3 5VO+R
03XR-6H-P
CN-12(1/2)
B38B-PNDZS
5V O+R 1
PHNR-02-H
PR TPD 3
5VNPD 5 R-DOOR I/F PWB B U03P-TZ-S
1
2
5VN 7 3 5V O+R 1
GND 9 CN-3 2 D-GND 2
SIN3 11 S32B-PHDSS-B 1 PRTPD 3
B U02P-TR-P-H
SELIN1 13 QR/P4-40*-C(01) CZHR-03V-S 03CZ-6H

1 /ADUGS
SELIN2 15 1 FPRFM2_V 1
D-GMD
2 24V4
SELIN3 17 2 FPRFM2_LD 2 30
Right paper
PHNR-02-H
APPD1 19 CN-1
APPD2 21 S16B-PHDSS-B
1 5VN
exit lower UN
FPRFM2_LD 25 2 GND D-GND 26
POD3 27 7 +24V 7 3 SIN3 FPRFM1_LD 25
8 +24V 8 4 SELIN1
ADUFM1_V 31 9 +24V 9 5 SELIN2 D-GND 23
ADUFM2_V 33 10 +24V 10 6 SELIN3 ADFM2_LD 22
/ADUFM_F_CNT 35 11 5VN 11 7 APPD1
/ADUFM_R_CNT 37 12 GND 12 8 APPD2
13 SIN3 13 D-GND 14
14 SELIN1 14 10 POD3 ADFM1_LD 13
3 5V_LED
SELIN2
2 D-GND
1 APPD1
24V4 12 15 15
FPRFM1_V 14 16 SELIN3 16
03XR-6H-P
FPRFM2_V 16 17 APPD1 17 D-GND

18 APPD2 18
19 POD3 19 5V_LED 6
ADUGS 22 20 5VNPD 20 16 5VNPD D-GND 5
21 FPRFM1_V 21 PHDR-16VS-2 APPD2 4
03CZ-6H
1
2
3
24 ADUM2_B 24
25 ADUM2_A 25 PHDR-32VS-1
26 ADUM2_XB 26
B U03P-TZ-S
3 5V_LED
PNDP-38V-Z CN-2
2 D-GND
1 APPD1
27 ADUM2_XA 27 S16B-PHDSS-B
1 DSW_ADU
28 ADUM1_B 28
CZHR-03V-S
3 5V_LED
2 D-GND
29 ADUM1_A 29
30 ADUM1_XB 30 D-GND 14
DRIVER PWB ADUM1_XA
179228-3
31 31
32 ADUGS 32 5V_LED 12
3 5V_LED
3 5V_LED
CN-6 33 24V4 33 D-GND 11

2 D-GND
2 D-GND
03XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P
1 POD3
1 TFD3
B12B-CZHK-1 BU12P-TZ-S 34 PR TPD 34 APPD1 10

ADUM1_XA 1 12 ADUM1_XA 1 35 5V O+R 35 5V_LED 9
ADUM1_A 2 11 ADUM1_A 2 36 /ADUFM_R_CNT 36 D-GND 8
ADUM1_B 3 10 ADUM1_B 3 37 ADUFM2_V 37 DSW_ADU 7 B U06P-TZ-S
ADUM1_XB 4 9 ADUM1_XB 4 38 /ADUFM_F_CNT 38 5V_LED 6 6 5V_LED 1
+24V 5 8 +24V 5 39 ADUFM1_V 39 D-GND 5 5 D-GND 2
+24V 6 7 +24V 6 40 FG 40 POD3 4 4 POD3 3
ADUM2_XA 7 6 ADUM2_XA 7 S P 5V_LED 3 3 5V_LED 4
ADUM2_A 8 5 ADUM2_A 8 SRA-01T-3.2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5
ADUM2_B 9 4 ADUM2_B 9 TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6
ADUM2_XB 10 3 ADUM2_XB 10 PHDR-16VS-2 CZHR-06V-S 06CZ-6H
+24V 11 2 +24V 11 SRA-21T-4
+24V 12 1 +24V 12
CZHR-12V-S
Paper exit tray UN
12CZ-6H

ADUFM_F ADU transport cooling fan motor F Cools the ADU transport path.
ADUFM_R ADU transport cooling fan motor R
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUM1 ADU motor lower Drive the transport roller 19, 20 and the paper exit roller 2.
ADUM2 ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 21, 22.
APPD1 ADU paper pass detector 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU paper pass detector 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU open/close detector Detects open/close of the duplex (ADU) cover.
FPRFM_F Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor F Cools the fusing pressure roller.
FPRFM_R Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor R
POD3 Right paper exit detector Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector (Right paper exit tray) Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray).
TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector (Right paper exit tray) Detects the right tray paper exit full.

1 Transport roller 20 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 19 to the transport roller 21.
4 Transport roller 19 (Drive) Transports paper to the right paper exit section or the ADU section.
5 Paper exit gate (ADU gate) Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the ADU section or to the right tray.
6 Reverse gate Discharges paper to the reverse gate right tray or selects the switchback transport path to
the ADU section.

(2) Paper exit section
CN-8 CN-10
502790-6491 502790-6491
POFM_R GND 1 64 GND
POM RRM_CNT2
POM_A
41
42
TNM_M_A
TNM_M_B
10
11
55 TNM_M_A
54 TNM_M_B
24
23
RRM_CNT2
POM_A
POFM_F POM_XA
POM_XB
44
45
TNM_M_/B
TNM_Y_A
13
14
52 TNM_M_/B
51 TNM_Y_A
21
20
POM_XA
POM_XB
TFD2 POM_CNT
ADUM1_A
46
47
TNM_Y_B
TNM_Y_/A
15
16
50 TNM_Y_B
49 TNM_Y_/A
19
18
POM_CNT
ADUM1_A
POD2 ADUM2_XA 54 TNHM_M_EN 23
TNHM_C_EN 24
42 TNHM_M_EN 11 ADUM2_XA
ADUM2_XB 55 41 TNHM_C_EN 10 ADUM2_XB
PCU PWB DRIVER PWB

1
CN-10
SMP-18V-N SMP-18V-NC B40B-PNDZS
GND 3 1 GND 1 5 GND
POD2 2 2 POD2 2 7 POD2
2-179228-3

TFD2 2 5 TFD2 5 13 TFD2
179228-3
1 POFM_V 1 7 POFM_V 7 17 POFM_V
2 POFM_F_CNT 2 8 POFM_F_CNT 8 19 POFM_F_CNT
4 POFM_F_LD 4 10 POFM_F_LD 10 23 POFM_F_LD
1 POFM_V 1 11 POFM_V 11 25 POFM_V
2 PFM_R_CNT 2 12 PFM_R_CNT 12 27 POFM_R_CNT
3 GND 3 13 GND 13 29 GND
4 POFM_R_LD 4 14 POFM_R_LD 14 31 POFM_R_LD
CN-5
B6B-PASK-1
1 POM_XA
B6B-PH-K-S SMR-06V-N SMP-06V-NC 2 POM_A
POM_B 1 1 POM_B 1 3 POM_B
+24V 2 2 +24V 2 4 POM_XB
POM_A 3 3 POM_A 3 5 +24V
POM_XB 4 4 POM_XB 4 6 +24V
+24V 5 5 +24V 5 PAP-06V-S
POM_XA 6 6 POM_XA 6
PHR-6

POD2 Paper exit tray detector Detects paper exit to the paper exit tray.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor F Cools paper after fusing.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor R
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detector Detects paper full in the paper exit tray.

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper to the paper exit tray.

(1) Duplex
• Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 19 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
• When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
• By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
lower side of the ADU gate which lowers by its own weight.
• The transport rollers 21 and 22 are driven by the ADU motor
lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position.
• Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
transported to the machine again.
(2) Paper exit
• Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 19 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.

1.
'(5,9(5< 81,7 '63) 81,7
710B. 710B& 710B0 710B<
32' 32)0B)
)RU(XURSH
633' 62&' 678' 63:6 63))$1 6/80 638)0
MX-7580N
71+0B. 71+0B& 71+0B0 71+0B<

32' 32)0B5
32)0B) 7%)0 633' 6/&29 67/' 635'0' 63)& 6320 /(' 3:%
7)6'B. 7)6'B& 7)6'B0 7)6'B<
7)' 32)0B(;
+/B3&' 32)0B5 78'B&/ 633' 63(' 63/6 675& 237,21 &&' 3:%
)80 67036
)8)0 32)0B(; 78'B. 633' 63(' 63/6 6755&
633' 632' 6&29 655&
)86(5 81,7 37&&0
320 :(%0 '0B. '0B& '0B0 '0B< %70 '63)FQW 3:%
350 37&&+3' '9&B. '9&B& '9&B0 '9&B< 785&
Block diagram
)3)' :(%(1'
5(*,67 6(1625
550 81,7
'+3'B. '+3'B& '+3'B0 '+3'B< 7855& 6&1027+(5 3:% 6&$11(5 81,7
7+B80
A. System block diagram
0,0
5(*6B)
3)0 '5,9(5 3:% +/B80 3&6B) /(' '5,9(5 3:% /(' 3:% &&' 3:%
7+B86
5(*6B&
2&6:
$'80 +/B86 3&6B& 256B/('
7+B86 86% &1 3:%
5(*6B5 0+36
$'80 +/B/0 3&6B5 0$,1 '5,9( 81,7
7+B/0 256B3'
23(5$7,21 81,7 237,21
/&&0 +/B8: 3&66 237,21
7+B/0 32:(5 6: 728&+ ,& &DUG
&&0B. &&0B& &&0B0 &&0B< 2=)0 3$1(/
3:% $8',725
&&0'B. &&0'B& &&0'B0 &&0'B< 2=)0 /9'6 31&
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
36 81,7 /&'
352&(66B. XQ 352&(66B& XQ 352&(66B0 XQ 352&(66B< XQ
3:% 237,21
'6:B) 2=)0
33' +20( .(< 3:%
&&+3'B. &&+3'B& &&+3'B0 &&+3'B< :+B6&1
'6:B5 9)0B5
237,21
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B< .(<%25'
33' '6:B&6 9)0B%$
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B< )RU(XURSH 237,21
'6:B)8 3&8 3:% (), ,) 3:% )LHU\ %R[
'6:B5/ 237,21
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B0 81,7 '9B< 81,7 )$;
0& 3:%
/33' 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
7& 3:% 0)3)0 +'')0
/&&& '97<3B. '97<3B& '97<3B0 '97<3B< +''
7& 3:%
86% :,5(/(66 $'$37(5
UG &$66(77( UG &$66(77( 7$1'(0 7$1'(0 0)3& 3:%
237,21 QG 75$< QG 75$< 237,21
5,*+7 '225 81,7 :70 &66B &66B &3)0 $&5(
5' ,)
32' 3:% :7%6(7 &38& &38& 733' 375& /68 81,7
7)' '6:B$'8 :7)' &/80 &/80 733' 733' 375& /68B7+ 237,21
/68 FQW 3:%
MX-7580N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 1

3573' $'8*6 &63' &63' 763' 763' 775& /68B7+ :+B/68
03(' $33' &3:' 7386 7386 738& /' 3:% %' 3:%
Service Manual
7+ +8'
03)6 $33' &3)' &3)' 7/80 3*0
3:% 3:%
)35)0B) $'8)0B) +/ 3:% &386 &386 7/8' 7/8' 738& /68)0
36)0
)35)0B5 $'8)0B5 &/8' &/8' 73(' 73(' 7/80
36)0
&3(' &3(' 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 71'6(7 &2,19(1'(5
03/' 03)'
67$786
3$3(5 )((' 81,7 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 ,1',&$725
03:' 03*6 /&& ),1,6+(5
/&&/&7 N ),1,6+(5
038&
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 '&36
237,21
68% '&36
237,21
:+B3:%
$& 3:%
$& 68% 3:% :+B6: 06:
:+B/&& :+B&6 :+B&6 :+B71'
237,21
237,21 237,21 237,21 237,21
$& ,1 $& ,1
㻰㻯㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻿㼠㼑㼜㼜㼕㼚㼓㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻲㻭㻺
㻰㻹㼋㻷㻛㻰㻹㼋㻯㻼㻻㻹㻛㻭㻰㼁㻹㻝㻛㻭㻰㼁㻹㻞㻛㻸㻯㻯㻹㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻾㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻮㻭㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻝㼋㻞㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻟㻛㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼀㻺㻹㼋㻷㻛㼀㻺㻹㼋㻯㻛㼀㻺㻹㼋㻹㻛㼀㻺㻹㼋㼅㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㻱㼄㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻛㻭㻰㼁㻲㻹㻝㼋㻞㻛㼃㻱㻮㻱㻺㻰㻞㻛㻲㻼㻲㻰㻛㻼㻻㻰㻝㻛㻼㻻㻰㻞㻛㻴㻸㻼㻯㻰㻛
㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻱㼄㼀㻲㻰㻞㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㼁㻛㻸㻼㻼㻰㻛㼀㻞㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㼀㻺㻰㻿㻱㼀㻛
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠㻴㼂㼃㼀㻮㻿㻱㼀㻛㻼㻾㼀㻼㻰㻛㻲㼃㻿
㻵㻯㻠㻝㻴㻸㼋㻼㻻㼃㼋㻯㻺㼀㻛㼀㻯㻞㻼㻹㻯
㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹㻴㻸㼋㼁㻿㻴㼂㻌㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞
㻼㼃㻹㻼㼀㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㻞㼀㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾
B. PCU PWB
㻔㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎㼕㼠㻕
㻵㻯㻞㻣
㻭㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㼎㼡㼟㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼎㼡㼟㻲㼁㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㻱㼄㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㻲㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻔㻟㻞㻹㼎㼕㼠㻕
㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㻾㼋㻸㻰㻛㼀㻮㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㼃㼀㻹㼋㻸㻰
㼄㻞
㼄㻓㼠㼍㼘㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠
㻝㻠㻚㻣㻠㻡㻢㻹㻴㼦㻵㻯㻟㻣㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㻿㻾㻭㻹㻯㻟㻼㼁㻿㻛㻯㻠㻼㼁㻿㻛㼃㻴㼋㻯㻺㼀㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㼋㼂㼋㻸㻛㻯㻟㻼㼁㻯㻛
㻯㻸㻷㻔㻞㻹㼎㼕㼠㻕㻯㻠㻼㼁㻯㻛㻯㻟㻸㼁㻹㻛㻯㻠㻸㼁㻹㻛㼀㻝㻸㼁㻹㻛㼀㻝㻼㼁㻿㻛㻼㼀㻾㻯㻝㻛㻵㻺㼀㼋㻯㻺㼀㻛
㼀㻮㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㼀㻮㻲㻹㼋㼂㼋㻸㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻹㻼㼁㻯㻛㻸㻯㻯㻯㻛
㼃㼀㻹㼋㻰㻛㻾㻾㻹㼋㻱㻺㻛㻾㻾㻹㼋㻯㻺㼀㻝㻛㼋㻯㻺㼀㻞㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻾㼋㼂㻸㻛
㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻯㼛㼕㼚㻌㼂㼑㼚㼐㼛㼞㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻲㼋㻱㻺㻛㻼㻲㻹㻌㻯㻺㼀㻛㻼㻲㻹㼋㻱㻺㻭㻮㻸㻱
㻹㻲㻼㻯
㻵㻯㻞㻜㼃㻱㻮㻹㻯㼂㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㼁㻺㼀㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻸㻻㻾㻝㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻸㻻㻾㻜㻛
㻼㻹㻯㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻝㻯㼂㼋㻯㻭㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻜㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻝㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻞㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻟㻛
㻯㼂㼋㻿㼀㻭㻼㻸㻱㻛㻯㼂㼋㻰㼁㻼㻸㻱㼄㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㼃㼀㻲㻰㻛㼀㻝㻼㻱㻰㻛㼀㻞㻼㻱㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㻱㻰㻛
㻿㻯㻺㻙
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻿㻯㻵
㻯㻟㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻟㻼㻱㻰㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻯㻿㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻸㻛㻲㼃㻿㻞㻛
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠㻴㼂㻯㻾㼁㻹㻰㼞㼡㼙㻌㼘㼍㼙㼜㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻯㼛㼕㼚㻌㼂㼑㼚㼐㼛㼞㻯㻠㻿㻿㻝㻙㻿㻿㻠㻛㻯㻟㻿㻿㻝㻙㻠㻛㻯㻟㻿㻼㻰㻛㻯㻠㻿㻼㻰㻛
㻴㻸㻯㻸㻷㻝㻛㻴㻸㼋㼁㻹㻛㻯㻾㼁㻹㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻰㻸㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻛㻸㻿㼁㻿㻿㼋㻯㻸㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻟㼋㼂㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻼㼅㻛㼀㻝㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㼀㻝㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛㼀㻝㻿㻼㻰㻛㼀㻞㻿㻼㻰㻛
㻰㻸㻞㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻯㼂㼋㻯㻸㻯㻻㻼㼅㻞㻠㼂㻹㼋㼙㼛㼚㻛㻞㻠㼂㻿㼋㼙㼛㼚㻛㻝㼀㼁㻰㼋㻯㻸㻛
㻸㻿㼁㻯㻯㻹㻰㼋㻷㻛㻯㻯㻹㻰㼋㻯㻛㻯㻯㻹㻰㼋㻹㻛㻯㻯㻹㻰㼋㼅㻛
㻰㻴㻼㻰㼋㻷㻛㻰㻴㻼㻰㼋㻯㻛㻰㻴㻼㻰㼋㻹㻛㻰㻴㻼㻰㼋㼅㻛
㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻼㼀㻯㻯㻴㻼㻰㻛㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛㻝㼀㼁㻰㼋㻷㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛
㻼㼃㻹
㻵㻯㻝㻤㼀㻝㻸㼁㻰㻛㼀㻞㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻟㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻠㻸㼁㻰
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻼㻹㻯㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻞
㻸㻯㻯㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻼㻿㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻟㼋㻸㻰
㻰㻯㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻲㻭㻺㻰㻯㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻰㻯㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞

㼁㻭㻾㼀㻲㼁㻹㻛㼃㼀㻹㻛㻾㻾㻹㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻲㻼㻲㻹㻛㻮㼀㻹㻛㻰㻹㼋㼅㻛㻰㻹㼋㻹㻯㻯㻹㼋㻷㻛㻯㻯㻹㼋㻯㻛㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㻲㻵㻺
㻯㻯㻹㼋㻹㻛㻯㻯㻹㼋㼅㻰㻹㼋㻷㼋㻯㼃㻯㻯㼃㻛
㻵㻯㻠㻣
㼋㼋
㻰㻹㼋㻯㻸㼋㻯㼃㻯㻯㼃㻛
㻯㻼㼁
㻮㼁㻺㻰㻹㼋㻷㼋㻰㻛㻯㼋㻰㻛㻹㼋㻰㻛㼅㼋㻰
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟
㻵㻯㻟㻤㻼㼃㻹
㻯㻸㻷㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻮㼁㻺㼀㻵㻺㻳㻌㻲㻼㻳㻭
㻔㻰㼂㼀㼅㻼㻿㻱㻸㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㻹㻛㼋㼅㻕㻛
㻯㻯㻴㻼㻰㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㻹㻛㼋㼅㻛
㼀㻲㻿㻰㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㼅㻛㼋㻹
㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠㻻㼆㻲㻹㻝㼋㻞㼋㼂㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻮㻭㼋㼂㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻮㻭㼋㻸㻰㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻴㻸㼋㻼㻾㻰㼂㻯㼋㻷㻛㻰㼂㻯㼋㻯㻛㻰㼂㻯㼋㻹㻛㻰㼂㻯㼋㼅㻛㻰㻹㼋㻷㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㻹㼋㻯㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㻹㼋㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻼㻯㼁㼋㼃㻻㻾㻷㻵㻺㻳㼋㻸㻱㻰㻛㻴㼂㻌㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻰㻹㼋㼅㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻲㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻾㼋㼂㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻲㼋㼂㻝㼀㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㻝㼀㻯㼋㻿㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻾㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻱㼄㼋㻸㻰
㻹㻯㼋㻮㻷㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㻹㻯㼋㻯㻸㼋㻱㻾㻾
㻵㻯㻞㻠
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻯㻼㻸㻰

㻰㻯㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻵㻺㻲㻻㻌㻸㻭㻹㻼㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻼㼀㻯㻯㻹㻸㻱㻰㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟㻯㻵㻿㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻲㻼㻾㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻲㻼㻾㻲㻹㼋㼂㻸㻛㼀㻝㻼㼁㻯㻛㼀㻞㻼㼁㻯㻛㼀㻞㻸㼁㻹㻛㼀㻞㻼㼁㻿㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻛
㻼㼀㻾㻯㻞㻛㼀㼀㻾㻯㻛㻼㻯㻿㻿㻛㻝㼀㼁㻾㻯㻛㻝㼀㼁㻾㻾㻯㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻾㼋㼂㻛㻹㻼㻲㻿㻛㻹㻼㻳㻿㻛㻴㼀㻯㻿㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㼅㻛㼋㻹㻛
㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻭㻰㼁㻳㻿㻛㻭㻰㼁㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻮㼀㻹㼋㻰㻛㻮㼀㻹㼋㻯㼃㻯㻯㼃㻛㻞㼀㼁㻹㼋㻰㻛㻞㼀㼁㻹㼋㻯㼃㻛㻼㼀㻯㻹㻰㻛㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㻹㻼㻲㻰㻛㻼㻻㻰㻟
㻵㻯㻥㻜㻲㼁㻹㼋㻰㻛㻲㼁㻹㼋㻳㻭㻵㻺㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㼋㻰㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㼋㻳㻭㻵㻺
㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻵㻛㻻㻌㻰㼞㼡㼙㻌㻸㼍㼙㼜㻌㻻㼜㼑㼚㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㼜㼜
㻯㻼㻸㻰㻰㻸㼋㻻㻼㻱㻺㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㻹㻛㼋㼅㻛
㻵㻯㻣㻤㻰㻸㼋㻻㻼㻱㻺㻞㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㻹㻛㼋㼅
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㻰㻛㻭
㻰㻛㻭㻌
㼀㻿㻳㼋㻮㻷㻛㼀㻿㻳㼋㻯㻛㼀㻿㻳㼋㻹㻛㼀㻿㻳㼋㼅
㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻾㻱㻿㼋㻾㼋㻸㻱㻰㻛㻾㻱㻿㼋㻲㼋㻸㻱㻰㻛㻾㻱㻿㼋㻯㼋㻸㻱㻰㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻹㼁㼄㻹㻼㻱㻰㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻭㻰㼁㻛㼀㻲㻰㻟㻛㻹㻼㻸㻰㻝㻯㻵㻿㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻾㼋㻸㻰㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻴㻯㻝㻡㻝㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻮㼀㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻞㼀㼁㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻲㻼㻾㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻼㼀㻰㻛㻲㻼㻲㻰
㻲㻼㻾㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻭㻰㼁㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻭㻰㼁㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰
㻾㻰㻌㻵㻛㻲㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻲㼁㻹㼋㻸㻰
㻵㻯㻢㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠

㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㼀㻴㼋㻹㻛㻴㼁㻹㼋㻹㻛㼀㻴㻝㼋㻸㻿㼁㻛㼀㻴㻞㼋㻸㻿㼁㻛㻯㻠㻼㼃㻰㼁㻹㼋㻯㻿㻛㼁㻹㼋㻰㻛㼁㻿㻝㼋㻯㻿㻛㼁㻿㻝㼋㻰㻛㻸㻹㻝㼋㻯㻿㻛㻸㻹㻝㼋㻰
㻿㼃㻼㻯㻿㼋㻲㻛㻼㻯㻿㼋㻾㻛㻼㻯㻿㼋㻯
㻾㻱㻳㻿㼋㻲㻛㻾㻱㻳㻿㼋㻾㻛㻾㻱㻳㻿㼋㻯
㻵㻯㻡㻤㻵㻯㻢㻢㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻰㼂㼀㼅㻼㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻛㼀㻯㻿㼋㻷㻛㼀㻯㻿㼋㻯㻛㼀㻯㻿㼋㻹㻛㼀㻯㻿
㻿㼃㻿㼃
㻵㻯㻡㻥㻵㻯㻡㻞㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠

㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㼁㻹㻛㼁㻿㻝㻛㼁㻿㻞㻛㻸㻹㻝㻛㻸㻹㻞㻛㻹㻼㼃㻰㻛㻰㻼㻲㻭㼕㼚
㻛㻛㻛㻛㻛㻛
㻿㼃㻿㼃
+''
USP
7%
/&'
6$7$ '63) 3DQHO
&1
/9'6
C. MFP control PWB
''52Q%RDUG 6OLGH ''52Q%RDUG

*% 6: *%
‫*ق‬E>[@[SFV‫ك‬ ‫*ق‬E>[@[SFV‫ك‬
*ESV
6$7$*HQ
''5 ''5
&18SGDWH /9'6 /9'6
86%
+RVW
7<3($&1
/9'6 3DQHO
3DQHO&RQWURO
7RXFK3DQHO,&
86%,) ''5 ''5 86%,)

*3,2 6',) 6$7$,) 6',) 6$7$,)
+RVW ,) ,) +RVW 6&$1
$50[
'HEXJ/(' $6,& +6
/$1-$&.
8$57
5-
)3'/,1. )3'/,1.
/&'&,) /&'&,)
*ESV *3,2 7UDQVPLWWHU *3,2 7UDQVPLWWHU
/9'6
(WKHU3+< *0,, )3'/,1. )3'/,1. /9'6
(WKHU0$& 6&1,) (WKHU0$& 6&1,)
* 5HFHLYHU 5HFHLYHU
* *
57/)*
)3'/,1. /9'6 /68
86%'HYLFH )3'/,1.
86% 0ESV 86%,) 7UDQVPLWWHU 32) 7UDQVPLWWHU
86%,) /9'6 /68
'HYLFH 'HYLFH /68,) /68,)
'HYLFH /9'6 /68&/. 6<1& /683:%
7<3(%&1 5HXV‫ڭ‬ /9'6
5HXV 5HFHLYHU
8$57 8$57 /9'6 /68&/. 6<1&
8$57
FK FK
,17 )/$6+',00 ,17
,17 FK 0ELW[ FK
Q)$;3,&,17
,17 3URJUDP ,17 )/$6+',00
FK ,& FK FK 0ELW[
)/$6+',00 ,& FK
,17 &RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHU 3URJUDP
%DWWHU\ 62&.(7
:DNH8S
,17 6&$1 /$1 ,17
: )/$6+',00
FK FK 6&$1਀ /68
,& FK ,& FK 62&.(7
57&
&RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHU
,17 8$57 &3/'
,17
FK /RFDO%XV /RFDO%XV +'' /RFDO%XV
/RJLF FK /RFDO%XV /RJLF
,) ,) /9'6 3DQHO 8$57
(WKHU0$& 8$57 3&,H,) ,& FK

3&83:%
3&,H,) (WKHU0$& 3&,H,) 3&,H,) 8$57
* FK ODQH &RQWUROOHU *3,2
ODQH * ODQH ODQH FK GHEXJ8$57
WR62&
3&,H[JHQ ,&
*ESV .+]
32) 3,&
%RDUGWR%RDUG&RQQHFWRU
0LFRQ
Q)$;3,&,17
3&,H[JHQ 86%+RVW
6HULDO&1 8$57 *ESV 7<3($&1
9HQGHU VHJ/(' 5[ )URQW
3&,
'HEXJ/('
&3/' 3&,H[JHQ
0DFK;2 3&,H6ZLWFK *ESV 7RXFK3DQHO,&
8$57 $&5(2SW 3,&;**3
5,& 6HULDO 56& 'HEXJ&1
&1 3HULFRP 3DQHO&RQWURO
9HQGRU &1 '5,9(5 63,
((3520
$&5(3:% 5[
.
2SW 'HEXJ/('
)$; )$;
SRUW
2SW &1 8$57 86%

86%+8%
.H\%RDUG
8$57 2SW6WG
1)&&$5'
5HDGHU
3&,H[JHQ 86%+RVW 86%+RVW 2SWLRQ
3LQ 7303:% *ESV 0ESV
2SW 0ESV
+HDGHU
((3520 6&10RWKHU3:%
NE
60%XV 'HEXJ
86% 3&,H,) ,& FK
*3,2 /3&,)
+RVW FK ODQH &RQWUROOHU
,& FK
&RQWUROOHU
6'00& 0,3, +' 86% 86% *3,2 :,),

63,,)
FK &6, $XGLR +6,& 8/3, 3:0 6LOH[

/9'6ESS /&'
6'00& ,& FK H'3 H'3 '3/9'6
86% ,6 ,& FK
FK &RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHU '', 371
+RVW FK
86%
+RVW FK
,QWHO
[ *HQ
86%
86% +RVW FK
+RVW (
GHEXJ8$57IURP3&8
4XDG*+] +68$57
5HXV8$57
9*$&1
9*$
'HEXJ
'3
'', ,& FK SLQ',3 ((3520
&RQWUROOHU 62&.(7 NE
0HPRU\
''5/62',00 60%XV
&RQWUROOHU
*%
((3520 ((3520
6$7$ 6$7$ 6'00& 3&8 3&8
',00&1 FK FK 69,' 63'FK 63'FK
FK FK FK 8$57 63,
''5/
63,)ODVK62,&
$QDORJ
6: 0%
',00&1 %,26
'XDO&KDQQHO
&1 P6$7$ 6HULDO&1
''5/62',00 'HEXJ
*% 30,&
P6$7$66' :ULWH
*% &1
3URJUDP
D. Scanner control PWB
㻰㻿㻼㻲㼏㼚㼠㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
䠄㻰㻿㻼㻲䠅㼀㼞㻾㻙㻾㻳㻮㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤㻌
㼀㼞㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㼀㼞㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻳㼛㼞㼛㼓㼚㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺
㼀㼞㻭㻲㻱㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞㻭㻿㻵㻯㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㻟㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
㼀㼞㻺㼑㼣㻌㻵㻼㻰
㼀㼞㻰㻻㻯㻯
㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻯㻼㼁
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂㻸㻰㻻㻝㻞㼂
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻㻝㻞㼂
㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻㻡㼂
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹㻔㼀㼛㻌㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻸㻰㻻
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿
㻿㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹
㻯㻸㻷㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻯㻼㼁㻌
㻯㻸㻷㻯㻸㻷
㻰㻿㻼㻲㻲㻭㻺㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞㻔㻞㻡㻹㻴㼦㻕
㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻰㻿㻼㻲㻌㻲㻭㻺
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻹㻲㻼㻯㻼㼃㻮
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻯㻺㼀㻼㼃㻮
㼀㼛㻌㻼㻯㼁
㻯㻯㻰㻙䠢㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻾㻱㼁㻿
㼀㼞
㼀㼞㻯㻸㻷㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㼀㼞㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻲㻙㻾㻳㻮
㻭㻲㻱㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤㻌㻯㻼㼁㻌
㼀㼞
㻟㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠㻯㻸㻷㻯㻸㻷
㼀㼞㼀㼛㻌㻼㻯㼁㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻔㻞㻡㻹㻴㼦㻕
㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㼀㼞㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌
㻔㻺㻵㻼㻰⏝㻕
㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌
㻿㻯䠝㻺㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠㻾㻱㼁㻿
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻺㼑㼣㻌㻵㻼㻰
㻰㻻㻯㻯
㻻㼞㼕㼓㼕㼚㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼦㼑㻌
㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻯㻼㼁
㻱㻞㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟㼀㼛㻌㻼㻯㼁㼡㼍㼞㼠
㻹㼕㼞㼞㼛㼞
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻔㻝㻹㼎㻕
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻸㻱㻰㻌㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾㻌
㻹㻴㻼㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹
㻻㻯㻿㼃
㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻭㼁㻰㻵㼀㻻㻾㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂㻸㻰㻻㻝㻞㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㼂㻝㻞㼂
㻸㻰㻻
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻㻡㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂㻸㻰㻻㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻿㻼㻱㻰
㻾㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㼠㼞㼍㼥
㻼㻻㻲
㼀㼛㻌㻼㻯㼁
㻼㻵㻯㻸㻭㻺㼏㼚㼠㻛㻼㻻㻲
㻼㻻㻲
㻾㼥㼏㼚㼠㻛㻻㻲㻲㼏㼚㼠
㻴㻻㻹㻱㻌㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻿㼃㻌㻼㼃㻮㼀㻼㻵㻯㻵㻞㻯

㼀㻼㻭㻺㻱㻸㻌㼁㻺
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻿㼃
㻸㻯㻰㻌㼁㻺
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻸㻯㻰㼐㼍㼠㼍
㻱㻲㻵㻌㻵㻲㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻿㼅㻺㻯㻿㼅㻺㻯
㻿㼅㻺㻯㻔㻻㻼㼀㻕㻮㼁㻿㻌㻿㼃
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㻲㼕㼑㼞㼥㻌㻱㼙㼎㼑㼐㼐㼑㼐
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤㻮㼁㻿㻌㻿㼃㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤
㻔㻻㻼㼀㻕
㻿㼅㻺㻯
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤
㻸㻿㼁㼏㼚㼠㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㼁㻿㻮
㼃㻵㻲㻵
㻵㻯㻌㻯㻭㻾㻰㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㻺㻌㻼㼃㻮㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮

㻾㻱㻭㻰㻱㻾㻷㻱㼅㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻌㼁㻿㻮㻕
㻲㻭㻺
㻹㻲㻼㻯
㻞㻠㼂㻛㻡㼂㼛㻛㻡㼂㻸㻛㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻴㻰㻰
㻡㼂㻸㻿㻞㻠㼂㻿㻝㻛㻞㻠㼂㻿㻿㻞㻠㼂㻹㻡㻛㻡㼂㼛㻛㻡㼂㻸㻹㻡㼂㼛
㻾㼥㼏㼚㼠㻛㻻㻲㻲㼏㼚㼠㻹㻭㻵㻺㻰㻯㻌
㻰㻯㻯㻺㼀㻌㻿㼁㻮㻌㻰㻯㻌㻿㼁㻮㻌㻰㻯㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻼㻻㻲
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮

E. LSU PWB
㸦㸧
㸸
㸸
㸦㸧
㸸
㸸
ࠉ
㸦㸧
㸸
㸸
㸦㸧
㸦㸧
㸸
㸸

2.
MainDCPS
AC PWB F101
Voltage
FUSE Conversion
AC CODE 1 NF +24VM1
+24VM2
MAIN POWER SW +24VM3
AC IN F1 +24VM4
NF +24VM5
L
T10AH/250V
(1) 200V series
Voltage
F2 Conversion
+ 5VOM
N + 5VLM
T10AH/250V
F3 F4
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH250V
SubDCPS
A. AC power line diagram
F101
Voltage
Power line diagram
FUSE Conversion
WARM HEATER SET (Option) NF +24VL1
+24VL2
+24VL3
+24VL4
+24VL5
WH-SW
WH PWB 10W
WH-N 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 Voltage
SCN Conversion
WH-L RY1 HEATER + 5VLS
NC
WH_CNT
NO
24V4
(MAIN)
10W 10W
㻯㻿
CS CS
HEATER 1 HEATER 2
HL PWB
18W
㼀㻭㻺㻌㻯㻿 L3
TAN RY2
HEATER
L4 INT24V
INT24V2L
RY1 (MAIN)
14W
LSU 㻸㻿㼁 L1 HLPR

HEATER
HLPR
10W
L2
LCC 㻸㻯㻯
HEATER

TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4
T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
4 HLOUT_UM 4 HLOUT_UW HLOUT_LM 4

T2 SSR1 T2 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 SSR4
1 1 1 1
HLOUT_US
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
7KHFRQQHFWRU 6 6 6 6
IRU:LWKVWDQG9ROWDJH7HVW
AC SUB PWB RY1
AC IN F1
L
T10AH/250V
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
AC CODE 2 RY2 F3
N/F
F2 +/B80 +/B8: +/B/0
+/B86
N
T10AH/250V
VR1
76B0 76B/
24V4
76B6
24V4 )86,1*81,7
HL_POW_CNT FW
Generating
Circuit 3.3V
FW
MainDCPS
AC PWB F101
Voltage
FUSE Conversion
AC CODE 1 NF +24VM1
+24VM2
MAIN POWER SW +24VM3
AC IN F1 +24VM4
NF +24VM5
L
20A/250V
(2) North America
Voltage
Conversion
+ 5VOM
N + 5VLM
F3
T2.0AH/250V
SubDCPS
F101
Voltage
FUSE Conversion
WARM HEATER SET (OPTION ) NF +24VL1
+24VL2
+24VL3
+24VL4
+24VL5
WH-SW
WH PWB 10W
WH-N 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 Voltage
SCN Conversion
WH-L RY1 HEATER + 5VLS
NC
WH_CNT
NO
24V4
10W 10W
(MAIN)
㻯㻿
CS CS
HEATER 1 HEATER 2
(Optional)
HL PWB
18W
㼀㻭㻺㻌㻯㻿 L1
TAN RY1
HEATER
INT24V2L
(MAIN)
14W
LSU 㻸㻿㼁 HLPR

HEATER
10W
LCC 㻸㻯㻯
HEATER

TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4
T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
4 HLOUT_UM 4 HLOUT_UW HLOUT_LM 4

T2 SSR1 T2 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 SSR4
1 1 1 1
HLOUT_US
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
6 6 6 6
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
+/B80 +/B8: +/B/0

+/B86
76B/ 76B6
76B0
)86,1*81,7
MAIN DCPS DRIVER PWB TNM_K
TNHM_K
TNM_C
WEBM2
POM TNHM_C
PRM TNM_M
TNHM_M
PFM
TNM_Y
ADUM1
TNHM_Y
ADUM2
LCCM RRM
(1) Main power supply: 24V
B. DC power line diagram
PCU PWB FUM

CPFM HL PWB
2
1
3
4
MC PWB
1TC PWB
2TC PWB
DM_K
CCM_K DM_C SOLENOID
CCM_C DM_M CLUCH

CCM_M DM_Y FAN
CCM_Y
AC SUB PWB
PTCCM BTM
WH PWB
T1LUM WTM
T2LUM COIN

VENDER
C3LUM SOLENOID
C4LUM CLUCH
Info LAMP FAN
DL2_K
DL_K DL2_C
DL_C DL2_M
DL_M DL2_Y
DL_Y
SCN MOTHER LSU CNT PWB LD PWB

PGM
LSUFM
MAIN DCPS PCU PWB
T1 PWB
T2 PWB
SENSOR
(2) Main power supply: 5VL
SENSOR
R-DOOR I/F PWB

SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
WTM
FUM
CPFM
DV un
COIN VENDER
AC SUB PWB

HUD_M
LD PWB BD PWB
SCN MOTHER PWB LSU CNT PWB
LCC
DRIVER PWB
FIN
SUB DCPS PCU PWB DSPF CNT PWB SLUM
SPUFM
SPOM
SOLENOID
SCN MOTHER PWB
CLUCH
LED PWB
CCD PWB
(3) Sub power supply: 24V
CCD PWB
SPFFAN
LVDS PWB LCD UN
LED DRIVER PWB LED PWB
MIM
ORS LED PWB
MFPC PWB
FAX2 TEL LIU2
FAX3 TEL LIU3
HDD FM

MFP FM
FAX1 TEL LIU1
LCC
SUB DCPS
PCU PWB
PRTPD
DSPF un
SCN MOTHER PWB DSPF CNT PWB CCD-R PWB

(4) Sub power supply: 5VL
CCD-F PWB
EFI IF PWB
ORS PD PWB
AUDITOR
OCSW
MHPS
IC CARD READER
FRONT USB
OPE un
KEY BOARD
LVDS PWB LCD UN
HOME KEY PWB
POWER SW PWB

MFPC PWB
FAX MAIN2 TEL LIU2
MAIN DCPS
FAX MAIN1 TEL LIU1 FAX MAIN3 TEL LIU3
WIRELESS LAN ACRE
REAR USBH HDD

1
1
3.
CN24
B12B-CZHK-B-1
12AK_CS_Y2
11AK_CS_Y1
10AK_CS_M2
9AK_CS_M1
8AK_CS_C2
LSU unit 7AK_CS_C1
6AK_CS_K2
: ‘17/Apr.
5AK_CS_K1
4AK_RXD
3AK_TXD
2AK_SCLK
1GND
12CZ-6H
A. LSU, MOTHER
CN5
B12B-CZHK-B-1 PCU PWB
AK_CS_Y2 1
AK_CS_Y1 2
AK_CS_M2 3 CN25
AK_CS_M1 4 B30B-PUDSS-1
AK_CS_C2 5 30 (NC)
AK_CS_C1 6 29 (NC)
AK_CS_K2 7
Actual wiring chart
AK_CS_K1 8
AK_RXD 9 SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N
AK_TXD 10
4 OZFM3_LD 4 28 GND
AK_SCLK 11
3 GND 3 26 OZFM3_LD
GND 12
2 OZFM_CNT 2 24 OZFM_CNT
12CZ-6Y
OZFAN 3 1 OZFM3_V 1 22 OZFM3_V
LD PWB
TH_M 4 27 TH_M
Temperature and GND 3 25 GND
HUD_M 2 23 HUD_M
humidity sensor 5VLM7 1 21 5VLM7
PHR-4
LSU PWB CN2
B20B-PUDSS-1
VREF2 20 20 VREF2
GND 19 19 GND
(NC) 18(NC) 18 (NC)
TH2_LSU 17 17 TH2_LSU
nPCU_TRG 16 16 PCU_TRG
TH1_LSU 15 15 TH1_LSU
nJOBEND_INT_K 14 14 JOBEND_INT_K
nJOBEND_INT_C 13 13 JOBEND_INT_C
CN1 CN4 nJOBEND_INT_M 12 12 JOBEND_INT_M
S4B-PH-K-S S7B-PH-K-S CN6 CN500 nJOBEND_INT_Y 11 11 JOBEND_INT_Y
+5V 1 4 1 7 +5V_LD TX25-120P-6ST-H1E TX24-120R-6ST-H1E JOBEND_INT 10 10 JOBEND_INT
DGND 2 3 2 6 GND D-GND 1 1 D-GND nTRANS_RST 9 9 TRANS_RST
BD PWB nBD 3 2 3 5 BD #P0_K_AK1 61 TH1 2 2 TH1 61 #P0_K_AK1 LSU_RST 7 7 LSU_RST
DGND 4 1 (NC) 4 4 GND D-GND 62 TH2 3 3 TH2 62 D-GND nRSV_DAT 8 8 RSV_DAT
04CK-6H-PC 5 3 TH1 3.3V 63 D-GND 4 4 D-GND 63 3.3V GND 6 6 GND
(Reverse type) 6 2 GND WP_Y 64 nBD 5 5 nBD 64 WP_Y nTRANS_DAT 5 5 TRANS_DAT
7 1 TH2 SCL_Y 65 D-GND 6 6 D-GND 65 SCL_Y GND 3 3 GND
07CK-6H-PC SDA_Y 66 +24V1 7 7 +24V1 66 SDA_Y SCK_LSU 4 4 SCK_LSU
CN1 S3B-PH-K-S (Reverse type) WP_M 67 +24V1 8 8 +24V1 67 WP_M GND 2 2 GND
(NC) 1 3 (NC) SCL_M 68 +24V1 9 9 +24V1 68 SCL_M INT5V_LD 1 1 INT5V_LD
10 PUDP-20V-S PUDP-30V-S
LSU GND 2 2
TH1 3 1
SDA_M 69
WP_C 70
P-GND 10
P-GND 11 11
P-GND
P-GND
69 SDA_M
70 WP_C CN3 CN20
TH1 PWB 03CK-6H-PC SCL_C 71 P-GND 12 12 P-GND 71 SCL_C B06B-PASK-1 B06B-PASK-1
(Reverse type) SDA_C 72 nPOLY_START 13 13 nPOLY_START 72 SDA_C D-GND 1 1 D-GND
WP_K 73 nPOLY_LOCK 14 14 nPOLY_LOCK 73 WP_K +3.3V 2 2 +3.3V
CN1 S3B-PH-K-S
SCL_K 74 nPOLY_CK 15 15 nPOLY_CK 74 SCL_K P-GND 3 3 P-GND
(NC) 1 3 (NC)
LSU SDA_K 75 D-GND 16 16 D-GND 75 SDA_K +24V 4 4 +24V
GND 2 2 SCAN MOTHER
D-GND 76 FAN_24V 17 17 FAN_24V 76 D-GND +5V 5 5 +5V
TH2 3 1
D-GND 77 FAN_nREADY 18 18 FAN_nREADY 77 D-GND D-GND 6 6 D-GND
03CK-6H-PC
19 PAP-06V-S PAP-06V-S
TH2 PWB (Reverse type) 5VLD 78
D-GND 79
P-GND 19
#P2_AK2 20 20
P-GND
#P2_AK2
78 5VLD
79 D-GND CN1 CN26 PWB
5VLD 80 #P1_AK2 21 21 #P1_AK2 80 5VLD DF50-40DP-1V(51) DF50-40DP-1V(51)
D-GND 81 #P0_AK2 22 22 #P0_AK2 81 D-GND CH0_N 1 1 CH0_N
5VLD 82 SDCLK 23 23 SDCLK 82 5VLD CH0_P 2 2 CH0_P
D-GND 83 P4_Y_AK2 24 24 P4_Y_AK2 83 D-GND D-GND 3 3 D-GND
CN3
#P0_C_AK1 84 P3_Y_AK2 25 25 P3_Y_AK2 84 #P0_C_AK1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
B5B-ZR-SM4-TF S5B-PH-K-S
#P2_AK1 85 nINT_Y_AK2 26 26 nINT_Y_AK2 85 #P2_AK1 CH1_N 5 5 CH1_N
+24V 1 1 24V
#P1_AK1 86 MSET_Y_AK2 27 27 MSET_Y_AK2 86 #P1_AK1 CH1_P 6 6 CH1_P

GND 2 2 PGND CN23 CN22
#P0_M_AK1 87 P4_Y_AK1 28 28 P4_Y_AK1 87 #P0_M_AK1 CH2_N 7 7 CH2_N
POLYGON /START 3 3 nPOLY_START
B15B-CSRK B15B-CSRK
DT_Y3+ 88 P3_Y_AK1 29 29 P3_Y_AK1 88 DT_Y3+ CH2_P 8 8 CH2_P
/LOCKED 4 4 nPOLY_LOCK
DT_Y3- 89 nINT_Y_AK1 30 30 nINT_Y_AK1 89 DT_Y3- D-GND 9 9 D-GND 5VO_DUTY 1 15 5VO
EXT.CLK 5 5 nPOLY_CK
DT_Y4+ 90 nLDERR_Y 31 31 nLDERR_Y 90 DT_Y4+ D-GND 10 10 D-GND PRTPD_out 2 14 PRTPD_out
MOTOR ZHR-5 PHR-5
DT_Y4- 91 MSET_Y_AK1 32 32 MSET_Y_AK1 91 DT_Y4- CLK_N 11 11 CLK_N TxD_PCU 3 13 TxD_PCU
DT_Y1+ 92 P4_K_AK2 33 33 P4_K_AK2 92 DT_Y1+ CLK_P 12 12 CLK_P RxD_PCU 4 12 RxD_PCU
DT_Y1- 93 P3_K_AK2 34 34 P3_K_AK2 93 DT_Y1- CH3_N 13 13 CH3_N RES_PCU 5 11 RES_PCU
DT_Y2+ 94 nINT_K_AK2 35 35 nINT_K_AK2 94 DT_Y2+ CH3_P 14 14 CH3_P RTS_PCU 6 10 RTS_PCU
DT_Y2- 95 MSET_K_AK2 36 36 MSET_K_AK2 95 DT_Y2- D-GND 15 15 D-GND CTS_PCU 7 9 CTS_PCU
DT_K3+ 96 P4_K_AK1 37 37 P4_K_AK1 96 DT_K3+ D-GND 16 16 D-GND /POF 8 8 /POF
CN1 DT_K3- 97 P3_K_AK1 38 38 P3_K_AK1 97 DT_K3- CH4_N 17 17 CH4_N 5VLMPD 9 7 5VLMPD
S3B-PH-K-S DT_K4+ 98 nINT_K_AK1 39 39 nINT_K_AK1 98 DT_K4+ CH4_P 18 18 CH4_P 5VLMPD 10 6 5VLMPD
1 24V DT_K4- 99 nLDERR_K 40 40 nLDERR_K 99 DT_K4- ECLK_LSU_N 19 19 ECLK_LSU_N GND 11 5 GND
41 4
Board to Board
2 nFANRDY DT_K1+ 100 MSET_K_AK1 41 MSET_K_AK1 100 DT_K1+ ECLK_LSU_P 20 20 ECLK_LSU_P GND 12 GND
LSU FAN 3 PGND DT_K1- 101 P4_C_AK2 42 42 P4_C_AK2 101 DT_K1- D-GND 21 21 D-GND ACK 13 3 SC_ACK
PHNR-3 DT_K2+ 102 P3_C_AK2 43 43 P3_C_AK2 102 DT_K2+ D-GND 22 22 D-GND REQ 14 2 PCU_REQ
DT_K2- 103 nINT_C_AK2 44 44 nINT_C_AK2 103 DT_K2- HSYNC_LSU_P 23 23 HSYNC_LSU_P (NC) 15(NC) (NC) 1 Reserve_IN2
DT_C3+ 104 MSET_C_AK2 45 45 MSET_C_AK2 104 DT_C3+ HSYNC_LSU_N 24 24 HSYNC_LSU_N 15CSR-8PK 15CSR-8PK
DT_C3- 105 P4_C_AK1 46 46 P4_C_AK1 105 DT_C3- VSYNC_Y_P 25 25 VSYNC_Y_P
DT_C4+ 106 P3_C_AK1 47 47 P3_C_AK1 106 DT_C4+ VSYNC_Y_N 26 26 VSYNC_Y_N
DT_C4- 107 nINT_C_AK1 48 48 nINT_C_AK1 107 DT_C4- D-GND 27 27 D-GND
DT_C1+ 108 nLDERR_C 49 49 nLDERR_C 108 DT_C1+ D-GND 28 28 D-GND
DT_C1- 109 MSET_C_AK1 50 50 MSET_C_AK1 109 DT_C1- VSYNC_M_N 29 29 VSYNC_M_N
DT_C2+ 110 P4_M_AK2 51 51 P4_M_AK2 110 DT_C2+ VSYNC_M_P 30 30 VSYNC_M_P
DT_C2- 111 P3_M_AK2 52 52 P3_M_AK2 111 DT_C2- VSYNC_C_P 31 31 VSYNC_C_P
DT_M3+ 112 nINT_M_AK2 53 53 nINT_M_AK2 112 DT_M3+ VSYNC_C_N 32 32 VSYNC_C_N
DT_M3- 113 MSET_M_AK2 54 54 MSET_M_AK2 113 DT_M3- D-GND 33 33 D-GND
DT_M4+ 114 P4_M_AK1 55 55 P4_M_AK1 114 DT_M4+ D-GND 34 34 D-GND
DT_M4- 115 P3_M_AK1 56 56 P3_M_AK1 115 DT_M4- VSYNC_K_N 35 35 VSYNC_K_N
DT_M1+ 116 nINT_M_AK1 57 57 nINT_M_AK1 116 DT_M1+ VSYNC_K_P 36 36 VSYNC_K_P
DT_M1- 117 nLDERR_M 58 58 nLDERR_M 117 DT_M1- D-GND 37 37 D-GND
DT_M2+ 118 MSET_M_AK1 59 59 MSET_M_AK1 118 DT_M2+ D-GND 38 38 D-GND
DT_M2- 119 D-GND 60 60 D-GND 119 DT_M2- D-GND 39 39 D-GND
#P0_Y_AK1 120 120 #P0_Y_AK1 D-GND 40 40 D-GND
DF50S-40DS-1C DF50S-40DS-1C
1
1
CN1 CN12 CN13

LVDS PWB
CN1 CN2
LCD module
FH48-50S-0.5SV FH48-50S-0.5SV FI-RE41S-VF FI-RNE41SZ-HF FI-RNE41SZ-HF 20453−040T-01
GND 50 50 GND GND 1 41 GND B_3R3V_LCD 41 40 VCSS
GND 49 49 GND nPVCCEN 2 40 (NC) B_3R3V_LCD 40 39 VCSS
GND 48 48 GND CTP_l2CUSBSEL 3 39 BKLT_EN B_3R3V_LCD 39 38 VCSS
GND 47 47 GND BKLT_EN 4 38 CN_LCDSEL0 B_3R3V_LCD 38 37 VEDID
GND 46 46 GND GND 5 37 GND (NC) 37 36 (NC)
: ‘17/Apr.
GND 45 45 GND GND 6 36 LCD_A3_P (NC) 36 35 (NC)(CLKEDID)

GND 44 44 GND GND 7 35 LCD_A3_N (NC) 35 34 (NC)(DATAEDID)
GND 43 43 GND GND 8 34 GND TX_OUT_ON 34 33 Rxin0-
GND 42 42 GND LCD_CLK_P 9 33 LCD_CLK_P TX_OUT_OP 33 32 Rxin0+
GND 41 41 GND LCD_CLK_N 10 32 LCD_CLK_N GND 32 31 VSS
CN_AFE_SDO 40 40 CN_AFE_SDO GND 11 31 GND TX_OUT1N 31 30 Rxin1-
AFE_SDTO 39 39 CN_AFE_SDI LCD_A2_P 12 30 LCD_A2_P TX_OUT1P 30 29 Rxin1+
AFE_SCLK 38 38 AFE_SCLK LCD_A2_N 13 29 LCD_A2_N GND 29 28 VSS
AFE_CS 37 37 AFE_CS GND 14 28 GND TX_OUT2N 28 27 Rxin2-
nRES_CCDAD 36 36 nRES_CCDAD LCD_A1_P 15 27 LCD_A1_P TX_OUT2P 27 26 Rxin2+
GND 35 35 GND LCD_A1_N 16 26 LCD_A1_N GND 26 25 VSS
A3.3V 34 34 A3.3V GND 17 25 GND TX_CLKOUT_N 25 24 RxCLK-
A3.3V 33 33 A3.3V LCD_A0_P 18 24 LCD_A0_P TX_CLKOUT_P 24 23 RxCLK+
A3.3V 32 32 A3.3V LCD_A0_N 19 23 LCD_A0_N GND 23 22 VSS
A3.3V 31 31 A3.3V GND 20 22 GND （NC) 22 21 （NC)
A3.3V 30 30 A3.3V CCFT_1 21 21 CN_nCCFT （NC) 21 20 （NC)
A3.3V 29 29 A3.3V P_MTP_INT_1 22 20 (NC) GND 20 19 VSS
GND 28 28 GND P_MTP_RST_1 23 19 (NC) （NC) 19 18 （NC)
A5V 27 27 A5V P_MTP_SCL_B 24 18 (NC) （NC) 18 17 （NC)
A5V 26 26 A5V P_MTP_SDA_B 25 17 (NC) GND 17 16 VSS
A5V 25 25 A5V GND 26 16 GND （NC) 16 15 （NC)
GND 24 24 GND +5VNSPSW 27 15 +5VNSPSW （NC) 15 14 （NC)
B. Operation panel, Scanner
A10V 23 23 A10V +5VNSPSW 28 14 +5VNSPSW GND 14 13 VSS

A10V 22 22 A10V +5VNSPSW 29 13 +5VNSPSW GND 13 12 LED_GND
GND 21 21 GND +5VNSPSW 30 12 +5VNSPSW GND 12 11 LED_GND
CN_TA_N 20 20 CN_TA_N GND 31 11 GND GND 11 10 LED_GND
CN_TA_P 19 19 CN_TA_P GND 32 10 GND GND 10 9 LED_GND
GND 18 18 GND +24V_PSW 33 9 +24V_PSW GND 9 8 LED_GND
CN_TB_N 17 17 CN_TB_N +24V_PSW 34 8 +24V_PSW GND 8 7 LED_GND
CN_TB_P 16 16 CN_TB_P +24V_PSW 35 7 +24V_PSW CCFT_OUT 7 6 LED_PWM
GND 15 15 GND +24V_PSW 36 6 +24V_PSW DISP_OUT 6 5 LED_EN
CN_TC_N 14 14 CN_TC_N GND 37 5 GND GND 5 4 LED_GND
CN_TC_P 13 13 CN_TC_P GND 38 4 GND VLED_PSW 4 3 LED_VCCS
GND 12 12 GND GND 39 3 GND VLED_PSW 3 2 LED_VCCS
CN_TCLK_N 11 11 CN_TCLK_N GND 40 2 GND VLED_PSW 2 1 LED_VCCS
CN_TCLK_P 10 10 CN_TCLK_P GND 41 1 GND （NC) 1
GND 9 9 GND FI-RE-41HL FI-RE-41HL FI-RE-41CL
CN_TD_N 8 8 CN_TD_N
CN_TD_P 7 7 CN_TD_P
GND 6 6 GND
CN_TE_N 5 5 CN_TE_N
CN_TE_P 4 4 CN_TE_P
SCNCNT_SE1 2 2 SCNCNT_SE1 CN1
GND 1 1 GND BM10B-GHS-TBT CN2
(NC) 11 12V 11 (NC) 1 GND IMSA-9619S-04Y800
10 YN_Y2 10 2 POW_SW XN_X2 1
9 XN_X2 9 3 +5VO YN_Y2 2
CN5 8 XP_X1 8 4 POW_LED XP_X1 3
B13B-PH-K-S 7 YP_Y1 7 5 BZR YP_Y1 4 TOUCH PANEL
(NC) 1 nA_PNC 6 GND 6 6 XP_X1
(NC) +5VO
CCD PWB (NC)
2 nA_COPY
3 nA_CA
5
4 CN_BZR
5
4
7
8
YP_Y1
XN_X2 POWER-SW
(NC) 4 nA_READY 3 CN_OPELED_SEG0 3 9 YN_Y2
AUDITOR (NC) 5 nA_AUD 2 CN_nOPELED_FO 2 (NC) 10 GND
OR (NC) 6 5V 1 CN_nHOME_KEY 1 GHR-10V-S
PWB
(NC) 7 GND XARR-11V XAP-11V-1
(OPTION) (NC) 8 24V
(NC) 9 /col
(NC) 10 nA_TC
(NC) 11 24V
12 nPNC-a
13 GND
PHR-13
7 GND 7
CN2 (NC) 6 INFO_LED_R 6 (NC)
B3B-PASK-1 (NC) 5 INFO_LED_G 5 (NC)
4 nPWR_SW_G 4
MHPS 1 1 MHPS
3 POW_LED_R 3
GND 2 2 GND
WU_LED
2 2
MHPS 5VN+R 3 3 5VN+R
1 nWU_KEY 1
179228-3 PAP-03V-S
SMP-07V-NC SMR-O7V-N
(1/2) CN7
B26B-PUDSS-1 CN1
CN3 BM07B-GHS-TBT
B04B-PASK-1 nINFO_FAX_LED 1
S6B-PH-K-S
EFI_KEY 3 (NC) 7 +5VO
MIM_XB 1 1 MIM_XB
nPOW_LED_G 5 6 WU_LED
MIM_B 3 2 MIM_B
WU_LED 7 5 nWU_KEY
MIM_A 4 3 MIM_A

CN_OPELED_SEG0 9 4 nHM_KEY
MIM MIM_XA 6 4 MIM_XA
XH(X1) 11 3 5VO
HOME KEY
PHR-6 PAP-04V-S PDSEL1 13 2 HOME_LED
nYL(Y1) 15 1 GND PWB
GND 17 GHR-07V-S
GND 19
LED PWB YH(Y2) 21
LED DRV PWB nBZR 23
SM03B-GHS-TB CN2 CN-1 +5VO 25
LED_ANODE 1 CN1
S6B-PH-K-S 5597-05APB7 5597-05CPB7F nPWR_SW 2
(NC) 2
1 LED_ANODE 24VPD 1 5 24VPD SEG1 4 (NC)
LED_CATHODE 3
2 GND 24VPD 2 4 24VPD (NC) 6 (NC)
GHR-03V-S 3 LED_CATHODE LAMP 3 3 LAMP nWU_KEY 8
4 LED_ANODE GND 4 2 GND nF0 10
5 GND GND 5 1 GND PDSEL0 12
6 LED_CATHODE PDSEL2 14
LED PWB
SM03B-GHS-TB
PD 16
PHR-6 5V 18
LED_ANODE 1
GND 20
(NC) 2
nXL 22
LED_CATHODE 3
nHOME_KEY 24
GHR-03V-S 5VO 26
CN4 PUDP-26V-S
B06B-PASK-1
OCSW 1 1 /OCSW
GND 2 2 GND
OCSW 5VN+R 3 3 5VN+R
179228-3 4 24V
5 /SIZE_LED1
24V 6 /SIZE_LED2
/SIZE_LED1 PAP-06V-S
/SIZE_LED2
ORS LED PWB GND
SRA-21T-4 B6P-PH-K-S
1 PDSEL0
2 PDSEL1
3 PDSEL2
4 5V
5 PD
SCAN MOTHER PWB 6 GND
ORS-PD
PHR-6
1
1
SCN MOTHER PWB

CN9 CN6
1 1 3
2 5V_SPED1
GND GND
C. DSPF
3 3 DSPF CCD PWB GND

DSDATA_3P 5 5 DSDATA_3P 1
CN4 CN1 CCN10 SPED1
DSDATA_3N DSDATA_3N
GND
7
9
7
9 GND 1 1 A-1 03XR-6H-P
SPED1
GND 2 2 GND 5V_SPED1 A-2
DSCLK_P 11 11 DSCLK_P
AFE_SDO 3 3 AFE_SDO GND A-3
DSCLK_N DSCLK_N
: ‘17/Apr.
13 13 AFE_SDIO AFE_SDIO D_SPED1

GND GND 4 4 A-4 3
15 15 AFE_SCLK AFE_SCLK 5V_SPRDMD 5V_SPRDMD
DSDATA_2P DSDATA_2P 5 5 A-5 2
17 17 RES_CCDAD RES_CCDAD GND GND
DSDATA_2N DSDATA_2N 6 6 A-6 1
19 19 CCD_SEL CCD_SEL D_RANDOM SPRDMD
GND GND 7 7 A-7 SPRDMD
21 21 GND GND /D_SPFC 03XR-6H-P
DSDATA_1P DSDATA_1P 8 8 A-8
23 23 A3.3V A3.3V +24V
DSDATA_1N DSDATA_1N 9 9 A-9
25 25 A3.3V A3.3V (NC)
GND GND 10 10
27 27 A3.3V A3.3V 09CZ-6Y
DSDATA_0P DSDATA_0P 11 11 2
29 29 A3.3V A3.3V /D_SPFC
DSDATA_0N DSDATA_0N 12 12 1
A3.3V 13 13 A3.3V +24V SPFC
GND 14 14 GND 02CZ-6H
2 2 A5V A5V
NCTS_SCN NRST_DSPF 15 15
4 4 A5V A5V
NRST_SCN NCTS_DSPF 16 16
6 6 A5V A5V
RXD_SCN TXD_DSPF 17 17 3
8 8 GND GND 5V_SCOV
TXD_SCN RXD_DSPF 18 18 2
10 10 A10V A10V GND
GND GND 19 19 1
12 12 A10V A10V CCN10 SCOV
DSPF_INT DSPF_INT 20 20 SCOV
14 14 GND GND 03XR-6H-P
GND GND 21 21 B-1
16 16 TA_N TA_N 5V_SCOV
RES RES 22 22 B-2
18 18 TA_P TA_P GND
DSPFUP DSPFUP 23 23 B-3
20 20 GND GND D_SCOV
TXD_DSPF_LOG D_CPU_TXD 24 24 B-4 3
22 22 TB_N TB_N 5V_STUD 5V_STUD
SPED SPED 25 25 B-5 2
24 24 TB_P TB_P GND GND
NLVDS_STBY NLVDS_STBY 26 26 B-6 1
26 26 GND GND D_STUD STUD
RXD_DSPF_LOG D_CPU_RXD 27 27 B-7 STUD
28 28 TC_N TC_N 5V_SPPD1 03XR-6H-P
NPOF NPOF 28 28 B-8
30 30 TC_P TC_P GND
GND GND 29 29 B-9
GND 30 30 GND D_SPPD1
DF50S-30DS-1C DF50S-30DS-1C TCLK_N TCLK_N
DF50-30DP-1V DF50-30DP-1V 31 31 B18B-CZWHK-B-1 09CZ-6H 3
TCLK_P 32 32 TCLK_P CZWH-18V-S 2 5V_SPPD1
CN6 CN5 GND 33 33 GND 1 GND
1 1 TD_N 34 34 TD_N SPPD1 SPPD1
GND 3 3 GND TD_P 35 35 TD_P 03XR-6H-P
24V 5 5 24V GND 36 36 GND
24V 7 7 24V TE_N 37 37 TE_N
12V 9 9 12V TE_P 38 38 TE_P
5VO 11 11 5VO GND 39 39 GND
3.3V 13 13 3.3V AFE_CS 40 40 AFE_CS
GND GND GND GND 292254-3
FH48-40S-0.5SV FH48-40S-0.5SV 3 1 3
2 2 2 GND 2 2 GND
GND 4 4 GND 1 SPPD2 3 1 SPPD2
24V 6 6 24V 5V_SPPD2 5V_SPPD2 SPPD2
24V 8 8 24V CN1001 03XR-6H-P
5V 5V 03XR-6H-P 173977-3
10 10 1
5V_SPF 12 12 5V_SPF SPFFAN_+V 2
3.3V 14 14 3.3V SPFFAN_GND 3 CN1 3
GND GND SPFFAN_SIG SPFFAN A-1 2 5V_SPPD3
PUDP-14V-S PUDP-14V-S 179227-1 GND A-2 1 GND
B14B-PUDSS-1 292132-3 SPPD2 SPPD3
B14B-PUDSS-1 A-3 SPPD3
5V_SPPD2 A-4 03XR-6H-P
5V_SPPD3 A-5
GND A-6
SAA-21T-3.5L SRA-21T-4 SPPD3 A-7 3
5V_SPPD4 A-8 2 5V_SPPD4
CCN13 GND A-9 1 GND
3 A-1 SPPD4 A-10 SPPD4 SPPD4
5V_STLD 2 A-2 5V_STLD DSPF control PWB 5V_SPPD5 A-11 03XR-6H-P
GND 1 A-3 GND GND A-12
STLD STLD A-4 D_STLD SPPD5 A-13
03XR-6H-P A-5 5V_SPF 5V_SLCOV A-14
A-6 GND GND A-15 BU03P-TR-P-H
A-7 D_SPED2 SLCOV 3 1 3
3 A-8 (NC) 15CZ-6Y 2 5V_SPPD5 2 2 5V_SPPD5
5V_SPF 2 (NC) 1 GND 3 1 GND
GND 1 08CZ-6Y SPPD5 SPPD5 SPPD5
SPED2 SPED2 03XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P 03CK-6H-PC 03KR-6H-PC
OPTION 2
292254-4 CCN13 1 GND
1 4 B-1 ROCD SLCOV
2 +24V 3 B-2 +24V 02XR-6H-P
3 /D_STMPS 2 B-3 /D_STMPS
4 D_STSET 1 B-4 D_STSET 3
STMPS GND B-5 GND 2 5V_SOCD
ARSU1 179228-4 B-6 5V_SPOD 1 GND
04XR-6H-P GND SOCD
B-7 SOCD
B-8 D_SPOD 03XR-6H-P
(NC)
3 08CZ-6H B16B-CZWHK-B-1
5V_SPOD 2 2
GND 1 1 /D_STRC
SPOD D_SPOD B-1 +24V STRC
03XR-6H-P 5V_SOCD B-2 02CZ-6H
GND B-3
SOCD B-4
/D_STRC B-5
+24V B-6 7

SPUFM_LD B-7 6 SPUFM_LD
SPUFM_CW B-8 5 SPUFM_CW
SPUFM_BRAKE B-9 4 SPUFM_BRAKE
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 SPUFM_CLK SPUFM_CLK
B-10 3
PGND B-11 2 (NC) SPUFM
+24V B-12 1 PGND
CCN8 /D_STRRC B-13 +24V
1 +24V B-14 07XR-6H-P 292132-7
/D_LUMBOUT 2 /D_LUMBOUT /D_SRRC B-15
/D_LUMAOUT 3 /D_LUMAOUT +24V
D_LUMBOUT 4 D_LUMBOUT 15CZ-6H
D_LUMAOUT D_LUMAOUT B30B-CZWHK-V-B-1
SLUM 5 CZWH-30V-S 2
+24V +24V 1 /D_STRRC
PHR-5 +24V STRRC
B5B-PH-K-S
02CZ-6H
2
CCN9 1 /D_SRRC
1 1 +24V SRRC
/D_SPUMBOUT 2 2 /D_SPOMBOUT 02CZ-6H
/D_SPUMAOUT 3 3 /D_SPOMAOUT
D_SPUMBOUT 4 4 D_SPOMBOUT
SPOM D_SPUMAOUT D_SPOMAOUT
PHR-4 PHR-4 B4B-PH-K-S
3
2 5V_SPLS1
1 GND
CCN12 D_SPLS1 SPLS1
1 03XR-6H-P
5V_SPLS1 2
GND 3 BU03P-TR-P-H
CN7 D_SPLS1 4 3 1 3
1 1 GND 2 2 GND 2 GND
LED_ANODE 2 LED_ANODE 5
2 D_SPWS 1 3 D_SPWS 1 D_SPWS
(NC) 3 GND 6
LED PWB 3 +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V
LED_CATHODE/ LED_CATHODE/ 7 SPWS
4 5V_SPLS2
GHR-03V-S LED_ANODE/ 8 03CK-6H-PC PHNR-03-H
SM03B-GHS-TB 5 GND
GND 9
6 D_SPLS2
LED_CATHODE
B09B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) 09CZ-6Y
PAP-06V-S B06B-PASK-1 3
2 5V_SPLS2
1 GND
D_SPLS2 SPLS2
03XR-6H-P
1
LED_ANODE 2
(NC) 3
LED PWB LED_CATHODE/
SM03B-GHS-TB GHR-03V-S
1
B2B-PH-K-S
1
B6B-PH-K-S CN-3 1 GND
GND 1 6 (NC) B30B-CZWHK-B-1 2 T1LUM T1LUM
GND 2 5 A-1 GND PHR-2
C4SS1 3 4 A-2 C4SS1 CN-2
C4SS2 4 3 A-3 C4SS2 B24B-PUDSS-1
C4SS C4SS3
C4SS4
5
6
2
1
A-4
A-5
C4SS3
C4SS4
GND 1
T1LUM 3 SMP-10V-NC SMR-10V-N B04B-PASK-1
06CK-6H-PC A-6 GND 5VNPD 5 1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
(Reverse type) A-7 C3SS1 GND 7 2 GND 2 2 GND
A-8 C3SS2 T1LUD 9 3 T1LUD 3 3 T1LUD T1 PWB
A-9 C3SS3 T1PED 11 4 T1PED 4 4 T1PED
B6B-PH-K-S A-10 C3SS4 GND 13 5 GND 5
GND 1 6 (NC) PAP-04V-S
A-11 GND T1SPD 15 6 T1SPD 6
GND 2 5
A-12 C4LUM 5VNPD 17 7 5VNPD 7
C3SS1 3 4
: ‘17/Apr.
A-13 GND GND 19 8 GND 8

C3SS2 4 3
C3SS A-14 C3LUM T2SPD 21 9 T2SPD 9
C3SS3 5 2
(NC) A-15 (NC) 5VNPD 23 10 5VNPD 10
C3SS4 6 1 3 GND
15CZ-6Y 24V3 2
06CK-6H-PC 2 T1SPD
T1PUS 4
(Reverse type) 1 5VNPD T1SPD
B-15 5VNPD 5VNPD 6
B-14 C4SPD GND 8 179228-3
B2B-PH-K-S B-13 GND T2LUD 10
P-GND 1 2 B-12 5VNPD T2PED 12 3 GND
C4LUM C4LUM 2 1 B-11 C3SPD 5VNPD 14 2 T2SPD
02CK-6H-PC B-10 GND T1PPD1 16 1 5VNPD T2SPD
(Reverse type) B-9 PTRC1 GND 18 179228-3
B-8 24V4 5VNPD 20
B2B-PH-K-S B-7 C4PUC T1PPD2 22
P-GND 1 2 SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC
B-6 24V4 GND 24
C3LUM C3LUM 2 1
B-5 C3PUC PUDP-24V-S 1 24V3 1
02CK-6H-PC B-4 24V4 2 T1PUS 2 T1PUS
(Reverse type) B-3 GND
5VNPD 1
B-2 C4PWD
C4SPD 2
B-1 VREF
C4SPD D-GND 3
15CZ-6H B04B-PASK-1
03XR-6H-P 1 5VNPD
CZWH-30V-S
2 GND
5VNPD 1
3 T2LUD
D. Cassette, Paper feed, RESI
C3SPD 2 T2 PWB
4 T2PED
C3SPD D-GND 3
PAP-04V-S
03XR-6H-P PCU PWB
BU02P-TR-P-H
1 PTRC1 2 1
PTRC1 2 24V4 1 2 Interface pass unit
PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-PC
BU02P-TR-P-H (Reverse type) 1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
1 C4PUC 2 1 2 T1PPD1 2 2 T1PPD1
C4PUC 2 24V4 1 2 3 GND 3 3 GND
T1PPD1
C3PUC
PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-PC 4 5VNPD 4
(Reverse type) 5 T1PPD2 5
BU02P-TR-P-H
6 GND 6
1 2 1
C3PUC 2 24V4 1 2
1 5VNPD
PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-PC 2 T1PPD2
(Reverse type) 6-292254-3
3 GND T1PPD2
3 GND 1
SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC 2 C4PWD 2
1 VREF 1 1 VREF 3
2 GND 2 179228-3 03XR-6H-P
C4PWD 3 C4PWD 3
5VNPD 1
C4PFD 2
C4PFD GND 3 CN-6
03XR-6H-P B29B-CSRK
CN-5 Reserve_OUT1 29 (NC) 7-292254-3 6-292254-7 B8B-ZR
5VNPD 1 BU11P-TZ-S B22B-CZWHK-B-1 24V4 28 1 24V4 13 1 24V4 7 8 24V4
C4LUD 2 11 5VNPD 1 B-11 5VNPD GND 27 2 GND 12 2 GND 6 7 GND
C4LUD GND 3 10 C4PFD 2 B-10 C4PFD 5VN 26 3 5VN 11 3 5VN 5 6 5VN
03XR-6H-P 9 GND 3 B-9 GND WTM_D 25 4 WTM_D 10 4 WTM_D 4 5 WTM_D
8 5VNPD 4 B-8 5VNPD WTM_CK 24 5 WTM_CK 9 5 WTM_CK 3 4 WTM_CK WTM
5VNPD 1 7 C4LUD 5 B-7 C4LUD GND(WTM_CW) 23 6 GND(WTM_CW) 8 6 GND(WTM_CW) 2 3 GND(WTM_CW)
C4PED 2 6 GND 6 B-6 GND WTM_LD 22 7 WTM_LD 7 7 WTM_LD 1 2 WTM_LD
C4PED GND 3 5 5VNPD 7 B-5 5VNPD 5VN 21 8 5VN 6 (NC) 1 (NC)
03XR-6H-P 4 C4PED 8 B-4 C4PED DSW_CS 20 9 DSW_CS 5
BU02P-TR-P-H 3 GND 9 B-3 GND GND 19 10 GND 4
1 24V4 2 1 2 24V4 10 B-2 24V4 5VN 18 11 5VN 3
C4PUS 2 C4PUS 1 2 1 C4PUS 11 B-1 C4PUS DSW_RL 17 12 DSW_RL 2
PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-PC 11CZ-6Y 11CZ-6H 11CZ-6H GND 16 13 GND 1
(Reverse type) 5VNPD 15
BU11P-TZ-S
LPPD 14
5VNPD 1 11 5VNPD 1 A-11 5VNPD
GND 13
C3PFD 2 10 C3PFD 2 A-10 C3PFD
5VNPD 12
GND 3 9 GND 3 A-9 GND 1 5VN
T2PPD1 11
C3PFD 03XR-6H-P 8 5VNPD 4 A-8 5VNPD
GND 10
2 DSW_CS
7 C3LUD 5 A-7 C3LUD 3 GND DSW_CS
5VN 9
5VNPD 1 6 GND 6 A-6 GND
TNDSET 8
C3LUD 2 5 5VNPD 7 A-5 5VNPD
GND 7

C3LUD GND 3 4 C3PED 8 A-4 C3PED
5VN 6 1 5VN
03XR-6H-P 3 GND 9 A-3 GND
WTFD 5 2 DSW_RL
2 24V4 10 A-2 24V4
GND 4 3 GND DSW-RL
5VNPD 1 1 C3PUS 11 A-1 C3PUS
WTBSET 3
C3PED 2 11CZ-6Y 11CZ-6H 11CZ-6Y GND 2
C3PED GND 3 CZWH-22V-S 6-292254-3
5VN+R 1
03XR-6H-P 02CK-6H-PC 1 5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD
29CSR-8PK
PHNR-02-H BU02P-TR-P-H (Reverse type) 2 LPPD 2 2 LPPD
1 24V4 2 1
3 GND 1 3 GND LPPD
C3PUS 2 C3PUS 1 2
6-292254-2
1 24VM4 1 2 24VM4 1 CN-16
PCSS BU21P-TCS-LE B21B-CSRK 6-292254-3
PCSS 2 2 1 PCSS 2
21 24VM4 1 21 24VM4 1 5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD
SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC 179228-2 02XR-6H-P
20 PCSS 2 20 PCSS 2 T2PPD1 2 2 T2PPD1
5VN 1 19 5VN 3 19 5VN 3 GND 1 3 GND T2PPD1
D-GND 2 18 GND 4 18 GND
REGS_R/ REGS_R_LED# 3 17 REGS_R_LED 5 17 REGS_R_LED
REGS_R 4 16 REGS_R 6 16 REGS_R
PCS_R PCS_R 5 15 PCS_R 7 15 PCS_R
05XR-6H-P 14 5VN 8 14 5VN
13 GND 9 13 GND
12 REGS_C_LED 10 12 REGS_C_LED
11 REGS_C 11 11 REGS_C
5VN 1 10 PCS_C 12 10 PCS_C 1 5VN
D-GND 2 9 5VN 13 9 5VN 2 TNDSET
3 GND
REGS_C/ REGS_C_LED# 3 8 GND 14 8 GND TNDSET
REGS_C 4 7 REGS_F_LED 15 7 REGS_F_LED
PCS_C PCS_C 5 6 REGS_F 16 6 REGS_F
05XR-6H-P 5 PCS_F 17 5 PCS_F
4 PTCCHPD 18 4 PTCCHPD 1 5VN
3 GND 19 3 GND 2 WTFD
2 5VNPD+R 20 2 5VNPD+R 3 GND WTFD
5VNPD 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 21 (NC) (NC) 1 (NC)
D-GND 2 21CSR-8PK 21CSR-8PK 21CSR-8PK
REGS_F/ REGS_F_LED# 3
REGS_F 4 1 3 WTBSET
PCS_F PCS_F 5 2 2 GND
05XR-6H-P 3 1 5VNPD WTBSET
PTCCHPD 1
GND 2
PTCCHPD 5VNPD+R 3
03XR-6H-P
1
1
QR/P4-40*-C(01) BU09P-TZ-S SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC
1 FPRFM2_V 1 1 FPRFM1_V 9 1 FPRFM1_V 1
2 FPRFM2_LD 2 2 FPRFM1_LD 8 2 FPRFM1_LD 2
3 MPGS 3 3 D-GND 7 3 D-GND 3 FPRFM_F
4 24VM4 4
PCU PWB 5 MPFS 5
CN12 (1/2) 6 24VM4 6 SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC
B38B-PUDSS-1 7 +24V 7 4 FPRFM2_V 6 1 FPRFM2_V 1
5VO+R 1 8 +24V 8 5 FPRFM2_LD 5 2 FPRFM2_LD 2
PRTPD 3 9 +24V 9 6 D-GND 4 3 D-GND 3 FPRFM_R
5VLMPD 5 10 +24V 10
5VLM4 7 11 5VLM4 11
GND 9 12 GND 12 7 5V_LED 3 3 5V_LED
: ‘17/Apr.
SIN3 11 13 SIN3 13 8 D-GND 2 2 D-GND

SELIN1 13 14 SELIN1 14 9 APPD2 1 1 APPD2 APPD2
SELIN2 15 15 SELIN2 15 CZHR-09V-S CZHR-09V-S 179228-3
SELIN3 17 16 SELIN3 16
APPD1 19 17 APPD1 17
APPD2 21 18 APPD2 18
MPWD 23 19 POD3 19
FPRFM2_LD 25 20 5VLMPD 20
POD3 27 21 FPRFM1_V 21
MPFD 29 22 MPFD 22
ADUFM1_V 31 23 MPWD 23
ADUFM2_V 33 24 ADUM2_B 24 BU02P-TR-P-H
/ADUFM_F_CNT 35 25 ADUM2_A 25 2 24VM4 1
/ADUFM_R_CNT 37 26 ADUM2_XB 26 1 /ADUGS 2
24VM4 8 27 ADUM2_XA 27 PHNR-02-H PHNR-02-H
ADUGS
24VM4 10 28 ADUM1_B 28
24VM4 12 29 ADUM1_A 29
FPRFM1_V 14 30 ADUM1_XB 30
FPRFM2_V 16 31 ADUM1_XA 31
MPFS 18 32 ADUGS 32 BU08P-TZ-S SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
MPGS 20 33 24VM4 33 1 ADUFM1_V 8 1 ADUFMV 1
ADUGS 22 34 PRTPD 34 2 /ADUFM_F_CNT 7 2 /ADUFM_F_CNT 2
TBFM_V 2 35 5VO+R 35 3 D-GND 6 3 D-GND 3
4 5 4 4
TBFM_LD 4
GND 6
36 /ADUFM_R_CNT 36
37 ADUFM2_V 37
ADFM1_LD ADFM1_LD
ADUFM_F
PTC_ERR 24 38 /ADUFM_F_CNT 38
2TC_ERR 26 39 ADUFM1_V 39 SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
HY_REM_TC2 28 To SRA-21T-4 40 FG 40 5 ADUFM2_V 4 1 ADUFMV 1
/TC2_LD 30 High S P 6 /ADUFM_R_CNT 3 2 /ADUFM_R_CNT 2
E. Right door, Manual paper feed
/TC2_CLK 32 SRA-01T-3.2 7 D-GND 2 3 D-GND 3

voltage
8 1 4 4
/TC2_DATA 34
GND 36 CZHR-08V-S
ADFM2_LD
CZHR-08V-S
ADFM2_LD
ADUFM_R
INT24V2 38
PUDP-38V-S
Manual paper feed tray

1 MPLD1 1 1 MPLD1
2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
3 5V_LED 3 3 5V_LED MPLD1
SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC 4 5VN 4 179228-3
1 TBFM_V 1 5 MPWD 5
2 TBFM_LD 2
6 D-GND 6
3 GND 3
TBFM 3 5VN
CN1 2 MPWD
S16B-PHDSS-B 1 D-GND MPWD
1 5VLM4 PHR-3
2 GND
3 SIN3 CN3
4 SELIN1 S32B-PHDSS-B
5 SELIN2 (NC) 32 (NC)
6 SELIN3 TH_M 31 (NC)
7 APPD1 D-GMD 30
Manual paper feed unit
8 APPD2 HUM_D 29 (NC)
1 MPED
(NC) 9 ADUD3 5VN 28 (NC)
2 D-GND
10 POD3 5V_LED 27 (NC)
3 5V_LED
11
(NC)
(NC) 12
MPFD
FAX_D
D-GND 26
FPRFM1_LD 25 179228-3
MPED
BU12P-TZ-S (NC) 13 MPWD 5V_LED 24 (NC) SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC
12 ADUM1_XA 1 14 1 1
(NC) TH_M D-GND 23 24VM4
11 ADUM1_A 2 15 2 2
(NC) HUM_D ADFM2_LD 22 /MPFS
10 ADUM1_B 3 16
MPFS
5VLMPD D-GND 21 BU10P-TZ-S
9 ADUM1_XB 4 10
PHDR-16VS-2 MPWD 20 (NC) 1 MPED
8 +24V 5 9
5VN 19 2D-GND
To 7 +24V 6 3 5V_LED
5V_LED 18 35V_LED 8
6 ADUM2_XA 7 2 D-GND
DRIVER D-GND 17 4 24VM4 7
5 ADUM2_A 8 1 MPFD
6
PWB 4 ADUM2_B 9
MPLD1 16
5V_LED 15 (NC)
5
6
/MPFS
5V_LED 5
179228-3
MPFD
3 ADUM2_XB 10 4
D-GND 14 7D-GND
2 +24V 11 3
ADFM1_LD 13 8 MPFD SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC
1 +24V 12 2 2 2
5V_LED 12 9/MPGS /MPGS
12CZ-6H CZHR-12V-S D-GND 11 10 24VM4 1 1 24VM4 1
MPFD 10 (NC) CZHR-10V-S CZHR-10V-S
MPGS

5V_LED 9
D-GND 8
MPED 7
5V_LED 6
D-GND 5
APPD2 4
5V_LED 3 (NC) 3 5VO+R 1 3 5VO+R
D-GND 2 (NC) 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
B6B-PH-K-S FAX_D 1 (NC) 1 PRTPD 3 1 PRTPD
ADUM2_/A 1
INT24VI 2
PHDR-32VS-1 CZHR-03V-S BU03P-TZ-S 03CZ-6H 03XR-6H-P
PRTPD
ADUM2_/B 3
ADUM2_A 4
ADUM2 INT24VI
ADUM2_B
5
6
PHR-6
R-DOOR I/F BU03P-TZ-S

3 5V_LED 1 3 5V_LED
B6B-PH-K-S
1 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
ADUM1_/A
2 1 APPD1 3 1 APPD1
INT24VI PWB APPD1
ADUM1_/B 3 CZHR-03V-S 03XR-6H-P
03CZ-6H
ADUM1_A 4
5
ADUM1 INT24VI
ADUM1_B 6
3 5V_LED
2 D-GND
PHR-6 1 DSW_ADU DSW_ADU
CN2 179228-3
S16B-PHDSS-B
(NC) 16 (NC)
5V_LED 15 (NC)
D-GND 14
APPD3 13 (NC)
5V_LED 12
D-GND 11
APPD1 10
5V_LED 9
3 5V_LED
D-GND 8 0;75(OPTION) 2 D-GND
DSW_ADU 7 BU06P-TZ-S 1 POD3
5V_LED 6 6 5V_LED 1
D-GND 5 5 D-GND 2
03XR-6H-P
POD3
POD3 4 4 POD3 3
5V_LED 3 3 5V_LED 4 3 5V_LED
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3 TFD3
PHDR-16VS-2 CZHR-06V-S 06CZ-6H 03XR-6H-P
1
1
SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N

PCU PWB 1 MPUC 1 1 MPUC 1
2 24V4 2 2 24V4 2 MPUC
3 LCCC 3
4 24V4 4 SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-N
1 LCCC 1
2 24V4 2 LCCC
CN10 3 GND
: ‘17/Apr.
B40B-PUDSS-1 2 POD2
MPUC 1 1 5VNPD POD2
24V4 3 SMP-18V-NC SMR-18V-N 2-179228-3
GND 5 1 GND 1
POD2 7 2 POD2 2 3 GND
5VNPD 9 3 5VNPD 3 2 TFD2
GND 11 4 GND 4 1 5VNPD TFD2
TFD2 13 5 TFD2 5
179228-3
5VNPD 15 6 5VNPD 6 SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
POFM_V 17 7 POFM_V 7 1 POFM_V 1
POFM_F_CNT 19 8 POFM_F_CNT 8 2 POFM_F_CNT 2
GND 21 9 GND 9 3 GND 3
4
POFM_F_LD 23
POFM_V 25
10 POFM_F_LD 10
11 POFM_V 11
POFM_F_LD 4
POFM_F
POFM_R_CNT 27 12 PFM_R_CNT 12 SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
GND 29 13 GND 13 1 POFM_V 1
POFM_R_LD 31 14 POFM_R_LD 14 2 PFM_R_CNT 2
POFM_EX_V 33 15 (NC) 15 3 GND 3
16 16 4
POFM_EX_CNT 35 (NC) POFM_R_LD 4
POFM_R
F. Delivery, Transport, PS
GND 37 17 (NC) 17
POFM_EX_LD 39 18 (NC) 18
SMP-06V-NC SMR-06V-N B6B-PH-K-S

1 POM_B 1 1 POM_B
To 2 +24V 2 2 +24V
DRIVER 3 POM_A 3 3 POM_A
4 POM_XB 4 4 POM_XB POM
PWB 5 +24V 5 5 +24V
6 POM_XA 6 6 POM_XA
PHR-6
SMP-04V-NC CN28
PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-S
1 24V3 1 SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
1 24V3
2 LED1 2 1 POFM_EX_V 1
2 24V3
3 LED2 3 2 POFM_EX_CNT 2
MX-SL10 N 3 24V3
4 LED3 4 3 3
4 LED1 GND POFM_EX
5 LED2 4 POFM_EX_LD 4
6 LED3
LCCC 2
24V4 4
GND 6 3 GND
HLPCD 8 2 HLPCD
CN13 5VNPD 10 1 5VNPD HLPCD
GND 12 179228-3
BU03P-TZ-S B24B-CZWHK-B-1
DSW_FU 14
5VNPD+R 3 1 5VNPD+R 3 A-1 5VNPD+R
5VNPD+R 16 1 DSW_FU
GND 2 2 GND 2 A-2 GND
1TUD_K FUFM_V 18 2 D-GND
1TUD_K 1 3 1TUD_K 1 A-3 1TUD_K
GND 20 3 5VNPD+R DSW_FU
03XR-6H-P 03CZ-6Y 03CZ-6H
FUFM_CNT 22 179228-3
FUFM_LD 24 SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
FUM_GAIN 26 1 FUFM_V 1
BU09P-TZ-S
FUM_LD 28 2 FUFM_CNT 2
(NC) 1 GND 9 (NC) (NC) A-4 GND
FUM_CK 30 3 GND 3
(NC) 2 PTD 8 (NC) (NC) A-5 PTD
32 4 FUFM_LD 4
(NC) 3 5VNPD 7 (NC) (NC) A-6 5VNPD
FUM_D
5VN 34
FUFM
4 GND 6 A-7 GND
GND 36
5 PPD2 5 A-8 PPD2
P-GND 38
GND 3 6 5VNPD 4 A-9 5VNPD
INT24V2L 40
PPD2 2 7 GND 3 A-10 GND PUDP-40V-S
PPD2 5VNPD 1 8 PPD1 2 A-11 PPD1
03XR-6H-P 9 5VNPD 1 A-12 5VNPD
09CZ-6H 09CZ-6H 12CZ-6Y
B7B-PASK-1
GND 3
(NC) 7 FUM_CW/CCW
PPD1 2
6 FUM_GAIN
PPD1 5VNPD+R 1
5 FUM_LD
03XR-6H-P
4 FUM_CK
3 FUM_D
2 5VN
1 D-GND
B07B-PASK-1 FUM
PAP-07V-S
24V 1 B-1 24V4
P-GND 2 B-2 P-GND
B2B-VH
BRAKE 3 (NC) B-3 BTM_CK
2 P-GND
BTM_CK 4 B-4 BTM_D
1 INT24V2L
BTM BTM_D 5 B-5 CW/CCW VHR-2N
CW/CCW 6 B-6 BTM_LD
BTM_LD 7 B-7 24V4
PAP-07V-S B-8 1TURC
B-9 24V4

B-10 1TURRC
B-11 PTCCM_A
B-12 PTCCM_B
CZHR-12V-S
CN15(1/2)
SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC SMR-06V-N SMP-06V-NC
B26B-PUDSS-1 BU02P-TR-P-H
1 24V4 1 1 24V4 1
T1PUC 1 1 T1PUC 2
1TURC 2 1TURC 2 2 1TURC 2
24V4 3 2 24V4 1 T1PUC
3 24V4 3
T2PUC 5 PHNR-02-H PHNR-02-H
4 1TURRC 4
SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC 24V4 7
5 PTCCM_A 5 BU02P-TR-P-H
1 24V4 1 TTRC 9
6 PTCCM_B 6 1 T2PUC 2
1TURRC 2 1TURRC 2 24V4 11
2 24V4 1 T2PUC
PTRC2 13 PHNR-02-H PHNR-02-H
24V4 15
24V4 17 BU02P-TR-P-H
CN1
T2PUS 19 1 TTRC 2
S3B-PH-K-S
GND 21 2 24V4 1 TTRC
PTCCM_A 3 PHNR-02-H PHNR-02-H
T2LUM 23
PACCM_B 1
Reserve_OUT2
(NC) 25
PTCCM PHR-3 BU02P-TR-P-H
PNDP-26V-S 1 PTRC2 2
2 24V4 1 PTRC2
PHNR-02-H PHNR-02-H
CN15(2/2)
292132-7 B26B-PUDSS-1
1 24V4 1
2 T2PUS 2 T2PUS
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
(NC) 3 6 GND
CPFM_CK 4 8 5VN
CPFM CPFM_D 5 10 CPFM_D 1 GND
CPFM_CW/CCW 6 12 CPFM_CK 2 T2LUM T2LUM
CPFM_LD 7 14 CPFM_LD PHR-2
179228-7 16 CPFM_GAIN
18 CPFM_CW/CCW
20 VFM_R_V
22 VFM_R_CNT
24 GND
SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC 26 VFM_R_LD
1 VFM_R_V 1 1 VFM_R_V 1 PNDP-26V-S
2 VFM_R_CNT 2 2 VFM_R_CNT 2
3 GND 3 3 GND 3
4 VFM_R_LD 4
VFM_R 4 VFM_R_LD 4
1
1
CN1
B18B-CZHK-1
DRIVER PWB TNM_C_/B 1 18
BU18P-TZ-S
TNM_C_/B 1 6 1
B6B-PH-K-S
TNM_C_/B
PCU PWB TNM_C_/A 2 17 TNM_C_/A 2 5 2 TNM_C_/A
+24V 3 16 +24V 3 4 3 +24V
CN8 CN10
+24V 4 15 +24V 4 3 4 +24V
502790-6491 502790-6491 TNM_C
TNM_C_B 5 14 TNM_C_B 5 2 5 TNM_C_B
: ‘17/Apr.
GND 1 64 GND
TNM_C_A 6 13 TNM_C_A 6 1 6 TNM_C_A
TNM_M_/B 7 12 TNM_M_/B 7 06CK-6H-PC
WEBM2_A 34 TNM_K_B 3 62 TNM_K_B 31 WEBM2_A (Reverse type)
TNM_M_/A 8 11 TNM_M_/A 8
+24V 9 10 +24V 9
G. Driver PWB

+24V 10 9 +24V 10
TNM_M_B 11 8 TNM_M_B 11 B6B-PH-K-S
TNM_M_A 12 7 TNM_M_A 12 6 1 TNM_M_/B
TNM_Y_/B 13 6 TNM_Y_/B 13 5 2 TNM_M_/A
TNM_Y_/A 14 5 TNM_Y_/A 14 4 3 +24V
+24V 15 4 +24V 15 3 4 +24V
POM_A 42 TNM_M_B 11 54 TNM_M_B 23 POM_A TNM_M
+24V 16 3 +24V 16 2 5 TNM_M_B
TNM_Y_B 17 2 TNM_Y_B 17 1 6 TNM_M_A
TNM_Y_A 18 1 TNM_Y_A 18 06CK-6H-PC
18CZ-6H 18CZ-6H 18CZ-6H (Reverse type)
B6B-PH-K-S
6 1 TNM_Y_/B
5 2 TNM_Y_/A
4 3 +24V
3 4 +24V
ADUM2_B 53 TNHM_Y_EN 22 43 TNHM_Y_EN 12 ADUM2_B TNM_Y
2 5 TNM_Y_B
1 6 TNM_Y_A
06CK-6H-PC
ADUM2_CNT 56 TNHM_K_EN 25 40 TNHM_K_EN 9 ADUM2_CNT (Reverse type)
PFM_EN 58 FUMCM_B 27 38 FUMCM_B 7 PFM_EN CN2
PFM_CNT 59 FUMCM_XA 28 37 FUMCM_XA 6 PFM_CNT B12B-CZHK-1 BU12P-TZ-S B6B-PH-K-S
TNHM_K_/B 1 12 TNHM_K_/B 1 6 1 TNHM_K_/B
TNHM_K_/A 2 11 TNHM_K_/A 2 5 2 TNHM_K_/A
+24V 3 10 +24V 3 4 3 +24V
+24V 4 9 +24V 4 3 4 +24V
LCCM_CNT 64 1 LCCM_CNT TNHM_K
TNHM_K_B 5 8 TNHM_K_B 5 2 5 TNHM_K_B
TNHM_K_A 6 7 TNHM_K_A 6 1 6 TNHM_K_A
TNM_K_/B 7 6 TNM_K_/B 7 06CK-6H-PC
TNM_K_/A 8 5 TNM_K_/A 8 (Reverse type)
+24V 9 4 +24V 9
+24V 10 3 +24V 10
TNM_K_B 11 2 TNM_K_B 11 B6B-PH-K-S
TNM_K_A 12 1 TNM_K_A 12 6 1 TNM_K_/B
12CZ-6H 12CZ-6H 12CZ-6H 5 2 TNM_K_/A
4 3 +24V
3 4 +24V TNM_K
2 5 TNM_K_B
1 6 TNM_K_A
06CK-6H-PC
CN5 ( )
B6B-PASK-1 CN3
1 POM_XA B18B-CZHK-1 BU19P-TZ-S B6B-PH-K-S
SMR-06V-N SMP-06V-NC 2 POM_A
TNHM_Y_/B 1 19 TNHM_Y_/B 1 6 1 TNHM_Y_/B
1 POM_B 1 3 POM_B
TNHM_Y_/A 2 18 TNHM_Y_/A 2 5 2 TNHM_Y_/A
2 +24V 2 4 POM_XB
+24V 3 17 +24V 3 4 3 +24V
3 POM_A 3 5 +24V
+24V 4 16 +24V 4 3 4 +24V
To Delivery, Transport 4 POM_XB 4 6 +24V TNHM_Y
TNHM_Y_B 5 15 TNHM_Y_B 5 2 5 TNHM_Y_B
5 +24V 5 PAP-06V-S
TNHM_Y_A 6 14 TNHM_Y_A 6 1 6 TNHM_Y_A
6 POM_XA 6
TNHM_M_/B 7 13 TNHM_M_/B 7 06CK-6H-PC
TNHM_M_/A 8 12 TNHM_M_/A 8 (Reverse type)
+24V 9 11 +24V 9
+24V 10 10 +24V 10
TNHM_M_B 11 9 TNHM_M_B 11 B6B-PH-K-S
TNHM_M_A 12 8 TNHM_M_A 12 6 1 TNHM_M_/B
TNHM_C_/B 13 7 TNHM_C_/B 13 5 2 TNHM_M_/A
CN6 TNHM_C_/A 14 6 TNHM_C_/A 14 4 3 +24V
B12B-CZHK-1 +24V 15 5 +24V 15 3 4 +24V
BU12P-TZ-S TNHM_M
+24V 16 4 +24V 16 2 5 TNHM_M_B
1 ADUM1_XA 12 1 ADUM1_XA
TNHM_C_B 17 3 TNHM_C_B 17 1 6 TNHM_M_A
2 ADUM1_A 11 2 ADUM1_A
TNHM_C_A 18 2 TNHM_C_A 18 06CK-6H-PC
3 ADUM1_B 10 3 ADUM1_B (Reverse type)
18CZ-6H (NC) 1 (NC) 19 (NC)
4 ADUM1_XB 9 4 ADUM1_XB
5 +24V 8 5 +24V 19CZ-6H 19CZ-6H
6 +24V 7 6 +24V
B6B-PH-K-S
7 ADUM2_XA 6 7 ADUM2_XA
To Right door 6 1 TNHM_C_/B
8 ADUM2_A 5 8 ADUM2_A
5 2 TNHM_C_/A
9 ADUM2_B 4 9 ADUM2_B
4 3 +24V
10 ADUM2_XB 3 10 ADUM2_XB
3 4 +24V
11 +24V 2 11 +24V TNHM_C
2 5 TNHM_C_B
12 +24V 1 12 +24V

CN4 1 6 TNHM_C_A
CZHR-12V-S 12CZ-6H 12CZ-6H
B16B-PASK-1 06CK-6H-PC
FBMCM_A 1 (NC) (Reverse type)
FBMCM_XA 2 (NC)
B6B-PH-K-S CN7 FBMCM_B 3 (NC)
PFM_/A 1 BU12P-TZ-S B12B-CZHK-1 FBMCM_XB 4 (NC)
+24V 2 1 PFM_B 12 1 PFM_B +24V 5 (NC)
PFM_/B 3 2 PFM_/B 11 2 PFM_/B +24V 6 (NC) SMR-08V-N SMP-08V-NC
PFM PFM_A 4 3 PFM_/A 10 3 PFM_/A PRM_A 7 1 PRM_A 1
+24V 5 4 PFM_A 9 4 PFM_A PRM_XA 8 2 PRM_XA 2
PFM_B 6 5 +24V 8 5 +24V PRM_B 9 3 PRM_B 3
PHR-6 6 +24V 7 6 +24V PRM_XB 10 4 PRM_XB 4
7 RRM_B 6 7 RRM_B +24V 11 5 +24V 5
8 RRM_/B 5 8 RRM_/B +24V 12 6 +24V 6 B6B-PH-K-S
9 RRM_/A 4 9 RRM_/A WEBM2_A 13 7 WEBM2_A 7 1 PRM_/B
10 RRM_A 3 10 RRM_A WEBM2_B 14 8 WEBM2_B 8 2 PRM_/A
11 +24V 2 11 +24V WEBM1_A 15 (NC) 3 +24V
12 +24V 1 12 +24V WEBM1_B 16 (NC) 4 +24V PRM
CZHR-12V-S 12CZ-6H 12CZ-6H PAP-16V-S 5 PRM_B
6 PRM_A
PHR-6
S06B-XASK-1
RRM_A 1
+24V 2
To Fusing unit
RRM_/A 3
RRM RRM_B 4
+24V 5
RRM_/B 6
XAP-6
CN8
B6B-PASK-1
1 LCCM_/B
2 LCCM_B
B6B-XH-A 3 LCCM_A
LCCM_A 1 4 LCCM_/A
+24V 2 5 +24V
LCCM_/A 3 6 +24V
LCCM LCCM_B 4 PAP-06V-S
+24V 5
LCCM_/B 6
XHP-6
1
1
RFCP-09SO-RJ-M 09SOR-RFC-MGD(LF)(SN) B7B-PASK-1
DV unit (BLACK) RFCYP-09-Z-S 09CSR-8PK(N) 1 24V3
(NC) 9 /DVCRU_K 9 (NC) 6-292254-7 2 P-GND
8 DVTYPSEL_K 8 1 DVTYPSEL_K 7 (NC) 3 (NC)
7 GND 7 2 GND 6 CN19 4 DM_M_CK
6 DVTYP_K 6 3 DVTYP_K 5 B23B-CSRK 7-292254-1 5 DM_M_D
TSG_K# 1 5 TSG_K# 5 4 TSG_K# 4 24V3 1 11 24V3 1 6 CW/CCW
DM_M
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 5 5VN 3 P-GND 2 10 P-GND 2 7 DM_M_LD
CN17
TCS_K 3 3 TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 2 DM_M_CK 3 9 DM_M_CK 3 PAP-07V-S
B29B-CSRK
4 2 2 1
TCS_K GND
51021-0400
GND
(NC) 1 24V3(DVCRU_V) 1 (NC) 07XR-6H-P
7 GND
07XR-6H-P
(NC) 1 (NC)
DM_M_D 4
CW/CCW 5
8 DM_M_D 4
7 CW/CCW 5
2 DVTYPSEL_K
DM_M_LD 6 6 DM_M_LD 6 BU02P-TR-P-H
3 GND
: ‘17/Apr.
DVC_M 7 5 DVC_M 7 2 DVC_M 1

4 DVTYP_K DVC_M
24V3 8 4 24V3 8 1 24V3 2
5 TSG_K#
DHPD_M 9 3 DHPD_M 9 PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-P
DV unit (CYAN) RFCP-09SO-RJ-M 09SOR-RFC-MGD(LF)(SN) 6 5VN
GND 10 2 GND 10
RFCYP-09-Z-S 09CSR-8PK(N) 7 TCS_K
(NC) 9 /DVCRU_C 9 (NC) 6-292254-7 8 GND 1 DHPD_M
11XR-6H-P 1-179228-1
8 DVTYPSEL_C 8 1 DVTYPSEL_C 7 9 DVTYPSEL_C 2 D-GND
7 GND 7 2 GND 6 10 GND 3 5VNPD+R
DHPD_M
6 DVTYP_C 6 3 DVTYP_C 5 11 DVTYP_C 179228-3
TSG_C# 1 5 TSG_C# 5 4 TSG_C# 4 12 TSG_C#
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 5 5VN 3 13 5VN
H. Process, DL, DV
TCS_C 3 3 TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 2 14 TCS_C

7-292254-1 B7B-PASK-1
TCS_C 51021-0400 (NC) 1 24V3(DVCRU_V) 1 (NC) 07XR-6H-P 07XR-6H-P
24V3 12 11 24V3 1 1 24V3
P-GND 13 10 P-GND 2 2 P-GND
DM_C_CK 14 9 DM_C_CK 3 (NC) 3 (NC)
DM_C_D 15 8 DM_C_D 4 4 DM_C_CK
CW/CCW 16 7 CW/CCW 5 5 DM_C_D DM_C
RFCP-09SO-RJ-M 09SOR-RFC-MGD(LF)(SN) DM_C_LD 17 6 DM_C_LD 6 6 CW/CCW
RFCYP-09-Z-S 09CSR-8PK(N)
DV unit (MAGENTA) DVC_C 18 5 DVC_C 7 7 DM_C_LD
(NC) 9 /DVCRU_M 9 (NC) 6-292254-7 24V3 19 4 24V3 8 PAP-07V-S
8 DVTYPSEL_M 8 1 DVTYPSEL_M 7 16 DVTYPSEL_M
DHPD_C 20 3 DHPD_C 9
GND 21 2 GND 10 BU02P-TR-P-H
6 DVTYP_M 6 3 DVTYP_M 5 18 DVTYP_M
5VNPD+R 22 1 5VNPD+R 11 2 DVC_C 1
TSG_M# 1 5 TSG_M# 5 4 TSG_M# 4 19 TSG_M#
(NC) 23 (NC) 11XR-6H-P 1-179228-1 1 24V3 2 DVC_C
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 5 5VN 3 20 5VN
PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-P
TCS_M 3 3 TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 2 21 TCS_M 23CSR-8PK
GND 4 2 GND 2 GND 1 22 GND
TCS_M 51021-0400 (NC) 1 24V3(DVCRU_V) 1 (NC) 07XR-6H-P
7
07XR-6H-P 23 DVTYPSEL_Y
1 DHPD_C
2 D-GND
24 GND DHPD_C
3 5VNPD+R
25 DVTYP_Y
179228-3
26 TSG_Y#
27 5VN
RFCP-09SO-RJ-M 09SOR-RFC-MGD(LF)(SN)
28 TCS_Y
DV unit (YELLOW) RFCYP-09-Z-S 09CSR-8PK(N)
29 GND
(NC) 9 /DVCRU_Y 9 (NC) 6-292254-7 B7B-PASK-1
8 DVTYPSEL_Y 8 1 DVTYPSEL_Y 7 29CSR-8PK 1 24V3
7 GND 7 2 GND 6 2 P-GND
6 DVTYP_Y 6 3 DVTYP_Y 5 (NC) 3 (NC)
TSG_Y# 1 5 TSG_Y# 5 4 TSG_Y# 4 4 DM_Y_CK
5VN
TCS_Y
2
3
4
3
5VN
TCS_Y
4
3
5
6
5VN
TCS_Y
3
2
CN20
B31B-CSRK 7-292254-1
5
6
DM_Y_D
CW/CCW
DM_Y
TCS_Y GND 4
51021-0400 (NC)
2 GND 2
1 24V3(DVCRU_V) 1 (NC) 07XR-6H-P
7 GND 1
07XR-6H-P
24V3 1
P-GND 2
11
10
24V3
P-GND
1
2
PAP-07V-S
7 DM_Y_LD
DM_Y_CK 3 9 DM_Y_CK 3
DM_Y_D 4 8 DM_Y_D 4 BU02P-TR-P-H
CW/CCW 5 7 CW/CCW 5 1 DVC_Y 2
B7B-PASK-1 24V3 DVC_Y
DM_Y_LD 6 6 DM_Y_LD 6 2 1
24V3 1
DVC_Y 7 5 DVC_Y 7 PHNR-02-H 02CK-6H-P
P-GND 2
24V3 8 4 24V3 8
(NC) 3 (NC)
DHPD_Y 9 3 DHPD_Y 9 1 DHPD_Y
DM_K_CK 4
DM_K GND 10 2 GND 10 2 D-GND
DM_K_D 5 CN18 DHPD_Y
5VNPD+R 11 1 5VNPD+R 11 3 5VNPD+R
CW/CCW 6 7-292254-1 B31B-CSRK
11XR-6H-P 1-179228-1 179228-3
DM_K_LD 7 1 24V3 11 1 24V3
P-GND 10 P-GND 7-292254-0
PAP-07V-S 2 2
CCMD_Y 12 10 CCMD_Y 1 1 CCMD_Y
3 DM_K_CK 9 3 DM_K_CK
GND 13 9 GND 2 2 D-GND
BU02P-TR-P-H 4 DM_K_D 8 4 DM_K_D CCMD_Y
1 DVC_K 2 5 CW/CCW 7 5 CW/CCW
CCM_Y_A 15 7 CCM_Y_A 4 179228-3
DVC_K 2 24V3 1 6 DM_K_LD 6 6 DM_K_LD
CCM_Y_B 16 6 CCM_Y_B 5
02CK-6H-P PHNR-02-H 7 DVC_K 5 7 DVC_K
GND 17 5 GND 6 CN-1
8 24V3 4 8 24V3
DL_Y 18 4 DL_Y 7 S3B-PH-K-S
DHPD_K 1 9 DHPD_K 3 9 DHPD_K
DL2_Y 19 3 DL2_Y 8 1 CCM_Y_A+
DHPD_K CCHPD_Y 20 2 CCHPD_Y 9 3 CCM_Y_B-
179228-3 1-179228-1 11XR-6H-P
5VNPD+R 21 1 5VNPD+R 10 PHR-3
CCM_Y
10XR-6H-P 1-179228-0
7-292254-0
CCMD_K 1 1 CCMD_K 10 12 CCMD_K
CCMD_K 5VNPD+R 3 3 5VNPD+R 8 14 5VNPD+R
179228-3 4 CCM_K_A 7 15 CCM_K_A Process unit (YELLOW)
5 CCM_K_B 6 16 CCM_K_B QR/P8-8*-C
CN-1 6 GND 5 17 GND (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC) 3 GND
S3B-PH-K-S 7 DL_K 4 18 DL_K 7 GND 7 2 GND
CCM_K_A+ 1 8 DL2_K 3 19 DL2_K 6 DL_Y 6 1 DL_Y
DL_Y
CCM_K CCM_K_B- 3 9 CCHPD_K 2 20 CCHPD_K 5 DL2_Y 5 PHR-3
PHR-3 10 5VNPD+R 1 21 5VNPD+R 4 CCHPD_Y 4
1-179228-0 10XR-6H-P 3 5VNPD+R 3
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 3 GND
Process unit (BLACK) (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 2 GND
QR/P8-8*-C S P 1 DL2_Y
DL2_Y

GND 3 (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC)
PHR-3
GND 2 7 GND 7
DL_K DL_K 1 6 DL_K 6
PHR-3 5DL2_K 5
1 GND
4
CCHPD_K 4
7-292254-0 2 CCHPD_Y
3
5VNPD+R 3 CCHPD_Y
CCMD_M 22 10 CCMD_M 1 3 5VNPD+R
GND 3 (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) PHR-3
GND 23 9 GND 2
GND 2 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 7-292254-0
DL2_K 5VNPD+R 24 8 5VNPD+R 3
DL2_K 1 P S 1 CCMD_C 10 22 CCMD_C
CCM_M_A 25 7 CCM_M_A 4
PHR-3 2 GND 9 23 GND
CCM_M_B 26 6 CCM_M_B 5
3 5VNPD+R 8 24 5VNPD+R
GND 27 5 GND 6
4 CCM_C_A 7 25 CCM_C_A
DL_M 28 4 DL_M 7
GND 1 5 CCM_C_B 6 26 CCM_C_B
DL2_M 29 3 DL2_M 8
CCHPD_K 2 6 GND 5 27 GND
CCHPD_K CCHP_M 30 2 CCHP_M 9
5VNPD+R 3 7 DL_C 4 28 DL_C
PHR-3 8 DL2_C 3 29 DL2_C
31CSR-8PK 10XR-6H-P 1-179228-0 1 CCMD_M
9 CCHPD_C 2 30 CCHPD_C
2 D-GND
10 5VNPD+R 1 31 5VNPD+R CCMD_M
3 5VNPD+R
CCMD_C 1 1-179228-0 10XR-6H-P 31CSR-8PK
D-GND 2 179228-3
CCMD_C 5VNPD+R 3
CN-1
179228-3
S3B-PH-K-S
1 CCM_M_A+
CN-1
3 CCM_M_B- CCM_M
S3B-PH-K-S
CCM_C_A+ 1 PHR-3
CCM_C CCM_C_B- 3
PHR-3
QR/P8-8*-C
Process unit (MAGENTA)
(NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC) 3 GND
Process unit (CYAN) 7 GND 7 2 GND
QR/P8-8*-C
6 DL_M 6 1 DL_M DL_M
GND 3 (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC)
5 DL2_M 5 PHR-3
GND 2 7 GND 7
4 CCHPD_M 4
DL_C DL_C 1 6 DL_C 6
3 5VNPD+R 3 3 GND
PHR-3 5 DL2_C 5
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 2 GND
4 CCHPD_C 4 PCU PWB (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 DL2_M DL2_M
GND 3 3 5VNPD+R 3
GND 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) S P PHR-3
DL2_C DL2_C 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC)
1 GND
PHR-3 P S
2 CCHPD_M
3 5VNPD+R CCHPD_M
GND 1
CCHPD_C 2 PHR-3
CCHPD_C 5VNPD+R 3
PHR-3
1
1
SRA-21T-3
PINK
BS-K 1 DV-K
VHR-3N
SRA-21T-3 1TC PWB SRA-21T-3
PINK PINK
MC-K MC-K CN1 1TC-K 1TC-K
: ‘17/Apr.
PS-250 B08B-PASK-1 PS-250

SRA-21T-3
1 INT24V2
WHITE SRA-21T-3
GB-K 1 GB-K 2 GND
PINK
VHR-2N MC PWB 3 /TC1_DATA 1TC-C 1TC-C
4 /TC1_CLK PS-250
PCU PWB 5 /TC1_LD
SRA-21T-3
SRA-21T-3 6 HV_REM_MC
PINK WHITE
7 1TC S-ERR 1TC-M 1TC-M
BS-C 1 DV-C CN23(1/3) CN23(2/3) 8 1TC O-ERR PS-250
VHR-3N CN1 B40B-PUDSS-1 B40B-PUDSS-1 PAP-08V-S
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
PINK B10B-PASK-1 1 INT24V2 INT24V2 2
WHITE
MC-C MC-C INT24V2 1 3 GND GND 4 1TC-Y 1TC-Y
PS-250 GND 2 5 24VM4 /TC1_DATA 6 PS-250
SRA-21T-3 /MC_DATA 3 7 /MC_DATA /TC1_CLK 8
WHITE /MC_CLK 4 9 /MC_CLK /TC1_LD 10 SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
GB-C 1 GB-C
I. High voltage, CRUM
VHR-2N /MC_LD 5 11 /MC_LD HV_REM_MC 12 1 OZFM1_V 1

/MC_LD2 6 13 /MC_LD2 1TC S-ERR 14 2 OZFM_CNT 2
HV_REM_MC 7 15 HV_REM_MC 1TC O-ERR 16 3 GND 3 OZFM 1
MC BK ERR 8 17 MC BK ERR OZFM1_V 18 4 OZFM1_LD 4
SRA-21T-3 MC CL ERR 9 19 MC CL ERR OZFM_CNT 20
PINK 24VM4 10 21 GND GND 22
BS-M 1 DV-M PAP-10V-S 23 1TUD_CL OZFM1 LD 24 SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
VHR-3N
25 5VLMPD+R OZFM2_V 26 1 OZFM2_V 1
SRA-21T-3 27 /HL_PR OZFM_CNT 28 2 OZFM_CNT 2
MC-M PINK MC-M To 29 HL_UM GND 30 3 GND 3 OZFM 2
PS-250 31 HL_US OZFM2_LD 32 4 OZFM2_LD 4
SRA-21T-3 Fusing 33 HL_LM VFM_BA_V 34
WHITE 35 HL_UW VFM_BA_CNT 36 SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
GB-M 1 GB-M 37 GND GND 38 1 VFM_BA_V 1
VHR-2N unit 39 INT24V2L VFM_BA_LD 40 2 VFM_BA_CNT 2
PUDP-40V-S 3 GND 3
PUDP-40V-S VFM_BA
4 VFM_BA_LD 4
SRA-21T-3
PINK
BS-Y 1 DV-Y
VHR-3N
SRA-21T-3
PINK
MC-Y MC-Y
PS-250
SRA-21T-3
WHITE
GB-Y 1 GB-Y
VHR-2N
SRA-21T-4 2TC PWB
F.G SRA-21T-3
WHITE
2TC 2TC
PS-250
SRA-21T-3
BU03P-TZ-S PINK
2DR 2DR
5VLMPD+R 3 1 5VLMPD+R 3 PS-250
GND 2 2 GND 2 (2/2)CN12 CN1
1TUD_CL 1TUD_CL 1 3 1TUD_CL 1 B38B-PUDSS-1 B08B-PASK-1
03CZ-6Y CZHR-03V-S INT24V2 38 1 INT24V2
03XR-6H-P
GND 36 2 GND
/TC2_DATA 34 3 /TC2_DATA
/TC2_CLK 32 4 /TC2_CLK SRA-21T-3
/TC2_LD 30 5 /TC2_LD PINK
CN21 PTC PTC
HV_REM_TC2 28 6 HV_REM_TC2
B29B-CSRK PS-250
2TC_ERR 26 7 2TC_ERR
SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC 7-292254-5 (NC) 1 (NC) PTC_ERR 24 8 PTC_ERR SRA-21T-3
CRM_K_DT 1 1 CRM_K_DT 1 1 CRM_K_DT 15 2 CRM_K_DT B2P-VH
PUDP-38V-S PAP-08V-S WHITE
CRM_K_CK/ CRM_K_CK 2 2 CRM_K_CK 2 2 CRM_K_CK 14 3 CRM_K_CK CASE 1 CASE
5VCRUM 3 3 5VCRUM 3 3 5VCRUM 13 4 5VCRUM VHR-2N
CRM_K_DT GND 4 4 GND 4 4 GND 12 5 GND
TSHR-04V-K 5 CRM_C_DT 11 6 CRM_C_DT
6 CRM_C_CK 10 7 CRM_C_CK
7 5VCRUM 9 8 5VCRUM
CRM_C_DT 1 1 CRM_C_DT 1
8 GND 8 9 GND
CRM_C_CK/ CRM_C_CK 2 2 CRM_C_CK 2
9 GND 7 10 GND
3 3 5VCRUM 3
CRM_C_DT 5VCRUM 10 5VCRUM 6 11 5VCRUM
GND 4 4 GND 4
11 CRM_M_CK 5 12 CRM_M_CK
TSHR-04V-K
12 CRM_M_DT 4 13 CRM_M_DT
SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC 13 GND 3 14 GND
GND 4 4 GND 4 14 5VCRUM 2 15 5VCRUM
CRM_M_CK/ 5VCRUM 3 3 5VCRUM 3 15 CRM_Y_CK 1 16 CRM_Y_CK
2 2 CRM_M_CK 2 1-179228-5 15XR-6H-P SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
CRM_M_DTCRM_M_CK CN35 1 POFM2_F_V 1

CRM_M_DT 1 1 CRM_M_DT 1
TSHR-04V-K B12B-PUDSS-1 2 POFM2_F_CNT 2
POFM2_F_V 1 3 GND 3
SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC POFM2_R_V 2 4 POFM2_F_LD 4
POFM2_F
GND 4 4 GND 4 /POFM2_F_CNT 3
CRM_Y_CK/ 5VCRUM 3 3 5VCRUM 3 GND 4
2 2 CRM_Y_CK 2 GND 5
CRM_Y_DT CRM_Y_CK
CRM_Y_DT 1 1 CRM_Y_DT 1 GND 6
TSHR-04V-K POFM2_F_LD 7 292254-3
POFM2_R_LD 8 1 GND 3
POFM2_EX_V 9 2 POFM2_R_LD 2
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N GND 10 3 POFM2_R_V 1
POFM2_R
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1 /POFM2_EX_CNT 11 179228-3 179228-3
TFSD_K 2 2 TFSD_K 2 7-292254-3 POFM2_EX_LD 12
TFSD_K GND 3 3 GND 3 1 CRM_Y_DT 13 17 CRM_Y_DT
DF3-3S-2C 2 5VNPD 12 18 5VNPD PUDP-12V-S
3 TFSD_K 11 19 TFSD_K SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N 4 GND 10 20 GND 1 POFM2_EX_V 1
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1 5 5VNPD 9 21 5VNPD 2 POFM2_EX_CNT 2
TFSD_C 2 2 TFSD_C 2 6 TFSD_C 8 22 TFSD_C 3 GND 3
TFSD_C GND 3 3 GND 3 7 GND 7 23 GND 4 POFM2_EX_LD 4
POFM2_EX
DF3-3S-2C 8 GND 6 24 GND
9 TFSD_M 5 25 TFSD_M
10 5VNPD 4 26 5VNPD
11 GND 3 27 GND
GND 3 3 GND 3
12 TFSD_Y 2 28 TFSD_Y
TFSD_M 2 2 TFSD_M 2
13 5VNPD 1 29 5VNPD
TFSD_M 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
1-179228-3 13XR-6H-P
DF3-3S-2C 29CSR-8PK
GND 3 3 GND 3
TFSD_Y 2 2 TFSD_Y 2
TFSD_Y 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
DF3-3S-2C
1
1
CN9
5 +5VLM
4 D-GND
3 +24VM1 DRIVER PWB
2 +24VM1
AC PWB PS-250(WH) 1
CN2 MSW P-GND
1 N1_SWOUT MAIN DC PWB
AC cord N1_SWOUT 1 VHR-5N B5P-VH
CN1 2
1 L_IN (NC) CN101
L1_SWOUT 3 1 L1_SWOUT
2 (NC) D-GND 1
3 N_IN D-GND 2
B03P-VL-K VLP-03V-K PS-250(WH) 3
D-GND
VLP-03V B03P-VL +5VO 4
+5VLM 5
SRA-51T-H5 6 SCN MOTHER PWB
: ‘17/Apr.
CN3 PS-250(RD) +5VLM CN22

+5VLM 7
L1_SWIN 3 1 L1_SWIN 1 +5VO
(NC) 2 B7P-VH-B VHR-7N 2 P-GND
N1_SWIN 1 3 +24VM5
1 N1_SWIN 4 P-GND
CN102 5
B03P-VL-R VLP-03V-R +24VS5
PS-250(RD) DC CNT1 1 6
NC 2 D-GND
7 +5VLM
CN5 DC CNT2 3 8 3.3V
L_DCPS 1 9 GND
2 CN1 B03B-PASK-1 PAP-03V-S
HL PWB (NC)
(NC) 3 3 L_DCPS VHR-9N B9P-VH
(NC) 4 2 (NC)
CN1 CN4 5 1 CN19
N_DCPS N_DCPS
L_HL1 1 1 L_HL VHR-3N 1 NOFF CNT
(NC) 2 2 (NC) B4P(5-3)-VH-B VHR-5N 2 NRY CNT
B2P3-VH 3
N_HL1 3 3 N_HL GND
CN10 4 NOFF CNT
B03P-VL VLP-03V VLP-03V-E B03P-VL-E CN103 5 NRY CNT
L_SUB_DCPS 1
FW 1
(NC) 2
P-GND 2 PAP-05V-S B05B-PASK-1
N_SUB_DCPS 3
P-GND 3
4 CN21
B2P3-VH VHR-3N P-GND
P-GND 5 1 P-GND
P-GND 6 2 +24VS1
P-GND 7 3 D-GND
P-GND 8 4 D-GND
5 +5VLS
CN8 VHR-8N 6
B8P-VH-B +5VLS
L-WH 1
(NC) 2 VHR-6N B6P-VH-B
J. DC power supply (Americas)
N-WH 3
CN104
B2P3-VH-BK VHR-3N-BK +24VM1 1
+24VM1 2 CN18
+24VM2 3
4 1 +12V
+24VM3 SM182 +5VLS
+24VM3 5
6 3 D-GND
+24VM4 4 D-GND
+24VM5 7
VHR-4N B4P-VH-B
B7P-VH-B VHR-7N
CN34
SUB DC PWB CN104 1 GND
+24VS1 1 P34 2 3.3V
+24VS1 2
+24VS2 3 VHR-2N B2P-VH
+24VS3 4 CN1
+24VS3 5
6 1 D-GND
+24VS4 2
+24VS5 7 +5VLM
3 D-GND
4 +5VLM
CN1 B7P-VH-B VHR-7N 5 P-GND
1 L_SUB_DCPS 6 +24VM4
2 (NC) 7 P-GND
3 N_SUB_DCPS 8 +24VM3
9 P-GND
VHR-3N B2P3-VH CN101 10 +24VS1
D-GND 1
D-GND 2 VHR-10N B10P-VH
1 PSFM1_V 1
D-GND 3
2 GND 2
+5VO 4
3 PSFM1_LD 3
+5VLS 5 PSFM1
6
+5VLS
7
WH PWB CN5 SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC
PCU PWB
+5VLS CN4
1 5VLM 1 WH_CNT 1
B7P-VH-B VHR-7N 2 2 NC 2 1 PSFM2_V 1 1 PSFM_V
GND 2 3
24VM4 3 2 GND PSFM1_LD
CN102 ELR-02VF ELP-02V 3 PSFM2_LD 3 5 GND
B3B-PH-R-S PHR-3-R PSFM2 7 PSFM_V
DC CNT1 1 SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC 9
NC 2 237,21 PSFM2_LD
11 GND
1 DC CNT2 3 13
L-WH /TXD_FIN
15 /RXD_FIN
B03B-PASK-1 PAP-03V-S 17
PS-187 DTR_FIN
19 DSR_FIN
1 21 RES_FIN
L-WH CN103 23 (NC)GND
FW 1 1 /TXD_FIN 1 25 24VM4
WH PWB OPTION PS-187 2 2 2 27
P-GND /RXD_FIN WH_CNT
CN1 P-GND 3 3 DTR_FIN 3 2 LCC_D
P-GND 4 4 DSR_FIN 4 4 /TXD_LCC
N-WH 3 WH SW 5 5 5 6

P-GND RES_FIN /RXD_LCC
(NC) 2 6 6 6 8
P-GND +24VS3 DTR_LCC
L-WH 1 P-GND 7 7 7 10
+5VLM /DSR_LCC
P-GND 8 8 D-GND 8 12 RES_LCC
B2P3-VH-BK VHR-3N-BK 9 9 FINISHER 14
P-GND (NC)GND
B8P-VH-B VHR-8N 10 FG 10 16 TRC_LCC
11 +24VS4 11 18 HL_POW_CNT
SRA-21T-4 12 P-GND 12 20 3.3V
22 24VM4
ELR-12V ELP-12V 24 GND
1 +24VM2 1 26 FW2
CN2 2 2 28
FW FW
WH-L(SCN) 3 1 WH-L(SCN) 1 1 WH-L(SCN) 1 3 +5VLM 3
(NC) 2 2 WH-N(SCN) 2 2 WH-N(SCN) 2 4 D-GND 4 PUDP-28V-S B28B-PUDSS-1
WH-N(SCN) 1 SCN warm heater 5 +5VLM 5 CN11
ELR-02V ELP-02V ELR-02V ELP-02V 6 D-GND 6
1 INT24VM2
B2P3-VH-BL VHR-3N-BL 7 +24VS2 7 2 GND
8 P-GND 8 3 24V2OUT
9 P-GND 9
10 4 24V2IN
CN3 +24VS3 10
1 WH-L(LSU) 1 11 P-GND 11
WH-L(LSU) 3 2 WH-N(LSU) 2 12 12 VHR-4N B4P-VH
+24VS4
(NC) 2 LSU warm heater
WH-N(LSU) 1 ELR-02V ELP-02V ELR-12V ELP-12V 1 1
LCC_D
VHR-3N 2 (NC) 2
B2P3-VH 3 3 1 1 1
/TXD_LCC 3.3V HL POW CNT
4 /RXD_LCC 4 FW 2 2 3.3VM 2
5 GND 5 SRA-21T-4 5 5 3 3 3
DTR_LCC 24V +24VM4
12 WH-N(LCC) 12 6 /DSR_LCC 6 GND 4 4 GND 4
SRA-21T-4 4 WH-L(LCC) 4 7 7 5 5 5
CN4 3 3 LCC warm heater RES_LCC HL_POW_CNT FW2
(NC) 8 FG 8
WH-L 5 9 9
4 +5VLM PAP-05V-S
WH-L(LCC) ELR-12V ELR-12V SRA-21T-4 10 D-GND 10
(NC) 3 11 11
2 +24VS2
WH-N 12 P-GND 12 LCC
WH-N(LCC) 1 1 WH-N 1 13 13
2 2 TRC_LCC
WH-L 14 (NC) 14
B4P(5-3)-VH VHR-5N Tandem warm heater 15 15
(NC)
ELR-02V ELP-02V a +24VM2
ELR-15V ELP-15V
1 WH-N 1 b DSW-R
2 2 SMR-05V-N SMP-05V-NC DSW-R
WH-L PS-187-2V
ELR-02V ELP-02V
Cassette warm heater1 2 INT24VM2 2
1 24V2OUT 1
1 WH-N 1 ELR-02VF ELP-02V
2 WH-L 2
ELR-02V ELP-02V
Cassette warm heater2 1 1 a 24VM2
+24VM2
b DSW-F
SLP-01V SLR-01VF DSW-F
PS-187-2V
1
1
CN9
5 +5VLM
4 D-GND
3 +24VM1
2 +24VM1
AC PWB PS-250(WH) 1
CN2
MSW P-GND DRIVER PWB
1 MAIN DC PWB
SRA-51T-H5 1 N1_SWOUT
AC cord 1 CN1 N1_SWOUT VHR-5N B5P-VH
1 (NC) 2
Live_in L_IN 3 1 CN101
2 (NC) L1_SWOUT L1_SWOUT D-GND 1
F-GND
Neutral_in 3 N_IN D-GND 2
B03P-VL-K VLP-03V-K PS-250(WH) 3
D-GND
VLP-03V B03P-VL +5VO 4
INLET 5 SCN MOTHER PWB
+5VLM
+5VLM 6
CN3 PS-250(RD) 7 CN22
: ‘17/Apr.
+5VLM
L1_SWIN 3 1 1 +5VO
2 L1_SWIN 2
(NC) B7P-VH-B VHR-7N P-GND
N1_SWIN 1 3 +24VM5
VLP-03V-R 1 4 P-GND
N1_SWIN CN102 5
B03P-VL-R +24VS5
PS-250(RD) DC CNT1 1 6 D-GND
NC 2 7 +5VLM
CN5 DC CNT2 3 8 3.3VM
L_DCPS 1 9 GND
2 CN1 B03B-PASK-1 PAP-03V-S
L_HL
(NC) 3 3 L_DCPS VHR-9N B9P-VH
N_HL 4 2 (NC)
CN4 5 1 CN19
N_DCPS N_DCPS
1 L_HL 1 NOFF CNT
2 (NC) B4P(5-3)-VH-B VHR-5N VHR-3N B2P3-VH 2 NRY CNT
3 N_HL 3 GND
CN10 4 NOFF CNT
B03P-VL-E 1 CN103 5 NRY CNT
L_SUB_DCPS FW 1
(NC) 2 2
3 P-GND PAP-05V-S B05B-PASK-1
N_SUB_DCPS P-GND 3
4 CN21
B2P3-VH VHR-3N P-GND
P-GND 5 1 P-GND
P-GND 6 2 +24VS1
P-GND 7 3 D-GND
P-GND 8 4 D-GND
5 +5VLS
CN8 B8P-VH-B VHR-8N 6 +5VLS
HL PWB L-WH 1
CN6 (NC) 2 VHR-6N B6P-VH-B
1 N-WH 3
L_PCI-T 2 CN104
(NC) 3 B2P3-VH-BK VHR-3N-BK +24VM1 1
N_PCI-T +24VM1 2 CN18
+24VM2 3 1
B2P3-VH 4 +12V
+24VM3 2 +5VLS
+24VM3 5 3
+24VM4 6 D-GND
7 4 D-GND
CN2 +24VM5
1 VHR-4N B4P-VH-B
L_HL2 2 B7P-VH-B VHR-7N
(NC) 3
(NC) 4
N_HL2
B2P4-VH-B VHR-4
CN1 CN2
SUB DC PWB CN104 1
CN34
1 1 L_HL2 GND
L_HL1 2 2 +24VS1 1 2 3.3VM
(NC) 3 (NC) +24VS1 2
3 N_HL2
K. DC power supply (Europe, Australia, Asia)
N_HL1 +24VS2 3 VHR-2N B2P-VH

+24VS3 4 CN1
B03P-VL VLP-03V VLP-03V-K B03P-VL-K 5
+24VS3 1 D-GND
+24VS4 6 2
+24VS5 7 +5VLM
AC SUB PWB 3 D-GND
CN1 4 +5VLM
CN1 B7P-VH-B VHR-7N 5
1 L_HL2 1 1 L_IN P-GND
2 2 2 1 L_SUB_DCPS 6 +24VM4
NC (NC) CN4 2 7
3 N_HL2 3 3 N_IN (NC) P-GND
L2_HL 1 3 N_SUB_DCPS 8 +24VM3
(NC) 2 9 P-GND
ELP-03V ELR-03V VLP-03V B03P-VL VHR-3N B2P3-VH CN101 10
N2_HL 3 +24VS1
D-GND 1
B2P3-VH VHR-3 D-GND 2 VHR-10N B10P-VH
AC cord 2 3 1 PSFM1_V 1
D-GND 2 GND 2
Live_in SRA-51T-H5 +5VO 4
5 3 PSFM1_LD 3
F-GND +5VLS PSFM1
Neutral_in +5VLS 6 WH PWB SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC
3 3 +5VLS 7 1 5VLM 1 CN5
PCU PWB
CN4
INLET L2-HL 2 GND 2 WH_CNT 1
2 (NC) 2 B7P-VH-B VHR-7N 1
1 1 NC 2 1 PSFM2_V 1 PSFM_V
N2-HL ELR-02VF ELP-02V 24VM4 3 2 GND 2 3 PSFM1_LD
CN102 3 PSFM2_LD 3 5 GND
ELP-03V ELR-03V 1 B3B-PH-R-S PHR-3-R
PSFM2 7 PSFM_V
DC CNT1 SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC 9 PSFM2_LD
NC 2 11
DC CNT2 3 OPTION 13
GND
/TXD_FIN
15 /RXD_FIN
B03B-PASK-1 PAP-03V-S 17 DTR_FIN
1 19 DSR_FIN
L-WH 21
CN103 RES_FIN
23 (NC)GND
PS-187 1 1 1 25
FW /TXD_FIN 24VM4
P-GND 2 2 /RXD_FIN 2 27 WH_CNT
1
WH PWB CN1 L-WH P-GND 3
4
3
4
DTR_FIN 3
4
2
4
LCC_D
N-WH 3 P-GND DSR_FIN /TXD_LCC
PS-187 P-GND 5 5 RES_FIN 5 6 /RXD_LCC
(NC) 2 P-GND 6 6 +24VS3 6 8 DTR_LCC
L-WH 1 P-GND 7 7 +5VLM 7 10 /DSR_LCC

P-GND 8 8 D-GND 8 12 RES_LCC
B2P3-VH-BK VHR-3N-BK WH SW 9 9 14
P-GND (NC)GND
B8P-VH-B VHR-8N 10 FG 10
FINISHER 16 TRC_LCC
11 +24VS4 11 18 HL_POW_CNT
SRA-21T-4 12 P-GND 12 20 3.3V
SRA-21T-4 22
1 1 24VM4
N2-HL ELR-12V ELP-12V 24 GND
9 L2-HL 9 1 1 26
CN4 5 5 +24VM2 FW2
GND 2 FW 2 28 FW
SRA-21T-4 12 12 3 3
WH-L 5 WH-N(LCC) +5VLM
WH-L(LCC) 4 4 WH-L(LCC) 4 4 4 PUDP-28V-S B28B-PUDSS-1
3 3 D-GND
(NC) 3 (NC) LCC warm heater 5 +5VLM 5 CN11
WH-N 2 6 D-GND 6 1
WH-N(LCC) 1 ELR-12V ELP-12V 7 +24VS2 7 INT24VM2
8 8 2 GND
P-GND 3 24V2OUT
B4P(5-3)-VH VHR-5N 1 1 9 P-GND 9 4
WH-N 10 10 24V2IN
2 WH-L 2 +24VS3
11 P-GND 11 1 LCC_D 1
Tandem warm heater 12 12 2 2 VHR-4N B4P-VH
ELR-02V ELP-02V +24VS4 (NC)
3 /TXD_LCC 3
ELR-12V ELP-12V 4 /RXD_LCC 4
1 1 5 DTR_LCC 5 CN3
WH-N 6 6
2 WH-L 2 /DSR_LCC 3.3V 1 1 HL POW CNT 1
7 RES_LCC 7 2 2
Cassette warm heater1 8 8 FW 2 3.3VM
ELR-02V ELP-02V FG 24V 3 3 +24VM4 3
9 +5VLM 9 4 4
SRA-21T-4 10 10 GND 4 GND
D-GND LCC HL_POW_CNT 5 5 FW2 5
1 1 11 +24VS2 11
WH-N 12 12
2 WH-L 2 P-GND B05B-PASK-1 PAP-05V-S SMR-05V-N SMP-05V-NC
13 TRC_LCC 13
14 14
ELR-02V ELP-02V
Cassette warm heater2 15
(NC)
(NC) 15
CN2 a +24VM2
ELR-15V ELP-15V AC SUB PWB
WH-L(SCN) 3 1 WH-L(SCN) 1 1 WH-L(SCN) 1
(NC) 2 2 WH-N(SCN) 2 2 WH-N(SCN) 2 b DSW-R
WH-N(SCN) 1
ELP-02V ELR-02V ELP-02V
SCN warm heater PS-187-2V
DSW-R
VHR-3N-BL ELR-02V
B2P3-VH-BL 2 2
INT24VM2
1 24V2OUT 1
ELR-02VF ELP-02V a 24VM2
CN3 b DSW-F
DSW-F
VHR-3N 1 WH-L(LSU) 1
1 1
WH-L(LSU) 3 2 WH-N(LSU) 2 +24VM2 PS-187-2V
(NC) 2 LSU warm heater
WH-N(LSU) 1 ELR-02V ELP-02V
B2P3-VH
OPTION
1
1
CN7
Fusing unit CN5 B7B-PASK-1
B2P-VH-B HL_US 7
Body side：19LR-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN) 1 N-HL(US) HL_LM 6
SLR-01VF SLP-01V YLR-01VF YLP-01V Fusing side：19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN) (NC) 2 N-HL(US) HL_UW 5
BK RD
1 L-HL(LM) 1 1 N-HL(LM) 1 3 N-HL(LM) 3 VHR-2N HL_UM 4
HL_LM /HL_PR 3
CN4 GND 2
D1.25-M3(Ni)
TS_L D1.25-M3(Ni) B03P-VL INT24V2L 1
1 N-HL(UW) PAP-07V-S
(NC) 2 (NC)
3 N-HL(UM)
: ‘17/Apr.
YLP-04V YLR-04VF VLR-03V VLP-03V YLP-03V YLR-03VF VLP-03V

RD BK N-HL(US)
2 L-HL(LM/US) 2 2 L-HL(US) 2 HL_US 3 N-HL(US) 3 6 6 CN3
D1.25-M3(Ni)
TS_S D1.25-M3(Ni) B03P-VL-R HL PWB
BK RD N-HL(UW)
1 L-HL(UW) 1 HL_UW 2 N-HL(UW) 2 5 5 1 L-HL(UM/UW)
2 L-HL(LM/US)
BK BK N-HL(UM)
1 L-HL(UM/UW) 1 3 L-HL(UM) 3 HL_UM 1 N-HL(UM) 1 4 4 3 N-HL(LM)
D1.25-M3(Ni)
TS_M D1.25-M3(Ni) VLP-03V-R
4 L-HL(UM/UW) 4 2 L-HL(UM/UW) 2
L. Fusing (Americas)
3 L-HL(LM/US) 3 1 L-HL(LM/US) 1 (3/3) CN23

B40B-PUDSS-1
INT24V2L 39
GND 37
HL_US 35
HL_LM 33
HL_UW 31
CN9
HL_UM 29
RCZR-09V-PS RCZR-09V-PS B22B-PUDSS
SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-BC /HL_PR 27
2 TH_UM 2 B-9 TH_UM B-1 1 TH_UM PUDP-40V-S
TH_UM 1 TH_UM_CS 1 B-8 TH_UM_CS
GND
B-2 3 TH_UM_CS
3 GND 3 B-7 B-3 5 GND
(Un-contacting) B-6 TH_US B-4 7 TH_US
B-5 TH_US_CS B-5 9 TH_US_CS
SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC B-4 GND B-6 11 GND
2 TH_US 2 B-3 TH_LM B-7 13 TH_LM
TH_US1 1 TH_US_CS 1 B-2 TH_LM_CS B-8 15 TH_LM_CS
3 GND 3 B-1 GND B-9 17 GND
(Un-contacting) 19 TH_US2
21 GND
2 TH_LM 2 Fusing drawer connector placement
TH_LM1 1 TH_LM_CS 1
3 3
GND Fusing unit I/F Drawer Fusing unit I/F Drawer
(Un-contacting) A-10 WEBEND2 A-1
(NC) A-9 (NC) A-2 (NC)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A10
A-8 TH_LM2 A-3 1 2 3 3 2 1

SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC A-7 GND A-4
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
TH_LM2 1 TH_LM2 1 A-6 5VNPD A-5 6 5 4 4 5 6

2 GND 2 (NC) A-5 (NC) A-6 (NC) 2 5VNPD
A-4 GND A-7 4 WEBEND2
(Contacting) A-3 5VNPD A-8 6 GND View from Fusing unit side View from Body unit side
A-2 FPFD A-9 8 5VNPD
175489-3 A-1 GND A-10 10 FPFD Fusing unit I/F Drawer Fusing unit I/F Drawer
5VNPD 1 P R 12 GND
WEBEND2 2 RCZR-10V-PS RCZR-10V-PS 14 GND
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
D-GND 3 16 POD1 1 2 2 1
WEBEND2 179228-3 18 5VNPD
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
20 TH_LM2 4 3 3 4
22 GND
PUDP-22V-S
175489-3 View from Fusing unit side View from Body unit side
5VNPD 1
FPFD 2
FPFD GND 3
179228-3
PCU PWB
CN7
B16B-PNDSS-1
Body side：13R-RWZV-K2GG-R4(LF)(SN) 1 24V4
Fusing side：13P-RWZV-K4GG-P4(LF)(SN) 3 /CV_COPY
(NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 5 /CV_START CN29
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 7 /CV_CLCOPY B4B-PH-K-S
(NC) 3 (NC) 3 (NC) 9 /CV_STAPLE 3.3V 1
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC)

COIN 11 /CV_DUPLEX /TxD_LOG 2
13 /CV_SIZE0 /RxD_LOG 3
VENDER 15 /CV_SIZE2 GND 4
2 P-GND
4 /CV_COUNT CN30
6 /CV_CA B5B-PH-K-S
(NC) B-6 (NC) B-1 (NC) 8 /CV_COLOR1 5VN 1
(NC) B-5 (NC) B-2 (NC) 10 /CV_COLOR0 /TxD_LOG 2
(NC) B-4 (NC) B-3 (NC) 12 5VN /RxD_LOG 3
(NC) B-3 (NC) B-4 (NC) 14 /CV_SIZE1 GND 4
(NC) B-2 (NC) B-5 (NC) 16 /CV_SIZE3 (NC) 5
(NC) B-1 (NC) B-6 (NC)
CZHR-06V-S CZHR-06V-S
TH_US2 1 TH_US2 1
2 GND 2
(Contacting)
A-7 TH_US2 A-1
175489-3 A-6 GND A-2
GND 3 A-5 GND A-3
POD1 2 A-4 POD1 A-4
POD1 5VNPD 1 A-3 5VNPD A-5
179228-3 A-2 WEBM2_A A-6
A-1 WEBM2_B A-7
P R
SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-BC CZHR-07V-S CZHR-07V-S
1 WEBM2_A 1
WEBM2 2 WEBM2_B 2
1 PRM_A 1
To 2 PRM_XA 2
3 PRM_B 3 To
DRIVER 4 PRM_XB 4
PWB 5 +24V 5 DRIVER
6 +24V 6
7 WEBM2_A 7
PWB
8 WEBM2_B 8
1
1
CN7
Fusing unit CN5 B7B-PASK-1
B2P-VH-B HL_US 7
Body side：19LR-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN) 1 N-HL(US) HL_LM 6
SLR-01VF SLP-01V YLR-01VF YLP-01V Fusing side：19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN) (NC) 2 (NC) HL_UW 5
1 L-HL(LM) 1 BK HL_LM RD 1 N-HL(LM) 1 (NC) 3 （NC) 3 (NC) 3 N-HL(US) HL_UM 4
TS_L VHR-3N /HL_PR 3
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
CN4 GND 2
B03P-VL INT24V2L 1
1 N-HL(UW) PAP-07V-S
(NC) 2 (NC)
: ‘17/Apr.
3 N-HL(UM)
YLP-04V YLR-04VF VLR-03V VLP-03V YLP-03V YLR-03VF VLP-03V
TS_S 2 L-HL(US) 2 2 L-HL(US) 2 RD HL_US BK 3 N-HL(US) 3 6 N-HL(US) 6 CN3
B03P-VL-R
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) HL PWB
1 L-HL(UW) 1 BK HL_UW RD 2 N-HL(UW) 2 5 N-HL(UW) 5 1 L-HL(UM/UW)
2 L-HL(LM/US)
TS_M 1 L-HL(UM/UW) 1 3 L-HL(UM) 3 BK HL_UM BK 1 N-HL(UM) 1 4 N-HL(UM) 4 3 N-HL(LM)
VLP-03V-R
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
4 L-HL(UM/UW) 4 2 L-HL(UM/UW) 2
3 L-HL(LM/US) 3 1 L-HL(LM/US) 1 (3/3) CN23

B40B-PUDSS-1
INT24V2L 39
GND 37
HL_US 35
HL_LM 33
HL_UW 31
CN9 HL_UM 29
RCZR-09V-PS RCZR-09V-PS B22B-PUDSS-1
SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-BC /HL_PR 27
2 TH_UM 2 B-9 TH_UM B-1 1 TH_UM PUDP-40V-S
TH_UM 1 TH_UM_CS 1 B-8 TH_UM_CS B-2 3 TH_UM_CS
(Un-contacting) B-6 TH_US B-4 7 TH_US
B-5 TH_US_CS B-5 9 TH_US_CS
SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC B-4 GND B-6 11 GND
M. Fusing (Europe, Australia, Asia)
2 TH_US 2 B-3 TH_LM B-7 13 TH_LM

TH_US1 1 TH_US_CS 1 B-2 TH_LM_CS B-8 15 TH_LM_CS
(Un-contacting) 19 TH_US2
21 GND
2 TH_LM 2
TH_LM1 1 TH_LM_CS 1
Fusing drawer connector placement
Fusing unit I/F Drawer Fusing unit I/F Drawer
3 GND 3
(Un-contacting) A-10 WEBEND2 A-1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A10
(NC) A-9 (NC) A-2 (NC) 1 2 3 3 2 1

A-8 TH_LM2 A-3
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC A-7 GND A-4 6 5 4 4 5 6

TH_LM2 1 TH_LM2 1 A-6 5VNPD A-5
2 GND 2 (NC) A-5 (NC) A-6 (NC) 2 5VNPD
(Contacting) A-4 GND A-7 4 WEBEND2 View from Fusing unit side View from Body unit side
A-3 5VNPD A-8 6 GND
A-2 FPFD A-9 8 5VNPD Fusing unit I/F Drawer Fusing unit I/F Drawer
175489-3 A-1 GND A-10 10 FPFD
5VNPD 1 P R 12 GND
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
WEBEND2 2 RCZR-10V-PS RCZR-10V-PS 14 GND 1 2 2 1

WEBEND2 D-GND 3 16 POD1
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
179228-3 18 5VNPD 4 3 3 4
20 TH_LM2
22 GND
PUDP-22V-S
View from Fusing unit side View from Body unit side
175489-3
5VNPD 1
FPFD 2
FPFD GND 3 PCU PWB
179228-3
Body side：13R-RWZV-K2GG-R4(LF)(SN) CN7

Fusing side：13P-RWZV-K4GG-P4(LF)(SN)
B16B-PNDSS-1
1 N-HL(LM) 1
1 24V4
2 L-HL(LM) 2
3 /CV_COPY
(NC) 3 (NC) 3 (NC) CN29
5 /CV_START
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC) B4B-PH-K-S
7 /CV_CLCOPY

9 /CV_STAPLE 3.3V 1
11 /CV_DUPLEX /TxD_LOG 2
COIN 13 /CV_SIZE0 /RxD_LOG 3
15 /CV_SIZE2 GND 4
(NC) B-6 (NC) B-1 (NC)

VENDER 2 P-GND
4 /CV_COUNT CN30
(NC) B-5 (NC) B-2 (NC) B5B-PH-K-S
6 /CV_CA
(NC) B-4 (NC) B-3 (NC)
8 /CV_COLOR1 5VN 1
(NC) B-3 (NC) B-4 (NC)
10 /CV_COLOR0 /TxD_LOG 2
(NC) B-2 (NC) B-5 (NC)
12 5VN /RxD_LOG 3
(NC) B-1 (NC) B-6 (NC)
14 /CV_SIZE1 GND 4
16 /CV_SIZE3 (NC) 5
TH_US2 1 TH_US2 1
2 GND 2
(Contacting)
A-7 TH_US2 A-1
175489-3 A-6 GND A-2
GND 3 A-5 GND A-3
POD1 2 A-4 POD1 A-4
POD1 5VNPD 1 A-3 5VNPD A-5
179228-3 A-2 WEBM2_A A-6
A-1 WEBM2_B A-7
P R
SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-BC CZHR-07V-S CZHR-07V-S
1 WEBM2_A 1
WEBM2 2 WEBM2_B 2
To 1 PRM_A 1
2 PRM_XA 2
DRIVER 3 PRM_B 3 To
4 PRM_XB 4
PWB 5 +24V 5 DRIVER
6 +24V 6
7 WEBM2_A 7
PWB
8 WEBM2_B 8
1
1
HDD SATA POWER
12V 15
12V 14 CN27
12V B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
13
DGND 12 1 DGND
DGND 11 2 5VHD
DGND 10 3 DGND
: ‘17/Apr.
+5VHD 9
PAP-03V-S
SCAN
+5VHD 8 Americas:STANDARD
+5VHD 7 MOTHER PWB KEYBOARD unit
DGND 6
Other:OPTION
DGND 5 MFPC PWB
DGND 4 CN24
PALR-06V PAP-06V-S PAP-06V-S PALR-06V KEYBOARD PWB
3.3V 3 (NC) BM06B-GHS-TBT
6 (NC) 6 SRA-21T-4 6 F-GND 6 F-GND
3.3V 2 (NC) SHIELD2 6 5 SHIELD2 5 5 SHIELD2 5 SHIELD2
3.3V 1 (NC) CN29 DGND2 5 4 DGND2 4 4 DGND2 4 DGND2
SATA SIGNAL IMSA-9813B-07Y901 D2+ 4 3 D2+ 3 3 D2+ 3 D2+
GND 1 1 GND D2- 3 2 D2- 2 2 D2- 2 D2-
SATA_TXP 2 2 SATA_TXP VBUS2 2 1 VBUS2 1 1 VBUS2 1 VBUS2
SATA_TXN 3 3 SATA_TXN CN32 CN30 （NC) 1 GHR-06V-S
GND 4 4 GND TX24-140R-LT-H1E TX25-140P-LT-H1E CN25
SATA_RXN 5 5 SATA_RXN
BM10B-GHS-TBT
SATA_RXP 6 6 SATA_RXP
SHIELD3 10 1 SHIELD3
GND 7 7 GND
DGND3 9 2 DGND3
D3+ 8 3 D3+
CN21 D3- 7 4 D3-
UAR27-4K5J00
N. FAX, USB, HDD, KEYBOARD
1 VBUS
VBUS3 6 5 VBUS3
IC Card
SHIELD1 5 (NC) 6 (NC) （OPTION）
2 D- DGND1 4 CZHR-06V-S
REAR USB-H 3 D+ D1+ 3
4 GND D1- 2 B05B-PASK-1 USB-A
VBUS1 1 1 SHIELD1 SHELL -

(TYPE-A) CN5
UBR23-4K2200
2 DGND1 DGND1 4
GHR-10V-S 3 D1+ D1+ 3
1 VBUS D1- D1-
4 2 USB
2 D-
5 VBUS1 VBUS1 1
3 D+
REAR USB-D PAP-05V-S
4 GND CN31
(TYPE-B) BM05B-GHS-TBT
CN6 USB Connector PWB
24-010139U13-1 VBUS_WIFI 1 5 VBUS_WIFI
1 MDI_0+ WIFI_D- 2 4 WIFI_D-
2 MDI_0- WIFI_D+ 3 3 WIFI_D+
3 MDI_1+ GND 4 2 GND Wireless LAN
4 MDI_1- SHIELD_WIFI 5 1 SHIELD_WIFI
5 MDI_2+ GHR-05V-S PAP-05V-S
6 MDI_2-
7 MDI_3+
8 MDI_3-
LAN 9 VCC
10 GND
11 RLED(A)
12 RLED(K)
LLED(A) CN15
13
14 LLED(K) B04B-PASK-1 SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N
+12V 1 1 +12V 1
CN7 PWM_RSVFAN 2 2 PWM_RSVFAN 2
DBR30-091F100 P-GND 3 3 P-GND 3 HDD FAN
1 CD LOCK_RSVFAN 4 4 LOCK_RSVFAN 4
2 RXD PAP-04V-S
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 GND
RS232C 6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS

9 RT
CN13
Board to Board
BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT
CN17
1 GND
+3.3V_F B4B-PH-K-S
2
3 +3.3V_F +12V 1
4 FAXD_TXD_N PWM_RSVFAN 2
5 nCNCT_FAX P-GND 3
6 FAXD_TXD_P LOCK_RSVFAN 4
MFP FAN
7 +5V_(off)
8 FAXCS_TXD_P
9 nRES_FAX
10 FAXCS_TXD_N
11 GND
12 FAXD_RXD_N
13 nFAX_WUP
14 FAXD_RXD_P
FAX unit 15 5V_(off)
16 FAXCS_RXD_P
17 GND
(OPTION) 18 FAXCS_RXD_N
19 GND
20 nFAXD_RTS
21 FLVPP
22 nFAXD_CTS
23 5V_A
24 nFAXCS_RTS
25 +24V
26 nFAXCS_CTS
27 +3.3V_F
28 +3.3V_F
29 GND
30 D-GND
1 : ‘17/Apr.
O. USB, INTERFACE
1
CN9 CN11
BM20B-SHLDS-G-TFT BM11B-GHS-TBT
(NC) 20
GND_POWER TPUSB_VBUS 1 (NC)
(NC) 18 ICC_GND TPUSB_D- 2 (NC)
(NC) 16 ICC_D+ TPUSB_D+ 3 (NC)
(NC) 14 ICC_D- TPUSB_GND 4 (NC)
(NC) 12 ICC_VBUS GND_POWER 5 (NC)
(NC) 10 GND_POWER VBUS3 6 (NC)
(NC) 8 FSUB_GND D3- 7 (NC)
(NC) 6 FSUB_D+ D3+ 8 (NC)
(NC) 4 FSUB_D- DGND3 9 (NC)
(NC) 2 FSUB_VBUS SHIELD3 10 (NC)
(NC) 9 GND_POWER PADLED 11 (NC)
(NC) 7 KEYBD_GND
(NC) 5 KEYBD_D+
(NC) 3 KEYBD_D-
(NC) 1 KEYBD_VBUS
CN10
BM06B-GHS-TBT
NC 1 (NC)
KEYBD_VBUS 2 (NC)
KEYBD_D- 3 (NC)
KEYBD_D+ 4 (NC)
KEYBD_GND 5 (NC)
GND_POWER 6 (NC)
EFI IF PWB
CN28 CN17
TX25-60P-12ST-H1E_DIP TX24-60R-6ST-H1E_DIP
USB_DET 1 1 USB_DET
LCD_EFI_CPU 31 /E_RDY 2 2 /E_RDY 31 LCD_EFI_CPU
/PRTC_RDY 32 /PRTC_INSTL 3 3 /PRTC_INSTL 32 /PRTC_RDY
nCTS_FAX_D_EFI 33 WakeUp_MFP 4 4 WakeUp_MFP 33 nCTS_FAX_D_EFI
RXD_FAX_D_EFI 34 nRTS_FAX_D_EFI 5 5 nRTS_FAX_D_EFI 34 RXD_FAX_D_EFI
EFI_EN 35 TXD_FAX_D_EFI 6 6 TXD_FAX_D_EFI 35 EFI_EN
5VLS 36 DVI_DET 7 7 DVI_DET 36 5VLS
5VLS 37 3.3VM 8 8 3.3VM 37 5VLS
5VLS 38 3.3VM 9 9 3.3VM 38 5VLS
Board to Board
5VLS 39 3.3VM 10 10 3.3VM 39 5VLS

5VO 40 /WAKEUP 11 11 /WAKEUP 40 5VO
5VO 41 GND 12 12 GND 41 5VO
GND 42 VSYNC_Y- 13 13 VSYNC_Y- 42 GND
PRT4+ 43 VSYNC_Y+ 14 14 VSYNC_Y+ 43 PRT4+
PRT4- 44 GND 15 15 GND 44 PRT4-
GND 45 VSYNC_M+ 16 16 VSYNC_M+ 45 GND
PRT3+ 46 VSYNC_M- 17 17 VSYNC_M- 46 PRT3+
PRT3- 47 GND 18 18 GND 47 PRT3-
GND 48 VSYNC_C- 19 19 VSYNC_C- 48 GND
ECLK_EFI+ 49 VSYNC_C+ 20 20 VSYNC_C+ 49 ECLK_EFI+
ECLK_EFI- 50 GND 21 21 GND 50 ECLK_EFI-
GND 51 VSYNC_K+ 22 22 VSYNC_K+ 51 GND CN5
PRT2+ 52 VSYNC_K- 23 23 VSYNC_K- 52 PRT2+ BM05B-GHS-TBT
PRT2- 53 GND 24 24 GND 53 PRT2- V_BUS2 1 (NC)
GND 54 ECLK_ENG- 25 25 ECLK_ENG- 54 GND D2- 2 (NC)
PRT1+ 55 ECLK_ENG+ 26 26 ECLK_ENG+ 55 PRT1+ D2+ 3 (NC)
PRT1- 56 GND 27 27 GND 56 PRT1- DGND 4 (NC)
GND 57 HSYNC_ENG+ 28 28 HSYNC_ENG+ 57 GND SHIELD 5 (NC)
PRT0+ 58 HSYNC_ENG- 29 29 HSYNC_ENG- 58 PRT0+
PRT0- 59 GND 30 30 GND 59 PRT0-
GND 60 60 GND
CN12
UBR24-4K2G00
5V 1 (NC)
D- 2 (NC)
D+ 3 (NC)
GND 4 (NC)
SCAN
CN14 CN1
MOTHER PWB XM4M-2432-1312 047272-0001
(NC) 1 TXA2- EQL_RXIN0+ 1
(NC) 2 TXA2+ D-GND 2
(NC) 3 D-GND EQL_RXIN0- 3
(NC) 4 D-GND TXOUTEQL_ 4
(NC) 5 D-GND D-GND 5
(NC) 6 DDC_SCL TXOUTEQL+ 6
(NC) 7 DDC_SDA EQL_RXIN2+ 7
(NC) 9 TXA1- EQL_RXIN2- 9
(NC) 10 TXA1+ EQL_RXIN3- 10
(NC) 12 D-GND EQL_RXIN3+ 12
(NC) 13 D-GND /WAKEUP_R 13
(NC) 14 DDC_V5_DVI /ERDY_R 14 EFI Display Port
(NC) 15 D-GND TXOUT+ 15
(NC) 16 TXACHPD_ D-GND 16
(NC) 17 TXA0- TXOUT- 17
(NC) 18 TXA0+ /PROGRAMN_R 18
(NC) 20 D-GND /FPGARST_R 20
(NC) 23 TXAC+ D-GND 23
(NC) 24 TXAC D-GND 24

MX-7580N
[13] OTHERS Service Manual
1. VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING

A. HDD / mSATA SSD memory contents
(1) HDD data contents
No. File system Stored data

S-1 Universal System storage data (for backup)
I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH/Document filing)
I-2 Image data Image data (Temporary storage)
I-3 Image data Image data (User watermark/stamp)
I-4 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images
L-1 Not available ICU firmware
S-2 Universal Download font
User profile
User macro
Key operation storage data
Database system file
S-3 Universal System log
S-4 Universal Document filing (Database)
Job log (Database)
Job completion list
S-5 Universal Address book (database)
Account management information (database)
Paper property information (database)
Billing account information (database)
Individual setting information for direct web browsing
Cookie file for OSA application
S-6 Universal Database file
S-7 Universal Spool area for printer
S-8 Universal Print share stored data
Print share file management information (database)
S-9 Universal Work area for OCR
S-10 Universal Work area for application (user file used in USB direct print)
S-11 Universal eOSA application file
S-12 Universal User file saved in the SMB server
S-13 Universal Address book, account information
User data of set value etc which must not be erased when installing the DSK
L-2 Not available System storage data
(2) mSATA SSD data contents
No. File system Stored data

L-101 Universal ICU firmware
Log data
Snapshot
S-101 Universal Font
Web help
Spdl
Option font ROM
S-102 Universal e-manual data
Watermark data
S-103 Universal Backup data
S-104 Universal System storage data
I-101 Image data FAX / Internet FAX receive images (backup)
L-102 Not available swap area
MX-7580N OTHERS 13 – 1
B. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD
(1) MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
CAUTION: Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.
CAUTION: Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
CAUTION: Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
(2) Procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
• HDD storage data and backup
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
a. HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage
data cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a-1. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
2 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
3 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
4 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
5 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
7 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
8 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
10 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
11 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
12 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
13 User color profile Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE.
14 Individual setting Not available Available Disable Disable Service
information for direct WEB
browsing
15 Cookie file for OSA Not available Available Disable Disable Service
application
16 eOSA application file Not available Installation of Disable Enable Reinstallation of Service
application application
17 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable Disable Service
server (NAS)
18 FAX/Internet FAX reception Not available Available Enable Sim66-62 Disable —
data
2 : ‘17/June
b. Replacement procedures when HDD data can be backed up c. Replacement procedures when the HDD storage data
b-1. Work contents and procedures cannot be backed up due to breakdown
c-1. Display when HDD breakdown
When a new HDD
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
is popped up.
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
is normal but a program model) is used * In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
error occurs in it is used. must be replaced.
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
c-2. Work contents and procedures
(Servicing)
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup
When a new HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
memory.)
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
is normal but a program model) is used *
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
error occurs in it is used.
authentication data))
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
or servicing)
 Formatting is automatically complex machine.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
performed.
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
is displayed.  Cancel
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
with SIM16.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the HDD
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
(BACKUP DATA) to the USB memory. (The backup image
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
data are of PDF file type, and cannot be restored to the
is no need to perform
machine. The backup data are given to the user.)
formatting procedure with SIM.
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex
SIM66-62 to backup the image data (ORIGINAL DATA) to
 Formatting is automatically machine.
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
performed.
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, data are given to the user.)
is displayed.  Cancel
Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
with SIM16.
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format the HDD data and the image related memory and to
automatically formatted, there the HDD. prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
is no need to perform only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
formatting procedure with SIM. Fax models.)
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
the HDD data and the image related memory and to shipping.
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
Fax models.)
Step 9 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 10 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)
2 (3) Procedures necessary for mSATA SSD replacement

a. mSATA SSD data and backup
Some mSATA SSD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some mSATA SSD storage data can be reinstalled, and some
other cannot.
If the mSATA SSD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the mSATA SSD
referring to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the mSATA SSD.
b. mSATA SSD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

procedures operator
1 ICU firmware/ Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
Snapshot
2 font Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
web help
spdl
3 Option FontROM Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
4 e-Manual Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-03 Service
5 Watermark Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-05 Service
2 : ‘17/June
2 Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

procedures operator
6 OCR dictionary data Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-06 Service
7 Backup data Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
8 System setting value Available Available Enable SIM56-02/ Enable SIM56-02/ Service or
data file Device cloning / Device cloning / User
9 FAX/I-FAX reception Not available Available Enable SIM66-62 Disable --- ---
image data (backup)
Procedures
Step1 Use SIM56-2 to back up the mSATA SSD data to the USB flash drive.
Step2 Back up the mSATA SSD data by the device cloning function when the operation panel screen is customized.
Step3 Replace the mSATA SSD with a new one.
Step4 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Step5 Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
Step6 Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the device cloning function.
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2017 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
x Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1, Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008,
Windows® Server 2012 and Internet Explorer®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
x PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
x Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc.
x IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
x Acrobat® Reader Copyright® Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
x PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
x Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions BU
First edition: February 2017

Latest edition: March 2019

Sharp MX 6580-7580 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX 6580-7580 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX 6580-7580 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TopPage

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

• Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that

MX-7580N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

• Place of much dust

• Place near a wall

• Unstable or irregular surface

MX-7580N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

MX-7580N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-FN20 MX-TU14 MX-SL10 N

MX-PN13 MX-FN21 MX-RB12

MX-FD10 MX-CF11 MX-RB15 MX-6580N MX-RB14 MX-LC13 N

MX-PF10 MX-FX15 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1 MX-FR55U MX-USX1 MX-USX5

MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-KB13

MX-7580N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

STD: Standard equipment

MX-7580N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

B. Engine speed (ppm)

Heavy Paper 1/2

Heavy Paper 3/4

Heavy Paper 1/2

Heavy Paper 3/4

*1: Envelope : Monarch, Com-10, DL, C5,

Paper type Tray 4 Multi bypass tray

(3) Size of paper which can be fed

Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi bypass

H. Paper exit section

Exit location Center (option) Right side (option)

CPU ARM11: 600MHz B. Job Speed

*1: HDD capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.

*1: Result may change depending on conditions.

C. Other List Print Functions

200 V (North America, etc.) 200 V (Europe, etc.)

*1: Power switch ON, dehumidity heater OFF

8. Dimensions and Weight

10°C 30°C 35°C

1. Supply system table

B. Europe, Australia, New Zealand

C. Asia, Hong Kong

D. Middle East, Taiwan, Africa, Philippines

MX-7580N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

MX-7580N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2